Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 6: “The Mexican, The Lawyer, And The Mechanic.”

Volume 2: “The Villains.”

Chapter 01: “The Maid And The Mechanic.”

By Paul Cousins.

Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.

(_)

Reality, Pedro and Lee's Home reality. Date, the day after Pedro and Matthew first left Pedro's home reality, to travel the multiverse. Place, a suburb of Los Angeles, California, United States. Time, around seven PM, an hour, or so, before sunset.

It was early evening in the small, but well furnished home of freelance photo-journalist, George Benedict.

George Benedict had been born and raised in Los Angeles.

George's mother was arabic, and his father was hispanic. Over the course of his childhood, he had a well funded education, and he was well versed in speaking, reading, and writing multiple languages.

George was a healthy, slightly tall man, with dark skin, and a medium, though muscular, physical build. His head was shaved bald, with no facial hair showing, save for a slight five o-clock shadow showing on his face.

He was in his mid-forties. Single. As such, he had no wife, nor kids. This was due to him being married to his career.

To that end, for the last two decades, George had made a career of being a freelance photographer and investigative journalist. He has been to and covered stories on nearly every shithole on the planet. He has received several awards over the years. Including, his work an embedded journalists with the U.S. military in both Iraq and Afghanistan. He also had been given awards for his stories and photos, covering several forms of illegal trade and production. Ranging from the diamond mines to weapons trafficking in Africa. To the drug trade and poppy fields of Golden Crescent of southwestern Asia, to the Golden Triangle of Indochina, to the coca fields of Columbia.

As such, very few things scared him.

What George was most known for was his ability to sneak into a city, or place, get the photos, and the information, for the story, and get out before anyone else was the wiser.

George's vernacular and penmanship skills in a number of these languages were fluent to the point that, combined with his thorough knowledge and understanding of various cultures and peoples, along with his skills in deception and disguise, that was it typical for natives he met, from various nations to have difficulty realizing that he was a foreigner.

It was reported, that George was so good at his job, that as long as his was in parts of the worlds where his skin complexion did not attract attention, he could completely blend into a crowd, and disappear, within minutes.

This was not to say that he did not take value his safety. He prefer to be a distance from the danger. With his view being that if he blended in, he could get the photos and information, from a distance, more safely, and get out of the area, more quickly.

Presently, George had just gotten back home, a few days ago, from his latest assignment.

The assignment was a week long, and his job dealt with creating an article and photos, for a story on the how the poor, in the slums of Caracas, Venezuela, were handling the downturn of the economy of that nation.

Going to Caracas was not the most dangerous job he had ever had. But, it was still somewhat dangerous.

And due to him appearing to keep to himself, and being as non-political as possible, the local authorities were not that hostile towards him.

That afternoon, George had just cashed his check for the job, and he was now enjoying a much deserved rest, alone, in his home.

He had just finished his supper, and he had retired to his living room.

George had a news magazine in his right hand, as he casually walked through his neatly kept living room.

He soon passed by a bookshelf, with two row of shelves being full of the awards that he had earned throughout his life.

When George reached his recline, he sat down in it.

He kept his recliner in the sitting position, as he leaned back in the cushioned chair.

He then opened the new magazine, and he flipped through it, to an an article. Specifically, he was reading a publish news article about Caracas, that he had just done. There were also a number of photos had taken, that were also included in the article.

While George continued reading the article, he thought, 'Interesting. I heard yesterday that they ran ran my story, already. With this magazine in my hand coming out two days ago. And I only e-mailed them my story, and photos, a week ago, when I just got back to the states. I guess their lead for this weeks story fell through. And my story was ready to go.'

'Though, from what I see, unlike other companies, this one didn't edit my articles too much. And they used some of the better photos I gave them. I wouldn't mind working for them.'

Suddenly, the wireless phone on the nightstand by his recliner, to his right, started to ring.

George set the magazine on his lap, on the page he was on. He then used his right hand to reach over and picked the phone off its base.

He then used his left index finger to press the talk button. After which, he held the phone to his right ear, as he said, in english, “Hello.”

The male voice on the other end of the line replied, in a casual tone of voice, in english, “Hey George. It's Mac.”

George inquired, “Hi Mac. How are you doing?”

Mac answered, “Fine. I know you just got off of that Caracas job. But, I have a nice, paying job lined up for you. If you are up for it?”

George commented, “I'll hear you out.”

Mac stated, “First, I want you to know, that when I was contacted about this assignment, that your name was at the top of the list.”

George replied, “Of course.”

Mac inquired, “Now, I need to know how long will it take you to be ready for this assignment? I sure you have bills to pay, and a few other things, to do, before you leave town again.”

George said, “I should be able to get all everything I need to do here, done in a few days. So, I will be able to get to the assignment within a week. With a plane ticket, and passport, I am only two days away from almost anywhere in the world.”

Mac replied, “Yes. And a week will be fine.”

George asked, “Good. So, are you paying me the standard rate?”

Mac mentioned, “Actually, my client wants to pay you double you usual rate. With a quarter of the payment sent to your bank account right after you agree to the job.”

George thought, 'No one pays double, unless the job involves something dangerous, that is not being mention. And I prefer a get a check, directly for those I am working for. Though, the best way to get to the bottom of this is ask about who is paying for all this.' He questioned, with suspicion in his tone of voice, “And who is the client?”

Mac coyly replied, “I would rather not say.”

George thought, 'Of course. There could be another reason why he is not telling me who the client is.' He stated, in annoyed tone of voice, “Mac, the client had better not be one of the rags that are sold at the check out lanes of local convenience stores. I have put my life on the line for my work, a number of times. And I do not like my work trivialized.”

Mac responded, “I understand. And I can assure you that the client is one of them.”

George thought, 'This is another possibility.' He asked, “So, it is a foreign client?

There was silence on the phone for a few seconds. Mac then coyly said, “Something like that.”

George thought, 'I see that I am not going to get a straight answer on who the client is. Though, this would not be the first time I worked for an anonymous client. Also, I can ask other questions.'

George asked, “Before I take the job, I need to know where you are sending me? Is it Columbia? Haiti?... I haven't been there since the earthquake that wrecked Port-a-prince. I hear that city is even more dangerous than before. Which I didn't think that was possible. Or, are you sending me to somewhere even more dangerous?

Mac responded, “It depends on how you look at it. I am sending you to an island city, on the east, gulf coast of Mexico.”

George mentally reflected, 'Depending on where in Mexico, this could be a very nice trip. But then, why is the client willing to pay double my usual fee?' He inquired, with curiosity in his tone of voice, “So, this is a milk run, for double my fee?”

Mac answered, “No. It is not. We have been hearing some strange rumors about that place.”

George thought, 'That just does not sound good.' He flatly asked, “What rumors?”

Mac said, in a serious tone of voice, “I would rather not repeat those rumors.”

George thought, 'More evasion. That is not good. Still, let's just get the details to this job, so I can decide what I want to do.' He inquired, “What exactly does this job entail.”

Mac answered, “Specifically, we want you to investigate the hotel on the north end of the island, and a casino on the south end of the island.”

George questioned, in a slightly confused tone of voice, “A Casino? In Mexico?” He mentally added, 'I thought that was illegal in Mexico. And it likely is.'

Mac said, “In many respects, the city is a lawless area. Though, from what I have learned, the police do keep the peace in the city. Even though they let the vice crimes in that city run rampant.”

George commented, “That doesn't sound so bad.” He thought, 'I have been to cities like that. As long as a person was not looking for trouble, they were usually fine. When I visited such city, I just kept my distance from questionable people. I listened in on conversation, instead of asking questions. And I used a telescopic lenses for my camera. If that is the case, here, I think I will do fine on this job.'

Mac pointed out, “Well, keep in mind that the federales don't give a damn about that city. So, watch your back.”

George responded, “Okay. I will get a hotel in the middle of the town. That will allow me to divide my work up, evenly. So, what is the name of the hotel? And the casino?”

Mac said, “Believe it, or not. The name of the hotel is called, the Devil's Hotel and Resort. And the casino is called, Daiyu Palace Casino.”

George thought, with confusion, 'Who would use the word, devil, in the name of their hotel resort? And a casino name that means, black jade?' He stated, “Okay. Mac, you have my interest. Now, where am I going?”

Mac answered, “The name of the city is called, De La Plata Podrido.”

George thought, 'Of The Rotten Silver. Interesting.' He inquired, “Okay. And how do I get there?”

Mac responded, “Well, that is the rub. Plata Podrido is not on any official maps. But, the people I have talked to have confirmed that the place exists. If you accept the job, I will e-mail you the directions, later tonight.”

George thought, with mild amusement, 'So, story on a modern mysterious island city that is not on a map. The article writes itself.'

George stated, “Okay. I will take the job, for double my usual fee.” He mentally added, 'If for any other reason than to say that I have been there.'

Mac happily said, “Good. The client will be happy to hear that. And I will look forward to your article, and photos, within... Say a month?”

George replied, “That should be plenty of time for me to do the job, get the photos, and find some sort of legitimate story in dealing with those two locations.”

Mac responded, with a bit of excitement in his tone of voice, “Excellent. We will finalize the details tomorrow.”

George replied, “That will be fine.”

Mac replied, “Okay. I will talk to you, later.” He then hung up the phone, on his end.

George heard the line go dead. He then held out the phone, away from his right ear.

While George looked at the numerical pad on the wireless phone, he thought, 'And he didn't even let me say goodbye. That is not like, Mac. I guess he really wanted to let his client know that I took the job. Now, to go back to having some fun.'

George used his right thumb to press the talk button, to hang up. Next, he placed the phone back on its base, on the nightstand to his right. After which, George looked back to the magazine on his lap.

George picked up his magazine, off his lap. He went back to reading the article, where he left off, as he thought, 'No rest for the talented. Looks like another adventure is ahead of me. And I doubt that island city could be any crazier, nor dangerous, than the places I have already been too.'

A few hours later, George went online, with his laptop computer, and he confirmed that the first part of his payment had been received, and the directions to the island city of De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. And he then began making travel plans, that would take place, in a few days. Including, what he was going to pack. And if he wanted to either business class, or fly first class.

(_)

Reality, Pedro and Lee's home reality. Date, around week, after George Benedict accepted his latest job. It was a Saturday. The morning after Chang, Lee, and River, had returned from their hunt for Pedro and Matthew. Roughly, a week after Pedro and Matthew original left Pedro's home reality. Place, the penthouse level of Daiyu Palace Casino, in De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. Time, nine twenty-one AM in the morning.

Outside, it was a sunny day, though the temperature was cool, but not cold, with a light breeze.

Inside Chang's office, in penthouse of Daiyu Palace Casino, Chang sat in the chair, behind the desk.

Chang was currently male, and he wore his usual black suit, with his two semi-automatic pistols in holsters, behind his waist.

Chang had just finished breakfast, with Lee, and River. With Chang's two lovers heading elsewhere, to enjoy their morning. With River and Lee enjoying the penthouse, outdoor, heated swimming pool, that used seawater to maintain its cleanliness. With the two of them possibly doing something else, together, later. Not that Chang minded.

Not that Chang minded. Given the amount of time he has spent with his two lovers, Chang completely trusted both River and Lee.

While Chang sat in his chair, he looked at the open door in front of him, as he thought, 'I must say, that hunt for Matthew and Pedro. And I look good in that nice orange and red Ao Dai, which River and Lee, got for me.'

'But, like all things. It had to end. And it is back to business, before myself. Still River, Lee, and I, had a wondering night, yesterday evening, when we returned here, to our apartment.'

'And Roberta of Hotel Caracas made a good point. It is best to try to avoid trouble. And so, we called off our hunt for Matthew and Pedro.'

'I am sure those two will come back here soon enough. If they run into trouble, they will likely be back sooner. Then, we will work things out. Until then, I am sure that Fabiola will take care of them. Also, it was nice see Leigharch again. He is always fun to be around. And Matt seems to have a good head on his shoulders.'

'And I already know what I plan to do when they return. First, I will help Matt get home. And in doing so, I will be in his good graces. Which would be great, given who his friends are.'

'And on Leigharch... I will offer him a job, or find something for him to do here. While he is crazy. As long as someone can keep in occupied, he will do find. Though, I wonder if Leigharch has every thought about formal stock car racing. He does have a natural skill with driving cars at very fast speed. Though, he might find running around a loop to be boring, compared to his other former jobs. And I would him for feeling that way. But, I will find something for him to do.'

'I will thank Fabiola for her help. And I will give her, Roberta, and Garcia, a few weeks, free, at one of the nicer suites here, at this casino.'

'Then, I will focus on Matthew and Pedro's troubles. This will not be too difficult. Matthew's problems can be handled in house, with me telling Revy to lay off of Matthew. As for Pedro. We will just have to work with him, Balalaika, and Revy's group, to set some boundaries for everyone. I have done this before, on a large scale, in Roanapur. So, this should not be a problem.'

'Speaking of problems and solutions. Last night, River, Lee, and I, decided, that after I make sure things have settle down here, we will visit our children in my kingdom, in feudal reality.'

'And I am sure that Book is doing a good job running things there. We raised him to handle such things, so there should be no problem. But, to him, and everyone else there, we will only have been gone a few days.'

'Also, from the few phone calls I have already made today, this city is still doing okay. It seemed that I picked my top staff well. Arcee, Mal, Zoe, and Annie, were able to divide up the workload they had to do, to run this casino, and help the city, at the same time. And they accomplished the task well. I will come up with a nice reward for them, in the next few days.'

'Still, right now, I wish I could join River and Lee in swimming in our heated pool, outside, on the terrace of our apartment, on this penthouse level. They look hot in their swimsuits, and they could care less what gender I am, when I join them.'

'Though, on another matter. As I think about, it might be best not to mention Roberta of Hotel Caracas, to anyone here. Especially, Roberta, or Balalaika. And I discussed this with River and Lee last night. And both of them agreed with me.'

'Also, I need to give Fabiola's message to Annie and Roberta. Fortunately, I will be able to start to make good on that promise very soon.'

'I called for Annie up here, a few minutes ago. She should show up any second. And she is only my first appointment, today. I also have a number of other people to meet.'

'But, that is what one has to do to run a successful business.'

Just then, Chang heard Annie walk up to the open hallway entrance to his office.

Chang turned to Annie, as he happily thought, 'All there, she is, right now.'

Annie look at Chang, as she asked, in english, “Chang, you wanted to see me?”

Chang requested, in enlgish, “Yes. Please, come sit down.”

Annie walked into the room, and she sat down in the chair, in front of the desk, to Chang's right.

While Annie got comfortable in her seat, Chang looked at her, as he calmly stated, “First, I must thank you, and the others for holding down the fort, while we were gone. We did not plan to be as gone for long, as we were.”

Annie looked up at Chang, as she replied, “No problem. And I am glad you are back.”

Chang responded, “And it is good to be back. Still, I was on the phone earlier this morning, with Arcee. And she told that you guys were able to keep this casino, and this town, together. I plan to reward you, Arcee, Mal, and Zoe, for you efforts. I just need a a few days to figure out a proper reward for all four of you.”

Annie said, “I appreciate that. Though, I doubt you just called me up here, to thank me.”

Chang mentioned, “And you would be correct. Also, when we were gone, we ran into Pedro, Matthew, and Fabiola.”

Annie asked, “How are they?”

Chang answered, “They are all doing fine. And Fabiola wanted to let you, and Roberta, know that she is going with Matthew and Pedro, as they travel the multiverse for a little while longer.” He thought, 'For now, I will leave out that Leigharch and Matt, are with them.'

Annie cracked a warm grin, as she commented, in a joyful tone of voice, “Then, they will be fine, together. And as long as you, or Pedro, are here. One of you can keep this city in one piece.” She thought, 'Looks like I won't have to go after Fabiola. And I do feel that will be fine, as long as they are together. Between the three of them, they handle handle just about any problem they run into.'

Chang stated, “Well, we can certainly try. Though, the reason we went after them, was partly because, Pedro was the only one that I feel that can keep this town together for an extended amount of time. Along, with that, Matthew is a good lawyer. With River, Lee, and I, liking both of them.”

Annie inquired, “I feel the same way. So, why did they leave in the first place?”

Chang replied, “Balalaika put a little to much heat on them. And they bolted.”

Annie sighed, as she responded, “Why am I not surprised? I am sure you will talk to Balalaika about that. So, when they do return, there be no problems.”

Chang said, “That is what I am planning to do. Also, after I thought it. I was thinking about who could have sent Fabiola after? And to be honest. I was wondering. Did you sent Fabiola to come looking for all five of us?” He thought, 'Given she mentioned you and Roberta. It was one of you too, and I am guess it was more likely you.'

Annie admitted, “Yes. It was I who sent her. I hope you are not upset.”

Chang thought, 'I enjoy being right. Now, to let you know that everything is fine.'

Chang said, “Actually, I am proud of you stepping up, and sending Fabiola after us. What you did was perfectly understandable, given that we left without giving any explanation to anyone. Still, I thought we would be make it back before anyone realized we were gone. But, we were wrong. And, in your place, I would have likely done what you did. With Fabiola being the best choice to send after us. Given her skills on tracking, subtlety, and kicking ass.”

Annie happily replied, “Thank you Chang.”

Chang said, “You're welcome. By the way, you would happen to know where Roberta would be, today? I need to get in touch with her, and let her know what has happened with Fabiola, and that her friend is fine.”

Annie thought, 'That is nice of you, Chang to want to inform Roberta of this. And I sense you are being honest with your intention to contact her, about Fabiola.'

'Though, given, from what I heard this morning. That the three of you just go back last night. You three likely have no heard about the fight between Revy and Hernan. With Hernan winning. And it then turning out the Hernan is the male counterpart to Roberta. With his wife, Maria, being the female counterpart to Garcia. And I really do not want to get between Roberta and Hernan, in dealing with their personal lives. So, I won't be the one to tell you all this.'

Annie coyly responded, “Heard from the rumor mill that Roberta will be busy today.”

Chang accepted Annie statement, as he said, “Okay. I will just talk to her, later. Is there, anything you need to talk to me about?”

Annie replied, “Not really.”

Chang stated, “Well then, you are dismissed. Have a good day.”

Annie said, “Thank you.” She then got up from her seat, turned around, and walked out of the room.

While Chang watched Annie leave the room, and disappear down the hallway, he thought, with a bit of relief, 'Well, that went better than I expected. I wonder what other surprises today will bring?'

(_)

At that moment, in another part of the De La Plata Podrido, near the center of the city, a car pulled up, and came to a stop in a parking lot of a medium level, two story, motel.

The parking lot was only half full.

After the cars engine when silent, the left driver's side door opened, and George Benedict got out of the car he had rent. He then locked, and shut, the door behind him.

George was wearing some casual clothing, as he stood and looked around himself.

While George continued to look around, he thought, 'It took me around a week to get here, but I am finally here... So, this is the city of, De La Plata Podrido. It doesn't look like much. But, that is usually where the most interesting stories come from. And it is the off season.'

'Also, I am glad that Mac's directions were spot on. With the airport I flew in from being only an hour away. And I heard they accept U.S. cash here. But, if not, I have my credit cards, and some Mexican cash.'

'Also, while I found out they speak english here, I am also fluent in spanish. So, there is no problems, when it came to language.'

'Well, now I need to check into this motel, and rent a room for myself. I will then unpack my luggage, in the trunk of this car, that I rented. After which, I will take a look around town. So, I can get my bearings. I will then start investigating this place more thoroughly tomorrow. I am in no rush. And this place seems calm enough.'

'And if anyone asks, I am just a tourist visiting the city for a little while. All in all, this should be a cakewalk.'

George then started walking towards the door to the check in desk of the motel.

(_)

Ten minutes later, in a more residential part of the city, Roberta got out of her car, as she walked up down the concrete path to the Pena's family home.

Besides her panties and bra, Roberta was dressed in a purple long skirt, that match her purple hair, which was in a ponytail, that was tied a few times, down her long hair. She also were a dark blue, long sleeved, button up, blouse. And she wore dark blue slippers that matched her shirt.

Her weapons here hidden under her skirt, in holsters, on the outer sides of her thighs.

Roberta walked down the concrete path, as she thought, 'Well, it is Saturday. And Hernan said that his family would be here. And we already worked out this plan. So, this should work. All we need to do now, is remain calm as we talk to Maria, and their children.'

'I don't usually wear a skirt, and slippers, but I have to give off as much of a relax impression as I can towards Hernan's family.'

Roberta then reached the steps of the porch, and finally the front door. She then started gently knocking on the front door of the Pena home.

After a couple of seconds, Roberta stopped knocking door.

Five seconds later, Roberta heard both the knob lock being unlocked. The door then opened, and she saw Hernan.

Hernan had short black hair, with a full, well groomed beard.

As Hernan stood in front of Roberta, she saw that Hernan wore a white shirt, brown pants, black leather belt, and brown shoes.

While Hernan looked at Roberta, he said, in a happy tone of voice, in spanish, “Good morning, Roberta.”

Roberta casually responded, in spanish, “Good morning, Hernan.”

Hernan commented, “I see you are right on time. As expected. I hope you had no problems in finding my home?”

Roberta said, “I did fine. Your directions were right on the mark.”

Hernan smiled. He then offered, “Good. Come inside and meet the family. Then, after introductions, we will talk to Maria, about what we discussed, in our kitchen, in private.”

Roberta did not response, as Hernan step out of the way, to allow her to walk inside.

After Roberta passed through the threshold, and into the home, Hernan shut, and locked the door behind them.

Hernan then walked passed Roberta, with Roberta then following him into the living room.

When they reached the living room, Roberta came to a stop. Hernan stepped to his left, to allow Roberta to look around the room.

In front of Roberta was a standard mordern living room. Much like Pedro's living room. There was a TV and entertainment to her left, set against the wall. And to her right was a couch. In front of the couch was a small, rectangular, wooden coffee table.

To the side of the couch, set against the wall, were two identical, small tables, with identical, electrical lamps on them. The lamps used soft, yellow light bulbs, and were had large cylinder, paper covers on them, to defuse the light even more, when they were turned on.

Currently, the lights were no turned off in the room, due to plenty of sunlight coming from large window behind Roberta and Hernan The window had light colored drapes, to allow light through, while allow those inside to have privacy from anyone looking at the windows from the outside.

In front of the two small tables, were two reclining chair, in up right positions. The chairs were positioned at a diagonal direction, to allow the person sitting in the chair to see both the coffee table and the TV.

The floor had brown carpet, which had been vacuumed recently. And the TV was turned on, and switched to a channel that showed a children's cartoon in spanish dialogue.

Along with doors long the walls of the room, there was a large glass cabinet with books on the far right wall of the room. And there was a large, brown stained, wooden table, with six wooden chairs around it, on the fair side of the room, set next to the back wall, and the cabinet on the far right side of the room.

Roberta then noticed those that were in the room.

There were Maria, along with Maria, and Hernan's three young children, were sitting near each other. All five members of the Pena family looked to be in good health.

Maria was sitting on the far side of the couch, next to her eldest. Except for her long blond hair, she looked like Garcia’s female form. She was wearing a pair a dark red drawstring pants, a white short sleeved t-shirt, and dark red slippers.

Sitting next to his mother, and closer to the front wall, was the eldest Pena son. The eldest son looked like a young Garcia, with short blond hair, and fair skin. He wore a pair of black pants, brown leather belt, black tennis shoes, and a green turtle neck t-shirt which was untucked.

There were open books, pieces of paper, and a sharpened pencil, on the coffee table, in front of the boy.

Roberta thought, 'He is probably doing some homework. Which is not bad. It shows responsibility on his part.'

Beside the books, on the far side of the coffee table, was the TV remote.

On sitting in the reclining chair, on the far side of the room, was girl. Except for having black hair, instead of purple hair, she looked like a younger Roberta. Her hair was allowed to hang loosing down her back, with her her reaching her shoulder blades. She wore a short, green skirt, that went up to her knees, yellow shoes, white socks, and a yellow long sleeved sweater over a white t-shirt.

And finally, there was youngest boy of the family. He had short black hair, and his facial features were a mix of his two parents. He wore gray tennis shoes, blue jeans, a brown leather belt, and a gray t-shirt, which was tucked into his pants. The boy was sitting on the floor, facing the TV, with his back to coffee table.

As Roberta and Hernan had entered the living room, the other four members of the Pena family turned to look at the two standing adults.

Maria also, reached down, and picked up the TV remote. She then used the remote to mute the TV. Next, she turned her attention to her husband and Roberta.

Hernan looked at his family, as he happily said, “Family. I would like you to meet your Aunt Roberta.”

Maria raised an eyebrow at Hernan's comment, but she did not say anything.

Roberta smiled warmly at Hernan's family. She thought, 'With luck, this meeting will go well. And then we can move forward with our plans.'

Hernan then turned to Roberta, as he commented, “And Roberta, let me introduce you to my family.” He turned to his family as he continued, “My wife, Maria Flores Pena.”

Maria said, in spanish, “We met before.”

Roberta responded, “Yes. We did. And Hernan has said only nice things about you.”

Maria replied, “That is nice to know.”

Roberta asked, “So, how is your right shoulder?”

Maria answered, “Completely healed. It was only a scratch, in the first place.”

Roberta replied, “Good.”

Hernan turned to Maria. Then, he looked at Roberta. He said, “Now, that is settled, I will introduce to our children.” He turned back his and Maria's children, as he stated, “Our oldest son, the blond one, is named, Antonio. He is eleven years old.”

Antonio looked at Roberta, as calmly he said, in spanish, “It is nice to meet you, Aunt Roberta.”

Roberta replied, “You too.” She thought, 'I guess Hernan and Maria has to say something to their children. And telling them that I am Hernan's sister is the easiest explanation. Besides, I do not mind being called an aunt, and sister.'

Hernan commented, “Our daughter, and middle child, is named Carmela. She is ten years old.”

Carmela looked over at Roberta, as she politely said, in spanish, “It is a pleasure to make your acquaintance.”

Roberta commented, “Same here.”

Hernan went on to say, “And our youngest son, is named, Ramon. He is nine years old.”

Ramon turned to Roberta, as he casually said, in spanish, “Hi Aunty Roberta.”

Roberta replied, “Likewise.”

Roberta looked at Maria, as she thought astonishment, 'So, Maria did three, back to back, pregnancies. I do not believe I could handle that, myself. Which says a lot of good things about Maria's inner strength of will, to go through that, while still being able to maintain her beautiful figure.'

Roberta looked at Hernan, and then to Maria, with Maria looking back at her. Roberta said, in a kind tone of voice, “It is nice to meet you all.” She turned back to Hernan, as she complimented, “You have a wonderful family, Hernan.” She turned back to Maria, as she continued, “Maria.”

Hernan continued to look at his family, as he said, “Thank you.”

Maria stated, “Yes. We appreciate your compliment.” She then looked over at her children, as she continued, “Children, your father, your... Aunt, and I, need to talk in the kitchen. We will be back in a few minutes.”

The three children turned to look at their mother.

Meanwhile, Hernan thought, 'Just as I expected she would do. And this way, I can let her feel that she want the one to come up with the idea to talk in private with us.'

Maria used the TV remote, that was still in her hands, to turn the volume back on the TV. She then set the remote on the coffee table in front of her.

Next, she get up from couch, and walked towards between the coffee table, and the chair Carmela was in. She then turn to her right, and continued walking.

Hernan and Roberta followed Maria, as Maria soon turned to her left, and into the kitchen, with at attached to the living room, from a door, on the back, left side of the living room.

As soon as the three adults had exited the room, the three children went back to what they were doing.

Antonio when back to doing his homework, while Carmela and Ramon turned their attention back to watching the cartoon program on TV.

(_)

Inside the kitchen, Maria and Hernan continued walking into the kitchen, as Roberta stopped just inside the doorway of the room.

The kitchen was a standard kitchen cabinets, drawers, counters. The double-sink had a rotating faucet, and retractable hose sprayer. Also, there was a small table in the room, with five chairs. Along with this, there was a refrigerator-freezer, an oven, a stove, and a microwave, and mechanical dishwater, in the kitchen. There was even a door to the backyard, on the back wall of the kitchen. And there was another door, to a hallway, on the opposite side of the kitchen from the entrance to the living room, with the doorway to the wall, being on the wall opposite to the back wall of the home.

As Maria and Hernan came to a stop, four feet away from each other, they turned to face one another. Though, the angle the two spouse were standing at, allow Roberta to see them both.

Maria inquired, in a serious tone of voice, “What is going on, Hernan? I know she looks like you. But, as far as I know, you don' have a sister. Up until today, you never mentioned one to me. So, what is going on?”

Hernan admitted, “You're right. She is not my sister. But, we are related. I just introduced her as, Aunt Roberta, to keep things simple for our children.”

Maria conceded, “Okay. I will give you that. So, what is the truth?”

Hernan said, in a sober tone of voice, “Maria, the reason I have not told you what is going on, since that night, a week ago, is because the explanation is really complicated. And we have to go step by step. This is the reason I didn't say anything yet. I spent the last week talking to Roberta, and her friends, to figure out how to tell you, in a manner that would not leave you thinking I am insane, with you possibly divorcing me.”

Maria commented, in a heartfelt tone of voice, “Hernan, I love you. And I am not going to divorce you over this. I could tell that something has been eating at you for the last week. And now you are ready to tell me, I am willing to listen. So, like you suggested. Let us take this step by step. What do you need to tell me, first?”

Hernan let out a breath, in relief. He then said, “Thank you for being so understanding. Now, to start with.” He turned to Roberta, as he continued, “Roberta is not of this reality. She is from an alternate Earth. And her friends are almost from alternate realities.” He then turned back to look at his wife, Maria.

Maria looked at Roberta, then back to Hernan, as she stated, “Hernan, if it wasn't for fact you are acting so serious, I would consider this a joke.”

Hernan said, in an even tone of voice, “It is not a joke.”

Maria questioned, “But still, how do you expect me to believe this claim?”

Roberta spoke up, as she calmly said, “I can prove it.”

Hernan and Maria turned to look at Roberta.

Roberta continued, “Not to upset you. But, some of my limbs are prostheses. Though, my artificial body parts work and feel just as well as my original limbs. I can move them. And they have a same sense of touch as the original limbs. I even have artificial nails and very fine body hair, to match my real limbs, with my artificial limbs.”

Roberta rolled up the sleeves of her dark blue long sleeved blouse, to her elbows. She then held up her arms, with the palms and inner forearms facing the two spouses. Next, Roberta held her left arm in that position, as she used her right hand to push into the middle of the inside of her left forearm. She pushed to her left, as she felt a click. After which, she pulled open a hatch, with the skin separating from around the outline of the hatch, as the hatch swung to her right.

The hatch opened to reveal the inner gears, microchips, wires, and artificial muscles, that allowed Roberta's artificial left arm to function.

For a few seconds, Maria and Hernan looked on at the inner works of Roberta's left forearm, as their eyes went wide in surprised at the stark reality in front of them.

Hernan was the first to calm himself down, as he turned looked over at his. He then looked back to Roberta, as he said, “I believe you have made your point, Roberta.”

Roberta replied, “I agree.” She used her right hand to gently flip the hatch shut on her left forearm. Next, she pressed downward against the hatch, then to the left of the hatch. After which, she head a clicking sound, which signaled the hatch was locked back in place. From there, Roberta rolled her sleeves back down her forearms to her wrists. And then, she dropped her arms back to her sides.

Hernan inquired, “I have to ask. Does it hurt to open that hatch?”

Roberta turned to Hernan, as she answered, “Not really. Though, it does sting a little, due to the sense of touch slightly misfiring for a split second, on the skin of the hatch, as the hatch separates from the rest of the arm. But, closing the hatch is painless. And the hatches for these parts, throughout my body, are self-sealing. In about an hour, the skin on the hatch of my arm will bond back to the skin around it. So, you will not be able to tell that there was ever a hatch there.”

Hernan questioned, “Okay. Also, do you have to do any maintenance on those parts?”

Roberta stated, “A little. Every six months to a year. To make sure everything is in working order. But, it is more like a doctors check up, than major surgery.”

By then, Maria has calmed down enough to speak. She then turned to look at Roberta's face, as she hesitantly said, “Okay. This like the Terminator Two movie.”

Roberta thought, with mild annoyance, 'Rock should have never cracked that joke about me being a killer robot from the future.' She calmed down, as she continued her thoughts, 'Though, what is done is done. And I am not going to hold it against her, now. Decades after the event.'

Roberta calmly responded, “No. Though, I will admit there are some similarities. So, please relax Maria. I am not an android. I was born human and I still am mostly human. I am here to talk, so I can get to know your family.”

Maria asked, “Since Hernan welcomed you into our home, I will give you the benefit of the doubt. For now. But, I need to know where are you from?”

Hernan looked at his wife, as he answered for Roberta, “Maria, do you remember that Black Lagoon anime series I showed you a few episodes of?”

Maria turned to her husband, as she replied, “Yes. I didn't care much for it.”

Hernan stated, “Well, Roberta is from that series. It seems that realities that are fiction here, exist in other parts of the multiverse. And we can interact with those realities and peoples. And vise versa.”

Maria said, “Okay.” She turned to look at Roberta, as she commented, “And now that I think about it, Roberta. Your hand does look a little like Luke's right hand from Star Wars.”

Roberta stated, “Actually, my artificial limbs are a combination of technologies, including imperial technology from Star Wars. And, my hair is not dyed. Purple is just my natural color.”

Maria looked between Hernan and Roberta, as she inquired, “After you showed me your left hand. I guessed that much. And now I believe you both. So, how are you two related?

Hernan answered, “There is no coincidence that she looks like what I would, if I were born a woman. She is my counterpart.”

Maria stated, in disbelief, “You expect me to believe that your counterpart of a fictional series? That is out there. The cyborg arm, and the claims of reality travel are pushing the boundaries of belief. But, to claim you are connected to this mess, in such a way, is quite a reach.”

Hernan sighed, as he said, “There is more.” He turned to Roberta, as he calmly requested, “Roberta, show her the pictures.”

Maria watched as Roberta used her right hand to pulled out of pair of small photos. From a hidden pocket in the folds of her skirt.

Roberta then handed Maria the photos.

Maria gently the photos from Roberta's right hand.

Maria took a few steps closer, to stand beside Hernan, as she looked at the photos.

As Maria looked at the two photos, Roberta commented, “You can keep the photos. I have plenty of copies at home.” She thought, 'Like you, and your wedding photos.'

Maria kept looking at the photos, as she thought, with mild amusement, 'Like the wedding picture I gave you, a week ago...' She said, “Good memory.”

Roberta replied, “Thank you.”

Maria continued to look at the photos, as she thought, 'Now, what is so special about these photos?... No way... What the hell?...'

Both pictures were of the face and upper body of an adult. And the person in each photo has the same green turtleneck shirt on. But, one picture was of a fair skinned man, with short blond hair. And the other picture was of a fair skinned woman, with short blond hair. Except for difference in genders, the two adults looked like identical twins. But, that was not all. Except for a being a few years younger, and having shorter hair, the blond woman looked exactly like Maria, and the man looked like he could be Maria's brother.

Maria quickly pocketed the pictures in her right, front pants pocket, as she looked up at both Hernan and Roberta, with confusion, and shock in her facial expression. She demanded, “Who are those two adults? And why do they look like me?”

Hernan thought, 'She took these pictures better than I expected. That is why Roberta and I decided on using these two photos. And I think it might be best if Roberta answers her question.'

Roberta calmly answered, “They are the same person, whom is a very dear friend of mine. The person was born male, and he lives as a man. His name is, Garcia Lovelace. Due to a strange magical curse, he was afflicted with, he can change gender with hot and cold water. And we believe he is your counterpart, Maria. Much like Hernan is my counterpart.”

Hernan turned to his wife, as he stated, “We have compared notes. Except for the gender differences, and you being a parent, there are striking similarities to your past, as a child. And you both have kind personalities, which are very similar to one another.”

Maria hesitantly said, “Fine... I believe you... Just give me a minute. This is a lot to take in.”

Roberta carefully replied, “Of course. It took Hernan time to come to grips with the truth, as well.”

There was silence for several seconds, with only the TV in the other room being heard. Maria then asked, “Who else knows about this?”

Roberta let out a breath. She then said, “Unfortunately, because of the way it came out, that night, with the fight. With all of us present, save for you and your children, realizing what was going on. With you were passing your wedding photo around. By the way, you look good in your wedding dress.”

Maria glared are Roberta, she firmly stated, “You are not helping.”

Roberta thought, 'Maria can even give the same looked that Garcia has when he is annoyed.' She responded, “I realize that. And due to how this was found out, your family connections to my family has become very well known among the reality travelers, whom now live in this city.”

Maria turned to Hernan, as she accused, with slight anger evident in her tone of voice, “And you just let me drive home, without telling me?”

Hernan continued to look at his wife, but before he could respond, Roberta said, “Please, do not be hard on your husband.”

Maria and Hernan turned back to look at Roberta.

Roberta continued, “He was coming to grips with this, as he asked you to leave. He wanted you and your children to leave, for your safety. He was not in the right frame of mind to have a conversation, concerning this matter.”

There was silence for a few seconds. Maria then conceded, in a calmer tone of voice, “I see your point. That was not the proper time for such a discussion.”

Hernan replied, “I am glad you realize that, Maria.”

Maria looked over at Hernan. She smiled warmly at him. She then looked over at Roberta, as she asked, “So, how did you get here?”

With her left hand, Roberta reached into a pocket in the folders of her skirt. She pulled out a small, TV remote sized device. She held it for Maria to see, as she stated, “This is a reality traveling device. Please, do not ask how it works, because I do not know. But, it lets us travel to any time, place, and reality, we can imagine, in an instant.” Roberta then put her reality device back into the skirt pocket that it has previously been in.

Maria commented, “Interesting. I could see how such a device could cause a lot of trouble.”

Roberta flatly said, “You have no idea.”

Maria requested, “You are probably correct. Now, would it be possible for me to meet, Garcia?”

Roberta thought, 'Things are going according to our plan. With letting Maria make the suggestion to meet Garcia is just the next part of our plan.'

Roberta said, in a casual, though happy tone of voice, “Funny you should request to meet Garcia. I recently returned to my home reality, where I spoke to Garcia about your family. And he would also like to meet all of you. But, due to his responsibilities. He cannot come here. So, he would like you and your family to come visit our home for a few days.”

Maria responded, “I don't feel comfortable going across realities, to visit someone we don't know. Especially, while bringing our children along.”

Hernan turned to Maria, as he stated, “Maria. I have spent the last week talking to Roberta. And getting to know her. I trust her. So, please trust me. This could be good for all of us. We need to deal with this now. Not later. Letting these issues simmer will only create problems for us.”

Maria conceded, “You may have a point there. Though, I would like to know where and when we will be going?”

Roberta said, “We will be going to my home reality. It is a few years in the future, when compared to here. The place is a hacienda, located outside of Caracas, Venezuela.”

Maria thought, 'I am from a plantation home outside of Caracas. These similarities just continue.' She asked, “Did Hernan inform you that we both are from Venezuela?”

Roberta answered, “Yes. And the same is true for Garcia and I. So, would you and your family like to come?”

Maria reminisced, as she said, “It would be nice to visit the homeland again. Even if it is a counterpart to our homeland here. Yes. We will come visit.”

Roberta replied, “Thank you. Garcia is truly looking forward to meeting all of you.”

Maria commented, “Well, we have to tell the kids. Then, get packed. And I need to get dressed and ready.”

Roberta complimented, “You look fine. Actually, you look better then me.”

Maria happily replied, “Thank you.”

Roberta mentioned, “Besides this is a family meeting. So, dressing casual is fine.”

Maria stated, “I will just comb my hair and I should be fine. Though, I will have to contact one of the school officials, to let them know our kids will be absent for a few days.”

Roberta commented, “That will not be a problem. My device allows for time dilation. Such as we leave here. Spent a few days there. And come back here, with it only be a few minutes, to a few hours here.

Maria inquired, “If that is the case. Then, why doesn't Garcia come here? I would think it would be simpler, that way.”

Roberta thought, 'Oh. You are as sharp as Garcia.' She answered, “It is the fact that Garcia does have responsibilities, that is he reason he does not do so. He does not like to abuse the time space continuum. Like some people I know of. Besides, he really does want you to come see our home.”

Maria commented, “Okay... But now, we need to figure out what to tell the kids.”

Hernan suggested, “We will tell them the basics. And we will ask them to keep it secret from those outside this home.”

Roberta said, “That could work.”

Maria responded, “I agree. Also, even though I did not care to watch. I believe I need to see this Black Lagoon series in its entirety.”

Hernan calmly said, “Later. Though, we need to talk about it first. You see, it does not always show Roberta in a good light.”

Roberta stated, “Like Hernan, I used to be a member of FARC. I left the organization in disgust. I eventually ended up the maid for the Lovelace household. Where, I met Garcia as a child.”

Maria spoke up, “So, there is an age difference between you and Garcia?”

Roberta responded, “Yes. Much like you and Hernan. But, also like you and Hernan, we waited until Garcia was an adult before we became intimate with each other.”

Maria commented, “You do not look so old. Actually, you look to be younger than Garcia, in the pictures.”

Roberta stated, “I am much older than I look. And we will explain that, later. Also, there is more. I was able to rescue Garcia and returned him to his father, Diego Lovelace. And we were happy for a time, until the Americans murdered Diego.”

Maria guessed, in a sober tone of voice, “And you went on a vicious rampage of revenge?”

Roberta replied, in a solemn tone of voice, “Yes.”

Hernan looked over at Maria, as he said, “It was similar to what I did when you were shot, during the cookout, years ago.”

There was silence for a few seconds, with the only noise coming from the TV, in the living room, nearby. Maria then commented, “Well, it is clear that you were able to come to your senses. And you did do it for the right reasons. Still, we will talk about what happened, before I watch the series.”

Roberta said, “That will be fine.” She thought, 'More and more, Maria shows how much she is like Garcia, in personality, to the point it is eerie.'

Maria suggested, “So, shall we head back into the living room, and give our kids the good news?”

Hernan agreed, “Yes. Let's do that.”

Maria and Hernan then started walking towards the entrance to the living room.

Roberta stepped out of the way, to allow the couple to pass by.

Roberta then followed behind the wife and husband.

(_)

A few seconds later, in the living room of the Pena family, the three children were still sitting where their parents had left them.

Antonio was the first to notice the three adults returning to the living room. He looked up from the book on the table, that he was reading. He watched them walked up towards him, and his two young siblings. He turned back to in front of him, as he leaned over and pressed the mute button on the TV. He then leaned back up, and looked over at his parents, and Roberta.

As soon as the TV went silent Carmela and Ramon looked around, and they saw their parents and Roberta come to a stop about six feet in front of them.

The three adults stood beside each other. With Maria to their left, Hernan in the middle, and Roberta to their right.

As the three adults looked over at the children, Hernan calmly said, “Children, we have some news for you.”

Maria continued, for her husband, “After some talking, with your Aunt Roberta, it seems children that you have an uncle that we were not aware of. His name is Garcia. He is you aunt's friend. And it seems he my long lost brother.”

Carmela questioned, “It seems kind of odd, mom, that you brother, and dad's sister, are living together.”

Roberta thought, 'I see these children are young. But, they are almost as sharp as their parents.'

Maria conceded, “True. But, not unheard of. And we are going to go visit him.”

Hernan stated, “Children, as your mother just said, we are going to be taking a little trip today.”

Antonio asked, “But, mom and dad, what about our homework?”

Hernan answered, “Don't worry, Antonio. You can take it with you. And we will help you with your homework while, we are visiting you aunt and uncle's very large home.”

Carmela asked, “Where are we going?”

Maria coyly replied, “To somewhere with a warmer, more pleasant climate. You will enjoy it.”

Ramon inquired, “What will we do there, when we get there?”

Roberta stated, “A lot of things. Visiting family. Seeing the sights. Some shopping. And of course, Senor Lovelace. Your uncle. Has a very nice pool in the back of the courtyard of his home. And I can guarantee it will be warm enough to go swimming in.”

Carmela stated, “I nice. It is always fun to go swimming. And I would like to do that.”

Ramon said, “Yeah! A swimming pool.”

Antonio commented, “I could use a swim. I miss not being able to go swimming during the winter months.”

Maria turned to her husband and Roberta, as she softly complimented, “Good call, Roberta.”

Roberta turned to Maria, as she commented, “Over the years, I have had to babysitting some of my friends' children, from time to time. So, I know a few tricks.”

Maria replied, “That is nice. And I will make sure we all will bring our swimwear with us.”

Roberta replied, “Good idea.”

Hernan just inwardly smiled, concerning how well his wife and his counterpart, were getting along.

The two adult women then turned their attention back to the children, as Maria said, “Now, let's get packed and ready, to go.”

The three children got up from where they were sitting. And then headed into a hallway entrance, that was by the TV, as they went to their bedrooms to pack.

Maria then went to join them.

Hernan watched his family leave. He then turned to Roberta, as he stated, “This won't take long.”

Roberta looked at Hernan, as she commented, “Take all the time you need. We have plenty of it.”

Hernan said, “I know. Now, just sit down, and enjoy yourself.”

He then turned back towards the hallway his family went into, and he walked into hallway, to join them.

While Roberta patiently waiting for the Pena family to get ready for their trip.

(_)

An hour and twenty minutes later, the Pena family was ready to go, as they wall met with Roberta, back in the living room.

The Pena family, along with Roberta's help, made sure, and double-check, that everything in the home was turned off. From lights, to TV, to any appliances, besides the refrigerator-freezer.

Presently, all five members of the Pena family were carrying some luggage, as they stood near each other.

Hernan is holding as suitcase in each of his hands. Maria had a suitcase in her right hand, while she had a bag for medical items on a strap, which was hung from her left shoulder. Carmela was holding her suitcase with both hands in front of her. Ramon was holding a suitcase with his right hand. While Antonio was holding his suitcase with his left hand.

Meanwhile, Roberta was not carrying anything, as she stood a few feet away from the Pena family.

Roberta turned to Hernan, as she offered, “You know. I would be more than happy to carry one of those suitcases?”

Hernan turned to Roberta, as he commented, “Not to sound macho. But, I want your mind to be one where we are going.”

Roberta replied, “Fair enough.” She mentally added, 'It would make sense that he wouldn't want any distractions, as I use my reality device.'

Nearby, Maria, turned to her three children, as she said, in a calm, motherly tone of voice, “Children.” Her three kids looked at her, as she stated, “Children. We have an important request for you. We need you to keep this all secret, from those outside this family. From meeting your aunt and uncle. To where we are going. To how we are getting there and back. It is very important.”

Hernan noticed what Maria said. He turned to his kids, as he said, in a fatherly tone of voice, “Your mother is right. We need you to keep this a secret. Or, we could all get into trouble. A lot of trouble.”

Antonio said, “Yes mother, and father.”

Carmela replied, “Of course mom, and dad”

Ramon stated, “I'll do it.”

Maria said, “Good. And thank you, children.”

Roberta walked over to them, as she used her left hand to pull out her reality device from a hidden pocket she had it in, in her skirt. As she came to a stop, by the Pena family, she looked over at them.

Roberta calmly requested, “Okay, boys and girls. Gather around me. I need you to be very close to me. And keep in mind, that in an instant, where are going to be outside, on a sunny day elsewhere. It is a little disorientating, but after a while, you will get use to doing this.”

The five Pena family members walked over to stand close to Roberta, as Maria asked, “Is this going to hurt.”

Roberta looked at Maria, as she answered, “It is completely painless and it only take a split-second. You will literally be there, before you realize it.”

Maria replied, “Okay.”

By then, all of the Pena family members had gathered closed to Roberta.

Roberta then thought of her home reality, the being right outside the front double-door entrance to the Lovelace, a few days after she had last seen Garcia, during the late morning, on a sunny day of a specific date. With her having checked the weather forecast of, before she left. She then held that thought, as she pressed the red button on her reality device.

The next thing Roberta and the Pena family know, they were instant taking to the Black Lagoon anime reality.

They were all outside, on a sunny warm day. And all of them saw they were standing in front of a large two story him, with a set of double-doors in front of them.

Maria was the first to speak, as she commented, “That was interesting.”

Carmela said, “Cool.”

Hernan turned to Roberta, as he stated, “I can see how that device can be handy.”

Roberta pocketed her reality device, in the same pocket she had pulled it out from. She turned to the Pena family. She smiled towards them, as she said, “Yes. It is.”

Maria overheard Hernan and Roberta's comments. She turned to them, as she stated, “That device must burn up a lot of fuel. Or, energy.”

Roberta looked at Maria, as she commented, “No. The power supply on these devices are designed and built to practically last forever.”

Maria replied, “Nice.”

Roberta agreed, “Most certainly.” She then looked around at the Pena family, as she stated, “Welcome to the Lovelace home. We are just outside of Caracas, Venezuela.”

Hernan looked at his children, as he said, “Yes. kids, welcome to the Venezuela. As your Aunt Roberta said. We are right outside of the capital city of this nation. Caracas. Also, known as city of eternal spring. And your parents homeland...” He looked around, as he continued, in a more heartfelt tone of voice, “And it is so good to be back.”

Roberta looked around, as she commented, “Yes. I know the feeling.” She turned to her extended family, as she continued, “Now, have a look around, then I will show you inside.”

And the Pena family took Roberta up on her offer, as they looked around them.

As the three children looked around, they did not response. Though, Carmela set down her suitcase. She then took off her yellow sweater, as she thought, 'It is too hot for this sweater.' She then held the sweater under her right arm, as she picked up her suitcase with her left hand.

Meanwhile, Maria looked up at the plantation home, she thought, 'This looked almost exactly like my childhood home. Only, mine needed a fresh coat of paint on the outer walls, during the last time I saw it. And this home has a fresh coat of paint on it.'

A few seconds later, Hernan had noticed his family had stopped looking around. He turned to Roberta, as he stated, “I think we are ready to go inside.”

Roberta just looked at Hernan, as she nodded once. She then said, “Right this way.”

Roberta turned back and walked to stand in front of the double-doors of the Lovelace home. She then turned to face the left door, as she pulled out a key. She then used the key to lock the door. Next, she put away the key, and held the door open, as the Pena family entered her home.

The Pena family saw what Roberta had done, and they all filed in the home, with Maria and Hernan being the first to walk inside.

While Ramon passed Roberta, he looked up at her, as he continued walking. He said, “Thank you.”

Roberta replied, “You're welcome.” She thought, 'Ramon is such a polite, young boy. I think our family is going to have a marvelous time here.'

Meanwhile, inside the entryway of the home, Maria came to a stop, inside the entryway room. She looked around the room, as she thought with a bit of nostalgia, 'This is exactly like my home. We are counterparts. Though, I think I will keep this to myself. We are guests here. And I mustn't forget that. Still, it will be nice feeling like I have come home. Even though, I won't share this information with anyone.'

Hernan came to a stop beside Maria, Hernan turned to his wife, and he noticed his wife's glassy eyed stare. He asked, “Maria, is there something wrong?”

Maria held back tears of joy, as she turned to look at her husband. She calmly answered, “No. I am fine. Just fine.”

After they all walked inside, Roberta shut and locked the door behind them. She turned to them, as she stated, “Now, just so you know, besides Garcia. There are three other people in this home. They are three maids. They have already been informed of your possible coming arrival. And they are expecting us. So, there will not be no problems with them.”

“We also have one other member of this household. A green haired woman named, Fabiola. Though, she is on an extended trip. And I do not know when she will return. She is a wonderful woman, whom loves children. And I think you will all get along well, when you do all eventually meet each other.”

“That being said. If you need help, those here will be more than happy to help you.”

“I will now show you to the guest quarters. Where you can drop off you luggage. And then we will meet with Garcia.”

The family turned around to look at Roberta, as Hernan said, “That will be fine.”

But, before anyone could move, Carmela asked, “So, how long are we staying?”

Hernan turned to his daughter, as he answered, “We will be staying a few days?”

Antonio inquired, “Won't that cause problems with school? We did leave without notice.”

Roberta stated, “Actually, you are no longer in your own reality, time, and place.”

Antonio mused out loud, “I was wondering about that.”

Ramon questioned, “So this is something like transporters, from Star Trek?”

Roberta answered, “More like a teleportation. Nothing is broken apart, and put back together. We just fold space-time around us.” Roberta mentally lamented, 'I have been spending way too much time around Akira, Natsuru, and Violin. I am starting to sound like a science fiction geek.'

Carmela inquired, “And that means?”

Maria turned to her daughter, as she stated, “While your father, and I, are not sure about the date. This means we have also time traveled. From when and where we were to another place, time, and reality. After a few days here, we will return soon after we left. For those in our home reality, we will be returning the same day we left.”

Carmela replied, “Cool.”

Hernan turned to Roberta, as he asked, “So, what is the date here?”

Roberta looked at Hernan, as she answered, “It is a Tuesday, in the late morning, of March sixteenth, two thousand twenty-one AD.”

Hernan thought, 'That is a few years in our future. And it has been twenty-six years since the Black Lagoon series had ended in the middle of nineteen ninety-five. Interesting.'

Maria turned to Roberta, as she commented, “So, this is a few years in the future, when compared to when we left our reality.”

Roberta looked at Maria, as she responded, “Yes. But, not much has changed here, over the years. And barring various politics and political influences, along with a few technological advances. Things are the same in both our realities.”

Hernan thought, 'Yes. Except your reality being a work of fiction to those of our home reality. But, now is not the time for such discussions.'

Roberta smiled, as she said, “Now, this way to the guest quarters.” She started walking towards the left part of the first story of the home, with the Pena family following behind her.

(_)

Twenty minutes later, Roberta lead the Pena family to the guest quarters. Roberta then assigned them there rooms, with the Pena family setting down their luggage down in their rooms. After which, Roberta showed then where the guest bathroom was. Which included a tub, shower, toilet, sink, closet, and toiletries.

With their living arrangements settled, Roberta then lead all five members of the Pena family to Garcia’s private study, on the second floor, in the front section, of the plantation home. The office had belonged to Diego Lovelace, Garcia's father, until his untimely demise.

When Garcia took over his father's office, he decided to leave most of the office the way his father had left it.

When Roberta and the Pena family reached the closed brown, wooden double-doors to the study, Roberta was in front. She came to a stop, with the Pena family stopping behind her.

Roberta turned back to the Pena family, as she said, “It is Tuesday. A weekday. And Garcia is usually working on the weekdays. And I know he is here, because this is usually where he is at. And if he was not, these doors would be open. Now, please keep in mind that Garcia is a very busy man. He oversees several businesses, ranging from farming, to mining, to investments. As such, he might not have a lot of time to spend with us.”

Ramon bluntly asked, “So, he is rich?”

Maria looked down at her youngest son, with a frown on her face. She looked back up at Roberta, as she calmly said, “I apologize for my son's behavior. That question was uncalled for.”

Roberta calmly replied, “It is alright. It is a fair question. And yes, we are very well off. Now, let me see if he has the time to see visitors.” She then turn back to the double-doors, as she lightly knocked on the left door, for a could of seconds, with the back of her left hand.

Right she finished knocking, they all heard an adult, male voice, inside the room, ask, in spanish, “Who is it?”

Roberta said, through the doors, “Garcia. It is Roberta, and I have brought the Pena family with me.”

Garcia requested, “Bring them in.”

Roberta opened both doors. She then stepped just inside the room, as she stood out of the way, to allow the Pena family to walk inside the study.

As Hernan entered with his family, into the room, he looked around.

Hernan through, 'This room is nearly the same as in the Black Lagoon anime. There is even the bamboo palm on the right corner of the room, by the window.'

A few seconds later, the Pena family came to a stop by the small table, on the other side of the room from the desk, and windows to the outside. The family turned, as the stood facing the window. With the three children standing in front of Hernan and Maria. With Hernan to Maria's left side.

With the Pena family inside the room, Roberta shut the doors, and turned her back on the doors, to look towards both the Pena family, and Garcia, whom was sitting in an office chair, behind his desk, but in front of the window.

Meanwhile, the family continued to silently look around them.

They saw that velvet curtains of the windows, were pulled away to the sides of the windows, to show the windows with rod iron bars set outside of the windows.

And while the office had not changed much over the years. There were a few changes.

On the book shelves, to the left of the desk, across from the bamboo palm, the second to the top shelf had more modern book titles, and update books on various subjects, place on it. On third shelf, from the top, there were data CD in jewel cases, which were business recoded. And the fourth shelf, from the top, there were a few music CDs, along with movie DVDs and Blu-ray discs.

Also, Hernan saw some more modern computer equipment, and other items, on top of the brown, wooden desk. To Garcia right, on top of the desk, was a thin-screen computer monitor. In front of the monitor was a keyboard, computer mouse. To the right right side of the monitor, near the edge of the desk, there was an external blu-ray burner, and behind the burner was a wireless phone, that was set into its base. Wires for these devices let into the right side of the desk, which meant that the computer tower, and hook ups for the phone, were inside the right side of the desk.

And except for the electrical cord, at the bottom of the desk, there was no other wires visible, meaning that the computer was hooked to the internet, via a wireless network.

The left side of Garcia's desk was empty, except for a few papers on top of the desk. And pen holder that had a few pens and pencils inside the holder.

Hernan thought, 'Well, Garcia updated the office to the twenty-first century. And I have to admit that Garcia is looking pretty good, as well.'

Garcia had grown to be a handsome man, whom looked to be a man in his late twenties. He still had short blond hair, and fair skin. He also had smooth face which had not trace of facial hair.

Garcia was dress in similar clothing as his father once preferred. In among other things, Garcia wore a dark red, turtleneck neck shirt, which was tuck into his brown pants. He had on a black leather belt, black socks, and black dress shoes.

Just then, Garcia stood up from his chair, as he face the Pena family.

Hernan noticed, as he thought, 'Well, in his male form, Garcia has a similar physical build, and height, as his father did. Now, I figure as long as we are polite, this will be a pleasant visit for all of us. And he is clearly no longer a boy. He is now a man. And even with that water curse. He seems to have a handle on things. And if his, Roberta's, and Fabiola's holdings are as vast as I suspect, Roberta would be right. They are well off. And then some.'

Maria meanwhile thought, 'So, this is what I would looked like, if I had been born as a man. And I look kind of like him. With him being cute, in a pure esthetic way. Still, this could be interesting. I hope he is nice. And it is comforting to know we have rich relatives.'

Garcia continued to look at the Pena family, as he calmly said, “Welcome to our home. I have been expecting you. My name is Garcia Fernando Lovelace. You may call me, Garcia. Roberta has inform me what has happened. And what is going on. I know that you, Maria, are my counterpart. And Roberta is Hernan's counterpart.”

Garcia thought, 'It is interesting that her first name is the same as my alias, when I am in my female form. I will have to ask her about that. But, later. When their children are not around.'

Hernan and Maria noticed their three children looking at them, with unspoken questions seen in their eyes.

Nearby, Roberta noticed this, as she thought, 'I did not expect for Garcia to mention that Hernan and Maria were our counterparts, in front of the children. Perhaps we should have told them, before we left. But, I am sure Hernan and Maria can handle this situation.'

The two parents looked down at their children, as Hernan softly said, “We discuss this matter, later, children.”

Garcia asked, “Is, something wrong?” He thought, 'I think I just accidentally let the cat of the bag, on this secret... So, much for a good first impression.'

Roberta stated, “An error on my part. We were planning on telling the children. But, not so soon.”

Garcia just sighed, as he thought, 'Me, and my big mouth.'

Maria, Hernan, and their children, all turned turned their attention towards Garcia, as Hernan said, “No. There is not a problem. It is just another day in the life of raising three children.”

Garcia and Roberta chuckled a little at Hernan's joke, for a few seconds. While Maria just smiled at Hernan's comment.

As Garcia and Roberta calmed down, Garcia thought, 'At least, they are taking this in stride.'

Hernan then stated, “And it is nice to meet you, Senor Lovelace. I am Hernan Pena. Hernan is fine.”

Maria calmly said, “It is a pleasure to meet you, Senor Lovelace. I am Maria Pena. Maria is fine.”

Garcia thought, 'Her voice... Very interesting... But, that is a question for later.' He kindly responded, “Maria, Hernan, please call me, Garcia. And I hope you and your family are able to make yourselves at home here, during your stay. Though, I have yet to be introduced to your children?”

Maria gestured at her three children, whom stood in front of the couple, as she commented, “The eldest son, is Antonio. Our daughter, the middle child, is Carmela. And our youngest son is, Ramon.”

Garcia said, “It is nice to meet you all.” He thought, 'These children have been well behaved. They have not even said a word, yet. While we have been talking. And they look healthy, and well clothed.'

Carmela replied, “Same here.”

Ramon said, “It is nice meeting you.”

Antonio complimented, “You have a lovely home, Uncle Garcia.”

Garcia commented, “Uncle Garcia is fine. And thank you for the compliment, Antonio.” He then thought, 'And I see that Maria and Hernan have raised three polite children. Still, I do need to lay out a few ground rules for their visit. But, nothing too serious. More about my own schedule, and the time I have. Or, lack there of.'

'Also, I am glad that Roberta informed me of Fabiola's current trip. It does not take a genius to know why she is traveling the multiverse, nor who sent her. Annie always has good taste in finding the proper people for their assignments.'

Though, before Garcia could speak, Maria inquired, in a polite tone of voice, “Pardon me, Garcia. But, I was wondering, given the advantages of time travel, why you could not come to visit us?”

Garcia said, “It is okay to ask. Unfortunately, that is the very real chance I will not make it back in a timely manner. And some of my business dealings are somewhat time sensitive, for this time of the year. Such as the plantations. And if I do go missing, it may effect the livelihoods of many people.”

“Though, now that I have learn about you, and your family, I am planning to set aside some time, to where I can visit. Using the five minute trick. Though, at that point, if I am gone a few days, to a week, it will no effect anyone else, here.”

Roberta happily thought, 'That is my Garcia. Always thinking of others.'

Maria responded, “I understand. And I can appreciate your situation. And keep in mind, you are more than welcome to come visit us.” She mentally reflected, 'I won't ask for a date, or advance notification, because I am not sure how that works between realities.'

Garcia replied, “Thank you.”

Maria offered, “Well, raising three children forces one to improve their time management skills. So, I could give you some pointers.”

Garcia inquired, “I may take you up on your offer. Though, how are the others? Has Revy gotten into any more fights?”

Hernan hid a grin behind his beard, as he thought, 'Garcia, knows his friends far too well.' He answered, “Not that I know of. And not many people would knowingly pick a fight with her.”

Garcia replied, “True.”

Hernan commented, “I think it is safe to say that I was not in my right mind, at the time, I fought her.”

Garcia agreed, “Also, true.” He then looked over at Roberta, and back to Hernan and his family, as he continued, “Though, Roberta filled in the details, and I am not surprised you fought her. Though, learning that you soundly beat her, was a bit of a shock.”

Hernan retorted, “I was just lucky.”

Roberta complimented, “No. I saw the fight. You were just good.”

Garcia commented, “And modest.” He thought, 'Just like Roberta.'

Hernan replied, “Thank you.”

Maria looked down at her children, then around the room at Hernan, Roberta, and Garcia. She requested, in a diplomatic manner, “As much as I am enjoying hearing how my husband defended my honor. I prefer not to talk about violence in front of my children.”

Garcia replied, “I understand.” He thought, 'In her position, I would make the same request. I am already seeing the similarities. And they are uncanny.'

Roberta commented, in a relax tone of voice, “I will keep that in mind.” She mentally added, 'That is a fair request, coming from a parent.'

Hernan turned to his wife, as he said, “I will make it up to you, later.”

Maria turned to her husband, as she replied, “I know you will.”

Maria and Hernan then turned back to look at Garcia and Roberta.

Garcia thought, 'Now, I do have questions I need to ask Roberta, before we continue this conversation. So, I don't accidentally say anything else they have chosen to withhold from their children.' He turned to Roberta, as he requested, “Come here, Roberta.”

Roberta walked over to stand beside Garcia, to Garcia's left.

Garcia stood up, and turned to face Roberta. He then lean over, and whispered into Roberta's right ear, “How much do they know?”

Roberta softly responded, “Hernan knows about the series and Lee's stories. We explained the basics to Maria. The kids are in the dark.”

Garcia quietly responded, “That is fine. So, how do you consider Hernan, to yourself?”

Roberta softly replied, in a warm tone of voice, “Like a brother.”

Garcia quietly complimented, “That is a good way to look at it.”

Roberta smiled in response.

Garcia notice Roberta's smile. He then leaned up from Roberta, with both adults turning back to look at the Pena family.

Garcia commented, “I apologize for the whispering. But, I had to ask Roberta a few questions, before we continued.”

Maria said, “That is fine. Sometime the situation calls for such actions.”

Garcia responded, “Very true. And given all our connections, to one another, I guess that makes you family. With you, Maria, being my sister. Hernan, my brother in law. And my niece and two nephews. If that is okay with you?”

Maria smiled, as she replied, “That is fine with me. And I always did want a brother.”

Hernan calmly said, “I feel similarly, towards Roberta.”

Antonio commented, “It is nice to know we have family we can turn to. If needed.”

Garcia stated, “And if you need our help, we will be there.”

Antonio replied, “Thank you.”

Carmela said, “And it will be nice to get to know you.”

Roberta coyly responded, “While, there are some items in our past, we would prefer not to discuss with you. Due to your age. We would be more than happy to talk to you.”

Carmela said, “I am just happy to talk to you.”

Ramon commented, in a slightly excited tone of voice, “And this means more Christmas presents.”

Everyone laughed for, a few seconds, at Ramon's comments.

As they all calmed down, Garcia commented, in a joyous tone of voice, “Then, it is settled. My home, is your home. You are welcome here, as long as you can conduct yourself in a civilized manner.”

Hernan and Maria looked as each other. They then looked back at Garcia and Roberta, as Hernan said, “That will be fine.”

Maria pointed out, “Though, we do have children. And like all children, items can sometimes break around them.”

Garcia calmly responded, “Accidents happen. As long as I am informed, it is not intentional, and no one was harmed, it will alright.”

Maria thought, 'This Garcia is a very just man. I will have to learn more about him.' She said, “We will do our best to do so.”

Garcia replied, “That is all one can do.” He thought, 'Still, this office is to stuffy for their children. And we do need to continue this conversation. Fortunately, I know a place that will be fine for everyone.'

Garcia suggested, “Good. Now, let use had for the patio. So, the children can play, as we talk.”

Maria gave Garcia a warm smile, as she complimented, “That is a wonderful idea.”

Roberta said, “This way to the courtyard.” She then began walking towards the double-doors that lead to the hallway, with Garcia right behind her.

The Pena family then soon followed the loving couple, to the stairs, and then the center courtyard, of the Lovelace home.

(_)

A few minutes later, they made it to the outdoor courtyard, in the center of the plantation home.

While, Garcia, Roberta, and the Pena family, stood at one of the entrances to the courtyard, the Pena looked around.

As Garcia, Roberta, and the Pena family entered the courtyard, they saw they were surrounded by the walls of the Lovelace manor. There two long balconies overlooking the rectangular courtyard from the second story. The balconies were located on the sides of the home. With no balcony on the back and front sides of the home.

On the ground level, there was and alcove surround all the sides of the courtyard. With breaks in the garden sections, to allow entryways into the courtyard.

For support, roughly every ten feet, square columns when up the outer sides of the alcoves, through the second story, to the roof line.

On the front and back sides of the courtyards, where there was no second story balcony, when the columns met the second story, they curved, to create archways. While the two sides alcoves and balconies, there were just square column, which barely curved as they met the bottom of the second story, and the bottom of the roof line.

On the second story balconies, the columns where connected to three feet high bannisters, with square, wooden spindles located every feet feet, beneath the bannisters.

Unlike years past, the small gardens and trees of the courtyard were not overgrown, with vines reaching up the walls, to almost touching the roof line. Instead, the gardens and trees were well groomed.

Also, the red and blue flowers on the bushes were in bloom.

The stone floors and functioning stone fountain had both been pressure washed to make the floors and fountain white again.

When facing the front of the home, there was a small, cleaned out pool in the on the back, left side of the courtyard. The pool was partly hidden by a bush line, between the pool, and the rest of the courtyard.

Also, the line of bushes hid an open alcove through the building, that lead to a secondary yard, and exit to the home, on the left side of the building. With that backyard having an iron fence around it, attached to the building, and a double-door iron bar gate at the other end of the yard.

Like the outer walls of the plantation home, the interior outer walls of the courtyard had been repainted white. And the reddish-brown roofing tiles had been replaced with new reddish-brown roofing tiles.

As the Pena family continued to looked around, Maria noticed the pool, over the row of bushes, in the back of the courtyard.

Maria thought, 'This would be exactly what I imagined my family courtyard to be, if we had maintained it better. And I am not surprise. Still, we need to talk to our hosts. And we can do so, as our children play, nearby' She looked over at her three children, as she continued her thoughts, 'But first, I need to remind my children of a few things.'

Maria calmly said, “Children, you may go play. But, keep in mind, we are guests. So, behave yourselves. And no fighting. Also, do not go swimming until after I have talked to our hosts.”

The children looked at her, and then back to the courtyard, as they rush out, to play with one another.

Maria turned to Garcia and Roberta, as she complimented, “Garcia. Roberta. You have a very lovely home and courtyard.”

Hernan thought, 'And it is much better than when you were a kid, Garcia. It is clear you have done much to repair, fix, and renovate your family home.'

Garcia replied, “Thank you. It took a lot of work to restore it, but I believe it was worth it.”

Roberta replied, “I agree.” She thought, 'It is much better than when I first became a maid of this household.'

Maria asked, “About your pool. I have a few questions.”

Garcia replied, “You may use it, anytime you please. Later, I will show you where the switches for the nighttime courtyard lights are.”

Maria responded, “Not just that. I was wondering. Does your pool use the chlorine system. Or, the salt water system?”

Garcia answered, “We switched over to the salt water system, years ago. And when we did, we have the pool itself acid washed, while it was empty.”

Maria said, “Good. That will help prevent the children from having eye and nose problems.”

Garcia offered, “True. Now, please follow me. I know a perfect place we can sit down and talk, while still being able to keep an eye on your children.”

Maria replied, “I would appreciate that.”

Garcia then started walking into the courtyard, with Roberta, Hernan, and Maria following behind him.

And as the children play, Garcia lead the three other adults, to a set of four, brown, wicker, lawn chairs. The chairs surrounding a circular white table, with a single, circular pedestal going down, from the center of the table, to from a circular base on the floor of the courtyard.. There was a large tree by the table, which offered the four adults shade from the sun.

Hernan sat across from Maria. And Roberta sat across from Garcia.

While they go conformable in their seats, Hernan noticed a woman in a maids uniform walk up to their table.

As the woman got closer, Hernan saw that the woman was slender, with fair skin. She has long black hair, which was tied into a bun on the back of her head. She also wore a black maids uniform, with a white apron, and black slippers.

The woman walked around the table, to where Garcia did not have to turn to look at her.

As all the adults at the table, looked over at her, the woman calmly inquired, “Master Lovelace, Roberta, would you, and your guests, care for some refreshments?”

Garcia answered, “We would love something to drink. And let me introduce everyone.” He turned to Maria, then Hernan, then back to the maid. He continued, “This is Maria and Hernan Pena. They are relatives, from out of the country. Their three children. From oldest, to youngest, are Antonio, Carmela, and Ramon.”

Hernan saw the woman raise an eyebrow, but she did not response.

Hernan thought, 'She is probably wondering why Maria and I look like Garcia and Roberta. But, she knows better than to ask such questions. Also, even though she works for Garcia, she spoke first. Which means she is very good terms with Garcia. Which is odd, but not unheard of.”

Garcia went onto say, “Maria, Hernan. This is Abella Hidalgo. She is one of the maids of this household. She and her family are good friends of ours. Her husband was of great assistance to me, after my father died. He helped keep my family fiances in order, until I could fully take over. She lives with her husband and children, in a home, near the plantation.”

Maria calmly said, in a kind tone of voice, “It is nice to meet you, Mrs Hidalgo.”

Abella said, “Abella is fine, Mrs Pena.”

Maria replied, “Maria is fine, as well.”

Abella made a slight grin, as she requested, “Alright. If it would be okay? I will inform the other servants of our guests?”

Garcia answered, “That will be fine.”

Abella asked, “So, what can I get for everyone?”

Garcia said, “I will have a batido.”

Hernan thought, 'That is a smoothie made of milk, various fruits, and ice. That is a good drink for a mid-morning snack.”

Maria requested, “I will have a papelon con limon.”

Roberta commented, “I will have one, as well.”

Hernan mentally reflected, 'A papelon con limon is sugar cane juice mixed with lime, or lemon. That brings back memories. Maria probably misses not having that in Mexico. Though, there was not much I could do about that. Though, I am more of a simple person, myself.'

Hernan stated, “I will have some lemonade, with some ice, in the glass.”

Abella looked around the table, as she said, “I will be back in a few minutes, with your requests.” She then turned around and walk away, towards the kitchen area of the home.

When Abella was out of sight, the four adults turned to look at each other. Though, Maria and Hernan, kept and eye on their children, whom were about sixty feet from them, further in the courtyard.

Hernan asked, “How much do the servants of the house know about you? And where we came from?”

Garcia responded, “They do not know a lot. We have no told them anything about reality travel. Nor, the other issues associated to such travel.”

“Though, they do know about Roberta's cybernetic parts. And they know about my other form. Due to the fact I like to swim, and it was just easier to tell them about, and show them, my other form. But, they are discreet, and they are polite enough not to ask any other questions. Though, except for a few others. No else knows about Roberta and my... Oddities...”

Hernan commented, “No matter how strange things can get, life still has to march on.”

Garcia asked, “Very true. So, what do you two do?”

Hernan thought, 'Given what I know of your lives. It is a fair question to ask. But, I think it is best for my wife to speak first on this manner. And then, I will follow her lead.'

Maria answered, “I raise our family, while, Hernan works during the day.”

Garcia turned to Hernan, as he inquired, “So, what is you line of work?”

Hernan looked over at Garcia, as he said, “I am an auto-mechanic. The job pays the bills, with a little left over for my family.”

Garcia complimented, “That is a good profession to have.”

Hernan replied, “I know.”

Garcia asked, “So... I have to ask. How did you two meet, and end up married?”

Maria and Hernan answered, in unison, “Long story.”

Roberta cracked a grin, while Garcia lightly chuckled.

As Garcia calmed down, he said, “We will compare notes, later.”

Maria asked, “I look forward to doing so. Though, do you have any children of your own?”

Roberta blushed, as Garcia hesitantly answered, “No.” He looked over at Roberta, whom was looking back at him. He then turned back to Maria, as he continued, “But, we have talked about it. And it is likely going to be a while.”

Maria complimented, “It is wise not to rush into such things. We took our time, as well. And events have so far worked out fine for us. So, I heard you have some sort of strange magical curse.”

Garcia turned to Roberta, as he raised an eyebrow. He inquired, “How much did you tell them, about that?”

Roberta responded, “Not much. But, it is best to get it out of the way, than to have an accident.”

Garcia thought, 'Well, I did mention I have another form, in front of Maria. And if Maria is as sharp as me, she would have asked about it, eventually.' He shrugged, as he agreed, “I agree. Could you get me a glass of cold water, a glass of hot water, and a towel.”

Roberta said, “Sure.” She then got up, and left for the kitchen.”

Hernan looked over at Garcia, as he thought, 'I did not realize Garcia would be this open about such matters. But then again, if the math is correct, he has had to live with this curse for around two decades. Still...' He commented, “Perhaps you would like to show us, in private?”

Garcia looked over at Hernan, as he stated, in a reassuring tone of voice, “Do not worry. As I said. The people of this household know about my curse. And they know not to ask questions. Besides. Roberta is correct. It is best to get this out of the way now, rather than wait until later.”

Hernan shrugged, as he replied, “Okay.”

The three adults them patiently waited for Roberta to return.

(_)

A minute later, Hernan saw Roberta walking back towards them, with a circular tray in her hands. On the tray were two clear glasses of water, and a small folded hand towel.

Hernan could see steam rising from one of the glasses, meaning the water in that glass was hot.

Hernan thought, with curiosity, 'This should be interesting to watch. From what I saw of Pedro collection of the Ranma Half series, they never actually showed the transformation of Ranma changing genders. Save for a few close up body shots. And while I have met Ranma in person, as a woman, I knew better than to ask her to show me the gender change. I don't want her, nor her friends, to get the wrong idea about me. Still, this will be interesting to watch.'

After Roberta set the tray on the table, between her and Garcia, she sat back down in her chair, at the white, circular table.

Garcia stood up, as he used his right index finger to test the temperatures of the water in both glasses. He turned to see that the three children were at the far end of the courtyard, away from them.

Garcia thought, 'Good. They will not notice. And the servants of the household are busy elsewhere. While the servants know about my curse. It is best not to startle them, in showing the change happening in front of them.'

Garcia then looked over at Hernan and Maria, as he stated, “As you were told. I have a magical water curse, that changes my gender. Cold water turns me physically into a woman. Hot water turns me back into a man. Do not be alarmed.”

Garcia picked up the glass of cold water. He bent down, and pour the water over the top of his head, with the angle allowing the water to flow down Garcia's face, without getting the clothing Garcia was wearing, wet.

The other adults could see the change happen within almost an instant. In that Garcia became several inches shorter, with Garcia's body becoming slightly smaller, as well.

They could see that Garcia was now physically a woman. That also saw that Garcia had moderately sized breasts for a woman, and in proportion to her body, she had slightly wider hips and thigh. This gave Garcia a wonderful female figure. Along with this, Garcia’s face has become more feminine, though had face a still clearly recognizable.

Garcia set the empty glass down on the tray. Next, she grabbed the towel and wiped her head and hair, to dry herself.

A few seconds later, Garcia loosely set the towel around her neck, to prevent any water from her head, from dripping down to her clothing.

Garcia then leaned up, and looked across the table at Maria, with Maria gazing back at the woman standing in front of her.

The other three adults, at the table, could tell that Garcia was now, not only a woman, from her figure, but she looked almost exactly like Maria.

Hernan thought, while feeling a combination of wonder, and concern, 'This is the first time Maria, and I, have ever seen the a magical gender bender change in person. And to actually see the change in person is a completely different experience, than to see it on TV, or computer screen.'

Hernan then looked at Maria, from the corner of his eye, as he thought, 'At least it appears that Maria is taking this all very well.'

While Garcia and Maria continued starring at each other, Maria hesitantly said, “It is likely staring into a mirror.”

Garcia stated, in a female voice that was identical Maria's voice, “I know. I did not want to say anything before, but when I am in this form, we even share the same voice. Except for your long hair, we could pass as identical twins.”

Maria admitted, “Well, you do look a few years younger than me. But, only a few.”

Garcia kindly responded, “Thank you. Now, please give me a few moments to change back. This shirt was not made for a woman, and it is slightly binding my breasts.”

Roberta and Maria slightly giggled at Garcia's comment, while Hernan remained silent.

Garcia then reached for the hot water. She then leaned over, and poured it over her head, to avoid getting her clothing wet.

The other adults then saw the gender change happen almost instantaneously, which Garcia's body growing a few inches in height, and putting on a little body mass, as he returned to his male form.

Garcia then set the empty glass on the tray, by the other glass. He then used back hands to pick up the hand towel off his neck, as he dried his hair and head, again. When he was finished, he loosely placed the towel back around his neck, to prevent water drops from dripping down his head, to wet his clothing. Next, he patted down his hair, with his hands.

Garcia then leaned back up, and saw back down in his chair.

As Garcia got comfortable, he looked over at Maria, Roberta, and Hernan. He said, with relief in his male voice, “Ah... Much better.”

Maria commented, “That was... Interesting... So, how complete is the change?”

Hernan noted that Garcia body language had suddenly stiffened, as Garcia answered, in an even tone of voice, “All the way.”

Maria inquired further, “Oh... So, you have experience everything?”

Garcia said, in a sober tone of voice, “Yes. And it is not something I feel like talking about.”

Maria quietly replied, “I understand.” She then inquired, in a normal tone of voice, “Still, I have to admit a bit jealous of your looks as a woman. Given you are a few years younger than me. And because of that, I have to ask. How old are you?”

Hernan noticed Garcia’s body language return to normal, as Garcia casually answered, “In a few months, I will be thirty-nine years old.”

Maria questioned, with a bit of surprise, and disbelief in her told of voice, “You are older than I am? Yet, you look younger. Is that tied to your gender ability?”

Garcia calmly answered, “No. And we will talk about my age secrets, later. Though, I am more than willing share such benefits. And it is not some horrible secret. It is just a medical treatment that my friends informed me of.”

Hernan thought, 'Garcia must be talking about the rejuvenation therapy. I am not sure how I feel about such an offer.'

Maria said, “I look forward to it.”

Garcia requested, “No problem. Now, I have a question for you, Maria. What is your maiden name?”

Maria responded, “Flores. Why?”

Garcia answered, “That is very interesting. Because, Maria Flores, is the alias I use for my female side, on my IDs. And when I am in my female form, I pose as my own female cousin.”

Maria said, in a curious tone of voice, “That is interesting...”

Hernan thought, 'That is interesting. Though, not very original. I believe that in the Ranma series, Ranma did the same thing, as Ranko Tendo... Or... Oh, she posed as the Tendo's cousin. Not her own cousin... Or, it is his cousin?... I could see how it could become confusing to have a conversation on the matter.'

Roberta commented, “This is too close to be consequential.”

Hernan pointed out, “Yes. But, we have no way of figuring out the deeper connections.' He mentally added, 'And I honestly don't want to. My life is crazy enough as is.'

Garcia said, “True. We will have to look into it, later.”

Maria mentioned, “Agreed. Also, I find it interesting that your name is Garcia. Because Garcia was the name of my father. And Roberta is the name of Hernan's mother.”

Garcia responded, “Fascinating... Well, Maria, you find it interesting to know that Maria was my mother's name. And Hernan was Roberta's father's name.”

Maria said, “That is interesting.”

Roberta commented, “Yes. Our connection runs deeper than any of us first realized.”

Hernan said, “Let us be thankful those are pleasant connections.”

Roberta replied, “Agreed.”

Maria commented, “Still, we have other concerns. Such as what we plan to do while we are here. We have three young children. And I have found I have to keep eye on them, or they can get into trouble.”

Garcia chuckled a little. He then offered, “While I was already expecting you. I will still need about an hour to working around my schedule, so I can take off from work, this afternoon. But, once I am finished, we will have some lunch here, and then visit, Caracas, with you, my new found family.”

Maria lamented, “That would be good. I do so miss the city. I have not been there in decades. Even if it is a Caracas of another reality.”

Garcia asked, with a slight bit of seriousness, and concern, in his tone of voice, “You haven't been to Caracas in decades?”

Hernan spoke up, as he stated, “Actually, we haven't be to South America. Let alone Venezuela. In several years. Our histories are somewhat different. We met under different circumstances. And ran from the cartels, together. We made our way to an island city in Mexico, where we have lived, since then.”

Maria said, in a soothing tone of voice, “Do not worry. We have had a good life there.”

Garcia stated, “Well, you can visit this city, while you are staying here for the next few days. And from what I understand, it is close to your Caracas. Except the politics here are better. The crime is lower. And the economy is more healthy.”

Roberta cracked a grin, as she said, “We have made some sound investments over the years. And since we learned how the politics of other Earths turned out, before they went bad here. I was able to head off, and made sure that changes where made the way they should. Instead of going wrong. As they have in so many other realities.”

Roberta thought, 'Though, I used reality technology, our vast wealth, and third parties, that had no idea who I was, to make a number of the less savory changes, that needed to be done. But fortunately, I was also able to make several changes in peaceful ways. Also, using third parties. With none of these changes being tied to me, nor the Lovelace name.'

Hernan responded, “Well, you had to invest your wealth somewhere. And I guess investing for a more honest government. Along with a more healthy nation and people, would be a good place to put part of one's wealth. As long as you can reign that government in.”

Roberta chuckled, for a few seconds, at Hernan's comment.

As Roberta lightly laughed, Hernan thought, 'And with you, and your friends, Roberta. You probably did some nighttime assassinations, behind Garcia's back. And you also made sure the right people came to power, and stayed in power. The people that you can control, whom can do their job in a competent manner. That is what I would do in your place.'

'Given the rampant government seizures of wealth, from the plantation owners, of Venezuela, in my home reality. Such assassinations, and bribery, would be the only way to insure the Lovelace family had a future.'

'And given Diego Lovelace, a man that both you and Garcia cared for, was murdered over politics. I have no doubt that after you returned from the fall of Chang's Tower, with your cybernetics and super-soldier serum, that you quietly cleaned house, in this nation.'

'Or, maybe you used third parties that could not be traced back to you. Or, a little of both.'

'Either way, it would have been poetic, considering you have been a maid by professional. And a badass maid, at that.'

'Also, I expect, that when you did this, you made sure that it appeared that each opposing side was at fault for your actions. Just like they did to Diego. With you eventually having the enemy oppositions, that is based in this nation, destroy each other, while keeping the rest of the nation in one piece.'

'Though, as tempting as it would be, to go further, into other nations, would attract too much attention. But, with your new abilities, and your resources, keeping such actions inside a single nation, would not be so risky, for one, such as yourself.'

'This also explains what you have been up to, while Book Three and Book Four happened.'

'Still, I do not know if you included Garcia and Fabiola in your plans and actions, or not. You would want to keep them at arms length from such dark actions. But, after Diego's murder, and that whole Blood Trail mess. Leaving you crippled. I do not see how you could have done so.'

'Though, I am not going to ask about any of this, because it is not my place to do so.'

'And doing so would ruin the wonderful relationship we are building between each other.'

As Roberta calmed down, she said, “Yes. And let us just say, that those of this household now have enough pull with the government, to keep the cartels, and others, completely at bay.” She thought, with amusement, 'Without any of them realizing that it is us that are pulling their strings.'

Hernan replied, “That is good.” He mentally added, 'And it does explain the relaxed composure that Garcia and Roberta have, as they have entertained us. And this may turn out to be a very good trip for everyone involved. At the very least, we get to meet, and get to know each other. And this trip should help with Maria, and my own, homesickness.'

Maria then suddenly realized, as she stated, with slight worry in her tone of voice, “Oh no. The only cash we have are mexican pesos, and U.S. currency. Neither are exactly welcome in this country.”

Roberta turned to Maria, as she calmly said, “Not to worry. We have plenty of money on hand.” She continued, in a happy tone of voice, “And it is a wonderful excuse to go shopping.”

Maria giggled a little bit, at Roberta's response. She then quietly said, “Thank you.”

Roberta replied, “You're welcome.”

Maria commented, “We will bring the kids along, as well. It is not to early to shop for their spring and summer clothing.”

Roberta complimented, “Good idea.”

Hernan looked over at Roberta, as he thought, with amusement, 'Roberta offering to go shopping for clothes, with my wife. I never thought I would hear that. Not that I am worried. Maria, and my kids. They will be safe with her. I can count on one hand, the people that I know of, on this planet, who might be able to take Roberta in a fight. And none of them are on this continent. And what they just said about their political ties, only cements that my family, and I, should be safe, during our visit here.'

'And should the military ever invade Plata Podrido. As Pedro sometimes mentions, that he worries about. Though, I doubt that will happen. But, if it does, after getting to know these two people, I am sure my family could move here, to stay on a more permanent basis, with little trouble.'

Garcia said, “I would have to agree. It would be a good excuse to go visit the city.”

Then, something occurred to Hernan, as he casually stated, “I hope you don't plan on me being pack mule on this trip?”

Roberta answered, “No. But, I can see why you would ask.”

Maria questioned, “And when have I ever made you carry my clothing bags?”

Hernan groaned. He then answered, “A couple of times. But, only a couple of times.”

Garcia commented, with a bit of mirth in his tone of voice, “If she only made you carry her bags a couple of times. Count yourself lucky. She is a keeper.”

Hernan quickly said, “Oh. I agree.”

Maria let out a small giggle at her husband's comment.

Roberta stated, in a mischievous tone of voice, “You are one to talk, Garcia.”

Garcia immediately stiffened slightly, as he went silent.

Maria asked, “What do you mean?”

Roberta commented, “There have a been a few times when I was the one carrying the bags for Garcia.”

Maria and Hernan could not help but laugh a little, for a few seconds.

As they calmed down, Roberta said, “And do not worry. I prefer to carry my own bags. And I am not a big shopper.” She turned to Garcia, as she teased, “In all honesty. Garcia has more feminine clothing for his female form, than I have for my own body.”

Maria and Hernan chuckled a little more, for a few seconds.

Garcia sighed, as he admitted, “That is true. And due to that, I will go as a guy, today.”

As the happily married couple calmed down, again, Hernan though, 'I guess that shopping for clothing for both genders, comes with being a gender bender. ' He commented, “Well, it will be nice to have another man along, in this shopping trip.”

Garcia looked over at Hernan, as he replied, “Thanks.” He thought, 'Even with the gender bending ability, Hernan still considers me a man. That a good sign.'

Maria commented, “There are some clothing stores in Caracas, from my reality, that I miss going to. But, considering this is another reality, and decades later. I do not if those stores still exist here. Or, even if they existed at all, here.”

Garcia looked over at Maria, as he pointed out, “Those shops might still exist in this reality.”

Roberta turned to Maria, as she commented, “If they don't exist. I do know of a few clothing shops that you might enjoy visiting.”

Maria looked at Garcia, and then to Roberta, as she said, “Thanks. I look forward to your recommendations.”

Garcia mentioned, “There are also a few eateries we know of, that you might like. Should we still be in the city, around dinner time.”

Maria replied, “That is nice.”

Hernan thought, 'Roberta is giving my wife lessons on clothing... Well, I will admit my sister is a sharp dresser, with an eye for detail. So, that is no problem. Still, there are to matters to discuss.'

Hernan stated, “While I would looked forward to this trip. Keep in mind that someone is going to have to watch the children. And I do not want to leave them with the other servants of the house. No offense, but we don't know them very well.”

Garcia replied, “None taken. And I would have asked the same question, in your place.”

Hernan responded, “Thank you. Now, since we are taking the children with us. We will have take turns watching them. Or, help to get their clothing.”

Maria said, “We have done that before. It will not be a problem.”

Hernan pointed, “I know. Still, how are we going to get there? I know you don't like to use reality devices to travel short distances. And most cars cannot fit all of us. And we don't have current driver's licenses for here. So, if we took two cars, you two would have to split up to drive us. I don't think you would want to do that.”

Garcia stated, “You would be correct on all counts. Fortunately, I do have a vehicle that can fit all seven of us.”

Hernan commented, “I hope it is not a limo. It would not feel right to ride in one. And it would draw too much attention towards us.”

Maria mentioned, “Also, riding in a limo might leave the wrong impression on our children.”

Garcia thought, 'They have a few points there.' He responded, “I agree. That would attract to much attention. And no, it is not a limo. It is a customize SUV.”

Hernan said, “SUVs are nice vehicles. I have even thought about getting one for our family, when our kids out grow our car.”

Maria commented, “That is not a bad idea. But, I am concerned about some reports that SUVs can tip over easily, when turning at high speed. Still, we will all wear seltbelts, so that should help some.”

Garcia stated, “Not to worry, these SUVs are made to not be top heavy. So, there is less chance of them tipping over on a turn.” He turned to Roberta, as he continued, “Though, Roberta, you believe you tell them about the SUVs we have. Since you were the one that oversaw the customization of both SUVs they have.”

Roberta looked over at Garcia, as she replied, “I would be more than happy, too.' She looked between Maria and Hernan, as she said, “As Garcia pointed out, we have two very nice, large SUVs, that we use them go to the city in. Mainly for grocery shopping. And for supplies.”

“Each SUV is gray colored, and looks nondescript. But, under their outer veneers, they have armor plating. Blast resistant glass. Flat resistant tires. And they comes with all sorts of other bells, and whistles. Though, the armor plating does decrease the mileage. So, I make sure each vehicle has a full tank of gas, before we leave the plantation.”

“We have a few large tanks of gasoline and diesel, located in other areas of the plantation. We have their refilled, by truck, on a regular basis. We mostly use our fuel supply for our farming and mining vehicles. But, we use them, as well.'

Roberta thought, 'Though, if we are cut off. We do have some fuel to fall back on, in emergencies.'

Roberta went onto say, “The driver's side of each SUV is to the left. Each SUV has three rows of seating. Though, the middle and back rows are usually folded down, to allow for more storage space. But, we can raise those rows. With there still be a little room for storage, behind the third row of seats.”

“I will drive, and you, Hernan, will be in the front passenger seat, to my right side.”

Hernan thought, 'That is because the front seats are the most venerable parts of a vehicle. And you are always thinking about Garcia’s welfare, Roberta. Not, that I blame you. I feel the same way for Maria, and I would prefer she, nor any of my children, be in the front seat, during this little trip. So, I am more than happy to be in the front seat, in their place.'

Roberta continued, “In the middle row, Garcia will be behind me, and Maria will be behind Hernan.”

Maria said, “I am fine with that.”

Roberta responded, “Good. And your three children will be in the back row. Because, it is not exactly easy for a full grown adult to get into the back row.”

“Also, there are two small TV screens in the car. One that folds down for the middle row, and one that folds down for the back row. And we have plenty of earphones for everyone. Over a dozen came with each vehicle, and they are in the center consoles of each row. Though, the second and third row consoles fold up, to allow for seating in the center seats.”

“Each of these TVs are hooked to a separate blu-ray players, which also play DVDs and CDs. Along, with the TV system in the SUVs hooked to a satellite TV system. And while it is not that far to the city. If we need something to distract the children, we can use TV. That is if you we cannot find something in our video library that you would approve of them watching.”

Maria complimented, “You have thought this all out. And I would like to look at your video library, after we finish our conversation here. While Garcia is finishing his business for the day.”

Roberta replied, “That will be fine.”

Hernan said, “Yes. That sounds like fun. Still, there is the matter of personal weapons. We did not bring any guns with us.”

Roberta stated, “I also have that covered. After some political wrangling. On the books, under an alias, I am now a licensed bodyguard for Garcia. And I have the permits that allow me to legally carry my pistols with me, without a problem.”

Hernan complimented, “That was good thinking on your part.”

Roberta cracked a grin, as she said, “It is part of being prepared in advance. There are also a pair of loaded M nineteen eleven A one semi-automatic pistols, in holsters, under the front passenger seat of each SUV. And there are extra loaded magazines, and boxes of forty-five caliber ammunition, in each glove box.”

Hernan stated, with happiness and astonishment in his tone of voice, “Well played.”

Roberta happily replied, “Thank you.”

Hernan asked, “Does Fabiola have similar credentials?”

Roberta answered, “Yes. And Garcia has permits for both his forms, to car a firearm, as well.'

Garcia commented, “Though, I prefer not to carry a gun. I can do so, legally. If I desire to.”

Hernan turned to Garcia, as he stated, “I respect your decision.” He thought, 'Using a gun is not for everyone.'

Garcia looked at Hernan., as he replied, “Thank you.”

Maria then realized something. She thought, 'Who is Fabiola?' She looked around the table, as she questioned, in a calm tone of voice, “Who is Fabiola? You have mention her name a few times. So, I was wondering.”

Garcia offered, “We will tell you, later. It will make for good conversation at lunch. Or, in the SUV.”

Maria inquired, “Okay. Now, onto another matter. Garcia, given privacy issues, about your cursed form. What do you want said, if one of my children sees you in your cursed form.”

Garcia said, in a casual tone of voice, “Tell them truth. I don't mind my family knowing. And if they told their friends, who would believe them. Especially, at their age.”

Maria conceded, “That is good point.”

Hernan asked, “I have to wonder. How do you explain your cursed form? Such as due to accidental changes in public?”

Garcia answered, “Fortunately, I am very careful. And due to me looking so very similar between my forms. Barring being slightly shorter, and smaller in my female form, as long as, people do not see the change itself. Or, get a good look at me. I can just rush out, and change back in the men's restroom, without anyone being the wiser.”

Maria inquired, “And if someone does notice?”

Roberta looked over at Maria, as she said, “The smart ones keep quiet... And those that don't... Well, it is best we don't discuss such options, in front of children...”

Maria hesitantly replied, “Okay.” She thought, 'I am starting to realize that Roberta has a dark side, like Hernan. I really do need to watch that Black Lagoon series, in its entirety. Though luckily, those sides of them only come out when they, or their loved ones, are threatened, or harmed. And I feel that is a good trait to have.'

Garcia stated, “Fortunately, we have not yet had to resort to such means. Considering magic, and the like, is still considered fantasy, in this day and age. And given the change is not that drastic, at a distance, it is also hard to notice with a camera. This prevents photograph proof. So, unless I get caught changing while naked, or near naked, I should be fine.”

Maria commented, “I can see what you mean. And given we look so alike. Me being around you, while you are a man, in public, would solidify that you and your female form as two different people.”

Garcia gave Maria a wicked grin, as he said, mischievous tone of voice, “And you even go by the same name as my female alias.”

Maria returned Garcia's wicked smile, with her own, as she teased, “Oh, you are devious.”

Garcia smile became a little wider, as he replied, “Thank you.”

Maria pointed out, “Still, I am not cutting my hair for you.”

Garcia said, “I am not asking you, too. I can always say, when I am a woman, that I decided to wear a wig that day.”

Maria commented, “That would work.”

Just then Hernan noticed Abella walking towards them, with a circular tray that had four glasses, filled with liquid.

Hernan thought, 'Ah, our drinks are finally here. Still, I better say something, to prevent one of us from saying something in front of Abella we don't want her to hear.' He casually stated, “Well, our drinks are here.”

The others immediately went silent, as they turned to look at Abella approaching them.

A few seconds later, Abella came to a stop at the table, at an angle, that allowed for Garcia not to have to turn his head to see her.

Abella took a look over at Garcia, whom had slightly wet hair, and small hand towel loosely draped over his neck. And on the table was another circular tray, with two empty glasses on it.

Abella raised an eyebrow at what she saw, but she did not verbally response. Instead, she set her tray down on the table, near the other tray.

Abella then served the glass of batido to Garcia. The next glass she served was for Roberta, and it was a glass of papelon con limon. The third glass was filled with papelon con limon, and it went to Maria. And the fourth glass, which was filled with lemonade and ice, went to Hernan.

Garcia said, “Thank you, Abella.”

Abella turned to Garcia, as she quietly replied, “You're welcome, Master Lovelace.” She then turned her attention back to the table, as she picked up Roberta's circular tray, with its two empty glasses on it. And she placed the tray, on top of her tray. Fortunately, both trays were the same size, and shape, which allowed the trays to fit together.

Next, Abella picked up both trays. After which, she turned around, and walked away, as she headed for the kitchen area of the home.

As Abella left their sight, they all turned back to look at each other. Though, Maria and Hernan continue to keep an eye on their children, playing about fifty from them.

Maria picked up her glass, took a sip of her drink, and she then set down her glass. She commented, “You clearly have very competent help, Garcia. This papelon con limon is fabulous. I have not had this drink in years. But, it takes me back to the better parts of my youth.”

Garcia replied, “I am glad to hear that, Marie. And you are correct. Those that work for me, know what they are doing.” He then took a drink of his batido, before setting down his glass, onto the table. He thought, 'This batido is as good, as usual.'

Roberta also took a drink from her papelon con limon. She then set down her glass, on the table.

Hernan picked up his glass of iced lemonade. He took a drink, and he liked the way lemonade tasted. He kept his glass in his right hand, as he turned to Garcia. He stated, “This is very good. I can tell you used real lemons. This is not store brand? Is it?”

Garcia answered, “No. All the drinks we were just served, were handmade. That is why Abella took so long. She had to make the drinks, herself.”

Hernan set his glass on the table. He replied, “Interesting.”

Garcia stated, “Yes. We prefer to make, and prepare, most of our food, here. On the plantation. Instead of getting it package, at the grocery store.”

Maria commented, “How, I envy such privileges, and opportunities.”

Garcia said, “Well, you can enjoy our wonderful food, and drinks, during your stay here.”

Maria replied, “I look forward to it.”

Roberta offered, “We also have a wonder selection of alcoholic drinks. We have a marvelous wine cellar. And ours assortments brandies, whiskeys, and tequila, are very nice. And we keep a nice selection of cold beer in the fridge.”

Maria turned to Roberta, as she said, “As a rule, I do not drink. Especially, in front of our children. Though, I do occasionally have a beer in private.”

Hernan turned to Roberta, as he stated, “I am the same way.”

Garcia complimented, “I admire you dedication to being good examples in front of your children.”

Maria and Hernan turned to Garcia, as Maria said, “Thank you.”

Hernan commented, “We appreciate that.”

Maria requested, “Though, we will have to be mindful, so our children do not get in the fridge, and accidentally have some alcohol.”

Roberta commented, “That can be easily solved. We can kindly tell them, that they are not allowed to go into the kitchen, unless escorted by one of us.”

Maria turned Roberta, as she said, “That should work.”

Roberta smiled, as she happily replied, “I thought as much.”

As the three children played, nearby, without incident, the four adults continued their pleasant conversation for another hour.

Though, by then, Garcia had to excuse himself, as he to headed back to his office, to make arrangements to take the afternoon off with his and Roberta's new found family.

After Garcia finished making his arrangement, they all had lunch at his and Roberta's home. They then headed out, in one of the Lovelace armored SUVs, to go shopping in Caracas.

When they reached the capital city, they went shopping, and had a great time. They returned to the plantation home, later that evening.

Maria was pleasantly surprised by Roberta's tastes, in recommendations on clothing. Both for Maria, her children, and even her husband, Hernan.

The next morning, they all spent about an hour, swimming in the courtyard pool. The kids played in the pool, while nearby, the adults talked to each other.

Fortunately, Garcia was able to arrange it so that he could take off, for most of the time, during the days the Pena family were visiting his home. And the rest of their vacation was pleasant and enjoyable for everyone involved.

A few days later, at the end of their trip. They say their goodbyes to Garcia, and the staff. With Garcia promising to visit them soon. Then, with their luggage in hand, they stepped closer to Roberta. With Roberta holding her reality device.

Roberta then thought of the Pena's family reality. With them returning to their living room. With it only being a few hours after they left for the Lovelace home. She then held that thought, as she pressed the red button on her reality device, teleporting herself, and the Pena family, back to their home, at the proper time, place, and reality, as she intended to take them.

(_)

Reality, the Pena family's home reality. Date, a few hours after the Pena family left for the Lovelace home, in the Black Lagoon reality. Place, Chang's office, in the penthouse level of Daiyu Palace Casino. Time, two PM in the afternoon.

Inside in personal office, Chang was seated in his chair, behind his desk. With the door to his office left open, across from him.

Chang had just finished another meeting for the day. As he continued to sort out and catch up on what he had missed, when he, and his two lovers, had gone after Matthew and Pedro, in the multiverse.

Chang thought, 'I believe I now have a handle on most of the unfinished work that I missed for the last week. Now, I just need to do it. But first, I need to meet with one other person. She should be here any second. With my enhanced hearing, I can hear her coming down the hallway, right now.'

Chang then turned his attention to the open doorway in front of him.

A few seconds later, Chang watched a Balalaika walked up to stand at the threshold of the door.

Chang thought, 'Ah, there is one of my business partners. And right on time. I am glad she was able to make this meeting on short notice. Considering, I called her last night. Half an hour after we had returned. To be fair, she wanted to know what as going on. So, she agreed to this appointment, on short notice.'

'And she decided to come alone for two reasons. One, it gives us privacy to talk without worry of someone overhearing. With her clearly wanting to know what I have been up too. And two, we both know the other is not going to try anything. Besides, once we realized that working together was profitable, and less boring than we realized. We stopped the sniping at each other, with insults, and bullets.'

'Still, it seems she is presenting herself a little differently today.'

As both adults looked at each other, Chang noticed a few things that were difference about Balalaika. While her long blond hair was styled the same way as usual. In a ponytail. Instead of wearing her usual red dress and low heeled slippers. She wore a matching dark blue dress, with dark blue heeled slippers. And instead of her finger nails having pink nail polish, her nails had dark blue nail polish, which matched her clothing and flat soled slippers.

Chang thought, 'Now, to properly greet her. With a pleasant surprise.'

Chang stood up from his seat. He then calmly said, in russian, “Hello Balalaika.”

Balalaika complimented, in a calm tone of voice, in russian, “Hello Chang. And your russian is becoming flawless.”

Chang stated, “Thank you. River is an excellent teacher.”

Balalaika replied, “I am sure she is.” She turned to the open door to the office. She looked back at Chang, as she teased, “And I see you still have your open door policy.”

Chang commented, “Doing so, helps. And having an open door to my office offers a more friendly atmosphere, when people come to see me.”

Balalaika said, “I agree. And leave the door open also allows you enhanced hearing to better notice anyone approach from the hallway.”

Chang stated, “That too. And I appreciate that you could come see me on such short notice.”

Balalaika responded, “I have questions for you. And you seem willing to answer those questions.”

Chang inquired, “You are correct. So, how are B, Dmitri, and Alexandra?”

Balalaika answered, “They are all fine. Dmitri and Alexandra are even both starting to walk around, and talk now. So, how is your family?”

Chang responded, “Fine. Now, no offense intended. But, what is with the blue dress? Is today a special occasion that I am not aware of?”

Balalaika casually said, “Not really.” She looked down at her clothing, as she continued, “I wore this old thing to just break the monotony.” She then looked back up at Chang.

Chang replied, “Yes. I know the feeling.”

Balalaika stated, “Yes. You would. And I hope your little jaunt across the multiverse was not an act of foolishness.”

Chang offered, “Quite the contrary. And we will discuss this further, in detail. But please. First. Come sit down.”

Balalaika did not respond, as she casually walked over to stand in front of Chang's desk.

Then, of the two chairs in front of Chang's desk, Balalaika sat down in the chair to Chang's right.

With Balalaika seated, Chang seated himself, back into his own chair, behind his desk.

There was silence between the two adults, at they stared at each other, for a few seconds.

Then, Balalaika lips curled into a smirk.

Chang saw the Balalaika face took on an amused expression. With her blue eyes showing a bit of mirth behind them.

Chang raised an eyebrow, as he calmly asked, “Is there something funny?”

Balalaika shrugged, as she answered, “Unfortunately, for you, yes. I look at you, and I think that if a stranger saw you, they would see you as a man in his prime. They would not know what really goes on behind the doors of your bedroom.”

Chang mentally wondered, 'What are you getting at?'

Chang was feeling curious about Balalaika comments. So, he took the bait, as he pointed out, “Yes. But, neither would they know what went on behind your bedroom doors.”

Balalaika admitted, “Touche. And quite true. But, that being said. I know for a fact that, as a woman, you have been pregnant and given birth more than once.”

Chang calmly inquired, “And how would you know?” He thought, 'I would really like to know how she found that out?'

Balalaika answered, “Chang, you forgot that you gave me high level access to your computers. And while most of your medical records are sealed. I did find an interesting CAT scan of your pelvis, as a man, in the computer memory cache of the CAT scan equipment.”

Chang stated, “I will have to remember to ask River to look into correcting that security flaw.”

Balalaika said, “Of course. Checking for such flaws, was one of the reasons I was looking at your computer files.”

Chang responded, “I will give you the benefit of the doubt on that one. But, what could a picture of my pelvis, as a man, tell you about possible previous pregnancies and birth, in my female form?”

Balalaika cracked a grin, as she answered, in an amused tone of voice, “Quite a lot, actually. When B and I were both pregnant. I reading a lot on the subject of pregnancy and childbirth. On that matter, I was surprised that childbirth was not as painful as some woman make it out to be. After we both gave birth to our children, B told me she felt the same way.”

Chang mentioned, “Not many people are as strong willed, and well versed in the experiences of pain, as you two.” He thought, 'Personally, I found childbirth to be quite painful, but worth it. Though, after the first birth. It got better. River and Lee also stated the same thing.'

Balalaika held up her right hand, by her face. She then used the tips of her right index and middle, to slide down the right side of her face. Along her scars. From top to bottom. As she said, “Very true.”

Balalaika then dropped her right hand back to the right armrest of her chair, as she continued, “And I stumbled upon some interesting facts about human pregnancy. It seems, that during pregnancy, the rubbing of the unborn child on the pelvis, creates ripples on the interior sides of the pelvis. This usually happens when woman had two or more children. And it seems that unlike reproductive organs, this rippling is like scars on a bone. They remind, not matter which gender you are in.”

Chang replied, “Interesting. And the childbirth?”

Balalaika stated, “That one is even more simple to find out. I have seen you nude, in both forms. And you have seen me the same way. And there is no caesarian scar on your lower abdomen. So, you gave birth to those children.”

Chang responded, “Well, you have me there. You are correct on both points. Though, those are personal matters, that I do not wish to discuss. So, is there a point to this? Or, are you just trying to start an argument, for old times sake?”

Balalaika inquired, “As fun as that would be. No. I am just leading up to asking my first question. In a manner you cannot just back down from. That question being. Given how long you have spent as a woman, and what you have experienced as a woman, why do you still prefer to be a man?”

Chang shrugged, as he answered, “Personal preference. Playing on the other side is fun. But, I prefer to be a man. Considering how your two children were conceived. I have always wonder what your thoughts are on the subject?”

Balalaika stated, “Well, like you. I do not talk about my personal life. But, I prefer to be a woman. Also, I did this to show you that there are very few things that you can hide from me. Should I wish to learn such facts about you.”

Chang casually responded, “Yes. We know each other well. By the way, I got in some fresh Cuban cigars, as week ago. I could give you a few boxes, if you want?”

Balalaika stated, “That is tempting. But, with my two small children, B and I both agreed that we needed to set good examples for them. We only occasionally drink. And I rarely smoke anymore. And when I do, I do so away from our children. And I do not want such quality cigars to go to waste.”

Chang thought, 'That is good to hear. Because, if she is trying to set a good example for her children, she will be less bloodthirsty.' He requested, “I can sympathize. So, let us get to the heart of the matter of this meeting.”

Balalaika stated, “Yes. Let us do that. Why did you leave this reality for so long? Without letting us know, ahead of time? Your security team were not the only ones putting out fires, in your absence.”

Chang said, “I can appreciate that. I hope there were not too many problems that you had to handle.”

Balalaika replied, “There were not. Which is why I am presently being so civil.”

Chang said, “Well, we did not plan to be gone that long. We were only planning to be gone a few minutes, for those here. But, it didn't work out that way.”

Balalaika commented, “Sometimes that happens. But, I still wish to know the reason you left, without notice.”

Chang stated, “The reason we did not leave notice was that we did not plan to be gone for long. If this happens again, I will be sure to make arrangements, beforehand.”

Balalaika replied, “That will be fine.”

Chang said, “And as for the actual reason we left. That is tied to the problems that happened last week. And well, I believe it started when you, and a few of your friends, decided to pay Pedro and Matthew an unscheduled visit to Pedro's home.”

Balalaika lips curled into a slight grin, as she responded, with a bit of intrigue in her tone of voice, “Really?... I heard they disappeared, as well. But, I was not sure who disappeared first. Nor, the sequence of events that took place. Nor, what happened to those two fools. So, what did happen to them?”

Chang stated, “You rattled their cages a bit too much. They stole one of my reality devices, and then left this reality.”

Balalaika questioned, “But, what would it matter? After all, they are just two fools.”

Chang pointed out, “That is where you are... Incorrect. I have found that you tend to underestimate individuals that you are unable to do a background check on. That is a failing on your part.”

Balalaika conceded, “Perhaps. Though, those two leaving is a small matter. They have never shown any courage against us.”

Chang explained, “You are looking at things from the wrong angle. Matthew may not know us. But, after being part of that chase through Mars Dome, he knows better than to go against us.”

“On the other hand, Pedro is just as much as a badass, as we were, during our time on Roanapur. You should talk to Melanie sometime about Pedro. She has some interesting stories to tell about him. And she has every reason to tell the truth.”

Balalaika said, “Then, I will have to talk to her about Pedro. Still, he seems so spineless towards us.”

Chang stated, “The only reason he doesn't show any real backbone towards us, is because he knows our reputations, and he knows, that even with his entire police force, he cannot take all of us in a fight. So, that was why he was doing subtle things against us, from the shadows.”

Balalaika commented, with slight disgust in his tone of voice, “I have never cared for using bureaucracy to a tool to slow someone down. I find it distasteful.”

Chang thought, 'Ah. But, Stalin did loved to use that tactic. Though, I am not going to mention that to you.'

Chang said, “Sometimes, one has to use the tools which are available. And besides dealing with us. Pedro was one of the main people keeping this city together. For years, he has been walking a tightrope with his superiors, the people in this town, the crooks in this town, and us. And that night you visited him was just the final straw.”

Balalaika asked, “And why did Matthew go with Pedro?”

Chang stated, “They are very good friend. They were thrown together, into this mess. And they had to make do with each others moral support. Matthew is also a fairly good thief. He was the one that snuck into one of the casino technology rooms, stole a reality device, and then walked out the casino, without getting caught.”

Balalaika questioned, “So, the lawyer has more skills, than just legal advice?”

Chang's eyes became unfocused for just a second, as Chang mentally recalled some of what Matthew had told him of his past. Chang eyes then went back into focus, as he said, “Yes. He seems to have several skills that he kept from us.”

Balalaika asked, “From the look in your eyes, I can tell there is another reason Matthew left with Pedro?”

Chang admitted, “Yes. The other reason Matthew went with Pedro was that we have not be as respectful towards him, as we should have.”

Balalaika guested, “And here I thought the reason you left, to go after them, might be because Matthew and Pedro knew too much? With you wanting to make sure they didn't talk?”

Chang responded, “As much as I would like to agree with you, that was not the reason we went after them. They know to keep their mouths shut. Also, River and Lee are good friends with both of them. I would catch hell from both my lovers, if I did anything to Matthew, or Pedro.”

Balalaika inquired, “But, what are Pedro and Matthew to you? And you to them?”

Chang answered, “We have an understanding. And while I may have taken Matthew for granted. I did pay him well. And the benefits he got for the job were very generous for what I asked of him.”

Balalaika commented, “Yes. You tend to prefer to pay for your loyalty.”

Chang stated, “It works. And most of those that work for me also have come to respect me. Anyway, River and Lee convinced me to bring Matthew and Pedro back. To prevent them from getting into trouble. And because this city would fall apart, without Pedro. And those two also convinced me, that when they do return, we that we should help them.”

Balalaika snorted, as she said, “That will be a challenge.”

Chang replied, “I don't think it will be so difficult.”

Balalaika asked, “We will see. So, where is Fabiola? I know she has disappeared. But, I also know she has not returned to the Lovelace home. Has she gone on this little fools errand, as well?”

Chang answered, “Yes. We met her while we were searching for Matthew and Pedro. Actually, when we were finally able to confront those two, together, she was there with Matthew and Pedro.” He thought, 'I think I will leave out that we also met Leigharch and Matt Bluestone, when we found those three. Because, I do not want to tell anyone about them, unless they become a problem. Which I doubt they will.'

Balalaika commented, “She is almost as good a tracker as her teacher.”

Chang agreed, “That she is.”

Balalaika questioned, “So, why did she come after you? Did someone send her, to come looking for you five?”

Chang answered, “Actually, it was Annie whom sent Fabiola to go find the two of them, and us. She is good friends with Matthew and Fabiola.”

Balalaika said, “Well, I will not fault those two for their friends. I take is she stated that she wished to remain with them?”

Chang thought, 'Good guess.' He stated, “Yes. Fabiola told me that she would keep them out of trouble, and protect them. Until, they decided to return here. And that she will make sure they return in a timely fashion, for us.”

Balalaika asked, “And what if they return as old men?”

Chang replied, “With their permission, we would use the vat process on them.” He thought, 'And Leigharch, and Matt too. If they want it.'

Balalaika inquired, with a bit of mirth in her tone of voice, “And how will Pedro explain the gender change to her local police force, and her superiors.”

Chang stated, “Should we reach that point. We will cross that bridge when we get to it. Still, I doubt that Fabiola will let those two stay away for very long. A month. Maybe two, at most.”

Balalaika responded, “I believe you are correct. In that Fabiola will return in a few months. But, how do you know those two will eventually return to this city?”

Chang answered, “Because we all have long since learned that running from one's problems solves nothing. They know that. And they just need some time to blow off some steam.”

Balalaika inquired, “True. Running solves nothing. And I can guess that you wish to talk to me about their possible return?”

Chang requested, “Yes. I want you to go easier on them. Especially, Pedro.” He thought, 'Balalaika. I know that you detest being told what to do. But, this had to be said.'

Balalaika firmly stated, “If they stay out of our way, there will be no problems.”

Chang thought, 'Good. Translated, that means she is open to the idea of going easier on them. Now, to handle this diplomatically. She is not the only one that knows how to push someones buttons. And we both do really know each other well.'

Chang responded, “Well, let's be honest. We are doing this for the fun, challenge, and profit. Not because we have to. We could go to a number of wonderfully places in the multiverse, where we would live a life of luxury, without a care in the world. But, people like us need to be challenged. We need goals. We go crazy if we don't have such objectives.”

Balalaika said, “Unfortunately, I will have to agree with you on this matter.”

Chang mentally reflected, 'I thought as much.'

Chang went onto say, “So, running out of town the only men keeping the city together is bad for business. And even you have to admit that.”

Balalaika conceded, “You may have a point there. Still, what do you suggest we do about Pedro? I have no problems with Matthew. He is your subordinate. But, I find Pedro difficult to handle. He hates bribery and extortion. And intimidation towards him has clearly backfired. And given his friends. Killing him, or threatening his loved ones, will likely backfire on us. So, the usual methods of dealing with law enforcement will not work with him.”

Chang stated, “While the usual methods do not work with Pedro. He is open to negotiation. And due to this, and our history, I want to meet you half way. If there is a disagreement between you two. I will mediate between you and Pedro. And we will find a solution that all of us can agree on.”

Balalaika commented, with a bit of nostalgia in her tone of voice, “Just like old times.”

Change responded, “No. Because there will be no insults. And Pedro is a very flexible guy. He will relent, if given a proper reason to do so. After years of watching him work. I have learned that his main goal is not so much to stop crime, but to keep the city from falling into chaos. Actually, he has encouraged some forms of vice crime, in this city, as a way to keep the town's economy running.”

“But, he realizes that he is walking a tightrope on this. Between enough crime to keep everyone here employed, and too much crime, causing either a collapse of the city. Or, his superiors sending in the military, to deal with us all.”

Balalaika mentioned, “Yes. We tapped his phone lines. Until he realized what we were doing.”

Chang though, 'Yes. Pedro is quick on the uptake. He knows our tactics. If he believed you were after him. He would immediately make changes to insure his communication channels were not tapped. Or, no longer tapped. Which they would likely be. He would then use the resources available to him, to eliminate the wiretapping, and try to prevent future wire tapping.'

Chang continued his thoughts, with concern, 'Also, Pedro conversations with his superiors, do trouble me. They don't like him, nor this city. And he does not like them. With the only reason he still has his job is because they cannot find anyone else to take the job.'

Chang commented, “I have also heard recordings of those conversations, as well. And I do not think his superiors are bluffing. Still, I believe once you understand all this, about Pedro. And realize how to work with him. You will have no further problems with him.”

There was silence between the two of them, as Balalaika thought over Chang's proposition.

Balalaika then relented, as she said, “Alright. I will except your offer.”

Chang thought, 'Good. I will call Revy later, to ask her to lay off on Matthew and Pedro. But, that will not be a problem. Now, to ask you some questions.'

Chang inquired, “Good. Is there anything else you would like to discuss. Anything that has happened while I have been gone?”

Balalaika grinned, as she answered, with a bit of mischievousness in her tone of voice, “Actually, a few interesting developments have occurred in your absence.”

Chang asked, “Good, or bad, developments?”

Balalaika coyly responded, “It depends on how you view having someone from here handing Revy her own ass, in a fist fight?”

Chang thought, 'Interesting.' He questioned, with a little curiosity in his tone of voice, “Is this person still breathing?”

Balalaika said, “Yes. He was able to make a good impression with us.”

Chang requested, in an eager tone of voice, “That must have been some impression. Please, tell me more.”

Balalaika continued to grin, as she stated, “Because you asked so nicely. I will. I was even there at the time, when the fight happened.”

Chang asked, “So, how did it start?”

Balalaika said, “It started at the Rats Nest, with Revy and Eda having a drinking contest.”

Chang stated, “With the super-soldier serum, a drinking contest would be very difficult to win.”

Balalaika responded, “I agree. I just don't think those two want to admit that to themselves. Still, their rivalry has sadly has devolved into a bladder contest.”

Chang sighed, as he said, “I don't want to know the details of their little contest. So, what happened next? How did this fight start?”

Balalaika stated, “It started when Revy lost her little contest to Eda. And well... Revy being Revy, got upset, and she decides to shot off her guns... Which, to be fair, has become a rarity for her. A few buildings away, one of her bullets hit the wife of a family, whom had gone out for dinner that night. Fortunately, it was a grazing, with the wound only mildly injuring her right shoulder. And she is fine. Still, this towards his family, and the injury to his wife, greatly upset the wife's husband.”

“After the man likely checked to make sure his wife, and their three young children, were otherwise uninjured, the man walked out of the restaurant he was in, and he walked into the Rats Nest bar.”

“When he entered our wonderful, little bar, he showed exactly what he was capable of. Including, disarming Revy, literally throwing her out of the bar, and then just beating the hell out of her. As this fight went on, none of Revy's punches effected him... For the most part.”

Chang asked, “How one sided was it?”

Balalaika answered, “Very one sided. Luckily, Melanie knew the family. And she retrieved the husband's wife. And with his wife's help, we were able to calm him down, before he seriously harmed Revy. And afterward, Revy promised, that from now on, she will not bring her guns with her, when she goes drinking.”

Chang stated, “That must have been some fight. It is rare for someone to get the upper hand on Revy. Though, given who we all are. I ask, again. Why is this man still breathing?”

Balalaika responded, “Well, we started it, by not doing something about Revy bringing her guns to our parties. And we didn't feel like harming him, after we learned who this man turned out to be.”

Chang questioned, “And who is he?”

Balalaika replied, “Hernan Pena.”

Chang inquired, “The mechanic you took your Zil too? The one with the full black beard?”

Balalaika said, “The very same. He did fine work on my car. And it is rare to find someone who could do such a good job. I may hire him for other automotive jobs.”

Chang responded, “Yes. It is. Kaylee is another good example of such skills. Still, I don't know why that would stop you from having some type of reprisal?”

Balalaika stated, “Well, it turns out that Hernan's beard hides a very interesting secret under it. We saw a picture of him without his beard. A wedding photo of him, and his wife, Maria Pena. And barring the hair color differences, he looks like Roberta's identical twin brother. It turns out that Hernan is Roberta's gender reversed counterpart for this reality.”

Balalaika saw Chang's eyes go wide for a seconds, before he forced himself to calm down.

Balalaika could not fully hold in her desire to burst out laughing. Though, the only response towards the surprised look on Chang's face, as her smiling, and letting out a small giggle, for a few seconds.

Chang said, “This town is just full of surprises. So, was Roberta there, as well?

Balalaika replied, “Yes. She helped calm Hernan down.”

Chang inquired, “How did she react to the news?”

Balalaika answered, “She laughed. She gets a kick out of it. And she and Hernan seem to treat each other like brother and sister.”

Chang questioned, “That's good. So, when his family is not in danger, how is Hernan's demeanor?”

Balalaika answered, “From the look in his eyes, he is calm on the outside, firm on the inside. Like Roberta is. But, you can tell that he is always thinking about what is going on. Also, from the way Hernan acted when B and I brought my car to him. He knew what was going on. But, he knew better than to mention it.”

Chang said, “It is clear the people here are not idiots. Many of them have likely put many of the pieces together, on who we are, and where we are from. But, they knew to stay quiet about such information.”

Balalaika agreed, “That is my assessment, as well.”

Chang requested, “I would like to meet Hernan.”

Balalaika stated, “Not today. Roberta took him, and his family, back home, to our reality, to visit Garcia, at the Lovelace home.”

Chang thought, 'Annie likely knew this when I talked to her. But, I will let her not telling me, slide. After all, it was not her place to discuss such matters with others.'

Chang asked, “Well, I hope they have a good time. Anything else interesting about the Pena family?”

Balalaika answered, “Yes. The wife, Maria, looks like Garcia's female form. Though, I do not know enough about her to get an assessment of her personality. Also, they have three small children. Two boys, and a girl.”

Chang commented, “I guess that makes sense. When will they be back?”

Balalaika replied, “Likely later today.”

Chang said, “Then, I will arranging a meeting with Hernan. Given he and his family will likely be a good mood, from their vacation, I do not think it will be a problem. And you know I can handle temperamental people.”

Balalaika responded, “Yes. You can. I believe that would likely be fine. Do you need his business phone number? I do not have his home number.”

Chang said, “I will have someone look up the number.”

Balalaika inquired, “Is there anything else you wish to discuss?”

Chang said, “Just how are things coming on your end?”

Balalaika answered, “Events are preceding in motion, as expected. Within six months, Hotel Moscow will have its own headquarters downtown.”

Chang inquired, “Given the cheap beach property on this island, I am surprised you did not put your new headquarters by the sand?”

Balalaika commented, “That would be too open for my tastes.”

Chang replied, “I can see your point.”

Balalaika mentioned, “Besides, we have the Maria Zeleska in the water.”

Chang questioned, “I guess that is as close to the water as one can get. So, is your new headquarters going to be like the old place in Roanapur?”

Balalaika coyly responded, “Somewhat. But, larger. With more floors, and floorspace on each level. With parts of the interior being laid out for apartment space for all our women.”

Chang commented, “Yea. From what I remember. Of the few visits I made there. Your place back in Roanapur was quite cramped, back then. And your ship is just as bad.

Balalaika replied, “True.”

Chang asked, “So, what defenses will that place have?”

Balalaika answered, “I am not going to talk about weapons and weapon placements. But, I will say the walls will be armor plated. The windows will be blast resistant. A concrete fence. And we will have a working energy field, surrounding the building, that we can turn on at a moments notice. Also, we have the same style of alien energy generators that the Lagoon family uses on their island. Only, ours are designed to be used on an industrial scale.”

Chang mentioned, “That is good thinking. I have been thinking of doing something similar for the casino. But, would draw a lot of power. And while I have similar generators, as what you have. And they work fine for the casino. They don't produce enough power for much else.”

Balalaika offered, “I have a couple of spare generators that would work for your defenses. If you want them?”

Chang answered, “Yes. I would like them. And thank you. We will discuss the details, later.”

Balalaika said, “That will be fine. And it seems that events are working out for all of us.”

Chang inquired, “I hope you are right. Still, did anything else happen during that last week, that was interesting.”

Balalaika coyly replied, “A few things.”

Chang questioned, “Such as?”

Balalaika answered, “I heard from Revy, that Lotton finally found a gunsmith to works on those old, antique pistols she likes to use. It was Melanie who knew the gunsmith, and that she has been keeping secrets from us.”

Chang commented, “Melanie probably knows quite a few secrets about this town. And having guns is not legal in this country. So, it was likely a secret on her part. And she can not be trusted with our secrets, if she can not be trusted with the secrets of others.”

Balalaika flatly replied, “I understand that.”

Chang casually responded, “Besides, she is Bao's girlfriend, and a nice person. So, there is every reasons to let this slide.”

Balalaika said, “I agree. As long as her secrets do not endanger us.”

Chang complimented, “As I would expect from a professional, such as yourself.”

Chang saw Balalaika crack a grin as his compliment towards her.

Chang inquired, “So, how good is this gunsmith?”

Balalaika answered, “From what Revy told me. The gunsmith in question did a good job on Lotton's pistols.”

Chang asked, “Nice. So, who is this gunsmith?”

Balalaika stated, “I heard from Revy, whom talked to Lotton, that the man goes by the name of, Burt Gummer. Though, the name rings a bell. I cannot place him.”

Chang chuckled a little, as he thought, 'Could he be... Of course, he is.' He said, “He is likely the same Burt that worked on our weapons, back in Roanapur.”

Balalaika replied, with interest in her tone of voice, “Really?”

Chang said, “Yes. And it gets better. He was the one we lost in Nevada, all those years ago.”

Balalaika commented, “Interesting... Now that you mentioned it. I do remember Mister Gummer's name coming up a couple of times in Lee's stories.”

Chang said, “Yes. But, with such a long story, it is easy to miss minor details.”

Balalaika stated, “Exactly. Given the amount of trouble he gave us in Nevada. And the artistic skills he displayed Roanapur. What is his backstory? I have a feeling that there is quite a tale behind his abilities.”

Chang responded, “And you would be correct. First, Burt loves guns. That is why he is so good with using guns and working on guns. And his story is one that is quite intriguing.”

Balalaika requested, with a bit of eagerness in her tone of voice, “Do tell.”

Chang grinned, as he answered, “Certainly. In back in Roanapur, I had my suspicions about him. He even used his real name. But, I thought that Burt from Tremors would never have been crazy enough to sell weapons to us. I guess I was wrong.”

Balalaika commented, “This would not be the first time you were wrong on such matters.”

Chang conceded, in an even tone of voice, “True.” He then grinned, as he continued, in a casual tone of voice, “Also, you might find it humorous to learn that he was just about as bummed out over the fail of the Soviet Union, as you were. His wife left him on the grounds that he could not live without the threat of nuclear annihilation.”

Balalaika burst out laughing, for several seconds.

Chang remained silent, as he let his friend laugh.

As Balalaika slowly calmed down, she requested, in an eager tone of voice, “What else? Is he from a fictional series, himself?”

Chang answered, “Yes. And Burt is likely the most badass monster hunter in existence. He is from a movie and TV series, called, Tremors. First two movies are worth a watch. I will loan you my copies, later today.”

Balalaika said, “I look forward to it. And we will have to visit Burt sometime. He always did well in the jobs we paid him for. And he was always respectful towards us.”

Chang asked, “I fully agree with your assessment. Do you have the address for Burt's gunshop?”

Balalaika replied, “No. But, I can find out his location.”

Chang said, “No need. I will just ask Lotton for Burt's address, his phone number, and the times he is open for business.”

Balalaika commented, “It figures that you would still talk to Lotton.”

Chang stated, “Of course. Lotton has remained a good friend. And I will arrange for us to visit Burt, at his shop, in a week, or so.”

Balalaika responded, with a but in intrigue in her tone of voice, “I look forward to it.”

Chang asked, in a relaxed tone of voice, “So, is there anything else you wish to discuss with me.”

Balalaika replied, “Well... Not for right now. What about, yourself?”

Chang mused out loud, “Hmm... You know. Besides the lesbianism. And conflicting organizations. I always wondered why we never slept together, at least once? And don't blame Lee for you preferring woman. The signs were all there, long before she had her hands in on the situation. It was just that Lee recognized those signs. Such as your butch lesbianism. No offense.”

Balalaika shrugged, as she conceded, “None taken. You have a point there. And the answer is real simple. Both of us have dominating personalities that will not yield to the other for very long.” She then cracked a grin, as she mischievously continued, “And we both have the same taste in women. We both like badasses. Especially, redheads.” She thought, 'Though, I do care for B.'

Chang returned Balalaika smile, as he said, with excitement in his tone of voice, “I knew it. I knew it. I knew it.”

Chang thought, 'So, way back in Tokyo, the likely reason you were telling Revy that she did belong in Rock's world, was that you didn't want give up your chance for her. Not bad. And I don't blame you for that. Still, it is interesting. Though, since we are having such a playful conversation, I will not mention this, because it might ruin the mood we have going between each other.'

Balalaika giggled a little, from Chang's response. She then said, “Don't tell me that you were not at least a bit attracted to her. It wasn't Revy's... Shining personality that was the determining factor for you deciding to teach her.”

Chang admitted, “I have have to agree with you, there. But, she had a lot of potential that I did not want to go to waste.”

Balalaika responded, “True. And for a while, I thought Revy preferred women... Well, at least more than she does. It was why I was interested in her.”

Chang stated, “You are not the only one that thought that.”

Chang thought, 'That, combined with her saving your life, when you first showed up in Roanapur, years ago. With you shooting me four times, and I shot you three times. With you going over the pier. Then, the Lagoon crew showed up, fished you out of the water, and patched you up. With Revy giving you some of her blood, in a transfusion, to keep you going until they could find you a doctor.'

'After our battle that night, I wasn't in that good a shape, either. And it took us both a few months to fully recover from the wounds we gave each other. Though, after that battle, I think our egos took a bit of a beating, as well. Considering, for all intents and purposes, it was draw.'

Balalaika lamented, as she said, “Still, at that time, if I had known about her past, I would have handled things differently toward her.” She then continued, in a dispassionate tone of voice, “But, then Rock showed up. And he unknowingly prevented me from forming any such relationships with her.”

Chang responded, “True. And though Dutch and Benny helped to keep her from getting worse. It was Rock whom was able to help her through some things.”

Balalaika commented, “Yes. Rock helped her become an overall better person.”

Chang stated, “True. And I have never been jealous of Rock's relationship with Revy. I mean, while we both liked Revy for body, and her sense of up front honesty. She is the living embodiment of the term, fiery redhead. And given her temper and reputation, I honestly believe that Rock didn't realize that anyone else, whom knew Revy, was attracted to her.”

Balalaika commented, “You are correct on both points. And it was my fault for not making my move sooner. Still, thanks to Rock's help. Revy is more pleasant to be around.”

Chang thought, 'I am glad you are mature enough to admit that you should have acted sooner. And if that had happened, I would have been okay with the relationship.'

Chang agreed, “Yes. Rock influence on her has made is much easier to be her friend.”

Balalaika said, “And that is something we need to be grateful towards Rock for.”

Chang replied, “Oh, I am. I would have hated it if she had lost her temper in a way that I was forced to take her down.”

Balalaika stated, “I feel the same way.” She then offered, with a bit of mirth in her tone of voice, “And, back to a more interesting proposal. While I should have also made this offer, sooner. Since you can turn into a woman, I would be more than willing to show you, and your two lovers, a good time. I am sure B would enjoy the company, in our bedroom, as well.”

Chang asked, “And what about your kids?”

Balalaika said, “Surprisingly, a number of my subordinates were willing, and very good, babysitters.”

Chang stated, “Careful now. A few of your subordinates might decide to become mothers, as well.”

Balalaika mentioned, “Interesting, you should mention that. Years ago, I had a wonderful discussion with Roberta, on this very subject.. She told me about how FARC use to handle their female soldiers. With the woman balancing being a soldier, with being a mother. And the practices they used were fairly reasonable... At least, until things went bad hill with FARC... But, I see no reason I cannot apply similar practices with Hotel Moscow.”

Chang said, “Leave to you, to always have a plan for every occasion.” He thought, 'It is also a good long term way to maintain the ranks.'

Balalaika smiled, as she playfully inquired, “You are one to talk. Though, what are you feelings in dealing with employees that have outside relationships? And the possibility of children?”

Chang stated, “As long as their actions do not effect their jobs, nor this organization, I could care less. My staff knows I will be more than willing to help them with any wedding they wish to have, free of charge.”

Balalaika commented, “That wedding you hosted, for Zoe and Wash, was nice. And that is generous of you.”

Chang said, “Thank you. Also, I will make allowances for when they are pregnant, up to a year after the birth of their children, for them to make arrangements on the care of their children, while they return to work.”

Balalaika responded, “I feel that same way when it comes to such issues. Still, we will cross those bridge we get to them. B and I, decided we would not be hypocrites on the matter. We will just deal with the events, as they come along... So, what about my offer?” She licked her lips, in a seductive manner, as she teased, “B and I won't be too rough with you three.”

Chang declined, as he said, in a calm tone of voice, “Thanks. But, no thanks. If half of what I heard is true. From River and Lee, concerning yours and B's discipline lesson on Lee. Back on Lagoon Island. I believe we have differing tastes in the bedroom.”

Balalaika shrugged, as she casually requested, “To each her own. And let me know if you change your mind, Chang.”

Chang replied, “I will, Balalaika.”

Balalaika commented, “Also, I must say. These meetings are so much nicer than the ones we had in Roanapur. But, that is likely because here we do not have to deal with riff raff that don't know when to sit down and shut up.”

Chang said, “Yes. It does make things easier, when one does not have to deal with idiots, whom are put in positions of authority.”

Balalaika giggled a little. She then replied, “So true. And have a pleasant day, Chang. I will be in touch.”

Chang stated, “I looked forward to your phone call. We have each others cellphone number, so that should not be a problem. And I hope you have a nice day, as well.”

Balalaika replied, “Thank you.” She then stood up from her chair. She turned to her right, and walked between the two chairs, in front of Chang's desk, and towards the open door, leading to the hallway.

When Balalaika reached the threshold of the doorway, she turned around, to look at Chang, whom was looking back her.

Balalaika smiled, as she said, “While I would have loathed to admit it, years ago. I can now say that we make a pretty good team.”

Chang returned Balalaika smile, as he stated, “I fully agree.”

Balalaika then turned around, and exited the office, and into the hallway, as she headed for the back elevators. And to her car, which was parked in the casino garage.

With Balalaika gone, Chang leaned back in his chair, as he allowed his body to relax.

Chang thought, 'Well, that turned out to be a delightful meeting, filled with pleasant surprises. I will have to arrange for Balalaika and I, to schedule a reunion with Burt. But, that is for, later.'

'Right now, I need to contact Hernan. If he really is as good as Balalaika made him out to be, I need to talk with him, as soon as possible.'

'It is likely that Roberta will return then Pena family back home, sometime this afternoon. Though, they will all have likely spent a few days, to a week, with Garcia.'

'I truly hope they had a good time. Because, that vacation will help put Hernan in a good mood, for when I meet with him. And I have been to Garcia's home. It is a nice place to spent a few days at.'

'Though, to get in touch with them, will be simple enough. I will just call their home, at the top of every hour. They will eventually answer my phone. Then, I will invite Hernan to come speak with me this afternoon. I would invite Maria, as well. But then, they would likely have to bring their children along. And that would likely cause problems.'

'Besides, I can meet with the entire family, later. Though, for now, I need to find out his home phone number and address.'

Chang then pulled out his cellphone and started to dial the extension to his security room, downstairs.

(_)

At that moment, elsewhere on the top floor of Daiyu Palace Casino, River and Lee had just come in from the outside, heated, pool, through the terrace and into their bedroom, by way of the sliding glass door, that lead from the terrace to the bedroom.

The two lovers had spent much of the morning in the heated pool, before they took a break for a few hours. But, because they wanted to swim some more, among other things they skipped, lunch, and swam some more, in the heated pool, for part of the afternoon.

Presently, they were both wearing one piece swimsuits, because of, while the pool was heated, when they got out, the cool wind, on the terrace, bit a little against their wet skin.

They also each had a cloth towel in their hands. With them drying themselves as they walk into the bedroom.

River had opened the sliding glass door, and walked through it first. With Lee walking behind her.

After Lee passed the threshold of the doorway, she turned around and slid the sliding glass door closed. But, she kept it unlock. After which, she turned around to face River.

River walked over to her left, by a set selves mounted to the wall, were where a set of six metal bars. The bars were set on the wall, to the right of the sliding glass door, when facing the door from the inside. The bars were placed their to allow for the residents of the apartment to hang their towels and swimsuit, after coming into the room, drying off, from being in the outside heated pool, or hot tub.

River then came to a stop by the set of metal bars, as she turned to look at Lee.

Both women dropped their towels on the floor, as they took off their one piece swimsuits.

With both women nude, Lee then walked over by River, with both women setting their swimsuits on the same metal bar, to dry off.

Both women were only a few feet away from each other, as they picked up their towels, and started to further dry off their hair and bodies.

River and Lee began dry off by, wiping down their long hair. With River's hair being red. And Lee's hair being black.

While they continued toweling down, in the nude, River shivered a little, as she commented, “Brr. It is a bit cold outside, while wet. But, it was worth it for a swim in that warm pool.”

Lee continued to drying off her hair, as she responded, “I agree. And you know what?... Well, since you are a telepath, you already know what I am going to say.”

River casually replied, “Yes. But, go ahead and say it. I enjoy casual, light conversation.”

Lee stated, “Well, I find it so much easier to dry water off as a woman, instead of a man. Due to woman having less body hair, and finer, small hairs.”

River commented, “I thought, with your female body being a cursed form, that except for the hair on your head, and the pubic hair between your legs, you have no hair on your body? With you skin being very smooth.”

Lee stated, in a considerate tone of voice, “That is correct. But, I didn't want to make you jealous.”

River had finally finished drying off her hair. She started toweling down her body, as she said, “I appreciate you consideration for my feelings.”

Lee commented, “You're welcome. On another matter. I am still concerned with Pedro and Matthew being out there, in the multiverse.”

River responded, “Well, Fabiola is with them. And she will keep them out of trouble. Or, at the very least, get them out of trouble. I mean how much trouble could they get themselves into?”

(_)

Elsewhere, in the multiverse, on a six lane highway, on Earth, at twilight. On the right side of the highway, in the center lane, of the three lanes, on that side of the road, was a mid-level, four door car, speeding down the road, with the windows all rolled down.

In the left driver's seat, was Leigharch, laughing his ass off, as he floored the gas pedal, in the high speed chase they were in.

To Leigharch's right, in the front passengers seat was Pedro. Behind Pedro, was Fabiola, and behind Leigharch was Matt Bluestone.

Fabiola had one of her pistol in her left hand, Pedro out his semi-automatic pistol, and Matt had his semi-automatic drawn. All three of the armed adults were firing behind them, outside their windows of the cars, at the twenty-one police cars, and three police helicopters, chasing them.

As this went on, in the center of the back seat, Matthew silently sat as he leaned forward. He cupped his face in his hands, as he slowly shook his head in disappointment.

(_)

Back in Lee's reality, in the bedroom of the penthouse of Daiyu's Place Casino, River had just rhetorically asked Lee how much trouble their friends could get into, while traveling the multiverse?

Lee strongly stated, at an even tone of voice, “Given our lives, you should know better than to say things like that. With Leigharch with them. I would say they could get into a lot of trouble.”

River pointed out, “True. On both counts. But, Matt Bluestone with them. And Fabiola and Matt have a lot of experience with fighting strange creatures. And being in strange situations.”

River thought, 'Though, I did sense from Pedro that they were running from someone. But, I didn't have time to find out who. Still, if it was important enough, they know they can return here for help. Lee and I would certainly make sure they got the helped the needed.'

'Unfortunately, I cannot tell Lee and Chang this, because they might not have left, if they knew this was the case. Still, I can hope that Fabiola and Matt, can keep them out of trouble. Fabiola, I know can handle herself, in most situations. And from watching the Gargoyles series, Matt seems to have a good head on his shoulders. With Pedro and Matthew, not far behind Matt, in that department.'

Lee had finished drying her long black hair, and she was now drying off her body. While she did so, she commented, “Still, I wonder how Matt Bluestone ended up running with those four? I mean, Leigharch, I can understand. Pedro and Matthew likely ended up in Black Lagoon's past, after the series, but before my stories. And they picked them up. I am glad that I didn't mention Leigharch.

River had just finished her hair, as well. And she began to dry off her body, as she agreed, “Yes. It does make for a more interesting situation with friends.”

Lee stated, “I know. Though, I thought Pedro and Matthew has more sense than to go to the Gargoyles reality. There is a reason Chang and I, both refused to have anything to do with the people of that reality.”

River commented, “I get the impression that the reason that Matt ended up with the rest of the group was likely an accident, on all their parts.”

Lee replied, “That is very likely.”

River asked, “So, would you like to get a late lunch?”

Lee answered, “Sure. I was thinking of that cuban restaurant downtown.”

River complimented, “Nice choice. After we get dried off, we will change clothes, and take the pink Cadillac, to that restaurant.”

Lee inquired, “My thoughts exactly. So, should we invite Chang? Or, has he already eaten?”

River stated, “Due to our mistake of returning a little over a week later. Instead, of a few minutes later. Chang has a lot of paperwork, and meetings to catch up on. And I sensed that he had lunch an hour ago.”

Lee asked, “Okay. Do you think we could help him with his work, in some way?”

River answered, “If he needs our help. He will ask. Otherwise, we just need to stay out of his way.”

Lee replied, “Okay.” By then, Lee had finished drying off. She looked over at River, as she asked, “So, you finished drying off.”

River stopped drying off, as she held her towel in her right hand. She looked over at Lee, as she answered, “Yes. I see that you are done, as well?”

Lee said, “Yea. Let's get some warm clothing on, and get some lunch.”

River replied, “Good idea.”

Each woman hung their towel on one of the bars. So, both towels could dry by the swimsuits.

River and Lee then headed into the walk in closet that they shared. So, they could change into some more winter theme, and warmer clothing.

Once they were dressed, they made a quick trip to the master bathroom of their apartment. Next, they headed downstairs, to the garage, where they would retrieve their pink Cadillac. And then, they went to go get something to eat at a local cuban restaurant they sometimes frequented.

(_)

In another part of the town of Plata Podrido, around fifteen minutes after River and Lee left for lunch, at two fifteen PM, inside the living room of the Pena home, Roberta and the Pena family had teleported back to their home, after spending three full days, and a full morning, at the Lovelace home.

It was a wonderful vacation for Roberta, and Garcia, and the five members of the Pena family. But sadly, their vacation was over. And they had to move on with their lives.

Roberta had her reality device in her right hand, as each of the Pena family members were holding a suitcase, full of their clothing. Maria also had a travel bag hung on her right shoulder, by its strap.

The six individuals were looking at each other, Ramon childishly commented, in spanish, “That was great.”

Antonio calmly agreed, in spanish, “Yes. It was fun... And at least my homework for the weekend is all done”

Carmela happily mentioned, in spanish, “The food and shopping were great.”

Ramon said, “And the pool was so much fun.”

Carmela stated, “And I got a chance to try on my new swimsuit, that we got over there.”

Antonio shrugged, as he commented, “It was okay.”

Maria turned to her three children, as she stated, in spanish, “Yes. Children. It was a fun trip. Now, go unpack.”

The three siblings, turned around, and headed into the hallway, that lead to their three separate bedrooms.

With her kids disappearing into another part of her home, Maria turned to Roberta, as she kindly thanked the purple haired woman, “I must say. That was a wonderful vacation. I am glad you invited us, Roberta.”

Roberta pocketed her reality device, as she turned to Maria. She happily said, in spanish, “You're welcome. And Garcia and I both, thoroughly enjoy you, and your family's company. I could have not asked for a most pleasant experience.”

Maria replied, “I agree. And I do hope that Garcia is able to come visit us, in a few days. Like he said he would.”

Roberta kindly responded, “Don't worry. Garcia has always been a man of his word.” She thought, 'Even when he was a child.'

Hernan looked at both Maria, and Roberta, as he stated, in spanish, in a calm, though pleasant tone of voice, “Yes. It was a very good experience for all us of. And I feel that we all gain much from getting to know each other.”

Roberta turned to Hernan, as she agreed, “Yes. We did.”

Hernan then looked at the clock on the wall above the TV. The clock stated it was two seventeen PM. He turned to look at Roberta, as he asked, “So, we are back on the same day?”

Roberta responded, “Yes. And not to worry. I have plenty of experience with reality travel. This is the same day we left.”

Hernan replied, “Great. I just wanted to make sure.”

Roberta said, “No problem. I would ask the same question, in your place.”

Hernan commented, “I realize that.”

Maria offered, “Yes. This is good to hear. This means that we have all of Sunday, together, to enjoy, as well. And I was wondering. After treating us so well in your home. It would be rude for us not to offer you a nice home cooked dinner. So, please stay for the afternoon, and join us for supper, tonight.”

Roberta said, “I would be happy, too.”

Maria happily replied, “Good.”

Roberta inquired, “Also, you have my number for my suite, at the Devil's Hotel?”

Maria responded, “Of course. It is written down on a piece of paper, in my pocket.”

Roberta offered, “Well, if anyone in your family needs to talk to me, about anything, I am more than willing to listen.”

Maria calmly stated, “I have no doubt about that. We will only be a few minutes. So, sit down, and watch some TV, as we take care of unpacking our belongings. We were are all finished. I plan to have our family play a board game, or too.

Roberta kindly replied, “I look forward to it.”

Maria and Hernan then turned around, and started walking into the hallway, that lead to both their bedroom, their children's three bedrooms, and the master bathroom of the home.

As Roberta watched Maria and Hernan disappear into the hallway, she thought, 'It is going to be so much fun to be around this family. They are such nice people to be around. And it gives me hope for myself, Garcia, and Fabiola, for our futures.'

'Though, I am not planning on getting pregnant anytime soon. Fabiola still has the zest of youth, and she clearly has no plans to be a mother, right now, either. And even without his responsibilities, I would loath to request Garcia to go through such an experience.'

'But, those worries are for later. For now, I need to patiently wait for them to get unpacked, and come back here, so we can have some more fun.'

Roberta then walked around the coffee table, to sit down in the couch, across from the turned off TV, as she patiently waiting for the Pena family to finish their tasks.

(_)

Around forty minutes later, at three PM, inside the living room, the Pena family, among with Roberta, sat around the coffee table, as they were in the middle of playing a simple board game.

On the reclining chair closest to the kitchen, sat Antonio. To his right, on the part of the couch that was nearest to Antonio, was his mother, Maria. In the middle of the couch was Hernan. On the other side of Hernan, on the couch, was Roberta. On the reclining chair to Roberta's left, sat Carmela. And Ramon was sitting on the floor, across the coffee table,

While, it was a short board game, and they were nearly finished, with the children were having fun playing the game, while the adults were enjoying the children having fun.

Suddenly, the wireless phone started to ring, on its base, on top of the table, by an electric lamp, that was between Maria and Antonio.

Maria picked up the phone, pressed the talk button, and held it to her right ear. She said into it, in spanish, “Hello?”

A few seconds later, Maria then spoke english, which caught everyone's attention. They all stopped playing the board game, as they looked over at Maria. Maria inquired, in english, “Who is this?”

Beside Maria, Hernan saw Maria turn to face him.

Maria handled the phone to Hernan, as she said, in spanish, “Hernan. It is for you.”

Hernan took the phone, and placed it to his left ear. He stated, in english, “Hello.”

On the other end of the line, a male voice asked, in english, “Is this Hernan Pena?”

Hernan replied, “Yes.”

The man stated, “My name is, Chang. You may have heard of me.”

Hernan calmly said, “I have. What is this about?”

Chang requested, “I wish to speak with you. In the next twenty to thirty minutes, if possible. In my office, at my casino.”

Hernan thought, with annoyance, 'Damn it. And it was such a lovely day. Chang is to dangerous a person to say, no, to. But...' He requested, “As long as I can bring someone with me. I will be more than happy to do so.”

Chang responded, “That will be fine. I am at the casino. My office is on the penthouse level. Do you know where the casino is?”

Hernan replied, “Yes.”

Chang stated, “Good. Then, when you arrive there, walk inside the front entrance. Next, keep going straight, to the front elevator bay. When you reach the elevator bay, let the guards there know who you are. They have already been informed to expect your arrival.”

Hernan thought, with concern, 'The man already knew I was going to say, yes. From what I know of Chang. That is par for course for him. Still, he put guards at his elevator. I wonder what is up with that?... Chances are it is just probably for show.'

Hernan stated, “I will do so.”

Chang replied, “I will see you then.” He then hung up.

Hernan handed Maria the phone. With his wife putting the phone back on it's base.

Maria turned back to Hernan, as she asked, in spanish, “Who was that?”

Hernan looked at Roberta, then back to Maria. He answered, in spanish, “It was Chang. And he wants to meet me. Right now.”

Roberta frowned, in response to what Hernan said.

Maria questioned, “Who is Chang?”

Roberta over to Maria, as she answered, for Hernan, “Chang is the owner of the large casino on the south end of the city. He is a very dangerous man. But, he knows not to cross me.”

Hernan stated, “And he wants to see me in twenty to thirty minutes. So, we don't really go time to talk about this.” He turned to Roberta, as he requested, “But, I was hoping that Roberta would coming along. If she wants too.”

Roberta turned to Hernan, as she said, “I would love too.” She mentally reflects, 'If for any other reason than to bring Chang's ego down a notch.'

Maria stated, “Given Roberta will be with you, I am sure you will be alright. I will watch the kids, and start dinner, in an hour. So please, try not to be long.”

Hernan replied, “I won't.” He thought, 'I will try to get my business done with Chang as quickly as possible.'

Hernan then looked around the room, at their children, whom were looking back at him, with concern looks on their faces and in their eyes.

Hernan thought, 'Even they can tell something is wrong.' He calmly said, “Children, I will be back in a little while. Try not give you mother a hard time.”

Roberta offered, “We will take my car.”

Hernan replied, “Good. Because, I am not in the mood to drive.”

Hernan stood up, with Roberta also getting up a second later. Roberta then turned to her left, as she walked around the coffee table. Hernan followed right behind her.

They soon made it to the front door, and from their, they reached Roberta's car, which was parked on the street, by the Pena home.

Roberta then drove Hernan to Daiyu Palace Casino.

(_)

Twenty five minutes later, Roberta and Hernan made it to the casino parking lot. After Roberta parked the car, they headed inside the front entrance of the caisno. They then made their way passed the front of the casino, through the busy gaming floor, and to the guarded, front elevator bay.

The two well dressed, chinese, female guards immediately recognized Roberta, and the two women quickly allowed both Roberta and Hernan to use the expressed elevator.

Once Roberta and Hernan were on the penthouse level, Roberta lead Hernan through the hallways of the penthouse, to Chang's office.

When Roberta and Hernan reached the open door to Chang's office, Roberta walked in first, with Hernan following inside, right behind her.

The two adults soon came to a stop, in Chang's office. The two adults stood side by side, with Roberta to Hernan's right, as they saw Chang, in his usual black suit, sitting in his chair, behind his desk.

Chang looked back at them, as he raised an eyebrow, upon seeing Roberta. He calmly stated, in english, “Well, hello Roberta and Mister Pena.”

Chang though, 'And right on time. And on short notice. To boot. Not bad. Not bad at all. And I should have seen this coming. Of all people, Hernan would have most likely want to bring Roberta here. And this proves what Balalaika said. He knows who we are. And Roberta and Garcia has likely told him and his wife, Maria, some more about me, and our friends.'

'Still, I have a few tricks up my sleeve. Such, as I know spanish. But, I am speaking in english, because I do not want you both to know that I speak spanish. That way, you two may slip up, and say something in spanish, that I can use. With you to falsely believing that I don't know spanish.'

'The only reason I didn't use this trick on Balalaika. And I let her know I knew russian was that it would be counterproductive for her to think she could not trust me, on such a minor issue.'

Hernan replied, in english, “Hernan is fine, Chang.”

Chang responded, “Alright, Hernan. And it figures the person you said you wished to bring would turn out to be, Roberta.”

Roberta calmly said, in english, “Hello to you too, Chang.”

Hernan cracked a grin, as he casually asked, “If you could bring anyone you wanted to this meeting, to offer their support for you, who would it be?”

Chang admitted, “Her.”

Hernan maintained his smile, as he stated, “My point exactly. Besides, I trust my sister.”

Roberta could not help but crack a grin as Hernan and Chang's compliments of her.

Chang commented, “I guess saying you are siblings would be the least confusing way to explain why you two look so similar. And depending on how you look at it the situation. There is some truth in your blood relation claims.”

Neither Hernan, nor Roberta, took Chang's bait. Instead, Roberta flatly asked, “So, why do you want to speak to Hernan?”

Chang answered, “I just got back in town, and I found out who, Hernan, here is. And that he beat Revy in a fight. I wanted to meet him, myself.”

Hernan replied, “Well, I am here.”

Chang requested, “Yes. You are. Now, please sit down. So, we can continue this conversation, with some class.”

Roberta and Hernan did not respond, as they just walked over to the two chairs in in front of Chang's desk.

Roberta then saw in the chair to Chang's left side. And Hernan sat in the chair to Chang's right side.

While Roberta and Hernan got comfortable in their chairs, Chang mentioned, “By the way. River, Lee, and I, ran into Fabiola.”

Roberta and Hernan looked up at Chang, as Roberta casually asked, “So, how is she?”

Chang answered, “Good. She decided to stay with Matthew and Pedro, for a while. She promised to return soon. At least for us.” He mentally added, 'I won't mention Leigharch, nor Matt Bluestone, since there would be no point in doing so. Since neither of these two people personally know those two men.'

Roberta stated, “Then, everything should work out for them.”

Chang responded, “I believe that will be the case.” He turned his attention to Hernan, as he continued, “Now, let's talk about you. My first question is. How much do you know about us?”

Hernan calmly answered, “I have seen the Black Lagoon series, and read Lee's stories. And I have discussions with Roberta on the matter. So, I have fair idea of how dangerous you are.” He thought, 'I will leave out that Maria and Garcia were also in on some of those discussions.'

Chang commented, “And yet you still are friends with Roberta?”

Hernan stated, “I am probably the only one in the whole multiverse whom could understand her.”

Chang thought about his experiences in Santo Domingo, as he coyly said, “Maybe not. But, you are on a very short list. When is comes to that. I heard that you, and your family visited Garcia in his home. I hope it was a pleasant visit.”

Hernan responded, in a low, dangerous tone of voice, “I don't know how you found out about that...”

Roberta thought, 'Oh no...” She quickly spoke up, “I believe I was at fault about that. I talked to Aeryn and Violin about it, at the Rats Nest, a few nights ago, local time. It is possible that one of my other friends over heard me.”

Hernan turned to Roberta, as he said, in a calm tone of voice, “Mistakes happen.” He looked back over at Chang, as he warned, “Still, if you think threatening me, or my love ones, with the information you have on us, is a good idea. I am hear to tell you that it is not.”

Chang responded, “I am not threatening you. I am just stating what I know. Do you honestly think I would risk getting on Roberta bad side. And I hear that you can likely can be as bad as her. I don't think I could survive a fight with both of you.”

Roberta conceded, “Chang has a point, there.”

Hernan forced himself to calm down, as he replied, “Okay. And yes, it was a pleasant visit.”

Chang inquired, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Good. Now, moving on. Do you know, Lee?

Hernan answered, “No. But, Pedro and Melanie are good friends of mine.”

Chang mentioned, “Of course. I believe Melanie may have mentioned you, once or twice.”

Hernan conceded, “That is possible. I have a bit of a reputation.”

Chang plainly asked, “What happened?”

Hernan stated, “Since you will eventually find out. I will tell you. Years ago, some cartel members track me to this city. They shot my wife. She fortunately recover. But, Pedro and I then took out the cartel members that were here. And Pedro's brother, Paciano, convinced the cartel not to send any other troops after me.”

“Still, that was pretty much my own personal Blood Trail. If Pedro was not there to reign me in. Or, if my family had been further harmed, or even killed. It would have been likely far worse for those I was after.”

“But, it seems that all it takes is a single bloody rampage, and one never lives it down.”

Roberta commented, in a sympathetic tone of voice, “You are not alone on that.”

Chang agreed, “Yes. That seems to be the case.”

Hernan questioned, “So, what do you truly want?”

Chang said, “I want to offer you a job?”

Hernan flatly replied, “You're kidding?”

Chang calmly stated, “No. It would be foolish not to offer someone with the skills similar to the Bloodhound here, a job. Roberta has already turned me down. But, you have not. I will make it worth your while.”

Hernan answered, “No. For several reasons. No First, like Roberta here, I really don't like the more violent aspects of my personality.”

Roberta spoke up, “He is correct.”

Hernan went onto say, “And we may both be good at fighting and killing. But, we prefer to try to move beyond our past actions. And don't fool yourselves. I was in FARC. Roberta and I compared notes. We both believe that I am just as good as her, when I was in my prime.”

“We fought the same types of enemies, in the same types of mud. And while I didn't have a nickname, like the Bloodhound here. I am likely just as good at killing, as she is.”

“My fight with Revy proofed the skills that I had. And I was not going full out. And I am passed my prime.

“I am happily married to a wonderful woman named Maria. And yes, she is Garcia's counterpart. Still, I would do nothing questionable, that would risk breaking her heart.”

“Along with that, we are the parents of three children. And I have to be a good role model them. Besides, my wife is cooking dinner in an hour. And I do not want to miss her good cooking.”

Chang stated, “I can appreciate that. And you are right, family comes first. Though, I do not want you to feel that you have wasted you time here. So, be aware that the heated, employee pool, and the employee gym, downstairs, in the back, on the first floor, are open to you and your family. At anytime, for free. Just like Roberta here, and her friends.”

Hernan replied, “I will consider it. But for now, I need return home.”

Chang responded, “Fair enough. If you decide you wish to hear my offer. Just call me. Roberta has my number. Also, if you decide to bring your family to the casino, we will do a meet and greet between your family, and the security staff, so they know that you and your family are clear to use employee pool and gym, without a problem. And also, have a safe trip, and a pleasant evening.”

Hernan and Roberta did not reply, as they both silently stood up from their chairs. They then turned around, and headed out of the room. Roberta took point, with Hernan following right behind her.

(_)

As Chang watched Roberta and Hernan walk out of his office, and into the hallway, he thought, 'Just like Roberta. Direct and to the point. Silent, unless they are spoken to. They really are a lot alike, in a several ways. Still, offering Hernan a job was worth asking.'

'Yet, like Roberta. He clearly cares for his loved ones. Which is a very good thing. I have always admired Roberta for the loyalty and concern she gave to her loved ones.'

'And with Roberta around the Pena family, being with them should mellow her out. Which means even less of a chance of her coming after Lee.'

'So, this outcome may have been beneficial to everyone, after all.'

'And in the future, there is always Hernan children, and any children that Roberta might have. All I have to do is have patience. And that is something I have plenty of.'

Chang then went back to business, on catching up with work, from the previous week he, and his two lovers, had accidentally missed.

(_)

A few minutes later, Hernan and Roberta soon reached parking lot, where Roberta had left her car. They got into the car, and Roberta drove them back to the Pena home.

When the two adults reached the Pena home, they spent the rest of the afternoon having a pleasant time with the rest of the Pena family. Roberta then stayed for a wonderful meal with the Pena family.

Maria had fixed a tasty meal. And they all had a pleasant conversation during their meal.

A few hours later, when it was time for the Pena children to go to bed, Roberta said her goodbyes. Though, she promised to come by to visit again, the next morning. With Maria and Hernan, saying she was welcome in their home, anytime.

Roberta then exited the Pena home, got into her car, and headed to the Devil's Hotel, and to her suite, where she could get some rest, for the night.

To be continued.

Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 6: “The Mexican, The Lawyer, And The Mechanic.”

Volume 2: “The Villains.”

Chapter 02: “Pirates and Robbers.”

By Paul Cousins.

Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.

(_)

Reality, Pedro and Lee's home reality. Date, it was Monday, and two days after Chang met with Balalaika in Chang penthouse office, after he had returned from his hunt for Pedro and Matthew. Place, the guest area, of the lobby, in a motel, in middle of the island city if De La Plata Podrido. Time, early morning, just after sunrise.

It was just after sunrise, in a partly cloudy name, with the air still cold, and the wind having a bite to it. Though, the day already showed promise of warming some, when compared to the previous night's low temperature.

Inside the eating area of the lobby, to a medium level motel, in the middle of the city of Plata Prodrido, the guests there were having a simple breakfast that was provided, as a courtesy, from the motel the customers were staying at.

The table by the back wall of the room of the building, there were a small continental style, breakfast set up.

On the table were an assortment of pastries, a selection of small cereal boxes. Slices of bread on a plate. With a pop-up electric toaster by the plate. A butter tray, with a block of butter, and a butter knife on it. An assortment whole fruits, in two large fruit baskets. There were pitchers of ice water, orange juice, apple juice, milk. By the pitchers of liquid, there was a hot pot of coffer, on a hot plate. And a small kettle of cream for the coffee.

Laid out in front of the foot and drinks, were porcelain bowls, plates, glasses, and coffee mugs. There were also an assortment of metal utensils, and paper napkins, on left corner of the table. And in the far right end of the table, where the table backed against a side wall, there was a small microwave that the customers could us.

Across from the back wall, from the table where the food and drinks were located, was a three sets of large windows that look out across the parking lot, and to the other side of the street.

Between the back wall, and the windows, were nine larger round tables, which set in three rows in length, and three rows in width, in a grid pattern

Each table has six armless, wooden chairs, with cushioned bottoms and cushioned backs.

Given it was a weekday, and the time of day, there were on four tables being used, by ten people, with an employee occasionally checking on the, to make sure the snack bar was full.

At a table, near the where the food was provided, sat two fair skin men. The two men were sitting across from each other, at the table they were at.

Two fair skin men. One of the men had a light complexion, while the other had a slightly dark skin tone due to tanning his skin. And both men were in great physical shape.

Both men were intentionally dress in nondescript clothing, which was pants, shirt, belt, and shoes.

While the two men ate their breakfast, they were discussing their plans on what they were going to do next.

The man with the tanned skin said, in a flat tone of voice, “Well, it is finally coming up. We are almost broke, Tony. Not that I am complaining. That last big job we pulled. Which I must say was a flawless work of art. Went to the good cause of getting your memory fixed.”

Tony inquired, “True, Herman. So, what do you want to do about it?”

Herman suggested, “That depends. We could always go home?

Tony casually responded, “I kind of like it out here. We don't have to worry about spies, or so-called do-gooders, coming after us. And if the heat for us gets to be too much, we just head to the next place we would like to go.”

Herman said, “That is true. And these seems to be an endless number of places we can go. Still, we need cash, or in this case gold, to pay for this lifestyle.”

Tony suggested, “So, why don't we just rob a bank?”

Herman casually commented, “Too cliche. We have both done that to death.”

Tony let out a small laugh. He then stated, “That is so true. Though, I heard this city has a casino. We could always steal from them.”

Herman said, “That could work. And the technology these non-superpowered realities use, are nowhere near as complicated as starktech. It would be a cakewalk.”

Tony commented, in a happy tone of voice, “I am already forming the plan in my mind.”

Herman pointed out, “So am I. But we need to do this low key. And we need to decide what to steal.”

Tony responded, “If we are going to go low key. Let us go all the way. We should just walk into their vault, steal what we want. And then walk right, through the front doors. Nobody would expect someone to do that one a Monday morning.”

Herman smiled, as he said, “You are right about that. And let's keep it simple. We still some of their gold and leave. Cash and jewels are to impractical to turn over for a profit. Given, we don't know any fencers out in this part of existence.”

Tony stated, “That is a good point. But, you are one of the best safecrackers out there. So, getting into the vault will be a breeze.”

Herman agreed, “That is true. And you are an expect computer hacker.”

Tony said, “Yes. I am. I will hack their computers to accept our fake IDs. Then, we will use our holoprojectors to walk all the way to the vaults. With the proper orders in their computers, to allow those on duty to allow us into their vaults, and walk out with the gold.”

Herman stated, “That could work. Still. We need an exit plan. In case we are caught, or walking out the front doors don't work.”

Tony responded, “No problem. I still have some explosives let from the last heist we pull. We can use those, and our car to get away.”

Herman replied, “Good. They are wonderful for demolition, but they will not hurt anyone nearby.”

Tony said, “Okay. That will be our, Plan B, for escape. Like the escape we did on that bank job in Zurich. A few realities away.”

Herman commented, “We wouldn't have had to escape that way, if I had known they did periodic thermo-scans.”

Tony replied, “Yea. But, we still got away with the loot.”

Herman stated, “Yes. We did. And we do make a great team.”

Tony agreed, “Yes. That guy, Bob, was right about that.”

Herman suggested, “I agree. Let us finish our breakfast. Head back to our rooms. Finalize our plans. Get changed into our working clothes. Head out to do the job. Get what we need. And then leave this reality behind us.”

Tony agreed, “Good idea. I will wear a long coat I have, over my professional clothing, we when check out. Given the weather, the clerk will not think anything of it.”

Herman replied, “As long as you are not wearing your mask, that should be fine.” He thought, 'And given that in realities like this, your mask, and my mask are far more well known than our actual faces. So, it is better to just go unmasked, for the most part.'

Tony said, “My thoughts, exactly.”

The two men then when back to eating the rest of their breakfast.

(_)

A few tables away from Herman and Tony, nearly the windows, sat George Benedict. George had his back to Tony and Herman, as he looked out at the window, in front of him.

As George ate his breakfast, he pondered what he was going to do next, in dealing with the job he was hired to do.

Among other things, George was dressed in a green short sleeved turtle neck shirt, light brown pants, with brown leather belt, black tennis shoes, and over his shirt was a black cloth jacket.

George took a sip of his coffee, from his mug. He then set down his mug, on the table, by his plate of food.

George looked out the window, at the parking lot, and street, in front of him. He saw a couple of cars drive by, as he thought, 'While this is not the best place I have stayed at. For the money I am paying, it is okay. The rooms, towels, and sheets, were clean. The bed and pillows are comfortable. I have hot running water for the shower and faucet. The toilet flushes fine. And the proper amenities are provided. For visit, where I am downplaying things. This is not bad.'

'And my little reconnaissance of the island, yesterday, was both good and bad, in a few ways. The good news is that everyone bought that I was just a tourist. It probably helped that I didn't have my camera with me. And I now know where everything is at. Also, the police are clearly not interested in newcomers, as long as they behave. That works wonderfully for me.'

'Still, the bad news is that the locals seemed a little cagey on some of the very vague questions I asked. It was next to impossible to get any information on the Devil's Hotel, and the Daiyu Palace Casino.'

'The only real information I have on the hotel was that the employees are happy there, and it is a wonderful place to visit.'

'And the information on the casino was even more sparse. All I know, was that the casino used to be a hotel, that was bought out, and renovated it into a casino, a few years ago.'

'Though, I always learned that both places have camera systems. With the casino also having a top notch security team.'

'The rest is hearsay and rumors. But interesting, hearsay and rumors.'

'Like this city itself, I cannot find any real records on either the Devil's Hotel, or Daiyu Palace Casino. I am not starting to realize why I was hired to look into this mystery. Because this puzzle just keeps becoming large, as I dig for more information.'

'Information, such as the rumors are that a group of foreign women moved into the hotel, a few years go. And that these women are top notch badasses that have taken out large groups of armed men, without breaking a sweat.'

'I don't know whether to be turned on, or terrified by these rumors.'

'And the casino rumors are even more fascinating. The casino was bought by a foreigner, gold. And the casino was renovated and opened in record time, of around a single month. If that is true, that would take quite a bit of money, some serious work, to accomplish.'

'Those that work in the casino employees are all foreigners. And unlike the hotel, I can confirm that none of the locals work there. Most of those employees are asian women. And none of the locals know anything about the pasts of either groups of foreigners, from the hotel, nor casino.'

'In addition, the locals stated that these two groups of foreigners are connected, but the locals I spoke with said they could not give me any details.'

'Still, I will take what I can get. As long as I do not attract unwanted attention, from my questions and actions, I will be fine. And attracting attention is something I need to avoid at all costs, while doing the job. But, in this line of work, unwanted attention can get me killed, very quickly.'

'Though, I did have check into this model, under my real name. Because, I could not get the proper paperwork for an alias, in the short amount of time I had. Fortunately, all my paperwork and permits, are in order, to stay here, in this country, under my real name.'

'But, I even if I get into trouble, it is a very small risk I will be traced back to this hotel.'

'Though, back on the topic of my job.'

'Along with this, a number of locals warned me that if I was asking questions, that I should not only stay away from the Devil's Hotel, and Daiyu Palace Casino, but also, a bar in town, named the Rats Nest, and an american style restaurant, known as the Last Resort Diner.'

'The locals mentioned the Rats Nest bar is regularly frequent that bar by some of the foreigners in question. Mostly, the women from the hotel...'

'Well, I didn't come here to drink. Experience has taught me that going to a bar, in a foreign town, is the fastest way to get in trouble. So, I will avoid the Rats Nest bar.'

'And the locals told me that the diner was connected to these foreigners in someway. But, they would not give me details. Since I am not paid to look into the diner, I will just avoid that place, as well.'

'After learning all this, I now understand the best, and safest, approach I need to take for my job. When it comes to the hotel and casino, I guess it is just going to be a stakeout style investigation.'

'I will take the car I rented, and I will spend time in the parking lot across the streets from both the Devil's Hotel main entrance. Then later, I will head to the parking lot across the street from the casino.'

'I will use my camera, with its telescopic lenses, to take photos of some of the more stranger people coming and going, from the front

'But first, I am going to have to wait for some auto stores to open. So, I can buy some windshield sun shades. I will put them around, on the interior of the windows of my car, to create a sniper blind, so no one can see me into my car.'

'I will also cut a small hole in both the front and back windshield sun shades. So, when I come to these parking lots, I can park at a different angle to these buildings, to decrease the chance of somebody becoming suspicious of my car.'

'And as an added safety measure, I will use some of my equipment, to attached my camera, at a fixed point inside my car, away from the windows. So, I can take these pictures of the entrances, to prevent myself from become tired at holding my camera.'

'Also, by anchoring my camera inside my car, and away from a window, but still angling the lenses to see out the holes, doing so will help prevent me from having to press my camera lenses against the door a window, to take my photographs, and risk my camera creating light reflections off the my lenses, to the outside, which might tip off someone by the entrances, that I am looking at them from across the street.'

'Fortunately, I have done these types of stakeouts a few times before, without a problem. So, I do not think I need to worry doing them, here.'

'And for right now, all I need to focus on is finishing my breakfast, and cup of coffee, while I enjoy the view to outside. As I wait for one of the auto shops in town to open, later this morning, so I can get what I need to begin my stakeouts.'

George then went back to eating his breakfast, and sipping his coffee, as he looked out of the window, towards the open world that awaited him, later that day.

(_)

A few hours later, the vendors of a food market in De La Plata Podrido were opening their booths for the day.

The food market was on a street, located on the northeastern part of the town, near the beach. The street was closed off to traffic, with both locals and tourists shopping there for food, and other ideas.

Just as the food stalls around them had opened up for the day, two figures appeared out of nowhere, in the middle of the closed off street, between the rows of vendors.

Due to the vendors being busy still setting up things, no one noticed the two people just appearing out of nowhere.

One of the figures was an old, but physically fit man. The man had tanned, leathery skin, due to age, and a lifetime of spending his days in the sun. The man had white hair that hung loosely, down to his shoulder blades.

The man wore a light black short-sleeved button up shirt, black leather gloves, darker leather pants, black leather boots, leather jacket and a black leather newsboy cap. The jacket was left open, and there was a large jolly roger pirate symbol in white, on the patch on the back of the black leather jacket.

His face was hidden by his sunglasses, and full, white beard, which went down to almost the bottom of his neck. And while his beard and hair were long, both were groomed, and nearly trimmed. And his mustache, the part of the beard around the top of sides of his mouth, were trimmed back.

Around the man's waist was a weapon belt. On his left hip was a scabbard, with a sheathed cutlass, which had an ornate hilt on it. On his right hip was a holster was a Colt MK IV series eighty model semi-automatic pistol. The pistol was modified to have adjustable sights, ivory pearl grips, and the outer steel had been blued, to give it a black finish. The pistol was based on the M nineteen eleven A one semi-automatic pistol. The pistol fired forty-five ACP rounds.

The man had a bullet loaded in the chamber, with the hammer cocked back, but the hammer safety was left on, Also, the pistol had a fully loaded updated magazine in it, which held up to eight bullets, instead of the standard seven bullets.

And on the left side of his weapons belt, behind his scabbard, he had an ammo holder that held two fully loaded ammo magazines for his pistol.

In his right hand, the man had what looked like a fleshy animal organ with wires, and trinkets, set into the organ. Though, the organ was not smelling, nor bloody. A such, holding the organ did not stain the man's black leather gloves. The man quickly stuffed the organ into his right side, outer, jacket pocket.

The other person, whom stood be the man, to his left, was a young, slender woman, with her head and body hidden by a red robe, and hood. She wore a light long sleeved brown blouse, brown pants, and black slippers.

As the two adults looked around, the woman sarcastically commented, in english, “You bring me to the most interesting of places.”

The man commented, in english, “Now Red, there is no need to complain. We will soon both find the people we are looking for.”

The man then pulled out an old compass, from and interior pocket of his coat.

The compass was inside an ornate wooden box, with metal trimming. The box also had a wooden top. The man opened the top of the box.

As the man looked into the box, what was inside the box was a compass. Though, as the man looked at the needle on the compass, the needle moved, and did not point north.

The woman noticed this, as she casually asked, “Do you have a heading?”

The man did not look at the woman, as he closed the compass, and he put it away in the pocket he had previously had it in.

The man said, “I believe so. And the first person we seek is this way. But first...”

Next, the man turned, and walked up to an apple vender, whose care was standing beside the man, to his right. With the women following behind him.

As the man and woman came to a stop in front of the cart, the vender look up at the man. The man then pulled out a coin, and toss it to the vender.

The vender caught the coin, and looked at it. The vender quickly realized what type of coin it was. He looked up at the man, as he said, in spanish, “Take all the apples you want.”

The man took one apple. He then turned, and walked down the street, as he started to eat the piece of fruit, in his right hand.

The woman reached out, from under her cloak, with her right hand, to pick up another apple, for herself.

The vender saw the woman's right arm and hand, was slender, thought the skin also had an orange complexion.

Given what the vendor had just been given, he did not saw a word, as he pocketed his coin.

The woman then turned, and follow the man. She began to eat her apple, while they continued walking down the street.

(_)

Two hours later, it was late morning. As the old man and the mysterious woman walked into the lobby of the Devil's Hotel and Resort.

As they entered the lobby, the music in the room change, as the speaker on the walls started to play the song, Ignition, by TobyMac.

(_)

At the moment, inside the restaurant and bar of the Devil's Hotel, Revy and most of her friends, were having an early lunch.

Besides Revy, and her friends, there were no other customers there, due to breakfast buffet being closed an an hour ago, and lunch rush not starting for at least another hour.

Those that were there were Revy, Rock, Dutch, Benny, Janet, Molly, Sarah, Kristina, Rebecca, Yukio, Aeryn, Violin, Roberta, Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru.

The reason that Yurika, Mikoto, Nodoka. Nor, the four toddler children. Shenhua's daughter Wenqian, Lotton's son Thomas, Sawyer's daughter Ivy. Nor, Violin and Aeryn's daughter Gilina. Were there, was that the three sisters had been given permission by the toddlers parents, to take them to a nearby playground, and they would be back, around noon.

The other adults trusted the three sisters completely, with the children. And Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, felt that babysitting the four toddlers would would help their own three adult children mature a little more.

Also present in the Devil's Hotel restaurant Yolanda and Eda, whom were both invited by Dutch. And Hernan, whom was visiting Roberta, for lunch.

The only other person present in the room, was the hotel employee, Melanie. She stood behind the bar counter, as she used a rag to wipe down glasses, while she kept an occasion eye on the other people in the room.

Those present were sitting at the round tables, in the back, near the stage, where they usually sat. Each rounded table had six chairs place around it.

At the table, in the back corner, where the back wall, met the stage, sat Roberta, Hernan, Aeryn, and Violin. Roberta sat across from Hernan, while Aeryn sat across from Violin.

At a nearby table, Dutch, Benny, Janet, Ranma, Akira, Natsuru, and Yolanda, sat together. With Yolanda pulling a chair, from unused table by her, so she could sit with her friends.

By the table near Dutch, the five sisters, Kristina, Sarah, Molly, Rebecca, and Molly, sat together.

And at the table that was closer to both the bar counter, and the entrancement to the restaurant, than the other occupied tables, sat Revy, Rock, Eda, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton.

And while Revy had her weapons in her shoulder holsters, she was keeping her promise to Hernan, by not consuming alcohol while armed. Instead, she was drinking a glass of lemonade with ice.

Also, Revy was not the only person in her group to have weapons on their person.

All of those present were had just finished their lunches, as they were continuing their various conversations at their tables. Their conversations were in english, given it was a language that everyone present knew well.

At the table Herman, Violin, Roberta, and Aeryn were sitting at, the four adults had just started talking about Roberta, Hernan, and his family's trip to see Garcia, at the Lovelace home.

Violins commented, “Hernan, I heard from the grapevine that you, Roberta, and your family, went to visit Garcia, at his home. I hope you guys had a great time.”

Hernan said, “It was fun.”

Roberta stated, “Things went well.”

Aeryn commented, “It is good that Hernan here was able to get a break from work, and get his wife and children, out of their home, some.”

Roberta said, “That is part of the reason I helped Hernan come up with this plan, for his entire family to take a vacation in Garcia's home.”

Aeryn complimented, “Well, it was a good idea.”

Roberta replied, “Thank you.”

Violin inquired, “Are there any plans for Garcia to come visit here?”

Roberta stated, “Actually, yes. There is. Meeting the Pena family seems to have been the needed push for him to arrange his schedule, to take some time off. He is planning to come here, soon, to visit his new family, and us, for at least a few days.”

Violin said, “Good. He could use a vacation, as well.”

Roberta said, “I fully agree.”

Aeryn inquired, “Hernan, how did your wife take the news about the truth?” She thought, 'Considering you were worried she might leave you, when she learned the truth about both you, and herself.'

Hernan answered, “Much better than Roberta and I expected.” He mentally reflected, 'Though, she wants to see the Black Lagoon series. But, that is a private matter.'

Aeryn asked, “So, how did the meeting between your family, and Garcia go?”

Hernan happily said, “Marvelously. In that the kids could have cared less about how we got there. Though, they had fun. While Maria, and Garcia got a long just fine. With Roberta and myself, having no problems with anyone.” He thought, 'Maria and Garcia seemed to hit it off very well. I think they will become very good friends. And after everything those two have been through, they could use some more friends.'

Roberta commented, “It was a very pleasant stay for everyone involved.”

Aeryn questioned, “How do they view each other?”

Hernan replied, “Much like Roberta, and myself. As siblings to each other.”

Aeryn commented, “I guess that is one way to look at it.”

Roberta said, “It works.”

Violin asked, “So, how did you kids handle the vacation?”

Hernan answered, “My children enjoyed our time at the Lovelace household. The pool at the Lovelace home was nice. And we got to finally show them Caracas, and some of the Venezuelan countryside. Something my wife and I have wished we could have done, years ago. Even though, this was in a different reality, and time, from this reality.”

Hernan thought, 'I am so happy that Antonio, Carmela, and Ramon, behaved themselves during our visit to the Lovelace home. And later this week, I plan to reward them, by taking, them, Maria, Roberta, and myself, out to eat, at a restaurant of their choosing.'

Violin questioned, “That is good. So, how did you all handle traveling across realities?”

Hernan stated, “It was fine. The children don't yet know about the fictional issue. Though, they do know they did travel between realities, with a little time travel mixed in. While Maria and I handled it in stride. And everyone is fine with traveling across realities. It also helped that Roberta here returned us home on the same day we left. And since we left out Saturday, we were able to enjoy Sunday, as well.”

Roberta smiled at Hernan, as she kindly said, “It was the least I could do for my brother.”

Hernan returned Roberta's smile, as he happily replied, “Thank you, sister.”

Violin pointed out, “Okay. I hope you explained to your kids on the importance of keeping on this all a secret.”

Hernan said, “Maria and I told them to keep the reality travel, and information on their new relatives, secret.”

Aeryn questioned, “Are you sure they will comply?”

Hernan flatly replied, “My children will not speak in public, on matters we tell them to not to talk about. They will keep quiet.”

Roberta thought, 'Hernan is clearly starting to become annoyed with these questions. And I am not far behind him. It is best that I change the topic of this conversation. And there is a topic that I wish to discuss with both Aeryn and Violin.'

Roberta asked, “Aeryn, Violin, what is it like to be a parent of a young child, again?”

Violin casually said, “Same old. Same old.”

Aeryn stated, “What my husband says is true. But, this time, we known what to look forward to. And Gilina should not give us any surprises, like when we raised our son, Little Dargo.”

Violin commented, “We did pretty good with him. And he, and my younger my brother, are running a nice, successful business.”

Aeryn said, “And that is why I do not mind raising a second children.”

Violin replied, “I understand, dear.”

Hernan stifled a chuckled, as he commented, “Wait until Gilina grows up a little bit. I have found raising a daughter is very different, than raising a son.”

Violin said, “Perhaps. But, I remember both my childhoods. And while there were differences, they were not that different.”

Hernan stated, “That is because you remember those from the child's point of view. Wait until you experience the differences from the parent's point of view.”

Roberta and Aeryn giggled a little at Hernan's comment.

Violin conceded, “Okay. You have a point there.”

Roberta inquired, “I was also wondering. Given you have both been pregnant and given birth. What are your views on pregnancy?”

Violin and Aeryn said two comments at the same time.

Violin said, “Too quick.”

Aeryn said, “Too slow.”

Roberta held back a laugh, as she thought, 'Aeryn pregnancy was very quick. While Violin was pregnant for around nine months. I guess like everything else. When is comes to pregnancy, the opinion, if it was good or bad, depends on the person that goes through it.'

Meanwhile, Hernan commented, “I find that a bit funny.”

Violin agreed, “So do I. I take it that you have seen our series?”

Hernan stated, “Yes. I always wondered what those that produced the Farscape series were on, when they made that series.”

Violin commented, “I sometimes wonder that, as well.” She turned to Roberta, as she inquired, “Let me guess. The reason you are asking this, is that you are thinking about finally having some kids of your own?”

Roberta admitted, “Meeting Hernan, and his family, has made me think about it, again. Though, I am in no rush. And I have brought up the subject with Garcia, and Fabiola. It has been years since the three of us have talked about.”

Violin responded, “Fair enough. Just keep in mind that raising even one child is a big commitment.”

Roberta calmly said, “I realize that. I am just not sure I am ready.”

Violin stated, “No one is ever truly ready to have and raise children.”

Hernan agreed, “Violin, is right about that.”

Aeryn said, “Violin, and Hernan, are both correct on this matter.”

Roberta responded, “Okay. Still, I am just thinking about it. As I said, there is no rush.”

Violin complimented, “That is a good approach to take.”

Just then, two mysterious individuals casually walked into the restaurant, from the hallway entrance.

From across the room, Revy was the first noticed the two people. She saw one of them was an old man in black leather biker clothing, while the other was a smaller woman that was shrouded in a red cloak and hood.

Revy saw the man and woman come to a stop, just inside the entrance to the restaurant. They standing side by side, with the man to the woman's right side. The man then used his right hand to pull something out of an interior coat pocket. Revy saw that it was a box.

With her enhanced eyesight, she could see that the box was wooden, with metal trimming. The man flip open the box's top. Look a little long at what was inside the box. Next, the man look in her direction. A second later, the man looked back down at the box. After which, he flipped closed the box, but held it in his hand, as he and the woman then started to walk in their direction.

Revy continued to watch the two newcomers, as she thought, 'Well, this is interesting.'

Revy then looked over at Melanie, to see that the bartender had put away the rag, and glass, in her hands. The brown haired woman looking at the two individuals, but she was not saying, or doing anything towards the two newcomers.

Revy thought, 'Melanie is going let this play out. Not that I blame her. She knows we can take care of ourselves.'

Revy turned back to look at the man and woman that was approaching them.

Beside her, Eda then noticed the two people, as she said, in a slightly loud tone of voice, to get everyone's attention, “Hey guys. Heads up. We got two strange people coming towards us.”

Everyone turned to look at the old man and the mysterious woman that were walking towards them.

While they all continued looking at the two strangers, Rock said, “Look's like we have trouble.”

Lotton commented, “Story of our lives. And if this is trouble, I am glad our children are not here.”

Beside Lotton, Sawyer replied, “I fully agree.”

Sitting on the other side of Sawyer, Sawyer said, “I do, as well. And our children will be safe with Nodoka, Mikoto, and Yurika.”

Lotton commented, “True. Given their abilities, powers, and personalities, it would take a lot to even present a danger to them. And I am sure they would protect our children, and other children, with their lives.”

Sawyer said, “That is what I hope, as well.”

Eda asked, “So, who is going to find out who these two are?”

Rock said, ““Let us allow them to make the first move.”

(_)

Nearby, Yolanda looked at the two newcomers, as she thought, 'And old man and a young woman. That is strange. And from the looks of their body language, they are not a couple. This just makes them even stranger. Still, it is best I not mention this, and let things play out. If there is trouble, the others here can clearly handled matter, themselves.'

(_)

A few seconds later, the two individuals came to a stop in front of the table that Lotton, Shenhua, Sawyer, Revy, Rock, and Eda, were sitting at. The man then looked down at his compass, then over to Revy, while the mysterious woman, robed in red, remained silent.

While continued to look at Revy, the man greeted them, in a warm friendly tone of voice, in english, “Greetings ladies. I have come a long way, in search of an old, dear friend. This person is an amoral, manipulative, selfish, greedy, foolhardy corsair, with a wicked sense of humor.”

Rock commented, “That doesn't sound much like a friend.”

The man quipped, “Those were my friend's good traits.”

Revy asked, “Well, with this group, you would find more people here with those traits, than without. Still, what is so important about this person?”

The man explained, “While we were not related, my friend was like a sibling to me. And as I have grown older I have come to appreciate the time I had with him. And like most siblings, half the time I wanted to kill him. And the other half, I cared about him, like a brother.”

Sawyer commented, “Before we go any further. I don't think you are going to get much help from us. You need to be aware, we are not normally a friendly group.”

The man turned to Sawyer, as he replied, “Neither am I. Normally. I guess we are both making exceptions for today.”

Revy was began to get annoyed with the man, as she warned, “Do not make me pulled out my cutlasses on you?”

The man turned to back to Revy, as he asked, “I don't see any cutlasses?”

Revy said, “I mean my pistols.”

The man said, “Oh... Those are not cutlasses.” The man then swapped out his compass, to where he held it in his left hand, with his right hand now free. Next he used his right hand unsheathed his sword with his right hand. He cracked a grin, under his beard, as he stated, “Now, this is a cutlass.”

Shenhua said, “A man as old as you should have a walking stick, instead of a sword.”

The man looked over at the Shenhua.

Shenhua could literally feel as the man stared into her eyes from behind his shades. She then noticed him look down at his box, in his left hand, and back up at her. He used the left side of his jacket to close the lid to his box. Next, he placed in compass in an interior jacket pocket, opposite to the pocket he had pulled it from.

The man continued to look at Shenhua, as he asked, “Interesting. And who are you, my dear?”

Shenhua answered, “I am Shenhua of Taiwan. And I am an expert in the use of bladed weapons.”

Rock stated, “Fair warning. She also has a super-soldier serum in her body that enhances her physical abilities.”

The man turned to Rock, as he complimented, “Thank, young lady, for that information. It would not be the first time I have fought such people.” The men turned to Shenhua, as he offered, “So Shenhua, would you be willing to have a little sparring match? It is so rare that I get a chance to meet someone skilled with a blade, in this day and age.”

Shenhua smirked, as she replied, “Sure. But, don't blame me if I accidentally kill you.”

The man quipped, “Lass, death holds no mysteries, nor fear, for myself.”

Shenhua commented, “I guess at your age, it wouldn't.”

The man said, “That is one way to look at it.”

(_)

Meanwhile, as Shenhua and the old man had their conversation. Along with everyone else in the room. Hernan and the three women at the table of he was sitting at, were looking at the newcomers.

Hernan looked at the man more closely. He then realized who the man was. He turned to Roberta, Violin, and Aeryn, as he inquired, “You girls don't realize who it is? Do you?”

Aeryn and Roberta shook their heads. Violin answered, “Nope. But, I got a feeling this fight is going to be good.”

Hernan cracked a grin, as he said, “Only one way to find out.” Hernan turned his head towards the two newcomers. He spoke a bit more loudly, so his voice would carry across the room, as he interrupted Shenhua and the old man's conversation, as he asked the man, “Hey, old man. Is your name Hector?”

The man turned to Hernan. The man had a smile on his lips, as he stated, “Aye. That is my name. Though, very few people know me by my given name.”

Hernan returned Hector's smile. He stated, “Twenty U.S. dollars on Hector, against Shenhua.”

The others were surprised by this by Hernan's open bet against Shenhua.

Roberta asked, “Okay. What is the angle, Hernan?”

Hernan turned to Roberta, as he said, “No angle. Let me whisper who Hector is. So you all can make a quick buck to.”

Roberta, Aeryn, and Violin, stood up, and leaned over the table, toward hear Hernan whisper something, as softly as he could, to them, so that the others would not overhear what he was saying, even with their enhanced hearing.

Roberta, Aeryn, and Violin's jaws dropped in unison.

As the three women collected themselves. They leaned up and set back down in their chairs.

Hernan and the three women turned to face Hector.

Roberta stated, “I will also be betting twenty dollars for Hector.”

Violin looked over at Aeryn. Aeryn noticed this, as she turned to Violin, and nodded once towards Violin.

Violin and Aeryn turned back to look in Hector's direction. Violin commented, “Aeryn and I place a single twenty dollar bet that Hector will win.”

(_)

At a nearby table, Dutch noticed this, and even with Hernan's efforts, she was about to hear enough of his whispering to put the pieces together.

Though, the others at the table, had not been about to do so.

Benny turned to Dutch, as she inquired, “So, do we take this suckers bet?”

Dutch turned to Benny, as she answered, “No. Because I also know who Hector is. Shenhua is about to get her ass handed to her.”

Janet looked over at Dutch, as she asked, “Who is he?”

Dutch smiled, as she looked at Janet. She said, “You'll find out soon enough.”

At their table, Ranma commented, “I find it interesting that the new guy figured out something that we have not.”

Yolanda calmly stated, “Everyone has a unique point of view on life. It is possible that Hernan's experiences here has gifted him with insight which we do not have.”

Natsuru complemented, “Those are wise words.”

Yolanda replied, “Thank you.”

Akira said, “Either way. This coming dual looks like it is shaping up to be entertaining.” She thought, 'I just hope neither of them are seriously injured, nor killed. Though, I might as well get this out of the way...'

Akira stated, “I will bet twenty dollars for Shenhua, against the eighty dollars for Hector.” She thought, 'Someone has to cover the bets, and this is chump change for us. Beside, Shenhua is my friend, so I might as well support her.'

Revy heard Akira's statement, as she thought, 'I don't know what is going on. But, it is clear that Hernan has inside information. So, I am going to play it safe. Though, I am glad that Akira is willing to come forward and cover the bets. Now, to find out what the others think of this matter?...'

Revy turned to those at her table, as she asked, “Do any of you want to place a bet?”

Shenhua stated, “It would be in bad luck for me to do so.”

Sawyer commented, “My gut tells me not too.”

Lotton said, “I don't want to risk upsetting Shenhua.” She thought, 'I do not want to be the one assigned to diaper duty, by myself, for a week.'

Rock said, “I have no interest in betting on this fight.”

Revy stated, “I think I will stick this one out also. Still...” She turned to the table with her five daughters, as she asked, “How about you five?” She mentally added, 'We need someone to cover the difference on the bet. And it will also teach them a lesson, on paying attention to their surroundings.'

Molly said, “We will each kick in ten dollars for Shenhua.”

Revy replied, “Okay.” She thought, 'At least Akira won't have to cover all the losses, if Shenhua loses.' She turned around to face Shenhua, as she happily said, “Good luck Shenhua.”

Shenhua said, “Thank you.”

Shenhua stood up, as she pulled out her two long knives. Given this was to be a casual fight, at close range, she decided not to pull out and place her cords on the bottom of the hilts of her weapons. Because doing so might hinder her fighting in close quarters.

While Shenhua stood, and turned to look at Hector, she thought, 'I am glad I already bought replacements for my long knives So, I could immediately replace the one that Hernan destroyed.'

'Though, I was not foolish enough to try to make Hernan pay for it. I would prefer to stay on the good side of that entire family. Because I know someday, his children are likely going be as badass as he, and his sister, Roberta are. And I would like my children to grow up to be friends with them.'

'It will be nice to spar with someone. Hector looks like he knows what is doing. I am going to be disappointed with him, if he does not know how to use his sword. Also, I am glad I decided to no longer wear high heels, and instead just flat soled, red slippers. I am not trying to impress my friends. So, I don't need to worry about any balance issues.'

Meanwhile, Hector continued to hold up his sword, as he turned to his mysterious friend in red. He playfully requested, “Red, please go stand by the bartender. She looks lonely.”

From under her red hood, the mysterious woman giggled a little, in response to her friend's request. She then turned, and she quickly sprinted across the room, to stand by the bar counter, and across from Melanie. The woman had her back to the bar counter, and she was three feet to Melanie's right side, to allow the bartender to continue to see what was going on.

For her part, Melanie decided to ignore the woman, as she watched Shenhua and Hector start to walk out into the open space between the tables and the bar counter. Though, the two adults walked away from Melanie and the woman by her, and instead came to a stop, closer to the entrance to the restaurant.

Shenhua and Hector came to a stop ten feet from each other.

Melanie thought, 'Fortunately, there is enough room between the tables and bar counter, to do this. Though, there are a few matters we need to clear up, before they start.'

Melanie warned, “I am letting you to do this. But, your swords and knives only. No throwing, nor projectile weapons. Also, if you destroy the furniture this fight immediately ends. And any survivors are responsible for cleaning up any possible blood stains on the floor and furniture.”

Shenhua and Hector turned to looked at Melanie.

Shenhua replied, “I can live with that.”

Hector commented, “That works for me.”

Both combatants then turned to face each other.

Shenhua said, “Any time you are ready, old man.”

Hector took on a one-handed sword style, with his right hand firmly on his sword, while the right side of his body faced Shenhua. He stated, with sarcasm dripping from his voice, “Lady's first.”

Shenhua did not bother to verbally reply, and instead she just came at him.

What happened next could only be classified as two master blade fighters of different styles, clashing against each other, for dominance.

Shenhua was like crashing waves, with her two blades coming towards on him, from several angles. Though, time after time. As she continually moved around Hector, forwarding the old man to continue to turn, to keep his right side to Shenhua.

On the other hand, Hector was like a rock, against Shenhua waves. Hector rarely moved from the spot as which he was standing. Each action, whether is was to block, parried, or attack, was carefully measured for maximum effect with minimum effort and strength.

Though, for a few exceptions, the only times Hector moved was when he was forced to turn, to make sure only his right side faced Shenhua. Or, for him to get better footing for his own strikes, against Shenhua.

Each time Shenhua came at Hector, the man forced the asian woman to feint back, over and over.

Neither opponent relied on strong blows. They both preferred short, swift movements in their strikes, and parries. Instead of stronger, longer blows, which might left them open to overreaching, and exposing their defenses.

And while Hector's blade was longer than Shenhua's kukri long knives, giving Hector the advantage in reach, Shenhua was extremely agile, and when combined with her having two blades to Hector's one, the fight was very well balanced.

Their fight continued for the next few minutes, as everyone watched in silence. The only sounds were metal clanging against each other.

Revy watched with the others, as she thought, with astonishment, 'Now, this is a fight. And from what sparing I do with Shenhua, I don't think she is holding back. But, from the looks up it, I think Hector is.'

Over time, everyone could begin to tell that Shenhua was growing impatient. By all accounts, she knew she should have already beating him, but she hadn't.

Shenhua has started to sweat a little, while man had showed hardly any sign of exertion.

Then, Shenhua made a mistake, as she lunged at him, she overextended herself.

Hector saw the opening and turned his body in a counterclockwise motion away from the attack, as he moved the angle of his sword.

A second later, Shenhua felt the cold blade of Hector's cutlass across the front, right side of her throat.

The blade of Hector's sword had not cut Shenhua, but she know only a master swordsman could pull off a move, without harming their victim. And she knew the duel was over, with her the defeated opponent.

Hector calmly said, “Yield.”

Shenhua dropped her weapons, to show that she admitted defeat.

After doing so, Hector withdrew his weapon, and he sheathed his weapon into the scabbard to the left side of his waist.

Shenhua turned around to face Hector.

Hector looked at Shenhua, as he complimented, in a calm tone of voice, “Lass. Do not feel bad. The only thing you lacked in defeating me was the wisdom of age, patience, and few more years of fighting experience. I spent a lifetime fighting people every day with this sword. You likely have had nowhere near that experience. But, you have potential. Would like me to teach you?”

Shenhua continued looked at Hector, as she realized that she was getting a once in a lifetime chance to learn from a true grandmaster of a blade. She said, “Yes.”

Hector happily responded, “Good. We will start today, or maybe even tomorrow. I will check into this hotel, and we will finalize the details, later. But, for now, I have to help my friend, find her friend. That is after I finish meeting with my own friend.”

Shenhua said, “I look forward to your instruction.”

Hector requested, “As you should. Also, I would like to talk to you with in private, after I concluded my business here.”

Shenhua nodded, as she said, “I am more than welcome to listen to what you have to tell me.”

Hector replied, “That, I am sure of.”

Shenhua picked up and put away her weapons. After which, she turned and walked back to the table with Revy, Lotton, Sawyer, Eda, and Rock, as she sat back down in the chair.

Shenhua noticed that everyone was still looking at Hector.

As Shenhua turned back to look at Hector, Lotton complimented, “That was a good fight.”

Shenhua continued to look at Hector, as she replied, “Thank you.”

Sawyer commented, “It was wise of you to take him up on his offer.”

Shenhua agreed, “Yes. He is good. Better than me. And to learn from him is an offer too tempting to pass up.”

(_)

Meanwhile, Hector turned and he walked over to the bar counter.

When Hector reached the bar counter, he stood by his mysterious friend, to his right. He then used his right hand pulled out a coin, from his right pants pocket, while he turned to Melanie. He tossed a coin to brown haired woman, as he ordered, “Lass. A bottle good rum. Please.”

Melanie caught the coin in her right hand. She looked at the coin. She quickly realized what it was. She looked back over at Hector, as she said, with surprise in her tone of voice, “This is spanish dobla gold coin.”

Melanie pocketed the coin, as she thought, 'This coin is going into my personal collection. This coin is in near mint condition. If this is real, I could buy this restaurant twice over with it. I will pay for the bottle of rum with my own money, after everyone leaves. And I do not know who this man is, but I am going to keep him happy, in case he tips like this, again.'

'I wonder what song played when these to entered the lobby? Though, I am not going to ask. It would be rude. I will ask the staff about the song, later. Yet. Given how cryptic these song connections can be. I doubt I will find anything out, about them, that way.'

Hector commented, in a matter of fact tone of voice, “Of course it is. Now, my rum.”

Melanie swiftly walked over, and pulled out a bottle of good rum, from the shelf behind her. She then turned back to Hector, as she handed the bottle to Hector. She said, “Let me know if you need anything else.

Hector took the bottle, as he let out a little chuckle. He thought, 'This woman clearly knows how valuable that coin is, in this era. And this is a quick way to make friends with a bartender.'

Hector replied, “I will.”

Hector opened the rum, dropped the cap on the counter, and took a gulp from it, straight out of the bottle, without gagging. He then set the bottle of rum on the bar counter. He looked back over at Melanie, as he complimented, “That is some good rum.”

Melanie said, “Thank you. You pay for top quality rum, you receive top quality rum.”

Hector cracked a grin, as he stated, “That is what I want to hear.”

(_)

Nearby, sitting at a table, Rock looked at Hector and the mysterious woman standing by him. She thought, 'Since at least one of them can handle Shenhua, we need to find out who these people are. Because they can clearly cause a lot trouble. If they wanted too.'

While still sitting down, and facing Hector's back, Rock requested, “Who are you really, Hector?”

Hector turned around to look at the women, as he answered, in a casual tone of voice, “Well, most people do not know me as Hector. I usually go by my family name. I am sure you have heard of it. That name being Barbossa.”

Dutch, Roberta, Violin, Aeryn, and Hernan starting laughing, as the rest of those there, save for Barbossa, and his mysterious friend, all stated, in not so many words, “Captain Hector Barbossa of the Pirates of the Caribbean movies?!”

Barbossa smirked towards the women at the tables, as he gloated, in a happy tone of voice, “I loved watching those movies. I think they truly captured my villainy.”

As everyone started to calm down, Rock was the first to speak, as she asked, “How did you get here?”

Ranma commented, “Yea. Reality travel technology is a little more advanced than what you had in your time.

Barbossa said, “Very true. And to answer your questions, ladies. And was little bit of magic and technology that got me here.”

The mysterious woman to Barbossa's left, coughed, to get his attention.

Barbossa stopped talking, as he turned his head towards her. He then looked back at the women and man, in front of him, as he went onto say, “I mean us. And it is a long story. But, given you know this much, I might as will tell you a few details.”

“It all started soon after my last meeting with Jack Sparrow.”

Akira asked, “How did it end?”

Barbossa said, with a bit of sadness in his tone of voice, “While I am not sure of his reasons. Jack ended up getting himself hung in Caracas. I guess Jack's luck finally ran out.”

Barbossa then noticed Revy shift a little in her seat.

Revy, herself, noticed her involuntary reaction. She thought, 'Why did I just suddenly tense up as Barbossa mentioned Jack Sparrow's death?'

Meanwhile, Barbossa continued, “Anyway, I and my men went to port, in a friendly island to pirates, and while we were there, for the night, we were attacked this blue metal monster.”

Rock thought, 'That was probably a combat boomer. Likely one of Chang's. From years ago. But, Barbossa, and his friend, do not need to know that. Knowing this would only cause trouble, if they did.'

Barbossa stated, “Fortunately, after a glorious battle, we slew the beast with repeated cannon fire. Afterward, I took the corpse of the headless beast to a fellow mystic, whom was able to find this inside its innards.”

Barbossa used his gloved right hand to reach into his right outer jacket pocket. He then pulled out the organ that had wires and trinkets on it. He held it out for everyone, even Melanie, whom was standing behind him, to see. Next, he turned back to the crowd, as he pocketed the organic device back into his right outer jacket pocket.

Kristina asked, “What is that?”

Lotton turned to Kristina, as she answered, “That is the reality device used in a boomer. It has organic covering the inorganic parts, like much of a boomer insides are. Though, I see this one has some things attached to it.”

Kristina looked over at Lotton, as she replied, “Oh.”

Kristina and Lotton then turned back to look at Barbossa.

Lotton saw Barbossa was looking at her, as he said, “Well, lass. Thank you for letting me know what that beastie was called.”

Lotton thought, 'I think I just misspoke. And I hope he doesn't put the pieces together, on how I knew all that. Still, the man is direct, so as long as I am not stupid, I should be fine.'

Barbossa then looked around the crowd, as he stated, “Be that as it may. To continue my story. The mystic told me that other monsters would come for me if I did not flee. I asked how far. The mystic said that they would track me to the ends of the earth, and beyond. Though, the mystic said that there was a solution.”

“The mystic pulled out the object I just showed you, and the mystic used some magic to make it work. When I tested the object, I suddenly found myself somewhere else in time and location. I quickly realized I could go anywhere I dared to dream. After visiting parts of the present, past, and future, of my own reality. And learning much as I could. I soon decided to go further.”

“Sooner after learning of the possibilities of space travel. I wanted to see what pirates in space would be like. And I when I used my totem, I found that I had traveled to a completely different reality, and I met, of what your time calls aliens and space fleets, across more stars than I could count. This is where I met my friend here.”

Sawyer questioned, “I find it interesting that given you are a pirate of a less technological age, that all this technology doesn't bother you?”

Barbossa stated, “I have always been one who enjoys seeing new things, and going to new places. That is one of the reasons I become a sailor, in the first place. Long before I became a pirate. And I am always open to using new technology. Such, as my pistol here.” He used his right hand to brushed against his holstered pistol, that was on the right side of his belt.

Barbossa continued, “Though, to be honest. Of all the things I have seen. All these new technological wonders. The technological advances I have enjoyed more are indoor plumbing. Such as showers and toilets. Something I am sure you ladies appreciate more than I.”

Several of those in the crowd laughed a little.

As they calmed down, Ranma then noticed that Barbossa had two legs and feet. She looked up at the old pirate's bearded face, as he pointed out, “Hold on. Didn't you lose a leg?

Barbossa turned to Ranma, as he stated, “Aye. And that goes with the point I am making. And concerning my lost right foot and leg. I received a wonderful replacement in my friend's reality, that works just as well.”

Barbossa then stomped his right boot once on the floor. Next, he continued, “Along my need body parts. I underwent some rejuvenation therapy that will likely extend my lifespan for another twenty years.”

Barbossa turned to the bottle of rum, as he commented, “Even my liver is in better shape, than it has been in several decades. Allowing me to enjoy some of the better things in life.”

Barbossa looked back to his friend, as he said, “Now, before you asked your next question. Let me introduce you to my friend. And do not be alarmed. She is an alien. But, a very nice one. She is a Togruta. Her name is Ahsoka Tano.”

Ahsoka pulled off her hood, and slightly open the loose front of her cloak, to reveal herself.

They saw Ahsoka's orange colored skin, two white and blue stripped montral horns going up the sides of her head, and white and blue stripped lekku head tails, with gray stripes, on the top of her head. Of Ahsoka's three lekku head tails, two draped down the back of her head, and onto the front of her shoulders, and over her large breasts. While the center head tail draped down the middle of her back, to her shoulder blades.

Under her red hood and cloak, Ahsoka wore a light long sleeved brown blouse, brown pants, and black slippers.

And though Ahsoka looked much like she did when she was younger, as a teenager. Much like Fabiola, Ahsoka had become much more beautiful, and physically mature, as she reached adulthood. With Ahsoka still remaining in top physical shape.

The crowd also noticed that Ahsoke had two lightsaber hilt strapped to her belt, one each side of her hips.

Revy let out a laugh. She then said, “This day is getting better by the minute.”

Barbossa looked over at Revy, as he smiled wickedly at her. He thought, 'The best is yet to come.'

Akira whispered to Natsuru, “That is Ahsoka. Anakin's apprentice. Before he went Vader.”

Natsuru softly replied, “I know. From the Clone Wars series. That series ended with her leaving the Jedi Order. She must have survived the Jedi purge.”

Ahsoka overheard Akira and Natsuru's conversation about her. She turned towards them, as she calmly requested, in english, not Galactic Basic, which was close to english, but english, “It seems you know of me. So, I request your help. I am looking for Anakin Skywalker. Also, known as Darth Vader. He disappeared, years ago. At least in my timeline. I heard he is here, and I have... Questions for him.”

Akira and Natsuru looked over at Ahsoka.

Akira thought, 'So, Vader disappeared in the timeline she is from. She is likely from same timeline as Annie. But, first, I need to ask if she is planning to try to kill Annie. For Ahsoka's sake, I hope that is not the case. “

Akira inquired, “Are you planing on trying to kill Annie, over what happened at the Jedi Temple? Annie has become a much better person since then. And Annie informed us of her making amends for the actions taken as Vader, against the people of your home reality.”

Ahsoka said, “It depends on his answers. And Anakin hated that nickname.”

Rock stated, “A lot has changed. Believe it, or not... Long story short, Anakin was kidnapped and changed into a woman. She is not also physically restored, and out of the black suit and helmet.”

Ahsoka said, “Really? This I have got to see that.”

Rock said, “Yes. Along with this, Annie has emotionally matured, greatly.”

Ahsoka commented, “That is nice to hear. I do vaguely remember hearing the Skywalker family, along with a woman that reportedly looked like Anakin's younger sister. Which I guess was Anakin. Overthrowing Palpatine.”

Akira stated, “That was likely Annie. She works at the nearby casino. On the other side of the island. Meaning the south end of the island. Even given the circumstances. I am sure, if you come in peace, she would be happy to talk to you.”

Ahsoka replied, “Thank you, for your information.”

Akira said, “You're welcome.”

Natsuru offered, “And we are more than happy to give you the answers you seek.” She thought, 'Because getting between a force user and who she is looking for, is a very bad idea. Even with our powers and skills. She would be a handful, even without her lightsabers.'

Ahsoka smiled at Natsuru and Akira, as she said, “I appreciate that.” She then pulled her hood back over her head, and she closed the front of her cloak.

A thought occurred to Ranma, as her lips curled into a mischievous grin. She asked, “By the way, are you two dating?”

At the bottom of Ahsoka's hood, they saw her jaw dropped, as Barbossa let out a laugh.

Barbossa flatly answered, “I wish.”

Ahsoka quickly collected herself, as she flatly stated, “No. Our relationship is purely platonic. Though, we have had some interesting adventures together, as we traveled through the various realities.”

Ranma replied, “Alright. Someone just had to ask the question. No offense intended.”

Barbossa replied, “No problem.”

Ahsoka said, “None offense taken.”

Molly requested, “Ahsoka. Barbossa. Can I get some photos of both of you?”

Ahsoka replied, “Sure. Though, not right now.”

Barbossa stated, “Yes. But, as Ahsoka said. We will do so, later. We both have business to attend to. Both here, and at this casino.”

Lotton thought, 'So, he is tracked someone down, to here. And, as to how? I believe that box he was holding at Jack's compass. Which would be a nice tool to have. But, I crazy enough to try to steal it from him. Especially, considering he just soundly beat Shenhua.'

'Though, we need to find out who he is after. But, before I ask. I need to butter him up some. And I just know how to do it.' She pointed out, “The casino is called, Daiyu Palace Casino. We are friends with the owner, and number of employees there. Including, Annie.”

Barbossa responded, “Thank you. That makes things much more easier for us.” He thought, 'I wish everything went this easily.'

Rock offered, “Do you wish for us to call ahead, and let them know you are coming?”

Ahsoka answered, “No. I want to surprise, Anakin.”

Rock replied, “Okay.” She thought, 'And that is going to be an interesting surprise for both of them. If they ask for a ride, I will offer to give them one. So, I can tag along, and watch the reunion.'

Lotton thought, 'Now is my chance.' She asked, “So, who are you trying to find here?”

Barbossa flatly answered, “Jack Sparrow.”

Dutch pointed out, “You just said he was dead.”

Barbossa coyly replied, “Aye. I did.”

Lotton commented, “Also, I though you hated him?”

Barbossa stated, “We were like brothers. We hated each other, but loved each other, at the same time.”

Shenhua said, “Well, Jack is not here. And we have not even seen him, once.”

Benny commented, “Yes. He is the type of person one would notice.”

Janet said, “Especially, with this crowd.”

(_)

Meanwhile, from behind the bar counter, Melanie remained silent, as she continued to silently watch the conversation continue.

Melanie remained calm, as she thought, 'While I am not touching the conversation. Though, I noticed that Barbossa knows the truth. He has been looking at her way, a few times.” She looked at Ahsoka, then quickly back to Barbossa, as she continued her thoughts, 'And while Ahsoka can read emotions. I believe force users cannot read thoughts. So, as long as I remain calm, and quite, I will be fine. And I will just let the situation play out in front of me.'

(_)

Nearby, at the table she was sitting at, with her friends, Eda looked around at her friends, as she commented, “I know Barbossa said he was dead. But, some people don't always stay dead. And Jack would be such a person.” She turned to Barbossa, as she inquired, “Are you sure that Jack wasn't tricking you all? And he bribed the hangman to fake his death? He has likely done crazier stunts than that.”

Barbossa stated, “Yes. He has. And I am quite sure that Jack is dead. I watched him hang in Caracas. I was the one arranged and watched him be buried. After I personally made sure he was dead.”

Rock asked, “Exactly, how did Jack die? For a man of his talents, being caught and hung seems an unbelievable way to die.”

Barbossa admitted, “I agree. And I have come to believe that he arranged his own death. I do not want to get into the details. But, from what I understand, Jack finally gained his sought after goal of eternal youth, but not health. Rumor has it that he grew sick. And he decided to go on one last mission, to die like a pirate should. On the other hand, I just grew older, but did not die... Such irony for the both of us.”

Revy responded, “So, as you pointed out, again. Jack is dead. What are you still looking for him, here?”

Barbossa did not immediately reply. He calmly walked over to the table where Rock was sitting, as he stated, “Well, I am looking for Jack. Or should I say Jack's next incarnation?”

When Barbossa came to a stop in front of Rock's table. Though, instead of looking at Rock, Barbossa looked Revy in her eyes, as he casually said, “Hi Jack. It has been a long time.”

Barbossa's statement, and whom it was directed towards, took everyone at the table by surprise.

(_)

At the table, where the Lagoon daughters were sitting, Rebecca commented, “Well, it figures that mom would be the incarnation of Jack Sparrow.”

Yukio replied, “While I love her. She definitely has the greed, narcissism, and creative insanity, that Jack had.”

Rebecca shrugged, as she said, “True.”

Sarah stated, “At least, she will now know what we are going through.”

Molly said, “You are correct. And that can help us with our relationship with her.”

Kristina commented, “I just hope this doesn't send her over the edge.”

Molly state, “I doubt that. If parenthood could not send her over the edge. Nothing can.”

Kristine agreed, “Good point.”

(_)

Back at the table, where Barbossa was standing by, Revy looked up at the old pirate. She flatly stated, “My name is not Jack. It is Revy.”

Barbossa said, “And what a fitting name that is, for one, such as yourself. And you always did prefer the pistols to the blades. On the other hand, I preferred the blades to the pistols.”

Rock asked, “Do you have any proof?”

Barbossa used his left hand, he pulled out his box, from an interior pocket. He then switch hands, to hold the box with his right hand. After which, he opened the box, and tilted it, to where Revy and those at the table, could see inside it. They saw it was a compass, with the needle pointing at Revy.

A few seconds later, Barbossa flipped the lids closed his compass, and put it back into the pocket, where had he kept it, earlier that morning.

Barbossa turned to Revy, as he stated, “If you have seen the movies, you know what this is. And this compass never lies. It is the only thing about Jack that never did.”

Lotton asked, “How did you wind up with Jack's compass?”

Barbossa answered, “Jack left it to me after he was hung in Caracas. After all, I was the one who buried his body. After he was hanged. I made sure he... Or should I say. You had a nice burial service, and all.”

Sawyer began giggling. She stated, “You're crazy. Revy, of all people, being the reincarnation of Jack Sparrow. The multiverse is not that twisted.”

Revy starting thinking about the Barbossa's claims. She then looked around the table, at her friends, as she softly commented, “I think Barbossa is right. My gut tells me he is right.” Revy then said, a bit louder, “Still, I cannot be believe that I was a guy in a previous life.”

Violin overheard Revy. She shouted, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Welcome to the club!”

Revy turned around, to look at Violin, as she snapped at the dark blue haired woman, “Don't start.” She then looked back at those at her table, as she continued, “There was a day that I cannot account for, in which I woke up in a pirates costume that looked like Jack Sparrow's costume. And I know who to ask about it. I need to make a phone call.”

Revy got up from her seat. She passed by Barbossa, as she headed for the bar counter.

(_)

Hernan heard all of this, as he thought, 'Honesty, I would rather be Roberta's counterpart. At least Roberta is sane most of the time. On the other hand, Jack was crazy, and Revy can be just as bad. Though, from what I understand, Jack was a lot nicer around people.'

(_)

At the table with Dutch, Benny, Janet, Yolanda, Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira, Benny asked, “Did I hear that right?”

Dutch laughed at little. She then smiled, as she replied, “Yes. And that explains so much.”

Janet said, “Oh, the mileage we are going on this information.”

Dutch's smile widened, as she responded, “I know.”

Ranma made a mischievously grin, as she commented, “The only question is, do we start with the word jokes, first? Or, do we immediately move to the visual jokes?”

Akira stated, “Either way would be fine.”

Natsuru said, “I agree. And I am thinking of several of both types of jokes.”

Yolanda calmly pointed out, “Still, when we do something like that, we need to first make sure that Revy is unarmed.”

Akira replied, “Good point.”

Dutch complimented, “That is what I like about you, Yolanda. You always plan ahead.”

Yolanda gave Dutch a warm smile, as she replied, “Thank you.” She thought, 'And it is from a lifetime of experience'

The seven women at the table, then turned their attention to Revy.

(_)

By then, Revy made her way to the bar counter. While Revy came closer to her, Ahsoka could sense in the force, that from Revy's emotional state, that Revy was in no mood to talk. So, Ahsoka just backed away a few feet, as Revy approach the bar counter.

Revy came to a stop, in front of the bar counter, she faced Melanie. With Melanie being a across the bar counter her, with her wireless phone in her right hand.

Fortunately, Melanie had overheard Revy's request for a phone, and she had already pulled off her wireless phone, from it's base, and headed to meet Revy, at the counter.

Melanie then handed Revy the phone.

Revy quickly took the phone, and dial a numbered. She then used her right hand to hold the phone up to her right ear.

Revy heard the phone ring a few times. When she heard it pick up, she did not even both to wait for a reply, as she flatly ordered, “This is Revy. Transfer to me to Chang's apartment.”

Revy thought, 'Lee should be there, with River. It is not like those two do anything of note, at the casino. Though, I am not one to talk. And Lee is the one in charge of producing some of the performances held at the casino. Including a few parties, my family and I have attended. And she does a good job of that. Still, if she is not there, I will call Chang on his cellphone, and he can find Lee.'

Revy heard a click, that signaled her call was being transferred. Then, the phone rang a few more times, before a familiar female voice answered the phone, in english, that Revy recognized, “Hello.”

Revy said, “Hi River. This is Revy. I need to speak to Lee, for a moment.”

A few seconds later, Lee said, over the phone, “Hello Revy. I am kind of busy at the moment.”

Revy flatly responded, in annoyed tone of voice, “Well, I have an important question for you.”

Lee sighed. She then inquired, “Okay, Revy. What do you need?”

Revy asked, in a straight forward manner, “Lee, am I the reincarnation of Jack Sparrow?”

The line was silent for a few seconds. Lee then calmly answered, “Yes. You are. How did you find out?”

Revy turned to look at Barbossa, then Ahsoka, and finally back to Melanie, as she stated, “I would love to tell you. But, you will find out soon enough.”

Lee responded, “I look forward to finding out. By the way, this is not my fault.”

Revy stated, “I believe you. You are crazy. But, not that crazy.” She thought, 'Besides, I would have remembered reading that in your stories.'

Lee replied, “Thank you.”

Revy inquired, “So, how did you find out?”

Lee answered, “Something happened to your mind that caused you to regress to Jack's memories and persona. I am not sure what. I wasn't there when it happened. I was just the one to clean up the mess, afterward. Though, you were still you. There was only one voice in your head. You just happened to prefer to be Jack at the time.”

Revy inquired, “Okay. I can guess that is the day I blacked out and awoke in that pirate's costume? I knew that outfit looked familiar.”

Lee stated, “Yea. And I am glad that Annie and River were able to put Jack back into the bottle.”

Revy wondered out loud, “Yea. I am grateful for that. Still, I want to know. Why did you help do that, Lee? I would think being Jack would be more fun. And you would prefer me to be, Jack. Even I will admit that I can sometimes be a bitch, and quite a handful to deal with.”

Lee answered, “I am glad you are willing to admit that. And I have six reasons for wanting to return you back to the personality you currently have. Revy, you may sometimes be a bitch, but you are always honest in your intentions. Jack was not. She figured out who I was. She is arguably more ingenious than Rock, Chang, or even myself.”

“While you are monogamous, she is promiscuous. I even caught her seducing Annie. And being that way would destroy your relationship with Rock and your family. She planned to make me her student. And she came onto me.”

Revy thought over what Lee said. She then agreed, “You did the right thing, Lee. Thank you.” She mentally added, 'Lee is right. Jack is promiscuous. And being Jack would have likely ruined my relationship with Rock, and my family. Had Lee not intervened, to get my mind restored, like it should be, I could have lost everything I hope dear. I guess I owe her one. I think, in return, I will cut her a little slack, the next time she needs it.'

Lee offered, “You're welcome. And if you start remembering your time as Jack, contact us immediately. We do not want a world class troublemaker, like Jack, on the loose in this reality.”

Revy said, “Don't worry. I will.” She then hung up the phone, and she handed it back to Melanie.

Melanie took the phone, and set it on the counter.

Meanwhile, Revy looked at Barbossa, with Barbossa, and everyone else looked at her.

Revy requested, in a humble tone of voice, “Barbossa, could I have some time to come to grips with this? This is a life changing event. I always felt in my life that I should have been a pirate. I just did not realize that I was a pirate in a previous life.”

Barbossa said, “Take all the time you need, Revy. I plan on staying here, for a while.” He turned to Shenhua, as he requested, “Shenhua, please meet me out front, in a minute”

Shenhua turned to Barbossa. She nodded once, as she replied, “Okay.” She then got up from her seat.

Barbossa then looked at Ahsoka, as he said, “I will be right back. Then, we will go see your friend.”

Ahsoka looked at Barbossa, as she replied, “Don't worry. We now know where Anakin is. So, take your time.”

Barbossa replied, “Thank you.” He then turned to Shenhua, as he said, “This way.”

Barbossa then turned and started walking out of the exit of the restaurant, with Shenhua following right behind him.

(_)

Just over a minute later, Barbossa and Shenhua exited out of the front of the lobby, and under the outside awning.

Barbossa then came to a stop a few feet from where the awning ended. Shenhua stopped, a few feet from Barbossa.

Barbossa then turned around to face Shenhua, without a few feet between the two of them. He then looked to see no one else was around. He said, “This is private enough.”

Shenhua asked, in a slightly confused tone of voice, “Out in the open?”

Barbossa responded, “My dear. When one spends a lifetime at sea. One learns the value of how the wind of the outside air can conceal a conversation.”

Shenhua conceded, “Fair enough.”

Barbossa inquired, “Now, I have a serious question for you, Shenhua. That being. Do you like apples?”

Shenhua responded, “While I do not consider that an important question. Of course, I like apples. That is why I prefer to wear red, it reminds me of apples. Why do you ask?”

Barbossa said, “I love apples, myself. I cannot get enough of them. Do you know that in a few years, I plan to returned to my reality, in time to retire?”

Shenhua commented, “No. Though, I can see you doing so. But, what does that have to do with anything?”

Barbossa said, “Well, I will die. And I have recently learned who I will become in my next life.”

Barbossa took off his shades, as he looked Shenhua in her eyes. She saw his eyes, as well.

While Barbossa's liver may have recovered, the whites of Barbossa's eyes were still yellow, from jaundice, as opposed to Shenhua's healthy eyes.

But, that was not what Shenhua noticed most about Barbossa's eyes. It was the intent she saw in his pupils.

The two adults continued to look each other, in their eyes, as Barbossa stated, “It is said that the eyes are windows to the soul. Tell me, when you look into my eyes, whose soul do you see?”

Shenhua took a harder, deeper look into Barbossa eyes. And she saw behind the intent of his eyes, was a look of insanity. But, it was not like Revy's wild insanity. No. Barbossa's soul was like a beast that leashed itself to remain a bit civil. Though, a beast that could unleash itself on a whim.

Shenhua realized she had only seem that look before in mirrors. She realized, as she said, with slight surprised, “I am you. And I can honestly feel the kinship.”

Barbossa replied, “So do I.” He then put back on his shades.

Shenhua asked, “But, how do you know?”

Barbossa pointed out, “As I said. The compass never lies. And as I said to Jack... I mean Revy. She preferred the pistols. We preferred the blades. Let me guess, as a child, you were considered a prodigy with those long knives of yours?”

Shenhua answered, “Yes.”

Barbossa said, “That is due to my life experience. You may not remember the lessons and experiences of my life. But, the basics of the skills still carried over.”

Shenhua thought, 'Just like some people believed that Mozart was a pianist and musical composer, in a previous life. And that is how he could play the piano and compose music at such an early age. Though, I do have a question for my previous self, that I am going to have to be a little more honest about, than I am comfortable with.'

Shenhua asked, “But, how can you end up me, a woman?...” She then forced herself to include, “And a self admitted prissy one at that?”

Barbossa grinned at Shenhua's self-deprecating humor, as he responded, “Karma. I was never that nice to women. Though, I never did anything too horrible to women. Also, we have always been very vain about our appearance.”

Barbossa brushed his right hand across Shenhua's left shoulder, against her fine white silk coat, as he mentioned, “We always did a have a taste for the finer things in life. Such as a better quality of clothing, than most.”

Barbossa dropped his right hand back to his side, as he continued, “And, I can see the look in your eyes that tells me though you like to wear the makeup, you still love to play in the mud. Honestly, I am happy that we ended up this way. I would hate for us to be Jack's love interest.”

Shenhua said, “While I find both men and women attractive. I have never found Revy attractive in that way. We have shared someone before, in the bedroom. But, it was more of a case of passing that person around. And not a case of the two of us doing something together.”

Barbossa let a soft laugh. He then stated, “Jack and I have done similar things with whores.”

Shenhua raised an eyebrow, as she questioned, “Really?”

Barbossa said, “It was a different time. A different place. A different culture. In many ways.”

Shenhua inquired, “I can appreciate that. And I have to ask. Have you ever had any real luck in romance?”

Barbossa commented, “Nope. And neither had Jack. Jack and I's luck with relationships were horrible to say the least. Oh sure. Both of us knew how to woo a woman. But, neither of us could find a woman that would stay for very long.”

Shenhua mentioned, “Well, my luck with lovers has been much better. And so has Revy's luck.”

Barbossa replied, with a bit of happiness in his tone of voice, “That is good to know.”

Shenhua asked, “So, what exactly was your association with Jack Sparrow?” She thought, 'Knowing this could help me with my friendship with Revy.'

Barbossa answered, “We were good friends. And it is nice to know that in the end, Jack will still be with my friend, and we will continue to be friends, from life to life.”

Shenhua asked, “But, what about all the betrayals? And the killings?”

Barbossa shrugged, as he said, in a casual tone of voice, “It was a game to us.”

Shenhua flatly stated, “That is a hell of a game.”

Barbossa commented, “We had no video, audio, or internet. We were bored out of our minds. As such, back then, we took our games very seriously. And from the way you and Revy seem to act towards each other. I can tell that you are close friends.”

Shenhua pointed out, “I wouldn't say we are close friend. Friends. Yes. But, not close friends. While we have gotten better over the last few decades. Revy and I had been sniping at each other for years. I use to try to kill her a few times.”

Barbossa casually said, “Been there. Done that with Jack. We finally buried the hatchet, metaphorically, a few years before he died.”

Shenhua questioned, “Okay. So, this is why you want to teach me?”

Barbossa admitted, “Partly. Yes. You really are that good with your knives. But, I also figured, what better person to teach as my successor, than me in my next life.”

Shenhua said, “While I am not opposed to leaning from you. It is a bit narcissistic.”

Barbossa commented, “True. But, it is also a bit poetic.”

Shenhua stated, “Yes. Though, I have seen your movies. I do not want to remember any of those events.”

Barbossa admitted, “I am happy to hear that. Spending years as a member of the cursed undead, and then dying, and coming back to life. Those memories still haunt me to this day. Which is why I look toward to when I die and become you. I will no longer have such horrible memories. And the scars that go with them.”

Shenhua said, “Well, rest assured that I have had a good life, I am in good health, with great friends and lovers.” She thought, 'I will not mention my children, just yet.'

Barbossa smirked, as he replied, “I look forward to it.”

Shenhua asked, “So, where is the sword of Triton? Or, did gaining that sword not happen to you?”

Barbossa snorted, “Oh, I had gained both that sword, and the powers that came with it... For a time, I also captained the Queen Anne's Revenge. A fine ship, I might add. But, Jack eventually cost me all that, in a very exciting adventure. But, that is a story for another time... Along with how I came by my current sword. My cutlass. As a trophy of one of my better sword fights... But, I need to go with Ahsoka to the casino, to meet with her friend.”

Shenhua offered, “I understand. Also, the casino is on the other side of the island. And I sure if we go back inside, that someone would be glad to give you both a lift, on their car.”

Barbossa grinned, as he replied, “I would appreciate that.”

Though, as they turned around, to face the doors to the entryway that lead to the lobby, Barbossa noticed Shenhua giggle a little.

Barbossa was to Shenhua left. He looked over at the Taiwanese woman, as he calmly asked, “What is so funny?”

Shenhua turned to Barbossa, as she admitted, “This entire situation. Jack is now a woman. And you will end up me, a woman, in your next life. And pretty one at that. And you have not made a pass at any of us.”

Barbossa said, “Well, I am not that twisted. And about the others. I took a look in the eyes of your friends. Most of them are crazy. I learned a long time ago to have nothing to do with crazy women... At least not in bed... Sometime, I need to tell you about one such crazy woman. Her name was Calypso. She was the walking embodiment of a raging tempest.”

Shenhua replied, “I have heard of her. And yes. You are right. Now, let us get inside. Where we can find a ride for you and her. So, your friend can meet Annie.”

Barbossa understood what Shenhua was not saying, as he asked, “You do not want to come with us.”

Shenhua answered, “Not really. Mainly because there is a very real chance that Annie and Ahsoka could end up fighting. And I do not want to be anywhere near to force users, when they are fighting.”

Barbossa conceded, “I can see your point.”

Shenhua said, “We will talk, after you return to the hotel. That is, unless you are staying at the casino.”

Barbossa commented, “Chances are. If things go well between Ahsoka and this Annie. That she will stay at the casino. But, I will be coming back to the hotel.”

Shenhua replied, “Good. Now, let us go find you a ride.”

The two adults then headed back inside, and to the Devil's Hotel restaurant.

(_)

A minute later, Shenhua and Barbossa walked into the restaurant, with Shenhua going in the room first, and Barbossa following right behind her.

Shenhua then headed to her seat, at the table she had shared with Lotton, Sawyer, Eda, Rock, and Revy.

While, Shenhua approached her friends, she saw that no one had moved from their spots, since she and Barbossa had left.

(_)

Meanwhile, Barbossa made his way to the bar counter, where Ahsoka was standing. With Melanie nearby, on the other side of the counter.

Barbossa then came to a stop, by Ahsoka, while facing the woman.

Ahsoka turned in Barbossa's direction, as she asked, “How was your meeting?”

Barbossa stated, “Productive. And we will be leaving in a minute, to go meet your friend.”

Ahsoka replied, “Good.”

(_)

Nearby, Shenhua reached her table.

While Shenhua sat down in her chair, Revy turned to Shenhua. She asked, “What did you guys talk about?”

Shenhua got comfortable in her seat. She looked over at Revy, as she casually lied, “We were discussing scheduling for my training with him.”

Shenhua could not tell if Revy believed her lie, or not. Though, Revy clearly let the matter drop, as Revy turned to look at Barbossa.

Shenhua also turned to look at Barbossa.

(_)

At that moment, across the room, as the bar counter, Barbossa turned to those at the tables, as he calmly requested, “Ladies, and gentleman. In the hopes of continued peace between us, I humbly ask. Could anyone give us a ride to this casino, where Ahsoka friend is?”

Rock stood up from the chair she was sitting at. She turned and faced Barbossa. She stated, “I will take you, both, by car.” She mentally added, 'Just as I thought. And I looked forward to seeing this reunion between student and teacher.'

Barbossa turned to Rock, as he replied, “Thank you, lass. Though, I would prefer to know the name of my driver.”

Rock answered, “Rock. My name is, Rock.”

Barbossa commented, “Then, thank you, Rock.”

At nearby table, Benny looked over at Rock, as she asked, “Are you taking the GTO?”

Rock turned Benny, as she casually answered, “Of course.”

Benny replied, “Have fun. And please tell us what happens.”

Rock said, “Thanks. And I will” She the turned back to face Barbossa and Ahsoka.

Revy stood up from her chair, as she looked over at Barbossa and Ahsoka, then she turned to Rock.

While Revy continued to look at Rock, she said, “I am coming to. I don't want to miss this. Because I just know it is going fun.”

Rock, Ahsoka, and Barbossa, turned to Revy.

Rock replied, “That is up to you.”

Ahsoka said, “I have no problems, with you coming along.”

Barbossa commented, “The more the merrier… Revy.”

Revy turned to Barbossa, as she said, “Thank you. By the way, since we both agree that I am Jack's reincarnation.”

Barbossa replied, “That we agree on.”

Revy requested, “Do you think I could have my compass back? I twas mine, in my previous life, after all.”

Barbossa responded, “That depends, my dear, Revy. Jack was given his compass, to help him find his way in life, in achieving what he truly wanted. Have you found what you wanted in life?”

Revy looked around the room, at her family and friends, as they turned towards her. Revy turned back to Barbossa. She grinned, as she honestly said, in a happy tone of voice, “Yes. I have.”

Barbossa stated, “Then, you do not need it.” Given Revy and Shenhua was sitting at the same time, Barbossa did not have to move his head, nor eyes, to shift his gaze from Revy to Shenhua. Barbossa continued, “While I still do.”

Revy replied, “Okay. It was worth a shot.”

Barbossa casually said, “I can go along with that.”

Ahsoka requested, “Well, let's head out, then.”

Revy happily stated, “Fine. But, I am calling shotgun.” She then started walking towards the door, to the hallway.

Rock also started walking for the door, as she turned to Barbossa. She said, “You will have to forgive, Revy. She has her moments.”

Barbossa chuckled a little. He then mentioned, “Oh, Jack had his childish moments, as well.”

There was some giggling among the crowd, which Revy ignored, as she continued walking towards the exit.

Rock said, “You will have to tell me about the events, sometime.”

Barbossa happily responded, “I would be more than happy to oblige. Now, let us head over this casino.”

Barbossa then turned, and started walking towards the door, with Ahsoka following behind.

Rock also turned to look at the double-doors to the hallway, as she approached them. She saw that Revy had just exited the room, and into the hallway. With her redheaded lover turning right, towards the lobby, and to the parking lot.

A few seconds later, Rock, Barbossa, and Ahsoka exited the room, and into the hallway.

All four adults then made their way to the Devil's Hotel parking lot, to the Lagoon's red GTO. Which Rock would drive, as she took the three other adults to the Daiyu Palace Casino.

(_)

Around an hour ago. Before Barbossa and Ahsoka, met Revy, Rock, and their friends. Inside one of the basement levels of the Daiyu Palace Casino, two individuals were walking down a hallway, towards the stairwell that would lead them to the ground floor of the casino.

The two individuals walked side by side. Each individual was carrying a small black briefcase, by the handle, with their right hand. While the briefcases appeared normal, both of the cases were reinforced to hold heavy loads of weight than normal. Inside the briefcases were gold bars the two individuals had just stole from a nearby vault, in the casino.

The two thieves had done this buy one of the thieves hacking into the computer network of the casino, and introducing new IDs and orders, for the two thieves to allowed in the vault, and to get what they wanted. The hacker also looped the video, while faking the time stamp on the video. So no one was the wise. In addition, the hacker turned off the alarms in the vault.

Also, the two individuals used technological disguises that fooled those they passed by.

They each had reprogrammable security cards, for the security locks, at each of the doors leading to the secure areas of the casino. The hacker just reprogrammed their security key cards to match their new casino accounts, and their new numerical passwords for the security locks.

Along with all this, they relied on the fact that no one would expect someone to just walk into a vault and rob it, on a Monday morning.

And the theft had worked perfectly. Due to their disguises matching up with their ID information and faked electronic orders, the guards let them through. Also, it helped that the hacker thief had experience in espionage. With the first rule of breaking into a place, while being seeing, it for the thief to convince those around people him, or her, is that the thief belongs there.

Once they were in the room, with the vault door. And they were alone. The expert safecracker of the team quickly opened the vault door. With their tools, and the safecracker's skills. It seemed that the vault was so simple to the safecracker, whom had a lifetime of experience in opening very complex vault doors in short amounts of time. That the safecracker did not even need to damage the vault to open it.

Once the door was open. The two individuals walked inside. And they quickly opened their briefcases and filled the cases with gold bars. Thirty seconds later, they were done. They exit the vault, and closed it.

They then walked out of the vault room, passed the guards, and down the hallway, to the stairwell. And the reason they preferred the stairwell to the elevator was that that there was less chance of problems just going up a few flights of stairs in a stairwell, than an elevator stopping for no reason, and trapping thieves inside it.

And to those that look at the two individuals, they would see two slightly taller than normal, black haired, asian women, with athletic physical builds. With them wearing black business suits, and black dress shoes. Though, the two individuals still looked somewhat different in facial features, skin tone, and physical heights and builds.

In truth, the two individuals were men, using three dimensional holographic technology to disguise both their appearances and voices from others.

As the two people walked down the hallway, with no one around them, and no doors nearby, the person on the right, whom was Herman, said, in a female sounding voice, in english, “I really don't like looking and sounding like a chick.”

Tony looked in front of them, as he stated, a female sounding voiced, in english, “I am not exactly crazy about it, either. But, sometimes you have to do things, to get the job done. And the trade off is worth it. We were able to walk in. Get the gold. And walk out. With no hassle. I wish most my jobs went this well.”

“Besides, it is not like we are woman. Our holoprojectors just make us look and sound like them. And we only have to deal with this for another five to ten minutes. Then, we will be gone, with enough gold to last us, comfortably, for a few years.”

Herman replied, “I guess I can live with it, for that long.”

Tony said, “That is the spirit.” He thought, 'And I am also happy these holoprojectors were also able to hide a few inches of our height, and mask our voices. Or, we would have still have had problems. Fortunately, Herman let me doing the talking. And I am fluent in chinese. So, with the IDs, disguises, electronic order, and language barriers solved, walking in was no problem at all, for us. Now, we just need to get out of here with our loot.'

The two disguised men soon made it to the door to the stairwell. They had already turned off the security sensors to the stairwell, they were using, before they had even entered the casino. The did so, with their computer equipment, that was currently in their getaway car.

The two men then opened the door to the stairwell, and entered it, with them shutting the door behind them.

They then continued up the stairwell, which would take them to the ground floor, near the gaming floor. From there, they would calmly make their way through the gaming floor, to the lobby, to the outside front doors, and finally to their getaway car, which was parked in the front part of the casino parking area.

(_)

A few minutes later, on the gaming floor, Annie was walking towards Spike, whom was standing near the back of the gaming floor.

That morning, after breakfast, Annie was bored. So, she decided to check on everyone, at the casino. Which was technically part of her official job at the casino. With her job officially being the morale officer, on the accounting records. But, in truth, she was one of Chang's private enforcers.

Given Annie has use to be Darth Vader. Whom was considered one of the people to work for, in the entire multiverse. Which was not exactly true. But, even Annie would admit to herself, that as Vader, she had days that previously come close to such claims.

And given who Annie once was, the irony, and poetic justice, of her being appointed to be morale officers for the casino, was not lost on her.

And she bet that Chang did this partly due to her abilities, and partly, because he found irony to be humorous.

Still, Annie occasionally performed her job as morale officer, to break the monotony of her life. And she did this by checking on the various employees at the casino. And being an empath helped immensely with her morale office job, because she could use her abilities to immediately tell if one of the employees was having trouble with their jobs. Or, their life.

In either case, Annie did have the authority, to send employees to be checked out by either by one of the staff doctors, or therapists.

That morning, Annie was wearing her usual jedi robed clothing, and shoes. She had her lightsaber clipped on the right side of her belt.

Meanwhile, Spike was in the middle of her morning shift, as pit boss for the gaming floor. Among other things, the woman with a green fro, was wearing a white, short sleeved button up shirt, black pants, black coat, black leather belt, white socks, and black dress shoes. Her black coat was closed over her shirt, so she looked more professional.

As Annie came to a stop near Spike, Spike continued to look around the room, as she calmly asked, in english, “How are you doing this morning, Annie?”

Annie casually answered, in english, “Fine, Spike. And you?”

Spike stated, in a casual tone of voice, “I am doing okay. So, are you here to relieve me of my shift. I hear that you have been doing such job as pit boss, on your shifts, that Jet and I might soon be out of a job.”

Annie responded, “Nah. We like you both two much, to do that to you. Besides, that has been more of a part time job for me.”

Spike inquired, “Okay. Then, what have you been up to this morning?”

Annie replied, “I am just checking up on people.”

Spike commented, “So, you are on that job, right now. Well, that is actually a good thing to do. That is what being a morale officer is all about.”

Annie responded, “Thank you. I was wondering. Do you have time for small talk?”

Spike continued looking around the room, as she answered, “Sure. It has been a slow morning.”

Annie inquired, “So, there has been no cheating this morning?”

Spike replied, “None that I have seen.”

Annie said, “Good. How is your daughter doing?”

Spike stated, “Julia is doing great.”

Annie responded, “Wonderful. I hope she is also spending time with children her own age.”

Spike said, “I have that covered. But, I do not wish to speak of such matters in public. And yes. She has some friends her own age.”

Annie realized that this was a sensitive topic for Spike. So, she decided to change the subject. She questioned, “That is nice. And I fully understand. So, are you seeing anyone?”

Spike cracked a grin, as she teased, “Why do you ask? Are you looking for a date?”

Annie commented, “No. I am just bored. And I am looking for some small talk, with someone that I trust.”

Spike stated, “I understand. Well, I am currently. As they say here. Having friends with benefits, with Faye. But, that is mainly because we are no seeing anyone else. It is not a deep relationship. Just two friends that are looking for a good time, for the moment.”

Annie asked, “I have done that before, myself. Though, what about Jetta?”

Spike said, “Surprisingly, she not interested in me. In that way. She wants to keep our relationship purely platonic.”

Annie commented, “That makes sense. She does value her friendships.”

Spike said, “Yes. She does. And do not get me wrong. She is no virgin. Since her change, she has a lot of fun. Though, she has been careful with using protection, like the rest of us.”

Annie thought, 'So, Jetta is using condoms. She always was one of the more responsible one here. Still, I wonder.' She inquired, “Of course. So, who has she been seeing?”

Spike answered, “You know how some people play the casino on this gaming floor. She is playing the employment of the casino, in a similar manner.”

Annie stated, “That could cause problems.”

Spike responded, “Not really. She does not get involved with the employees on the floor here. Or, anyone else that might be under her, in that way. So, there are no problems.”

Annie said, “Well, that is not bad. I might think about doing that. If I get desperate.”

Spike playfully joked, “If you get that desperate, give me a call.”

Annie cracked a grin, as she teased, “Maybe, I will.”

Just then, Annie sensed something through the force. She turned towards the path leading from the elevator bay, through the gaming floor, and to the lobby. She saw two chinese women, in black suits. With each woman carrying a small briefcase in their right hand.

The two women were walking side by side, as they made their way through the gaming floor, with them soon reaching the front lobby.

Spike noticed Annie looking at the two women. She asked, “What is?”

Annie continued to look at the two individuals, as she stated, “Those two are not women. They are men in some sort of energy based disguise. Inform security, we have a problem.”

Annie then started walking toward the two individuals, as Spike pulled out her radio.

Spike thought, 'I would take too long to find someone to relieve me of my post, so I could join in. But, I can call for backup.'

Spike said, into the radio, “Guys we have a problem. Annie spotted two individuals in disguises. We are not sure what they look like. But, you know Annie and her abilities. Anyway, the two individuals are in the gaming floor, heading for the lobby. Annie is walking over to confront them, and she requests back up.”

Over the radio, Mal said, in english, “We are on our way.”

(_)

Meanwhile, Annie walked very quickly, but quietly, towards the two women. So, she would not alert the casino costumers.

When Annie came within thirty feet of the two individuals, she was already in the hallway between the gaming floor, and the lobby. With the two individuals just entering the front lobby of the casino. And at the moment, there were not that many people in the adjoining hallway, nor the lobby areas.

And none of these people were between Annie and the two men in disguise.

Annie kept walking towards them, as she ordered, “Stop where you are?”

The two individuals came to a stop, as they turned look at Annie.

Tony stated, in a female sounding voice, “Looks like we had been made.”

Herman replied, in a female sounding voice, “Looks like it.”

Herman then used his left hand to press a button his belt, that dropped his disgust, revealing who he was to everyone around him.

Herman said, in his male voice, “At least we can drop these ridiculous disguises.”

Tony use his left hand to press a button on his belt, which instantly dropped his disguise as well. Tony happily said, in his male voice, “That is so true.”

Standing before everyone, were the supervillains, Taskmaster and Shocker. In their physically buffed glory.

Taskmaster, whom sometimes went by the alias, Tony, was wearing a variation of one of his older disguises. He wore blue, super-tough tight, over his entire body, except for his head. Over his blue tights was white boots, white skin tight shorts, white gloves, and a utility belt, which had a number of small pouches and weapons attached to it.

Taskmaster also wore his white, skull mask, which completely covered his head. The skull face of the mask had holes for his eyes, nose, mouth, and ear. And the skull face fitted over his own face to the point that the skull face moved with his facial movements. Though, Taskmaster was not wearing his cloak and hood, because of the risk of it brushing up against someone.

Standing to Taskmaster's right, was Herman 'Shocker' Schultz. Shocker was dressed in his usual costume, which was a yellow and red quilted styles pants, shirt, and mask. With the mask being a sky style mask that completely covered his head, with slits for his eyes to see through. Shocker also wore red boots, and gloves. And his chrome colored vibro-smashers gauntlet weapons, which were on his forearms. Along with his chrome colored utility belt around his way.

Shocker's vibro-smashers worked by sending a continuous stream of vibrations of compressed air at a target, or object. Depending on the level of power, a single blast could knock someone down, or destroy a small building. Though, Herman prefer was on of the few supervillains that did not like to harm people. Let alone kill people. And he did not care to destroy things.

When it came to safecracking, Herman considered himself more of an artist, than a demolitionist. And in the end, when it came to Hernan's job, he was in it for the money. Or, in this case, gold. As such, he believed revenge to be a foolish endeavor.

The people around the two men were not sure what was going on. But, they all quickly scattered out of the lobby, to avoid any problems. Even the nearby employee staff, behind the check in desk, and chip exchange booths, quickly back away, as they fled into other parts of the casino.

Annie immediately recognized the two men, as she thought, 'Oh no. It is Taskmaster and Shocker. Still, it was good I long since looked into the backgrounds of all the people Lee mentioned in her stories. Still Lee, this is another one of your loose ends.'

'Okay. I know who I am dealing with, and what they can do. And I will try to take them alive, and relatively unharmed. If for any other reason, than Lee was correct. This is likely one of the best two men teams for stealing, there is.'

'And Lee and River would probably want to meet them. With Chang owing me a favor, for capturing to people, whom he might want to give a job to.'

'Anyway, I need to take them down quickly, before they hurt someone. If I remember from what I read about them. Taskmaster is far more dangerous in combat that Shocker is. Though, Shocker is not to be underestimated, either. And to many people around, to directly use the force. So, I will use a swift aggressive lightsaber style against them. That should deal with them quickly. Though, I will be careful not to cut off their limbs, nor kill them.'

Annie quickly unhooked her lightsaber, as she quickened her pace towards the two men. She the ignited the red energy blade, in front of her, as she held her held the hilt with both her hands.

Taskmaster kept his eyes on Annie, as he handed Shocker his small briefcase, in his right hand. He said, “Here. Take this. I will handler her, as quick as I can.”

Shocker to the small briefcase in his left hand. He said, “Good luck.” He then backed away from the fight.

Meanwhile, everyone nearby, also swiftly backed away from Annie and Taskmaster.

As Annie came closer to the two men, she saw Taskmaster then unhook something from the right side of his belt, with his right hand.

Taskmaster then held up the cylinder, and a yellow blade ignited from it, showing that it was a lightsaber.

Annie thought, 'It looks like I am going to have to do this the hard way.'

By then, she reached Taskmaster, as she attacked him with her lightsaber.

But, to Annie's surprised, Taskmaster held his lightsaber with just his right hand, as he was able to counter her attack.

Both of them held their ground, with Annie attacking as swiftly as she could. But, Taskmaster was countering her every strike. Though, Taskmaster was not attacking, but instead going solely on the defensive.

Still, as Taskmaster blocked Annie's strikes, with little effort, he smugly said, “I bet you didn't expect me to have one of these. And from the aggressive attack you are giving me, it is clear you recognize us.”

“To be honest, I am flattered. But, you did not take into account that I also learned you lightsaber styles from a force user, that was master of lightsaber combat. And he likely never realized how much he taught me, with me watching, while I used my photographic reflexes to learn from him.”

Suddenly, their red and yellow blades clashed to a stop, as they pressed against each other.

Taskmaster used the opportunity, to push the two blades away from them, to his right. He then quickly used his left knee to hit Annie in her stomach.

This caught Annie off guard, as the blow knocked the wind out of her.

Taskmaster followed up his attack, by using his left fist to punch, across the right side of Annie's chin. The blow knocked her to the ground, flat on her back.

As Annie fell, she let go of her lightsaber, which automatically deactivated, as it dropped to the ground, to her left.

While Annie laid on the ground, she looked at Taskmaster and Shocker. And she saw that Taskmaster did not press his attack.

Annie got back her breath, as she thought, 'I should have just used the force on them. Though, there were too many witnesses. And after knocking me to the ground, Taskmaster could have clearly killed me. But, he didn't. So, I will cut them some slack, and let the casino security handle them.'

'Also, it is rare for someone to be able to successfully mix physical blows in lightsaber combat. But, that only shows how skilled Taskmaster is.'

Meanwhile, Taskmaster deactivated his lightsaber, as he turned to Shocker. He then hooked his lightsaber to the right side of his belt, as he said, “Move to plan B. We need to get out of here, right now.” Next, Taskmaster pressed a button, on his utility belt, which summon their vehicle.

Shocker looked at Taskmaster, as he replied, “Okay.”

As Herman turned around to face the front of the lobby, he thought, 'At least Tony is agreed to follow my no killing rule. With Tony saying that he liked a challenge. Now, to get us out of here.'

Shocker then gently sat down his two briefcases, on their sides, on the floor. Next, he stood straight up, as he aimed both his vibro-smashers at the outer lobby wall, to the left of the entrance doors. After which, he fired two low level blasts, with his weapons, at that part of the outer wall.

Fortunately, by then, the people whom were inside the lobby had fled into adjacent rooms, or outside.

The vibrations against the wall did two things. One, it set off shape charges they discreetly placed on the outside. With the explosives designed to go off when sensing very powerful vibrations. The other thing the vibrations of compressed air did was to prevent the explosion from blowing into the building.

Given both Tony and Herman's experience with explosives, they knew how much explosives and use of force to pull off this trick.

That trick being that when the explosive went, it was with just enough for to blow into the building. But, the compressed air vibration prevent the wall pieced from blowing back. This created a crushing force on both sides, of the wall, at once, which pulverized the wall into small bits of rubble.

While Shocker could have just used his vibro-smashers, at a higher level, to just blow out the wall to the outside. Herman preferred doing this trick, because it prevent shrapnel from being created by the explosion. Thus, preventing anyone that might be outside, or inside, near the explosion, from being harmed.

Thus, the blast created a hole, six feet in diameter, to the outside, with only a little dust in the air, as the debris.

Fortunately, since there was no one there, the only damage was to the wall, and some nearby furnature.

By then, the security team had showed up. The team was comprised of six people. All of them running side by side with each other. They were Chief of Security Mal, Zoe, Wash, Jayne, and two female security guards. All six of them were carrying automatic rifles. But, they made sure to keep them pointed away from those around them.
which was composed of six people

Taskmaster saw the team first. He warned, “Behind you.” He then moved out of the way, and to the left side of the room. So, Shocker could have a clearly line of sight

By that time, the security team reached Annie, and passed by her.

Shocker turned around, and he saw the team. He then fired both his vibro-smashers at the floor, in front of the security team, at low levels. The force of the blasts, knocked the security down on the ground, on their backs. But, they were all otherwise unharmed.

Just then, everyone saw a blue, four door, convertible car, with the roof and side windows down, appear right outside the hole in the wall. With the left, driver's side of the car facing the hole.

Was the first to run towards the Taskmaster. As he passed by Shocker, he used his right hand to quickly picked up the briefcase, to Shocker's right side, without missing a beat.

Taskmaster then said, “Our ride's here.”

Shocker then swiftly turned around to a face the hole, as he used his right hand to pick up the other briefcase. After which, he ran right behind Tony, as they both headed for the car on the other side of the hole.

While they ran for their exit, they both pressed a button on their utility belts.

Behind the security team, Annie was the first to stand up. As she stood straight up, she used the force to telekinetically pull her deactivated lightsaber, into her right hand. She then clipped her lightsaber the right side of her belt, as she back away from the security team.

By then, the security team were back on their feet, as they fired their rifles at the two men.

Though, as the two thieves fled, the security team watched as their bullets bouncing off the lightshields surrounding the two men.

The two supervillains did not bother to look behind them, as Herman said, “See Tony, I told you these things would work.”

Tony stated, “And I am glad they do. Now, let's get out of here. And I'm driving.”

Herman replied, “That is fine with me.”

Across the room, Mal stopped firing his rifle, as he ordered, “Hold you fire!”

Mal team immediately stopped firing their rifles, as well.

By then, on the other side of the lobby, the two men both reached the hole, and the blue car, on the other side of the wall.

Taskmaster was first to the car, he tossed his briefcase in the backseat of the car, as he jumped into the driver's seat.

A second later, Herman reached the car. He tossed his briefcase in the back seat, he then dove into the backseat, as well.

The security team, and Annie, then watched as the car took off into the air, by some hover technology. With Taskmaster quickly piloting his car, into the sky, and away from the casino.

The team stared at the hole, as they were momentarily surprised as seeing a car suddenly fly.

Jayne commented, “I would like one of those cars.”

Wash said, “So would I.”

Zoe commented, “Only after you get your pilot's license back.”

Wash turned to Zoe, as he replied, “I am already working on it.”

Zoe said, “Good.” She then turned to Mal, as she calmly inquired, “So, Captain. How are we going to explain this to Chang?”

Mal looked over at Zoe, as he answered, “Simple. We will pull all the footage, and sensor recordings we have, for the last few hours. At the same time, we will find out where they have been, as we check on those places. And the computers. It is a save bet our computers were hacked. And from all this, we will figure out how these two slipped by us, and escaped. And as we do this, I will explain what happened to Chang.”

Mal then handled Zoe his rifle.

Zoe let go of her rifle, with her left hand, while still holding her weapon with her right hand. She then gripped the forearm of Mal's rifle, with her left hand.

With his hands free, Mal used his right hand to pulled out his cellphone from a pocket. Next, he used his right hand to dail a number, After which, Mal used his right hand to hold his phone up to his right ear, as the phone began to ring.

After a couple of more rings, the other end answers the phone. On the other end of the line, Chang picked up. He had caller ID on his cellphone. Chang asked, “Yes, Mal? What is it?”

Mal calmly stated, “Sir, we have a problem.”

Mal then began explaining the situation, of what had just happened.

(_)

Almost an hour later, inside the living room of the penthouse apartment, in Daiyu Palace Casino.

Chang, River, and Lee were sitting on the couch, as they watched the film of of the fight in the casino lobby, on their big screen TV, for a third time. There was no audio from the camera recordings. Just silence.

Meanwhile, Chang was on his cellphone. With River to his left, and Lee to River's left.

The first time they had watched the video and viewed Taskmaster defeating Annie, Chang was shocked at what he saw. River was confused on how this could happen. And Lee shook her head a few times, at seeking someone knock Annie to the ground.

Presently, Chang hung up his cellphone, and put it away, into one of his inner coat pockets.

Chang turned to River and Lee, with Lee and River looking at him

Chang stated, in english, “That was Zoe on the phone, with an update on what is going on.”

Chang thought, 'And the only time Mal has Zoe speak for him, to me, is when he is embarrassed. And he is clearly embarrassed about this whole mess. And he should. And so am I.'

'And I am not going to hold this against Mal. Because, at least he was the first person to call me. And he let Zoe handle talking to me, afterward. That was professional of him.'

River and Lee turned to Chang, as River asked, in english, “So, what new information does she have?” She mentally added, 'Even though I can read your mind Chang, it is better if you just tell us, out loud, what is going on. And I will not mention how embarrassed you feel, on the matter.'

Chang said, “Well, Zoe and Wash are checking over the vault. While Jayne is overseeing a team of computer technicians we have on staff. Presently, they finished a full diagnostic of the casino computers.”

River inquired, “And what are the damages?”

Chang answered, “Surprisingly none, for the vault they broke into. Nor, for the computer system. Jayne, and the technicians, found no damage to the software, nor trojan viruses. The only things they found was a number of security settings changed, and a few IDs and orders, added into the computers.”

“But, it is the speed at which they pulled this off that concerns me. If what Zoe told me is true. And what Jayne found, on the computer timestamps, is correct. Within a matter of less than three hours, these two thieves hacked the casino computers, created a few accounts, adding some fake electronic orders, and used the items to get into one of my vaults.”

Lee stated, in english, “I am not surprised. While Taskmaster is known for his hand to hand skills. He is very good at hacking computers. And Shocker is artist when it comes to safecracking. They make a good stealth style team.”

Chang flatly agreed, “Clearly they do.”

River turned to Lee, as she pointed out, “Which is why you did just that, Lee.”

Chang raised an eyebrow, as he questioned, “What?”

River turned back to Chang, as she explained, “Using Lori, from Book Three of Lee's stories, Lee teamed them up. She even had Lori, as Bob, explain to the both of them, on how they would make a great team. And now we are literally paying for it.”

Lee mentally grumbled, as she sarcastically thought, 'Thanks, River. I was hoping not to mention that to, Chang. I just hope he doesn't hold this whole mess against me.' She then continued her thoughts, in a more calmer manner, 'Though, it is ironic that Taskmaster and Shockers ended up, unknowingly, robbing the two people responsible for this situation. Chang, whom they were running from. And me, whom wrote them into teaming up, and leaving their reality, in the first place.'

River turned back to look at Lee.

Lee saw River nodded once, to confirm she had read Lee's thoughts.

River then turned back to look at Chang.

Chang slowly said, “Well... We will get to that in a minute. We need to talk about a few other matters, first.

Lee quickly took the opportunity to change the subject from herself, as she asked, “You are correct. So, where is Mal?”

Chang stated, “Zoe stated that Mal was in the front lobby, overseeing the repairs with Annie. With both of them also handle crowd control. Our repair personnel should be there within half an hour to oversee repairs.”

Lee inquired, “How bad was the hole?”

Chang responded, “Not too bad. To quote Mal. They way they actually destroyed it was a work genius. The only rubble was within two meters of the hole on both sides. And there was a little dust.”

“Except for a few pieces that need to be replaced. The furniture just needs to be cleaned. And the hole itself was just on part of the wall, without a window, support beam, nor electrical wires in it. So, it is just a patch job. And it will likely only take a few hours to fully repair.”

Lee replied, “Well, that's good.”

River asked, “Speaking of which. How are we going to handle the witnesses?”

Lee stated, “That is a good point. Those two might not be the most well known supervillains. But, they are recognizable.”

Chang said, “I was just told over the phone that Mal and Annie are already seeing to that. Since no one was harmed, we are just going to say it was theatrical stunt that got a little out of hand.”

River commented, “That could work.”

Lee said, “I agree. That would be a good excuse to give on why two men in full costumes were in public.”

Chang replied, “Correct.” He thought, 'And that is why I employ intelligent people. Because, they can come up with ideas like this, on the fly.'

River mentioned, “To bad that this happened in the casino lobby, or Arcee could have been called in to deal with them.”

Chang stated, “True. But, I am actually happy this did not turn into a destructive battle. And from what Annie told me, a little while ago, by phone, that is why she only relied on just using her lightsaber. There were just to many people around to risk a major fight.”

Chang thought, 'Also, she did not want witnesses to see her use the force. Men in costumes, and explosions can be explained. Telekinesis is harder to explain.'

River shrugged, as she complimented, “Well, those are some good points.”

Chang replied, “Thank you.”

Lee inquired, “Do we have any other information? Like camera footage from the vault? Or, the hallways leading to the vault? And how did they get to and front vaults, and the ground floor.”

Chang answered, “They used a stairwell. They looped the camera systems in stairwell, and basement areas. They even faked the timestamp on the video. They likely didn't mess with the videos from the gaming floor, and lobby, due to the traffic, and regular security checks there.”

River stated, “They are good.”

Lee asked, “Yes. They are. So, what are we going to do about these security flaws?” She then continued, in an embarrassed tone of voice, “And my oversight concerning those two thieves?”

Chang responded, “Relax, Lee. I am let you off the hook, on this matter. After all, I was the one that both helped design the security systems that run this casino. And I approved both those systems, and those that run those systems. As such, I have only myself to blame for this mess.”

Lee happily thought, 'It is nice that Chang believes that the buck stops with him. And I admire such responsibility in leadership.'

River make a small grin at Lee's thoughts. She then commented, “It was all our fault, in some ways. We relied too much on a computer ID system. And this is the second time in a month, this oversight has bit us in the ass. We should have done something about this security loophole, once we found out that Matthew was able to walk into a secured area, take a reality device, and walk out, without being caught.”

Chang agreed, “You're right. I will start ordering changes be made today. Where members of the security team, whom monitor the video cameras, in the security room, have to approve someone, each time a person uses their ID to enter a secure area. I will also look into setting up scanners that detect holographic technology, like those two thieves used. So, this will not happen again.”

River said, “I like those ideas.

Lee commented, “So do I.”

Chang replied, “I am glad for both your votes of approval.”

Lee asked, “So, what did they take?”

Chang stated, “Zoe says they took ten large bars of gold, and nothing else.”

River commented, “They knew what they wanted, ahead of time. They took what they needed, and no more. No bad, on their part. It shows they are not greedy.”

Lee said, “And that is chump change to you.”

Chang replied, “Exactly. To be honest, I am more embarrassed over the theft, itself. Than, what was taken.”

Lee commented, “Okay. Still, I hope we don't have to kill them, when we eventually find them.”

Chang scoffed, as he said, “Killed them? Actually, I plan to hire them.”

Lee inquired, in a confused tone of voice, “I thought you would feel differently. Usually, when someone steals from you, in such a disrespectful manner, it would be a death sentence.”

Chang responded, “True. But, I have to admit these two are real ballsy to pull something like this off, in the morning, on a weekday. They would have gotten away clean, if Annie had not sensed something was up. And from the way they pulled this off, I can guess they are in it for the money? Not revenge, nor ideology.”

Lee said, “From what I know of them. Yes. That is true.”

Chang stated, “Good. That gives me something to work with. As such, I am thinking of hiring them. And I will tell them that I would consider what they stole to be the down payment for their employments.”

Lee commented, “That would be a good approach. And what Tony and Herman just pulled, puts what Danny, Rusty, and Linus, did to shame. And that is saying something.”

River started chuckling, at Lee's comment.

Though, Chang did not get the reference. He asked, “I do not get reference?”

By then, River had calmed down.

Lee answered, “Ocean's Eleven.”

Chang questioned, “The nineteen sixty movie starring the Frank Sinatra and the Rat Pack? They didn't get away with the money, at the end of that film.”

Lee stated, “No. The two thousand one, remake of Ocean's Eleven, starring George Clooney. And the remake's two sequels. Ocean's Twelve, and Ocean's Thirteen, respectively. And in the remake the thieves got away with the money, using a very creative theft and escape plan. And they were able to successfully pull off their cons in the two sequels, in inventive ways.”

“Besides George Clooney, all three movies had an all star casts. In addition, I consider these three movies to be George Clooney's finest work, next to the films, The Men Who Stare At Goats, and Peacemaker.”

Chang said, “I have not seen any of those movies.”

Lee responded, “Well, don't feel bad. While, I have seen The Men Who Stare At Goats, and Peacemakers, years ago. I only got around to watching the Ocean's film trilogy a few years ago. During one of our brief stays here. I regret not seeing them sooner. The ideas in those movies could have helped me a lot, when I first came to this city.”

Lee thought, 'And before, when I was working on my stories.'

Lee continued, “Still, I enjoyed watching them. And they are a fun trilogy to watch, back to back.”

River stated, “I watched the movies with Lee. The movies are a real treat to watch.”

Chang questioned, with a bit of disappointment in his tone of voice, “And you did not feel like informing me about those movies?”

Lee said, in a sheepish tone of voice, “Given you are a casino owner, we didn't want to put you in a bad mood.”

Chang commented, in a more casual tone of voice, “I always love a good heist movie. And finding out there are three good ones that I have not seen makes me feel better.”

Lee said, “Then, we will have to watch all five of those movies, sometime.”

River stated, “We will make room in our schedules, to them watch those movies together, within week, or so.”

Chang replied, “That will be fine.”

Lee commented, “Good. Now back to those two thieves. You said you were thinking about, when we find them, that you wish to hire them?”

Chang requested, “Yes. And considering I am thinking of hiring them. Refresh our memories, and tell us about those two that robbed from us. How they were able to do this? And why?”

Lee commented, “The, why, is simple enough. They likely just needed some travel money. The two of them are Taskmaster and Shocker. The guy in the skull mask is Taskmaster. Shocker is the guy in the ski mask. Taskmaster, also known as Tony, is very skilled at breaking into places. And he is an excellent computer hacker. Shocker, whose given name is Herman Schultz, is an excellent safecracker. Between the two, they make an excellent stealth thieving team.”

“As you pointed out. If Annie didn't have the force, to sense them with, they would have just walked right out the front door with no violence happening. Also, Herman has a, no killing rule. So, we don't have much to worry about from him.”

“Though, Shocker does have his gauntlet weapons. He calls them, vibro-smashers. They fire compressed air. And can be used to create a lot of damage.”

“Taskmaster is a hand to hand expert. And he can literally copy any moves he can see. He cannot copy super-power. But, he can copy and perfect, a martial art style, just by watching a practitioner of that style, for a while.”

Chang thought, 'Still sharp as ever, Lee. Nice.' He asked, “Given what they can do, they do make an interesting duo. Which is why I am not upset. Just embarrassed. Still, I want to know about those disguises and personal forcefields? The guards said those two looked and even sounded like women? But, they way they changed back on video showed that it was just an illusion, instead of an actual physical change.”

Lee said, “The disguises are likely variations on holo-projectors, which existed in their home reality. Such technology even includes voice modulators. And, on occasion, Tony has been known to use such technology.”

Chang questioned, “And the security cards?”

Lee answered, “They probably programmable security cards they already had on them. They just reprogrammed the cards to match their new casino accounts and passwords. Such identification counterfeiting is not that difficult. Even on this world.”

Chang inquired, “We will have to look into updating our security cards, as well. Also, with that lightsaber, and those moves by Taskmaster, they have been to a Star Wars reality. Though, I do wonder about their forcefields?” He thought, 'I would like to get my hands on some of them.'

Lee stated, “Likely modified lightshields from the Outlaw Star reality. They spent some time there.”

Chang thought, 'So, that is where those items are from. Still, I do vaguely remember something about that, in your stories.' He questioned, “Which was your doing?”

Lee replied, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Sadly. Yes.”

Chang groaned. He then asked, “Even though I wish to hire them. Should we worry about those two coming back?”

Lee responded, “No. As you correctly guessed. Unlike their contemporaries. Both of them are in it for the money. Not revenge. Those two know when it is time to leave. This is likely just a quick robbery, to get some spare gold, as spending money. They won't be back. So, unless they took some magical artifact from the that vault, we should be okay.”

Chang said, “Good. And I don't keep my magic items there. I have a deeper, much more hidden, and secure, vaults, for such items.”

Lee stated, “Okay. Also, keep in mind, those two are not the type to stick around for two long, anywhere. If you do hire them. I suggest you use them as freelances.”

Chang said, “I will take that under advisement. We will track them get done we finished here, and after we get back from our kingdom.”

River said, “I can live with that.”

Lee replied, “So can I.”

River asked, “Though, I was wondering. Was that really a flying car that they escaped in?”

Chang answered, “Yes. Zoe mentioned that security scans registered an outward bound reality jump, that was high up in the air, over the island. That was probably their flying car. And they likely jump realities using technology in their flying car.”

Lee pointed out, “If your security did such scans, why didn't they pick up those two, when they first came to this reality.”

Chang admitted, “I like to keep such sensors off, because they can be tracked back to the casino. Or, wherever they are place at. Like a radar dish, or radio antenna, can be found.”

Lee conceded, “That is a good reason to only use them, sparingly.”

Chang asked, “My point, exactly. So, do we have to worry about any other powerful costumed villains showing up here?”

Lee answered, “Maybe. It is possible that other costumed villains and heroes might show up. But, they are all going to learn very fast that this reality does not have a, no killing rule, to those that break the law. Either they will lay off, or get shot to death.”

“The vigilantes of this world do not do wear costumes. They do not want to attract attention. They are like Paul Kersey, from the Deathwish films. They will quietly take care of business, and move on. And the press does not like to report on such matters, because it reflects badly on the authorities the press seems to worship.”

“Though, on a side note. This also works for us. Because as long as we do not make to much of a big deal about what happened. The press will stay out of this. And we will be fine from that angle.”

Chang replied, “Good.”

Suddenly, the phone began to ring.

River offered, “I will get it.” She got up, walked passed Lee, and over to where the wireless phone was attached to its base, on a nearby table. She picked up the phone, pressed the talk button, and held it to her right ear. She said, “Hello.”

On the other end, Revy replied, “Hi River. This is Revy. I need to speak to Lee, for a moment.”

River turned and walked over to Lee and Chang. She held out the phone, to Lee, as she stated, “It is for you. It's Revy.”

Lee took the phone, and placed it her right ear, as she said, “Hello Revy. I am kind of busy at the moment.”

Revy flatly responded, in annoyed tone of voice, “Well, I have an important question for you.”

Lee sighed. She then inquired, “Okay, Revy. What do you need?”

Revy asked, in a straight forward manner, “Lee, am I the reincarnation of Jack Sparrow?”

The line was silent for a few seconds, as Lee thought, 'So, she finally found out on her own. I will find out, how, later. Right now, I need to handle this conversation very delicately.' She then calmly answered, “Yes. You are. How did you find out?”

Revy stated, “I would love to tell you. But, you will find out, soon enough.”

Lee replied, “I look forward to find out. By the way, this is not my fault.”

Revy responded, “I believe you. You are crazy. But, not that crazy.”

Lee thought, with relief, 'Oh, I am so thankful for small favors.' She replied, “Thank you.”

Revy inquired, “So, how did you find out?”

Lee thought, 'I am not going to involve Melanie in this mess. Even if she was the cause of it. She is to dear a friend for me to do that to her, and Bao.' She coyly answered, “Something happened to your mind that caused you to regress to Jack's memories and persona. I am not sure what. I wasn't there when it happened. I was just the one to clean up the mess, afterward. Though, you were still you. There was only one voice in your head, you just happened to prefer to be Jack at the time.”

Revy inquired, “Okay. I can guess that is the day I blacked out and awoke in that pirate's costume? I knew that outfit looked familiar.”

Lee stated, “Yea. And I am glad that Annie and River were able to put Jack back into the bottle.”

Revy wondered out loud, “Yea. I am grateful for that. Still, I want to know. Why did you help do that, Lee? I would think being Jack would be more fun. And you would prefer me to be, Jack. Even I will admit that I can sometimes be a bitch, and quite a handful to deal with.”

Lee thought, 'Now, to explain my reasons. And hope she understands.'

Lee answered, “I am glad you are willing to admit that. And I have six reasons for wanting to return you back to the personality you currently have. Revy, you may sometimes be a bitch, but you are always honest in your intentions. Jack was not. She figured out who I was. She is arguably more ingenious than Rock, Chang, or even myself.”

“While you are monogamous, she is promiscuous. I even caught her seducing Annie. And being that way would destroy your relationship with Rock and your family. She planned to make me her student. And she came onto me.”

Revy agreed, “You did the right thing, Lee. Thank you.”

Lee thought, 'Good. She understand.' Lee offered, “You're welcome. And if you start remembering your time as Jack, contact us immediately. We do not want that world class troublemaker, like Jack, on the loose in this reality.”

Revy said, “Don't worry. I will.” She then hung up the phone.

Lee lower the phone from her ear, press the talk button to disconnect the line from her end. Next, Lee handed the phone to River.

River then walked over to the table with the phone's base on it, and she placed the phone back on its base.

After which, she returned to sit down between Chang and Lee.

River and Chang turned to Lee.

River smiled mischievously, as she inquired, with a bit of mirth in her tone of voice, “So, how did you find out?”

Chang also asked, “What did Revy want?”

Lee turned around to face River and Chang. She saw River's smile, as she thought, 'Of course. You would already know, River. Still, I am not going to get Melanie in trouble over this. And I know you are going to keep this secret from everyone. Including Chang.'

Lee responded, “Well, to add to our woes. Revy has somehow learned that she is the reincarnation of Jack Sparrow.”

River questioned, “How did she find out?”

Lee stated, “She didn't tell me.”

Chang asked, “Does she remember her time as Jack, at the casino?”

Lee answered, “I don't think so. And it sounds like she is not upset about finding this out about herself.”

Chang stated, “Good. We have other concerns to contend with, right now. And at least, her Jack Sparrow personality is presently dormant.”

Lee agreed, “True.”

River inquired, “So, what is the plan? And how can we help?”

Chang answered, “I am heading to my office to make a few phones, to help sort out this mess. I want you two to head down to the security room, and assist Jayne.”

“You both know your way around the computer system. And helping Jayne and the technicians, while Mal, Zoe, and Wash are busy, would be a good idea. Jayne is a good subordinate. But, I don't want him in charge of a team for an extended period of time.”

River said, “Fair enough.”

Lee replied, “Okay.”

Chang said, “Now, let's go.”

The three adults then got up from their seats, on the couch.

Chang then started walking towards the door to the hallway, outside of the apartment area.

River walked over to the TV, and pressed the off button, on the lower right side of the surface. Then, she and Lee walked over to join Chang at the door.

As Chang opened the door, and walked through it, towards his office. With him leaving the door open for his two lovers.

A few seconds later, River and then Lee, walked through threshold hold of the door, and to the hallway.

As Lee exited the living room, she locked the back of the knob, and pulled the door shut, behind her.

Then, River and Lee headed down the hallway, towards the back express elevator, to get to the main security room of the casino.

(_)

Fifteen minutes later, Rock drove her GTO into the front side of the parking lot of the Daiyu Palace casino.

Rock soon found a parking spot near the front entrance of the casino.

Rock then parked her car, to where the front of the car faced the parking lane, and the casino. So, in case the reunion did not go well, she and Revy could make a quick escape.

Rock put her car in park, turned off the ignition, and put away her keys. She undid her seatbelt. Next, with Revy in the front passenger seat, to her right, she turned to look between the seats, at Barbossa, whom was behind her driver's seat, and Ahsoka, whom was behind Revy, as she said, “Well, here we are.”

While, Revy, Barbossa, and Ahsoka undid their seatbelts, Barbossa looked out the front window of the car, at the casino.

Barbossa commented, “You people definitely like to build big things in this age of man.”

Rock stated, “Very true.”

Ahsoka looked at the front window. She scoffed, “This is nothing compared to buildings of Coruscant.”

Revy turned to look between the seats, towards Ahsoka, as she stated, “Coruscant is a class onto itself.”

Ahsoka shrugged, as she agreed, “True.”

Revy happily stated, “Now, let's get out of the car, so we have the big, happy reunion, and possible fireworks.”

Ahsoka looked at Revy, as she commented, “If I didn't know better. I would think you were hoping for a fight.”

Revy gave Ahsoka a wicked grin, as she admitted, “That is because I am.”

Rock looked at Revy, and then to the two adults in the backseat, as she commented, “I apologize. But, Revy sometimes gets this way. She is a lot better than she use to be.”

Ahsoka deadpanned, “Really?”

Barbossa looked over at Ahsoka, as he calmly said, “Relax, Red. Some people are just that way. As long as they are not picking a fight, you have little to worry from them.”

Ahsoka turned to Barbossa, as she replied, in a polite tone of voice, “Thanks, old man.”

Barbossa said, “You're welcome. Now, let's go see your friend.”

After Rock and Revy opened the two car doors were still open. The two lovers then got out of the vehicle.

Rock and Revy then lower their front seats forward, so those in back could get out.

Ahsoka then immediately got out of the car, with Revy raising her seat, and shutting the door behind her.

It was then that Rock noticed that Barbossa did not have his sword on his waist. She also saw that Barbossa's sheathed sword, in its scabbard, was in the backseat of her car.

Rock thought, 'He must have had taken off his scabbard and sword, while we were traveling.'

Rock watched as Barbossa started to undo his belt buckle.

Rock thought, 'He is getting ready to put his sheath back on his belt. That reminds me. I need to ask him to do something.'

Rock requested, “Barbossa. Please, don't take this the wrong way. But, while Ahsoka's lightsaber would not attract attention, unless it is ignited. I request that you please leave you gun and sword here. The owner and management, personally know us. So, they do not mind Revy having her weapons. But, they did not know you.”

Barbossa looked over at Rock, as he flatly said, “I prefer to keep my weapons with me.”

Rock stated, “And I can respect that. Though, I do not want to start a fight in there. That casino has a lot of wealth inside the building, and security there is very wary about guarding such wealth.”

Barbossa conceded, “Aye. I can appreciate that. But, I still wish to keep my weapons.”

Rock said, “I will offer you a compromise. Leave your sword, but you can take you pistol, as long as it is holstered. We will vouch for you. And as long as you are with us. There should not be a problem.”

Barbossa stated, “I can live with those terms.” He then redid his belt buckle.

Rock replied, “Good.”

Barbossa then got out of the car, and took a few steps, to stand back from the car. Rock then used the controls to electronic lock the door, and closed the driver's side door.

After which, the four adults turned and walked towards the casino. When they were all passed the front of the GTO they grouped back together, in a row. Rock to the far left, with Barbossa to her right side. Ahsoka was to Barbossa's right side. And Revy was to Ahsoka's right side.

While they walked, Revy asked Barbossa, “Barbossa, why do you call Ahsoka, Red? It is because of her red hood and clock?”

Barbossa looked over at Revy, as he stated, “No. I call, Ahsoka, here, Red, because when my friend here gets angry, she can cause more bloodshed in a single battle, than I can in an entire decade.” He then started to chuckle evilly, as he turned to look at the casino they were approaching.

Ahsoka smiled at her friends comment. She then adjusted her hood and cloak, to better hide her face and body.

Rock overheard their comments. She thought, 'I really hope that Revy knows better than to try to start a fight with a force user, or we could all be in for a lot of trouble.'

They soon approached the large front entrance, carport awning that covered the front entrance and a few lanes of vehicle traffic, and three large concrete pillars, acting as supports for the far end of the awning.

The four adults saw that presently, there were no vehicles near the entrance.

As they came closer then not only saw that valets, but they also noticed, to their right, near the entrance, the large hole in the wall of the casino.

Revy loudly stated, “Wow. What happened here?”

Rock calmly replied, “Let's find out.”

Just then, Ahsoka slightly grinned, as she said, “I sense that my friend is nearby.”

Rock cautioned, “As long as you don't start a fight, I don't think there will be a problem.”

Ahsoka smirked under her hood, as she replied, “Don't worry. I don't start fights. I finish them.”

The four adults soon reached the entrances to the casino. When the valets saw Rock and Revy, the recognized them, and the opened the doors for them, and their guests, with all four adults walking inside. With the valets shutting the doors behind the four adults.

(_)

At that moment, inside the front lobby of the building, near the hole in the wall, Annie was standing by Mal. With no one near them.

Due to the damage, there were a couple of guards near each of the entrances to the room. These guards had been assigned by Mal to steer the customers away from the lobby area that was damaged. And except for those that were there to talk to the clerks, and tellers, the other guests were politely requested to head further into the casino, or outside, until repairs could be done.

Presently, Annie saw that Mal had his encrypted cellphone in his right hand, as he held his cellphone to right ear. And from what she overheard of the conversation, it was Zoe that he was talking to, for the last five minutes.

A second later, Mal disconnected his phone, and put it away, into a pocket.

Annie continued to look at Mal, as she asked, “So, what is going on?”

Mal turned Annie, as he answered, “The good news is that Zoe said that Chang is okay with the situation. We just need to get this hole fixed.”

Annie commented, “Let us count our blessings that this hole is the only major damage we have to worry about.”

Mal stated, “I agree. The repair personnel should be here in about fifteen to twenty minutes.”

Annie inquired, “What is the hold up?”

Mal responded, “They are getting together their tools and materials for this patch job.”

Annie commented, “That is understandable.”

Mal said, “Yes. It is. And until they get here, one of us will have to be here, to make sure everything goes smoothly.”

Annie questioned, “Do you have anywhere better to be?”

Mal thought, 'Annie will immediately know if I lie to her.' He replied, “No. Zoe, Wash, and Jayne are handling everything else that needs doing on our end. How about yourself?”

Annie said, “Not really.”

Mal asked, “On another matter. I was wondering. This cover story should work. But, do you know any force tricks that might help us?”

Annie answered, “Unfortunately, no. While I do know the basic mind trick ability. And a few of few less than savor mental techniques against others, that require a bit of concentration. I do not know any real force techniques dealing with crowd control and mind tricking large groups of people, at once.”

Mal commented, in a casual manner, “Well, that explains the brute force, and lack of people skills, in your previous life.”

Annie flatly replied, “I will let that comment slide.”

Just then, Mal saw Annie turn her head towards the entrance. She was looking at four adults whom had just entered the casino.

Mal noticed this, as he asked, “What is it?”

Annie kept looking at the entrance to the lobby, as she giggled a little, at the joke she was about to tell. She coyly said, “I sense a disturbance in the force, from someone I have not seen, in several years.”

Mal groaned, as he got Annie's joke. He then inquired, “In a good, or bad, way? There has already been enough damage done to the casino, for one day.”

Annie continued look at the four adults nearby, as she answered, “Good. Very good. Let me introduced you to an old friend.”

Annie then started walking towards the other adults. Mal followed beside her, to Annie's left side.

Mal looked over at saw the four adults. He recognized two of them, as he thought, 'So, Revy and Rock are here, with an old man and a woman in a red cloak and hood. I wonder which one of them knows Annie. And it looks like I am about to find out.'

(_)

Across the room, Rock and Revy came to a stop, with Barbossa and Ahsoka stopping one step after the couple did, in response to Rock and Revy stopping.

Barbossa asked, “What is the hold up?”

Ahsoka smiled under her hood, as she answered for Rock and Revy, “To our right.”

All four adults turned to their right, to seem whom was approaching them. They saw a woman and man walking towards them. The woman had brown hair, and wore a brown robes over white pants, shirt, and shoes. The man wore a black business suit, with dress shoes.

While Ahsoka continued to look at Annie, she asked, “Is that her?”

Rock answered, “Yes. That is Annie.”

Ahsoka grinned, as she replied, “Good. And at least she looks cute.”

Revy cracked a grin, as she commented, “You should see her in a bikini.”

Ahsoka giggled a little.

Meanwhile, Barbossa remained silent, as he only moved his eyes towards Revy. A second later, he turned back to look at the two adults approaching them.

Just then, from the corner of her eye, Revy saw a female guard approaching them, from the front entrance.

The guard was about to confront the four adults.

But, by then, Annie and Mal were within ten feet of the other four adults, as they came to a stop.

Mal turned to the guard, as he said, “Let them be. And go back to your work. They are with our friends. So, we can trust them.”

The guard looked over at Mal, and nodded once. She then turned around, and headed back to her station, at the front entrance, where a few other guards were.

Barbossa looked over at Mal, as he said, in a sincere tone of voice, “Thank you, kind sir.”

As Mal and Annie both came to a stop, eight feet in front of the four adults, Mal stated, “You're welcome. I am Malcolm Reynolds, the chief of security for this casino.”

Barbossa replied, “Nice to meet you.” He thought, 'I do not think I will give my name just yet. Until I am more sure of the situation, and the people, around us.'

Mal looked at Rock, Revy, and the two newcomers, as he thought, 'While I do not know who these two newcomers are. And even with one of them being armed. I am sure that anyone that can stand Revy for more than five minutes has enough self-control to not do something stupid while in this casino.'

'Also, it is clear the old man is sharp. He did not give me his name, yet. But, I will get it in a minute. Though, for now, I will let Annie handle this. Considering she at least knows one of these two individuals.'

Annie and Ahsoka silently looked at each other for a few seconds. They were close enough that Annie could see Ahsoka's mouth and chin, under her hood.

Ahsoka was the first to speak, as she asked, “Anakin?”

Annie replied, “It is Annie, now?”

Ahsoka inquired, “So, what I was told is true?”

Annie said, “Yes.”

Ahsoka stated, “It has been a long time.”

Annie agreed, “Yes.”

Ahsoka inquired, “I heard about your little coup, on Coruscant. Why didn't you include me?”

Annie said, “I couldn't find you.”

Ahsoka said, “Fair enough.” She smiled, as she continued, “It is good to see you.”

Annie returned the smile, as she replied, “Same here.”

The former teacher and student then took a few steps closer to each other, until they were able to hug each other.

While they hugged, Annie said, “I am glad you are alive.”

Ahsoka replied, “Same here.”

Revy look at the two women hug each other, as she thought, 'As touching as this is. There are other matters to deal with.'

Revy turned to look at the hole in the casino wall, as she thought, 'So, this is what Lee meant by being busy. I thought she was having a different kind of busy, in her bedroom. I guess I was wrong. Though, we might as well find out what happen.” She looked over at Mal, as she joked, “I see you have done some redecorating.”

Mal turned to Revy, as he flatly replied, “Ha. Ha. Revy.”

Rock thought, 'Neither Revy, nor Mal, are the most social of people. I best step in, before this becomes a contest to see who can be the most macho. The last time that happen, between these two, was at one of our bikini parties. With Mal as a woman, as well. And as funny as that was watch. This is not the time and place for that.'

Rock calmly asked, “What happened?”

Mal answered, in an even tone of voice, “A break in and theft. It is being handled. Though, no one has been harmed.”

From Mal's tone of voice, the other adults knew better than to ask any other questions.

By then, Annie and Ahsoka let go of their hug, and they took a few steps back from each other.

The former teacher and student continued to look at each other, with warm smiles on their lips.

Annie happily said, “It is good to see you, again.”

Ahsoka joyfully replied, “It is good to see you, as well.”

Ahsoka look Annie up and down. She then look at Annie's face, as she commented, “You certainly have changed.”

Annie replied, “And for the better.” She then turned to Mal, as she stated, “Mal this is my old friend, and a former student of mine. Her name is Ahsoka Tano. She is a Togruta. An alien. That is why she is hiding her appearance from everyone here.” She mentally reflected, 'Though, with all the strangeness in this city, I doubt any of the locals would look twice at a pretty, humanoid alien.'

Mal turned to Annie and Ahsoka, as he said, “That is understandable.” He mentally lamented, with a bit of sarcasm, 'Great. That means she is likely a force user and she has a lightsaber, on her, which she knows how to use. And this just what we need. Another force user. I will just have to warn the others to not play poker with her. Because, if she is a good as Annie, she could clean house, with everyone, but River and Lee.'

Annie turned back to Ahsoka, as she went onto say, “Snips, this is Mal. As he just stated, he is the head of security here. And he is a friend. Though, he is rough around the edges.”

Ahsoka looked over at Mal, as she said, “Nice to meet you.”

Mal turned to Ahsoka, as he replied, “The feeling is mutual.”

Revy noticed the nickname, as she asked, “What is with the, Snips, nickname?”

Ahsoka turned to Revy, as she calmly answered, “It is a joke about my former attitude, when I was a teenager.”

Annie commented, “Yes. You had a real, snippy, attitude back then.”

As Ahsoka turned back to look at Annie, both Ahsoka and Annie giggle a little.

As the two women calmed down, Ahsoka replied, “And I still do, in some ways.”

Annie giggled a little more. She then smiled, as she stated, “Well, it is good to have you here.”

Ahsoka said, “It is good to be here.”

Annie complimented, “And I have to say. It is a smart move on your part to wear a hood and cloak, to hide your appearance. It is a simple, yet elegant solution. And it is rare for aliens to come to this planet. So, you have good reason to hide yourself from the public. But, in the privacy of this employee parts of this casino, you do not need the cloak and hood. The employment here has seen far stranger people than you. And if one of the customers sees you, we will just say you are in makeup for a performance.”

Annie thought, 'This would not the first time we have given that excuse for someone. And that excuse works.'

Ahsoka happily said, “Thank you for informing me.”

Annie replied, in a warm tone of voice, “You're welcome.”

Mal thought, 'Now is my chance.' He turned to Barbossa, as he calmly requested, “Now, that we know who your friend is. Who are you?”

Barbossa looked over at Mal, as he introduced himself, in a slightly humorous tone of voice, “I am, Hector Barbossa. You might have heard of me.”

Mal immediately put the name with Hector's face. He replied, “I have.”

Mal thought, with worry, 'Oh... I am so glad I saw those pirate movies about him... Still, we have Annie's former student, and one of the most craftiest pirates in the multiverse, together, in the casino. With Revy and Rock. Chang needs to handle this. Not I. Annie, Revy, and Rock, will at least listen to him, if things start to go bad.'

Mal stated, “If you will excuse me. I have an errand that I need to run.”

Rock turned Mal, as she said, “Have fun.”

Rock then looked back over at the others around her, as they continued their conversation.

Meanwhile, Mal turned towards the right side of the room, from the entrance. He then began walking towards the door that lead to the back of both the check in desk, tellers.

While Mal walked, he thought, 'That was not a lie. So, I should be okay. Now, to find a place to contact Chang, where Annie, Revy, and Rock's sharp ears won't hear me.'

A few seconds later, he reached the door. He pulled out his security key card, and slid it against the electronic lock, by the door. He then put in his personal password, as he thought, 'While Chang didn't tell me why. He did request that I change my password. Which I did.'

Mal heard the door unlock, and he pulled it to him.

As he walked into the small hallway on the other side of the door, he shut the door behind him. He then put away his key card, and he pulled out his encrypted cellphone.

Mal held his cellphone in his right hand, as he used his left hand to speed dial he had preset in his contact list.

While Mal dialed the number, he thought, 'I need to tell Chang what is going on. After all, he is the boss. So, he should handle this, himself. And just in case things go bad, I will hang back here. So, I can have a heard start.'

'I have no illusions about my chances against two force users. And with Barbossa and Revy there, there is a real chance that things could go real bad, real quick. Even with Rock present.'

'And if things go well, I will stay here, until the repair team shows up, to hand off the job of fixing that hole to them.'

As Mal finished dialing Chang's personal cellphone number. He held his phone up to his right ear.

The phone rang a few of times, before Chang picked up.

On the other end of the line, Chang inquired, in a tired tone of voice, “What is it this time, Mal?”

Mal calmly said, “Chang. This is important... There are some people that have just entered the casino, with Revy and Rock. Their names are Ahsoka Tano, a friend of Annie's. And Hector Barbossa. And yes. I believe he is that Barbossa. Annie is there, with them. And I left her to handle things. They are currently in the front lobby.”

There was silence for a few seconds, on the line. Chang then replied, in a more firm tone of voice, “Thank you, Mal. I will be right there.”

Chang hung up the phone, from his end.

Mal turned off the connection from on his cellphone. He then put his cellphone away, into the pocket he had pulled it out of.

Mal then stood, as he leaned his back against one of the walls of the hallway. He thought, 'Now, to hope that things work out for the best.'

(_)

At that moment, inside the main security room of the casino, a rare instance had occurred. With the casino security staff being on alert, without alerting their guests. Though, with the other casino staff being told to just act normally.

Most of the casino security had assigned elsewhere. Some of the security were appointed to main the front lobby, to help with flow traffic at the entrance and hallway that lead into the lobby. While others personnel were sent to guard the other entrances to the casino. In addition, two security personnel each, were assigned to guard each of the various casino vaults, and security storage lockers. And most of the security staff that was left, were sent to increase guards that already were stationed within the gaming floor, and a few other places.

Even Arcee was called in to stand outside the back garage entrances, in her motorcycle mode.

The only ones currently in the main security room was Jayne, was there because Mal and Zoe trusted him to direct the other staff, with the communications equipment in the room. Also, there was some computer technicians, at various work stations, whom were checking on and repairing the casino computers, software issues. And River and Lee, whom just reached the room five minutes ago, with the two women being there to help Jayne.

Presently, Jayne was sitting down in a swivel chair, at a computer workstation. He had just finished up his parts in doing the final parts of the computer diagnostic programs on the main casino computers. With the diagnostic programs stating that all computers were reported to be fine.

When the computer system was installed, the security staff was given lessons on how to use it. Including, Jayne, Zoe, and Mal. And Wash presently using some of his off hours to better learn the computer system, so he could do his job better, as a member of the security staff, at the casino.

River and Lee were standing behind Jayne. And all three adults were all looked up at the wall in front of them. The wall in question was the wall in front of them, in the main casino security room. The wall had video screens laid out across it, in a grid pattern, which showed silent video feeds from the various security cameras placed in the casino.

Presently, all three of them were watching the video feeds that showed different angles of the front lobby of the casino. And the group, composed of Annie, Rock, Revy, and two newcomers.

Less than a minute ago, the three adults had watched Mal leave the group of adults standing around the front lobby entrance. The other adults were Annie, Rock, Revy, and old bearded man in black colored, biker clothing, and a woman whose looks were hidden behind a red hood and cloak.

And Lee was the first person to realize who the old man was, as she asked, “Is that?”

River had read Lee's thoughts, as she said, “I think he is.”

Lee commented, “And who is that woman that Annie just hugged? I wonder who she is?”

River responded, “She is wearing that hood and cloak to tightly for me to tell. And I am not going to try to telepathically sense the thoughts of one of Annie's friends. So, there is only one way to find out.”

Lee stated, “I agree. It is not worth the risk. And you are correct, there is only one way left.”

River mentioned, “Also, all of Annie's friends tend to be very powerful, and very dangerous.”

Lee replied, “I know.”

Jayne kept looking at the video monitors on the wall, as he inquired, in a confused tone of voice, “Girls, I cannot understand you... What are you two talking about?”

Lee looked down at Jayne, as she explained, “While we don't who the woman that Annie just hugged is. We do recognize the old man as the pirate captain, Hector Barbossa.”

Jayne asked, “I do not recall the name?”

Lee said, “Barbossa is one of the main characters from Pirates of the Caribbean movies.”

Jayne replied, “Okay. So, he is an old pirate from those movies. What does that mean?”

River looked down at Jayne, as well. She answered for Lee, by stating, in a serious tone of voice, “It means that he is a crafty old pirate who knows how to start a whole lot of trouble. He is almost at Jack Sparrow's level, in such savviness. And whomever is with him, is a friend of Annie's. Add to that Revy is nearby, and you have a massive recipe for possible destruction.”

Jayne turned around in his swivel chair, and looked up at the two women, as he said, “Okay. That explains why the captain left. But, we just got robbed, less than two hours ago. We don't need anymore trouble today.”

Lee stated, “Yes. We agree.”

River responded, “We have to get down there before something bad happens. If you do not mind, Jayne. I would prefer you to stay here, and keep an eye on things.

Jayne said, “No problem. Let me know if you need any help.”

River replied, “We will.”

River and Lee then turned and walked towards the exit of the security room, that lead to a back hallway, that would take them to the front lobby of the casino.

Jayne turned in his swivel chair, as he silently watched the two women reach the door. Lee was first to the door. She opened it, and held it open for River. Lee then, walked through the door, and closed it behind here.

Jayne then turned his swivel back to face the wall of with the monitor screens on it.

On one of the video feeds he watched as River and Lee walk down a back hallway, away from the security room.

When Jayne saw them turn the corner, to another hallway, and he knew that he was likely at a safe distance from them, he let out a sigh of relief.

Jayne continued to look at the various video feeds, showing River and Lee walking through the back hallways.

While Jayne watched the two women, he thought, with mild annoyance, 'Hiding my thoughts, and emotions, are becoming such a chore.' He then continued his thoughts with more happiness, 'But, after so long, at least I know I can do it, when it comes to River, and Annie.'

'And if River and Lee want to handle this mess. I say, let them. I am getting the same pay and benefits, if I am doing my job in here, or out there, on the floors.'

'And in the long run, all that doesn't matter. The people do, but this job doesn't. What does matter is dinner tonight, and those I will be with... I am so looking forward to seeing them.'

'Also, the fun thing about being fourth in line, in the management and security of this casino. Next to Chang, then Mal, then Zoe, is that nobody questions me when I leave, unannounced. And if Mal, Zoe, Chang, or the others ask where I have been, I will just tell them I was on an errand. Which is not truly a lie. And they take my word at face value.'

'And since Wash has returned, it has been so much easier to work with Mal and Zoe. Especially, Zoe. And they are so happy, that they both could care less about what I am doing, as long as I am not harming them, our friends, nor this casino's reputation.'

'Also, Zoe and Wash's wedding was fun. Good people. Good cake. Good dancing. Good music. Good party. And it was good to see both Wash and Book again. As adults. And they both remember me.'

'And should any of them catch me, at what I have done. I can always point out that what I did was actually less troublesome than what River and Lee did to bring back Wash and Book.'

'And while I am not sure about Chang, River, and Lee. Mal and Zoe are many things. But, they try their best not to be hypocrites.'

Jayne then went back to his job, as he patiently waited for the evening to come.

(_)

Meanwhile, as River and Lee walked down the hallways, to the front lobby, River asked, “Do you think we should contact Chang?”

Lee responded, “No need. I would already guess that Chang is on his way, as well. As Chief of Security, Mal is suppose to handle situations like these. And he does have a sense of honor in doing so. But, he is not stupid. If he feels he cannot handle a situation, he will ask for help. And the only person his pride would let him call, while doing this job, would be his boss, Chang. That is likely the reasons that Mal excused himself. So, he could find someplace private to contact Chang, and let him step in to handle this mess.”

River said, “That makes sense. Sometimes I forget how sharp you are.”

Lee replied, “Being sharp comes with this lifestyle.”

River agreed, “You are right about that.”

The two women then continued walking down the hallway they were in.

(_)

At that moment, nearby, Chang was just walking out of the gaming floor, and into the hallway leading between the gaming floor and the front lobby.

Except for Chang, there was no one else in the hallway.

When Chang got the call from Mal, he had immediately started heading downstairs, to talk to those that Mal had mentioned by phone.

As Chang walked he thought, 'Even after everything that has happened this morning. I am pleasantly surprised that Mal has the fortitude to call me directly, when the situation warrants it. And this situation does warrant my direct attention.'

'Besides defusing a potential problem like this. Which needs my personal attention. I need to keep things peaceful, so there is not any more damage to my casino.'

'Still, how did Ahsoka and Barbossa end up in this reality? I will just have to ask them, when I see them.'

Just then, as Chang approached the locked doors, along the wall of the hallway, to his right, Chang saw one of the doors open. And Chang saw River and Lee walk out the door.

Lee shut the door behind her.

A second later, Lee and River spotting Chang, and they quickly walked up to him.

The two women walked up to be beside Chang's right. With River being beside Chang, and Lee to River's right.

There was no one else around, as they walked through the hallway.

As the three adults continued walking towards the front lobby, Chang inquired, “Let me guess. You recognized Barbossa on the video screen?”

River said, “Got it in one.”

Lee questioned, “So, how did you know what is going on?”

Chang stated, “Mal called me, to let me know what was going on.”

Lee thought, 'Told you.'

River cracked a grin at Lee's thoughts. She then said, “Still, we could not figure out who the woman in a red clock and hood, whom was hugging, and talking, to Annie.”

Chang said, “That must be Ahsoka Tano.”

Lee asked, “Annie's former student?”

Chang stated, “The very same.”

Lee said, “Then, this could be worse than we thought.”

Chang conceded, “That is possible.”

Lee then realized, as she stated, “I think it might be worse. It is possible Barbossa was the one to inform Revy about Jack.”

River said, “That would explain why Rock and Revy are with them.”

Lee commented, “And it is likely Rock and Revy gave those two a lift here, to see Annie.”

River agreed, “That is very possible.”

Chang asked, “While, I agree. I want to know how could Barbossa know the connection between Jack and Revy?”

Lee said, “Likely the same way Barbossa and Ahsoka found Revy in the first place. They clearly used a reality device to get here. Then, they used Jack's magic compass.”

Chang deadpanned, “Oh... That is just great.” He then asked, in a more curious tone of voice, “Still, is there any way we could get our hands on that compass?”

River pointed out, “We have to first confirm the compass is here.”

Lee responded, “I am sure the compass is here. That compass is the only way all the pieces fit. And Jack would guard that compass with his life. Still, I know for a fact that the Jack we met, as Revy, died from a noose in Caracas. He. Well, she told me. It is very possible that Barbossa was involved in Jack's death, and he got his hands on Jack's compass.”

Chang questioned, “So, how do we get the compass from Barbossa?”

Lee stated, “We don't. At least not for the moment. We don't want to create an incident. Especially, with Annie, Revy, and Ahsoka, nearby. That is just asking for trouble.”

Chang conceded, “True. Still, you are our resident manipulative bitch. No offense.”

Lee cracked a grin, as she replied, “None taken. Considering all three of us are magnificent bitches, or bastards. Depending on our moods.”

River giggled a little at Lee's joke.

Chang smiled, as he asked, “Touche. So, how do we get the compass?”

Lee answered, “Simple. Though, it will not be right now. We will have to be patient. Barbossa is an old man. And he likely realizes he will die soon. And he knows better than to leave such a dangerous artifact unattended. He will likely leave it to someone he knows. Maybe someone here. The person might even be Revy. We will just the person and make we then a fair offer for the compass.”

Chang complimented, “Good idea.”

Lee replied, “Thank you.”

River suggested, “Why don't we just offer the vat treatment. Restore Barbossa's youth, in exchange for the compass. Even with the gender change. I don't see how he could refuse the offer.”

Lee stated, “I completely disagree. If even half of what happened to the movies, happened to this Barbossa. Which I don't see any reason not to assume that. Then, he has literally been a member of the undead, and he as been killed and come back from the dead at least once.”

“He knows what is waiting for him on the other side of death, and he has never acted once in fear of dying, and going back there... No. He is likely looking forward to death, like a long, well earned rest.”

Chang questioned, “So, you don't think he went to hell?”

Lee commented, “If he did. He must have made a good impression on the devil.”

Chang said, “That is possible.”

River asked, “Still, how could Ahsoka even be here? She is not from the movies.”

Lee pointed out, “You forget that I used Cad Bane in my stories. And Ahsoka is from the same series and meta-timeline as Cad Bane. They are both from the Clone Wars animated TV series.”

River inquired, “So, why didn't you use her in your stories?”

Lee stated, “She was a child during the series. And at the end of the series, she left the order. So, there was hope for her future. And I didn't want to mess her up anymore than she already was. I just hope she is not here for revenge against Annie.”

River said, “I won't worry. Annie can take care of herself.”

Lee pointed out, “Actually, if those two clash, I am more concerned about those around them.”

River questioned, “That is a good point. We just need to make sure that doesn't happen.”

Chang calmly requested, “Well, we will get our answers in a minute. And defuse this problem, at the same time. And please let me do the talking.”

Lee commented, “That works for me.”

River replied, “Of course.”

The three lovers then continued walking down the hallway.

(_)

Meanwhile, at the front lobby, Annie, Ahsoka, Barbossa, Rock, and Revy, were still standing together, in a group, while facing each other, as they continued their conversation.

Annie turned to her former student, Ahsoka, as she asked, “So, where are you two planning staying?”

Ahsoka looked over at Annie, as she said, “I am not really sure.” She turned to Barbossa, as she asked, “What do you think?”

Barbossa turned to Ahsoka, as he answered, “I plan on heading back to the Devil's Hotel to check in. I believe that they accept gold there.”

Annie said, “They do. And so does this place.”

Barbossa looked over at Annie, as he stated, “That is good.” He turned to Ahsoka, as he suggested, “Though, Red, I feel you need to be with your friend here.”

Ahsoka replied, “Of course.” She turned to Annie as she commented, “Though, while Barbossa has some money. I don't have anything to pay for lodgings.”

Annie stated, “Don't worry. I will pay for your room and board.”

Ahsoka smiled at Annie, as she replied, “Thank you.”

Just then. Chang, Lee, and River walk up to the five adults.

As Change Lee, and River came to a stop a few feet from the group, the other adults turned to look at them.

Chang stated, “I am Chang. The owner of this casino.”

Barbossa commented, “I did not expect to meet the owner of this establishment so soon.”

Chang stated, “When my scheduling allows. I make it a policy to try to meet high provide individuals, such as yourselves, when you show up.”

Barbossa replied, “Of course.”

Annie said, “Let introduce everyone. You already know who Chang is. The two women with him are River and Lee. River is the redhead, and Lee is the black haired woman. River, Lee, the woman in red is my friend, Ahsoka Tano. And the man with us is, Hector Barbossa.”

Ahsoka turned to River and Lee, as she politely commented, “Nice to meet all three of you.”

Chang, Lee and River looked over at Ahsoka, as River replied, “Same here.”

Chang commented, “It is always nice to see new faces, and meet new people.”

Lee stated, “I looked forward to getting to know you, better.”

Barbossa commented, “I always liked the additions of more pretty faces.”

Lee looked at Barbossa, as she replied, “I appreciate that.”

Chang turned to Revy and Rock, as he asked, “So, Revy, Rock, how did you end up with these two?”

Revy answered, “Well, Barbossa found us with his... Well, my former magic compass. And he told me about my previous life as Jack Sparrow.” She shrugged towards Ahsoka, as she continued, “And it seems that Ahsoka here has been traveling with Barbossa for a while now.”

Chang commented, “That is interesting.”

Barbossa turned to Revy, as he flatly questioned, “Lass, are you sure you are not Jack, right now? Because you certainly share the secrets of others, easily. Just like Jack.”

Chang teased, “So, that is where she gets that from?”

Except for Revy, Barbossa, and Chang, the others laughed a little at Chang's comment.

Revy apologized, “Sorry. I got a little ahead of myself.”

Barbossa calmly said, “Oh well... Don't feel to bad about it. It would not take one long to figure out I have that compass.” He turned to Chang, as he flatly stated, “I can see it in your eyes that you want my compass. And the answer is, no. I am not selling it.”

As those adults that had been laughing, calmed down, Chang complimented, “I am fine with that. And while I wouldn't mind purchasing that item from you. I have no intention of trying to steal it.”

Barbossa stated, “Aye. Yet, you are gambling my age will aid you in gaining my compass, when the reaper finally comes to claim my soul for good.”

Chang admitted, “Yes.”

Barbossa said, “At least we are honest with each other.”

Chang commented, “A rarity in our professions”

Barbossa agreed, “Absolutely.”

Lee thought, 'Someone needs to change the subject, before we accidentally create the very problems we are trying to avoid.” She turned to Ahsoka, as she asked, “So, what are your plans, while staying here, in the city?”

Before Ahsoka could speak, Revy interrupted, “While I am not sure about Ahsoka here. Barbossa here is planning to teach Shenhua few things about sword fighting.”

Lee commented, “That is not surprising. He is one of the best sword fighters of his time.” She mentally reflected, 'And he is getting up there in age. Finding a student would likely be a hobby for him.'

Barbossa turned to Lee, as he said, “Thank you, young lady.”

Lee looked over at Barbossa, as she replied, “You're welcome.” She then turned back to Revy.

Revy stated, “Exactly. And he just beat Shenhua in a sparing match, back at the hotel bar.”

Lee smiled, as she answered, “I wish I could have seen that.” She thought, 'I wonder if the Lowe family still had access to the hotel security camera system. Or, I could just ask Melanie for a copy. I am sure, if I asked politely, in person, she would gladly give me copy.'

Revy inquired, “By the way, about the day I blacked out and awoke in that pirate's costume. Though, I don't remember that time. I now know I was Jack during that time. What I don't know is how did you get me back to normal?”

Lee answered, “Fortunately, Annie and River, here, were able to put Jack back into the bottle.”

Annie commented, “It wasn't that hard.”

River agreed, “No. It wasn't.” She thought, 'Once we got Jack to agree to allow us to put her back into a dormant state.'

Revy looked over at Annie and River, as she said, “I am glad to hear that. And should that happen again, I know who to go to for help.”

River offered, “Anytime you need it.” She thought, 'I agree with Lee, that should Jack return. She would cause nothing but trouble for everyone. Including, possibly wrecking Revy's personal life. So, I might as well keep the door open for Revy to seek our help, if that does happen again.'

Revy replied, “Thank you.”

Chang turned to Barbossa, as he said, “Now, that is settled. Since, I am the owner of this establishment, I can tell you both, that you are more than welcome to spend time here, and gamble in my casino.”

Ahsoka said, “I don't gamble.”

Barbossa coyly replied, “I prefer to gamble in other ways.”

Chang commented, “To each their own.”

Annie mentioned, “That being said. Ahsoka here has decided to stay with us.”

Chang looked over at Annie, and then to Ahsoka. He said, “That is wonderful. And what of Barbossa?”

Annie answered, “Barbossa is heading back to the Devil's Hotel.”

Chang said, “Of course.” He turned to Barbossa, as he continued, “So, you can be closer to Shenhua, as you train her?”

Barbossa replied, “Exactly.” Barbossa thought, 'This Chang is clearly a very sharp man. He has already tried to convince me to stay at the casino in a few different ways. He clearly still wants my compass. And he wants to keep me around, so he might have the chance to acquire it. I will have to watch myself around him, and his workers.'

River then realized, as she thought, 'I cannot read Barbossa's mind at all. I wonder why? Still, that is not important. And I don't dare try to read Ahsoka's mind... I will just sort this out, later.'

Rock thought, 'As fun as this is. The only reason those three would show up, is because they are concerned that a fight might break out. And with this crew, that might happen. But, I can solve that problem real quick.'

Rock casually stated, “Well, we need to be heading back to the hotel.” She turned to Ahsoka, as she said, “Ahsoka, I hope you have a pleasant time here.”

Ahsoka turned to Rock, as she commented, “I plan too, Rock. And thank you for the ride.”

Rock replied, “You're welcome, Ahsoka. And don't be a stranger. I would love to hear about some of things you know about the multiverse. Even about your home galaxy.”

Ahsoka commented, “That would take several days to tell you.”

Rock stated, “Not to worry. We have the time.”

Ahsoka said, “I will consider it.”

Rock replied, “Thank you.”

Revy suggested, “We will just invite her to have some of our drinking parties at the Rats Nest. I am sure the others will love to meet her. And such stories are great over a few drinks.”

Ahsoka responded, “I agree. And I just might take you up on your invitation.”

Revy requested, “Just think about it. And let us know.”

Ahsoka replied, “I will. And I will let you know.”

Revy replied, “Good. You can reach us at the Devil's Hotel.”

Ahsoka said, “I will keep that mind.”

Barbossa turned to Ahsoka, as he stated, “Have a good time, Red. When I get checked into my own room, I will leave a message at the front desk of this casino, with my phone number, and room number.”

Ahsoka looked at Barbossa, as she said, “Thanks. I will look forward to your message. And I will inform you when I am assigned a room, as well.”

Barbossa replied, “That will be fine.”

Chang turned to Ahsoka, as he offered, “Ahsoka. I would be more than happy to give you a tour of this casino. And then we will find you a room to stay in.”

Ahsoka looked at Chang, as she stated, “Annie already said she would help me with getting a room. Though, I would love to have that tour.”

Lee looked over at Chang, as she thought, 'Chang's tours are always fun. And I am sure, River, and Annie, are going to come with Ahsoka and Chang. So, I might as well, come also.'

Chang smiled, as he said, “Then, right this way. We will head to the gaming floor first. Since, it is the closest location in this tour. Then, we will go from there.”

Chang then turned around, and he started walking back towards the hallway that lead to the gaming floor.

Ahsoka, Annie, River, and Lee, followed right behind Chang.

Meanwhile, Barbossa, Rock, and Revy, turned, and they started heading for the front door, to Rock and Revy's GTO, that was parked out front, in the casino parking lot. So, they could return to the Devil's Hotel and Resort.

(_)

A few minutes later, Mal opened the door he was beside. He poked his head out of the small hallway he was in, and into towards the lobby. He around to the check in desk, to see that the others had left. He leaned back up straight, exited the hallway, and shut the door behind him. After which, he returned to the front lobby to wait for the repair team, which showed up ten minutes later, from the large hallway connecting to the lobby, to the gaming floor.

The repair team were pushing two carts full of tools and supplies, to be used to fix the hold in the wall.

Mal then handed off the job of looking after the hole in the wall, and repairing it, to the repair team.

The repair team then began their repairs on patching the hole in the wall. Within three hours of the start of their repair work, and the place where the hole had been, now looked exactly like it has been, before it was blown up.

(_)

Earlier, around twenty minutes after Rock, Revy, and Barbossa had lead the Daiyu Palace Casino, Rock finished driving, Revy and Barbossa, as she pulled into the front of the Devil's Hotel parking lot, and parked her family's red Pontiac GTO.

They the got out of the car, with Barbossa putting back on his scabbard and sword, on the left side of his belt. After which, Rock and Revy shut their doors, and they inside.

Though, as they head into the front lobby entrance, they did not notice another car pulling up into the parking lot, near where the GTO was parked.

As Rock, Revy, and Barbossa walked into the lobby, from the front entrance, Barbossa asked, “So, shall we retire back to the bar, with your lovely friends?”

Rock came to a stop, with Revy and Barbossa stopping right behind her.

With her back turned to Barbossa, Rock rolled her eyes for a seconds, as she thought, 'I would call Barbossa a dirty old man. But, he would likely take that as a compliment. Still, let's look around.'

Rock looked around her. To her right, on the right side of the lobby, she saw her five adult daughters, sitting around a set of four couches, that were set in a square, facing each other. The couches were placed near the windows of the lobby. And there was a low, square coffee table set in the middle of the couches. In addition, there was enough room, in the gaps, in the four corners of the couches, for someone to easily walk in and out of.

Rock also saw three women sitting with her five daughters. Those three women being Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira. She also noticed that from the facial expressions on their faces, the eight adult women were having a wonderful conversation. And though she could have listened in on their discussion, with her enhanced hearing, she chose not too.

Rock then looked to her left, and she saw that another set of four couches, turned to face each other, with a low, square coffee table set in the center. The set of couches were places by the windows, on the left side of the lobby. She saw that the rest of her family and friends were sitting around, in those couches, while they talked.

The people sitting at those couches were, Dutch, Benny, Janet, Lotton, Shenhua, Sawyer, Aeryn, Violin, Yolanda, Eda, and Roberta.

Rock also noticed, that except those she knew, and the two hotel staff members, at the check in counter, there was no one else in the room.

Rock thought, 'I guess the people here are wise enough to avoid us. Though, as long as we continue to pay for our rooms, leave the other customers alone, and we don't damage the property, we are allowed to stay here... Still, where is Hernan?'

And Rock looked some more, and she did not see Hernan, anywhere in the room.

Rock thought, 'Hernan must have gone back to work. Which is understandable. Considering he was only here to have some lunch, and visit Roberta. And after getting to know him, I think he is a nice guy. I am glad that he and his family have gotten along so well with Roberta and Garcia. I believe that Roberta and Hernan are good influences on each other.'

'Also, we are going to have to tell them about what happened at the casino. But, we really don't have any information, right now. Given Mal was tight lipped, and Annie had other matters on her mind, by being reunited with Ahsoka.'

'Still, I need to answer to Barbossa's question. And I will move on from there.'

Rock kept her back turned to Barbossa and Revy, as she stated, “No. The party has moved to here... This way...” She turned to her left, as she walked over to the older members of her family and friends.

Revy and Barbossa followed Rock.

A few seconds later, they reached the women whom were sitting down at the couches.

As they approached the adults that were sitting down, the other adults stopped talking, while they turned to look at the three newcomers.

Rock came to a stop, as she stood by the back, right corner of the couches, from the front left corner of the room, to allow those sitting down, to be able to turn, and look at them.

Barbossa stood behind Rock, to Rock's right.

Meanwhile, Revy walked around Rock, and she went over to sit down on the couch where Benny, Janet, and Dutch were. Fortunately, there was still enough room for her to sit down on that couch.

Dutch was the first to speak, as she casually asked, “So, how did it go?”

Barbossa replied, “Wonderfully.”

Rock coyly replied, “It depends on how you look at it.”

Dutch inquired, “What do you mean?”

Benny asked, “Was there a fight there?”

Rock answered, “Yes. But, the fight happened before we got there.”

Revy stated, in a casual tone of voice, “The casino got robbed.”

Except for Rock and Barbossa, Revy's comment took everyone else around them, by surprise.

Dutch said, “I never thought I would see the day someone stole from Chang in such a brazen manner.”

Benny replied, “You and me, both, Dutch.”

Janet said, “The thief, or the thieves, either don't know who they stole from. Or, they are suicidal.”

Roberta commented, “Or, they just like a challenge.”

Dutch said, “There is challenging, and there is crazy. This is borderline for both.”

Roberta replied, “Most real challenges are.”

Shenhua stated, “Either way, that would be an extremely unwise action to take.”

Violin stated, “Well, whomever stole from Chang must have some a serious pair of stones.”

Aeryn commented, “And whomever did it, must be very intelligent and resourceful. Chang's security is formidable. Even by Peacekeeper standards.”

Yolanda said, “You are correct about that.”

Eda questioned, “Who would do this?”

Rock said, “We don't know. Those at the casino are not talking. Though, we will find out, later.”

Yolanda commented, “That would likely be wise. Given, Chang, and the other things, are very prideful people.”

Rock agreed, “That is true.”

Janet asked, “Do the thief, or thieves, escape?”

Revy mentioned, “Though, from the hole in the wall, in the front lobby of the casino.
I am guessing that the thieves got away.” She though, 'Given Mal not have been acting so uptight, if they had caught, or killed them.'

Dutch inquired, “How bad was the damage?”

Revy replied, “Not bad. And they will likely have the hole completely repaired by later today.”

Dutch said, “Well, that is good.” She thought, 'And it means Chang will not be too upset.'

Janet stated, “Still, whoever these guys are. I hope they know how to hide. Because Chang will eventually come after them.

Roberta turned to Janet, as she commented, “While I agree with you. Given that they were able to achieve a successful break in and theft, I believe Chang might try to hire them.”

Sawyer flatly asked, “Chang would not that foolhardy? Would he?” She turned to Shenhua, and Lotton, whom were sitting right beside her, to her left, on the couch they were sitting at.

Sawyer saw Shenhua and Lotton looking at her.

Shenhua just shrugged, in response.

Lotton said, “It is possible. Chang does value talent. And anyone that could break in, and get away, would be talented. Though, it would depend if anyone got hurt.”

Rock stated, “Mal stated, no one was harmed.” She thought, 'And from the way everyone was acting there. I believe that is the case.'

Lotton replied, “That is good.”

Benny asked, “So, how as the reunion between Annie and Ahsoka?

Rock said, “It went very well.”

It was then that Barbossa chose to speak up, as he stated, “Yes. Red seems to be happy with her meeting with Annie.”

Lotton guessed, “You don't have a clue who Annie is?”

Barbossa turned to Lotton, as he responded, “Quite the contrary. I have seen the Star Wars movies. And Ashoka's Clone Wars movie and series. Which she has seen, as well. And it may interest you that I have dealt with worse individuals than Vader could ever hope to be.”

Lotton stated, in a serious tone of voice, “If anyone else has made that claim. I would not have believe them. But you, I do believe.”

Barbossa cracked a wicked grin, as he said, “Thank you, for your vote of confidence.”

Violin inquired, “So, where is Ahsoka?”

Revy answered, “She decided to stay at the casino. So, she could visit Annie.”

Dutch stated, “I am glad just glad their union went so well. It could have gone very badly.”

Revy replied, “Oh, I agree.”

Just then, from her vantage point, Shenhua saw Nodoka, Yurika, and Mikoto, enter the front entrance of the lobby, as they herded four toddler children with them. Three girls and a boy.

Shenhua thought, 'Good. They are finally here. And I think I will introduce Barbossa to them.'

Shenhua stood up from her seat. She then turned to Barbossa, as she kindly requested, “Barbossa, could you please come with me, for a moment. I would like you to meet some people.”

Barbossa looked over at Shenhua, as he replied, “Sure.”

Shenhua then walked over, passed Rock, and Barbossa.

Barbossa turned and followed Shenhua towards the middle of the room.

The rest of the adults present, turned to see where Shenhua and Barbossa were heading, and they realized whom had returned.

Roberta commented, “I am glad they are back, safe and sound.”

Dutch agreed, “So am I.”

Violin said, “It looks like our daughter is fine.”

Aeryn agreed, “Yes. It seems so. And those three can be trusted with her welfare.”

Benny asked, “Hey, Lotton. Are you sure it is wise to let Barbossa so close to your children?”

Lotton stated, “I am sure. Barbossa knows better than to harm our children. And if he does. He will deeply regret it.”

Sawyer commented, “My chainsaw is in our suite. I can get go up there, get it, and bring it back down here, within a few minutes.”

Lotton replied, “Exactly.”

(_)

Meanwhile, Shenhua was not the only ones that saw Nodoka, Yurika, and Mikoto return with the young children.

On the right side of the room, the five Lagoon sisters, along with Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru, saw them enter the room, as well.

As the eight adults look over at at them, Sarah said, “It looks like they are back.”

Akira commented, “Yes. And they are likely tired from their babysitting trip. Still, this experience has likely done some good.”

Ranma suggested, “Yes. It likely did. How about you five bring our daughters over here? There is much we need to tell them. And it would be best just to get it out of the way.”

Natsuru turned to Ranma, as she complimented, “Good idea, Ranma.”

Molly said, “Sure.” She then looked around, at her sisters, as she stated, “Let's go, girls.”

Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru then watched as the five Lagoon sisters get up from their seats, as they headed over to the center of the room, to retrieve their three adults daughters.

(_)

A few seconds later, Shenhua and Barbossa, and the five Lagoon sister, reached Nodoka, Yurika, Mikoto, and the four toddler children, as the same time.

As everyone present stood, and looked at each other, Rebecca commented, “Well, this is awkward.”

Nodoka asked, “What is going on?”

Yukio answered, “There is a lot of we need to talk about. If you don't mind, your parents would like you to join them.”

Nodoka turned to Yukio, as she replied, “Okay.”

Meanwhile, the four toddlers just stood and watched the adults talk.

Mikoto pointed at Barbossa, with her right hand, as she inquired, “Who is he?” She then dropped her hand to her side.

Molly stated, “We will tell you in a minute.”

Shenhua suggested, “It might be best if you three go with them. And thank you, Nodoka, Yurika, Mikoto. I will take it from here. So, have some fun with your friends.”

Yurika turned to Shenhua, as she said, “Thank you.”

Nodoka, Yurika, and Mikoto, then headed with the five sisters, back to meet with their parents, on the right side of the room.

Shenhua and Barbossa looked at the eight woman, whom were heading towards the right side of the room.

Barbossa asked, “Who are those three women?”

Shenhua answered, “The green haired girl is, Yurika. The purple haired girl is, Mikoto. The girl that has blue hair, with black highlights is, Nodoka. The three of them are sisters. And they are all very nice. Much nicer than us. Still, each of them can manipulate various elements of nature.”

“Yurika can create and control electricity. Mikoto can generate and control fire. And Nodoka can manipulate, water, ice, fog, and steam.”

Barbossa stated, “I will be sure to stay on their good sides.”

Shenhua replied, “That would be wise. Now, let me introduce to you my children. And the child of my friends.”

Shenhua turned to looked down at at the four children, Three of whom, were her children.

Barbossa looked down at the children, as well. He saw that all four kids were wearing tennis shoes of various colors. That the three girls were were feminine colored pants and shirt, while the young boy wore blue jeans, shirt under a sweater.

Shenhua said, in a sweet, warm tone of voice, in english, “Children. This is Barbossa. Say hello.”

The four children looked over at Barbossa, as they said, almost in unison, in english, “Hello.”

Barbossa calmly replied, “Nice to meet you.”

Shenhua then used her right hand to point at the black haired girl with asian facial features, and pale skin tone. She stated, “This is, Wenqian. I gave birth to her. She is one of my three children.”

Next, Shenhua pointed at a black haired girl, with pale skin and caucasian facial features. She said, “This is, Ivy. She is one of my children, as well.”

Shenhua pointed at the black haired boy, with asian features, and fair skin. She said, “This is. Thomas. Another one of my children.”

Shenhua pointed at the girl with dark blue hair, asian facial features, and fair skin. She stated, “This is, Gilina. She is the daughter of two family friends that you met today. The dark blue haired woman known as, Violin. And the black haired woman known as, Aeryn.”

Shenhua then dropped her right hand back to her side.

Barbossa turned to Shenhua, as he complimented, “They all appear to be happy, healthy children. And those are all fine names. Especially, Wenqian. Which I know what that name means. It means refined and modest.”

Shenhua looked over at Barbossa. She smiled, as she said, “I am surprised you are taking finding out I have children, in stride.”

Barbossa commented, “Yes. I am not surprised you are now a mother. Actually, I find it comforting that you are continuing your family line.”

Shenhua replied, “Thank you.” She thought, 'I find Barbossa taking such a relaxed view on my motherhood, both amusing. Though, comforting.'

Barbossa commented, “And contrary to my reputation. I try not to harm children. Adults of either gender are fair game. But, children are off limits.”

Shenhua thought, 'I am glad that carried over to me.' She said, “That is nice to hear. And I agree.”

Barbossa suggested, “Good. Now, let's reunite this children with their parents. And then I will go check in to the hotel, and get a room.”

Shenhua replied, “My thoughts, exactly. Afterward, I will help you check into the hotel.”

Barbossa said, “Thank you. I appreciate that. And when we are finished, we will talk about your training regiment.” He thought, 'Then, I will find out the phone number for the casino, from Shenhua. And I will leave a message there for Ahsoka.'

Shenhua happily commented, “I look forward to it.”

Shenhua and Barbossa then lead the young children over to their parents, on the left side of the lobby.

(_)

Meanwhile, on the right side of the lobby, the five Lagoon sisters had returned to the seats they had been in before, on the couches.

As the five sisters sat down, Mikoto and Yurika sat down, on a couch, near their parents. While, Nodoka sat next to Kristina, on another couch.

Nodoka and Kristina looked at each other and then kiss each other on the lips for a brief moment. After they broke their kiss, Kristina asked, “How was your babysitting experience?”

Nodoka said, “Quiet. For the most part. They are very well behaved, for their age.”

Kristina replied, “That is nice.” The couple then turned their attention back to the others.

As this went on, Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira, had decided to stay silent, as they listened to their children, and their friends talk.

Yurika looked around her, at the other women nearby, as she asked, “So, what did we miss?”

Rebecca replied, “A lot.”

Sarah explained, “After you left this morning, with the kids, two individuals showed up at the bar here, while we were all having an early lunch.”

Nodoka asked, “And those two would be?”

Yukio stated, “Hector Barbossa from the Pirates of the Caribbean movies. That old man you just met, with Shenhua. He is Barbossa. The other person was Ahsoka Tano. Yes. That Ahsoka. The alien girl, who was Annie's former student. Only, she is now grown up, and she is a full fledged babe, like the rest of us.”

Yurika replied, with a bit of excitement in her tone of voice, “Cool.”

Nodoka asked, “Now, how did those two end up traveling together?”

Kristina commented, “We don't know. All we know is that their friendship is platonic, and there is a tale to be told on that matter. Still, there is more.”

Mikoto cracked a grin, as she requested, “Do tell.”

Molly said, “It turns out the reason they were here, is that they looking for a couple of people. Not only were they trying to track down Annie, Ahsoka's former teacher. Which she did. But, they were also trying to find Jack Sparrow.

Nodoka asked, “But, why would they think, Jack Sparrow is here? That man would stand out in a crowd. Even among us.”

Molly let out a breath. She then said, “Well, it turns out that Revy, one of our mothers, is the reincarnation of, Jack Sparrow.”

Yurika questioned, in a slightly surprised tone of voice, “You're kidding? Right?”

Molly calmly replied, “No. Aunt Revy even confirmed this.”

Nodoka, Yurika, and Mikoto, turned to look at their three parents, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru. With their parents looking back at them.

Akira confirmed, “They are telling the truth, sweetie.”

Yurika, Nodoka, and Mikoto then started giggling, for a few seconds.

As they calmed down, Mikoto said, “That is ironic.”

Nodoka inquired, “Still, how can they be so sure?”

Kristina answered, “Because Barbossa has Jack's magic compass. We even saw it. And he would have no reason to lie about this. There is no reason to. Also, as Molly said, Aunt Revy confirmed this to be true.”

Nodoka replied, “Well, that is interesting.”

Kristina agreed, “To say the least.”

Mikoto turned to Rebecca and Yukio, as she asked, in a mischievous tone of voice, “So Rebecca, Yukio, how does it feel to have Jack Sparrow as a parent?”

All nearby eyes turned to look at Yukio and Rebecca.

Yukio and Rebecca looked at each other. They then turned their attention to the others.
Rebecca stated, “To be honest. This is likely the most normal thing we can say about our family.”

Yukio said, “I have to agree.”

Except for Rebecca and Yukio, everyone around started laughing.

Yukio mentioned, “Look at who we were in our previous life. We are not ones to talk.”

Everyone around laughed even harder, for the next few seconds.

As everyone calmed down, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, looked at each other.

Akira commented, “Well, Revy's birthday is not that far off.”

Natsuru asked, “True. So, what gift are should we get Revy for her birthday.”

Akira said, “Something Pirate themed.”

Ranma suggested, “And a fun item at that. Maybe, a wenches costume.”

By then, everyone around Ranma had been paying attention to the comments on Revy's birthday, and all women around Ranma, including herself, started to giggle a little at her comment, for the next few seconds.

As they calmed down, Yurika said, “I will go buy the hidden cameras.”

Mikoto stated, “I will pay for the costume.”

Molly mentioned, “Lee mentioned she knows of a well stocked costume shop in town.”

Mikoto happily replied, “Nice. We will ask her where it is. I am sure she would be more than happy to tell us.” She thought, 'Knowing her. She would also likely guess why we want to know where that costume shop is.'

Natsuru said, “I can set up the video link to the camera.”

Akira stated, “I'll help. And our laptops, that are upstairs, should be able to handle the video feed recording.”

Nodoka responded, “Good. All that is left is is the matter of hiding the cameras?”

Ranma stated, “With my skills, that will not be a problem.”

Sarah requested, “You wouldn't mind providing copies of Revy in her costume? Would you?”

Ranma's lips curled into a wicked grin, as she replied, “Sure.”

The women continued their conversation.

(_)

Meanwhile, across the room, the four toddler children were safely reunited with their children.

A few minutes later, Barbossa check into the hotel. Shenhua's helped him. And given the rarity of the items in question, the hotel staff gladly accepted one of Barbossa's coin as payment for his suite, for the next month.

Ten minutes later, Barbossa made it up to his suite, with Shenhua kindly accompanying him. He found the suite to his liking.

Barbossa then asked Shenhua for the phone number for the Daiyu Palace Casino. And Shenhua gave the number to Barbossa the phone number. Barbossa then used the suite's phone to call the front desk at the casino, and he left a message for Ahsoka. That he was now check into the hotel, he provide her with the direct phone number for his room. Which was listed on the base of the suite's phone.

After Barbossa finished his phone call, he and Shenhua then talked about how he would train her. About what she knew. And what possible areas of sword play that she felt she needed to brush up on.

Then, a few hours later, Barbossa began Shenhua's training, on the center of the roof, of the hotel. Which Shenhua asked Melanie for a key to the roof door. And Melanie gladly provided them, with a key to use, to get to the roof.

The two adults then spent an hour on the roof, with Barbossa training Shenhua, while the two of them had fun in doing so. When they were finished, they headed back down to join Shenhua's family and friends, for an afternoon and evening, of pleasant conversation, and entertainment. Which included supper, and then karaoke, in the hotel restaurant.

To everyone's surprise, save for the old pirate himself, Barbossa had a nice singing voice. And he was able to sing the song, Amazing Grace, with the proper lyrics, in tone, and in sync with the music. Afterward, Barbossa mentioned he was quite fond of that song.

Barbossa also enjoyed watching some of the others in the hotel restaurant, sing various karaoke versions of songs, as well.

And rest of the night was pleasant for everyone involved.

When Barbossa retired to his room for the night, he received a message from Ahsoka, that she had received his message. And she left him the information on her suite phone number, at the casino, to contact her with.

Afterward, Barbossa got ready for bed, and went to sleep for the night.

(_)

In the early afternoon, of the same day that Barbossa and Ahsoka had come to De La Plata Podrido, pleasant events were taking place in the Last Resort Diner.

It was just after lunch rush was over. And the last few customers had just paid for their meals, and they were leaving the restaurant. Though, the lack of customers, right after lunch, during a weekday, was normal for the Last Resort Diner.

And now that the employees finally had some privacy, and a moment to rest, the three adults on staff, Lori, Ed, and Rico, were talking to each other, as they stood behind the counter.

That day, Lori was working as the cook, with Ed and Rico being waitresses for their current shift.

Lewis, Stan, Irene, and Leona, were not on shift, and the four younger adults were taking the afternoon off. Though, they had just finished having a late lunch, in the diner, in a booth by a window, on the right side of the room. With Ed and Lori allowing their drinks and meals to be on the house. In the hopes it would help smooth over things between Lewis and Irene.

Lori, Ed, and Rico, were standing around the left side of the middle counter in the dining room.

Lori saw the last of their current customers walk out the doors. Just after the doors closed behind the customers, Lori turned to her wife, and Rico, as she said, with relief n her tone of voice, “Finally, we can talk.”

Ed stated, “Yes. We can. And I am so glad about how well, Irene and Leona worked out for us, in doing their jobs.

Rico commented, “Yes. That help wanted sign is long gone. And I have to say both our good at both waiting tables, and cooking. But, Leona seems to lean more towards cooking, and Irene's people skills are top notch. I think our customer numbers during peak hours has actually increased.”

Ed said, “I will have to look at the accounting books, to be sure. But, I believe you are right.”

Lori responded, “That is good. But, we should not force them into a role they don't like. If we do, we might run them off.”

Ed replied, “That is a good point.”

Lori commented, “Though, as long as we continued to offer them flexible hours, good management, and fair pay, they will stay.”

Rico stated, “I believe so, as well. That is how I ran my Gateway To Fantasy collectors store, back in Aspen.”

Lori inquired, “By the way, how is your store doing.”

Rico happily answered, “The last time I check. A month ago for me. A month for them. The person I put in charge is doing a wonderful job. And I get a nice supplementary income from the business. And I am happy that you two talked me into keeping that store open, under different management.”

Lori replied, “You're welcome.”

Ed stated, “You put too much work into the business to just throw it all away, to come here.”

Rico replied, “Yea. But, it has been a fun two years.”

Ed agreed, “Yes. It has.”

Lori said, “It has been an interesting time here.”

Rico inquired, “So, what is going on with the sisters living arrangements?”

Lori answered, “I talked to them, at work, yesterday. They are happy with the apartment we found for them. The place is in good shape, with a decent amount of living space. The landlord is nice, and the lease is fair. And the amount for monthly rent is affordable.”

Rico commented, “That is good.” She thought, 'And that will help convince those two women to stay.'

Ed mentioned, “And the apartment is only a few blocks from the beach. Which may not mean much now, during the winter. But, during the summer months, they will be able to enjoy being close enough to the beach, that they won't have to use transportation.”

Rico complimented, “Always, the long terms planners.”

Ed replied, “Of course.”

Lori said, “Also, it seems that Lewis and Irene seem to be getting to know each other.”

Ed commented, “Yes. It is so good that Lewis finally met someone he is interested in. And Irene seems to like him, as well.”

Rico stated, “I agree. And Leona seems to be working well with everyone.”

Ed agreed, “Yes. Both of them are friendly enough.”

Rico responded, “Well as much I would love to continue this conversation, we need to get this place cleaned up, before some more customers come back.”

Lori replied, “True.”

Ed said, “Yes. Let's do that. I will get the broom and dust pan. So, I can clean the floor.”

Rico stated, “I will take care of the dishes.”

Lori commented, “I will clean the stove and food preparation tables.”

The three women then went back to work, doing their various jobs, in the diner.

(_)

Meanwhile, across the room, in the right side of the restaurant, Stan, Lewis, Irene, Leona sat in a booth that was set beside the windows on the right side restaurant.

Leona sat, on the inside of the booth, as she faced the front windows of the diner. Irene sat on the outer side of the same bench as Leona.

Across from Irene, with his back turned to the front windows, was Lewis. With Stan to Lewis' right side, on the inside corner of the bench the two brothers were sitting in.

Fortunately, the booth and seats, were big and long enough, to comfortably seat all four of the adults.

The reason they were at the diner was to get some lunch. Which they had finished about ten minutes ago. At the moment, they were having a casual conversation on various subjects.

Irene asked, “So, did you two go to high school?”

Lewis answered, “Yes. And we did so together. And we both graduated without too much trouble.”

Stan mentioned, “I was even on the american style football team, in high school.”

Leona commented, “With your physical builds, I am not surprised.”

Stan replied, “Thank you.”

Leona inquired, “So, what role were you on the line up?

Stan answered, “I was on the defensive line. I was nicknamed, the line breaker.”

Leona shrugged as she replied, “Neat.”

Irene looked over at Lewis, as she questioned, “So, have either of you had any steady relationships before?”

Lewis saw Irene looking at him, as he stated, in a casual tone of voice, “Not really.” He then looked over at Irene. As he continued, in a relaxed tone of voice, “But, I am hoping that might change in the future.”

Irene realized Lewis was talking about her. She smiled at him, in response.

Leona asked, “What about you, Stan? Any previous relationships?”

Stan casually answered, “Not since high school. Where I took the prom queen, to prom.”

Leona look over at Lewis, as she questioned, “Is this true?”

Lewis stated, “Yes. Stephanie. Stan's girlfriend, and the prom queen. And she even let me have a dance with her.”

Irene turned to Stan, as she commented, “That was sweet of her, and you, Stan.”

Stan replied, “Thank you.”

Lewis said, “Yes. It was, on both their parts.”

Leona turned back to Stan, as she inquired, “So, what happened? Why are you still not together?”

Stan plainly stated, “She wanted to go to college, I want to do something else. Things happened, and we just took two different directions in life. Still, we parted on good terms.”

Lewis commented, “Yes. We are still friends with Stephanie.”

Irene asked, “That is a cute name. So, where are you really from?”

Leona said, “Yea. Until now, none of you have really talked about your pasts.”

Stan thought, 'We might as well get this out in the open. And right now is a good opportunity.'

Stan answered, “We are from Mars, in a Cowboy Bebop reality. After the beginning of the twenty third century. And please no Star Trek jokes. We have likely heard them all.”

Though, there was no laughter from Stan's comment. Instead, there was silence, for a few seconds, as Leona and Irene let the implications of what Stan has just said, sink in.

Leona then flatly questioned, “You know who we are?”

Lewis thought, 'I might as well tell them, what we know of them.' He looked over at Irene, as he answered, “We know your parents are the Knight Sabers. Our parents knew who you were, before they hired you. Rico, Stan, and I, were told after work, that night, in private. We are guessing that Leona, you are Leon's daughter. And Irene, you are Linna's daughter.”

Leona said, “That would be correct.”

Irene guessed, “And you all decided not to confront us, and let things play out?”

Lewis responded, “Yes. We figured we would just see what happened. We did want to ruin a potentially good thing.”

Stan said, “Besides, we needed the help here. So, we could all have a life.”

Leona responded, “Okay. And I guess that is why you are so open on talking about reality travel?”

Stan stated, “From a direct standpoint. Yes. But, many of us have been here for a few years. And anyone with a brain, and some knowledge, in this city, can figure it out what is going on. It is just that the locals are intelligent enough not to talk about it. At least, not in public.”

Leona questioned, “So, this is a secretive town?”

Stan answered, “Only in a good way. Most people here will help you, if you need it. And just don't advertise who you are, and where you are from, and you should do fine.”

Leona said, “Okay. We will keep that in mind. And this does explain a few things we heard on the grapevine, about this town. That this city can be lively for reality travelers. But, not very dangerous, for those that are careful.”

Stan responded, “That about sums it up. And if you are looking for excitement, you will find it here.” He thought, 'So, that explains why you two came to this city. You learned about it, from rumors you heard. Now, to have some fun, with my questions.'

But, before Stan could ask his question, Irene commented, “We are more of the type that are just seeing what is out here.”

Lewis replied, in a supportive tone of voice, “That is fine, as well.”

Stan asked, in a casual tone of voice, “So. I have to ask. How does it feel to have super-heroes as you parents?”

The two brothers saw the sisters squirm a little in their seat.

Leona then stated, “It is more a case of having parents that are mercenaries.”

Lewis commented, “Oh. We have been there. Our parents use to be bounty hunters, before they chose their current jobs.”

Irene asked, “So, who are your parents?”

Stan cracked a grin, as he said, “You haven't figured it out?”

Leona questioned, “Figured out what?”

Stan coyly said, “You have already met our parents.”

Leona asked, “Where are they?”

Irene questioned, “Who are they?”

Stan rolled his eyes for a second. He then looked back at the two sisters in front of him, as he flatly stated, “They are your managers. Ed and Lori.”

Irene shrugged, as she said, “Interesting.”

Leona sarcastically commented, “So, you have two mothers. So, what? We have eight.”

Stan coyly said, “It is a little more complicated than that. And no offense intended. But, we already knew that, as well.”

Irene asked, “No offense taken. Also, I guess that your family also knows that a few of our mothers used to be men?”

Lew soberly replied, “Yes. And so does Rico. And we do not judge you, nor your parents, on such issues.”

Irene said, in a warm tone of voice, “Thank you.”

Leona commented, “Still, do you know how embarrassing it is to have a mother that gave birth to you, whom was originally a man?”

Lewis started laughing, while Stan remained silent.

Irene realized, as she said, “You do.”

Lewis said, “Yes. Lori used to be a gender bender, before she locked in her current female form. She was originally born a man named, Bob.”

Irene asked, with in concern in her tone of voice, “Why was she locked in her female form?”

Stan stated, “It is not what you think. She is locked in female form due to the physiology of her gender bending abilities. That when she reached old age, she locked as a woman. And yes, both our parents are much older than they look. Still, this is not something we like to talk about, outside our family.”

Lewis commented, “No. it is not.”

Irene replied, “I understand.”

Leona turned her head, to look at Lewis, as she asked, “And I guess, your father gave birth to you?”

Lewis cracked a grin, as he stated, “No. Not me. Him.” He shrugged his shoulders towards Stan

The two women look at Stan.

Stan explained, “Long story short, our mom used magic power to change into a man. They things together, with medical equipment, and they end up pregnant with both of us at the same time. My father was pregnant with me. While, our father also impregnated our mother, at the same time. Do not ask for the details. Because neither of us like to think about it.”

Irene stated, “That is messed up.”

Leona said, “Yes. It is.” She thought, 'Though, it is nice meeting someone who knows what I went through.'

Stan replied, “That we agree on.”

Lewis commented, “Sadly, yes... Though, it does make for interesting conversation.”

Stan conceded, “That it does.”

Leona inquired, “So, how did you handle learning about your birth? It took me a few hours to come to terms with the truth about my mother's origins. When she personally told me, in private.”

Stan shrugged, as he casually commented, “Nothing a fifth of Jack Daniels cannot help.”

Leona asked, “I guess that could work. Also, given your father could change genders, are you two gender benders?”

Lewis answered, “Yep. We turn into hot caucasian woman.” He thought, 'I will leave out that we also turn into redheads. And that if we stay as women long enough, we literally start acting like our mother use to be. A crazy genius babe.'

The two girls giggled, as Lewis asked, “This is not going to effect our relationship, Irene?”

As the sisters calmed down, Irene requested, “Not really. You are a nice guy and I like your personality. Though, I want to see both your female forms.”

Lewis stated, “Not right now, while we are in public. I will be more than happy to show you, in private. Later.”

Irene replied, “That will be fine.”

Leona turned to Stan, as she asked, “How about you?”

Stan joked, “Not unless you are willing to pay for my dinner, first.”

Leona let out a single laugh. She then complimented, “Good one.”

Stan commented, “And I have several more.”

Leona responded, “I am sure... Still, there is another matter I would like to ask you. We have heard rumors that some of the female reality travelers here, having wild bikini parties, on a tropical island, somewhere in the multiverse.”

Stan questioned, “You heard about that?”

Leona replied, “Yes.”

Stan stated, “Well, the rumors are true.”

Lewis replied, “Yes. They are.”

Leona asked, “You have been to them?”

Lewis just nodded twice in response.

Stan answered, “Well, they are fun. Though, to attend, we have to be women, and wear bikinis. That is the rule for all adults that go there.”

Irene commented, “Well, I look good in a bikini.”

Leona said, “So do I.”

Lewis realized where they were going with their comments. He offered, “We will talk to the Lagoon family, whom are the hosts of those parties. We will see if we can get you both invitations. Though, I do not see that as a problem.”

Irene replied, “Thank you.”

Leona stated, “Yes. We appreciate it.”

Stan commented, “Don't worry. We will just vouch for you. And they should let you come to the next party. Which happens on a regular basis.”

Irene said, “That is nice to know.”

Leona replied, “We will look forward to it.” She thought, 'Now, to have some fun.'

Leona turned to her sister, as she teased, “By the way, Irene, last night, I saw you making out with Lewis here. After closing.”

Irene looked over at Leona, as she flatly stated, “That is not something you talk, in front of others.” She turned to Lewis, as she said, “Especially, in the presence of the other member of the event.”

Lewis looked at Irene, as he calmly replied, “I am not bothered by her comments.”

Stan looked at Lewis and Irene, as he commented, “I am not surprised to learn this. You two have been treating each of other very kindly for the last week. So, you seem to have hit is off. I don't mind. I even talked with mom, dad, and Rico about it. We all support you.”

The two sisters looked at the two brothers, that were across the table from them.

Lewis said, “Okay. That is awkward, but nice to hear.”

Leona and Stan chuckled a little.

Irene stated, “Still, there could be a problem with us dating.”

Lewis inquired, “What do you mean?”

Irene said, “Well, it is how my mother will react to you, that I am worried about. She has a powersuit, and she is not afraid to use it.”

Lewis let out a laugh. He then commented, “We will have to tell you the back story about our parents sometime.”

Leona asked, “What do you mean? Don't get me wrong. They are nice. But, they don't look like much in a fight.”

Lewis answered, “While our mom is not really a fighter. Lori, our dad is. She fought Revy to a stand still, a few times. And our father outright defeated her once. Do you know who that is?”

Leona inquired, “Is that the redheaded woman, in the daisy dukes, that carries two pistols?”

Lewis replied, “The very same.”

Leona commented, “Well, Auntie Priss mentioned that she beat her, a few months ago. Our time. By pinning her to the floor. Though, she admitted that Revy was a challenge to beat.”

Stan mentioned, “That is how our dad beat Revy, as well.” He thought, 'I guess, while Revy does learn from her mistakes. She still hasn't taken the time learn how to deal with fighters that used grappling and wrestling techniques.'

Lewis said, “So, as you can understand. Our father knows how to fight. Also, the rest of us are no slouches either.”

Leona questioned, “And Rico?”

Stan stated, “She can also hold her own.”

Lewis said, “Still, we might as well tell you about who our mother really is. You know how we said we were from a Cowboy Bebop reality?”

Leona replied, “Yes.”

Lewis asked, “You have seen the Cowboy Bebop series?”

Leona answered, “Both of us have.”

Lewis stated, “Well, our mother is the super-hacker Ed. A former crew member of the Bebop. Our dad and her met years after the series ended, when they were both teenagers. And things just clicked.”

Irene said, with astonishment, “Wow. After spending some time with your mother, I came to believe she looked familiar. But, I could not place her.”

Lewis commented, “Yes. And some people still only think of her as a kid, instead of the adult she is, now.”

Irene replied, “True.”

Leona inquired, “Since you mother is a super-genius. We have to ask. Did you inherited any of your mother's intelligence?”

Stan replied, “Yes.”

Lewis coyly responded, “Let us just say you don't ever want to play chess with us. And if you are going to play poker. Get ready to use at least five decks, at the time.”

Stan commented, “Though, I know mom can count cards up to eight decks at once. And that is the number of decks she is willing to admit to. I think she can do up to ten. At least. But, I am not sure.”

Lewis stated, “Yes. But, that gets kind of ridiculous.”

Stan said, “True. But, if you want to get into ridiculous situations. We need to tell you about Lee's stories sometime.”

Leona asked, “Stories? What do you mean, stories?”

Stan responded, “Neither of you know about Lee's stories? We know that your parents know about those stories, because they went after Lee.”

Irene answered, “All they told us, and our sisters, was they had some information on a target they were going after, whom was named, Lee.”

Lewis commented, “Okay. We will tell about those stories, in detail, later.”

Irene said, “I will look forward it.”

Leona replied, “As will I.”

Lewis commented, “Though, before you read book two, of Lee's stories, we need to talk to you. Because what you find out, will upset you.”

Irene replied, “Okay.”

Leona said, “I will keep that in mind.”

Stan requested, “Just promise us you won't go after Lee, once you learn about her stories?”

Lewis stated, “Yes. While we are the first to admit that Lee made some serious mistakes, without realizing it. We got to know her, and we like her, as a person. Lee is really a good person, and a family friend. Stan and I practically consider her to be like an aunt to us. And once you get to know her. I am sure you would like her, as well.”

Irene replied, “Okay.”

Leona stated, “I will try to honor your requests. But, if I decide to do anything about Lee, I will talk to you both, first.”

Lewis inquired, “Alright. Also, now it is our turn to ask. Have you see the Bubblegum Crisis series?”

Leona said, in an even tone of voice, “Yes. All of them. OVAs, TV series. We have even read the mangas, fan magizines, and novels.”

Irene commented, “Though, the soundtracks are nice.”

Lewis stated, “I am not surprised by your answers.” He turned to Irene, as he calmly requested, “Since there is no time like the present. And our secret is out. Would you like to go out for dinner, tomorrow night at eight?”

Irene coyly answered, “It depends on where you are planning on taking me?”

Lewis stated, “On the island, there is a good american style steakhouse that my family, and I, have been to, before.”

Irene said, “Okay. We will stop by both our homes, to get changed after work, and then head out.”

Lewis replied, “That will be fine. And thank you.”

Irene responded, “You're welcome. Though, and later, tomorrow night, you will have to show me your female form.”

Lewis said, “Sure. I don't mind. Just don't be jealous.”

At four adults at the table laughed a little at Lewis' joke.

As they all calmed down, Irene inquired, “Don't worry. I won't be. Though, is there anything else you want to tell me about your female forms?

Stan playfully mentioned, “Well, we are redheads in our female forms.”

Leona joked, “And here, our parents warned us not to date redheads.”

All four adults laughed a little more, at Leona's comment.

As they calmed down, Irene mentioned, “Though, I believe that Auntie Nene, and Ed, are exceptions to that rule.”

Lewis and Stan said, almost in unison, “Thank you.”

Irene replied, “You are both welcome.”

The four adults then continued their conversation for another half hour, before they decided to head out of there restaurant, for other parts of the island, using the car that Stan and Lewis owned, until their shift, at six PM that night.

(_)

Later that evening, around seven PM, not long before sunset, at Daiyu Palace Casino, there was a mystery taking place.

A mystery that only one woman had so far noticed. That woman being Inara.

Over the course of the last few weeks, Inara had noticed that Jayne had occasionally left the casino, right after work. With Jayne returning a few hours later.

Due to Jayne position in the casino's security team. No one questioned his comings and goings.

At first, Inara thought that Jayne has been spending time with his good friend, Lori.

That was until one night, when Jayne was gone, she got a phone call, on her cellphone, from Lori, asking if she had seen Jayne. Meaning that Jayne was not with her, nor the rest of the Lowe family.

And that was when Inara started looking further into this mystery.

Due to her training, in various carnal areas, and her knowledge of human nature, along with the fact that Jayne could be very stubborn, and private, she knew better than to confront him on the matter.

Also, Inara had not proof to question Jayne with.

In addition, she did not want to ask River and Annie for help, because she did not want to poison her decent friendship with Jayne. Which was cordial. Nor, did she want to risk asking someone to read another person's mind, without their permission, over a matter than might be very minor.

Such as Jayne maybe playing pool at a bar, or seeing a secret girlfriend.

Though, Inara doubted that Jayne had a new girlfriend. Because Jayne also smiled when he was dating. And Jayne was not that good at pool, or other casual games.

And she knew that he could not be renting out a place for himself, given the Security Crew, along with the Bebop Crew, were allowed to live in very nice, large apartment suites, inside the casino, as part of the benefits of working at the casino.

Zoe and Wash had even recently moved into a larger suite, in the casino, than the one Zoe had previously been living in, after the two got remarried.

All this only made the mystery, of where Jayne was going, even more puzzling for Inara.

So that evening, Inara decided she was going to follow Jayne, to wherever he was going.

Though, Inara knew that Jayne could spot a tail. But, she also knew that Jayne used one of the black, four door, sedan cars, the casino had, in the back garage.

So, she call in a favor from Kaylee, whom stuck a tracking device that Inara with given her, on the car specific black sedan that Jayne preferred to use. Due to Inara and Kaylee being good friends, Kaylee did ask Inara why she wanted to track where Jayne was going.

The tracking device was connected to a small remote with glowing arrows to show in what direction Jayne's car would be in. Very simple, but it worked. The tracking device had a ten kilometer range. So, there was little chance of losing him on the island.

After Inara then waited that evening for Jayne to leave. Which was just before seven PM.

Earlier that day, Inara already took another of the sedans from the garage, and she parked it in the back parking lot, near the garage, while facing the garage doors of the casino. Along with her tracking remote, she brought a pair of binoculars with her.

When Inara saw Jayne heading for the garage, she circle around, to the car she had parks.

So, had just gotten into her car, and buckled up, when she saw that one of the garage doors open.

She then moved swiftly as she ducked down, to her right, while Jayne drove passed her, across the parking lot, and onto the street.

Inara then sat back up, and quickly turned on the ignition, and sit the car in drive. She then follow Jayne out of the parking lot, and onto the street.

As Inara tailed Jayne, she was careful to keep about a city block's distance from him. And with her tracking remote, she easily kept track of Jayne, even when she lost sight of him, when he turned down a road.

Also, with the tracking device, Inara did not have to worry about losing Jayne, if she was caught by a red light, and had to wait until the light was green, to continue following him.

After ten minutes of following Jayne, Jayne had lead Inara to a beach, on the southeast part of the island.

As they drove down a two lane road, that was ran parallel with the shoreline, a hundred feet from them, with Jayne's car was about five hundred feet ahead of her.

Jayne then turned down, on a driveway that lead to a large white home, on the beach.

Meanwhile, to avoid suspicions, Inara just drove passed where Jayne turned in. She then did a gently u-turn, as she parked her car on a hill overlooking the home.

After she turned off her car, but she left the keys in the ignition. She unbuckled her seatbelt. Inara pulled out her binoculars, and looked through them, at the home. She was facing the southwest side of the home.

The home was a large white home, set about fifty feet from the sandy beach, on a hill that was ten feet higher than the beach. The hill lead way from the house, inland, to the road.

The outside of the home looking to be in great shape. With the paint job, and the roof, in great condition.

There was an above ground deck attached to the home, on the side facing the beach, with stairs leading down to the beach, on the deck, and on the sides of the road.

Inara then looked down at the curved driveway, that loop around the back of the home, so a vehicle could drive up to the home, and a way from the home, without backing up, and turning around.

Inara saw that Jayne had already parked his car, on the driveway, by the home.

Through her binoculars, she saw Jayne get out of the car, and approach the home. She saw that Jayne was still wearing his the black business suit, and dress shoes, which he wore for his security job.

Inara then watched as Jayne walked to the door, and knock on it a couple of times.

A few moments later, Inara watched as the door opened, and a much old, fair skinned woman, walk home, and hug Jayne, for a few seconds.

The older woman then let go of Jayne, and the two adults entered the home, with the door soon shutting behind them.

Inara looked around the sides of the home, which was the western back part of the home, and the southern side of the home.

Inara then noticed that the curtains were pulled back on large window on the south side of the home, facing her.

She saw that it was a large dining room, with the large, elongated table always set with plates, utensils, paper napkins, glasses full of various drinks, and metal trays of home cooked food. There were several people already gather around, as they all sat at the table.

Inara then saw older woman walk into the room, and Jayne following her. The old woman then sat at one end of the table, and Jayne sat down on the other end of the table.

The people at the table then bowed their heads, as the older woman said a prayer. When the woman finished her prayer, the people at the table then started passing around their plates for food. So, they go eat in a few minutes.

As Inara continued looking at Jayne and people she did not know, have dinner, she mentally wondered, in slight confusion, 'Okay. Did Jayne adopt a family? What is going on? I will have to ask him, when he returns to the casino, later this evening.'

Inara lowed her binoculars. She buckled her seatbelt. She started her car. And she drove back to the casino.

A little over ten minutes later, she returned to the casino, and she parked the black sedan where she had originally retrieved it, from the casino garage.

As she got out of the car, and walked over to the key box.

After she returned the key, back to where it went, she walked back towards the nearest door the back hallway of the casino.

She passed by Kaylee, whom working on car. She had the front hood open, and she was leaning down on the an engine, as she worked on it.

Kaylee continued to lean down on top of the engine, as she inquired, “Did you find out what was going on? And don't worry, Arcee is out on an errand. So, it is just the two of us, in here. So, you can talk freely.”

Inara stopped in her tracks, as she turned to face Kaylee. She thought, 'She most have recognized my footsteps. That is possible. And I guess she really did have questions for me, after all. Not that I really have any answers for her.'

Inara replied, “Not really.”

Kaylee asked, “So, Jayne is not doing anything naughty?”

Inara responded, “Quite the contrary. I think he was doing was very normal, and polite.”

Kaylee said, “Hmm... Well, all I want to do is make sure he was not going to bring us any trouble.”

Inara stated, “I do not think we have to worry about that.”

Kaylee responded, “Good. I will pull out the tracking device from Jayne's car, tomorrow. And soon after, I will return it to you.”

Inara thought, 'I need to find out when Jayne returns, so I can confront him.' She requested, “That will be fine. By the way, could you let me know when Jayne returns to the casino?”

Kaylee flatly said, “No can do. When I am finished working on this engine, in about ten minutes. I am going upstairs and getting cleaned up. I have a dinner date with Simon, in an hour.”

Inara commented, “Okay. I will find him, later. And good luck on your date.”

Kaylee replied, “Thank you.”

Inara turned, and headed for the nearest door that lead out of the garage. As she walked, she thought, “Jayne usually returns around two hours, later. I will just come back to the hallway, outside of the garage, in an hour and forty minutes. Set up a room to talk to him, in private. And wait for him, there.'

A few seconds later, she reached the door she was heading for, which lead to the back hallway. She opened it, walked through the threshold, and shut the door behind her. As she headed to back elevator bay, and her suite. So, she could sit down, and relax, until it was time to come back down, and confront Jayne.

(_)

An hour and forty-five minutes later, Jayne had finally returned to the casino.

Jayne had just finished parking his car, and returning the keys he had used, back into the key box. Now, he had just exited the garage, into the back hallway.

Presently, Jayne's intent was to head to the back elevator bay, and to his suite, where he could get some rest.

But, as he walked, he soon saw Inara standing by the inner wall of the back hallway.

Except for Inara, Jayne did not see anyone else in the back hallway.

Jayne watched as Inara looked at him. She then started walking towards him.

Jayne thought, 'I wonder what she wants?'

When Jayne and Inara came within ten feet of each other, they stopped, while facing each other.

Inara flatly said, “You and I need to talk. Now. Come this way.”

Jayne replied, “Okay.” He thought, 'I know from experience, that in the long run, it is best to do what Inara says. And I will sort out what is going on, later.'

Inara swiftly lead Jayne to a nearby door, in the hallway. Inara already, long since knew the door usually unlocked.

Inara opened the door, and she held the door open, as she turned to Jayne. She firmly ordered, “Go in.”

Jayne saw it was a dark room, but he still complied with Inara's request, as he walked inside.

Inara followed behind him, as she flipped the light switch on to her right, in the interior side of the wall. She then shut the door behind her.

With the lights on, Jayne saw they were moderately large storage room, for the janitorial equipment.

As Jayne came to a stop, he thought, 'Okay. This is not a bad place to talk in private. The doors to these rooms are almost never locked. And it is conveniently close to where we were.'

Jayne turned around to see Inara standing five feet away from him. Jayne continued his thoughts, 'Now, to find out what she wants to talk about.'

As the two adults looked at each other, Inara demanded, “Jayne, what is going on? And who are those people you are with?”

Jayne thought, 'She must have followed me there... It is always those you least expect... I might as well admit what I have done. She may not be a telepath, nor empath. But, she is good at spotting a lie.'

Jayne stated, “They're my family. The ones I talked about all the time, while we are on the Serenity.”

Inara questioned, with a bit of surprise in her tone of voice, “You brought them here?”

Jayne calmly replied, “Yes.”

Inara sternly pointed out, “Do you realize how much trouble you could be in for doing this?

Jayne responded, “I had very good reasons for what I did. Besides, this is nothing compared to the stunt River and Lee pulled to bring back Wash and Book. And don't lie me and say you aren't happy to see them again. Back among the living.”

Inara relaxed both her tone of voice, and her body language. She shrugged, as she conceded, “True. I agree with what you said. I am glad they are back. And Zoe is with Wash, again. So, what are you reasons?”

Jayne answered, “If I hadn't done so, the Operative that was after River, would have murdered them.”

Inara sadly replied, “Oh...” She thought, with sadness, 'You are right, about that.'

Jayne commented, “It is a long story.”

Inara suggested, “I already know this much. You probably should tell me the rest.”

Jayne let out a deep breath. He then responded, in a sober tone of voice, “Well, to start with. I never told you what happened to my family, after that whole dusted up over secrets on Miranda. But, as you can guess, when the Operative went on his destructive insanity. Bombing up, literally everywhere, we have been. He glassed my homeworld.”

Shock was evident on Inara's face, as she began, in a disheartened tone of voice, “Oh, Jayne. If we had known...”

Jayne interrupted her, as he calmly stated, “You would have felt sorry for me. But, since there was nothing you could have done at the time, there was no point in complaining. Though, at that time, given our situation then, I wasn't expecting to live very long. And I was looking forward to seeing them.”

“Then, Rock, and the others showed up. Leading us to this great adventure we are on. And she brought with her the possibilities of reality jumping technology. Including, time travel.”

“I have seen enough time travel movies to understand what that means.”

Inara forced herself to calm down, as she realized, 'This was not done in haste. He has been planing this for a while.” She calmly asked, “How long have you been planing this?”

Jayne casually admitted, “Years. Decades. I have been patiently waiting for my opportunity. Which was to have the technology, and bring them somewhere they would be safe, and still be able to comfortably live their lives. The main problem was watching what I thought around River. And later, I learned how to control my emotions around Annie. So, neither of them can sense what I am thinking, nor feeling.”

Inara thought, 'We all have sorely underestimated Jayne's level of intelligence.' She questioned, “How?”

Jayne rhetorically asked, “You don't think all those times I invited River to play poker with us, was just so I could lose my money to her. I got more out of those poker games than her. She got my cash. But, I got so much more, by learning how to block my thoughts from her. And over the course of a few years, I became very good at doing so. None of you really know what is going on in my mind.” Jayne cracked a grin, as he continued, “And that is the way I would like it to stay.”

Inara replied, “Seemingly not. And point taken. Please continued.”

Jayne dropped his grin, as he stated, “Okay. While we had the technology, I did not have the opportunity. Then, we had this whole mess with Lee come up. And Chang convinced everyone to move here, and start this casino. And when I took good, long, hard look around this island. This city. The people here. I could see this was the perfect place, time, and reality, to bring my family too. Plus, there was all the wealth that Chang is paying each of us, for these casino jobs.”

“Even if I quit my job, now, family and I could live very comfortably, on the gold Chang has already paid me. Not, that I am going to quit.”

Inara commented, “Yes. This job does keep things from being boring.”

Jayne replied, “Exactly.”

Inara wondered, as she asked,“Besides money issues. Which were not that bad for us, on Mars. Why didn't you just bring them to Mars, in the Cowboy Bebop reality.”

Jayne stated, “Unlike Mars, the technology here is not that far apart from what my family is use to dealing with. Still, the medical technology here is good. And the locals don't ask too many questions about newcomers. So, I finally had the technology, the wealth, and the place, to bring my family too. And as such, I took that opportunity, and I seized that day.”

Inara asked, “Does anyone else know about what you have done?”

Jayne said, “I believe a few suspect. Though, no one has called me on it, but you.”

Inara inquired, “Such as?”

Jayne answered, “Well, I think Chief Del Soto suspected. He has no proof. And since the Cobb family keeps to themselves. And he has his hands full with everything else, he likely did not look to closely into the matter.”

Inara complimented, “I must say. This is brilliant planning and implementation on your part.”

Jayne happily replied, “Thank you.”

Inara commented, “You're welcome. You are clearly far more intelligent than most people give you credit for.”

Jayne chuckled a little. He then responded, “I am glad someone finally noticed.”

Inara happily requested, “Now, please tell me more.”

Jayne stated, “Certainly. Due to Chang, and these jobs, we are all quite rich.”

Inara commented, “And happily so.”

Jayne stated, in a casual tone of voice, “And our jobs keep us busy. And they are not that bad. I mean, for my job, I still have a gun, and occasionally get to play the brute. While, in your new job, you still bend over, but for completely different reasons.”

Jayne's comment caused Inara to giggled a little. As she calmed down, she replied, “That is a nice way to put it. And with my new job as the casino spa director, and masseuse, I can use my training in way that does not annoy Mal.”

Jayne said, “Yes. You traded up on that. And our hours and benefits keep us here.”

Inara agreed, “Very true. Also, we really do not have anything better to do.”

Jayne commented, “You are right about that. The only other things I can think of doing, besides this, as a job, would get me in a whole lot of trouble.”

Inara pointed out, “Well, the companion services are nowhere near as structured and regulated here, as it was in the verse.”

Jayne replied, “Yea. I guess you had some protections there, when you did you job.”

Inara stated, “Absolutely. And the pay, and perks, were worth it.”

Jayne thought, 'I really don't want to know the details of your previous job.' He stated, “Anyway, Since I had all this wealth, and nothing really to do with it. I mean people dream of making it big. But, after doing a couple of wild and crazy things. I never really thought what I would achieve this level of success. That was one of the reasons I did this. I always cared for my family. So, I decided to bring them here, and use my wealth to help them as much as I can.”

Inara inquired, “How did you get your gold out of Chang's vaults, without him, or someone else, realizing it?”

Jayne answered, “Mal and Zoe put me in charge of overseeing the accounting of what goes in and out of those vaults.”

Inara commented, with a bit of disbelief in her tone of voice, “I am surprised that they would put you in charge of that.”

Jayne flatly stated, “Don't be. I am paid enough. And I am in a job I like. That I am not going to steal anything. But, I was able to pull some of my gold out, without anyone being the wiser. Though, I have kept a record of what I pulled out. Still, the first thing I did was use that gold to buy that home you followed me too.”

Inara complimented, “It is a nice home.

Jayne commented, “Yes. It is. And it has better be for what I spent to pay for it.”

Inara questioned, “So, why did you decide to buy a beach home for your family?”

Jayne said, “After we went to Chang's beach home here, for a few parties, and business meeting. I found I liked that style of home. And I bought the same type of home, along the beach, here. I even used the same restated agents at Chang used.”

Inara asked, “And what was your next course of action?”

Jayne answered, “Next, I bought my family here. Most of them were on my homeworld. But, a few I had to track down. And I had to bring a few spouses and kids, as well. But, all in all, things went well. After that, I had to forge them all some IDs. Which was not hard with this casino's resources.”

Inara inquired, “So, how much do they know?”

Jayne said, “Well, they know they are on Earth. There was no point in lying to them about that. Also, I just told them that in my many adventures, I found some technology that could take them to an Earth of the past, but not the Earth we came from. And that is an honest enough answer.”

Inara questioned, “True. And what about secrecy?”

Jayne replied, “Already got that covered. Taking into account what I am giving them, they all agreed to keep what they know secret. Well, at least the adults. And the kids. Well... We can just say they are being kids.”

Inara responded, “That is a pleasant surprise on your part. And what do they know of your job here?”

Jayne admitted, “I never really told them about what I use to do for a living. I sent money, and they didn't ask too many questions. But, I told them that I got my life turned around. That I now have a good, respectable job, that pays well, and allows me to spend time with them.”

Inara commented, “That is basically the truth.”

Jayne said, in a relaxed tone of voice, “It is nice not having to lie to my family, for once.”

Inara inquired, “So, have you told any of them about you gender abilities?”

Jayne stated, “I only told my mother. Because, I wanted her advise on how I should tell the rest of my family.

Inara asked, “And her answer?”

Jayne replied, “She said she need to think about it.”

Inara questioned, “Do you receive any other responses from her finding out you can now enjoy both sides?”

Jayne flatly said, “She stated that I now had no excuses for not giving her some grand-kids, of my own.”

Inara could not help but giggle a little at Jayne's comment. As she calmed down, she asked, “And how did you reply?”

Jayne commented, “I didn't.”

Inara complimented, “Wise choice.”

Jayne replied, “Thank you.”

Inara asked, “So, when did you do this? When did you bring your family here?”

Jayne replied, “Over a year ago.”

Inara thought, 'Interesting. I guess that from when we started this job, to then, would be enough time to save up the funds from work, and implement you plan.' She commented, “I can guess that you now fund them with your wealth.”

Jayne said, “Yes. I give them gold, and cash, regularly. I have found some people here whom buy gold, as the current market rates, and don't ask to many questions. And these buyers know I am work at the casino, so they know not to cross. me.”

“Though, some of my family are working on getting jobs. Given this town is use to outsiders coming to live here. No one is really asking questions. But, most of my family. Even those looking for a job, are being given an education in both schooling of the cultures and technology of this world.”

Inara asked, “How is that working out for your family?”

Jayne stated, “Slow. But, we are making progress.”

Inara commented, “I would not surprised if you have also decided to gain an education from the lessons you are paying your tutors.”

Jayne replied, in a casual manner, “Oh. I am. And I am learning a lot.”

Inara responded, “Good. And with our extreme longevity, you have plenty of time to receive a proper education.”

Jayne said, “You are correct about that.”

Inara gave Jayne a warm smile, as she complimented, “Well, Jayne. I never thought I would say this to you. But, I am very proud of you, for what you are doing to help your family, and for the actions you have taken for your own self-improvement. It sounds like you have this all planned out, very well.”

Jayne returned Inara's smile, as he responded, in a kind, sincere tone of voice, “Thank you, Inara. And speaking of which, the medical treatments have already been started for Mattie. And he is responding well to the treatments. The docs say he should be fully cured of what has been ailing him, within six to eight months.”

Inara happily replied, “That is great news.”

Jayne agreed, “Yes. It is. I also had the docs check out the rest of my family.”

Inara complimented, “That is a good precaution.”

Jayne replied, “I know. And except for some minor issues. Which have been taken care of, or being treated. For chronic conditions. They are all fine.” He then dropped his grin, as he continued, in a more sober tone of voice, “Now, that we have discussed all this. I really need to tell one of you what happened to the verse after we left.”

Inara thought, 'I guess, after going back for his family. His curiosity would get the better of him, and he would want to see the future of our home reality. And I really need to know, myself.' She inquired, with concern in her tone of voice, “Is it bad?”

Jayne flatly replied, “Very bad.”

Inara thought, 'I should not be surprised. Still, there is one other question I need to ask, before I inquire further on this matter.' She responded, “Are you not worried, that by telling me, you might risk a paradox.”

Jayne answered, “I highly doubt what we could significantly change the course of what happened. Delay it. Perhaps. But, not change the outcome.”

Inara softly demanded, “Then, tell me, anyway.”

Jayne stated, in an even tone of voice, “Fair warning. You are not going to like what I have to say. And I am going to ask you to keep it a secret.” Jayne continued, in a stronger, though even tone of voice, “Because, I didn't want Mal, or maybe even Zoe, to go on some damned fool quest to try to save everyone one, only to get themselves killed. Especially, after Zoe finally got Wash back.”

Inara offered, “I understand. I will be discreet. If I have to talk about it with someone, it will be River.”

Jayne responded, “Fine. She would likely find out it, from you, anyway.”

Inara conceded, “Probably. Now, please continue with your story.”

Jayne said, “Well, after I rescued my family. I decided to see how events would play out after we left. Now, after learning what happened. I really wish I didn't do that. And it is all that damn Operative’s fault.”

Inara asked, “What do you mean?”

Jayne stated, in a sober tone of voice, “Inara, would you say, while on the Serenity, we visited several different places?”

Inara said, “Yes. More than I could care to count.”

Jayne continued his explanation, in the same sober tone of voice as before, “I never realized how many places we have been too. And on many of those places, we only spent a brief amount time. Just long enough to either pick up our load, or drop it off, and get paid. Or, maybe just long enough to rob a bank... And now that I think about it, I regret not spending more time on a few of those worlds. Even a couple of the moons we went to were nice.”

“Some of those places, I wished we had spend enough time to either watch a sunrise, or a sunset there.”

Inara calmly said, “Jayne, I never took you as a romantic.”

Inara saw Jayne gain a glassy look to his eyes, as if he was looking through her. He replied, “Neither did I, until I realized how much we have lost. And it is now to emotionally painful to go back to. Even if is in the past, for those places, to us.”

Inara realized that what Jayne was about to say was horrible. And she forced herself to ask, in a hesitant manner, “What are you trying to say?”

Jayne took a deep breath, and then slowly let out. He then looked Inara in her eyes, as he said, in a very sober, serious tone of voice, “As I said. I wanted to see how our reality faired after we left. It wasn't good. It seems that when all was said and done, in an attempt to flush us out, that damn Operative literally destroyed around a quarter of the known verse to try to get to us.”

Inara stated, in shock, “Dear god!”

Jayne responded, “Yes. He targeted almost every single place we went too. Nearly every place we had ties too. And not just the places we spent a few nights at, while Kaylee was doing repairs on the ship. But, the places we went to, just to drop something off, or pick up. Hell. He even went after the places we robbed. And not just the cities we were at, but entire worlds, moons, spacestations,”

“With the exceptions being a few place, such as the Alliance central worlds, like Ariel. And I think, at the time, if he thought we were hiding there, he would have glassed that planet, just to kill us.”

While Inara was still in slight emotional shock, the only words that Inara could find to say were, “Such... Fanaticism... Talk about the cure being worse than the disease.”

Jayne stated, “True. And I also cannot believe what a monstrous idiot the Operative was. I see no justification for what he did, nor for those that carried out his orders. I mean, think about it. The Alliance controlled the press, the police, the courts. It would have been their word against River's. And let's be honest, even her own brother, Simon, a trained doctor, openly admits that she is insane... Well, was insane.”

Inara spoke up, “You right, Jayne. It would have been her word, against theirs.”

Jayne said, “Exactly. Though, River has gotten better since then. Annie has been a great help to River in reclaiming her sanity.”

“But, that was only the start to the Operative's stupidity. After that much destruction, then on top of it, the news of the Alliance’s genocide of the population of Miranda, and their accidental creation of the reavers, everything went to hell, very quickly.”

“There was no question on who did all the destruction. Considering the Alliance was the only military power left after the war, and they are the only ones that could pull it off. And no one can hide that level of destruction from the rest of civilization for long. Most of the locations that were destroyed, use to have Browncoat leanings in the war. And more than a few of those that had family on those planets, moons, and spacestations, that were destroyed, had very deep pockets. Some, even had powerful Alliance connections.”

“And though most of the people on these planets, moons, and spacestations were murdered, their surviving families, elsewhere, were not. For these people, the Operative had made his attack personal to them. And you never want to make it personal. Especially, on a scale such as this.”

Inara guessed, “The Alliance accidentally restarted the Unification war?”

Jayne explained, “No. Worse. Things went, as the human say here, MAD. Mutually assured destruction. When word spread in the Alliance military of what some of their comrades did to the Verse. Along with many officers losing their family and homes, due to this madness. On top of the news about Miranda and the reavers.”

“Less than a month after we left our reality, a very bloody civil war started within the ranks of Alliance. Nukes were used in this civil war. I am not sure which planet, but I heard at least one of the central worlds was completely glassed in the fighting.”

Inara quietly said, “Oh no.” Then she realized, as she inquired, at a normal tone of voice, “And the families of those killed in the Browncoats area?”

Jayne complimented, “You are catching on. While this Alliance civil war raged, it gave the Browncoats time to reunited, reorganize and prepare. They had no army, but their hatred of the Alliance had been fully reignited. What they did have was research, know-how, technology, and weapons of mass destruction. Items that many groups of Browncoats successfully hid, at the end of the Unification War.”

Inara asked, “After all this happened, and came out, what were the Browncoats' opinions on the Alliance?”

Jayne responded, “Not good. Not good at all. The Browncoats I talked to, both before and after they attacked that Alliance, stated they believed that after the Operative's attacks, Miranda, and the reavers, that the Alliance, and their supporters, had gone insane. And they all needed to be put down like rabid dogs.”

Inara commented, “Sadly. After everything that has happened. There is some truth in their beliefs.” She mentally lamented, 'And I was a supporter of the Alliance during the Uniification Wars. My, how things have changed.'

Jayne requested, “Yes. But, I would never have gone anywhere near as far as what the Browncoats did next.”

Jayne continued, with concern in his tone of voice, “And don't tell Mal and Zoe about this. It will break their hearts, if they learned what some of their comrades had done.”

Inara replied, “I will take that under advisement.” She thought, 'Mal and Zoe have deep scars over that war, and I would loath to reopen them. Also, I am tempted to ask how it could get any worse. But, I have a feeling that Jayne is about to tell me that it did.'

Jayne responded, “I appreciate that... Anyway, as the Alliance civil war winded down, with the rebels on the losing side. The hardliners, were still somewhat crippled by their war. They were at their weakest. Their forces numbers just over a third, before the civil war had started. Most of their large aircraft were damage, some to the point they requiring dry-dock, and they had spent most of the conventional, and non-conventional ordnance against each other.”

“And that was when the Browncoats struck with their weapons of mass destruction. Though, while some weapons were used on Alliance planets, moons, and spacestations, were chemical. Most of the weapons used were biological and nuclear weapons. The nukes were mostly reserved for the spacestations and the large Alliance military ships.”

“And about the biological weapons. We are talking about the nasty type of biological weapons. Such as the highly contagious, fast acting hemorrhagic fever viruses. Though, that is not all of the weapons used by the Browncoast.”

“Some former Browncoats were even able to go to Miranda, and make it back, alive. And those that did make it to Miranda, somehow found, salvaged, and reworked the chemicals used to keep all those people, and create the reavers.”

“As we both personally know, getting to, and escaping Miranda, through reaver space, is a literally a journey to hell and back.”

“But, these fools actually topped themselves with their insanity. They figured out how to weaponize the reaver making chemicals used on Miranda. And they dropped their new weapon into the atmosphere of one of the core worlds. I don't know which one.”

“And unlike the reaver plague, this one didn't kill ninety-nine percent of those affected. No, it only killed one percent of the people that were exposed to it. The rest went violently insane.”

Inara's face paled, as she thought, 'It did get worse. Far, far worse.'

Jayne continued, “They are just as dangerous as the original reavers. They will rape, torture, and eat people alive. And the chemicals used to make these new reavers were clearly untested, because this affliction became like a contagious disease to other humans, by fluid transfer. Incubation can be a matter of days, to months. From what I understand, various psychotic medications will help those effected.”

Inara coud not help, but ask, “How bad did the situation become?”

Jayne stated, “Bad. Very bad. Think the worse than a standard zombie apocalypse, because these reavers, like the original reavers, still have enough brains and know how to operate starships.”

“The Alliance tried to glass the originally infected world. Though, as the bombs dropped, anyone with a ship, fled the planet. This included those infected, and a few hundred thousand new reavers. With the Alliance to weakened by the civil war, and the Browncoat attacks, to stop all the ships.”

“And from there, the infection quickly spread to the other core worlds.”

“By the way, don't worry. I make damn sure I was clean, and not infected, before I came back here. If I was infected, I would have taken care of myself. With a message to all of you, stating what happened. So, you all would know what happened, So, you would know what to expect, if you ever returned to the Verse.”

Inara inquired, “I am sure that you would have. So, do you have any good news?”

Jayne answered, “Well, not much. The only good news is not everyone infected went full reaver. About a quarter of those infected become very violent, but they still had much of their sanity left. These poor souls usually are given some weapons and turned loose on the reavers in suicide missions. Which most of them volunteered for. With their reasoning being, if they cannot stop being violent, they can at least put their violence to good use in fighting that which was destroying civilization.”

Inara said, “Better do die as one's self.”

Jayne agreed, “Exactly. And just to add to the misery. Of course, given how spiteful the Alliance can be. The surviving Alliance navy decided to launch what weapons they had left on the Browncoat leaning territories, which were the only habitable places left in the Verse. And in so doing, the Alliance doomed humanity, in the Verse, to a slow death.”

“And this is not counting the original reavers spreading out their territories. Though, what was left of the both the Alliance and Browncoat space forces nuclear arsenals were used both against the original reavers, and these new reavers. Not that doing so helped much.”

Inara inquired, “How can you be so sure that the situation was hopeless? We have been in some trying situations, ourselves.”

Jayne responded, “That we have. Still, in this situation, it was hopeless. And I learned that it was hopeless, after I jumped ten years, after we left, into the future. Those still alive, in multiple locations stated they estimated that only twenty percent of humanity was left alive. With around half of them reavers, or carriers of the reaver disease. With no fuel being produced, space travel was becoming very rare, except for the reavers that steal fuel from the ships that are foolish enough to attempt space travel.”

“The only close to nice places I have found, are on the edges of the verse, away from everywhere. And they are now dark age level civilizations.”

Jayne's voice broke a little bit, as Inara saw the man was on the verge of tears, while he said, “I am sorry, Inara. But, we don't have a home to return too. And one of the reasons I am asking you to keep this a secret is that I don't know how to break it to the others, without crushing their hearts.”

Inara composed herself, as she said, “Someone has to tell them. And I will do so. I will figure out how to tell them. And when I do, I will inform them, and handle the matters. But, I will do as you request, and I will not tell anyone today.”

Jayne responded, “Thank you. And let me know when you do figure out how to tell them.”

Inara responded, “I will. We will talk, before I speak to them. Still, that reaver disease needs to be dealt with, before it spreads across multiverse.”

Jayne said, “I am way ahead of you, on that. I talked to Bob about this... Well, Lori... Even though she is now chick. On occasion, we still hit the town on our wild drinking nights. Only her wife, Ed, demands that I go as a chick with her.”

Even after hearing all the bad news, Inara giggled a little, at Jayne and Lori spending their time, as friends, as women.

As Inara calmed herself down, she thought, 'After such horrible news. I really needed that laugh. Now, to find out what Jayne did in response to this mess that the verse has become.'

Inara commented, “So, what did you do?”

Jayne stated, “I got in touch with Lori's friends, on Deep Space Nine, in a Star Trek reality. And I convinced them to offer me aid on this matter.”

“And don't worry. They cannot connect this back to us, here in this reality. I reality jumped several times, between there and here. And my explanation to them was that I was given this technology to help those of the Verse. And I was seeking their aid. Given the dire situation the Verse was in, those I spoke too did not ask to me questions of how I got the technology I had. And they did not try force me to stay with them.”

Inara said, “That is nice.”

Jayne commented, “Yes. It is. And as part of their aid, I helped to send one of their large ships to the Verse and back. They were able to retrieve a sample of the reaver disease, along with bringing some survivors they took with them to the Federation. Some were Browncoats. The others have been with the Alliance. By then, the survivors no longer care who started it this mess because they were having to fight together just to survive.”

“And, in relative terms, as we speak, the Federation is right now working on both a vaccine and a cure. And when they have the cure ready, they even had the technology, which they are willing us, to disperse that cure, across the Verse.”

Inara said, “That is good to hear.”

Jayne mentioned, “I agree. I even let them have a sample of that gender bending disease we have. They found it interesting. And don't worry, it is dormant, and it will likely not infect other people, outside of a blood transfusion, or like what happened with Lee. They said my blood may even help treat a similar ailment that hit an alien world there.”

Inara stated, “Interest. I am glad that disease will be used to help people.”

Jayne commented, “Yes. So am I. Though, back to the Verse. I try to keep in mind. That all of this is because the Operative claimed to want to create paradise. Instead, he turned the Verse into a hell. I wonder how he finally went out, in the end?”

While Inara hid her emotions well. She thought, with disgusted, and anger, 'Such destruction bought on by arrogance and insanity. Wherever that Operative is, I hope he is suffering, because from the sound of it, he set the Verse ablaze. And what of his, paradise that his superiors clearly brainwashed him into believing in? And may they suffer, as well.'

Inara responded, in a calm, even tone of voice, which Jayne could clearly tell that she was hiding her emotions, “It does not matter. Still, I wonder of the paradise he wanted to create. Who was that paradise for? It clearly wasn't for the for Browncoats. Nor, the Alliance citizens. Given he freely murdered both those groups. It wasn't for himself, as he said the paradise he was trying to create was not for him. Nor, was it for the Alliance military. And nor was this paradise for the elitists of the Alliance. Such as River, Simon, and others like them. Whom were the best and brightest of the Alliance.”

“And instead of the Alliance valuing and cherishing the individuals. The Alliance government tricked many of them into becoming tortured slaves and brainwash living weapons, to be experimented on. Such as River.”

Jayne commented, “Yes. I see now that my trying to hand River and Simon over to the Alliance was like casting pearls before swine.”

Inara thought, 'After we saw our own series, we did not really call you on your actions, on Ariel. Because you had since proven yourself to us. And besides, we all did things, that were shown in that series, which we were not proud of.'

Inara said, “I see your learning, in other areas of life, as well.”

Jayne stated, “I am surprised you guys didn't space me after we saw our own series, and movie.”

Inara pointed out, “We all did questionable actions, that were set out in the open, due to us watching those videos.”

Jayne commented, “True. We just had to let go of the past, and move on.”

Inara stated, “Yes. We did. Given our situation. It was the only way we could remain sane.”

Jayne responded, “I agree. Back to the Operative. That Operative was a true fanatic, that destroyed all his masters works. Leaving only despair and decay, to the colossal wreck of what once was there. Now, boundless and bare.”

Jayne poetically styled comment caught Inara mildly off guard. She calmly questioned, “Are you paraphrasing the poem, Ozymandias? If so, that was very good.”

Jayne said, “Yes. And thank you. I have learned a few lessons and quotes from my tutors. And I actually like that original poem. And I did look up what an albatross was. All that trouble over a bird.”

Inara giggled a little. Inara then smiled at Jayne, as she responded, “That is nice. I guess, like their Operatives, those of the Alliance government has become true fanatics. They had redoubled their efforts, while losing sight of their goals.”

Jayne finished Inara's comment, “And in so doing, the Alliance lost everything.”

Inara replied, “Exactly.”

Jayne stated, “Thank you again for deciding to keep this secret.” He thought, 'Since you decided to keep this secret, on your own. There is less chance of you telling anyone.'

Inara said, “I do not mind. Actually, I have been thinking about doing the same thing you did. Going back and rescuing family and friends that I care for.”

Jayne sincerely offered, “Do you need help retrieving them?”

Inara answered, “No. I can handle that on my own. Though, I could use some help in finding my family and friends some places to stay here, on this island.” She thought, 'Since it would be foolish to just rent them a room here, or at the Devil's Hotel. With the other hotels on the island not being up to par for my tastes. And I would settle for nothing less, than the best, for my family and friends.'

Jayne stated, “I will just use the same local real estate agents that Chang and I used. They live on the island. And their names are Sans and Isandro. They are discreet, and fair, about their listings and prices.”

Inara inquired, “Do you have their phone numbers?”

Jayne said, “Not on me. But, I can give it to you, later.”

Inara replied, “That will be fine.”

Jayne then remembered, as he thought, 'Best to warn her. So, the others don't find out what happened, through her.'

Jayne cautioned, “Now, while I can understand you talking to River, about me bringing my family her. Be careful when you think about this, around River, or Annie. My family being here is minor, compared to everything else I told you. And I don't want them finding out. Until, you and I figure out what to tell them. If they react badly to the news. Especially River. They will immediately will tell the others. And this could quickly spiral out of control.”

Inara stated, “I realize that. As I said, I will handle telling them. When the time is right. And I have a lot more experience, and training, in keeping secrets, than you do.”

Jayne said, in a polite tone of voice, “I am sure of that. But, in dealing with telepaths and empaths, it is always wise to be wary of what one thinks and feels around them.”

Inara replied, “I will agree with your point. And I before I do anything, will talk to you, first.” She thought, with a bit of a sense of irony, 'Who would guess, that I have ended up having Jayne, of all people, be my confidant.'

Jayne thought, 'This has been a draining conversation. But, a good one. With me finally getting a lot off my chest, with someone I trust. Still, I really need to head to my room, to sit down and relax. Now, to convince her to let me go.'

Jayne suggested, “Good. Well, this conversation has been interesting, but we probably need to get back to what we were doing. Before people will start to notice that we are gone.”

Inara agreed, “Good idea. But, we will need to talk about this further, at a later date.”

Jayne responded, “That will be fine. But, let's give it a few days, to a week, to think about what we are going to say on this.”

Inara said, “I will agree with that. Now, enjoy your rest.”

Jayne thought, 'Damn. She is good at reading people. I have sometimes wondered if she was psychic. It wouldn't surprise me. Still, there is no point in denying.”

Jayne said, “I will. And have a pleasant night.”

Inara replied, “Same to you.”

The two of them then turned, and exited the storage room. Jayne was the last one out of the room. He turned the lights out, as he shut the door behind him, as he exited into the hallway.

After which, Jayne headed for his apartment suite, on one of the higher employee levels of the casino. While, Inara headed to the front, entertainment areas of the casino, to find something to do, to entertain himself. Though, she was not going there to gamble.

To be continued.

Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 6: “The Mexican, The Lawyer, And The Mechanic.”

Volume 2: “The Villains.”

Chapter 03: “Prelude to Madness.”

By Paul Cousins.

Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.

(_)

Reality, Pedro and Lee's home reality. Date, the day after the robbery at Daiyu Palace Casino. At Tuesday. Place, The Rats Nest, De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. Time, around noon.

It was a cool, partly cloudy day, outside of the Rats Nest. With the Rats Nest having long since been fully repaired a few days ago, around a week after Revy and Hernan's fight. And things had gone back to normal.

Inside the bar, Revy, along with her family and friends were sitting around the various tables, on the left side of the room, while Bao was behind the bar counter.

At one of the center tables, sat Revy, Rock, Lotton, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Eda.

At one of the small tables by the back wall, Janet and Benny sat across from each other.

At the large around table in the back, left corner of the room, sat Dutch, Violin, Aeryn, Roberta, and Yolanda.

At a large table, closer to the front, running along the left wall, by the large windows, sat Rebecca, Yukio, Mikoto, Yurika, Kristina, and Nodoka. Kristina and Nodoka sat beside each other, with Nodoka to Kristina’s left side.

At a table located on the front left corner of the room, sat Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma.

At the side of the bar counter, which facing the front windows, sat Barbossa, in a stool, with his back to the front windows. Barbossa has choose to set alone, as he enjoyed his bottle of beer. With Bao being introduced to Barbossa, when she met him.

The only ones not there were Sarah and Molly, whom were babysitting the four toddler children, Wenqian, Ivy, Thomas, and Gilina, back at the Devil's Hotel. This was due to Bao having an understandably, though strict rule, concerning that there were no children allowed in her bar. And Bao refused to relent on her rule, no matter how much gold, Dutch and the others offered her, to change her mind. For Bao, this rule was more important.

That morning, at breakfast, at the buffet in the Devil's Hotel restaurant, Revy, her family, and her friends decided they would have lunch at the Rats Nest. With then bringing their lunches there. While drinking something at the Rats Nest. This was not the first time they had done this. And Bao was okay with this, as long as it did not become a habit.

When they were ready to have lunch, they had called ahead, to request Bao temporally close her bar for them.

Given the amount of wealth they were paying Bao in gold, Bao happily followed their request.

When they got to the Rats Nest, they sat down, and they order their drinks from Bao. With Bao soon filling their orders.

Revy and a few others liked to do this, because Bao was a very skilled bartender, whom knew how to filling the drink orders given to her, in a timely manner, while still maintaining the quality of her service.

Most of those inside the bar were drinking bottles of beer. Which only a few drinking harder alcoholic beverages and mixed drinks.

Still, per Revy's promise to Hernan. Since she was drinking, she was not armed.

Presently, they had just finished lunch. With Bao clearing their tables of plates and trashing. Leaving only their drinks behind. Most of which were periodically refilled, or replaced, at time passed by.

(_)

Bao was standing behind the bar counter, facing the left side of the room, and her customers, at the tables, on the left side of the room.

Bao was not really doing anything, as she looked out at her customers. She thought, 'This has certainly turned out to be an interesting, and entertaining day. I like how Barbossa introduced himself. For an old pirate, he can be polite. And I loved how Revy could not keep her own secrets, secrets.'

'With Barbossa coming in here, they had to tell me that Revy was the reincarnation of Jack Sparrow. I got a good laugh out of that one. And in a twisted way, I can see how she could be a reincarnation of Jack.'

'It was also nice that Barbossa allowed me to take a picture of himself, with my polaroid camera, which he autographed, and let me keep.'

'And with what they regularly pay me in gold, along with them rarely trashing my bar now. While I request they do not make a habit of it. I don't mind them bringing lunch here, and asking me to temporally closed the bar to the public. Though, that was more for the public's safety, than the current customers in my bar. Also, they still order drinks for their lunches from here. So, I still make some money from their meals.'

'Speaking of which. I really need to invite Hernan to come here. Considering, he was the one to finally get Revy to stop bringing her guns with her, when she drinks.'

'And as tempted as I am to let them bring their young children in here... It was hard to turn down the amount of gold they offered to looked the other way... Still, I know that if I did relented on my no children rule, it would get me in real trouble with the locals. Especially, Pedro.'

'And I admire, respect, and like Pedro. And while we only did it a few times, years ago, he is pretty in bed.'

'Besides, it would be wrong for me to let children in here. It is one of those rules to being a bartender. A rule that I have kept since I started bartending, back in Roanapur, Thailand. You don't let children come into the bar.'

At that moment, Barbossa looked over at Bao, as he asked, “So, from the way you look at them, and the familiarity they have with you. I take it you know them?

Bao looked at Barbossa, as she replied, “Yes. I know most of them, very well.”

Barbossa responded, “Good. Because, I would like to know your opinion of them?”

Bao thought, 'Given some of them are eavesdropping on this conversation, with our enhanced hearing, I need to figure out how I honestly answer that question. While not upsetting any of them... Oh, that should work...'

Boa stated, “Most of them are as straightforward, and sharp, as the sword on your belt.”

Barbossa looked down at the sheathed sword, in his scabbard, on the left side of his belt. He then looked back at Bao. He cracked a grin, as he complimented, “Good answere.”

Bao thought, 'Now, it is my turn.' She inquired, “So, why are you still with them? You found out what Revy is the reincarnation of Jack. And given how friendly you are. You clearly not here for revenge. So, what is going on?”

Barbossa coyly said, “You could say I am just setting up my inheritance, for when I am gone.”

Bao replied, “Okay.” She mentally added, 'I am not sure what he meant by that. And chances are, someday, one of the others in this room will tell me. When they find out. So, I am not going to push the matter. Also, I need to tally up the bill for them. While they pay me gold. I still need to make up their bills, for my own records keeping. So, I know what I have in stock, and what I need to restock.'

Bao then turned, and headed over the cash registered, which was on the side of the bar counter, facing the left wall, with register, itself, being near the back of the room.

While Bao went over to cash register, to work on her customers bills, at one of the center tables of the room, Revy, Rock, Lotton, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Eda, sat clockwise around the table.

Revy and Shenhua sat across from each other, as they looked at a small, ornate, wooden, metal box, on the table.

The box belong to Revy, whom had bought a box, as a conversation piece for their meal.

And the box did generate a pleasant conversation. With the discussion eventually leading to someone asking what was in the box.

Unfortunately, the box was locked and Revy did not have key.

So, Revy and Shenhua looked a the box, as they both made suggestions on how best it would be to open the box, without risk of damaging the box itself, or what might be inside the box.

Meanwhile, the others at their table, whom knew the two women well enough, to not bother them went they had their mind set on doing some. So, Rock, Eda, Lotton, and Sawyer, just continued their own conversation, while Revy and Shenhua talked to each other.

Revy carefully inspected the small box, as she commented, “I cannot use my gun, that might damage it.”

Shenhua looked at the small box, as well. She replied, “I agree. Though, what is inside it might make it worth damaging it, to get it open.”

Revy stated, “I don't want to damage it. Just in case there is nothing in it. That way, the box is still worth something?”

Then, from a nearby table, Violin turned to Revy, as she asked, “Hey Revy. Where did you get that box from, anyway?”

Eda inquired, “You didn't steal it? Did you?”

Revy looked over at Violin, then to Eda, as she flatly answered, “Actually, I bought it.”

At another table, Akira questioned, “From where? And when?”

Revy turned to Akira, as she said, “I bought it, years ago, at an antique shop, back in my home reality.” She then turned the box, as she complained, “I know I should have asked for the key, when I bought this.”

Eda teased, “I didn't know you were into antiques.”

Revy continued to look at the box, as she answered, “I'm not. But, I was bored one day, and I took a look around at a store, on an island, near our tropical island home.” She then tried to open the box with her fingers. But, the lid would not budge, even a bit.

Lotton looked at Shenhua, as she asked, “And what is your interest in that box, Shenhua?”

Shenhua looked at the box, as she answered, “Pure curiosity. I would like to see what is in the box, as well.”

From the bar counter, Barbossa looked to his left, over at the box on Revy's table. He calmly warned, “Ladies. Experience has taught me. Concerning boxes like. That such boxes only bring trouble. And likely, it is best you just take that box to a remote location, and bury it, very deeply.”

Revy scoffed, “Thanks for yours concern. But, I am going to find out what is in this thing.”

Shenhua commented, “I am also not going to give up on finding out what is inside the box.'

Barbossa looked at Shenhua, as he dispassionately thought, 'The sad part is that I am Shenhua's previous incarnation. So, I will someday actually, be her. And so, at this point in time for her, we will not know better. And Jack certainly knew better. I guess people do have to relearn lessons, from life to life. Though, at least I warned them.'

Suddenly, Barbossa saw Rock, Lotton, Sawyer, and Eda, get up from their seats, pick up their drinks, and move to other, nearby tables.

Barbossa mentally added, 'I guess at least some of them had enough sense to heed my warning.'

Rock sat down by Ranma, at the table Ranma shared with her two lovers.

Meanwhile, Lotton, Sawyer, and Eda, moved to set down at a table, near the back, that was previously empty. They, then sat down their drinks.

Revy turned to Rock, as she asked, “Where are you going?”

Rock took a sip of her bottle of beer. She sit it down. She then looked over Revy, as she answered, “Given the lives we have lead. I am not taking any chances.”

Lotton looked at Sawyer, whom was sitting beside her. She then turned to Shenhua and Revy, as she stated, “And neither are we.”

Revy said, “Fine. Have it your way.” She then turned her attention back to the box in front of her, at the table, she was sitting at.

Ranma offered, “I could pick the lock for you, Revy. Without opening the box. So, we can then use tools to open it from a distance.”

Revy continued to look at the small box, as she replied, “I already tried picking the lock. Besides, I like a challenge.'

Ranma thought, 'Given the way Revy is at the moment. I think it is best to just drop my offer to help her. If I unlocked that box for her, right now. Which, with my skills and abilities, would only take a few seconds to do. She would take it as an insult. And I have no intent of upsetting her, even if she does not have her pistols with her.'

Janet suggested, “We could always have the box x-rayed. That way we can find out what is in it, without risk of damaging it.”

Revy did not take her eyes off the box, as she responded, “Nice idea. If I cannot get into it, within the next few minutes. I may take you up on your suggestion.”

Janet replied, “Okay. That will be fine.” She thought, 'At least, she is open to taking a different approach on this matter. I just hope she doesn't become too obsessed with that box. Because, when she gets like this. She acts like a little kid that wants to stick her hand in the cookie jar, without caring about the consequences, afterward.'

Revy finally took her eyes off her box, to look over at Shenhua. She asked, in a polite tone of voice, “Shenhua, could I please borrow one of your throwing knifes, to pop the lock to this box?”

Shenhua continued to look at the box, as she responded, “By all means. It is your box. Just don't damage my knife, and hand back when you are finished.”

Revy replied, “Sure.”

Shenhua used her right hand, to reach under the right side of her red qipao, for the garter belt on the right thigh. She then used her right fingers to carefully pulled out of her kunai throwing knifes.

She then looked up at Revy, as she offered her kunai, to Revy, with the butt of the hilt, facing Revy.

Revy then gently took the knife from Shenhua's right hand, with her own right hand, as she replied, “Thank you.”

Shenhua replied, “You're welcome.”

The two women then turned their attention back to the box, are Revy inserted the tip of the blade, along the slit that the lid created, near the lock.

Everyone in the room then silently watched, are Revy began carefully working the knife back and forth, along the latch of the lock, that held the lid closed.

While Revy continued to work the lock, she muttered, “Come on damn it. Give. Give.”

A second later, without warning, the lid burst open, with the latches on the back of the lid being the only thing that kept the lid attached to the box.

As the lid opened up, everyone saw a large puff of blue smoke emerge from the box.

The blue smoke hit Revy directly in the face, while a little bit of smoke hit Shenhua.

The smoke then swiftly dissipated, before it could reach anyone else in the room.

There was silence for a few seconds.

Ranma commented, “From my years of experience, with magical objects. That type smoke immediately appearing, then quickly disappearing, is never good.”

Dutch turned to Ranma, as she, “I will take this means that we should be concerned about what just happened” She turned to Revy and Shenhua, as she continued, “So, we need to check on those two.”

As everyone looking more closely at Revy and Shenhua, they saw that Revy had appeared complete dazed. Revy was so out of it, that she unconsciously dropped the knife in her right hand, onto the table.

Meanwhile, Shenhua's eyes seemed more focused. Though, she showed surprised in her facial expressions.

Sawyer and Lotton look at Shenhua.

Sawyer asked, with concern in her tone of voice, “Shenhua, are you okay?”

Lotton inquired, with concern in her voice, “Shenhua, do you need help?”

They saw that Shenhua's eyes and face return to normal, as Shenhua turned to Sawyer, and Lotton. She calmly responded, “I will be fine. Though, thank you for asking.”

Akira commented, “Okay. Don't feel bad. A sudden burst of smoke like that, would startle anyone.”

Shenhua looked over towards Akira, as she replied, “I realize that.” She turned to Revy, whom was clearly still daze. She continued. “Though, it seems that Revy took the brunt of the blast.” She turned to Revy, as she asked, with concern in her tone of voice, “Revy, are you okay.?”

Revy did not response.

Shenhua quickly reached over and picked up her throwing knife, by its hilt. She then looked down at her legs, as she carefully put away her kunai, where she had it, in her right garter belt.

After she had sheathed her throwing knife, she turned back to look at Revy. She thought, 'I do not know how Revy will react. So, I feel it is best to remove all sharp objects from her reach. Still, I hope I am wrong about what I think may have happened to her.'

Dutch commented, “Damn. I have not seen Revy this out of it, since Roberta here, gazed her head, with a bullet, back on Roanapur.”

Roberta said, “Actually, that was a grenade. Honestly, I was surprised that she survived that.”

Dutch responded, “I am surprised we survived any of this.”

Roberta conceded, “That is a good point.”

Janet questioned, “Back to the matter at hand. What should we do about Revy?”

Akira inquired, “How long do you think she is going to be like this?”

Natsuru suggested, “Should we take her to a doctor? Or, at least call one?”

Rock stated, “If we have too, I will call Simon. I have his cellphone number. He said he would more than happy to treat any ailments we have.” She thought, 'I will leave out that Chang stated that he would have to pay Simon to help us with any medical treatments. Though, that is between him and Chang.'

Yolanda commented, “That is good to know.”

Violin suggested, “Perhaps there is a clue to what has happened to Revy, inside the box. Shenhua, could you please tell us, what is inside the box.”

Shenhua leaned over the table, as she looked down inside the box. She then sat back down, as she turned Violin. She said, in a confused tone of voice, “There is nothing inside the box.”

Ranma commented, “Now, I know we are in trouble.”

Barbossa stated, “Actually. If this is magic. And sense is no one is dead, nor turned into something, nor asleep. She should be coming back around, in a few seconds.”

Over the next couple of seconds, the others noticed as Revy relaxed her face. Her lips curled into a crazed smile, as she took on a wild look in her eyes. Revy then jumped out of her chair, and onto her feet, as she exclaimed, in a slightly british accent, “I'm free, again!”

Ranma thought, 'Barbossa clearly has more experience with magical items than I do. And that is saying something. And Revy's action just now concerns me. If she has gone completely over the edge, it is going to be a challenge to tie her down, until we can get her some help.'

Barbossa looked at Revy. He cracked a grin, as he commented, in a humorous tone of voice, “I know that smile, and accent.”

Revy turned to Barbossa, as she said, in the same british accent, “That you do, you old gent.”

Natsuru asked, “What are you talking about?”

Barbossa continued to look at Revy, as he said, “Ladies, meet Jack Sparrow. Hi Jack. It is good to see you, again.”

Revy continued to face Barbossa, as she happily said, in her the same pirate accent, as before, “And it is good to be back.”

Barbossa calmly asked, “So, how are you enjoying your new body?”

Revy ran her hands down her body, as casually answered, in a pirate accent,“I am enjoying these lush curves. And this is not my first time in controlling this body.”

Barbossa thought, 'That is interesting to know. And that does explain how others knew, before we came here, that Revy is the reincarnation of Jack Sparrow.'

Benny stated, with worry in her tone of voice, “Oh no. She's possessed.”

Revy turned to Benny, as she casually said, in her pirate accent, “Not really, Benny-girl. I am not possessed. As you know, from Barbossa, here. Revy is the reincarnation of me, Captain Jack Sparrow. And if you are wondering. I have both Revy and my own memories. Just mine are more fun. And I am the dominate personality... Persona... Whatever...”

Benny remarked, “And what are you a captain of? The only boat you currently are a member of is the Lagoon. And Dutch is still the captain of that boat.”

Dutch stated, “And I am not resigning that captaincy anytime soon. And you know, you are not going to get a mutiny from this crew.”

Barbossa calmly commented, “They're right, Jack. The title of, captain, for you, went down with your body, on that noose, in Caracas.”

Revy groaned a little, as she admitted, “Well, you have me there? Though, there is a lot that we can do, that does not involve me being a captain.”

Janet inquired, “I can see the train wreck already coming. So, how do we get Jack back into the box?”

Revy turned to Janet, as she commented, in a mischievous tone of voice, “And why would you want to do that, my deary? Think of the fun we could all have.”

Benny stated, “I don't know about anyone else, but happy Revy is freaking me out.”

Dutch said, “You're not alone.”

Janet commented, “Yea. I am feeling the same way.”

Eda pointed out, “At least, she doesn't have her guns with her.”

Dutch stated, “Amen to that.”

Revy began to belly laughing at their comments about her, for a few seconds.

Everyone remained silence, as Revy laughed, because no one was sure how to react to Revy's present, jovial nature.

Meanwhile, Dutch thought, 'While Revy's Whitman fever always concerned me. We got that sorted out, and taken care of, years ago. And I am loath to admit it, but Lee did have a hand in helping Revy through that. But, this Jack-Revy, is something else entirely. My instincts tell me that she is capable doing almost anything, at any given moment. That she is truly unpredictable. That her actions have random, yet planned, natures to them. And that only confirms that Jack Sparrow is at the wheel. Because, that is Jack, to a, t.'

As Revy stopped laughing, she turned to Barbossa, as she playfully inquired, “Oh, Hector. Do you remember that party we went to, that night, at that whorehouse on Tortuga?”

Barbossa calmly answered, “Aye. Though, I believe if you tried that with this lot, you would likely not make it out of this room alive.”

Revy gave Barbossa a wicked smirk, as she replied, “It still might be worth the attempt.”

Benny asked, “What is she talking about?”

Meanwhile, behind the bar counter, Bao had been silent, as she paid attention to the conversation. She thought, 'Someone needs to answer Benny, before Revy gets herself in trouble, and starts a fight in my bar... Again.'

Bao commented, in a plain tone of voice, “Jack is trying to figure out how proposition all of us, at once.”

Sawyer let out a laugh. She then said, “And I thought Revy was crazy.”

Dutch commented, “If this is how Jack usually is, I can understand why Revy was returned back to normal.”

Barbossa shrugged, as he said, with mirth in his tone of voice, “Oh, this is nothing. Jack hasn't even gotten started, yet.”

Dutch stated, “All the more reason to return her to normal, as soon as possible.”

Eda commented, “Still, that might be easier said, than done.”

Barbossa said, “Well, that box clearly carried a curse that bought Jack back to the land of the living. And we have no idea how to cure Revy of her curse.”

Ranma stated, “That does explain why the box was otherwise empty.”

Barbossa replied, “Aye.”

Dutch commented, “Getting her back to the way she was cannot be that hard. From what we understand, this is not the first time this has happened. So, we know there is a solution out there. We just don't yet know what it is.”

Aeryn pointed out, “Though, Jack likely knows the solution to her current situation.”

Everyone continued to look at Revy.

Revy noticed this, as she looked around the room. She stated, “And I am not telling.”

Lotton deadpanned, “Of course. It would not be that easy.”

Yolanda calmly mentioned, “Well, yesterday morning. When we met Barbossa and Ahsoka. Revy called Lee on the phone about this matter. And she seemed happy with the answers Lee gave her. So, since Jack here said this is not the first time this has happened. I can guess that Lee was the one responsible for returning her back to normal.”

Revy turn Yolanda, as she commented, “Damn. I forgot how sharp everyone here can be.”

Yolanda gave Revy a warm smile, as she replied, “Thank you, my dear.”

Rock stated, “That is a start. And I am starting to understand why Lee would want to get Revy to return to her old self. Though, given who Lee knows. I think it was River and Annie that did the job. Lee just made sure the job worked.”

Dutch said, “That is very possible. Those two would be the only ones that could pull it off.”

Revy looked at Dutch, as she said, “You would be right about that. But, even there, I had to consent to it being done. And I don't feel like going back so soon. There is so much fun to be had here.”

Barbossa calmly requested, “Jack. Let Revy have her life back. You had your life. Now, let her have hers. She may not be the happiest person in the world, but I can see she has a good life. And these childish antics will only cause trouble for both you and her.”

Revy whined, “Come on. Can't a man... I mean woman, have some fun?”

Barbossa said, “Even I will admit that our type of fun will not work in this day and age. Our time has passed. Yield to the future. Like I have.” He then looked over at Shenhua, and then back to Revy.

Rebecca inquired, with a mix of worry and concern in her voice, “Mom.... Can I call you mom?”

Revy turned to the table that three of her five children were sitting at. She answered, “Sure, Rebecca. I remember carrying you inside me. Giving birth to you. And raising you. I will always be your mom.”

Rebecca stated, in a pleading tone of voice, “Well, then... Mom, I don't want to lose you.”

Yukio begged, “We don't want you to leave our family.”

Revy turned to Rebecca, as she said, “I will never let that happen, ladies. I will never leave what we have. I am just different, now.”

Barbossa stated, in a sober tone of voice, “Jack. Given your nature. You know you cannot keep that promise. You were born at sea. And the sea calls to you every day. If left to your own devices, you will not be able to help yourself, as you return back to the sea. This is likely not the same for Revy.”

Revy turned to face Barbossa, as she commented, “Actually, Revy had a similar nature in her love of the sea. She was just better at hiding it.”

Barbossa said, “Even so. Give your nature, and how you handle relationships. If you stay this way, you will wreck Revy's life, and harm those that care for her. Take a look around. And tell me, as Revy, you have not become richer than I, in so many ways.”

Revy slowly look around at the faces in the room. Most of them had the looks of concern in their eyes. Some showed caring in their eyes. And a few of them had fear of loss in their eyes.

As Revy faced Rock, she stopped turning. She saw such deep caring for her, in Rock's eyes. Revy slumped her shoulders, as she admitted defeated, “Alright. I will go back to sleep.”

Kristina commented, “Thank you, Jack. Besides. Most of us love you too much for you to leave without a fight.” She thought, 'And Sarah and Molly are going to enjoy hearing about all this.'

Nodoka smiled at Kristina, as she gave Kristina a quick kiss on her right cheek.

Kristina looked over at Nodoka, as she returned her girlfriend's smile. A second later, the young couple turned back to look at Revy.

Revy looked over at Kristina, as she sighed. She said, “I know... And damn it. This is a similar trick, as way Lee did, to convince me to go back, the first time.”

Eda commented, “That would be Lee, to a, t.”

Barbossa thought, 'There is something I have to know.' He asked, “Is this the same Lee? A young, slender, black haired lass? Whom I met, yesterday? At the casino?”

Violin answered, “Yes. That is the same, Lee. And a word of caution. Do not underestimate her.”

Barbossa looked over a Violin, as he replied, “I will make a note, not too.”

Revy turned to Barbossa, as she commented, with amusement in her tone of voice, “Oh, the things we could tell you about that person.”

Barbossa turned back to look at Revy, as he thought, 'While I knew about River being a telepath. And I knew the basics about Chang. I just thought Lee was a trophy girlfriend to Chang, and likely River. Given the way those three acted towards each other. But, if what the others here are saying is correct, I am starting to realize that she is likely as sharp as the rest. It might be best to keep my distance from her. And Ahsoka can take care of herself.'

Rock thought, 'I think it is best we don't let Barbossa know about Lee stories.' She turned to Revy, as she stated, “Jack. You are not to tell Barbossa about Lee. He is a very old man. And we do not want to give him a heartattack.”

Barbossa overheard Rock. He said, “Ladies. It is quite alright. I have solved all the mysteries I care to learn in my life. The rest can wait until, later.”

Only Shenhua understood the hidden meaning of Barbossa's words. But, she chose to remain silent.

Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Suit yourself.”

A thought occurred to Benny, as she inquired, “Hold up, a moment, Jack. I have a question for you. How good is your memory?”

Revy turned to Benny, as she said, “I have a very sharp memory.”

Janet inquired, “Then, why does Revy have such a poor memory?”

Revy looked over at Janet, as she answered, “Because, it is not so much that she has poor memory, it is that she doesn't feel like recalling many of the more unpleasant events in her life.”

Benny stated, “That makes so much sense that it is scary.”

Revy calmly replied, “I know.”

Rock thought, 'As fun as it is to talk to Revy, this way. We need to get her back to normal, before she is tempted to try to escape us. I am sure she realizes that we would easily track her down. But, it is just not worth the trouble. And I know who to call to fix this mess.'

Rock stated, “I better call Chang. And arrange for him to find River and Annie.”

Rock pulled out her cellphone from her right side pants pocket. The cellphone was encrypted, and given to her, as a gift from Chang. For emergencies, where Rock had to get in touch with Chang, or someone else at the casino. While, at the same time, she did not have to worry about someone eavesdropping on the signal.

While Rock selected the preset number for Chang's cellphone, she thought, 'I am glad I only had a single bottle of beer for lunch. Because, I know I am going to have to drive Revy to the casino, right after I finish this phone call. I am glad I brought my car keys to the GTO, with me. Given Benny drove, Revy, Dutch, Janet, and myself, here.'

By then, Rock had finished dialing the number, and she press the talk button to connect to the number. After which, she held her phone to her right hear.

Everyone else in the room, soon noticed that Rock was making a phone call. They knoew Rock well enough to realize that Rock would only be making a phone call, in this situation, as a way to help Revy.

They turned to look at Rock, as they went quite. To silently wait to see how her phone call would turn out.

Rock then began hearing the phone ring.

After a couple of rings, Rock heard the other end of the line pick up.

Chang said, “Hello.”

Rock stated, “Chang. We have a situation?”

Chang asked, in a disheartened tone of voice, “How many people are dead, or injured?”

Rock answered, “None, as of right now.”

Chang responded, in a much happier tone of voice, “Good. Then, what is the problem?”

Rock said, “I know this may sound hard to believe. But, Lee and River already likely told you. Revy is the reincarnation of Jack Sparrow. The problem is that Revy bought a magically bootytrapped box years ago, and a few minutes ago, she decided to open it. She has been the only one effected. But... How do I put this?... Jack is back.”

Chang chuckled a little over the phone. He then stated, “Actually, the last time this happened. I had a hand in getting Revy back to normal.”

Rock replied, in a slightly relaxed tone of voice, “Good. Then, you know how to help her?”

Chang said, “Yes. Pardon the pun. It was River and Annie that put Jack back into the box. But, Revy... Or, I guess, Jack, has to want to go back to normal. And it can be difficult to convince a trickster like Jack to do what you want her to do.”

Rock thought, 'So, Yolanda was correct.' She stated, “Fortunately, we convinced Jack to go back to sleep.”

Chang responded, “Good. I will call River and Annie up to my office, on the top floor. I will let the guards on duty, at the front elevator, let Revy through, without question. And since Jack has Revy's memories, she knows where to go. Also, I may send someone out to meet you.”

“Though, I will ask that only Jack comes up. From what I understand. This does require a some concentration. So, I have to request you not come with her, to the top floor. Even I will not be around, when they restore Revy back to normal.”

Rock said, “I understand. And that will be fine. I will just spend some on entertainment section of your building, as I wait.”

Chang offered, “And for keeping this a secret, from you. During your brief stay this afternoon, everything, but the gambling, is on me.”

Rock happily replied, “I appreciate that.”

Chang said, “See you there. In a few minutes.” He then hung up.

Rock disconnected her end of the line. She then put away her cellphone. Next, she looked over at Revy, as she stated, “Okay, Jack. Chang said he will get River and Annie, to meet us at his office, at the top floor of his casino. I am going to drive you over there.”

Revy turned to look at Rock, as she replied, “That will be fine.”

Rock then got up from her seat. A second, later, Barbossa got up, from his stool, as well.

The old pirate turned to Rock, as he requested, “If you don't mind. I would like to accompany you. So, I can talk to Jack, while I still can.”

Rock turned to Barbossa, as she replied, “That will be fine.”

Shenhua overheard Rock and Barbossa. She stood up. She turned to Rock, as she said, “I would like to come, as well.” She turned to Revy, as she continued, “Seeing Revy like this, amuses me.”

Rock looked over at Revy, as she asked, “You're call.”

Revy said, “Why not? The more, the merrier.”

Rock look over at all three of them, as she requested, “Okay. Just none of you start any fights.”

Barbossa said, “I will be on best manners.”

Revy replied, “So will I.”

Shenhua rhetorically commented, “Why would I want to start a fight? I think I will get plenty entertainment just listening to these two talk.”

Barbossa turned to Shenhua, as he agreed, “You might have a point there, my dear.”

There was some mild giggling from the others in the bar, over Shenhua and Barbossa's comments.

Dutch then requested, in a casual, yet humorous tone of voice, “Have fun, everyone. And let of know how it turns out.”

Rock turned to Dutch, as she said, “We will.”

Benny stated, “And be careful. And good luck.” She thought, 'With that this lot, you are going to need it.'

Rock turned to Benny, as she smiled at her. She said, “I appreciate that.”

Sawyer and Lotton looked over at Shenhua. Sawyer requested, in a concerned tone of voice, “Yes. Benny's right, Shenhua. Be careful.”

Shenhua turned back to Sawyer and Lotton, as she replied, in a warm tone of voice, “I will.”

Revy looked over at Rock, as she calmly requested, “Come on, Rock. If I was still Revy. I would be complaining about this. Due to my impatience. Me, on the other hand. I just want to get this over with.”

Rock turned to Revy, as she replied, “Okay... Jack.” She then turned towards the front door of the bar, as she started walking towards the exit, to the outside of the building.

When Rock reached the front door, she opened it. And she left the door open, as she walked outside.

Barbossa, Shenhua and Revy then followed behind her.

Revy was the last to reach the front doors. Though, unlike the other three adults, she did not immediately go through it, and instead, she turned back to face those still inside the bar.

Revy commented, in a calm tone of voice, “Oh. And whoever wants that box on the table, can have it. To be honest, Revy didn't really pay that much for it. So, she won't mind.” She then turned back towards the front doors. She walked through the threshold, to the outside, as she closed the doors behind her.

With Revy, Rock, Barbossa, and Shenhua gone, all eyes turn to the small, magical box sitting, with the lip open, on the table that Revy and Shenhua had just vacated.

Rebecca was the first person in the room to ask what was on everyone's mind, “So, who wants the box?”

Dutch flatly stated, “No thank you.”

Yolanda calmly said, “I would prefer not too.”

Ranma commented, “I will take the box. I have experience in dealing with worse magical items. So, I know how to properly handle such dangerous items.”

Benny turned to Ranma, as she inquired, “And how would that be?”

Ranma looked over at Benny, as she answered, “Very, very carefully.” She looked around the room, as she requested, “Now, do any of you have a pair of tongs, nearby? So, I can move this box without actually touching it.”

Bao stated, “I do.”

Ranma looked over at Bao, as she responded, “Good. Now, all we need is decently strong bag to put this box into, and we are all set.”

Ranma and Bao then went to work to take care of moving the small, magical box that was on the table.

(_)

A few minutes later, Rock, Revy, Barbossa, and Shenhua were on the road.

Rock was driving the three others, in Lagoon family's red GTO.

To Rock's right, sat Revy in the right front passenger seat. Behind Revy sat Shenhua, and behind Rock sat Barbossa.

None of them had their seatbelts on.

Barbossa had removed his sheathed sword, and placed it between his legs, in the back seat of the car.

As they drove down the road, the two side windows were rolled down, to allow the cool air to wash over them.

Revy offered, in Jack's pirate accent, “You know, Rock. Before we get to the casino, we could always, stop find a quiet spot, and have some fun. There is no way it could be considered cheating, since I am Revy. Though, I am also Jack. At the same time.”

Rock kept her eyes in front of her, on the road, as she admitted, “Tempting. But, we have company in back.”

Revy cracked a grin, as she replied, “Oh. Don't worry about them. I know Barbossa wouldn't mind watching. And I feel the same can said about Shenhua.”

In the backseat, Shenhua and Barbossa heard Revy's comments.

Shenhua turned to Barbossa, as she asked, “Was Jack always like this?”

Barbossa looked over at Shenhua, as he answered, “Aye. When I considered staging my mutiny against Jack. I first made a list of reasons I would want to so. It quickly turned into a very long list.”

Shenhua commented, “I am starting to see why.”

Barbossa just nodded twice, towards Shenhua, as a way to support her statement.

Revy overheard Shenhua and Barbossa. She let out a laugh. She then requested, “Speaking of which, Hector. I would like my compass back.”

Barbossa calmly responded, “No, Jack. I have need of it. While you clearly do not?”

Revy pointed out, “I could just take it from you?”

Barbossa responded, “You could try. But, as yourself. As Revy, you clearly have plenty more years to enjoy, before it is your time to move on, from your current life. While I have such fewer years. I will admit that a fight between us will most likely cost me my life. But, there is a good chance it would cost yours, as well. Do you wish to see the ferryman, again, so soon?”

Revy conceded, “Point taken.”

Shenhua commented, “Now, we know that it is really Jack in there? Because Revy would have taken Barbossa's comment as a challenge.”

Revy replied, “Don't be so sure.”

Shenhua inquired, “What do you mean?”

Revy answered, “Revy, in Roanapur, would have. When she had little to lose. Now, she no long takes challenges without reason.”

Rock kept her eyes on the road, as she teased, “So, you consider minor slights to be, a reason.”

Revy retorted, “I never said they were good reasons.”

Everyone in the car laughed a little at Revy's comment, for a few seconds.

As everyone calmed down, Shenhua asked, “So, when we reach the casino? What then?”

Revy answered, “I get to go back to sleep. But, this time, since the cat is out of the bag. I will request River and Annie to allow me to remember this day, as Jack. And I believe that Revy will remember this day very fondly.”

Barbossa commented, “You hope Revy will like being you so much, she will willingly let you out again.”

Revy admitted, “Exactly.”

Shenhua commented, “You seem to always be looking for the escape back into life, Jack.”

Revy inquired, in a curious tone of voice, “And how would you know?”

Shenhua lied, “Academic guess.”

Revy turned around, between the front seats, to look at Shenhua and Barbossa. She turned to Shenhua, as she gave her a risque smile. She threw a little charm into her voice, as she questioned, “Are you sure?”

Shenhua raised an eyebrow, as she replied, “Nice try. But, your charm will not work with me. I have tastes that even you would not dare attempt. That my two lovers are more than willing to enjoy with me.”

Barbossa turned to his right, to look at Shenhua, with a curious look to his eyes.

Revy noticed this, but she did not say anything about it. Instead, she teased, “Are you sure about that?”

Shenhua leaned over to whispered into Revy's left ear, for a few seconds.

In the driver's seat, with her enhanced hearing, Rock blushed, as she overheard what Shenhua said to Revy.

Then, Shenhua lean back away from Revy, and into her seat.

Revy looked at Shenhua, with surprise on her face, as she flatly asked, “You actually enjoy that?”

Shenhua cracked a wicked grin, as she replied, “Sure do.”

Revy commented, “I have done some very interesting things with other people. As both myself, and Revy. But, not that.”

Before Shenhua could speak, Barbossa flatly said, “I don't want to know. So, do not tell me.” He mentally lamented, 'I truly don't want to know. But, I know I am just going to find out someday. First hand, as Shenhua. Which at that point, I hope that she is honest about her enjoying whatever rattled Jack's cage.'

Shenhua started giggling at both Revy and Barbossa's responses.

Barbossa commented, “It is very rare to get that type of a response from Jack.”

While Shenhua calmed down, she kept her smile. She replied, “I know.”

Revy caught onto Shenhua's comment, as she asked, “And how would you know?”

Shenhua stated, “Because, you and Revy are clearly two sides of the same coin. Jack, you are light, to Revy's dark.”

Revy commented, “Deary, I am not so light.”

Shenhua countered, “No. But you are cheerful. In the same way I am. While Revy is always so serious. Even when she tries to relax. That has always been her problem.”

Barbossa could not help but ask, “Why is that?”

Revy looked over Barbossa, then back to Shenhua, as she demanded, “Don't you dare say a word.”

Shenhua answered, “Revy was falsely arrested, beaten, and raped as a teenager, by a cop... A deputy constable.”

Barbossa calmly replied, in an even tone of voice, “I know what a cop is.”

Revy looked at Shenhua, as she grimaced. She warned, “If I was currently Revy, I would have hurt you for telling someone that, so openly.”

Shenhua responded, “But, you are not Revy, right now, Jack. And it is a good way to explain to Barbossa why Revy is so different from you.”

Revy stated, “You do not know what you are talking about. That was not the final straw. Nor, the first. That event was just one of the worst... Bitch...”

Barbossa and Shenhua then watched a Revy started breathing slowly, as she forced herself to calm down.

Revy then looked over at the two adults, as she commented, “Relax everyone. I was just starting to let Revy's negativity seep through. And I had to calm down.”

Rock overheard the conversation, as she drive the car down the street.

Rock kept her eyes on the road, as she stated, “Jack. It is clear this conversation is bothering you. If you want to spend the rest of this trip in silence. That is fine with me.”

Revy leaned back, as she looked at Rock. She commented, “No, Rock. I... Don't have long, as Jack. And I need to enjoy my time to the fullest.”

Rock said, “I trust your judgment.”

Revy replied, with caring warmth in her tone of voice, “Thank you, Rock.”

Barbossa said, in a sober tone of voice, “Jack. While I know you loath pity. You do have my sympathies on this matter.”

Revy looked towards the backseat, as she responded, “I know, Hector. We have done a lot of horrible things to each other. But, there were a few lines we never crossed with each other.”

Barbossa commented, “And there are lines I would not cross with you, now. Still, I have always found it better to loosen a woman's legs with alcohol, than with force... No offense, ladies.”

Rock said, “None take.”

Shenhua commented, “I can live with it.”

Revy replied, “I've done worse, as Revy.”

There was silence for a few seconds in the car, as no one dared to inquire about Revy's comment.

Rock kept her eyes on the road, as she thought, 'While I suggested silence for Revy. Now, that I think about it. I need to keep this conversation moving. I have three unpredictable people, in the car. All of whom are known to be prone to violence. I need to keep them occupied with talking. Or, one of them might do something stupid.'

'I agree with Shenhua. Revy and Jack are just two sides of the same person. That is why I think of both Revy and Jack, as just Revy.'

Meanwhile, in the backseat, Barbossa then noticed that Shenhua had an intense expression on her face. He asked, “Something on your mind, lass?”

Shenhua sighed, as she answered, “Yes. But, I am not sure, I should tell you.”

Barbossa commented, “Don't worry, dear. I have heard it all.”

Revy flatly stated, “She is concerned, because is it clear that Shenhua is your reincarnation. And due to that puff blue smoke, she remembers your life, Hector.”

Revy statement caught Shenhua and Hector by surprise. Though, Rock only found the situation to be more amusing, than surprising.

Rock thought, 'That explains a lot.'

Barbossa looked to Shenhua, as he questioned, with concern in his tone of voice, “Is this true?”

Shenhua turned Barbossa, as she admitted, “Yea.” She look towards the front, as she inquired, “But, how did you figure that out Jack?”

Revy responded, “Simple. I have Revy's memories. I noticed that during that time Revy and you first met Barbossa, Barbossa looked at my compass, twice. The second time was after you first spoke to him. Given he had already used his compass, to confirm my identity, it makes sense he would find out about you, as well.”

“This also explains why he suddenly decided to take you as a student, and you were so willing to be his teacher. And the reason why he wanted to speak to you in private.”

Barbossa complimented, “Sharp as ever, Jack.”

Revy replied, “Thank you.”

Rock asked, “Okay. So, Shenhua, you are the reincarnation of Barbossa?”

Shenhua answered, “Yes.”

Rock commented, “Well, you are definitely not acting like Barbossa's personality is at the wheel.”

Barbossa said, “Aye. I would have noticed something, if that was the case.”

Revy commented, “We all would have.”

Shenhua stated, “You are correct. I am still me, Shenhua. For the most part. And I do not understand it, either. I have some of Barbossa's memories. But, it is a jumbled mess. And I certainly am not acting like Barbossa here. And that is what I don't understand. Revy is acting like Jack, but I am not acting like Barbossa.”

Revy commented, “The simplest explanation could be you got a glancing blow, while I got a full blast of the blue smoke.”

Barbossa commented, “Well, there is another explanation. No matter his, or her, life. Jack is always in love with himself, or herself.”

Revy smiled, as she stated, “True.” She looked over at Rock, as she continued, in a warm tone of voice, “Though, I believe that there is enough love to spread around.”

From the corner of her right eye, Rock noticed Revy was talking about her. She continued looked forward, as she said, “Thanks.”

Barbossa went onto say, “On the other hand, I have never really been that proud of who I am. While I have loved the life I lead, and I enjoyed many things. When I sit quietly in the dark, I do not like the person I ended up being.”

Barbossa turned to Shenhua, as he continued, “While, you Shenhua, do like yourself. So, the part of you that is me, and the part of you that is you, both want the part of you, that is you, to be you.”

Revy teased, “Hector, you are starting to sound like me.”

Barbossa quipped, “I had a good teacher.”

Revy began laughing, for a few seconds.

Shenhua stated, “That somewhat comforting... If, a bit confusing.”

Barbossa said, “Not to worry. I would not want to take control of your life, nor body. And from what I understand, we will soon have you both cured of these troubles.”

Shenhua replied, “I look forward to that.” She thought, 'While I have lead a violent life. And Barbossa's memories are a jumbled mess in my head. Some of Barbossa's memories, which I can clearly recall, disturb even me.'

Rock asked, “Jack, am I correct in assuming that the reason that you are in the driver's seat, instead of Revy, is due to you, as Jack, having a much more upbeat, positive personality?”

Revy looked over at Rock, as she smiled. She complimented, “That is what I like about you, Rock. You are a sharp as I am.”

Barbossa thought, 'Well, that does explain why those two are together.' He commented, “Well, at some point, everyone wants to be the wild one at the party. And Jack is always that.”

Revy agreed, “Quite true. Still, I am impressed that you are taking this so very well, Barbossa.”

Barbossa casually responded, “Come on, Jack. Compared to dying and coming back to life a few times. And being undead for a few years. This is nothing.”

Revy replied, “Fair enough.”

Shenhua requested, “I know this is a lot to ask. But, could you keep my connection to Barbossa a secret?”

Rock replied, “Sure.” She thought, 'There is nothing gained my letting this secret out. And Shenhua is a front to both Revy and myself. As such, I have no reason to tell this secret. And I am sure that Shenhua will eventually tell this secret, on her own. To the rest of us. When she is ready.'

Revy said, “Along, as it is okay with, Hector.”

Barbossa stated, “I am fine with it. I do not want the troubles of my life to haunt her life.”

Shenhua said, “Thank you.”

Revy turned to her left, so she could look between the front seats, and into backseat. She looked over at Shenhua. She gave the black haired woman a lecherous grin, as she stated, “That is very touching. Still Shenhua, I know I look a lot better than I did as Jack. And you are clearly far more appealing than Barbossa ever was.”

Barbossa said, “I won't argue that point.”

Revy ignored Barbossa, as she went onto suggest, “So, how about you and I have a little fun, before we reach the casino?”

Shenhua looked Revy directly in her eyes, as she flatly stated, “That is never going to happen.”

Barbossa said, “Jack, we maybe friends, over the course of lifetimes. But, we will never be lovers. There is not enough rum in the world for that. You see, there is one thing I realize that both Shenhua and I both still share in tastes, and distastes, for possible lovers. We find such open insanity, such as both you and Revy present, to be a complete turn off.”

Shenhua nodded once in agreement.

Revy replied, “Humph.” She then turned back around, to sit in her seat.

Rock asked, “Was Jack always like this?”

Barbossa commented, “Sadly, yes. Jack was very much the manchild. When he was not obsessed with each finding a specific treasure. Or, saving his hide. He preferred to spend his time with cheap rum, and cheaper woman.”

Revy muttered, “Those women in Singapore were not so cheap.”

Shenhua stated, “Well, Revy here is pretty much a womanchild. So, there is not much difference between the two.”

Barbossa said, “I am coming to realize that, my dear.”

Rock kept her eyes on the road, as she inquired, “Still, there is one thing I don't understand. Where is the karmic connection between you two? How did a pirate of the Caribbean end up reincarnated as a Taiwanese assassin for the Triad? I can understand Revy. She is mixed chinese-european american, from the eastern coast of the U.S. She likely has pirate blood in her veins. But Shenhua. I don't understand your connection to all this.”

Barbossa stated, “Concerning Revy lineage, that is very possible. As for Shenhua, I am not so sure.”

Shenhua commented, “Well, I do have two pirate ancestors that I know of. A mother and daughter team from Taiwan, that captained pirate ships together.”

Barbossa inquired, “Those two women you mentioned, Shenhua. The mother-daughter team. Where their names Qiaohui and Qiaolian?”

Shenhua answered, “Yes. They were. Qiaohui was known for her knife throwing, and Qiaolian was known for her swordsmanship skills. When I heard tales about them, as a child, they inspired me to learn how to use my knives. Did you know them, Barbossa?”

Barbossa casually said, “Aye. You could say that I did. While I commanded the Cobra. My own ship. Long before I met Jack and joined him on the Black Pearl. I knew Qiaohui. And you see... Qiaolian is our illegitimate daughter.”

Barbossa's revelation took Shenhua by completely surprise. Shenhua yelled, in surprised, “What?! I am my own great, several times removed, granddaughter?... Oh no, I actually remember them.”

Revy could not help but laugh, for a few seconds, at Shenhua's outburst. As she calmed down, she teased, “I thought you said you were pure blood Taiwanese?”

As Shenhua forced herself to calm down, she flatly answered, “Two centuries, or more, is considered pure enough.”

Revy laughed some more, while Rock chose to remain quiet, as she drove the car down the road.

Barbossa turned to Shenhua, as he said, “It would appear to be that way.” He then looked in towards the front seats, as he continued, “I won't laugh too hard, Jack. Given the number of women you slept with, in your previous life, by now, a quarter the planet, of our home reality, is likely related to you. You are even probably related to the current you.”

Revy heard what Barbossa said. She forced herself to calm down, as she replied, “You're probably right. Still, it is funny.”

Shenhua looked over at Barbossa, as she requested, “Barbossa. Please, tell us about Qiaohui and Qiaolian?”

Barbossa turned to Shenhua, as he said, “Both were wonderful women, and fierce pirates. And both were very beautiful women. Though, I did not marry Qiaohui, I did make sure she and Qiaolian were well taken care of. With some of the booty I made from my raids, while commanding the Cobra, going to them.”

“I even taught Qiaolian how to use a sword. Eventually, when Qiaolian reached adulthood, both mother and daughter wanted to get back into piracy. I helped them find their own ship and crew. And for a few years, they were very successful pirates.”

Revy commented, “I don't ever remember meeting those two.”

Barbossa replied, “Actually, I did introduce you to them at a pirate hideout, on the east coast of Thailand.”

Revy responded, “Now, I remember. Those two. Your daughter was quite fetching. And she was fun in bed. I even remember the next night, after you introduced me to them. When we got drunk, while on the Pearl. It was a bright, moonlit night. We had the ship taken out pass the cove, to test how long it would take us to do so. In case we needed to make a quick escape. While, right outside of the cove, we had the crew take shots with our cannons on that giant Buddha Statue in the harbor.”

Barbossa reminisced, “Yea. That was fun. We even blew off most of that statue's face and its left hand.”

Rock spoke up, “Buddha statue? On the east coast of Thailand?”

Revy asked, “What is it Rock?”

While Rock kept her eyes on the road, and she did not turn her head towards them. She stated, “Revy. Don't you realize, as Jack, you and Barbossa visited Roanapur before it was even Roanapur. And you are the ones whom were responsible for destroying the head of that statue, we passed, all the time, while on the Lagoon.”

Revy realized, as she said, “You're right, Rock. Every time we passed by that statue, I always felt that I was some how responsible for damaging it. Now, I know why, and how I did it.”

Shenhua stated, “I can see it. I can honestly see it. Roanapur started as a pirate hideout. Then, as piracy on the high seas waned, the pirates went into hiding there, as fishermen. Eventually, the Japanese would move in there for a decade or so, and then leave. Allowing the place to go back to a fishing village. Then, the refugees and former soldiers starting coming in, and the whole place when back to being a pirate city. Until Chang destroyed it all.”

Revy commented, “I won't worry. The pirates will one day return there. And it is still a better fate than what happened to Port Royal?”

Barbossa said, in a sad tone of voice, “Aye. Those of Port Royal did not deserve such a calamity to befall them.”

Shenhua asked, “What happened?”

Barbossa stated, in a sober tone of voice, “An earthquake. A bad one. The earthquake sank both the buildings, the harbor, and the ships moored to the dock. One morning Port Royal was there. An hour later, the city was gone, beneath the waves.”

Shenhua quietly said, “Oh...”

Revy stated, “Aye. That was a dark day for piracy... Still... Now, about those two women we were talking about. I seem to recall. Didn't we sink their ship a month after you introduced me to them?”

Barbossa pointed out, “Well, we did let those two women live. And we allowed them to safely make it to shore.”

Revy said, “Wait a minute. We never found any treasure on their ship. We killed all of the men, but you convinced me let those two women live.” Realization dawned on her eyes, as she continued, “And it was your idea to have the Pearl attack their ship, in the first place.”

Everyone else in the car realized what Revy was alluding too.

Barbossa commented, “Well, to be fair, we offered them surrender, in exchange for their lives. And Qiaohui did put the matter to a vote, and all the men voted to fight. And they did need to retire from piracy all of a sudden, given you, Jack, got my daughter pregnant.”

Revy asked, “I did. Why didn't you tell me?”

Barbossa explained, “Because Jack. Unlike Revy. You are promiscuous. You would have never treated my daughter right. That is one of the reasons we are putting you back into your bottle. We don't want you to screw up Revy's life anymore than you already have.”

Shenhua jumped into the conversation, as she commented, “I have to agree. The one positive thing we all agree about Revy, is that she is monogamous.”

Rock calmly spoke up, “And happily so.”

Barbossa said, “Anyway, Qiaohui and Qiaolian needed the money. And quickly. If they had divided their wealth with the crew, they would have had barely anything. This way, Qiaohui, Qiaolian, and our future grandson, whom I have met a few times, were set for life, from the fortunes they made as pirates.”

Rock kept her eyes on the road, as she stated, “Barbossa, I find what you did to be deceitful, underhanded, and everything else I have come to expect from a pirate of your caliber.”

Barbossa turned towards Rock, as he responded, in a pleasant tone of voice, “Thank you, Rock. It takes years of experience to become so skilled. Especially, when tricking a trickster, like Jack.” Barbossa turned to Revy, as he stated, “By the way, when I found out you got my daughter pregnant. That was the first time I ever genuinely entertainment the thought of taking your ship and crew from you.”

Revy said, “Oh. That explains a lot. Still, I find that a bit hypocritical of you, given you got her mother pregnant, in a similar situation.”

Barbossa defended himself, as he stated, “True. But unlike you, once I found out, I made sure she had enough wealth to be fine, and that our daughter were raised well. I doubt you would have done the same, for your child.”

Revy was silent for a few seconds. She then admitted, “You're right about that.” Revy then slyly smiled, as she moved to looked between the front seats, and towards Shenhua. She commented, “You know what this means, Shenhua? That we are likely related.”

Shenhua warned, “Don't remind me.”

Rock stated, “This is all interesting. The blood ties explain the Taiwan angle, and the weapons angle, but this does not explain the Triad angle.”

Revy said, “That one is easy. Chang and Hong Kong are the keys. At the time, Hong Kong was still a common wealth of Britain. Barbossa here is not originally British. But, he did become a privateer for the British crown. As you said, Barbossa. Where's the harm in joining the winning side. And you do meet a nicer class of person.”

Barbossa replied, “Aye.”

Revy went onto say, “And I have come to agree with that opinion. Anyway, just as Barbossa was an outsider that joined the British navy, as a privateer. Shenhua was an outsider, from Taiwan, that joined the Hong Kong Triad. I guess history, in a way, repeats itself. And in this life, we even met each other again in the middle of nowhere. And even now, centuries later, across the realities, we are still working together, while sniping at each other.”

Barbossa commented, “There is quite a bit of symmetry in that.”

Revy replied, “Yes. I see it, too.”

Shenhua disappointingly questioned, “We are going to be together until judgment day, and trumpets sound? Aren't we?”

Revy said, in a sober tone of voice, “It looks that way.” She then turned back, to sit in her front, right side, passenger seat.

Rock asked, “Barbossa, you actually told Jack that?”

Barbossa admitted, “Aye. The first movie pretty much nailed that scene. And it is a great quote.”

Rock agreed, “Yes. It is. And at least it never gets boring with this group.”

Barbossa replied, “Aye. I see why you are with them.”

The four adults then continued their conversation, as Rock drove them down the road.

(_)

Ten minutes later, Rock, Shenhua, Revy, and Barbossa, had reached Daiyu Palace Casino.

Rock had parked the car, rolled up the windows. And got out. Barbossa left his sword and scabbard, in the backseat of the car, as Rock and Revy locked the car doors, and shut them.

The four adults then walked inside the casino, from the front entrance.

As they walked into the front lobby, they were walking in a side by side, with Barbossa to the far right, Rock was to Barbossa's right. Revy was to Rock's right. And Shenhua was to Revy's right.

While the walked, they saw Simon in front of them, on the other side of the front lobby, by the large hallway that lead to the gaming floor.

As the four adults saw Simon look at them, they watched as Simon began to walk towards them.

While Simon came closer to them, Revy stated, “Looks like we have someone here to greet.”

Rock commented, “Chang said he would send someone to greet us.”

The four adults came to a stop, as Simon approached them.

A few seconds later, Simon came to a stop, six feet front of them.

There was currently no one else around the five adults.

While Simon looked at the four other adults, he calmly said, “Hello. I know who you are all. Rock, Revy, and Shenhua, know me. And I know of you, Mister Barbossa. I am Doctor Simon Tam. River's my sister. Whom you met, yesterday.”

Barbossa recalled, as he said, “Ah, the redhead.”

Simon replied, “Yes.” He thought, 'Though, her natural hair color is brown.'

Barbossa commented, “Well, it is always nice to meet a doctor.”

Simon said, “I appreciate that.”

Rock inquired, “Simon, how much did Chang tell you?”

Simon answered, “I have been apprised of the situation.” He looked over at Revy, as he continued, “Now, should I refer to you, as Revy? Or, as Jack?”

Revy replied, “Either way, is fine.”

Simon said, “Well, if you would follow me, we will head to the penthouse level, where River and Annie are waiting to help you.”

Shenhua calmly requested, “I need to come with, Jack, to meet with Annie and River.”

Before Simon could protest, Revy said, “It is alright. We will explain, when we get up there.”

Simon thought, 'There is no point in arguing with these two women.'

Simon responded, “Okay.” He turned to Rock and Barbossa, as he stated, “Now, Chang said that you two may use the casino facilities to your hearts content. Except for gambling, he will cover your expenses, within reason. Stay out of trouble, and we will be fine.”

Barbossa said, “There is no profit in trouble by itself.”

Simon agreed, “Very true.” He thought, 'I think it might be best to keep Mal and Barbossa away from each other. Those to might bring out the worst in each other.'

Rock inquired, “I take it we will be contacted when Revy is back to normal?”

Simon replied, “Yes. By your cellphone.”

Rock said, “That will be fine.”

Barbossa asked, “Is Ahsoka here? I hoping to see if the young lass was now having some fun.”

Simon answered, “Unfortunately, she is not here, at this time. Though, I do know she has been having fun, with Annie, while she has stayed here.”

Barbossa replied, “That is nice to know.”

Rock questioned, “Where is she?”

Simon said, “For obvious reasons. Due to Annie being busy. To keep an eye on Ahsoka, Arcee is giving her a ride around town. And I have no idea when they will be back.”

Barbossa asked, “Who is Arcee?”

Rock replied, “I will tell you at the bar. Just follow me.” She looked over at Revy and Shenhua, as she said, “Good luck.”

Shenhua remain silent, so as to no tip off her secret, but she did give Rock a warm smile.

Revy replied, “Thank you.”

Simon said, “This way.” He then turned around, and started walking towards the hallway, leading to the gaming floor, and front elevator bay.

Revy and Shenhua followed right behind Simon.

Rock and Barbossa watched the two women, and one man, leave.

Once the three other adults had entered the hallway, Barbossa turned to Rock, as he inquired, “So, while we wait for them, what can a person do in this place, besides gamble?”

Rock looked over at Barbossa, as she answered, “Well, a lot, actually. Along with the internet and TV connections offered by wireless, here. There is a stage theater, near the middle of the building. A guest movie theater, in the front right side of the building. Two separate gyms and heated pools. One set, in front, for the customers. One set, in back, for the employee staff.”

“We both have access to the employee facilities. The casino also has a spa, with masseuses. It is free to employees. But, guests has to pay for an appointment.”

“I know the director of the spa. She probably forgotten more about giving pleasure, than the both of us will ever know. And this place has a top rate medical staff and resources. And that is just the short list.”

Barbossa commented, “Well, when you list all that. I am starting to have second thoughts on deciding not to stay here, instead of the Devil's Hotel.”

Rock thought, 'It is better if I warn him. I don't want something bad happen, that will cause problems for everyone.'

Rock said, “You likely do not know this. But, the security staff this casino has, use to be space private... Well, bank robbers. And all of them know about your compass. If you stay here, you will likely lose your compass on the first night.”

Barbossa responded, “Thank you for the informing me. I see I made the proper decision, in the first place.”

Rock replied, “I agree. And you're welcome.”

Barbossa asked, “So, where is this bar.”

Rock answered, “Straight ahead of us, and when we reach the gaming floor, the bar is to our right. You cannot miss it.”

Barbossa suggested, “Then, let's go get a drink and talk more about the wonderful friends Ahsoka is making.”

Rock happily replied, “With pleasure.”

Rock and Barbossa then started walking towards the hallway, that lead to the gaming floor, front elevator bay, and the casino restaurant, which had a bar counter in it.

(_)

A minute later, Simon, Revy, and Shenhua, had already reached the front elevator bay, and the express elevator. The guards let them pass, without question. With Simon using his key to open the doors.

As the doors opened, all three adults walked passed the two female chinese guards,, whom were dressed in black business suits, and dress shoes.

After Shenhua turned around, to face the door way, she saw her reflection in the doors, as they closed. And for a brief moment, she caught a glancing memory, that was not hers. The memory had a touch of emotion to it. But, the memory was gone as soon as she realized it was there.

As the doors fully closed, Shenhua thought, 'I wonder why looking at my reflection makes me feel sad. Unfortunately, with the jumbled mess that is my memories are, right now. I may never know.'

(_)

A few hours later, in an auxiliary room, on the penthouse level of the casino, Shenhua woke up.

As she leaned up, she saw she was laying on top of a white cot, in a small room, with her clothes on. But, she saw that the door to the room was closed, and her slippers were off her bare feet.

Shenhua then heard Revy snoring.

Shenhua turned to see Revy sound asleep on a cot, right beside her, to her right. Revy's clothing on her, but her boots were off.

Shenhua then recalled the events of the day, as she thought, 'Oh. Yea. Annie and River were willing enough to help us both. And while they sealed our memories, they agreed to let us both remember what happened to us, today. Also, they said that we can let ourselves out, when we woke up. Which is fine with me. The less people that know who I once was in my previous life. The less chance of my secret getting out.'

'Still, I wonder why Annie was acting strangely around Revy? Revy was once Jack, before. And River and Annie sealed Jack away, that time. It is possible that the two of them might have done something naughty, while Revy was Jack.'

'But, given they were about to work on my mind, I was not going to say a word about the matter. Though, River likely read my thoughts on the matter. But, she was nice enough not to say anything, because I chose not to speak of the matter, either.'

'Now, do I still have Barbossa memories? And are my memories fine?'

Shenhua spent the next few minutes reviewing her own memories.

Shenhua then continued her thoughts, 'Well, I seem to still have my memories. And all of Barbossa's memories are sealed. But, to the relief of my entire soul.'

'Though, I do remember being sad, in the elevator. But, I do not really know why. Given the jumbled mess of those memories. I should just be happy I still have my own memories, and leave it as a mystery, for another time.'

'Though, I wonder where are our shoes are?'

Shenhua look around, and she then noticed that her slippers and Revy's boots, were in the gap, between the two cots.

Shenhua thought, 'Good. They are right there.' She turned to Revy, as she continued her thoughts, 'Now, need to check check to see if Revy is still Revy, and if she also remembers to day, as well.'

Shenhua looked back over at Revy, whom has turned on her back, as she slept.

Shenhua thought, 'Revy has always liked to sleep in, late. I can leave without her. Because it will annoy Rock, and likely Barbossa. And if I wait for her to wait up, we will both likely be here, all day. So, I am I going to have to wake her up. Though, I will have to be careful, when I do so... Well, here I go.'

Shenhua then leaned over, towards Revy, as she used her left index to gently nudge the top of Revy's shoulder. As Shenhua did this, she calmly said, “Come on, Revy. Wake up. We don't have time for you to sleep all day.”

Revy said, “Huh?”

Shenhua immediately removed her hand, from Revy's reach.

Shenhua then saw Revy's eyes go wide, and she quickly sat up in her bed.

Shenhua thought, 'Depending on how she reacts in the next few seconds. This could be good. Or, bad.'

Revy looked at Shenhua, with a dazed look on her face. She plainly asked, in a slightly confused tone of voice, “What just happened?”

Shenhua thought, 'Good. She is not upset about being awoke. Now, to find out what she remembers.' She said, “A lot. How much do you recall?”

Shenhua then saw Revy mentally collect herself. Revy facial expressions turned more normal, for herself. She held the palm of her right hand, on the right side of her face, as she groaned, “Enough to be embarrassed about. Did I really try to proposition everyone in the bar, at once?”

Shenhua replied, “Yes.”

Revy kept her right hand in her fact. She could barely get out the rest of her question, “Including my own children?”

Shenhua said, in a kind tone of voice, “Yes. Though, we were all polite enough not to point that out.”

Revy dropped her right hand, to her side, as she looked at Shenhua. She responded, in a warm tone of voice, “Thank you. That is likely the most embarrassing thing I have done, while sober, in my entire life.”

Shenhua thought, with mild amusement, 'It is so tempting to twist the knife, right now. And tease her about this. But, it is not worth it. That is for later.' She asked, “You're welcome. So, how much do you recall?”

Revy answered, “I recall what happened today. I recalling being Jack. All the way, until Annie and Revy made me go to sleep. But, I don't have any of Jack's memories, right now. It is like I know what I did. But, I do not know why I did it.”

Shenhua guessed, “Sort of like being drunk?” She thought, 'From personal experience, I guess that is one way to put it.'

Revy replied, “Yea. But, with no hangover, afterward.”

Shenhua agreed, “That is true.”

Revy asked, with a bit of concern in her tone of over, “So, how are you?”

Shenhua answered, “I'm good. Now, are you still going to keep my secret?”

Revy said, “Yea. There is no point in spilling it. If I do say anything, the others would just think I was trying to deflect attention for myself.”

Shenhua thought, 'Good.' She replied, “Perhaps.”

Revy began, “Still...”

Shenhua questioned, “What?”

Revy admitted, “I would really like to be Jack, again. I mean, I really had a lot of fun, as him... I mean her.”

Shenhua pointed out, “That was Jack's plan in the first place. Having you remember being Jack, as a way to get you to bring him, or her, back to a conscious state.”

Revy responded, in a slightly annoyed tone of voice, “I realize that. And that is why it sucks. Deep down, I now know I have a cooler, more happier personality, than I am.”

Shenhua thought, 'No good will come from that line of thinking. I need to do say something.' She suggested, “You can always try to be Jack, in other ways. Not the sex angle. But, trying to be more cheerful.”

Revy deadpanned, “When have I ever been cheerful?... Well, truly cheerful?”

Shenhua countered, “Good point. But, you can at least try.”

Revy said, “True. Let's go see Chang, in his office. So, we can have him contact Rock, and Barbossa. And we can catch a ride back to the others.”

Shenhua agreed, “Good idea.”

Revy then noticed her socked feet. She turned to Shenhua, as she asked, “Though, where our my boots?”

Shenhua answered, “Between the cots.”

Revy looked down, between the cots, and saw her boots, and Shenhua's slippers. Revy replied, “Oh.”

Shenhua and Revy then reached over and picked up their shoes. Shenhua put on her slippers, on her bare feet. While Revy put on her boots, laced them up, and tied them.

After they had their shoes on, they moved off their cots, and stood up.

Both women then headed to the closed door to the hallway, with Revy being the first one to the door.

When Revy reached the door, she stopped, as she turned around, as Shenhua came to a stop in front of her.

Revy recalled something, as she said, “Oh yea...”

Shenhua asked, “What?...”

Revy leaned close to Shenhua, and she then used her right hand to slap Shenhua across her left cheek.

Shenhua demanded, in anger, “What was that for?”

Revy sternly answered, “For telling Barbossa about my rape, when I was younger.”

Shenhua thought, 'I believe it would best let it slide. Since, Revy is in a good mood. And is she wasn't, she would be a handful, over me telling that. But, I do have something to say on the matter.'

Shenhua pointed out, “Well. At the time, I also had to deal with Barbossa's memories.”

Revy replied, “Fair enough. I will let the matter drop.”

Shenhua thought, 'Good.' She commented, “Besides. Anyone that watches that series about us, will learn about that incident.”

Revy flatly stated, “That doesn't matter. You don't talk about such things, in public. Especially, when it concerns your friends.”

Shenhua thought, 'Well, I am glad she still considers herself to be my friend. I best apologize.' She replied, “Okay. I apologize.”

Revy said, “Good. Apology accepted. Now, let's get out of here.”

Revy turned back around, and opened the door, that lead to the hallway. Revy walked through the threshold, and into the hallway.

Shenhua followed Revy into the hallway, and she shut the door behind her,

A few minutes later, they both reached Chang's office. With his door open. Chang was inside, and he was happy to learn that Revy was back to normal.

Much to Shenhua's hidden delight, it seemed that Annie, nor River, had informed Chang of Shenhua's connection to Barbossa.

Chang then called Rock on her cellphone. With her and Barbossa still in the casino common areas. With Chang relying the message between them, to meet at the front entrance.

Revy and Shenhua then left Chang's office to use the front express elevator.

While Revy and Shenhua used the front express elevator to make it down to the ground floor, Rock had called Dutch, on Dutch's own encrypted cellphone, which was a gift from Chang. And Dutch had informed Rock that her friends and family had headed back to the Devil's Hotel. With Dutch was happy to hear, from Rock, that everything was back to normal, concerning Revy.

A few minutes later, Revy and Shenhua met Rock and Barbossa, at the front entrance.

The four adults then headed to the Lagoon family's red GTO, in the parking lot, and they were soon on the road, heading to rejoin the others, at the Devil's Hotel.

(_)

Across town, around the same time Revy and Shenhua had awoken on their cots, in the casino penthouse, in his mid-town motel room, George Benedict had been a quiet, though very busy man.

In George's small suite, the heavy window curtains of the room were drawn closed, with the only light in the room, being from a soft florescent yellow bulb, from an electric lamp, on the small nightstand by his bed.

George was sitting at his chair, on the small table in his room. He had his laptop turned on, and plugged in.

Beside his laptop, was his camera, with a telescopic lenses attached to it. Also, attached to the camera was a wire that lead to the laptop.

At the moment, he was reviewing the digital photos he had taken yesterday, at both the Devil's Hotel, and the Daiyu Palace Casino. He had transferred the photos from his camera, to his laptop computer.

Fortunately, for George, the previous day, the photographer had decided to stake out the front of the casino, first. And he had taken several photos of the robbery that had happened there.

After which, George had decided it was time to leave, for a little while. Until, those at the casino had calmed down. So, George returned to the motel suite it was staying at, in the middle of the city, and he had organized all his work. Which he found took him all the rest of yesterday, to lunch time of the present day.

Now, George was just paging through his photos, as he decided what to do next.

George paged through the photos. Including, photos of the hole being blown open in front wall of the casino. Along, with photos of various people coming and going from the casino. Including, what look like people in costumes. And a flying car landing and taking off.

George happily thought, 'I am so happy that I went casino first. In my entire career, I have never seen in anything like this in real life. And I caught it all on film. Though, it is clear most of the action happened inside. I still got a lot photos from what happened outside.'

'And the surprising thing of all this was that a flying car I saw. And actual flying car. And those two that go in, were dressed in costumes. I would find seeing that in a movie, to be corny. But, this happened in real life.'

'From the locals I talked to, that evening. The rumor stated that morning, the casino had a robbery, and the thieves escaped. Given what I saw, I tend to believe that. Those two men in costumes were carrying briefcases, so that is likely where their loot was, when they escaped. And that is not all...'

George then pulled up another computer folder he had complied the night before. The computer file had some of the pictures of various people he had taken photos up, coming in and out of both the Daiyu Palace Casino, and the Devil's Hotel. With a lot of the photos showing the same people visiting both locations.

George thought, 'I have traced a number of people coming and going. From both the casino, and the Devil's Hotel. There is clearly a connection between the two locations. While I don't know what the connection is. I know it exists. And while I cannot yet identify any of the people in these photos. They do look familiar to me. Especially, the women. I just cannot place them. But, I will figure out who they are, eventually.'

'Still, I am beginning to realize that there is a far grander mystery in this city, than I once thought. A mystery that I need to look further into.'

'I think I will stake out the casino, first, this afternoon, and this evening, until around Ten tonight. Then, I will do the hotel in the morning.'

'The heat at the casino should have died down, by now. Also, I believe that hole has been completely repaired. And I would like to see the repairs. If for any other reason than to confirm that these people can repair, and sweep things under the rug, very quickly. Which just means I will have to continue to keep my distance from them.'

'But, this isn't my first rodeo. And I am not going to chicken out, because the big mean bull glanced at me. That just means I will have to be more careful. Which, I am more than prepared to do.'

George then continued to look through the photos had had taken for another hour, before he put his belongings back up, and to his equipment, including his camera, and laptop, to the car he was using. So, he could stakeout the casino, for the rest of the afternoon, and evening.

(_)

Later that afternoon, Arcee had returned Ahsoka to the Daiyu Palace Casino, through one of the back garage entrances.

This was after an afternoon of fun, and riding around. Which they both enjoyed.

Ahsoka had won a full helmet, with her visor down, that fit her, and did not bother her three lekku head tails.

As they rode through the city, no one paid them any mind. Which Ahsoka and Arcee found comforting.

When they returned, Arcee contacted Annie, by Annie's encrypted casino cellphone, that they had returned the casino.

With Annie meeting with them, the privacy of the garage.

When Annie met with them, she brought Ahsoka a change of clothing, for what they were about to do. And Annie told them what had happened, while they were gone. They all got a good laugh from Annie's news about Revy actually becoming Jack Sparrow. Even Arcee commented that she would have like to have seen that.

Though, at Shenhua's request, both Annie and River had agreed to keep quite on the matter that Shenhua was the reincarnation of Ahsoka friend, Barbossa.

Also, the three of them already decided, earlier that morning, to do something that both Annie and Ahsoka had been looking forward to. With the former student and teacher planning to spar with one another in the employee gym, around the time Arcee had returned Ahsoka, back to the casino. Because, the gym was mostly empty during that time of day.

Ahsoka had used her red hood and cloak to head to the employee gym, which was near the garage.

Arcee also came in motorcycle mode. With Annie walking with them.

And so, when Annie, and Ahsoka entered the gym, with Arcee rolling in behind them, in her motorcycle mood. All eyes in the room turned towards them. Annie was wearing sweat pants and a sweatshirt. With her not having her lightsaber on her person.

Also, Ahsoka was wearing her red hood over her heard, and cloak over her body. Though, Ahsoka had also had on some sweatpants and a sweatshirt that Annie had lent her, when she met with them in the garage. With Ahsoka having place her dirty clothing, and lightsabers, in a safe place, in the garage, that Kaylee had showed her. With both Annie and Arcee, vouching for Kaylee's honesty.

As they entered the gym, Annie politely requested that everyone in the room, finish what they were doing, and leave within twenty minutes.

Given, Annie was both being polite, and giving everyone a reasonable amount of time, none of them complained, and they had all exited the room within twenty minutes.

Also, while not everyone on the employee staff knew of Annie's origins. They all did know that when Annie made a request, it was best to fellow her requests.

After everyone had left, Annie, Ahsoka, and Arcee moved to the back of the gym where the matted floor, with blue square mats, was located.

As Ahsoka and Annie got ready to spar on the mats, Arcee transformed back into robot mode, and she sat down by a wall, as she watched her two friends have some fun.

After Ahsoka took off her red cloak and hood, they began to spar.

The form of sparring that Annie and Ahsoka had agreed on was simple hand to hand combat, with no use of the force abilities, what so ever.

The two women were currently on their fifth match. With both of them being tied, two for two, for the last four matches.

Then, Arcee saw Ahsoka catch Annie in a hold, and bring her down to the floor.

As Ahsoka held Annie down on the ground, Annie yielded, “Okay. I give.”

Ahsoka then let go of Annie, as she leaned up. She took a few steps away from her former teacher, as she commented, “I am glad you now know when to yield.”

As Annie stood up, she replied, “Well, I would have saved myself a whole lot of trouble, if I had learned that lesson, sooner.” By then, Annie was standing, as she faced both Ahsoka, and Arcee, with the cybertronian being to her right side.

Ahsoka offered, “So, do you want to do four out of seven matches?”

Annie responded, “Nah. I know when I am beat. And you clearly have gotten better at hand to hand, over the years.”

Ahsoka commented, “Thank you. You should see my lightsaber and force abilities.”

Annie stated, “I plan to. Though, I just need to make arrangements for us to have a secluded location, where we can really spar with each other.”

Ahsoka responded, “I look forward to it. Though, I have never seen you accept
defeat, so graciously, as you just did.”

Annie said, “Yea. I finally grew up.”

Ahsoka teased, “And all it took was to have your gender changed.”

Annie replied, “Well, it was more than that. But, I do no wish to elaborate on the subject.”

Ahsoka requested, “That is fine. Still, maybe we can go visit Barbossa tonight, for dinner, at the hotel he is staying that.”

Annie said, “That will be fine. Though, you missed Revy acting strangely this morning.”

Ahsoka replied, “True. But, from what you all have told me. Revy almost always acts strangely.”

Annie giggled a little. She then said, “Yea. But, we don't tell her that, to her face.”

Ahsoka let out a small laugh. She then responded, “I won't say anything, if you won't. And thanks again for loaning me this clothing.”

Annie replied, “No problem.”

Ahsoka turned to her left, to look at Arcee, whom had just been silently watching and listening as the pair talked. And Ahsoka just look at Arcee for a few seconds.

Arcee calmly looked back at her.

They stared at each other for a few seconds. Arcee then flatly asked, “What? Didn't you have fun on our little sight seeing tour of this island?”

Ahsoka stumbled on her words, as she commented, “Yes, Arcee. I did. But... Well... Seeing you like this, instead of your motorcycle mode. Well... I have never met a droid like you, before.”

Arcee stated, in an annoyed tone of voice, “For the last time, Ahsoka. I am not a droid. I am a cybertronian.” She then forced herself to calm down, as she continued, in a more pleasant tone of voice, “And while I am trying to be polite. I am well versed on the discrimination that organics of your reality have for robotic life forms. Your people treated them like garbage. And I find the concept and use of your so called mind wipes to be disgusting. It is too close to mnemosurgery for my tastes.”

Ahsoka asked, “What is mnemosurgery?”

Arcee stated, “Altering the mind through use of needles into the brain casing. It is a practice that few do, and it is frowned upon by many. Including, myself.”

Ahsoka stated, “Okay. And I admit that we do not have the best track record when it comes do how we treat droids.”

Arcee pointed out, “Just keep in mind that when the imperials treat your kind like dirt, due to not being human. Think about how you treat the robots you know.”

Ahsoka quietly said, “I will keep that in mind.”

Arcee mentioned, “Good. Still, your civilization's discrimination against inorganic life is nothing compared to the fanaticism of the Vong.”

Ahsoka questioned, “Who are the Vong?”

Arcee cracked a wicked grin, as she coldly replied, “You may someday find out.”

Annie thought, with concern, 'While I can understand Arcee's disgust by my civilization's culture, in its treatment of robots. I think it is best not to mention the Vong, to Snips, right now.'

'I remember reading the Star Wars book series on the Vong... The stories were... Disturbing to say they least... Compared to them, I was a saint, even when I was Darth Vader. And that is disturbing and frightening, on so many levels...'

'And while I do not have nightmares over what may, or may not, happen to our home reality. I already had Thrawn look into this. Should the Vong ever reach my home reality's home galaxy, in my timeline. We will be well prepared to deal with them. But, I need to change the subject, before Arcee says anything more concerning the Vong. And I know just what to say.'

Annie decided to change the subject, by saying, “Ahsoka, Arcee's species is very special. Just like organic beings, her species have souls. Including, herself.”

Arcee spoke up, “We call them, sparks.”

Annie responded, “Yes. And you may have noticed that when you sense Arcee, through the force, that she does not feel like a droid, but instead, she feels like an organic being would.”

Ahsoka said, “Yes. I sense her in the force. And I have been wondering about that?”

Arcee stated, “It would take too long to explain. But, we have sparks, and sparks are the core of our being. They are just like your souls. Though, unlike you, our spark casing can be removed from our bodies, for an indefinite about of time. I have had this done to me, previously, when I went a little too wild in battle. Once. I didn't find it to be a that bad of an experience.”

Ahsoka was not sure how to reply, as she said, “I will take your word on that. Still, does that mean you can use the force?”

Arcee answered, “I am not sure. But, there are a number of individuals of my species that have somehow learned, or gained, supernatural abilities, that we cannot explain. Some can project forcefields. Some can turn invisible. Some can sense things on levels that are beyond detection of what their sensors should be able to detect. Some of them can move things with their minds. Although, they were checked, and found not to have the hardware to do any of this. Yet, they can still perform these feats of wonder.”

Ahsoka inquired, “Fascinating. So, how old are you, Arcee?”

Arcee calmly answered, “By your calender. I am millions of years old.”

Ahsoka asked, with a bit of surprise in her tone of voice, “Really?”

Arcee replied, “Yes.”

Ahsoka commented, “You don't act like you are that old.”

Arcee questioned, in annoyed tone of voice, “And how should one my age act?”

Ahsoka conceded, “Point taken. I will admit that even Yoda had his moments.”

Annie agreed, in a playful tone of voice, “That is true.”

Ahsoka and Annie giggled a little at their private joke.

Arcee calmly requested, “I look forward to you telling me, some time.”

As Ahsoka and Annie calmed down, Annie said, “We will.”

Ahsoka inquired, “So, who built you, Arcee? Your species? And how did your kind come to exist?”

Arcee answered, “The previous generation builds the next generation. As to our origins. That depends on who you ask. I did not come online until several millions of years after our civilization began. In comparison, the continuous written history of this world's civilization is less than tens of thousands of years old. And they have not even reached the stars, yet.”

Ahsoka commented, “Our civilization is far older”

Arcee pointed out, “In a number of ways. Though, being Annie's friend. I have done extensive research on your home reality, and the alternate realities of your home reality. I have found that the continuous line of history of your galactic civilization is only just over twenty-five thousand years old. Much younger than my kinds' history. But, to answer your question, there is some evidence that we have evolved in our history.”

Ahsoka replied, “Interesting.”

Arcee agreed, “Yes. It is.”

Ahsoka asked, “Given your age. I have to ask. Do you perceive the continuance of time the same as we do?”

Arcee stated, “Yes. A minute to me, is likely as long as a minute to you. And, before you ask, my species memories are not perfect. We do remember most of what has happened to us. So, while I don't recalled everything. Which I find comforting, for a number of reasons. And for myself. My life span has been a very long time to me. And the same is true for the rest of my species.”

Ahsoka questioned, “Being so old. And clearly so patient. I take it you come from very peaceful, and wise, civilization?”

Arcee burst out laughing, for a few seconds. As she calmed down, she plainly stated, with a bit of mirth in her tone of voice, “Anything but. We have never really had a peaceful civilization. We have had dark ages. We have had autocratic ages. But, never truly peaceful ages. And we all live so long that old grudges build up over time, until there was a massive wars. And by then, both sides are too stubborn to try to find another solutions, besides violence. And the war, I was in, lasted for millions of years.”

Ahsoka responded, in a sober tone of voice, “That is so sad to hear. So, how did your war start?”

Arcee answered, “From what I have learned, a miner, in the lower classes, wrote writings that preached from freedom and equality, through peaceful means.”

Ahsoka inquired, “What happened to this cybertronian?”

Arcee said, “He remained peaceful, until the corruption he railed against finally beat him to the point he believed that the only path to achieve his goals would be through use of violent means. Use of force... Not the force. But, use of brute force.”

“And he then started a war, in which he dragged everyone with him into the conflict. Lines were drawn. Sides were taken. And both sides committed unspeakable acts that can not be stated in polite company.”

Ahsoka asked, “What was his name? The person who started it all?”

Arcee all but spat out the answer, “Megatron.”

Ahsoka noticed Arcee's tone of voice, as she guessed, “I take it that you don't like him?”

Arcee said, in a stern tone of voice, “You are correct. I don't like him. I despise him. Or, more aptly, I despite what he became. And what he did to my species, and our homeworld. Though, I will admit, that in the beginning, he had the best of intentions.”

Arcee looked over at Annie, as she continued, “But, like many people, he allowed his fanaticism to consume him the point that his quest was no longer about freedom, but power, and domination.”

Ahsoka turned to look at Annie, as she understood what Arcee was hinting at. She stated, “Well, Megatron is not the only one that fell to darkness over good intentions.”

Annie noticed the two other people in the room, looking at her. She stated, “I know the feeling. I know I did wrong. And I have gotten better. I learned my lessons, and I have tried to make up for what I have done.”

Annie thought, 'And while I have not been a saint. I have truly tried to make up for my actions, and become a better person, than who I was. Which, given where I was at, was not that difficult. It is true. Some people only admit a problem, and fix it, after they realize they hit rock bottom. And that is what happened to me.'

'Still, I would mention that I am still friends with Megatron. And through the force, I have sense he was sick of that war, as well. It was just that he was to emotionally invest to leave it. And he lacked the means stop it. If he tried, his very army, or the other side's army, would have killed him. And he knew it.'

'Though, I did learn that war did finally end. At least in Megatron's home reality. And I was happy to learn thought. But, I think it is best I not mention any of this, right now. To them. Because they will likely take my comment the wrong way.'

Ahsoka replied, “Fine.”

Arcee just shrugged, in response to Annie's response.

Arcee and Ahsoka then turned back to look at each other.

Arcee stated, “But, that is not the great poetic irony to that war. That achievement belongs to the leader of the other side of the war. The one who read Megatron's original writings of peace, and equality, which he took to heart. And he ended up fighting Megatron. Defending Megatron's own original beliefs of freedom and equality, against Megatron, and his armies, with his own armies.”

Ahsoka could not help but giggled a little. She then said, with a bit of amusement in her tone of voice, “That must have annoyed this Megatron to no end”

Arcee cracked a warm grin, as she agreed, “I believe so, as well.”

Ahsoka asked, “So, what is your leader's name?”

Arcee answered, “His name is Optimus Prime. But, after the end of the war, he walked away from his leadership, because if he had not, the war might have restarted. There is still a lot of bad blood on both sides.”

Ahsoka glanced her eyes back to Annie. She then looked back towards Arcee, as she said, “I can understand why he did that.”

Arcee replied, “I do, as well.”

Ahsoka inquired, “What about other alien, space fairing species, of your home reality? How did you people handle them?”

Arcee stated, “We all tried to drag the entire galaxy into our war. And the galaxy eventually washed their hands of us. And the Galactic Council, the loose ruling body of our home galaxy, warned us, that if we continued to involve our war with their member planets, they would annihilate us. So, we left them alone.”

“But, that did stop both sides from plundering, and fighting over planets and moons, that did not belong to that Galactic Council. And turning these locations into burnt out husks. Including, worlds inhabited by those that had yet to even figure out how to travel into space.”

Annie commented, “Sort of like the opposite of the Federation's Prime Directive.”

Arcee replied, “Exactly.”

Ahsoka turned to Annie, as she asked, “What is the Prime Directive?”

Annie looked at Ahsoka, as she said, “I will tell you, later.”

Annie and Ahsoka then turned their attention back to Arcee.

Ahsoka questioned, “So, how did your war end? Or, did it ever truly end?”

Arcee answered, “Oh, it did end. When both sides finally admitting that there was nothing left fight over. Megatron had disappeared. Prime left. Those that were in hiding, across the galaxy, started showing back up. And except for a few hardliners. Everyone else just wanted to stop fighting. So, we start rebuilding our homeworld.”

“Though, the beginning of the end started when we began to fight over an Earth much like this one. In my home reality.”

Ahsoka commented, “This planet doesn't seem like much to me.”

Arcee stated, “You would be surprise what you may find on Earths like this one. The people here can adapt to a situation very swiftly. As both sides in our war found out, the hard way.”

“Ironically, it was the humans of the another Earth, that tilted the scales on the war, to its conclusion. Though, they did not tilt it to either sides favor. But instead, from a moral standpoint, they pushed us to the breaking point. Which we had be on the verge of for a very long time.”

Ahsoka questioned, “So basically, many of the rank and file had been looking for an excuse to stop the fighting for a very long time. But, none of your were able to stand up to your higher ranking officers.”

Arcee conceded, “Yes. That is one way to put it. But, some of us, just liked killing too much to give it up.”

Ahsoka asked, “Are you talking about, yourself?”

Arcee admitted, “Somewhat. But, I had my revenge. And with the war over. Like many of my people. I am asking the same question, as they do. Now what?”

Ahsoka asked, “But, why were you seeking revenge?”

Arcee coyly responded, “You haven't figured it out, with the pronouns used in this conversation?”

Ahsoka replied, “No.”

Annie stated, “Arcee has been referring to the others of her species, using male pronouns. While, Arcee refers to herself, with female pronouns.”

There was silent for a few second, as Ahsoka began to understand what the two other women were getting at. When Ahsoka realized what they were talking about, she said, “Oh...”

Arcee said, “Yes. I am living proof that a robotic being can be gender bent, as well.”

Ahsoka stated, “I guess the pink color of your armor should have tipped me off.”

Arcee responded, “Well, I have been considering changing my armor color.” She turned to Annie, as she asked, “Do you think I could pull off, red? Or maybe, black?”

Annie turned to Arcee, as she answered, “I think you can pull off any color you like.”

Arcee said, “Thank you.”

Ahsoka commented, “And I thought, my life could not get any stranger.”

Arcee and Annie turned to look at Ahsoka, as Arcee stated, in a mischievous tone of voice, “You haven't seen anything, yet.”

Annie commented, “While you spend your time with us, you will find out about many strange and wondrous things.”

Ahsoka inquired, “Scary things? Or, cool things?”

Annie replied, “Both.”

Arcee stood up, with the ceiling high enough for her to stand fully upright, without her head touching the ceiling.

Arcee offered, “Speaking of which, I still have some errands that I would like to run in town for, today. I would be more than happy to invite you both to come with me. My motorcycle form can fit both of you, at the same time.”

Ahsoka replied, “I would love to.”

Annie said, “I always enjoy riding with you. Though, I will be sitting up front.”

Ahsoka stated, “That is fine.”

Annie pointed out, “Still, we need to get cleaned up, and change our clothing.” She turned to Ahsoka, as she offered, “You can borrow some more of my clothing. I don't mind.”

Ahsoka turned to Annie, as she replied, “Thanks.”

Arcee commented, “I can wait.” She thought, 'It's not like I have anything better to do.'

Ahsoka requested, “Good. Still, I skipped lunch, and I would like to get something to eat.”

Annie recommended, “I know a good local diner, called the Last Resort Diner. The restaurant a nice selection of cooked meals for lunch. And since it is after lunch rush, there are not very many customers there. Also, I am sure Arcee wouldn't mind visiting that diner.”

Arcee responded, “Not really. I won't mind seeing the Lowe family, again. The owners of the diner. I even heard they hired a couple of new waitresses that I would like to meet.”

Annie replied, “I heard that too.”

Arcee cracked a wicked grin, as she stated, “And I know the Lowe family will love to meet Ahsoka here.”

Ahsoka could guess what Arcee meant by that, as she groaned, “No more Star Wars fans. I have met so many, since I got here.”

Annie said, in a sober tone of voice, “Sadly. They seem to be endless.”

Ahsoka replied, in a disheartened tone of voice, “I know.”

Annie commented, “Still, these fans are good cooks and they promised me no more jokes about those movies, and series.”

Ahsoka voice become more positive, as she said, “Good. I can tolerate the polite fans.”

Annie responded, “Well, then. You won't have any problems with these fans. I know them personally, and they are very nice.”

Ahsoka replied, “Good. Now, let's start getting ready to head over there.” She then walked over to where she had dropped her red hood and clock. She leaned over and picked up her clothing. As she stood back up straight, she put back red cloak around her body, as she pulled the hood over here head.

While Ahsoka adjusted her hood, slightly, for a better fit, she though, 'At least Kaylee was nice enough to find a motorcycle helmet that would fit me okay. So, I can at least enjoy riding down the road, without attracting too much attention. And I do wonder who the Lowe family are. Well, I am about to find out, after Annie and I each get a shower, and change our clothes. Then, we will head over to their restaurant.'

Arcee transformed into her motorcycle mode, and the three women then headed towards the front entrance of the gym, and towards and elevator that would take them to Annie's suite.

Fortunately, the elevators were designed to handle much more weight that what Arcee weighed.

Soon, the three of them reached the elevators, and then Annie's suite. Where Annie, and Ahsoka would each get separate showers. Then, change into some fresh clothing. And get something to eat, at that Last Resort Diner.

Half an hour later, Arcee took Annie and Ahsoka to the Last Resort Diner, with the Annie and Arcee, in motorcycle mode, in the diner, introducing Ahsoka to the Lowe family, and the Lowe family's friends.

It was a pleasant and enjoyable meeting for all. With Annie and Ahsoka then getting some lunch, which they found okay to eat. Due to them not be raised on the food the diner provided, they are not fond of such food. But, they could eat it, without complaint.

(_)

Much later, that evening, after dark, a black painted limo suddenly appeared in an alleyway, on the south side of Plata Podrido.

The limo then started moving, and turned onto a street, soon it was on the highway, heading for its destination.

Inside the limo were three individuals. In the front, in the left driver's seat, was the chauffeur, whom was a short, slender man, with long white hair. Also, he had long pointed ears. He wore a white business suit, and white dress shoes, that went well with his hair.

In the back of the limo, sitting beside each other were two middle-aged adults. Both of whom were in peak physical shape.

One of the adults was a man, with tanned skin, and long brown hair that was tied back in a ponytail. The man also had a well groomed mustache and goatee. The man wore a nice black business suit, with black dress shoes.

The other adult, sitting to the man's right side, in the backseat of the limo, was a woman. The woman had fair skin, with long orange hair. She had a teal tattoo over her right eye. She wore an orange evening gown, and orange flat soled slippers, which matched her orange hair color.

The woman turned to the man, as she calmly asked, in engish, “So, how do I looked?”

The man turned to the woman, as he responded, in a kind tone of voice, in english, “Lovely, my dear. You don't look a day older than when I married you.”

The woman replied, “I will take that as a compliment.” She thought, 'Though, there is some truth in that. And my skin has become a touch paler than it use to be.'

The woman used her left hand to reached up and adjusted something on the back of her left ear. As she did so, she commented, “Is this telepathic jammer annoying you, as much as it is me?”

The man calmly replied, “Not really. But, some things are necessary for our part of the plan to work.”

The woman dropped her left hand back to her side, as she agreed, “True. And it is not like our part of the plan is that difficult. All we have to do is be ourselves, and have fun for the evening.”

The man replied, “Yes. If only all our plans where so simple.”

The woman commented, “But, we both love challenges.”

The man responded, “Yes. We do dear. And that is what makes life worth living. Still, I wonder what our son is up to?”

The woman said, “He told me what he is planning to do this evening. I believe he will be fine.”

The man replied, “I trust your judgment.” He then turned to the driver, as he inquired, “How long until we get there?”

The chauffeur kept his eyes on the road in front of him, as he said, in english, “Turning in, right now.”

The chauffeur then pulled into the parking lot, and steered his limo towards the front of the large, well lit, building in the middle of the parking lot.

From the tinted windows of the back seats, on couple could see them approach the large, well lit building.

The woman commented, “Well. That doesn't look like much.”

The man said, “When compared to what we have, very few things measure up.”

The woman responded, “Yes. And I guess it will have to do. It is not like we are spending the night there?”

Man replied, “No. We are not.”

The woman said, “Good. As such, I don't see a problem.”

By then, the limo drove up, under the large awning that was attached to the front of the building. The limo came to a stop, by the curb, to the front doors, facing the limo's right side.

The driver put his limo in park, and he got out of the vehicle, leaving the driver's side door open. He then walked around, from the front of the car, to the right side of the vehicle. He then opened the back, right door to the limo.

From inside the back of the limo, the couple watched the door, to the woman's right side.

The man turned to the woman, as he said, “Well, my dear. It's showtime.”

The woman looked over at the man, and gave him a smile. She then turned back got out first. The chauffeur helped the woman up to her feet. The man soon followed the woman out of the limo.

With both his passengers outside of the car, the chauffeur gently closed the right back door behind them.

The chauffeur turned to the nearby female valet, he requested, “Find a nice place to park this vehicle. We will be back for it later.”

The woman just looked at the chauffeur, and nodded one. She then handed the chauffeur a ticket stub. Next, she walked around to the front limo, get into the open driver's door, and it. After which, the valet put the limo in drive, and she gently drove it to another part of the parking lot.

The chauffeur then turn see the man and woman start walking, side by side, towards the front doors, with the woman to the man's right side.

The chauffeur caught up with the couple, to walk around them, and opened the front left door in front of the couple.

As the couple approached the entrance, the man calmly inquired, “So, what type of gambling would you like to do first?” The man thought, 'With the stack of U.S. thousand dollar bills in my interior coat pocket, we will have no problems purchasing chips for the gambling tables.'

The woman answered, “I have always enjoyed the roulette wheel. How about yourself?”

The man responded, “Well, dice has a certain appeal to me. But, we will try our luck with the roulette wheels, first.”

The woman happily replied, “Thank you.”

The couple then took their time, as they made their way to the front doors of the Daiyu Palace Casino.

When they made it to the door their chauffeur was holding for them, the wife went int first, then the man, and finally the chauffeur entered, with him shutting the door behind himself.

After which, the man and woman then started walking beside each other again, with the woman to the man's left. And the chauffeur followed right behind them.

Though, the three adults are intentionally taking their time, and they walked slowly, as they moved through the front lobby, and towards the large hallway, in front of them, which lead to the gaming floor of the casino.

(_)

At that moment, in the security room Jayne, Mal, Zoe, and Wash, stood of the room, as, from the wall of monitors in front of them, they watched see three newcomers. A woman with long orange hair that was loose and rand down her back. A man with the brown ponytail. And a short, slender, white haired man with pointed ears, and long white hair that went down his back. Enter the building, from the front entrance.

While the woman drew a little of their attention, was the short, slender man, with long white hair, and long pointed ears, that caught their attention.

Jayne was to the far right, Mal to Jayne's left. Zoe was to Mal's left. And Wash was to Zoe's left.

Due to the lateness of the hour. There was no one else in the security room, that was on duty for the shift. Though, there were still plenty of guards stationed, in, and around, the casino.

Jayne commented, “Well, you don't see an elf, every day.”

Mal agreed, “Certainly not.”

Zoe recognized the three individuals, as she flatly stated, “Oh hell, guys. We are about to be in some real trouble.”

Mal asked with concern in his tone of voice, “Who are they?”

Wash inquired, “Can you tell us?”

Zoe pulled out her encrypted cellphone, as she answered, “I will tell you both, in a minute. But, I need to inform Chang, right now. This is way over our heads.” She then dialed the phone for Chang's cellphone.

(_)

At that moment, in the dining room, or the penthouse apartment of the casino, Chang, River, and Lee, sat around their dining table, eating small snacks, as they talked.

Chang was still in his business clothing, with River and Lee wearing casual clothing.

Suddenly, Chang's encrypted cellphone rang. Chang pulled it out, and answered, “Hello.”

Zoe stated, “Mister Chang. I would not call you, at this time, unless it is important. But, there is something you need to know, that cannot wait.”

Chang thought, 'Ah oh. Zoe only used the term, Mister Chang, with me, when it is important.' He asked, “What is it?”

Zoe said, in the calmest voice she could muster, “David Xanatos, Fox Xanatos, and their friend Puck, just walked through the front doors of the casino.”

Chang exclaimed, “What?!” He thought, 'Oh hell. This is bad. Very, very bad.'

Nearby, Lee turned to River, as she quietly asked, “What is going on?”

River looked over at Lee, as she answered, “It is important. But, I will let Chang explain. Sufficient to say, our snack is over.”

Chang sighed, as he requested, “Okay. Tell me everything.”

Zoe answered, “Not much to say, sir. They pulled up in a limo. One of the valets took the vehicle to our parking lot, while all three of them walked inside, the front entrance.”

Chang inquired, “Where are they heading?”

Zoe said, “It looks like they are just taking their time.”

Chang thought, 'I wonder why. Not that it really matters. They just bought us more time.'

Zoe mentioned, “Also, as I said, Puck is there. And he is out in the open, in his true form. Not as Owen. And I don't see Alex anywhere. I think Puck has his powers back.”

Chang complimented, “If that is the case. I agree. And good catch. If Puck is openly showing himself, without Alex around, that means he likely is back to full power.”

Zoe said, “I think it would be unwise to call Annie and Arcee into this. Though, do you wish have tracking device hidden on the limo?”

Chang responded, “Do not place a tracking device on their limo. We do not want to antagonize them. Also, I agree on you not contracting Annie and Arcee. I will take care of contacting them. Should I feel it is necessary to do so.”

Zoe questioned, “Given how dangerous they are. Do you want us to bar them from the building?”

Chang flatly answered, “No. They would not be doing this in such an open manner, unless they were doing something in a more peaceful manner. Though, I will handle this. I am also coming down with River and Lee. I want you and Mal, to meet with us. In case this goes south, we will all be in this together. Though, only bring your pistols, and keep their hidden. As I said. We do not want to antagonize them.”

Zoe replied, “I understand, sir.”

Chang hung up his cellphone, but he left it in his right hand. He turned to River and Lee, as he stated, in a serious tone of voice, “I will keep this short and sweet. Since we don't have time to come up with a good plan.”

“And since River has already read my mind, and knows what is going. I am just going to say it straight out. David Xanatos, Fox Xanatos, and Puck, just walked through the front doors of the casino.”

Chang saw Lee's eyes go wide for a second, before Lee forced herself to calm down.

Chang continued, “Zoe, and I agree, that since Alex is not present. And Puck is in his original form. He has his power back. I want us all to head down there. I will handle David and Fox. You two, handle Puck. And I know none of us have any illusions about the dangers we are facing. Puck is the most dangerous in the group. And not just in power. He has probably forgotten more about being a magnificent bastard, than David and Fox ever knew. And that is saying something.”

“You two are the most manipulative people I know. Keep Puck from being creative. Keep him from using his powers. If nothing else, just talk to him. But, don't let him become mischievous. I am counting on the both of you.”

Lee stated, “Okay. We will try our best. Though, David Xanatos is the Master of Gambits. And his family are a close second, in those categories..”

Chang said, “I know. And I agree. And I realized we do not have time for you two to get properly dress for the event. But, you both look fine, as is. You will just have to go they as you are.”

Lee replied, “That will be fine.”

River commented, “I okay with what I have on, as well. Though, if they do try something. I will know first, before they can action.”

Chang stated, “Don't count on it. I would not be surprised if the Xanatos family did not have counters to telepathic scans. And maybe even empathic scans.”

River said, “I will keep that in mind.”

Chang replied, “Good. Now, let us get down there.”

The three of them got up from their seats, and they headed for the door that that was directly connect to the hallway, that lead to the express elevators.

Chang started dialing a phone number.

(_)

Down in the security room, Zoe had just put up away her cellphone. She turned Wash, then to Mal, and Jayne, as she said, “Chang wants Mal and I to head over to meet him, River, and Lee. As we confront these three individuals. Though, we should go with only with our pistols, hidden.”

Jayne asked, “Why don't we came in, in full force?"

Zoe turned to Jayne, as she stated, “Because we do not want to upset them. For very good reasons.”

Wash asked, “Do you want me to come, Zoe?”

Zoe turned to Wash, as she answered, “No. I don't want you to be anywhere near they. They are too dangerous.” She thought, 'And we are just finally back together, again.' She continued her thoughts, with more firmness, 'And I am not going to lose you, again.'

Mal asked, in a confused tone of voice, “Okay. But, wait a minute. Am I not in charge?”

Zoe looked back to Mal, as she answered, “The situation is to urgent to delegate rank, right now.” She looked over at Jayne, as she stated, “Jayne. You and Wash, stay here, and keep an eye on things. And let us know if something comes up.”

Jayne turned to Zoe, as he replied, “Alright. I will.”

Jayne thought, 'I am not sure what is going on. But, it is clear that Zoe and Chang do. Which makes it important.'

'If I cannot get any information on the computer system, maybe I will call the Lowe family, later. And ask them what is going on. They might know. But, for right now. I would like to see how this plays out.'

Jayne then turned back to look at the wall monitors.

Meanwhile, Mal and Zoe headed for the exited, Mal inquired, “While Chang doesn't want us to have any more weapons, than our pistols. Do we believe we will need our weapons?”

Zoe said, “No, Captain. That would only likely make the situation more dangerous.”

A few seconds later, Zoe and Mal reached the exit to a small auxiliary hallway. They then turned and walked in the direction which would lead them to the front part of the casino.

(_)

A few minutes ago, from when the Xanatos family had just arrived in the casino.

Inside the casino garage, Annie, Ahsoka, and Arcee, whom was in robot mode, stood around, as they watched Kaylee finish working on a car.

Kaylee was leaning under the open hood, which her tools in hand, while she finished what she was doing to that engine of that car.

As she finished working on the car, she said, “And that is how you install a car transmission.”

Ahsoka replied, with curiosity in her tone of voice, “That was interesting.”

Annie commented, “See. I told you, that you would like learning this. It is not the selector gearbox for a hyper-drive engine, but is interesting to see how a car transmission is take out, replace, and installed back into the engine.”

Ahsoka replied, “You're right.” She turned to Kaylee, as she said, “Thank you for showing us, Kaylee.”

Kaylee leaned up, from under the hood. She turned to Ahsoka, as she replied, “You're welcome, Ahsoka.”

Kaylee then turned and walked over to tool box, where she kept her tools at. As she left down her tools, on top of a tool box, she said, “I have known starship engines, that I have personally worked on, that were less temperamental than some of these vehicles transmissions. The engines of the Serenity being the top among them.” She then turned around to face the others.

Ahsoka inquired, “So, you were a starship engineer?”

Kaylee happily answered, “Yep. And proud of it.”

Arcee commented, “Well, Ahsoka. You might find this interesting. But, much like Kaylee, Annie has made it a hobby to work on the vehicles, in this garage, as well.”

Kaylee said, “And she is a great help, too.”

Annie stated, “I have always loved working on machines. Even as a child. And these vehicles are one of the few things I can get to work on regularly, without people asking me questions.”

Kaylee complimented, “And she can use the force to set the timing of an engine better than a computer. I am sometimes worried, she might take my job.”

Annie casually replied, “Nah. I like working on an engine. Though, I don't want to make a career out of it.”

Ahsoka said, “I am glad you found another hobby, Annie. And thanks again for today. I enjoyed it. I have to say, that the Lowe family were interesting to meet, for lunch.”

Kaylee commented, “They always are.”

Ahsoka stated, “Yes. They appear to be a very entertaining, and pleasant, family to be around. And it was nice to see Barbossa for dinner. That was fun, as well.”

Annie responded, “I am glad you had a good time. Still, I have to know. What is the back story to him singing that the karaoke version, Kokomo, by the Beach Boys? Which he heard him do, earlier this evening, at the karaoke stage, at the Devil's Hotel restaurant. That song is so not him.”

“Yet. He sung that song with style and skill. So, he has sung that song a few times before. So, I have to know how he originally end up choosing to sing in the first place.”

Ahsoka coyly answered, “It is a very interesting, and long story. But... Let's just say that he likes the song. And he enjoys singing it. He says the lyrics of the sing resonate with him.”

Annie recalled the lyrics of the song. She then realized that Ahsoka was correct. She replied, “Okay. That explains why he was so good at singing that song.”

Just then, Arcee and Kaylee noticed Annie and Ahsoka tensed up.

Arcee asked. “What is it?”

Annie answered, “Someone powerful just walked into the front side of the casino.”

Ahsoka commented, “Very powerful.”

Kaylee inquired, “Should we contact Chang?”

Annie commented, “It depends. Right now, we need to decide how to go about telling Chang. Using the excuse, of feeling something in the first. Become a very tired excuse, over time.”

Kaylee said, “I can see what you mean.”

Ahsoka stated, “Beside, I sense no maleficence, nor danger, from that person.”

Annie commented, “I sense the same thing.”

Arcee said, “That is comforting to know.”

Suddenly, Annie's encrypted cellphone rang. Annie pulled it out, press the talk button, put the phone to her right ear, and answered the call, “Hello.”

Chang inquired, in a serious tone of voice, “Hello Annie. I need to know where you are at? And who you are with? This is very important.”

Annie could tell that Chang was being series. She stated, “Hello Chang. I am in the garage, with Ahsoka, Arcee, and Kaylee.”

Kaylee quietly commented, “Chang called us first. Damn. He's good.”

Meanwhile, on the phone, Chang said, “Good. That means you can give Arcee this message, as well.”

Annie asked, “So, what is going on?”

Chang responded, “Quick question. Did the Lowe family every show you the Gargoyles animated series?”

Annie replied, “Yes. Why?”

Chang answered, “Because, David, Xanatos, Fox, Xanatos, and Puck, just walked through the front doors of the casino. Alex is nowhere in sight. And Puck is in his original form. So, we are guessing that Puck has his powers back.”

Annie flatly said, “Arcee and I can be in the lobby, in less than two minutes.”

Chang stated, in a strong tone of voice, “I don't want either of you to come. Also, keep Ahsoka with you. It would only create problems. With these people. Civil discussion is likely a better coarse of action.”

Annie questioned, “Okay. So, what do you want us to do?”

Chang answered, “Stay away from the front of the casino. Use the employee facilities. Go up to your suite. Take a ride around town. Just don't confront these three people. And keep an eye on Kaylee and Ahsoka. I know Ahsoka can cause trouble. You were her teacher, after all.

Annie sarcastically thought, 'Ha. Ha. Though, I will let that comment slide.'

Chang continued, “And if something happens to Kaylee, River and Simon will never forgive us.”

Annie replied, “I understand. I am will comply.”

Chang replied, “Thank you.” He then hung up.

As Annie put away her cellphone, Kaylee asked, “So, what is it?”

Annie turned to Kaylee, as she answered, “The Xanatos family just walked in through the front door of the casino. And Chang wants none of us to go near them.” She turned to Ahsoka, as she stated, “That includes you, Snips.” She looked around the group, as she went onto said, “He wants us all to stay in the back of the casino. He said he would handle them.”

Arcee commented, “That understandable. I have seen the series. What that group. I admit that discretion might be the best approach to take.”

Annie responded, “I agree. But, let's stick around, for a while. Just in case we are needed.” Annie looked over at Kaylee, as she said, “And Chang wants us to watch you, Kaylee.”

Kaylee shrugged, as she replied, “Okay. I don't mind the attention. So, what do you suggest we do.”

Annie answered, “Well, since we are going to be spending some time in the back part of the casino tonight. Do any of you want to go swimming, in the heated, employee pool. It uses salt water to remain clean. No chemicals.”

Ahsoka replied, “I'd love to.”

Kay said, “I could use a soak.”

Arcee stated, “I really don't feel like swimming. But, I won't mind keeping you company.”

Ahsoka turned to Arcee, as she asked, “You can swim.”

Arcee looked over at Ahsoka. She smiled, as she responded, with a bit of amusement in her tone of voice, “I can do a lot of things.”

Ahsoka happily replied, “Cool.”

Ahsoka then remembered, as she commented, “But, I don't have a swimsuit?”

Kaylee offered, “We will find something for you.”

Ahsoka turned to Kaylee, as she said, “Thank you.”

Annie stated, “Well, come on girls. Let's go have some fun.”

Annie then started walking for the nearest garage exit, to the back hallway, with Ahsoka, Kaylee, and Arcee, whom transformed into her motorcycle mode, following behind her.

(_)

At that moment, in one of the interior hallways of the casino cages, Zoe and Mal walked at a quickened pace, as they made their way to the doors that would lead them to the front lobby, where they would meet with Chang, River, and Lee, to confront the Xanatos family.

They walked side by side, with Mal was to Zoe's left.

As the two very good, platonic friends, walked beside each other, Mal asked, “So, who are the Xanatos family?”

Zoe responded, “Do you remember that animated series about Gargoyles the Lowe family showed us?”

Mal said, “I didn't really care much for that series.”

Zoe stated, “Well, the Xanatos family is from that series.”

Mal inquired, “And why does that trouble you?”

Zoe said, “Did you ever wonder if someone was better at this game than Chang, or Lee?”

Mal replied, “Yea.”

Zoe commented, “Well, in a way. Chang and Lee have both been using the playbook that the Xanatos family wrote.”

Mal requested, in a more serious tone of voice, “Okay. Tell me who we are dealing with?”

Zoe responded, “The black hair man is named David Xanatos. The woman with orange hair, and the tattoo on her face, is named Fox Xanatos. They are husband and wife. Both of them have more money than god. And they know how to use it. They are both highly educated, and highly intelligent. Both are sharp as they come. And in combat, either one of them could hold their own against Roberta. Then, there is their servant, Puck...”

Mal commented, “I am not going to like what you have to say, about this Puck? Am I?”

Zoe stated, “No, sir. You are not. Puck is an ancient mystical being that can pretty much literally do anything he wants. The good news is that while he does have a sense of humor. He also has sense of fair play, and honor. He won't start anything, unless her, or his friends, are provokes. Which includes the Xanatos family.”

Mal asked, “Okay. Still, should we call in Annie and Arcee?”

Zoe answered, “Chang and I both agreed that it would be a bad idea. If Annie and Arcee got into a fight with Puck, this city might not be left standing. And I am not embellishing, sir. I honestly believe that this city would be rubble, by the time the battle ended. Think Serenity Valley, sir. That bad.”

Mal hesitantly said, “Okay...” He thought, 'I have only heard Zoe use Serenity Valley as an example, a few time before. And all of them were very bad situations. I am just happy the two of us survived that hell hole.' He commented, in a more normal tone of voice, “This night is just getting more interesting, by the minute.”

Zoe said, “Look on the bright side, captain. Chang is the one that is going to be handling this. We are just be there as back up.”

Mal replied, in a slightly sarcastic tone, “Yea. That doesn't really inspire me with confidence.”

Zoe pointed out, “Keep in mind, sir. If a fight does break out. They will likely go after Chang first. Then, us.”

Mal conceded, in a slightly calmer tone of voice, “Well, that does make me feel better.” He thought, 'It gives us time to run, if we need too.'

Zoe replied, “Glad to hear it, captain.”

The two friends then continued walking, at a quickened pace, towards the front lobby.

(_)

Less than a minute later, David, Fox, and Puck had just reached the other end of the front lobby of the casino, towards hallway that lead to the gaming floor, when they saw three adults see them come towards them, from among the small crowd of people moving back and forth, with people coming to the gaming floor to use poker chips, and people coming from the gaming floor, to the tellers, to cash out their poker chips.

They then saw the three adults approaching them were one man and two women.

The man was Chang, whom was in usual business clothing.

To Chang's left was a woman with long red hair. She wore a blue blouse, black jeans with a black belt, and blue tennis shoes.

To Chang's right was a fair skinned woman with long black hair. She wore a red long skirt, blue t-shirt, and black flat soled slippers.

At the same time, the Xanatos family saw two other adults exit a doorway, along the left side of the hallway they faced.

The two adults immediately turned to face the Xanatos, they turned and walked towards them.

The two adults were a fair skinned man and a dark skinned woman. Both were dressed in black business suits, like all the other security in the casino.

David thought, with amusement, 'Right on schedule.'

David was the first to come to a stop, with Fox stopped beside him, to his right side. Puck walked around stand beside Fox, to her right side.

Fox quietly said, “Took them long enough.”

David softly replied, “Easy. Let's not tip our hand, yet.”

The three adults then waited silently for the other five adults to approach them.

A few seconds later, Chang, River, Lee, Mal, and Zoe come to a stop, by each other, as they all were facing David, Fox, and Puck, to Lee's right side, and David's left side.

Meanwhile, the customers and other staff that passed by them, knew better than to stop and attempt to listen to the casino owner's business.

Chang calmly said, “Hello. I am Mister Chang. And this is my casino.”

David calmly responded, “Nice to meet you. Might I ask why the three of us have been singled out for such special attention?”

Chang thought, 'With these three, there is no point in trying to hide what we both already know.' He said, “You are very well known to us. Mister and Mrs Xanatos. Along, with you, Puck.”

Puck commented, “Of course. With reputations such as ours. I would expect nothing less.”

Chang went onto say, “And while we are not sure what came about to bring you here. We only want to make sure you have a safe, pleasant time here.” He then looked over at Puck, as he continued, “While leaving our other guests, and staff, in peace.”

Puck looked over at Chang, as he stated, “I promise to be on my best behavior. I will leave the gambling tables, and the people alone. And as long as my charges are not harmed. There will be no problem.”

Chang thought, 'That is about as good a promise as I am going to get from Puck.' He replied, “Then, I will insure that nothing does happen.”

David response dripped with sarcasm, “Of course.”

Puck noticed his friend's sarcasm, as he calmly replied, “We will hope for the best, then.”

Chang looked at all three adults in front of him, as he complimented, “Yes. That would be the proper outlook to take.”

Fox turned to Mal and Zoe. She then looked at Chang, as she inquired, with a tone of voice like ice, “So, we will be having chaperons?”

Chang answered, “Not exactly. We will just keep a few more guards on the gaming floor. And make sure no one does anything stupid. Beside which, given how wealthy you are. A little extra security will not harm anyone.”

David conceded, “I guess that is more than reasonable.”

Chang cracked a grin, as he said, “I am glad that you agree.”

Meanwhile, River slowly turned her eyes towards David, then Fox, then Puck, as she tried to passively read the thoughts. She did not even sense David and Fox. And while she could sense Puck, the magical being was doing something to block his thoughts from her.

River thought, 'Chang was right. Fox and David must be using something to jam my ability to read their thoughts. I cannot even tell that they are there. If they just walked by me. I would not sense them. And even though, I can sense Puck, he is clearly blocking my thoughts.'

River then noticed Puck was looked at her, in her eyes. She continued her thoughts, 'Oh hell. I better stop, right now, before he catches me.'

River quickly broke eye contact with Puck.

Puck then noticed that Lee was looking into his eyes, as well.

As Puck and Lee's eyes met, Lee just nodded once. Before Lee broke eye contact.

Puck raised any eyebrow, in interesting, from Lee's response.

As this went on, Zoe looked over at Fox, and she noticed a look in Fox's eyes that concerned her. She thought, 'Fox has a look in her eyes that is practically, feral. Like the look that Revy sometimes has in her eyes. And to think this man actually married her... No accounting for taste.'

(_)

At that moment, among the crowd that parted around the group of eight adults, a middle-aged Japanese man, with playing chips in his hands, walked by the group, from the lobby, towards the gaming floor. When facing the gaming floor, the japanese man walked against the far right side of the hallway.

The man had come in, just after the Xanatos family, and he had bought some poker chips, from a nearby teller, in the lobby. And now, he was ready to play on the gaming floor.

Unlike the Xanatos family. This man had parked his car, in the parking lot, and walk inside the front doors, by himself. Without anyone really paying him any mind.

For those around him, he was just another customers, for the casino.

The japanese man had a will groom, partly bald, black head of hair, which was cut short. He had a clean shaven face. He was in good physical health. Average height, with a medium physical build. He wore a gray business coat and gray pants, with black belt. Under his gray coat was a white short sleeved button up shirt, with a dark blue tie around his neck. And for shoes, he wore a part of black leather loafers, which comfortably fit his black socked feet.

The japanese man quickly made his way around the right side the right side of the eight adults, with him passing behind Mal and Zoe. With the japanese man, then walking further towards the gaming floor, without any trouble.

(_)

Back in the group, standing by the hallway, in the front lobby, that lead to the gaming floor, Fox looked from River to Lee, as she commented, “While I can understand why these two are here with you... Mister Chang.” She turned to Zoe and Mal, as she asked, “Though, whom are these two?”

Lee thought, 'I think we have just been insulted.' From the corner of her left eye, she saw River nodded her chin once in agreement.

Mal turned to Fox, as he calmly stated, “I am Chief of Security, Reynolds.” He gestured with his right hand, towards Zoe, as he continued, “And this is my second in command, Washburne. And as head of security. I have to ask. What are you plans for tonight?”

David thought, 'Well, given he is security. I guess we have to answer.' He said, “Well, we intend to gamble at some of the tables. And have a little fun.”

Mal inquired, “Are you planning on spending the night in the casino?”

David replied, “No. We plan to leave in a few hours.”

Mal replied, “Then, enjoy yourselves.”

David thought, 'I think he just gave me a veiled threat. Though, I don't want to ruin my evening with my wife, and friend. So, I will let his comment slide.'

Fox looked around at the group in front of her, as she said, “I must say. You have some an interesting selection of people here?”

Chang commented, “Having a diverse customer base helps keep the doors open.”

Fox turned to Chang, as she responded, “Of course. Thought, I was not talking about the customers. I was talking about the staff. Some many people, from different realities, in one place.”

Chang plainly stated, “It stands to reason you would know about the world as myth concept. Though, if you wish to discuss that, I will have to ask that we do so in private.”

Fox said, in a sly tone of voice, “Oh. I am not going to get detail. But, it must as been such a story to bring you together.” She then looked at Lee.

Lee looked back at Fox, as she thought, 'Oh hell. They know about my stories.'

Chang noticed Fox looking at Lee. He put two and two together, as he thought, 'They know about Lee's stories. That does not surprise me.' He calmly responded, “So you know our back stories. In more ways then one. That just puts us on an even keel, with one another.”

Fox kept her gaze on Lee, as she replied, in a smug tone of voice, “Quite so. Still, I am surprised you would be so open with the one that caused all of you so much trouble.”

Fox hit a nerve for Lee. Lee continued to look at Fox, as she grimaced. She stated, “I went through hell and back, to get where I presently am at. Some of us are not daddy's little, rebellious, trust fund baby.”

Fox face turned to a mask of fury. She started to approach Lee, as she said, “Why you little...”

Lee did not response, as Fox suddenly found she as not able to move.

Fox moved her eyes to her right, towards Puck. She saw the little man just smiling at her.

Puck commented, “Now, now, Fox. I am not going to let you ruin this wonderful evening. You started this. And as a writer. She would know how to push someone's buttons. Besides. Take a little at her. She wasn't going to fight you. She knew I was going to pull this.”

Fox looked over at see Lee smirking at her.

Fox then felt herself be able to move. She did not take a step towards Lee. Though, she continued to look at the black haired woman, as she inquired, “How did you know?”

Lee dropped her grin, as she said, “Pre-cog.”

Fox replied, “Oh.” She thought, 'I should have paid more attention on the reports about this person.'

Puck turned look at Lee, then to Chang. He requested, “Please, forgive my friend here. She sometimes gets this way.”

Chang looked over at Puck, as he thought, 'Well, that both confirms that Puck has his powers back. And that he is will step in to stop a problem from occurring. The latter I find to be a relief. He clearly wants to keep things peaceful. So, he can help keep David happy. Which is understandable.'

Chang calmly responded, “I can sympathize. Just don't let her go anywhere near Revy. Nor, most of Revy's friends.”

Puck replied, “I won't. That wouldn't be fun for us.”

Chang said, “I am glad we agree.”

David spoke up, “That would be a wise suggestion.” He turned to his wife, as he continued, in a warm tone of voice, “Besides. We came here to have some fun. Not start a fight.” He thought, 'Though, you sometimes liked to start bar fights as a from of entertainment. With you walking away, the clear victor.'

Fox looked over at David, as she forced herself to calm down. She replied, “Okay.” She turned back to Lee, as she warned, “This is not over.”

Lee looked at Fox, as she calmly said, “It never is.”

The group continued their conversation.

(_)

Nearby, the middle-aged japanese man, in the gray suit, whom held his poker chips in his hands, approached the gaming floor.

The japanese man continued to looked around, while he walked. As he did so, he happily thought, 'Sometimes being one of Gomez's lower profile agents has its perks. And I guess that telepathic blocker on the back of my left ear is working, or River would have sniffed me out, by now. Also, as long as I watch my emotions, I don't have to worry about Annie, at all.'

'I wonder if Chang here, would find it hilarious that, over the years, we have known so many of the same people. But, we have never actually been in the same room, until tonight.'

'Though, I am not going to say a damn word about it. And blow my cover.'

'Still, Masahiro Takenaka, old boy. I know how good I got it now. A good paying job. That is less dangerous than the life I use to lead. I received a wonderful health benefits package. And I get to go to places where I am not a wanted man. Life can be such fun, at times.'

'Though, it took some effort for Gomez to find me. While, at the time, I did not have the details of Chang little insanity, I did find out he was after me. And unlike others, I know how to go to ground. And stay there.'

'But, three months after Chang's first fall. Which I see he came back from. I was eventually found, by Gomez.'

'At the time, I was still a bit of a communist ideologue. That was until Gomez showed me that Black Lagoon series. Especially, episodes eleven and twelve, that dealt with me.'

'Watching that series changed my point of view, very quickly, in several way.'

'And now, I find it slightly poetic that all the political struggles that I, and others, have been through, to be meaningless fiction of other people, in other realities.'

'And that was when Gomez offered me this job, and I gladly took it. I find it funny, that given my origins, I have gone from an enemy of the state, to a government agent. Then again, some pirates ended up becoming privateers. Though, it is not like I have anything better to do.'

'Gomez had also informed me that he had looked further into my history. And he revealed to me, that he liked what he found. That I was very good what both being a spy, and a mercenary. That I could keep a level head tense situations. That I knew when to cut my losses and walk away.'

'And that is how I have stayed alive this long.'

'Also, to help insure that I would be loyal to him. Gomez did a few other things for me. He pulled some strings, and I am no long a wanted man in my home reality. He even had me undergo a rejuvenation therapy that added another good thirty years to my life, and it even helped clean out my lungs from decades of smoking. As such, I gave up smoking. And I am better for doing so.'

'As such, I decided, since I now had a new lease on life, I was going to enjoy it. And this job, along my reality device, and perks that come with it. Has so far been one hell of a great ride, that I had have no intention of quitting, anytime soon.'

'Fortunately, Gomez respects what I can do. Between my skills, and polite manners, I can get into many places, and get the information we need, while remaining undetected.'

'Now, to do my job. And plant my electronic bugs, while the Xanatos family are keeping everyone distracted.'

By then, Masahiro Takenaka was approaching on of the Blackjack tables. A few seconds ago, he had saw a four of players leave the table. And he also noticed who the dealer was.

After Takenaka recognized who the dealer, he walked up to that dealer's table.

As Takenaka reached the table, he set his two rolls of chips onto the table itself. He then looked up at the dealer, as he greeter her, in english, “Hello little lady.”

The dealer, Faye Valentine, her dealer's uniform, look across the table, at Takenaka.

While Takenaka looked at Faye, he thought, 'Records state that this woman's name is Faye Valentine. And she is from a reality close to my own. Though, the date she left her reality, is far into my own future. She is a conartist, and a cheat... It makes sense she would be a dealer in this place like this... Though, to be fair, records also state that Chang tries to run this place honestly, and cleanly.'

'That is no point in cheating, if he is making such a large amount of money in such a direct way... Along with that screwy gender bending whorehouse, Chang also has, elsewhere on this island... I will admit, as twisted as such a whorehouse is, that is actually, quite a brilliant way to make money. It take one's vices to the extreme, without those vices turning ugly, nor painful...'

'Still, back to focus on the matter at hand... While Faye's job here is on the lower end. She is connected all the way to Chang. I need to see if I will be recognized. And it is best to just see if I can pass the sniff test, now. Before I start planting the bugs. Chances are, if she doesn't spot me, none of them will. And those that are watching right now, will likely give me a pass, if Faye gives me a pass.'

Faye said, in english, “Hi to yourself...” She then looked more closely at Takenake, as she commented, “Say... You kind of look family.”

Takenaka casually replied, “I just have that type of face.” He then placed a couple of chips to bet, as he continued, “Now, let's play some cards.”

Faye shrugged, as she said, “I meet a lot of people. So, that is probably the case.” She then reached over to the automatic poker shuffling machine that was by her, to her left, and she pulled out some cards for both her and Takenaka.

Takenaka found he won the first hand. He pulled back his winning chips. He then looked up at Faye's face, as he said, “That is a great way to start a game.” He thought, 'I wonder if she lost intentionally, to lure me into a false sense of safety, in gambling. So, she could make more money on the back in. That is likely.'

Faye inquired, “Yes. Care to try you luck further?”

Takenaka set out a few chips to bet with, as he replied, “Sure.” He thought, 'Now, since she does not recognized me, it is time for me to do my job.'

As Faye turned her attention to the automatic shuffling machine, Takenaka reached under the table with his right hand. He then palmed an electronic surveillance bug onto the bottom of the table, from under his right sleeve.

He had a number of such electronic bugs on both his sleeves. And they would not turn on for another few hours. Making them less likely to be detected while he was still there.

Takenaka then lost the next two rounds.

As Faye pulled back the chips from the third round, she asked, “Do you want another go?”

Takenaka stated, “No. My dear. I know when to cut my losses.” He mentally added, 'Story of my life.' He commented, “I think I will have a drink at the bar.” He then began to collect his chips

Faye replied, “Enjoy.”

Takenaka then turned and started walking towards the casino restaurant, as he thought, 'Now, to plant some bugs in the restaurant. Then, I need to work my wait around the customer areas of this floor.'

'While, we likely won't get any major information this way. It will just be one more stepping stone to learning about this place. By showing us the day to day schedule of the gaming floor. Thus, allowing us how to figure out how to infiltrate further into this place. Such as, the casino cages, offices, and personal areas... But, for right now, I think I will have a drink, while I continue with my job.'

A few seconds after Takenaka left Faye's blackjack table, a few more gamblers showed up to try to their with her, as their dealer.

(_)

Several feet away, Spike was the acting pit boss for that shift. She wore her black business suit and dress suits

While Spike did her job, and looked around the gaming floor for possible trouble, to stop, she saw the middle-aged japanese, with a handle of chips, had caught her eye.

The man had just finished playing a few hands from Faye's blackjack table, and he was currently heading for the casino restaurant.

As Spike looked at the man, she thought, 'Something about that guy sets me on edge. But, I cannot tell what. Though, since Faye didn't spot anything about him, I will give him the benefit of the doubt. Faye could spot a cheat a mile away. And if she sensed that something was wrong, she would have alerted me. So, I think we are fine.'

'Now, I just cannot wait to get off this shift, so I can be with Julia. At least Jetta was nice enough to watch, tonight, her for me.'

Spike then went back to her job, as looked around the gaming floor.

Meanwhile, Takenaka made to the casino restaurant, without a problem.

(_)

Back to the eight person group, in the front lobby, their conversation was starting to drag on, as David though, 'This is getting us nowhere. I better move things along before Fox has another outburst.'

David said, “Well, I believe you have taken too much of my wife's time. So, if you don't mind? I would like to treat her to a night out?”

Chang thought, 'Meaning, you are worry that you wife is growing impatient. Fine. I have not interest in antagonizing you three. I will let you have your fun.'

Chang replied, “Have fun. And let us know if you need anything.”

David did not reply, as he turned to his left, and started heading towards the tellers, to purchase some poker chips.

Fox gave Chang a feral smile. She said, in a demure tone of voice, “Oh... We will.” She then walked over to join her husband.

Puck turned to his two friends, as he said, “David, Fox, I will be with you in a moment.” He looked over at River and Lee, whom were also look back at him. He continued, “I have a few things to discuss with those here, for the moment.”

While David did not turn around to face Puck, as he kept walking, with Fox by his right beside him, to his left. He brushed his right hand, backwards, as he stated, “Take your time. We are in no rush.”

Puck turned towards his friends' direction, as he replied, “Thanks.”

Meanwhile, Chang watched the married couple head to the tellers, as a thought then occurred to him, 'I wonder why they immediately did not go purchase some poker chips, when they got here?... Unless they were waiting for us... They wanted to meet us... Meet me... That also explains why they took their time, walking across this lobby. And given the inner workings of their Machiavellian minds, that is no way to know as to why they would go about meeting me in this way.'

'And I know better than to ask them. Still, I will just count ourselves lucky if these three behave during their stay here. And all evidence I have seen so far, points that they will. Though, there are a few other things I need to do, before the Xanato's family makes it to the gaming tables.'

'Including, reminding the dealers there is a limit in place for bets.'

With the married couple no longer in ear shot, Chang turned back to Zoe and Mal. He said, “Come on. We need to inform Spike that we have some foreign dignitaries to keep an eyes on.”

Puck overheard Chang. He turned to Chang, as he commented, “That is a nice way to put it.”

Chang turned to look at Puck, as he said, in a kind tone of voice, “You're welcome. Enjoy your stay.”

Puck replied, “We will.”

Chang then turned towards the gaming floor, as he started walking across the hallway, and gaming floor, to reach the pit boss on duty, which was Spike Spiegel.

Then, Zoe and Mal followed right behind Chang.

With Chang, Zoe, and Mal gone, River and Lee looked over at Puck, as Puck looked at them.

Puck inquired, “I noticed that you two were looking at me, a few times. So, what do you two want to talk about?”

River answered, “So many things.”

Lee said, “To start with. We are big fans.”

Puck stated, “It is always nice to be admired. I don't mind dealing with fans. As long as you are polite.”

Lee said, in a polite, sincere tone of voice, “We will be on our best behavior.”

Puck chuckled a little, as he realized Lee was quoting what he had told them, a few minutes ago.

Puck responded, “Touche. So, which one of you is Chang's girlfriend? I was wondering about that, myself.” He thought, 'Even Gomez's records were not exactly clear on that point.'

River said, “It is complicated.”

Puck thought, 'That means they are probably both involved with Chang, in some sort of three way. Not that I am one to judge.” He replied, “Isn't everything in life. Still, what you said to Fox was not wise.”

Lee responded, “She cannot be any more dangerous than Roberta, the Bloodhound.”

Puck conceded, “I will give you that one. Though, just try to stay on her good side from now on.”

Lee said, “I will do so. And thank you for stopping her, when you did.”

Puck responded, “She started it. If you had started it. I would have let her attack.”

Lee inquired, “I understand. Still, given the situation. And the fact my friends own and run this place. I have to ask, are you still bound by Oberon's decree? I am guessing after that little display with Fox, and Alex not being here, the answer is, no.”

Puck smirked, “And you would be correct. We found someone to remove that little problem. With Oberon, Titania, and the others, not having a clue about my newfound freedom.”

Lee sarcastically thought, 'Just great. A near immortal, reality bending magical trickster in this casino. And I doubt any iron bells are going to work with him. He knows to look out for such dangers. In all honestly, Puck is as intelligent and genre savvy as David and Fox. If not more so... Besides, if any of us tried such a trick against Puck, we would likely piss off all three of them. With even them, later on, possibly becoming the least of our problems.'

River read Lee's thoughts. She commented, “Well, we appreciate you deciding to be on your best behavior.”

Puck shrugged, as he answered, in a casual tone of voice, “It is okay. I am not in the mood for tricks, right now. Besides, I don't pull pranks while at work. It is bad form. And we are only staying for the evening.”

Lee thought, 'This is good. Also, I have a good idea why Puck is here as Puck, and not Owen.' Lee questioned, “Let me guess. The reason you are not as Owen, is that you have moved from being the stoic servant, to the witty servant?”

Puck complimented, “Yes. Very perceptive. While playing the ultimate straight man was fun, once everyone around me knew who I really was, the joke slowing soured. But, I still enjoy working for the kids. So, as soon as that binding spell was lifted, I started working as Puck, instead of Owen. And it has work out quiet well.”

Lee agreed, “Yes. A good balance between stoic and crazy can be fun.”

Puck responded, “You are right about that, Lee.”

Lee inquired, “From what Fox said, I am guessing you have heard about all of us?”

Puck answered, “Yes. We know about all of you. By the way, River, I love the red hair. And you look great. Sanity really appeals to you.”

River replied, “Thanks.”

Puck inquired, “I heard that Annie was here?”

Lee answered, “Yes. But, we asked her, and a few others, to avoid you three. No offense. But, I am not sure how your magic and her force would react to each other. And we really don't want to risk a fight between you, too.”

“So, while Annie is now a nice person, and I am sure you would get along with her, she and Fox might get into it. And if that happens, it will snowball from there. With the current theory being if you and her got into it, there is not be a city left. And that is not even counting Arcee.”

Puck responded, “I can understand you discretion on the matter. Maybe, I can see her again, when it is just myself whom is visiting.”

River said, “That would be possible.”

Puck replied, “Good.”

Lee thought, 'I take you cannot sense there thoughts.'

River shook her head once.

Lee thought, 'Damn.'

Puck commented, “It doesn't take long ears to tell you two are talking to each other. But, it helps. Let me guess, River. You are reading Lee's thoughts, and answering her in none verbal ways?”

River admitted, “Correct.”

Puck complimented, “Not bad. You two turn silent communication into an art form. Though, what I want to talk to you about is, Sam?”

River thought, 'Chang said that keeping this man happy is our number one priority. And I agree. He is the priority. And we will let Chang handle David and Fox. Still, we should be careful around him.' She coyly inquired, “You heard about that?”

Puck replied, “My dear. There have been many things I hear about.”

Lee suddenly became very aware of how public their surroundings were, as she suggested, “Perhaps this is not the best place to discuss such matters.” She thought, 'River, I don't like our private lives made open to the public.”

River quietly said, “Neither do I.”

Puck commented, with mischievous glee in his voice, “River, I can guess what thoughts you were responding to, from Lee. And what is the fun in taking this conversation some place private. While I promised to behave. That does not mean I cannot have a little fun. And I heard you two are very good at dealing with talking about things in plain sight, while appearing not too. So, we can make a game of how vague we can keep it.”

Lee thought, 'It is your call, River.'

River said, “Okay. Say your piece.”

Puck stated, “First, we have all read your stories, Lee. Contrary to Fox's abrasive tone of voice, we found them quite funny. From what you wrote, and what you have done since being hunted by the others you wrong. To the point where you are now. As one trickster to another, I am impressed.”

Lee questioned, “Thank you. You also hinted that you have seen your series? Is that true?”

Puck answered, “Oh course. And we all loved it. David even has a favorite episode. That being, the episode titled, Vows.”

Lee stated, “Of course. Because it showed, as he put it, how he became a self made man. And let me guess, your favor episode is, The Mirror.”

Puck responded, “Nope. My favorite episode is, The Gathering. Both parts. That two part episode is also Fox's favorite episode.”

Lee replied, “I can see why.”

Puck commented, “Thought, The Mirror, is a good second runner up.”

Lee requested, “So, what else do you have to say?”

Puck gave River and Lee a wicked grin, as he stated, “Well, for River here. I have to say your little role at Sam was truly entertaining to learn about. Before I heard what you pulled, as Sam. I thought my Owen gag was pushing the envelope of playing against the type. I was clearly wrong. River, you took it to a whole concept to new level. And you pulled it off, beautifully.”

A gray derby hat suddenly appeared on top of Puck head. He used his right fingers to tip the hat towards River, while still remaining on his head, as he said, “And I tip my hat off to you.”

A second later, the hat disappeared from Puck's head.

River thought, 'That was a very nice compliment on his part. And I will accept credit, where credit is due.' She said, warm tone of voice, “Well, thank you, Puck. And I was inspired by you.”

Puck happily responded, “As I expected.”

River mentioned, “Well, besides your role as Owen Burnett. You were the first to throw gender bending into the mix with that game, of playing against the type, in a modern setting. That was in the episode, Future Tense. When you pretend to be Elisa, when you tried to trick Goliath out of the Phoenix Gate.”

Puck raised an eyebrow, as he complimented, “Good memory. You know, you two are really a pair of jokers. And with a trickster like me, think of the fun we could have. We could even have a little contest?”

Lee flatly stated, “We will have no gag contests, here. We will have no giant eight balls rolling down the hallways.”

Puck caught Lee's reference, as he let out a laugh. He then questioned, “Night Court fan? Eh?”

Lee answered, “Yea. I loved that series. It was good on all levels. And Harry Stone was the first trickster character I was introduced to as a child.”

Puck said, “Girl, right at the beginning, you dived into the deep end of trickery.”

Lee agreed, “Yes. And I learned from both the best, and kindest, characters in that department.”

Puck responded, “And it shows. Still, you are being a bit of stick in the mud. I am surprised you haven't tried to pull any more gags on this island, after you got back from those chinese amazons.”

Lee said, “I am not surprised you know about that, as well. Considering I occasionally still dress in the clothing I had from the tribe I belonged too.”

Puck complimented, “And I must say those people have a real sense in fashion and style. Though, their sense of humor needs a little work.”

Lee thought, 'Interesting. It sounds like you have visited them, before.' She stated, “Thank you. And to answer you question. It is just that I do not want to upset, Revy, and her small army of badass women, again. Given each of them can be as scary and dangerous, as Demona, if not more so, on one of her bad days. I believe I have good reasons not to push my luck.”

Puck replied, “Point taken.”

Lee inquired, “By the way. I have always wondered. Why does Fox have orange hair? Does she dye it?”

Puck said, “No. That is her nature hair color. How she ended up with hair color, I don't know. And Alex has the same color hair. I guess Titania has a sense of humor.”

Lee responded, “Okay. That also explains why their son also has the same orange hair color. And I think we can agree that Demona has red hair because of her fiery personality... No offense, River.”

River replied, “None taken.”

Puck stated, “I would go along with that.”

River inquired, “What I would like to know is what is with pain associated with Demona's change? She has to go through it twice a day. I do not see how that is constructive. And your actions always seemed to level of constructiveness to them. Why you can be vindictive. Like anyone else. You clearly prefer not too. Much to our relief.”

“And given that Demona is one of your friends more dangerous enemies. I would think you would want to at least keep her in a good mood.”

Puck answered, “I will admit. That is a good question. The pain is tied to her level of hatred for humanity. The less she hates humanity, the less pain. No hatred for humanity, no pain.”

River pointed out, “It was might have been a good idea to tell her that, up front. After a thousand years of getting into trouble. She clearly is not one to learn from her own lessons, by herself.”

Puck said, “True. But, there are some things you have to learn on your own. No matter how long it takes. Anyway, speaking of tricksters, I heard that Jack Sparrow is around here, in some form. Jack owes me five gold dobla coins for a bet he lost to me, once.”

As Lee and River continued to look at Puck, they immediately realized several things about Puck, at that moment, including...

Lee thought, 'River, Puck has traveled between realities. And, from his point of view, he likely has been doing it for centuries, before any of us, from our realities did so. And I did not write any of this.'

River flatly said, “I realize all that, as well.”

Lee inquired, “So, you have traveled beyond your... Realm.” She mentally added, 'Realms can have many meanings. From kingdoms, to realities. And we need to try to keep this vague, and from any prying ears.'

Puck answered, “Oh yes. And for quiet a while. Magic works just as well as technology in that area of travel. And I have been to quite a few places, over the years.”

“I was even the one whom inspired Heinlein's, world as myth, theory...” Puck lightly chuckled. He then continued, “At least, in my realm.”

Lee thought, 'At least, he is using the term, realms. So, he is keeping the game we are playing. And I believe him on his claim to that theory.' She said, “I believe you are creatively crazy enough to pull that off.”

Puck responded, “Thank you. And that is a nice term. Creatively crazy. I like it. And before you ask. Yes. I believe one of my kind was Shakespeare. I am not sure which one. It wasn't me. But, my money is on Oberon himself. Or, maybe Titania, as either Shakespeare’s wife, Shakespeare, himself... Yea, she use to be as crazy as you, River. Though, she was a touch snobbish, when she was younger. Though, long, long before she had Fox, she finally emotionally grew up, and became a much more interesting person. Like, you, River.”

River replied, in a slightly confused tone of voice, “Thank you... I think.”

Lee thought, 'Before we continue this conversation. I better check on something.' She asked, “No to sound rude. But, are you sure this is the right Jack Sparrow? You could be looking for another Jack Sparrow, from an alternate reality?”

Puck coyly said, “Unlike others. I can tell one Jack, from another.”

Lee got the movie reference, from part three, of the Pirates of the Caribbean movies. She commented, “That was an interesting scene.”

Puck commented, “True. Anyway, Jack's group literally fell into another realm, for a little while. And they got the attention of others. And the grapevine eventually reached me. I then track Jack down. With Jack and I ending up having such fun together.”

“And as I said. I believe that this is the same Jack as the one I met so long again, because I can tell that Chang here, and the others from his realm, are from the same realm, as the realm Jack was from.”

River said, “Interesting. Unfortunately, it would be unwise to contact Jack at this time.”

Lee agreed, “River is correct. It would only cause problems.”

Puck replied, “Mores the pity.” He then look over his left shoulder at David, Fox, and he saw that they were finished with the teller. David carrying a box of poker chips towards the floor, with Fox by his side, to his right, as they headed for the gaming floor.

Puck turned back to River and Lee, as he stated, “Well girls, it looks I need to head back to my friends. Still, we need to get together sometime, at a later date. Where we can have a more formal, sit down discussion, and debate on the finer points of trickery.”

River said, “Perhaps.”

Lee commented, “As long as we keep it civil.”

Puck gave them a warm smile, as he happily replied, “Then, I look forward to it.”

Then, River and Lee heard Pucks voice softly speak in both their mind, in a calm mental, tone of voice, with was emotionally pleasant for them to hear, in their minds, 'By the way, for someone with my abilities. Telepathy is a cakewalk. And don't worry, at the moment, only the two of you can hear me like this. Though, I do prefer not to use this little trick. I find it too easy.'

River complimented, in thought, 'Then, you are a better person than I, in that area of expertise.'

Puck said, out loud, “Thank you. And like I said, we really will have to do this again, some time.”

River and Lee then watched Puck turn and walk over join David and Fox, with him walking up a few feet behind them.

As River and Lee saw Puck follow right behind Fox and David, River took a few steps closer to Lee. She leaned over, as she whispered into Lee's left ear, “We're fucked? Aren't we?”

Lee thought, 'Absolutely to the wall. I suggest we don't give details about our little conversation with Puck, to Chang and the others, unless they ask. They are clearly going to have enough problems with David and Fox. And since Puck is the type of person that, while powerful, he prefers not to be a threat, unless provoked. There is no point in worrying about him harming us.'

River quietly said, “Agreed. Still, should I look go get some iron chains, and an iron bell.”

Lee thought, 'No. Absolutely not. If we harm Puck, especially in such a cheap manner, we rest invoking the wraith of not only the Xanatos clan, but the Third Race. The Children of Oberon, as well. Besides, as twisted as it sounds. Puck is the voice of reason... And most sane person in his little group.'

River leans back up right, as she softly replied, “Fine. We will just figure out a different way to help mitigate that situation.”

Lee thought, 'Exactly. And this is likely going to be a long night. Though, if they are just here to have fun, right now. And they plan to leave in a few hours. Then, we should just ride out this situation.'

River whispered, “I hope you are right. Because, I really don't see any other options we can take.'

Lee thought, 'I know.'

(_)

Nearby, as Puck followed behind David and Fox, he cracked a grin, as he overheard, with both with his long ears, and telepathically, River and Lee finish their conversation. He thought, 'Well, these kids are a lot more wiser than most of the people I deal with. And that is nice to know.

(_)

In front Puck, David and Fox entered the gaming floor, with them approaching one of less busy roulette tables.

While they continued walking, David asked, “So, do you still wish to go to the roulette wheel, first? Or, have you changed your mind?”

Fox coyly responded, “Yes. After that, I am not sure. We will see, I see how fun the wheel is. Then, we may play soon dice. Like you prefer.”

David commented, “That will be fine. Still, I wonder how our son is handling things?”

Fox stated, “Given Alex's training, and pedigree, I doubt he has much to worry about, over his plans for tonight.”

By then, the two spouses had reached the roulette table, and they started gambling.

(_)

At the moment, across town, in the restaurant of the Devil Hotel, Revy, Rock, and most of their friends and family were enjoying karaoke night at the stage, in the restaurant of the hotel.

Those present were Rock, Revy, Dutch, Benny, Janet, Ranma, Akira, Natsuru, Yolanda, Eda, Molly, Sarah, Kristina, Rebecca, Yukio, Yurika, Mikoto, Nodoka, Roberta, Lotton, Sawyer, and Shenhua.

The only ones not present were Barbossa, whom had retired to his suite early, to get some sleep. Along with Aeryn and Violin, whom were babysitting their young daughter, Gilina, in addition to watching Ivy, Wenqian, and Thomas.

The women were sitting in their usual tables, near the stage floor of the room.

There are also other customers scattered throughout the room. Along, with Melanie behind the bar, and a few waitresses serving drinks to the customers in the room.

Sawyer had just finished her karaoke version of Amazing Grace, which she got a standing ovation at the end for, and she was now exiting the stage. She soon made it to the table she shared with Lotton, Shenhua, Eda, Yolanda, and Roberta, where she sat back down in her seat.

Nearby, from the table Benny sat at, with Janet, Dutch, Rock, and Revy, Benny commented, “Look's like I am up.”

But, just as Benny was about to get out of her seat, someone immediately appear standing on on stage.

The person standing stage, facing the crowd, was a thirteen year old boy. He had fair skin, and orange hair that was cut short, and parted to his right side. He was very well physically fit for his age. He wore a pink turtleneck shirt that was tucked into black pants, along with a black belt, white socks, and black tennis shoes.

And unbeknownst to those in the room, the boy was Alexander Xanatos. The son of Fox and David Xanatos. And Alexander went by, Alex, to his friends.

All eyes turned on Alex, as he looked out at the crowd. He thought, 'Under different circumstances, I would be asking for autographs, right now. But, I just simply don't have the time.'

Benny quietly said, “I guess not.” She then sat back down in her seat.

At the table Janet, she asked those around her, “Who is that?”

Revy replied, “Whomever it is, it's a kid.”

At the table she was sitting at, Dutch commented, “Well, he just teleported here, so this cannot be good.”

Rock suggested, “Let us find out who he is? And then, we can politely ask him to come down, peacefully?”

Dutch replied, “Good idea.”

Revy look over at Alex, as she inquired, in a slightly loud tone of voice, “Hey you? Who are you?”

Alex looked over at Revy, as he thought, 'I would love to tell you who I am, Revy. And that I know who you are. But, if I did so, I would likely get in trouble with my parents. And my mother did teach me not be to open about who I am with strangers.'

Alex answered, “I would rather not say.”

Rock calmly asked, “So, why are you here?”

Alex thought, 'I might as well be honest.' He stated, “A personal test of character, courage, and conviction in one's actions, as it were.” He turned to look at the karaoke machine to his left, in the corner of the stage. He looked back at the crowd as he continued, “I see you guys like karaoke. So, I have one question, for all of you. Are you Jim Carrey fans?”

Suddenly, Alex's used his magic to turn his clothing into a male calypso costume. The costume had yellow shirt, with orange cloth ruffled sleeves on the arms. Black pants, with a black belt. And black dance shoes. Also, there was a pair of colorfully painted maracas attached to the right side of his belt.

With his new suit on, Alex said, in an excited tone of voice, “Hit it!” Suddenly, the karaoke machine started playing the song, Cuban Pete.

(_)

Meanwhile, back in the security room of Daiyu Palace Casino, Jayne and Wash watched as the Xanatos family made their way to a roulette table.

Jayne was sitting in a swivel chair, at a computer workstation. With Wash standing near him.

Jayne thought, 'Something bad is going on here, and I need answers. Though, these computer ID system is turning a blank on these three. Though, that is possibly because I do not have proper access. If these guys are as dangerous as Zoe stated, Chang could have put a lock on their files, for only him, Mal, Zoe, Arcee, Annie, River, and I guess, Lee.'

'And I with Wash here, I don't want to just search the internet for information on them. I don't want them to believe that I am still somewhere less well thought out, in my actions, and beliefs, than I really am.'

'Fortunately, I know just who to ask.'

Jayne then pulled his encrypted cellphone and dialed a number.

Wash noticed this, as he asked, “So, who are you calling?”

Jayne stated, “Someone that might have some answers, that I am good friends with. And I will let you know what is going on, as soon as I do.” He thought, 'And Zoe is right. It is nice to have you back, Wash. Next to Kaylee. You were the fun one of our group.'

Wash replied, “Thank you.”

Jayne said, “You're welcome.” He then held the phone to his right ear, he here the phone begin to ring.

A few seconds later, Jayne heard the other end of the line pick up, and a recognizable female voice said, in english, “Last Resort Diner. How can we help you, Jayne?”

Jayne requested, in a pleasant tone of voice, in english, “Hey Ed. Could I speak to Bob, real quick.”

Ed replied, “Sure thing.”

(_)

Across town, inside the Last Resort Diner, Ed was the acting cook, as she held the wireless phone to the restaurant, in her right hand, while standing near the stove, behind the counter.

Rico and Lori were acting as waitresses that shift, and Stan was washing dishes.

Lewis was on a date with Irene. And Leona was back in the apartment she shared with her sister, enjoying her day off.

Ed still had the wireless phone in her hand, away from her right ear. She stood facing the front double-door entrance to the diner, from behind the counter, in the center of the room.

Ed saw Lori walk across the front of the counter.

Ed said, “Lori.”

Lori stopped and turned to her wife.

Ed noticed this, as she stated, “Jayne is on the phone.” She thought, 'While I could just walk over and hand Bob the phone. This is the type of conversation, we need to keep form the customers.'

Lori replied, in english, “I will be right there.”

Lori walked behind the counter, to where Ed stood. Ed handed the phone to Lori. The redhead then went back to cooking one of their customer's orders.

Lori held the phone in her left hand. She held the phone to her left ear, as she said, “Hello.”

On the other end of the line, Jayne replied, “Hey Bob.”

Lori smiled, as she responded, “Hi Jayne. How are things going with you?”

Jayne answered, “Not so good. I have question that I think you can answer.”

Lori replied, “Sure. Go ahead and ask.”

(_)

At the casino, Jayne looked at the monitors, of River, and Lee walking over to join Chang, Mal, Zoe, and Spike, as all six adults watched the Xanatos family gamble, near by. He stated, “A few minutes ago, we have a couple of guests show up, with their servant, into the casino. And they seem to have rattled Zoe, Chang, River, and Lee.”

(_)

At the diner, Lori thought, 'It takes lot to get those four to be concerned.' She requested, “Describe them?”

Jayne said, “The man and woman are of average height, are both in physical good shape. The man is wearing a black suit, while the women is wearing an orange dress. The man has tanned skin and brown hair. He has a mustache and goatee, along with a short ponytail. The women is wearing an orange evening gown. She has fair skinned, with long orange hair, and she had teal tattoo around her right eye.”

Lori thought, 'Teal tattoo around her right eye... No. It could be them...' She asked, “What are their names?”

Jayne answered, “Zoe said their names were, David and Fox Xanatos.”

Nearby, with her enhanced hearing, Rico could not help but listen to what was going on, as Lori blurted out, “David and Fox Xanatos are at the casino?”

Lori's comment also caught Stan and Ed's attention, as well.

Rico, Stan, and Ed, all stopped what they were doing, as they listened to the conversation.

On the phone, Jayne replied, “Yes. “

Lori thought, 'Crap... Wait. Jayne said there was another person with them. Please, don't be who I think it is.' She inquired, “You said they had a servant there with them?”

Jayne answered, “Yes. I believe his name is, Puck. He is a small, fair skinned, skinny man. He has long white hair, and he is wearing a white business suit. Also, he had long, pointed ears. I would guess that he looks like an elf. He might be an elf.”

Lori responded, “Actually, you are not that far off the mark.” She thought, 'Oh hell. It is, Puck. But, is he still under Oberon's spell that binds his powers to protecting, and teaching magic to, Alexander Xanatos? There is one way to know for sure...” She inquired, “Is there a child with them? A boy?”

Jayne answered, “No. I did not see them come in with any children.”

Lori thought, 'If Alex is not there, and Puck is showing his true form. Chances are that the binding spell on his powers has been removed. This is very bad. The only good news is that while David and Fox are, on their best days, civil, but dangerous. Puck is a much nicer person. While Puck is dangerous and powerful, he is also good natured, and honorable. Meaning, he won't start a fight, unless he has to. But, I need to warn Jayne.'

Lori stated, in a serious tone of voice, “Jayne, I want you to listen very carefully. Do not do anything towards these people. Do not bother them. David and Fox are each as dangerous as Roberta, River, Chang, or Balalaika. And their servant is more dangerous than Annie, or Arcee. Let Chang, River, and Lee handle them.”

“Also, if it looks like things are about to go to hell. Get out of there. Don't try to fight them. And don't mention this information to Mal, or Zoe, or Wash, for that matter. Mal and Zoe might do something stupid, if they knew the level of danger you are all in. And Wash will mention what you tell him to the other two.”

Jayne commented, “Actually, from the way Zoe was acting, I think she realizes this, and she is letting Chang take lead.”

Lori replied, “Good. I was worried she might try something unwise.”

Jayne asked, “So, do you have any good news for us?”

Lori answered, “Yes. The good news is that, chances are, if the Xanatos are making such an open showing, it means they are doing something underhanded, but not an immediate danger to any of you.”

Jayne said, “Understood. And thank you.”

Lori inquired, “You're welcome. Is there anything else?”

Jayne asked, “Yea. Are we still on for beer night, on Thursday, at eight?”

Lori replied, “Sure. If you don't mind being a woman.”

Jayne stated, “It sucks that you wife doesn't trust me around you as a guy.”

Lori looked over at Ed, whom was looking back at her. She agreed, “Yea. It does. Still, it is not that bad.”

Ed just shrugged towards Lori, before she turned and went back to cooking.

Jayne replied, “Well, I have reached the point I don't mind.”

Lori commented, “And you can change back and forth, while I not long can.”

Jayne stated, “Some things we just can't help. Still, you are a great person to have as a drinking buddy. And as long as I don't have to wear anything frilly, nor short, below the waist. I don't care.”

Lori said, “Good. I will see you then.”

Jayne replied, “Bye.”

Lori said, “See you later.”

Jayne ended the connection on his end of the line, just as Lori did the same. Lori then hung up the phone on its base, on the back wall, away from the stove.

Ed continued cooking, as she casually asked, “So, what is going on over at the casino?”

Lori answered, “The Xanatos family showed up at Chang's casino. David and Fox. Along with Puck. Not Owen. Puck.”

Ed commented, “Well then, those three and those at the casino, are going to be in for a ride.”

Lori replied, “I agree. And it means we are going to have to avoid the casino for a while.”

Ed agreed, “True. Also, it sounded like the Xanatos' son, Alexander was not there.”

Lori said, “Yea. You're right on the money. And that concerns me, as well. Also, I doubt Alexander is a baby, anymore.”

Ed commented, “Possibly. And Alexander could be a handful, by himself.”

Lori responded, “I agree. Let's just hope we don't get mixed up in this mess.”

Ed said, “Yes. I would prefer it is we just watched.”

Lori commented, “Honey, you are preaching to the choir.” She then thought, 'I am glad that Irene and Leona are not here, right now. Because, I don't want to explain to them what is going on. Still, I will have to tell Lewis what is going on, when he gets finished with his date with Irene.'

'Speaking of which, I hope their date goes well for both of them. And at least they are not having their date anywhere near the casino, Devil's Hotel, nor the Rats Nest bar.'

'Though, I will find out, later. For now, I need to held back to my job.'

Lori then went back to waiting, and cleaning, tables.

Nearby, Rico and Stan heard Ed and Lori's comments. Though, they did not comment on the matter. But, as they continued going back to their work, they thought about the news they had just heard.

(_)

Back in the main security room of Daiyu Palace Casino, Jayne put away his cellphone.

Jayne continued to watch the Chang, River, and Lee, Mal, Zoe, along with the Xanatos family, on the monitors on the wall, as he thought, 'At least Bob explained what was going on. And I will just have to be careful, and keep an eye on what is currently happening on the game floor.'

Wash asked, “So, what is it?”

Jayne turned to look at Wash, with Wash looking back at him.

Jayne stated, “Well, those people are some major players, from another reality. And it is best if we just let the others handle them. So, grab a seat. This is going to be a long night.”

Wash replied, “Thanks for letting me know.”

Jayne said, “You're welcome. And it is good have you back.”

Wash stated, “Good to be back. By the way, did I hear right. That you are going drinking Thursday night, as woman?”

Jayne said, “Long story on that one. But, it is not what you think.”

Wash commented, “At this point. For both of us. And our family and friends. There are likely very few mysteries when it comes to either gender.”

Jayne stated, “From am a physical standpoint. I guess so. But, from an emotional standpoint. There is still plenty of mystery. In a lot of ways, I am still a very simple person. In either gender. And that is also the case for me in best.”

Wash teased, “Don't tell me your cheap?”

Jayne said, “No. I just don't play games, like our friends do.”

Wash commented, “You always were simple in that way. So, you have done it in both forms?”

Jayne retorted, “Like you haven’t done with Zoe, both ways, for both of you.”

Wash replied, “Good point. And you would be correct.” Wash cracked a grin, as he continued, “You know I haven't seen your female form.”

Jayne responded, “And I have not seen your female form.” He playfully went onto say, “How about, you show me yours. I will show you mine.”

Wash chuckled a little. He then said, “Maybe later”

Jayne inquired, “That would be fine. So, are you ever going to give us the details on what you were up to for the last several years, as you grew up?”

Wash coyly replied, “Sometime. When I have permission for my parents.”

Jayne said, “Fair enough. And I hope you are not keeping these secrets from your wife.”

Wash stated, “I am not. And Zoe knows to keep quiet.”

Jayne suggested, “Good. Now, let's got back to watching what is going on, concernining these special guests.”

Wash agreed, “Good idea.”

Jayne and Wash then walked over to a couple of the workstations, set downs the wall with the monitors. They each sat down in a chair, as they continued to monitor the situation.

(_)

Fortunately, events went smoothly that night at the casino. About a half hour of playing at the roulette table, the Xanatos moved to one of the dice tables. Later on, they tried their hand at some of the card games, as well.

An hour after the Xanatos family had started gambling, Takenaka had finished his job of planting his electronic bugs, and he then slipped out of the casino, unnoticed, except for the Xanatos family, whom noticed him leave, as scheduled.

Two hours after Takenaka left, the Xanatos family called it a night. They exchanged their poker chips for money. And they found they had broke even for the night.

During this time, Chang was professional enough to say good night to the Xanatos family, and have their limo waiting for them, under the awning, outside the front entrance.

When they reached the front entrance, Puck redeemed the ticket stub, from valet that head the keys to the limo. Once Puck had the keys, he used the clicked on his keyring to make sure the doors were unlocked. After which, he opened the back door of the limo, which faced them. That being the right side of the vehicle.

After David and Fox entered the limo from the back, Puck closed the door behind them. He then walked around to the front left driver door. He opened the door and got in. Next, he closed the door, started the engine, and gently drove out of the parking lot of the casino, and into the streets of Plata Podrido.

With the Xanatos family gone, River and Lee had decided head up to the penthouse to get some sleep.

Meanwhile, Chang stayed downstairs, with Mal, Zoe, and Spike, until Jayne called Chang, on Chang's cellphone, to inform Chang that Wash and him had tracked an outbound reality jump, which they guessed was the Xanatos family.

Chang stated he believed that was the case. He then turned Mal and Zoe, as he kept his cellphone turned on. Chang ordered that his security team to assign some personnel to do some security sweep of the first floor. Just to be sure that everything was fine. And that he, Mal, and Zoe, would have a meeting, sometime in the middle of the morning of the next day. To talk about what happened that night.

Mal said that would not be a problem.

Chang then used his cellphone to contact Annie and Arcee. He informed them that the Xanatos family was gone, and everything was back to normal.

Chang then put up his cellphone, and he head up to the penthouse, to get some sleep, as well.

(_)

Meanwhile, at the Devil's Hotel restaurant, twenty minutes after Alex had first arrived in the restaurant, the party was in full swing, with dancing and music.

There had been several songs played and a lot of fun had.

And the party had evolved into a massive conga line on the floor, with the present customers, and staff, being a part of it. And Alex was at the front of conga line, with maracas in his hands, while he had a wonderful time.

But, Alex could sense that the song was winding down, and so what his spell that kept it all together.

Alex continued dancing, and directing the conga line, between the tables, as he thought, 'While I am having a ball, I really need to cut this short. I wonder if this is how Cinderella felt like at midnight. And while everyone is having a good time. Most of it is the magic. And I can only compel people to act in the way I want for so long. Though, since I just had people dance and have a good, casual time. I doubt any of them will have any hard feelings over the matter. Now, to end this.'

The music then started its downward tempo in ending, Alex stopped the conga line. He then put away his maracas, back into this belt.'

Next, Alex took a step from the crowd, with the women behind him letting go of his waist. He then took a few more steps, before he turned around, to face the crowd.

Alex calmly said, “See you later.” He then took a bow.

A second later, Alex instantly disappear from sight, as the song came to an end.

Then, it was as if a mental veil had been lifted over everyone, with everyone coming to their senses, as the conga line fell apart.

Kristina asked, “What just happen?”

Yurika said, ““I think we just got played. Big time.”

Sarah commented, “At least it was in a fun way.”

Molly agreed, “True.”

Nearby, Eda commented, “Aeryn and Violin are not going to believe what just happened.”

Lotton pointed out, “The important part is that the kids are with them. Out of harms way. And not here.”

Shenhua stated, “Yes. Much to our relief.”

Sawyer said, “It is good they were none of them were present for this.”

Shenhua replied, “I agree.” A thought then occurred to her, as she turned to Revy. She coyly asked, “Revy. Is everything still fine, upstairs?”

Revy turned to Shenhua. She understood what Shenhua meant by her question. Revy answered, “Yea. I am fine. And all me.” She thought, 'I can sense that my Jack persona is still sealed.'

Shenhua said, “Good.” She thought, 'My memories of Barbossa are sealed.'

Yolanda looked around, as she stated, “At least, no one seems to be upset.”

Nearby, Roberta said, “That's good.”

Revy stated, “I am still annoyed that boy could pull a trick on us, like that, so easily.” She thought, 'And it has only been hours sense Jack was sealed. If I had still be Jack, with that boy here. Things could have turned really bad. With the things I would have suggested to the boy might want to try with his powers.'

Akira responded, in an offhanded manner, “Oh, come on, Revy. You have admit it was fun.”

Revy said, “I will put this way. I am not angry about what happened.” She thought, 'I am just upset that I have had my mind played with twice in one day. The most upsetting part, is that I enjoy both times that this has happened, today. Though, with some many customers here. I cannot make a scene, without people asking questions. And there are secrets I have that I would rather not be made public.'

Akira casually replied, “Well, that is good.”

Natsuru said, “It is nice that kid has good taste in music, or there might have been problems.”

Ranma commented, “I am just surprised that everyone could stay in beat with each other.”

Revy inquired, “So, how could he get all of us to go along with him so quickly? And so easily?”

Eda commented, “Well, most likely, that was magic the boy used on us.”

Dutch said, “Obviously.”

Lotton stated, “I will give that boy props. Jim Carrey's The Mask, is one of my favorite films. And that Cuban Pete scene, with the cops, was a classic.”

Sawyer said, “And it nice to meet someone who knows how to really dance and sing.”

Shenhua asked, “Should we tell Chang, and the others at the casino, about this?”

Rock stated, “Oh yes... But, we will call Mal tomorrow morning. Because if this happened to us. There is a good chance something happening at the casino, right now.”

Dutch suggested, “Should we head over there?”

Rock answered, “No. If they cannot handle such a situation. No one can.” She mentally reflected, 'And with magic, that boy had us. Like putty in his hands. We are just extremely lucky that all he wanted to do was have a little harmless fun.'

Benny asked, “So, who was that boy?”

Rock stated, “I think I know who it is. But, I want to check with Mal, and Chang, first.” She thought, 'If I am right, then it is likely Chang and the others will be having their hands full tonight with that boy's parents.'

Janet agreed, “Good idea.”

Mikoto stated, “Waiting till tomorrow morning will all us time to clear our heads.”

Rock agreed, “Exactly.”

Nodoka asked, “Still, why would that boy pulls such a trick on us, of all people?”

Revy deadpanned, “That's obvious. He said it was a test. He knows who we are and he wants to see if he could get away with pulling off such a stunt on us.”

Ranma commented, “Well, considering no one was harmed. I would suggest we let what he did go. We had some fun. And I have been through much worse with magic. This is just a mild taste, when compared to some of the things I have been through.”

Dutch stated, “I agree with Ranma. There is not much we can do. Besides, he clearly likes us. And I really don't want to piss off someone that can make us dance on command, and have us like doing so.”

Benny said, “It was the, liking, part that I could not get.”

Janet stated, “Me, neither.”

Benny commented, “But, I am with Dutch on this.”

Janet agreed, “Same here.”

Revy said, “Alright. I will let things be.”

Ranma replied, “Good.”

Rock looked around and saw the other customers in the room, whom were not part of her family and friends, talking amongst themselves.

Rock thought, 'There were so many witnesses to this. That this is not good. I need to speak to someone about this.'

Rock then noticed Melanie nearby, with Melanie looked at her.

Rock thought, “She'll do.' She asked, “Melanie. What about everyone else that is here during this event? There might be questions.”

Melanie answered, “I doubt it. Weird stuff like this occasionally happens in Plata Podrido. Even before your group showed up. Since no one has been hurt. By tomorrow morning. Not many people are going to talk much about this, nor ask many questions. As such, it will likely be completely swept under the rug within a week.”

Rock replied, “Well, that is good.”

Melanie commented, “I know. Though, I do now need to deal with the crowd.”

Melanie then looked around the room, at the crowd, as she stated, in a loud tone of voice, “Okay everyone. Since no one was hurt. We are just going to go back to what we are doing, and continue the night like normal. Alright?”

Everyone quieted down, as they turned to look at Melanie. Though, no one responded

After a few seconds of silence, Melanie continued, “Good. Now, to help settle everyone's nerves. I am offering a free beer to anyone that wants it. Just let your waitress know.”

That was a mild cheering, as customers went back to their tables, and the staff went back to their jobs.

A few minutes later, karaoke singing resumed, with Benny being next in line.

Eventually, everyone called it a night, paid their bar tabs and tips. Then, they left to get some sleep for the night.

(_)

Reality, Gargoyles reality. Date, Saturday, October seventieth, two thousand nine. Place, the dining room of Castle Wyvern, on top of Xanatos Enterprises Tower, in New York City. Time, morning.

It was hours passed dawn, in the morning. The Gargoyles living in the castle, had long since turned back to stone for the day.

David, Fox, and Alex Xanatos sat around the dining room table, having breakfast, which was served by Puck, in a conventional, none magical way.

While Puck was a magical being, he preferred to prepare, and cook the meals he served the Xanatos family, by hand. He found it to be more professional, and he enjoyed cooking. And he did not want such skills, he had, to get rusty, in case he lost his powers again.

This morning, Puck had prepared a simple breakfast for the Xanatos family. With scrambled eggs, toast, a selection of jellies, an assortment of sliced fruits, and an assortment of a dozen fresh bagels, that Puck had ordered in from a nearby bakery in New York City.

To drink, Alex had a glass of orange juice, while both David and Fox each had a cup of coffee, and a glass of ice water.

Everyone present had already had a good night's sleep. With them dressed and ready for the day. Along with this, Alex did not have to worry about school, given it was a Saturday morning.

As they ate their breakfast, and sipped their drinks, they were having a casual conversation on various topics.

Fox took a sip of her coffee. She then set her cup down, on the table, as she commented, “I am pleasantly surprised that none of the others of the castle asked where we went last night.”

David calmly stated, “Let's not look a gift horse in the mouth.” He thought, 'Though, I have begun to wonder why none of them had asked why Puck has started staying as Puck, for the most part. Not that I am going to mention that out loud. Goliath and the others are very sharp. They must be wondering about that binding spell on Puck, that they don't know is now broken. Still, they won't address an issue unless it becomes a problem.'

Fox shrugged, as she replied, “Perhaps.” She then noticed Puck coming by with a pot of coffee, to refill her glass. She turned to Puck, as she asked, “Well, Puck. I have been meaning to ask you. How did your little conversation go, with those two women, at the casino?”

Puck came to a stop be Fox. He used the coffee pot he held, with his right hand, by the handled, to refill Fox's cup of coffee. Not a single dropped spill, as he did so.

Puck then held the pot back up, as he answered, “It was very enjoyable. Those two women clearly know a thing or about trickery.”

Fox commented, “Coming from you, that is a high compliment.”

Puck replied, “Yes. And I hope to visit them again, some time.” He the headed to attend to David and Alex.

Fox offered, “We might be able to make arrangements for that.”

David stated, “Yes. We don't mind you making new friends. Now, onto another matters.” He turned to his son, as he inquired, “So, Alex how was you evening, yesterday? You mother would not tell me what you had planned. But, I trust it was interesting.”

Alex responded, “Oh, it was. Do you remember that dance scene I liked, in the comedy movie, The Mask?”

David replied, “Yes.”

Puck came to a stop. He turned to Alex, as he accused, “You didn't.”

Alex cracked a grin, as he admitted, “I did.”

Fox commented, “As a trickster, Puck. I would believe that you would appreciate what he did?”

Puck responded, “I admit. That movie was entertaining. And a good primer on trickery. But, there are just some things one does not do, unless absolutely necessary.”

David calmly thought, 'And that is why you are Alex's teacher, Puck. When it comes to magic. You understand the responsibility that comes with such power. And you have kept that power from corrupting my son. By showing him ways to use it, that are harmless fun, but still useful. Now, to find out how foolish Alex has been.'

David turned to Alex, as he calmly asked, “What did you do, son?”

Alex looked over at his father, as he stated, in a slightly prideful tone of voice, “I followed you three to that reality you went to, last night. I spent twenty minutes there. Though, instead of going to the casino, I went to the restaurant in the Devil's Hotel, on the other side of the island. There I met those Black Lagoon women. Among others. Whom I read about in those computer files you have. Concerning them.”

“And then, I had the karaoke machine start playing, Cuban Pete, and a few other songs. While we sang and danced. We even did a conga line, together. Where I was in the front. Eventually, I literally disappeared, before the spell fully ran its course.”

David could not believe what he had just heard, as he flatly asked, in a tone of disbelief, “You did what?”

Alex responded, in a casual tone of voice, “Relax, dad. I didn't do anything to bad. And everyone had some fun. It was a basic mind trick spell, is all. And all they did was dance and sing a little. So, I should be fine...” He turned to his mother, Fox, as he continued, “I mean, I talked to mother, before I did it. And even mom here said it was okay for me to do this.”

David turned to Fox, as he flatly asked, “Fox?”

Fox turned to her husband, David, as she calmly answered, “I believe our son needs to learn how to handle strong women. So, I gave him my blessing for his plan.”

David stated, with serious tone of voice, with a hint of worry to his tone, “While, I agree that our son needs to learn that lesson. I do not consider taunting some of the most dangerous women in the multiverse as wise way to do so. It is not wise to upset such women.”

Fox shrugged, as she calmly responded, “You may have a point there. But, what is done, is done.”

David sighed, as he thought, 'I am not going to win this discussion.' He turned to Alex, as he requested, “Fine. But, next time, Alex, talk to me, before you decide to do something like this. I do not want you to get hurt.”

Alex turned to his father, as he said, “I understand. And I promise I will.”

David replied, “Thank you, son.”

The Xanatos family then continued on their conversation for another half hour, before they finished their meals, and went about the rest of their day, occurring to the schedules they had set for themselves.

(_)

Reality, Pedro and Lee's reality. Date, Wednesday, morning after the Xanatos visit to Plata Podrido, Mexico. Place, Chang office on the penthouse floor of the Daiyu Palace Casino. Time, middle of the morning.

It was around the middle of the morning, as Chang, Mal, and Zoe, held a private security meeting, in Chang's office. They were discussing the events of the previous day. Mostly concerning the Xanatos family.

Chang had decided to wait until the middle of the morning, to allow for all three of them to have a good night's sleep, with plenty of time to get ready for the meeting.

Chang sat in his chair, behind his desk. In front of Chang's desk, Zoe sat in the chair to his right, with Mal sitting in the chair to his left.

Due to this being a private meeting, the door to Chang's office was closed. Which was unusual for Chang.

The first part of their meeting had covered what Chang was present for. Now, they were talking about anything else on the matters pertaining to last night.

Chang calmly asked, “So, are there any other items that I not know about?”

Zoe answered, “Two items of note.”

Chang questioned, “What is the first one?”

Zoe stated, “This morning, Rock called the casino security. It seems they had a run in with someone last night. And they guessed something may have happened here, as well. Which is why they call us, instead of you, directly.”

Chang complimented, “Rock has always had sharp instincts on these matters. So, what happened?”

Zoe said, “I did not get all the details, but a teenage boy, with fair skin, and orange hair, cause them some minor trouble. He seems to display magical abilities, and he escaped.”

Chang commented, “So, that was where the son was. At least, we now know where he was during that time.” He thought, 'And Alex is not a teenager. Though, he must either still be immature, or crazy, to try something with those women. And given his age, and his teacher is Puck. It could be either possibility.'

Chang stated, “That was likely Alexander Xanatos. Also, known as, Alex. He is David and Fox's son. And it seems that he has grown some, since we last heard of him. Which only makes that situation more dangerous.”

Mal asked, “Should we be concerned about him?”

Chang answered, “No. Whatever he did over there, must have not been that serious. Or, we would have heard more than just a phone call from Rock. Alexander likely just did that out of pure fun. With no one harmed. Did you informed Rock of what happened last night at the casino?”

Zoe replied, “No. I figured it would be best for you to handle informing them.”

Chang said, “Thank you. And I will take care of it, later.” He thought, 'I will call Rock later, and talk to her over the matter. I will tell her what happened last night with us. And we will compare notes.'

Chang requested, “And the other matter?”

Mal said, “In our sweeps, last night, our security teams turned up some electronic bugs on the gaming floor, and restaurant.”

Chang inquired, “Why was I not notified sooner?”

Mal stated, “We only just finished our sweeps an hour ago. And it also took a little time to back track on the cameras, and find out who was responsible for planting those bugs, last night. And that person is long gone. And the bugs taken care of. There was no urgency to inform you sooner.”

Chang said, “Fair enough. So, who is this person?”

Mal pulled out his cellphone, from a pocket, and he then selected picture. He handed his cellphone, across the desk, to Chang.

As Chang took Mal's cellphone and looked at the picture of a man, in a gray suit, on it, Mal stated, “We took this photo from the security cameras. The person in question is a middle-aged japanese man. We have yet to identify him. They only thing we do know, is he is good at this. And he has clearly done this before. He slipped in during the commotion with the Xanatos family. He then played a few hands of cards, and had a few drinks, as he slowly worked his way around the gaming floor, and restaurant.”

“He also had a casual, relaxed demeanor about himself. Which even fooled Faye and Spike were fooled. Once he was finished planting his electronic bugs, he did even bother to cash out his chips. He just walked out the front door.”

“And even the electronic bugs are interesting. They were pre-programed not to turn on for a number of hours, after he left. So, there would be less chance the sensors on the gaming floor would pick up the tiny machines. At least, while he was there.”

“And these bugs are not just audio recorders. The techs are having a field day with them.”

“On top of quality audio recording, these bugs can scan through the furniture and walls. The detail of the scans can tell, in detail, who is who. Along with the audio recording, together, the recordings could identify us, and record our schedules, for those that come and go from the gaming floor and restaurant.”

“In addition, the bugs designed to record, but only broadcast, all together, in a single, data burst, at the same time. A few days from now. We guess that whomever planted them, would show up them.”

“The problem is that these bugs broadcast on a frequency that we have problems tracing. Also, it is a long range signal. So, even if they return, they will likely not be on this island. And we cannot trace them.”

“This was clearly first step, in a long term plan to breach our security. Learn our routine for one section, so next time, they could breach further into the casino.”

“Whomever this man is. He is a pro. He knows what he is doing. And he is very likely working for someone with deep pockets, and interesting resources.”

Chang continued to look at the picture, on Mal's cellphone, as he commented, “These guys are smoother than we thought. That is Masahiro Takenaka. He is from my reality. He is one of the few people to have a brush with both Revy and Rock, and live.” He mentally reflected, 'Considering, after I took over Roanapur, he was one of the few I was interested in, that escaped my hunters. I always wondered what happened to him. Now, I know. And I am glad he is still in the game. Also, from this picture, he is looking great.'

Chang then handed Mal back his cellphone. Mal took his cellphone, and he put it back into the pocket, that he had pulled it from.

Zoe asked, “Who is this, Mashahiro Takenaka?”

Chang turned to Zoe and Mal, as he stated, “A communist terrorist from Japan, that ran from his homeland, and into exile. He eventually became a freelance spy and mercenary. I always wondered what happened to him. Now, I know.”

Mal inquired, “Do you think he is connected with the Xanatos family?”

Chang flatly answered, “Oh, hell, yes. While I know it is hard to believe. I wouldn't be surprised, that last night, the Xanatos family used themselves as a distraction, towards us, so we would be so caught up in handling them, that Takenaka could sneak in, plant his electronic bugs, and sneak out, without us realizing it. And their plan work, perfectly. And I would expect nothing less from the Xanatos family.”

“Though, they probably didn't take into account that we regularly sweep for electronic bugs. And after that robbery, two days ago, we have beefed up security. Including, how often we do those sweeps.”

Chang though, 'If robbery had not happened. It could have been weeks until we spotted those bugs. So, it seems that robbery was actually fortuitous for us.'

Mal thought, 'I have never seen both Zoe and Chang so concerned about potential enemies. That worries me.' He asked, “Are the Xanatos family really this diabolical?”

Zoe and Chang turned to Mal, as they answered, almost in unison, “Yes.”

Zoe said, “Captain... Mal... The Xanatos family are one of the few groups that I doubt even River, Annie, Roberta, and Arcee, working together, could take then down in a fight.”

Chang agreed, “Zoe is not joking. They are that formidable.”

Mal hesitantly said, “Okay. They are dangerous.” He thought, 'I will have to watch that Gargoyles series, then. Again. I guess I should have paid attention, that time the Lowe family loaned up their copy, to watch on the Serenity. Though, I will admit. While I did not care for the series, the rest of the crew did. Chang had fun rewatching it. Jayne and Zoe both commented they considered it interesting. Kaylee and River said they enjoyed it. And Simon commented that it was worth a watch.'

Chang stated, “Exactly. The Xanatos family never do something on the spur of the moment. They will always have a plan. Which means the we are now caught up in a Xanatos gambit, by the very people whom invented the concept of a Xanatos gambit.”

Mal thought, 'I may as well ask.' He inquired, “Given how knowledgeable Lee has. What is Lee's opinion on the Xanatos family?”

Chang said, “Lee has on occasion, called David Xanatos the Master of Gambits. After all, the Xanatos gambit is named after David Xanatos. And Fox, Puck, and likely David and Fox's son, Alex, are just as good as David is, at playing this type of game.”

Mal asked, “Then, how should we proceed?”

Chang answered, “Very cautiously. These people are all about plans, moves, and counter moves. They are one of the few people that could probably out think Lee on working the angles. And Lee even admitted that to me.”

Mal thought, 'Considering, if she wanted to, Lee can play us like a fiddle. This is bad. Very bad.' He suggested, “If they truly are that dangerous. Perhaps, we should head to their home reality, and investigate them further?”

Chang flatly stated, “No. While they are one of the more dangerous groups and individuals, in that reality. For all the dangers the Xanatos family present. They are pragmatic. They possibly realize how dangerous reality travel would be, in the wrong hands. And as such, they have likely kept the secret of reality travel from their contemporaries, in their home reality.”

“Where as, there are other, dangerous individuals, in their home reality, whom would likely become very destructive. On a genocidal level. If they gained reality travel technology, and the benefits such technology could afford one to have.”

Zoe thought, as she realized, 'Demona would likely be at the top that list. Still, there is something else we can do.' She said, “I suggest we have all the security staff, and upper management, see the Gargoyles series, as soon as possible.”

Chang stated, “I agree. I have the original english copy of the series on the casino computers. For just this occasion. We will pull some copies from there.”

Zoe thought, 'Intelligent thinking, Chang.'

Mal thought, 'At least, I don't have to embarrass myself, in asking for a copy.'

Zoe went onto say, “I will also start working on a basic profiles on each of the Xanatos family members. Their known history. Their abilities. Their known family, friends, and associates. I should have a file for the security staff, and the upper management, by this evening.”

Chang complimented, “Good idea. Because, until we learn more about what their plans are. And who their allies are. All we can do right now is keep our guard up. And I do not like playing defensive. I do not like that at all.”

To be continued.

Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 6: “The Mexican, The Lawyer, And The Mechanic.”

Volume 2: “The Villains.”

Chapter 04: “Bikers, Babes, And Hoverbikes.”

By Paul Cousins.

Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.

(_)

Reality, unknown, those on a modern Earth. Date, sometime in the very early twenty-first century. Place, somewhere in the United States, in a hotel, during a sci-fi convention. Time, mid morning.

It was the middle of the morning at the hotel that was hosting a sci-fi convention.

The sci-fi convention was full swing, while in the hotel restaurant, Fabiola, Leigharch, Matthew, Pedro, and Matt, were sitting around a table, as they finished the breakfast they had eaten.

They were all dressed in their usual, casual clothing.

The last few months had been interesting for this group of five adult badasses. With their ups, downs, and close calls. But, they were always about to get away, just in time.

And they finally were able to achieve some downtime, and they were using this time to help two members of their team. Matt and Leigharch.

The group of five were were in this reality, at this sci-fi convention, for very specific reasons. They had come to the convention, to purchase a copy of the first sixty-five episodes of the Gargoyles animated series, and the first three seasons of the Black Lagoon animated series. So, Matt and Leigharch could see their own series.

Fortunately, due to selling some gold, Pedro had enough money to rent five rooms for a few nights, along with their meals, and other items.

At they sat around the table, Fabiola asked, “So, are you guys ready to do this?”

Leigharch replied, “Of course.”

Matt replied, “Sure. Though, from the size of the series, it is going to take at least a couple of day, or so, to watch it.”

Matthew commented, “Don't worry, we will wait for you.”

Pedro inquired, “Are your copies and video equipment already in your rooms? Hooked up, and ready to play?”

Leigharch said, “Yea.”

Matt answered, “Yes.”

Pedro mentioned, “Good. I even arranged so you can order in, when you are hungry. We will meet back here for breakfast at nine. Lunch at noon. And dinner at six. So, when you get finished. Just meet back here, to find us. And don't worry about what we will be doing. We will be enjoying the convention.”

Matthew looked over at Pedro, as he thought, 'Yea. Pedro is a fanboy, And he is likely enjoying being here. Though so am I.' He turned to look at Fabiola, as he continued his thoughts, 'And while Fabiola prefers to hide it. I can tell that she is as much a fangirl, as I and Pedro, are fan boys.'

Leigharch said, “I got it.”

Matt replied, “Okay. I understand.” Matt turned to Fabiola, as he asked, “So, what are you going to do? I have a feeling this isn't your scene.”

Fabiola looked over at Matt, as she said, “Not usually. But, among us, I am likely going the get most out of this convention. I am going to in enter the cosplay contest, as myself.”

Matthew pointed out, “Just don't be upset if you lose. Keep in mind, those that have seen the series, saw you as a teenager, not an adult. You might lose for being an adult, and not your younger self.”

Fabiola replied, in a halfhearted tone of voice, “I didn't think of that.”

Matt suggested, “Actually, now that I think about it. You will be fine. Just dress in a maids outfit, that can still show your figure, while remaining tasteful. And do some gymnastics. With your boyshorts on. So, there is no accident peepshows. As long as you keep your footing, you will get first place.”

Fabiola said, “Thanks. I think I will do that. Also, keep in mind that watching your series can mentally mess you up. I have seen that first hand.”

Leigharch inquired, “How bad could it be?”

Fabiola stated, “I was present when Garcia and Roberta watched our series. I handled watching the series well. Though, they didn't. And I had to deal with the fallout of helping Annie, after she watched all six Star Wars movies.”

Matt inquired, “How did Annie take it? I can only imagine her anger.”

Fabiola responded, “Quite the opposite, She completely broke down into tears. I had to do a lot of hugging, and verbal comforting, to help calm her down enough, to stop crying.” She thought, 'As you will find out, when you read book two of Lee's stories.'

Matt said, “I can see that. And not because of the gender bending.”

Fabiola stated, “I am glad you realize that.”

Leigharch questioned, “Speaking of Annie. Didn't you guys say that only the prequel trilogy happened to her? Not the original trilogy?”

Fabiola turned to Leigharch, as she commented, “Yes. But, she saw what would have happened, if she had not been taken. And she didn't take that news very well. Mainly because she found out she would never make up for what she did.”

Leigharch replied, “Yea. That could do it.”

Fabiola agreed, “Uh huh. It took a few hours for me to calm her down. And that is a good lesson of how seeing yourself from a different point of view can mess with your head.”

Matt stated, “I will keep that in mind. I doubt I have much to worry about. Not a lot happened to me.”

Fabiola turned to Matt. She shrugged, as she replied, “You are right about that.”

Leigharch commented, “And from what you all told me. I was just a bit character anyway.”

Pedro stated, “We prefer the term, dark horse. While you did not get much screen time, you were very memorable.”

Leigharch turned to Pedro. He smiled, as he replied, “Thank you. Then, I look forward to seeing myself.”

Matthew looked at Leigharch, as he said, “You will probably get a laugh out of seeing yourself, completely out of it, while having the time of your life.” He turned to Matt, as he commented, “And you will likely gain greater insight into your friends and foes.”

Matt turned to Matthew, as he said, “That is what I hope to learn.” Matt got out of his chair, as he stated, “Well, I guess I better get going.”

Leigharch got up from his chair, as he said, “Same here. No time like the present.”

Pedro commented, “I will take care of the bill and tip.”

Leigharch said, “Thank you.”

Matt replied, “I appreciate it.”

Fabiola stated, “Well, have fun. Or, lack there of. We will talk about it, when you two get finished.”

Matt said, “I look forward to.”

Leigharch commented, “I always enjoy talking about so topic. See you.”

Matt and Leigharch turned and headed out of the restaurant, and for their own suites. While Pedro, Matthew, and Fabiola, had fun at the convention.

(_)

Around five minutes later, Matt used his key card to open his door to his suite. He then entered his suite.

He closed the door behind him, and he put away his key card. The curtains to the window were closed, so there was no other light than from room, except for what escaped around the edges of the curtains. Still, that was enough light to make it to his bed, where he turned on the electric lamp on the nightstand by his bed.

Matt then turned to his chest of draws. On top of it was a flat screen TV, which a blu-ray player hook to it. And by the blu-ray player was a few boxes of DVDs of the first two seasons of Gargoyles.

Matt continue to look at those items, as he thought, 'I might as well get this done. Leigharch is doing the same thing in his room, right now. '

'Still, we could not find the comics here. At least, watching the series will help a lot. Since season three didn't happen to me. There is no point in seeing it. Besides, I barely have the time to watch what I do have. And the reason we didn't get Leigharch the Black Lagoon manga is because he is not that big a reader. And those manga volumes take a while to read.'

'Now, watching this series could be interesting for me.'

Matt then walked over, turned on the TV and blu-ray play. Opened the boxes, and put in the first disc of the Gargoyles series. He then closed the disc tray. Next, he picked up both the blu-ray and tv remotes, as he turned he walked back over to see on his bed.

As he sat down on the foot of his bed, the disc loads.

A few minutes later, Matt selected through the disc options, as he started watching the five part Awakening pilot of the series.

After Matt finished the five part series, he thought, 'That was pretty good. And that explains how they ended up in New York City.'

A few episodes later he reached the Deadly Force episode. After watching it, he thought, 'So, that is how Broadway accidentally shot Elisa. That explains a lot.'

A couple of episodes later, he reached, the episode, The Edge, which introduced him in the series.

As Matt watched his younger self on screen, he thought, 'Was I ever that young?' At the end of the episode, he thought, 'I really should not have been surprised that David stole the Eye of Odin back from the city. That is very Machiavellian of him.'

When he reached the episode, Metamorphosis, he mentally grumbled, 'David Xanatos can be a real SOB for doing that to Derek, Maggie, Claw, and even Fang.'

As he watched the episode, The Mirror, he thought, 'So, the entire city turning into Gargoyles, myself included, was not my imagination. Also, what Puck did to Demona was funny, and poetic. To bad it didn't temper her hatred of humanity.'

'Still, back then, we all noticed that Elisa and Goliath did have feeling for each others. I am glad they finally admitted to each other, years ago.'

While he watched the episode, Eye Of The Beholder, playfully thought, 'Oh, the teasing I am going to give Elisa for that princess costume, she wore. And she certainly looks nice in it. Though, I am going to first have to figure out an excuse on how I know she has that costume. Maybe, I will just say I saw an old photo, of her in that costume, with her dancing with Goliath, that someone let me see. That might work. They did dance out in public, on the street. And it is partly true.'

After watching the next episode, Vows, he thought, 'David really does take time travel to the extreme. Still, that ending makes me wonder. With the past Goliath splitting the Phoenix Gate medallion in half, and giving it to Demona, with the scene panning to show the clock toward. I wonder, was that just either the symbolism of time they spent with each other? Or, was it an animation error? I will ask Pedro, later. Either way, it was a nice way to end the episode.'

Matt looked at the clock in his room, and he saw that it was well passed lunch time.

Matt paused the series, as he thought, 'Well, I am kind of hungry. Now, to get something to eat.'

Matt then used the phone in his room to order in some food, and drinks.

After which, Matt resumed watching the Gargoyles series.

Half an hour later, the food and drink order was delivered to his suite.

A little while later, after the bellhop had come to take the food cart back, Matt finished the four part City of Stone episodes, he thought, 'Okay. I will admit it. Demona is one messed up woman. Though, she is also coldblooded to murder all those people she turned to stone.'

After he finished watching the episode, Highnoon, 'Okay. So Elisa, that was went you learned that Demona turned human during the day. At least you told us, soon after.'

When Matt each the episode, Revelations, which dealt with his meeting with Mace Malone, and his former FBI partner, Martin Hacker, he thought, 'Well, that does answer a few more questions I had on that matter. But, not many.'

Then, he watched the episode, Double Jeopardy. He thought, 'Well, that explains the background on how Thailog came to be. And this is one of the few times that David is willing to admit he made a mistake.'

After a few more episodes, he reached the Avalon episode trilogy, he mentally reflected, 'I have to admit that the Archmage was pretty clever to figure out how to bend the rules, instead of break them. And those episodes explain how Angela and her siblings ended up on Avalon. I wonder what happened to Tom's mother, Mary? Still, that is a mystery for another time.'

When it was supper time, Matt ordered in, as he continued to watch the series.

By the time Matt made it half way through the Avalon tour, it had gotten late, and Matt turned in for the night.

The next morning, after Matt got cleaned up, and had some breakfast, which he had ordered in, he soon resumed watched the Gargoyles series.

By the time he reached the two part Gathering episode, it was the middle of the afternoon, and he ordered in some lunch.

By the time he had finished the Gathering episodes, his lunch order had arrived.

As Matt ate lunch, while he watched the beginning of the next episode, Vendettas, he thought, 'While I did find out Puck was Owen, a few years later, it was clear the rest of them, including Elisa knew, much earlier. Not that I am going to hold it over them. Considering, I now know about this series. And I am watching it. Still, I do find that slightly annoying.'

'Though, now I know the events surrounding Alex's birth, and the reasons behind David eventually offering Goliath and his clan to move back into Castle Wyvern, and why Goliath eventually accepted.'

'Still, my one question is on those events is. Where did they get that harpoon-gun from? Was that David's order his father's harpoon-gun? Petros Xanatos' harpoon-gun? It is likely Petros' weapon, considering David likes to think of himself as high class. And he would probably consider such a weapon would be a little lowbrow for himself. Still, if it is Petros' harpoon-gun. When did he bring it with him?... Hmm... A question for another time.'

At the end of the Vendettas episode, he saw Vinnie give Golaith a cream pie to his face, he thought, 'Okay. That was funny. And the icing on the cake was that the guy got away with it.'

When Matt finished watched the episode Reckoning, he though, 'When I found about about Dililah, I was shocked that someone was cross the DNA of Elisa with Demona. Though, I have nothing against Dililah herself. She is a nice woman. And I wish her and the other clones, except for Thailog, the best. Still, I find what Thailog did in creating Dililah, to be disgusting, and a major violation, in so many areas.'

Soon after, Matt reached the series finale. The Hunter's Moon trilogy.

As the video stopped playing, and Matt finished watched the series, he thought, 'Well, that kiss at the end was nice touch. And all in all, that was a good series. I can see why the others are fans of this series. And I now have a lot of questions answered. Still, that series was just an appetizer to what happened over the next thirteen years.'

'Perhaps, I will tell the others about some of what happened over those years. But, that is for later. And now that I am done, I need to know what time it is?'

Matt looked over at the clock to see that it was six PM on the dot.

Matt happily continued his thoughts, 'And just in time to meet up with the others, for dinner. At least the Black Lagoon series is far shorter than my series. So, I know I am the only one holding things up. As such, I better head down there, and meet with them.'

Matt then got up, turned off everything in his room, and then left his suite, for the restaurant.

(_)

A few minutes later, Matt made it to the restaurant, and he immediately saw Pedro, Fabiola, Matthew, and Leigharch, sitting in the same table he had left them, a day ago.

All of them were dressed in their casual clothing.

As Matt approached them, they turned to look at him.

Pedro said, in a kind tone of voice, “Welcome back, Matt. How was your viewing experience?”

By then, Matt had reached the table. As he sat down in an empty chair, he answered, “Splendid. There is much I want to talk about.”

Pedro responded, “Well, I am sure we all look forward to answering your questions.”

Matthew mentioned, “Also, you are just in time. We haven't even ordered our drinks, yet.”

Matt replied, “Good.”

Leigharch said, “Still, we were wondering when you would get finished.”

Matt responded, “Well, I am done. Thought, before we talk about this. I do have a question, for Fabiola.” He turned to looked at Fabiola, as he asked, “So, how was your contest Fabiola?”

Fabiola warmly smiled at Matt, as she answered, in a cheerful tone of voice, “The cosplay contest went great, last night. I did what you suggested, with the maid's outfit, and gymnastics. I made first place.”

Matt said, in a happy tone of voice, “Congratulations.”

Fabiola maintained her smile, as she replied, “Thank you.”

Matt turned to Pedro, as he inquired, “I have a question about my series, Pedro. It is the clock tower background at the end of the episode, Vows? Is there an animation error? Or, symbolism?”

Pedro stated, “From what I read, it was an animation error. Though, it could have been symbolism. I am not really sure, myself.”

Matt replied, “That is okay.”

Fabiola asked, “So, what part of that series did you like the most?”

Matt answered, “The part where I didn't get my ass handed to me all the time. At lot happened, and concerning a lot of it, I am grateful that I was not a part of what happened, most of it.”

Fabiola commented, “I can appreciate that.”

Matthew asked, “So, what happened to you, after the series ended?”

Matt stated, “Quite a bit. To the point it makes what happened during the series look like an appetizer.”

Matthew said, “You will have to tell us about it, sometime.”

Matt replied, “Oh. I will. But, not tonight. Besides, I have questions of my own, for Leigharch.” He looked over at Leigharch, as he inquired, “How did you handle watching your series?”

Leigharch stated, “I was perfectly fine watching my series. Except for Shenhua, I didn't really have any emotion invested in any of those people the series showed. And Shenhua is just a friend. Still, I found it touching that Shenhua mentioned me, during that siege of Lagoon HQ. That woman really does have a nice side for her friends.”

Pedro commented, “No arguments that. Besides Fabiola here, she is one of the nicer Lagoon women we personally know.”

Fabiola looked over at Pedro, as she kindly replied, “Thank you.”

Pedro turned to Fabiola, as he said, “You're welcome.”

Leigharch stated, “And like you pointed out in your own series, Matt. A lot of shit went down in my own series. And I am happy I wasn't there for it.”

Matt agreed, “You are preaching to the choir.”

Fabiola said, “I had to agree with you on that, as well.”

Pedro thought, 'I find it interesting that these three people have the same reaction. That as the side characters, and bit players, they are happy they were no part of the main events. For the most part. It shows a sign of maturity on their part that they understand there is a difference between watching a work of fiction, that has a lot of danger in it, and being a part of those dangerous situations.'

Leigharch stated, “Though, just one thing. When I finished my series, this morning. And yes. It was a bit weird watching myself.”

Fabiola commented, “It is for everyone.”

Leigharch said, “Anyway, since my native language is english, I watched the anime in english. And Pedro was right. The english track is very good. Though, I don't have as bad an accent as the guy who voiced me on that series?”

Pedro joked, “Actually, yours is worse.”

Except for Leigharch, There was some mild laughter from the rest of the group, for a few seconds.

Leigharch ignored their laughter, as he said, “Also, while I was watching that Black Lagoon series, I was so happy I made it a habit of not working in Roanapur, most of the time.”

As everyone calmed down, Fabiola said, “I can sympathize.”

Leigharch mentioned, “And from the series, and what I have seen you have done, first hand. I can see the transition on how dangerous you have become.”

Fabiola commented, “I will take that as a compliment.”

Leigharch replied, “Please, do.”

Matthew turned to Leigharch, as he asked, “By the way, what did you usually do for Chang?”

Leigharch coyly answered, “In a few ways, I was his errand boy. I would go in and out of the various cities. Taking packages, and picking up people. And going where I was told to go.”

Pedro commented, “That makes sense.”

Leigharch replied, “Yea. And the pay was okay.”

Matt asked, “So, where are we going to go next?”

Pedro cracked a grin, as he answered, “Wherever our imagination takes us.”

Fabiola commented, “Corny. But, true.”

The group lightly laughed for a few seconds.

As they calmed down, the waitress came by and took their drink and meal orders. Soon after, they were eating dinner, as they continued their conversation well into the evening.

(_)

Reality, unknown. Date, unknown. Place, Gomez's office, on his spacestation. Time, morning, local time.

Except for a single lamp light on his desk, the Gomez's large office was dark.

Gomez sat behind his desk, with his back facing a window that showed the starry night sky.

Standing across the desk, from him, was his head of operations logistics and personnel, Nechla Geeze.

The two individuals were going over the last little details of Gomez's plan.

Gomez inquired, “How did things go at Chang's casino, last night?”

Nechla said, “While the mission, itself, was accomplished without a problem, by both the Xanatos family, and Takenaka, our contact, in the casino, later stated that casino security personnel found the electronic bugs less than a day later. Local time.”

Gomez commented, “Well, bugging the casino was a long shot. And that was only a secondary mission. And I am more concerned with the primary mission being able to move forward. Is that still the case?”

Nechla replied, “From what I have seen in our reports. So far. We are still a, go, with the primary mission.”

Gomez questioned, “And the trap has already been properly baited?”

Nechla stated, “Yes. Our prey should be arriving in the target zone, very soon. And from there, we will simply need to decide when to take our next course of action.”

Gomez commented, “Our next action will have to be soon after they arrive. But, not on the first day. That would be too soon. We want them to get comfortable. Then, we strike.”

Nechla said, “As soon as you decide when to act. I will see that your forces to take action.” She thought, 'And I will play along with you for a little while longer, Gomez. Then, when the time is right, I will have my revenge, for what that writer, put my people, and myself, through.'

Gomez stated, “I will have a time table for you, before then end of the day. Now, onto another matter. Recruitment of other alien species in our organization. How goes that end of your job.”

Nechla responded, “Unfortunately, I am still hitting the same road block. No many beings can handle learning the truth about humanity, human fiction, and the multiverse. Or, at least this branch of the multiverse. Even John has hit roadblock, in attempting to recruit some of the more mystical beings in the multiverse.”

Gomez commented, “Sadly, it seems that most aliens cannot handle learning they were created from the imaginations of a backwater world of primitives.”

Nechla said, “It took me a while to come to grips with the truth, myself. And it was not easy.”

Gomez stated, “It took us all some time. And since we come from the same reality, there is some commonality between us. Which I believed helped you deal with these issues.”

Nechla replied, “Yes. That did help.”

Gomez responded, “I know. And on this matter, I was surprised when I found that the Vulcans, of the Star Trek reality, seem to go insane the quickest.”

Nechla shrugged, as she joked, “Yes. For them, the logic did not compute.”

Gomez did not laugh at Nechla's joke. Instead, he calmly commented, “I should have never shown you the various Star Trek series and movies.”

Nechla responded, “I found it funny that another space federation exists in the multiverse. And that it is actually nicer than mine, even though it is run by humans.”

Gomez stated, “One of better traits that humanity has is they try to better themselves.”

Nechla replied, “That we agree on. Still, there are exceptions. Including, exceptions to Vulcans handling the truth.”

Gomez said, “Yes. Even among Vulcans, there are some that can handle the truth. Unfortunately, those individuals are of the mindset that precluded them from joining us.”

Nechla commented, “It does seems that the more independent minded can handle the truth better than most.”

Gomez stated, “And this is both a good thing. And a bad thing. It does allow us to have a pool of people to draw from, in missions. Though, these are the same types of people that usually make for poor rank and file personnel.”

Nechla commented, “There are ways around all problems. We just need to figure out those approaches.”

Gomez responded, “True. And I have seen first hand how brainwashing does not work. So, we will have to find another way. Though, that is for later. After we deal our targets. Then, we will be able to move on with our other plans.

The two individuals continued their conversation for another half hour, before Gomez dismissed Nechla, so she could carry out her duties, and her orders.

(_)

Reality, Pedro and Lee's home reality. Date, two days after the events with the Xanatos family. It was Thursday. Place, De La Plata Podrido, Mexican. Time, middle of the morning.

It was a cloudy, chilly, slightly windy morning, on the island of Plata Podrido.

In a deserted section of the island of Plata Podrido, a Klingon Bird of Prey suddenly appeared in the air, right over a dry, flat area of the beach dunes.

The space ship was then hovered around, to where the back faced into the shore. The ship then gently landed in the sand, with its landing gear.

Next, the ship immediately shimmered and cloaked from sight, and sensor instruments.

A minute later, the back cargo bay ramp of the space ship opened up to the beach sand below.

Suddenly, several hover-cycles, motorcycles, and a few trikes, three wheeled motorcycles, roared to life, down the ramp, and to the beach below.

The dozens of riders of these vehicles were made up of men and women, of various ages, and physical sizes.

The clothing the riders wore were a mix of nineteen eighties rock styles, clothing from a post-apocalyptic film, and standard black leather biker clothing.

All of the riders wore various types of helmets, and biker armor on their shoulders, elbows, and knees, as they headed into town.

(_)

Ten minutes later, in the middle of town, George Benedict was getting a late start to the day.

His alarm malfunctioned, and he had accidentally slept in a few hours. But after getting cleaned, dressed, and ready, he had a quick breakfast. And now, he was on the road in the car he rented, heading for the Devil's Hotel.

At the moment, George car was stopped at a red light, at an intersection.

As George waiting for the light to turn green, he saw a mix of a few trikes, along with dozens of motorcycles, and hover-cycles, driver passed him, down the perpendicular street he was facing.

George thought, 'What the hell?! Some of those are hover-cycles! No time to think! I need to get my camera!'

George immediately picked up his camera, which was laying on the front passengers seat. The camera had a regular lenses on it. Fortunately, years of experience allowed George to, within seconds, point and pull the lenses into proper focus on the bikers. And he was about to take a number of photos, in focus, of the later half of the biker gang.

A few seconds after all the bikers had passed by, the light turned green. But, George just sat there, while still in slight shock at what he had just scene.

George set his camera back down, beside him, as he thought, 'Along with the motorcycles, and trikes. Over a dozen of those vehicles were hover-cycles. While I have seen online videos of prototype hover-cycles, I have never seen them mass produced. And all of those vehicles seemed to be customized. Are they even of this world? Are those bikers even of this world?'

'Okay, this is getting to be Twilight Zone level weird. But, this story is far too big for me to drop now.'

'Still, they are heading heading for the casino. With that being the only logical place they could be heading in that direction. And as tempting as it is to follow them. I better not head to the casino, because they are going to stir up the casino security even more than has already been done over the course of the week.'

'Such as, while I am not sure what happened two nights ago. From those I spoke to yesterday, and the photos I took, it seems some major players came to town, to the casino, for the evening. Those I talked to gave no names, nor descriptions of whom they were.'

'At least I know what they look like. A woman with long orange hair, and teal tattoo over here right eye. A man with brown hair, a short ponytail, with a mustache and goatee. And their chauffeur, a smaller man, with long white hair, and pointed ears, that make him look like an elf.

'But, I can still photos of them entering the building, and I can confirm that something happened inside the casino, right after the entered that building.'

'Also, I heard that at the same time those three strange people entered the casino, some sort of dance incident happened at that Devil's Hotel restaurant. But, there is even less details on that event.'

'And after the robbery earlier this week, all this has set the casino management on edge.'

'So, it is better for me to just head out to stake out the Devil's Hotel, today. Because if I went to the casino, right now. Either the security would catch me, or those bikers might notice me.'

'There is a fine line between catching a story, and having the story catch you. And I realize that right now I am walking on the edge of that line.'

Suddenly, George heard a car honk right behind him.

George looked in the rearview mirrors, and he noticed a car right behind him. He thought, 'I guess, I better get moving.'

George then let go of the break pedal, and gently pushed down the gas pedal, making his car move forward, towards the parking lot across from the Devil's Hotel, for his morning stake out.

And while most of the bikers were heading to the Daiyu Palace Casino, not all of them were.

(_)

Across town, outside of the Devil's Hotel, the beach was mostly deserted, due to it still being the winter, and the off season.

And while the wet salty breeze had a cold bite to it, two figured where sparing with their weapons, near the shoreline.

Shenhua had her two kukris in her hands. Though, the hilts of her blades were not connected to the cords rapped around the bracers, on her forearms, under the loose sleeves of her clothing.

And the man she was sparing against was Barbossa, with his cutlass.

A few hours ago, after they had finished breakfast, they had come out to the beach to spar. Given that it was too cold for swimming and sunbathing, the deserted beach was perfect for training.

With wearing shoes on the sand forcing the combatants to focus on their balance, while sparring with each other.

The two of them had been sparing, for a few hours a day, for the last three days. Tuesday, they sparred in the afternoon. And yesterday, Wednesday, they had spared in the morning.

Fortunately, the cool weather did not both either of them.

Shenhua was dressed in her red qipao, under her white cloth jacket. And she wore her red, flat soled slippers.

Barbossa wore his, black leather biker clothing, black boots, and black newsboy cap.

And while Barbossa was showing how much more skilled at swordsmanship he was, than his student, Shenhua. Shenhua found Barbossa to being a firm, thought fair instructor.

Barbossa constantly gave Shenhua pointers, even while sparring, in what she should and show not be doing. With the pointers being polite comments, and not rude insults.

And to Barbossa delight, they could both tell that Shenhua was making progress. Bringing her already brilliant skills at swordsmanship up a number of notches.

Though, Shenhua was still nowhere near as good at Barbossa. But, she was slowly closing the gap between them.

While Shenhua sparred with Barbossa, her three children were being watched by their other two parents, Sawyer and Lotton.

Just then, they both stopped sparring, as they turned to look at the shoreline. Running across the water, twenty feet from them, were two bikers on hover-cycles, speeding by, at about around sixty miles an hour.

As they continued looking at the bikers riding by, Shenhua commented, “Not very subtle of them.”

Barbossa said, “Still, I won't mind learning to ride on of those things. It cannot be any harder than learning to ride a horse.”

Shenhua turned back to Barbossa, as she teased, “Well, that would explain your biker clothing.”

Barbossa looked back over at Shenhua, as he conceded, “True. I dress like this because my usual pirate clothing attracts too much attention. And I like this style of clothing. Plus, it seems that most people know to leave me alone, when I am wearing attire.”

Shenhua replied, “I can appreciate where you are coming from.”

Barbossa inquired, “So, my dear. Shall we start this from the top?”

Shenhua answered, “Of course.”

They then when back to sparring, with each other, some more, that morning.

(_)

Ten minutes later, on the other side of the island, the hover-cycles, motorcycles, and trikes came to a stop under the large, front awning of the Daiyu Palace Casino.

As the riders revved down their engines, with the hover-cycles sitting on the paved ground, the casino valet, all of whom were young adult women, turned to look at the riders.

On of the closest valets said, in english, “I apologize. But, we do not know how to drive your... vehicles.”

Nearby, one of the bikers, on a trike, a man, in a full black helmet over his head, with dark skin seen between his the cuffs of his loose sleeves, of his closed black leather duster, and his black leather gloves, turned to the women. He calmly stated, in english, “That is alright. We will park our own vehicles.”

The bikers then revved up their vehicles, and drove out from under the awning, as they look from parking spacing for their various types of vehicles.

(_)

At that moment, in the main casino security room, along with a few security personal, whom were sitting some workstations in the room, Mal, Zoe, Wash, and Jayne, were standing in back, as they watched the monitors on the wall that show cameras station outside the casino.

The four adults watched as the biker gang was looking for places to park their vehicles in the front of the casino parking lot.

Zoe commented, “And I thought Tuesday night was interesting.”

Mal stated, “I'll call, Chang.”

Jayne said, “I will round up the personal. We are going to need them.” He then pulled out how own cellphone, as he started call in security personnel from within the casino.

Wash complimented, “I will start praying.”

Zoe complimented, “Wise idea, Wash. It can't hurt. And at least the valets bought us some time.”

By then, Mal had already pulled out his cellphone, and he had already dialed Chang's cellphone.

As the held his phone to his right ear, he stated, “Let us hope that it iis enough time, to prepare.”

(_)

At that moment, in the casino penthouse, Chang had decided to take the morning off, to spend with River and Lee. The day before, he had finally caught up with work. And now, he felt he could take a little time off with his two lovers.

They were in their apartment living room, sitting on the couch, across from their TV. Chang was in the center cushion, River was to his left, and Lee was to his right.

All of them were dressed for the day, in their usual clothing. And they were watching TV, as they talked.

Suddenly, Chang cellphone started to ring.

Lee had the remote, and she immediately muted the TV.

Chang held his phone to his right ear, as he said, “Hello.”

On the other end of the line, Mal stated, “Sir, we have a situation. A group of bikers are outside the front of the casino, about to come in. Some of them are driving hover-cycles. So, I do not think they are locals. We estimate we have about five minutes before they make into the front lobby.”

Chang asked, “What you have done so far, to handle this matter?”

Mal answered, “Jayne is already rounding security personnel for this. Though, we figure you might want to take point on this.”

Chang responded, “I do. And thank you for informing me. And let us be discreet concerning our weapons.”

Mal realized that Chang was telling him that his personnel should only be armed with this concealed weapons. Though, Mal suggested, “Understood, sir. Also, given everything that has happened, this week. I would suggest we call in Annie, and maybe Arcee for this.”

Chang agreed, “Good idea. I will inform Annie and Arcee. Bring your personnel, and we will meet you in the front lobby, in a few minutes.”

Mal replied, “Yes sir. We will see you there.”

Chang then hung up cellphone, those he kept it in his right hand.

River asked, “What is it?”

Chang looked over at River, as he answered, with a bit of sarcasm in his tone of voice, “More fun girls. It seems a biker gang is about to come into the casino. And we need to round up the security team to confront them.”

Lee commented, “Well, that is new.”

River said, “This should be interesting.”

Chang asked, “What do you think?”

River answered, “I am honestly am not sure.”

Lee commented, “Well, I have known some bikers, in my life. Baring the one percenters. Most of them just want to have some fun. And unless they are literally looking for trouble. They will likely behave themselves.”

Chang replied, “That is comforting to know.”

Lee inquired, “So, are you going to let them in?”

Chang looked over at Lee, as he said, “We will talk to them. And if they agree to abide by my rules. And behave. Then, yes. They can stay.”

Lee commented, “That is more than reasonable on your part.”

Chang replied, “I know.” He then dialed the cellphone number of Annie. He held it up to his right ear, as the phone began to ring.

As soon as Chang heard the line on the other end pick up, he stated, “Annie, we have a situation developing at the front of the casino. I am going to have to cut your time with Ahsoka this morning, short. And I need you in the front lobby, as soon as possible. And please, also inform Arcee that on stand by, in one of the cage hallways. In case we need her. And I guess have her watch Ahsoka, while you are with us.”

Over the phone, Annie replied, “I will inform Ahsoka and Arcee. And I will be there in a few minutes.”

Chang replied, “Thank you.” He then hung up his cellphone, and put it away.

Chang then looked at River, then to Lee, and back to River. He stated, “Okay. Let's go.”

The three adults got up, as Lee used the remote to turn off TV, and then set the remote on the coffee table in front of them. They then headed for the door to the living room that lead to the main interior hallway, outside the apartment section of the penthouse level. From there, they would take the front express elevator to the gaming floor, and walk the rest of the way to the front lobby.

(_)

A few minutes later, Chang's group was assembled in the front lobby, before the bikers had made it inside.

Chang was in the center front of the group. To his right was River. To his left was Lee. To the left of Lee was Annie, then Jayne. To River right was Mal, then Zoe. Behind Zoe was Wash. With the reach of the security personal that was call in, fanned out behind them.

While both the security personal, and Chang, were armed. Their weapons were concealed in their clothing. As was Annie's lightsaber, which was attached to the right side of her belt, under her jedi robe.

The casino group then watched as the bikers came into the casino. There were about two dozen of them. And while the bikers left their helmets with their vehicles. the casino group noticed that some of the bikers had weapons on them. Mostly pistols, and blasters, holstered in side holsters, on their belts.

Chang kept his eyes on the group, as he calmly ordered, “Keep cool, ladies and gentlemen. I do not want any itchy trigger fingers.”

As the bikers came closer, the casino group noticed three members, in front that stood out from the group.

In the front, middle part of the group, was a dark skinned man in very good physical shape. He had a bleach blond, almost white, mohawk.

Over his black boxer shorts and black socks, he wore black pants, with a black leather belt. He had on black, steel-toed military style boots. He did not have on a shirt. Instead, had had on a long sleeved, black lather duster, which he had opened to show his bare chest, with his rock hard abs. And he had on a pair of sunglasses over his eyes.

Lee thought, 'Okay. I will admit that guy with the mohawk looks good.'

Across from Chang, River giggled a little from Lee's thoughts.

To dark skinned man's left left was a fair skinned woman, in good physical shape. She had long red hair that went loosely down to her shoulder blades.

The woman wore a black leather jacket that was open to reveal she was wearing a black midriff shirt, that exposed her toned stomach. She also wore tight, black pants, a black belt, and black boots.

To the dark skinned man's right was a fair skinned man in nice physical shape. He had dark short hair, and green irises. And unlike the others, he was dressed like he was Sherlock Holmes. Including, among other things, a deerstalker hat, an open long coat, shirt, pants, belt, and boots.

The bikers clearly saw them, as they came to a stop ten feet from Chang's group.

Everyone else in the lobby saw what was going on, and disappeared from the room. Including, the clerks, and tellers on staff, in the alcoves on the left side of the wall.

Chang stated, in english, “Hello. I am in the owner of this casino. To whom am I addressing?”

The dark skinned man stated, in english, “I am Professor Johnathan Durban, and these are my boys.

Chang replied, “Nice to meet you, Professor Durban.”

Lee immediately realize who Durban was, as she thought, 'This is Johnathan Durban from the end of book two. And he has changed.'

Durban said, “The redhead, beside me, is, Sally Finnegan. She is a former reporter who is now the communications officer, on my ship.”

Sally looked over at the casino group, as she kindly said, in english, “It is nice to meet new people.”

Chang replied, “Likewise.”

River inquired, “With this many people, I can see why you would need a ship to travel. So, what type of ship do you captain?”

Durban answered, “A modified Klingon Bird of Prey.”

Lee thought, with curiosity, 'A Klingon Bird of Prey... Could he have gotten the idea from?... Oh, I am going to have to ask him about this, later. Still, it makes sense, given his ship is likely on this island, and cloaked. Though, it is better if we leave their ship be. But, I can ask one question, right now.'

Lee questioned, “So, you are multiverse travelers?”

Durban asked, “Yes. And you two are?”

River answered, “River.”

Lee stated, “Lee.”

Durban replied, “Nice to meet you both. Now, let me introduce you to my good friend, and second in command, Arthur D Clemens. He is also my science officer.”

The black haired man, in the deerstalker cap, said, in english, “It is a pleasure to make your acquaintances.”

Lee immediately recognized the alias, as he thought, 'And this is Data, from Star Trek, The Next Generation. I should have realized it sooner. He is using the alias I created for him at the end of book two. Also, that is Sally, the reporter, with them.'

'Still, when I created these characters, I did not plan for them to go Mad Max on me. But, then again, I have changed a lot, as well. So, I am not one to judge. And I think it will be best if I do not mention that, except for Data, I am their creator. It would just complicate matters for all of us.'

Annie turned to Arthur, as she calmly said, “Hello Data. It has been a long time.”

Those that did not immediately recognize Data, immediately realized who he was, to their surprise.

Data turned to Annie, as he answered, with a hint of joy and happiness in his tone of voice, “Yes. It has.”

Annie inquired, “So, what have you been up to?”

Data said, “Making new friends. Seeing new places. Sort of like my old job in Star Fleet. Only with better hours.”

Annie giggled a little. She then replied, “That is nice.”

Data asked, “So, what about you? What have you been up to?”

Annie replied, “The same as you.”

Data commented, “Yes. I see you, and a number of others, are now working for Chang.”

Chang showed a little uneasiness in his body language. as Data was hinting at some of the dark parts of his life. But, a second later, Chang immediately forced him to stop moving.

Chang thought, 'I dare not comment on this matter. It is best I just let the situation play out, while hoping that Annie does not leave me out to dry.'

Annie coyly said, “A lot has changed.”

Data commented, “I hope for the better.”

Annie responded, “Yea. It has been for the better. Such as, we have settled our differences with Chang.”

Data replied, “I am glad to hear that.”

River mentioned, “No one has been brainwashed to work here. And everything is on the up and up.”

Annie said, “She is correct. Everything is on the level.”

Data replied, “Good.”

Lee turned to Durban and Sally, as she asked, “Not to be rude. But, do all of you know your friend here is really, Data.”

Sally answered, “Yes. We have known for a while, now.”

Lee replied, “Cool.”

Data mentioned, “And the redhead in front, to Chang's right, is River Tam. She dyed her hair red. She is also a telepath.”

River quickly said, “I can only read surface thoughts. And I cannot turn off my ability.”

Lee thought, 'Touche. We reveal a secret and you reveal a secret. And any of the other secrets would likely cause a problem. Such as Annie use to be Darth Vader. And I see you have the problem handled, River.'

Durban commented, “That is fine. We have dealt with psychics before. Just keep what you learn about us to yourself.”

River stated, “If I didn't, I would long since be dead.”

Durban said, “Point taken. Now, to deal with another matter.' Durban turned to Chang, as he inquired, with slight anger in his tone of voice, “So, you're Chang, from Roanapur?”

Chang looked at Durban, as he sheepishly admitted, “Yes. I am.”

Durban stated, with force in his tone of voice, “I have some questions for you, about some students of mind that went missing, years ago, in Roanapur.”

Chang thought, 'It is best for me to just answer his questions. After everything that has happened this week. I do not need a brawl in the front lobby of my casino.'

Chang stated, “I will be more than willing to answer your questions. But first, I need some background information on you. What field of study were you in?”

Durban answered, “In my previous job, I oversaw the technology sections of Georgia Tech. And these students were hired by a company from Hong Kong, to go Roanapur, to work on research dealing with m-theory. Or, should I say, multiverse fact. And from what I understand. You were the one behind all this.” Durban punctuated the last five words of his statement, as he continued, “So. Where. Are. My. Students?”

Chang replied, “Oh...”

Chang thought, 'This is starting to come back to me. And it is not good. I now realize that this is the Durban from the end of book two. And he wants to know what I did with his students.'

'The problem is. I don't remember. But, I didn't kill them, or imprison them. I might have put them in the vat process. Though, I am sure they were alive and well, when I fled my tower. Yet, I cannot tell him that, without starting a major fight. I am going to have to play this very carefully. And I know just how to do it.'

Chang stated, “I will be honest with you. That was a number of decades ago, for me. And when my organization collapsed, I fled into the multiverse. And sadly, I do not remember your students. But, for those that worked for me. And even those I had brainwashed. I treated them well. And unless someone betrayed me. I did not kill them. And those that worked under me, held the same philosophy. So, I am sure, they were alive, and in good health, when I left the tower.”

Annie said, “That is correct. Chang is many things. But, he is not wasteful. He prefers to treat those that work for him, well.”

Chang kept his eyes on Durban, as he thought, 'I am going to have to give Annie a bonus, this month, for backing me up on this.'

Mal thought, 'It has been a while since I have seen Chang so honest and forthcoming. I guess there is hope for him, after all.'

River overheard Mal's thoughts. She hid her smile, as she she mentally reflected, 'Mal, I am glad you feel that way about Chang.'

Durban stated, “At least you are honest. I will give you that. And now I know they are alive. So, it is just a matter of finding them, in the proper time and place.”

Lee suggested, “They might have gone missing, because your future self retrieved them from your past.”

Durban shrugged, as he conceded, “That is possible. And I can use that to my advantage.”

Lee thought, 'I think I will leave out that there is a good chance the male students that he is looking for, are now female. All that would do is risk starting a fight.'

River thought, 'Intelligent thinking, Lee. On several points.'

Chang cautioned,”Just be careful in traveling to the past. Paradoxes are only one of the dangers in doing so.”

Durban stated, “Oh, I know about paradoxes, and how to avoid them. And as to trouble. I am not worried. Because if there is trouble.”

Durban put his hands down, to his sides, to the front, downward sides, of himself, at a diagonal angle, away from everyone.

Suddenly, through use of a gamblers' rigs, on the undersides of both his sleeves, two weapons slid out into his hands. In his right hand was a small blaster pistol. In his left hand was a small lightsaber, that he ignited with a snap-hiss. The blade was yellow, and two foot long.

Durban looked over at the casino group, as he continued, “We will handle that trouble.”

Annie thought, 'I have not seen a small lightsaber like that, in years. I wonder where he got it from? Not that I mind. It is best that I just leave the matter be.'

Chang calmly said, “We would prefer to avoid trouble.”

Durban deactivated his lightsaber. He then retracted his weapons, back up his sleeves, as he stated, “Good. Because I feel the same way. And my group will behave themselves.”

Chang replied, “I hope so.”

Mal commented, “Still, you will need to leave your weapons at the door, if you wish to enjoy this establishment.”

Durban replied, “That will not be a problem, for my boys, and myself.”

Chang said, “Good. Also, you will need something to pay for the poker chips here?”

Durban asked, “Do you accept gold as payment?”

Chang commented, “If it is pure. Then yes. We have an exchange rate on that. And we use current market prices for that exchange rate.”

Durban stated, “That is fair.”

Chang replied, “We would like to think so.” He mentally reflected, 'There is no point in charging a fee for the conversion of gold to cash, considering people come here to gamble. All it would do is upset customers whom are already going to lose their money to me. Still, it might be best, since Pedro is gone, right now, if I call Balalaika, and then the police station, to talk to whomever is currently in charge. To let both those groups know I am handling the situation when these bikers. Also, I wonder what Durban calls his group?'

Chang asked, “So, what do you call your group?”

Durban answered, “I call my team, Professor Durban and the Atlantic Riders.”

Chang let out a laugh, as he got the reference. He accused, “You're a Buckaroo Banzai fan? Aren't you?”

Durban cracked a grin, as he admitted, “Guilty as charged.”

Chang replied, “I am a fan, as well.”

Durban responded, “I am not surprised. So, are you really Chang, from the Black Lagoon series? If so, then we share the same reality, and the events of that series happened in our home reality. Though, after we left our reality, my boys and I have seen both the anime and manga versions of that series.”

Chang replied, “Yes. I am. And I have seen my series, as well. And it was the anime that happen to myself, and the others. Though, it has been years since the events detailed in the anime.”

Durban commented, “Okay. I can see from your demeanor that it has been a while for you.” He thought, 'You are nowhere near as cocky as you were in that series.'

River suppressed a giggle from Durban's thoughts. She mentally reflected, 'Oh, how true that is.'

Durban continued, “And by confirming that it was anime version that happened to you, you have answered some of my questions.”

Chang inquired, “Yes. So, why do you ask?”

Durban requested, “Some of my crew, and I, would like some autographs from you, and your friends. If that is okay?”

Chang thought, with a mix of concern and amusement, 'So, we have gone from threatening me, over your charges. To asking for my autographs. Interesting. Not that I am complaining. I like this change, and it works for everyone.'

River suppressed a desire to giggle from listening Chang's thoughts.

Chang said, “Sure. We will talk about it later today.”

Durban responded, “That will be fine. And thank you. Also, I was wondering, what did you think when you saw your series?”

Chang answered, “It confirmed my suspicions that I was living in a fiction world.”

Durban commented, “Let me guess. It was kind of obvious, after the maid first came to your town?”

Chang let out a laugh. He then said, “Oh, I like you. And you are correct. Also, don't get me started on those twins.”

Durban replied, “I won't dream of it.”

Zoe asked, “What has brought you to De La Plata Podrido?”

Durban looked over at Zoe, as he said, “We heard about a casino, where a number of badasses, from various realities, had set up shop. And we wanted to check this place out. And so far, you have not disappointed us.”

Chang happily reflected, in thought, 'Word of mouth is almost always good.' He commented, “We are glad to hear that. And we hope you enjoy your stay.”

Durban turned to look at Chang, as he replied, “So do we.”

River asked, “Will you be checking into the casino?”

Durban answered, “No. We will be staying in our ship.”

River replied, “Okay.”

Lee then remembered, as she thought, 'We need to warn them about the Devil's Hotel, and the Rats Nest. But first, I need to ask a question?'

Lee inquired, “Durban does you group have radios on them?”

Durban stated, “Yes. We have encrypted radios in both our helmets and on our person.”

Lee responded, “Good. You need to order you group to avoid the Devil's Hotel. The large hotel on the north side of the island. And the Rats Nest bar. Because, one of the rougher groups in town stays at that hotel, and parties at that bar.”

Durban asked, “What do you mean by rougher groups? We are a bit of a rough group, ourselves.”

For a few seconds, there was smiles and mild laughter from among the Atlantic Riders, beside and behind Durban.

Lee let the laughter die down. She then stated, “Don't get me wrong. You dress the part. But, none of you have that violent, insane look in your eyes, of the people I am talking about. On the other hand, the group I am talking about include. Revy. Roberta, whose now a cyborg, due to that whole Grey Fox debacle.”

Lee thought, 'I will leave out the super-soldier serum.'

Lee continued, “And a number of other Black Lagoon women. Along with other badass women of the multiverse. And these are the type of women that it would be best to leave alone, unless they want to talk to you.”

The casino group immediately saw the bikers drop this smiles, and go silent, as the bikers understood what Lee had just said.

A few seconds later, Durban turned to Lee, as he responded, “Okay. You have a point there. And thank you for the warning. I will do as you requested. While I don't mind asking Chang here for an autograph. The others are a little too crazy for my groups' tastes.”

There was some mild laughter among the casino group.

Chang offered, “I completely understand. Now, I hope you all some fun in my casino.”

Chang thought, 'That reminds me. I believe Jetta is on shift, this morning, as the pit boss. And I believe she has experience in dealing with bikers like this. So, this shouldn't be too much of a problem for her. Still, I will speak to her. And I will have Mal assign some more security personnel to the gaming floor, while the bikers are here.'

Durban looked over at Chang, as he replied, “Thanks for the offer.” He then turned around to face his group, as he said, “Okay. Let's get this party started.”

The bikers cheered, and then they walked over to where the tellers were suppose to be at.

Chang saw the tellers were gone. He stated, towards the Atlantic Riders, “We will have our staff back in a few minutes. So, turned over your weapons for safe keeping, and you can purchase some poker chips. Also, if any of you lose your reciepts, or have problems retrieving your weapons, when you leave. Just, inform security. And we will help you, with the matter. Though, we do have a policy of not turning over weapons to those that are drunk. So, have someone sober,with you.”

Data turned to Chang, as he stated, “That will not be a problem.” He then turned back around, to join his friends.

Chang thought, 'Yes. With Data here. He will help keep his friends from doing anything foolish, while here. Now, to talk to Mal.'

Chang turned to Mal, as he ordered, “Find where our staff went. And get them back here, as soon as possible.”

Chang mentally reflected, 'I don't blame them for running. It just shows intelligence on their part. But, someone needs to give them the all clear.'

Mal looked at Chang, as he replied, “I'm on it.”

He then pulled out his cellphone, and he started dialing a number for the casino security office, to contact the personnel they left there, to track down where the staff had run off too.

Chang then turned to River and Lee. He saw his two lovers look at him. Chang stated, “You two, with me.”

Chang then turned and started walking toward hallway, that lead to the gaming floor. With River and Lee walking right behind him.

Chang left Mal, Zoe, Annie, Wash, and the security staff present, to keep order among the bikers, as things were being handled.

(_)

Five minutes later, the staff had returned to the front lobby. The bikers left their weapons with the tellers, while receiving a receipt for them. Even Durban left his weapons with the tellers. The bikers also bought some poker chips, with some of their gold. And they headed to the gaming floor, to gamble.

Meanwhile, Chang, River, and Lee, when over to gaming floor, and talked to Jetta for a few minutes.

As soon as Mal had found some of his security personnel, he could spar, he assigned them to the gaming floor, with Jetta and the guards already stationed there.

With that taken care of, the three lovers headed back up to their penthouse apartment, to enjoy the rest of their morning.

Meanwhile, Annie went back to rejoin with Ahsoka and Arcee, for some fun that day.

And the security personnel, that was not reassigned to the gaming floor, when back to their posts. And Jayne, Mal, Zoe, Wash, heading back to the main security room, to continue doing their jobs.

(_)

Across town, around the time Durban, and those of his group that were with him, started gambling at the Daiyu Palace Casino, another part of Durban's group was heading to the Last Resort Diner.

At that time in the morning, it was between breakfast rush ending and lunch rush beginning. And there were usually no customers in the diner. And that was the case this morning.

This was why Ed had called an employee meeting for that time on this morning.

Everyone was there. Ed, Lori, Rico, Stan, Lewis, Leona, and Irene. Ed and Lori were in their cooks clothing. While, Stan and Lewis were in their waiters uniforms. Rico, Leona, and Irene were in their casual clothing. Rico was off the day. And Leona, and Irene would be on shift, later that day.

This was just a regular monthly meeting, to touch base with everyone, on what was going on, concerning the diner, and what future plans were. Such as how the diner was doing. How revenue and tips were doing. And if there were any really nice customers that need special attention. Or, problem customers to watch out for, should they show up.

They had held the meeting while standing, or sitting in stools around the counter, in the middle of the diner.

They had just finished their meeting. With the meeting going great for everyone.

Stan turned to his brother, Lewis, as he asked, “Lewis. I have been patiently waiting for a response. Which you so far have not told me. So, I am going to just ask. How as yours and Irene's date, two nights ago?”

Lewis stated, “I am surprised you didn't ask us earlier.”

Ed comment, “We were hoping you would bring of the topic.”

Rico cracked a grin, as she looked at Lewis, then Irene, and back to Lewis. She said, “Which you didn't. Now, we get to ask you both questions. While we tease you.”

Lori calmly requested, “So, come on, and tell us what happened?”

Leona cracked a grin, as she said, “You know, you want too.”

Lewis stated, “Alright, it was fun.”

Irene commented, “Yes. It was quite fun.” Then, her lips curled into wicked grin, as she said, “And afterward, Lewis showed me his female form. If Stan's female form is as hot as Lewis' girl form, I can see why they were concerned about us being jealous.”

Stan admitted, “Yes. My female form is as hot as Lewis' female form. Like our male forms, are female forms look very similar to each other.”

Leona questioned, “They cannot be that hot?”

Irene stated, “Oh, yes they are. But, they also have been very polite about this. As such, I see not reason in being jealous.”

Lewis looked over at Irene, as he said, “I am happy you feel that way, Irene.”

Irene turned to Lewis, as she commented, “No problem. It is call being an adult.”

Ed agreed, “That is true.”

Irene requested, “Anyway, we would prefer not to talk about that, right now.”

Lori commented, “That is okay. We just wanted to make sure everything went fine.”

Lewis said, “It did. Though, we didn't do anything afterward, except kiss.”

Irene commented, “No offense. But, you were quite modest, Lewis.”

Lewis replied, “None taken.”

Lori stated, in a plain tone of voice, “Well, should you sleep together. Remember to use a condom.”

Besides Lewis and Lori, the other adults giggled a little, as Lewis blurted out, “Dad!”

Lori said, “Sorry. I just do not want you to have any grandchildren, until you are ready.”

As everyone calmed down, Leona than noticed something outside of the front windows of the diner. She said, “Guys. Take a look outside. I think we are about to have some trouble come our way.”

Everyone else turned to look out the front windows of the diner.

They saw three motorcycles, two hover-cycles, and one trike, come into the parking lot, and park.

There were six bikers in all. The bikers were dressed in black leather, biker clothing. And they were all wearing helmets.

They watched the bikers get off this vehicles, take of their helmets, place their helmets on their vehicles, and then turned to walk toward the front entrance of the dinner.

Stan said, “I don't think they are local.”

Ed commented, “No. They are not.”

Leona asked, “What does this mean?”

Stan looked out the window, as he answered, “Likely trouble. Though, I hope not.”

Lori stated, “Relax everyone. We just play this cool. We should be fine.”

Leona turned to Lori, as she asked, “And if we have trouble?”

Lori brushed a folds of the right side of her skirt to reveal a hidden slit, that revealed her outer right thigh. On her thigh was a holster that had her six round revolver in it. She stated, “I am always armed. And so is Ed, and Rico.”

Lewis commented, “Our family and friends love to be prepared.” He thought, 'Though, Stan and I prefer to be unarmed. Unless, we feel we are in going into a situation, where we feel we need to be armed.'

Leona looked over at Ed and Rico, both of whom were looking back at her. The two women each nodded once towards Leona. Leona turned back to Lori, as she replied, “Glad to hear it.”

As the bikers go closer, they got a better look at them. All of the bikers had various types of pistols in side holsters, on their person.

Three of the bikers were women, and three were men. There were two caucasian men, and one asian man. One caucasian woman, one dark skinned woman, and one native american woman. All of them looked to be in their mid-twenties.

Then, Lori got a good look at their faces, and she could not believe whom she saw. She commented, “I think I know these people. From my childhood.”

Rice commented, “Really?”

Lori responded, “Yea. I have seen them since... That would make so much sense. The convention while I was looking for B's cure.”

Ed asked, “From the stories?”

Lori answered, “Yea. Those are the six people I met. And they don't look that much older from when I met them, then.”

Ed said, “Okay. This could work out well for us.”

Lori continued to look at the bikers approaching the front doors of the diner, as she replied, “I know. Let me do the talking. Now kids, get behind us, in case this goes south.”

Lewis, Stan, Leona, and Irene walked around, to the back of the counter.

With Rico and Ed standing by the left side of the entrance to behind the counter, and Lori standing behind the middle counter. With the Lewis, Stan, Irene, and Leona, standing behind Lori, Ed, and Rico.

A few seconds later, the six bikers walked inside, and they came to a stop in front of the counter. With them standing staggered, though, nearly side by side, as they face the counter, and those in front of them.

Those inside looked at the six newcomers, as the newcomers look at them.

Lori said, in a happy tone of voice, “Welcome to the Last Resort Diner?”

The six bikers chuckled a little.

As they calmed down, the caucasian woman inquired, “So, this place is named after the whorehouse in the original Total Recall movie?”

Lori complimented, “That is very astute of you.”

The caucasian woman replied, “Thank you. I take it, you have a sense of humor?”

Lori stated, “Of course. It makes life worth living. Cindy.”

The women stated, “My name is Cynthia. Though, Cindy was my nickname, when I was younger. How do you know my name.”

Lori about about to answer, but she found herself tripping on her words, as she suddenly realized how much she would have to explain. She hesitantly said, “You see... Well, I now sure how to tell you this... And I know you likely won't believe a word of this... But, it is me, Bob. I have, or had the ability to change genders. And due to that ability, and old age of my male form, I am stuck in this form, of a young woman.”

The bikers burst out laughing, for a few seconds.

Lori thought, with concern, 'That is not the reaction I was expecting.'

As the bikers calmed down, one of the caucasian men, then sneeze, on command. And he instantly turned into a she.

Lori thought, with less concern, and more mild amusement, 'Okay. This just got interesting. In a good way.'

The man turned woman cracked a grin, as she stated, “It is not that hard to believe, Bob.” The woman then sneezed, and she changed back into a man.

The other caucasian man commented, “Stop showing off, Wyatt.”

Wyatt playfully replied, “Oh. But, it is fun.”

Leona commented, with a little surprise in her tone of voice, “Okay. That is a nice trick.”

Irene leaned over and whispered into Leona's left ear, “That is how Lewis and Stan can change.”

Leona replied, “Oh.”

The native american woman stated, “Don't worry. You will get use to dealing with gender benders.”

Rico said, “That is true.”

The native american woman teased, “You might even someday become a gender bender.”

Leona said, “No thank you.”

The native american woman giggled a little. She replied, “Don't knock, until you have tried it.”

Lori commented, “I guess there are more of us back home than I thought.”

Lori mentally reflected, 'That reminds me. I really need to talk to my extended family about our hidden abilities. My parents, my siblings, and my siblings' children. While my wife and kids know what is going on. The others do not have all the details.'

'My siblings, and their children, could use this ability as a way the extend their own lives. And while I did tell them about my gender bending abilities. I did not tell them where I got my abilities from. My parents seem okay with it. Considering they got grand-kids. And my siblings are still talking to me, when I visit them.'

'As for mom and dad. I need to talk to them about the rejuvenation therapy that that Ed used. Though, that is for later. Now, I have to talk with my old friends, about this.'

The asian man said, “Yes. There are many of us. Actually, more than we can counter. Anyway, we already knew it was you, Bob. We heard on the grapevine, what happened to you. And we decided to check on you, and your family.”

Lori thought, 'That is surprising. And now, to introduce everyone.' She responded, “That is great to hear. Now, let me introduce everyone to everyone. First, I no longer go by Bob. I am now, Lori.” She thought, 'Except, in private, from my wife and close friends.'

Lori then used her right hand to point to Ed, as she continued, “And this is Ed, my wife.”

Ed looked over at the bikers, as she said, “Nice meet you.”

Cynthia replied, “Likewise.”

Lori pointed at Stan, as she said, “This is Stan, one of my sons.”

Lori next pointed at Lewis, as she continued, “This is Lewis, my other son.”

Lori pointed at Rico, as she stated, “This is Rico. A good friend of the family.”

Rico commented, “It is a pleasure to make your acquaintances.”

Lori then pointed at Irene, and Leona. She said, “And this is Irene and Leona. New girls. We just recently hired them. But, they know how to keep secrets.”

The dark skinned woman commented, “That is good.”

Lori turned to face her family, as she stated, “Now family, these are some old friends of mine, from high school.”

Lori pointed at the caucasian woman first, “As you know, this is Cynthia.”

Lori pointed at the asian man, as she commented, “This is Tommy.”

Tommy said, “It is a pleasure.”

Lori pointed at dark skinned woman, as she commented, “This is Denise.”

Denise said, “It is always nice to meet new people.”

Lori pointed at one of the caucasian men, as she said, “This is Wyatt.”

Next, Lori pointed at the other caucasian man, as she stated, “This is Kyle.”

After which, Lori pointed at the native american woman, as she said, “And this is Evelyn.” She then dropped her right hand back to her side.

Evelyn commented, “It is always interesting the journey life takes us on.”

Ed agreed, “That is very true.”

Stan asked, “Okay. We know at least one of you can change gender. What about the rest of you?”

Cynthia commented, “All of us. In one way, or another.”

Lewis said, “Interesting. We will have to talk about this more, later.”

Denise responded, “We would be more than happy too.”

Lori thought, 'While we are on the subject. I might as well tell them.'

Lori stated, “Before those that change, like I did. There is one thing you all need to be aware of. Like I said. When you reach old age, you will remain young in your alternate gender form. But, you will eventually lock in that gender. Like I am now locked as a woman.”

Tommy said, “That is interesting to know. Thank you.”

Evelyn asked, “So, how old are you?”

Lori teased, “Don't you know it is rude to ask a woman her age? But, to answer you question. Physically, I am in my mid-twenties. But, I am around seventy now.”

Denise stated, “We haven't been gone, but for a few years.”

Lori explained, “I have been gone for much longer. That is time dilation for you. But, I have lead a good life. And everything is fine.”

Denise replied, “We can clearly see that.”

Tommy said, “Though, we always did wonder what happened to you.”

Lori admitted, “Yea. I kind of left you all very abruptly.”

Wyatt said, “That is to put it mildly.”

Lori inquired, “So, how did you end up as bikers, traveling the multiverse?”

Cynthia answered, “After you left us. We looked into m-theory, and we found that it was possible, with our combined skills, know-how, and access to equipment, in Georgia Tech. And the most interesting thing happened. It seemed, in a nearby reality, a another research team at that Georgia Tech, was working on m-theory. That team was being lead by Professor Johnathan Durban, with his teachers, and his students. And our two portals met up.”

“For both sides, it was like the moon landing for both our teams.”

Lori said, “I am glad to hear that.”

Ed mentally reflected, 'That sounds like the Johnathan Durban whom Data met at the end of book two of Lee's stories. I will need to talk to Lori about this, later. I think it would be best if we don't mention to her old friends, about Lee's stories.'

Cynthia went onto say, “And there is more. As both of our groups were getting to know each other, members of a secret organization crashed our party on Durban's side. Fortunately, we were able to get all of Durban's team on our side of the portal, and close it behind us.”

“But, that did not slow them down for long. They soon followed up to our home reality. Meaning they were reality travelers. And they had the intent to either imprison us, or worse. Though, we were are able to use our portal to flee into the multiverse. That was went we joined Durban's group, as part of his crew. Whom he named, The Atlantic Riders.”

Stan complimented, “That is a cool name.”

Cynthia responded, “I know. It is a good name. And we like the name, as well. Anyway, we have been on the run since then, as we have fought this secret organization.”

Lori offered, “I have connections pretty powerful people. If you tell us more about your enemies, we might be able to help you.”

Denise commented, “As you pointed out. You have pretty good life here. And we do not want to wreck your life. Or, the lives of your family and friends.”

Tommy said, “Denise is right about this.”

Kyle stated, “Durban, and our crew, has be able to handle the situation, so far. And we are not going to drag you into our mess.”

Lori responded. “Alright, I appreciate your concerns.” She thought, 'I will find what is going on, later. And then, we will be able to help all of you, then.'

Suddenly, the radios on this bikers belts came on, with a man's voice, which stated, “To all Atlantic Riders. You are hear by ordered to avoid the Devil's Hotel. Which is the large hotel on the north side of the island, opposite side of the island where the casino is located. Also, avoid a bar called the Rats Nest. A dangerous group stays around both those places.”

“Still, if you are looking for a good time. You are more than welcome to join us at the casino. It is very fun here. And it is on the level.”

“And remember. Check in, if you get into trouble.”

Irene asked, “Who was that?”

Cynthia answered, “That was Professor Durban.”

Rico commented, “That is wise advice on his part.”

Wyatt inquired, “Why is that?”

Rico questioned, “Have you ever seen the Black Lagoon series?”

Wyatt replied, “Yea.”

Rico stated, “Well, that hotel and bar, are where Revy, Rock, and a number of their family and friends stay at, most of the time, in this town.”

Wyatt said, “Oh. Okay... Thanks for the warning.”

Rico replied, “You're welcome.”

Denise inquired, “Wait a minute, there was a man in that series, named Rico?”

Rico stated, “That was me. Long story short, like you. I got my gender changed. Only, I am locked in this form. And before you ask, we are from the anime version of that series. After the third season ended.”

Denise replied, “Okay.”

Evelyn asked, “And the casino?”

Ed stated, “Chang owns and runs it. Yes. That Chang. But, it is a legitimate business. As long as you are nice, have money, and don't cheat. You will be fine there.”

Tommy said, “We will keep that in mind.”

Stan cracked a grin, as he inquired, “So, what would you guys like to talk about?”

Evelyn turned to Stan, as she returned Stan's smile. She replied, “Oh, so much.”

Lori suggested, “Yes. Let's catch up, on old times.”

The group then continued talking for another hour, as they talked about what they had been up to, and what wonders they had seen in the multiverse.

Though, by the end of the hour, customers starting coming in for lunch rush. But, even then, the bikers stuck around, to keep their old and new friends company for a few more hours, before they left for the day.

Though, the bikers promised to return tomorrow morning. And Lori stated that she would look forward to their visit.

(_)

Later that afternoon, at the casino, Lee hand come back down to the gaming floor, alone. She looked around and she soon found whom she was looking for, Johnathan Durban. She saw that Durban was near the back of the gaming floor. He was just leaning against the wall, as he look at his men from a distance, as they gambled.

Lee walked up to him. When she came within ten feet of him, she stopped. She asked, “Durban, can I speak to you, for a moment?”

Durban turned to Lee, as he said, “Sure. What do you want to talk about, Lee?”

Lee commented, “Well, you said you fly around in a Klingon Bird of Prey. I wanted to ask you about that. But, in private. That is why I waited until now.”

Durban questioned, “Okay. What about that?”

Lee inquired, “Well, first let me get this straight. To confirm what you said earlier. You are traveling around the multiverse in a Klingon Bird of Prey?”

Durban replied, “That is correct, Lee.”

Lee inquired, “So, don't take this the wrong way. But, it sounds like you ripped the idea off, from the fanfic, Legion's Quest? Didn't you?”

Durban gave Lee a warm grin, as he said “Yep. I loved that story. I wished that epic fanfic had been completed. I have checked other realities, none of their versions are complete, either. And I know better than to look for those lunatics, in the multiverse.”

Lee stated, “Yes. It is wise to stay away from such people.”

Durban agreed, “Very true. And besides, I figured, if I was going to ride around in the multiverse. I might as well ride in style.”

Lee inquired, “I can agree with that. So, on another matter, I have to ask. What is it like working with Data?”

Durban answered, “Well, given he has matured and grown up, since before a met him, he is a great guy to be a friend with. He is funny, social... And nice to be around.”

Lee commented, “Well, you're welcome?”

Durban replied, “Huh?”

Lee thought, 'It is tempting to tell you about my stories. Though, I don't believe it would be a good idea, on my part. So that, you're welcome, is as close as I am going to get to telling you.' She said, “Nothing. So, how does Data handle traveling with all of you?”

Durban stated, “Data seems to not mind traveling with us. And he gets to explore the true finale frontier. The possibilities. The multiverse.”

Lee questioned, “Like what Q say at the end of The Next Generation series?”

Durban replied, “Exactly.”

Lee asked, “Do you think the Q know they are fictions characters?”

Durban responded, “Hell yes. After the seeing the whole Voyager Christmas Ornament scene, and that possibilities comment by Q, to Picard. In the TNG, All Good Things series finale. I think the Q know they are fiction characters. In the T.N.G. finale, you could see in that scene, the look on Q's face, as he was sorely tempted to tell Picard the truth. But, he could not do it. Though, with that, possibilities, comment, he did leave Picard some clues.”

“Plus, in the scene. You noticed how most of the time, when they changed reality, it was to some human setting. They were playing to the audience. And the main Q, we know, clearly likes to ham up his role.”

Lee giggled a little. She then commented, “Yes. You make some good points. Though, I hope the Q don't show up here.”

Durban commented, “And risk ruining our adventures I doubt it they will show up, anytime soon.”

Lee asked, “I hope you are right. So, do you think they are watching us, right now?”

Durban lips curled into a wicked grin, as he casually replied, “Oh yea.”

Lee inquired, “Anyway, back to Data. Has he seen his own series and movies?”

Durban answered, “Yes. He has seen and read the entire Star Trek franchise. Or, at least what we could find.”

Lee questioned, “How did he take watching his series?”

Durban dropped his grin, as he said, “He said he found it slightly embarrassing. Like watching videos of oneself as a kid.”

Lee replied, “In some ways that is true.”

Durban smiled, as he said, “Uh huh. But, not anymore. Though, he did squeal like a fanboy should, when he met a version of Sherlock Holmes, in one reality.”

Lee commented, “That is to be expected. Data is a big Sherlock Holmes fan. I mean, look at the way he is dressed, when he came into the casino. Don't get me wrong. He looks great in that outfit. But, he even occasionally dressed that way on the Enterprise. Outside the holodecks.”

Durban agreed, “True.”

Lee thought, 'It is best that I wrap this up, before one of us says something to the other, that we shouldn't.' She said, “Well, it was good talking to you, Durban.”

Durban replied, “You too, Lee.”

Lee then turned back and headed for the front elevator bay, and the penthouse apartment.

Meanwhile, Durban turned back to look at his crew, whom he check on, to make sure they were all having fun, while staying out of trouble.

(_)

That evening, after dark, Revy, Rock, their family and friends heading for their occasional party at the Rats Nest.

Those that attending included, Revy, Rock, Dutch, Benny, and Janet. All of whom were sitting around a table in the center of the room. Of the five adults, Revy and Rock were sitting beside each other, with Rock to Revy's right side.

Also, given Revy was drinking. She was not armed.

Sitting at the large round table, in the left, back corner of the room, in clockwise order, was Sarah, Molly, Rebecca, Yukio, Kristina, and Nodoka.

In the table next to that corner table, by the left windows, was Ranma, Akira, Natsuru, Mikoto, Yurika.

Fortunately, Balalaika and B were able to get off that night, and they sat a table, by the left, front corner, with Aeryn and Violin.

At a table, in the front, sat Shenhua, Lotton, and Sawyer.

At a table, in the back, near the middle, sat Roberta, Eda, Yolanda, and Hernan. With Roberta inviting Hernan to come. So, she could spend some time with him.

The six toddlers that were part of the group, Balalaika's son, Dmitri, B's daughter, Alexandra, Lotton's son Thomas, Shenhua's daughter, Wenqian, Sawyer's daughter, Ivy, and Violin and Aeryn's daughter, Gilina, were being babysat by some trusted members of Hotel Moscow.

The one person in the group that did not come was Barbossa. He stated that at his age, he would prefer to rest in his suite, at the Devil's Hotel, during such a late hour in the evening.

The only other person in the room was Bao, whom was serving them drinks. Given that it was usually a busy night at the Devil's Hotel restaurant, for Melanie, and she could not come to the Rats Nest, to help out her longtime girlfriend, that evening.

Their drinks ranged from bottled of beer, to mixed drinks, to wines, hard liquors, whiskey, tequila, and even vodka. Those that were driving that night, as designated drivers, were each having a bottle of beer.

At the table, in back, where Roberta, Hernan, Eda, and Yolanda were sitting, Hernan's displayed a slightly stiffen body language. Roberta could tell that Hernan was not completely comfortable sitting around so many women.

While he was find in the much bigger, more roomy restaurant of the Devil's Hotel. The Rats Nest bar was more confined. And Hernan, a married man, was deeply aware of this fact.

Roberta said to Hernan, “Relax. You're fine.”

Hernan took a drink from his bottle of beer, as he looked over at Roberta. He then set his bottle of beer down, as he nodded once in her direction, to confirm that he heard her.

Unfortunately, Roberta was not the only one to noticed Hernan's composure. Eda turned to Hernan, as she teased, “I won't be so sure. So, how did you convince your wife to let you visit all us beautiful women, in a bar, of all places?”

Hernan turned to Eda, as he calmly responded, “My wife and I trust each other. We have known each other for two decades. And we have been happily married for over the last decade. She knows nothing is going to happen.”

Eda playfully replied, “Are you so sure?”

Hernan stated, “After spending a few lunches and dinners, with your group. It doesn't take a genius to tell that, besides you, only Yolanda, are single. Even Roberta has Garcia.”

Yolanda had been paying attention to the conversation in front of her. She complimented, “That is very observant of you.”

Hernan looked over at Yolanda, as he said, “Thank you, Yolanda. Though, I admit I am not sure what the dynamic is for the younger women here. I can still see there is something going on with them.”

Eda commented, “We are not actually sure, ourselves.”

Hernan looked at Eda, as he stated, “Anyway, Roberta is my sister. I know too much about you, Eda, for it workout between us.” He turned to Yolanda, as he continued, “And, please don't take this the wrong way, Yolanda. But, I believe the cultural gap is likely too wide between you and I.”

Yolanda commented, “No offense taken.”

Hernan replied, “Thank you.” He turned back to Eda, as he said, “So, as you can see, my wife has very little too worry about.”

Eda conceded, “Point taken.”

(_)

At a nearby table, near the center of the room, where Revy, Rock, Dutch, Benny, and Janet were sitting, Revy inquired, “So, did you hear about those bikers that showed up today?”

Benny said, “Yea. But, none of them have come around the hotel.”

Rock mentioned, “Actually, when I heard about the bikers, I called Chang. He told them to steer clear of us, the hotel, and this bar. And they seem to have listened.”

Dutch complimented, “It was wise of him to do so.”

Janet stated, “Yea. It avoids trouble for all of us.”

Rock agreed, “True. And it looks like we don't have anything to worry from them.”

Revy shrugged, as she said, “Oh well.” She then turned to Rock, as she put her right arm over Rock's left shoulder. She continued, “We can have fun, in other ways, tonight.”

Rock looked over at Revy, as she gave her lover a warm smile. She said, “I look forward to it, Revy.”

Revy returned Rock's smile, as she replied, “That's the spirit.”

(_)

At that moment, elsewhere, five adults then found themselves in outside, in front of some windows, on the front, right side of a bar.

Those five adults were Pedro Del Soto, Matthew McCormick, Fabiola Iglesias, Matt Bluestone, Leigharch. They had just teleport to a bar, in the multiverse, to get a drink.

The windows were to the right side of the group, with the group standing on the right side of the front of the building, facing the door in the middle of said building.

And all five members of the group looked tired, from the long day they just had.

Pedro put away his reality device, as he said, with tiredness in his tone voice, “Guys, let's get a drink, and figure out what to do next.”

Fabiola suggested, “Finding a place to rest afterward, would be nice.”

Matthew replied, “Both sound like great ideas.”

Fabiola said, “Since I am not driving, I can have some hard liquor.”

Matt commented, “Of course. That is because we don't have a car.”

Leigharch suggested, “We could always borrow one. I promise I won't wreck it.”

Matt groaned, “Just don't.”

Leigharch replied, “Okay. I won't.”

Matt said, “I could really use a beer.”

Fabiola commented, “All of us, could.”

Pedro said, “Okay. Let's head inside.”

As the five members of the groups walked towards the door, Matt requested, “Leigharch, hang back a second.”

Leigharch looked over at Matt, as he said, “Sure.”

Meanwhile, Pedro, Fabiola, and Matthew took the lead, with Matthew opening the door, for Fabiola and then Pedro. Matthew then closed the door behind them.

Matt and Leigharch continued walking behind them, but as a much slower pace.

Matt looked at Leigharch, as he asked, “I have a question. From my understanding, you have dealt with violently insane women on a regular basis, without being harmed?”

Leigharch answered, “Yes.”

Matt asked, “How did you do it?”

Leigharch cracked a grin, as he stated, “Simple. I respect them. And I used a firm voice with them, only within reason. It also helps when they know I am as batshit crazy as they are. Actually, more so. I have been committed to the looney bin before. They cannot make that claim.”

Matt let out a laugh. He thought, 'I wonder.' He inquired, “What is your definition of, insanity?”

Leigharch answered, “I take Einstein's approach to the meaning of insanity. He applied his statement to experiments, but I believe that his statement can also be applied to life, in general. That being that if someone does the same thing over and over again, yet that person is expecting different results, then that person is insane.'

Matt thought, with worry, 'I find it terrifying that is the most lucid comment I have heard all year. From a committed lunatic, no less.” He hesitantly said, “I can see where you are coming from.”

Leigharch suggested, “Good. Now, let's head inside before our friends miss us.”

Matt agreed, “That would be a good idea.”

Both men then started walking towards the front entrance to the bar. When they made it to the door, they Matt opened the door, and Leigharch was the first to walk inside. Matt then followed, while closing the door behind them.

Leigharch and Matt stood behind Pedro, Fabiola and Matthew, at the front of the entrance, with the three of adults having their backs turned to them. The two men overhead Pedro stated, “You have got to be kidding me.”

Pedro's group were back in the Rats Nest, with the both those inside, sitting down, and those whom just entered, looking at each other.

Matthew commented, with disbelief, “Talk about coming full circle. We are back in the
Rats Nest...” He turned to Pedro, as he stated, “You do know that I am going to be asking Fabiola to do the reality jumps, from now on. Because you just cannot seem to get these teleports exactly right.”

Pedro looked over at Matthew, as he replied, “I admit it. I messed up. And I don't blame you for having that opinion. We will have to talk about it, later. In private, if we make it that far.”

Matthew said, “I am with you on that.”

Pedro and Matthew then looked back out among the crowd in front of them.

Across the room, from the entrance, Balalaika sat in her chair, as she focused on looking at Pedro, Matthew, and Fabiola. She cracked a grin, as she said, “Well, isn't this a surprise.”

Beside Balalaika, B commented, “Yes. Chang was right. They returned on their own.”

Balalaika thought, 'I think I will call Chang about them, later. Just to let him know he was right. I do believe that credit belongs, where credit is due.'

At the front of the room, Pedro saw Hernan in the back of the bar, sharing a table with Roberta. He thought, 'What is Hernan doing here? And why is he sharing a table with Roberta, Eda, and Yolanda? I got a distinct feeling that I don't want to know the answer. But, I am going find out anyway,'

At a table, near in the center of the room, Revy casually said, “Hi guys. We were wondering where you went off too?”

Roberta spoke up, “Fabiola, what have you been up to?”

Fabiola turned to Roberta, as she replied, “Actually, a lot.” She then noticed the black bearded man sitting next to Roberta. She asked, “Roberta, who is that man with you?”

Roberta grinned, as she said, “I will tell you in a minute.”

At the table near the entrance, Shenhua's jaw dropped at seeing the blond man in green clothing.

Shenhua quickly composed herself, as she asked, with disbelief, and hope, in her tone of voice, “Leigharch, is that you?”

Leigharch waved his right hand, while smiling towards Shenhua. He happily said, “Hi Shenhua. Long time, no see.”

Shenhua collected herself, as she responded, “That is an understatement.”

Leigharch complimented, “I am glad to see you are in good health.”

Shenhua replied, “I am glad you look fine, as well.”

Meanwhile, Revy used her right hand, to pointed at Matt, as she said, “I know all of them. But, who are you?” She then dropped her right hand back to her lap.

Matt didn't even bat an eyelash, as he turned to Revy. He flatly replied, “I'm the new guy.”

Revy giggled a little from Matt's reply. She then said, “When I look at you, you have that, seen it all, look.”

Matt smirked, as he responded, “That is because I have. And running with this group has just been a wonderful vacation.”

Revy inquired, “What is your name?”

Matt answered, “I would rather not say. I have found that such answers seem to attract the wrong type of attention.”

Revy responded, “Okay. What do you do?”

Matt inquired, “Have you seen the MIB movies?”

Revy answered, “Yea.”

Matt answered, “Think that. Only with less pay. Worse hours. And less respect.”

Revy let out a laugh. She stated, “I like you, already. You can come in.”

Suddenly, Pedro group heard a familiar voice, from behind them, say, “Actually, they will be coming with me.”

Those sitting down saw who it was, as Akira commented, “Oh hell.”

Violin said, “We don't see that every day.”

Aeryn agreed, “No. We don't.”

The five adult group, by the front entrance, turned around to see the door open, with the black power armored man standing only five feet from them.

Matthew complained, “Not him again.”

The black powersuited man commented, in his modulated, electronic tone of voice, “Yes. Me again.”

The black armored man ordered, “Surrender now, Mexican and Lawyer.”

Matthew thought, with annoyance, 'One time before when he once caught up to us. He asked for our names. And Pedro and I answered, that we were the Mexican and the Lawyer, as a joke. And he has not stopped calling us that, since then.'

Several of those inside the bar immediately put two and two together. Including Revy.

Revy questioned, in surprised, “You two were the men from Caracas.”

Pedro and Matthew turned back to looked at Revy, as they admitted, almost in unison, “Yes.”

Pedro turned to Matthew, as he commented, “And that was such a wonderful night.”

Matthew looked over at Pedro, as he agreed, “Yep. So much fun. You really did teach them to be badasses.”

Pedro said, “I know.”

Matt flatly requested, “Guys. Can you reminisce, later. After we deal with the situation at hand.”

Pedro looked over at Matt, as he replied, “Okay.”

Matthew and Pedro then turned to look at each other, as Matthew said, “Well, time to pay the piper. You know the deal. You kick the ass, I do the paper work.”

Pedro inquired, “How? He is in powerarmor, and all I got in my Sistema.”

Matthew responded, “Listen, I am getting the shorter in the stick here. I got to explain what is going on to these hyper-violent women. This cannot be any worse than that time we crashed that Wookiee wedding. They were not happy. But, damn that cake was good.”

Pedro agreed, “Yea. The cake was good. It almost made the whole party crashing worth it.”

Revy complain, “What are you two talking about?”

Fabiola turned to Revy, as she answered, “It involved an incident in the Star Wars reality. I will tell you, later.”

Revy thought, 'That must be some story.'

Matthew turned to Revy, as he requested, “Please, give us a minute, Rev.”

Revy stated, “Don't call me Rev. It is Revy.”

The powerarmored man turned his helmet towards Revy, as he inquired, “Revy? Oh my god, it is you girls. And a few I don't recognize. Or, worry that I do?”

Rock asked, “Who are you?”

Black armored man pulled up his faceplate to reveal himself. He questioned, “Recognize me know?”

Revy, Rock, Dutch, Benny, said, almost in unison, “Abrego?!”

While, Abrego face was a very unhealthy pale shade of what. He was still recognizable.

Abrego said, in his normal voice, “Yes. It is I. And is that bastard Chang here? Or, is it bitch, now?”

Revy answered, “It depends on Chang's mood. Though, Chang is here.”

Abrego lowered back his mask, as he said, in his voice modulated tone, “Good. After I am finish with you all, I am going to kill Chang for stripping me of my organization, robbing my men of their manhood, and trapping me inside this suit!”

Roberta dared, “I would like to see you attempt that.”

Abrego laughed. He then stated, “This powerarmor is completely surrounded with an armor tight forcefield. Try your worst, bitches. You will wear yourselves out, and then I will kill you all.”

Violin stood up, as she flatly said, “I think not.”

Abrego turned to look at Violin, as he asked, “Who are you?”

Violin walked over to Abrego, with Pedro's group parting out of the way, to let her pass. As she came to a stop right in front of Abrego, she said, “I am Violin Cephon Shinmyou Crichton. I am the reincarnation of John Crichton. My mother is Birdy Tsutomu Cephon Shinmyou. Do any of those names mean anything to you?”

Abrego realized, as he thought, 'Gomez did mention a Birdy... Oh crap.' He asked, with worry evident, in his modulated voice, “It is too late to back out now?”

Violin lips curled into a wicked grin, as she replied, “Oh yes. Most certainly, yes.” Then, with her super-strength, she used her right first to punch Abrego in the chest, sending him back into the street. Which had rarely had cars and other vehicles drive by, at that time of night.

Violin then used her super-speed, to catch up to Abrego, whom landed in the middle of the street. She then continued throwing Abrego around, as she beat on him, with a mixture of speed and strength that was about frightening and impressive.

Eda stated, “Let's go check this fight out.”

Everyone whom was sitting down, had gotten out of their seats, and headed for the front entrance.

Matthew noticed Hernan and Roberta looking at them, as he suggested, “Pedro, Fabiola, I think we should stay inside for a minute.”

Both Pedro and Fabiola noticed Hernan and Roberta looking at them, as well, as they were slowing approaching them, with the group.

Pedro replied, “Yes. I agree.”

Fabiola said, “Yes. It will be good catch up with what is going on.”

As the women passed by Pedro's group, to the outside, a few of the women stayed inside, with Pedro, Matthew and Fabiola, along with one man.

Matt and Leigharch turned to Pedro. Matt said, “I am going to go check out the fight.”

Leigharch commented, “So, am I.”

Pedro looked over at the two men, as he said, “Have fun.” He then looked back over at Roberta, and Hernan.

Matt and Leigharch then turned, and heading outside, as well.

Meanwhile, the only once left inside, besides Pedro, Matthew, and Fabiola, was Bao, Roberta, and Hernan.

By then, Bao was standing, in the back of the room, on the outer side of the counter.

As Bao watched the other five adults, she thought, 'I think it might be best if I stay in here for the moment. To keep things from becoming violent, and destructive to my bar. Again.'

Meanwhile, the others inside the room, looked at each other.

Pedro inquired, “Hi Hernan. What are you doing here?”

Hernan turned to Pedro. He answered, “Hi Pedro. Long story short, as insane at it sound, I am Roberta's male counterpart for this reality.”

Fabiola commented, “Really?” She turned to Roberta, with Roberta looking back at her.

Roberta said, “Yes. It is true. And there is more.”

Pedro thought about for a few seconds. He then shrugged, as he said, “That makes so much sense.” He then realized, as he thought, 'Hold on. Maria kind of looks like...' He began, “And Maria...”

Hernan thought, in amusement, 'Just as Rock predicted. Pedro figured it out.' He responded, “Yes. My wife is the female counterpart to Garcia.”

Pedro thought, 'I pity any fool that messes with their family, again.'

Fabiola asked, “And you're married to Garcia's counterpart?”

Hernan turned Fabiola, as he said, “You must be Fabiola. It is nice to meet you. And yes. I am happily married to her.”

Roberta commented, “Maria is a wonderful woman. I have met their family. And they also have three well behaved kids.”

Fabiola replied, “Cool. Does Garcia know?”

Roberta stated, “Actually, all of us visited Garcia for a few days, last Saturday. Local time.” She continued, in a sad tone of voice, “We could not find you. So, we had to do it without you.”

Fabiola thought, 'That reminds me. I need to call Annie, later tonight. And let her know we are back.' She responded, “It is alright. I understand. So, how did your visit go?”

Roberta happily stated, “Wonderfully. Much like Hernan and I. Garcia and Maria consider each other brother and sister. Also, the children were well behaved during their time at the Lovelace household.”

Fabiola said, “That is great to hear. And I do look forward to meeting Maria, and the children.”

Hernan commented, “Give the lateness of the hour. You are going to have to wait, until at least tomorrow, before you can see my wife and children.”

Fabiola replied, “That will be fine.”

Matthew stated, “As fun as this is. Pedro and I probably need to get out of here, before your friends come back.” He turned Pedro, as he continued, “Though, I am not suggesting a reality jump. It is clear that is not working.”

Pedro looked over at Matthew, as he said, “I wasn't planning too. But, you are right. We need to get out of here.” He thought, 'And I know a perfect place to hide.”

Bao stated, “Head out the back door, guys. And you will be fine.”

Pedro turned to Bao, as he replied, “Thanks, Bao.”

Bao said, “You're welcome.” She thought, 'It doesn't hurt to help my friends, out of a jam, especially, when one of them is the local police chief.'

Pedro looked at Hernan and Roberta, as he commented, “I am glad all of you found each other. I am glad your family is doing fine. And as much as I would like to stay and talk. We need to get out of here.”

Hernan said, “I appreciate it, Pedro.”

Roberta stated, “No problem, Pedro.”

Pedro turned to Fabiola, as he requested, “And Fabiola. Let Matt and Leigharch know we had to leave, but we are not reality jumping, without them.”

Fabiola replied, “I will.”

Hernan thought, 'Matt and Leigharch. I guess they are to the two men with these three. And given Shenhua spoke to the blond. It is a good guess that Leigharch is the blond man. And he is the same Leigharch from Black Lagoon. Though, I don't know who Matt is. Still, it is nice to put a name to each of their faces.'

'And on the matter of Pedro and Matthew. I don't think I will try to convince Pedro and Matthew to not leave. It is clear that them staying, would cause major problems for them. And from Roberta and Melanie have told me, concerning those two. I can see why.'

Pedro said, “Thank you. See you later, then.”

Matthew commented, “Yea. Goodbye.”

Both men then walked passed the others, as they headed for the door to the storage room, on the back, right corner of the bar room, which would lead to the back door to the building.

As soon as Pedro and Matthew were out of sight, Bao turned back to the group. She suggested, “Now, how about we go check on that fight, happening outside.”

Roberta complimented, “Good idea.”

Fabiola commented, “I have nowhere better to be.”

Hernan said, “This fight should be interesting.”

Bao stated, “Then, let's head out there, and watch.”

The four adults then walked out of the front entrance, to join the others, that were watching the one sided fight outside, between Violin and Abrego, with Violin on the winning side of the battle.

A few seconds later, as Hernan, Roberta, Bao, and Fabiola joined the crowd that had gathered right outside the front entrance of the Rats Nest. The three adults them watched with the rest of the crowd, as the fight, or more aptly, the beatdown that was commencing on the empty street in front of them.

Violin showed how skilled a powerful fighter she was. In the way she used both her super-strength and super-speed in turning the black armored, human ping-pong ball, between her fists, feet, and the ground, without seriously harming Abrego. This both kept Abrego from reacting, and also slowly broke down his powerarmor.

Eda asked, “I wonder if Abrego is still alive?”

Aeryn answered, “He is. Violin has not interest in killing him. You can tell this by the fact his armor is still in one piece. Violin is hitting him around just enough to keep him off balance, while wearing down the armor. Though, at the same time, Violin is preventing serious harm to the person inside the armor.”

Eda inquired, “It sounds like this is not the first time she has done this? It is?”

Aeryn replied, “No. It isn't.”

Benny commented, “Either way, Abrego is going to feel this in the morning.” She thought, 'There is also no point in creating a betting pool. The end of this fight is a foregone conclusion.'

Aeryn agreed, “That is very likely.”

Akira commented, “This is like watching Thor kick Ironman's ass.”

Natsuru replied, “I know. And Violin is moving so fast, and with such power behind her strikes, that Abrego cannot react.”

Balalaika looked towards Aeryn, as she said, “I did not realize your spouse was so strong.”

Aeryn turned to Balalaika, as she responded, “Given Violin's peaceful personality, people tend to forget that she is a half-alien super-soldier. Given my Sebacean background, I can only imagine how powerful our daughter will be. If our son was any indication, being just half human and half Sebacean, she will definitely be a handful, as she grows older.”

Balalaika replied, “I bet.”

Aeryn joked, “Also, I no longer have to worry about accidentally breaking her in bed, like I did when she was John.”

Balalaika laughed for a few seconds.

Nearby, B overheard the two women, as she thought, 'And I have no doubt that those two are rougher in bed than Balalaika and myself.'

Suddenly, Violin threw Abrego onto his back, on the paved road. She then stood six feet from him, as she just quietly looked him.”

Everyone in the crowd turned to look at scene, on the empty street, play out.

Janet asked, “Why did you stop hitting him?”

Violin kept looking, at Abrego, whom was still laying on the ground, as she answered, “Because. It's over.”

A few seconds later, everyone watched as Abrego's armor, from the top of his helmet to the tip of his boots, started to crack.

The cracks quickly grew for a couple of seconds, until the armor literally shattered, and fell apart, to the ground, revealing a very surprised Abrego. With him only his boxer shorts.

While Abrego looked at Violin, he had a surprised expression on his face. Though, he did not say a word to anyone.

Janet complimented, “Not bad.”

Violin continued to looking at Abrego, as she replied, “Thank you.”

Rock requested, “Guys. Let me talk to him.”

Balalaika stated, “Go ahead. I have nothing to say to that fool.”

Dutch said, “Do what you got to do, Rock. You will likely get answers out of him, the quickest.” She mentally added, 'And least messy.'

Rock walked over to stand beside Violin, to Violin's left side, as both she and Violin looked down at Abrego, whom was laying on his back

Rock saw that Abrego looking up at her and Violin. She also noticed that like Abrego's face, the rest of his body was very pale. Also, he had several bruises start to show all of his body. And though, he otherwise unharmed, he was in no shape to move, left alone stand under his own power.

Rock thought, 'That paleness over his entire body, only confirms what he hinted at. That he is very unhealthy. As such, I need to wrap this up quickly.'

Rock stated, “I have questions for you.”

Abrego replied, in a defeated on tone of voice, “Go ahead. It is not like it matters anymore. By the way, who are you?”

Rock replied, “You know me. I am Rock.”

Abrego responded, “The only Rock I know of is a man....” Rock saw realization dawn in his eyes, as Abrego continued, “Oh. Chang got you, as well?”

Rock said, “Correct. So, what do you mean, when you said, you were trapped in your suit?”

Abrego coyly replied, “It is a long story.”

Rock suppressed a chuckle, as she thought, 'It more ways than you likely realize. Still, we need answers.' She pointed, “It is not like you have anywhere to go.”

Abrego spat out, “Perhaps. But, I am dead, either way.”

Rock inquired, “What do you mean?”

Abrego answered, “Your friend here trashed my suit. There is a reasons it partly resembles an Ironman suit. Because it was partly based on those suits. And my suit also functioned as my life support system.”

Rock questioned, “How long do you have?”

Abrego replied, “I am not sure. But, not long.”

Rock stated, “Then, start from the beginning. There might be something you know that will allow us to save your life.”

Abrego inquired, “You would still try to save me after I threatened your life?”

Rock answered, “I am in a relationship with Revy, whom has threatened my life more times than everyone else combined.”

Nearby, Revy thought, 'I will let her comment slide. Because, I use to be that bad. But, not any more.'

Abrego commented, “We always thought you were crazy for being involved with her.”

Rock said, “I won't argue that point with you. Now, tell us where you have been, all this time?”

Abrego stated, “Well, it started back in Roanapur. Soon after the heads of the families, including myself, agreed to put Chang in charge. So, we could profit from his little multiversal ventures. I see now that was a big mistake.”

Rock thought, 'Yes. They say hindsight is twenty-twenty.'

Abrego continued, “Anyway, one night, Chang invited over the enforcers and the bosses of the families. Save for Hotel Moscow. To a party. And Chang must have spiked the drinks, because I passed out. Along with, I am guessing, everyone else Chang invited. The next thing I know, I am inside a vat of green goo, with a mask on my face. Plugs and wires connected to me. While stark naked.'

Rock thought, 'This is what happened to Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer, to get them into the vats.'

Abrego went onto say, “The only reason I came to was the sedatives they used on the others did not work on me. This was due to when I was younger, I use to abuse tranquilizers. And due to that, I have built a high tolerance to sedatives.”

“I pulled off everything that was on me, except the mask. Until I was able to get the hatch at the top of the vat I was in, off. Then, I removed the mask, and got off. I soon made it to the ground, and I realized I was in a large, dimly lit, warehouse, with several other vats.”

Rock thought, 'Actually, that was one of the vat levels in Chang's tower.'

Abrego stated, “Then, I saw who was in the other vats and I realized what Chang was doing to my men, and others. And I what he was planning to do to me. Soon after, I heard some guards coming, and not intention of being caught. So, I quickly ducked into a nearby empty room.”

“In the room, there was some sort of portal system. Considering the metal circle looked like a Star Gate, it did not take a genius to figure out that it was a way out for me. And I saw the control, were near the gate.”

“Fortunately, after fiddling with the controls, for about a minute, I was able to get the machine to work, and I jumped in, before anyone found me.”

“Suddenly, found myself in Japan. In the middle of the day. In another reality. Though, in a similar time period. There, I was soon found by someone that would eventually become my benefactor. After explaining myself to him, he offered to both help me, and to give me a job. Of which, I gladly accepted his offer.”

“Then, I started getting sick. Fortunately, he provided me with this powersuit, which your friend just destroyed, that kept me alive. Sort of like the black suite Vader wore, to survive. Only, it is not breathing that is my problem. But, immunity problems. And that suit kept me alive, and stopped my body from dying. Now, it is gone, and I am a dead man.”

Rock thought, 'He was just like I was. Which means we can save his life. Though, he is going to have to become a woman to do it.”

Rock said, “I believe we can save your life. But, first tell us who you work for?”

Abrego responded, “No. As much as I would love to tell you. That is the one answer that I can trade for. Though, I am more than willing to give you the name, in exchange for my life. So, there is no need for threats against me. Now, you say you can save me?”

Rock thought, while mild annoyance, 'I forgot what fools some of those in Roanapur gangsters came be.'

Rock answered, with a hint of annoyance in her tone of voice, “Yes. But, first give us the name of your employer?”

Abrego calmly stated, “After you save me. I will answer your question. We both know this is the only leverage I have. And it is a simple trade. My life for this knowledge.”

Rock responded, “Fine, Abrego. We will do it that way. And your negotiation skills have gotten better over the years.”

Abrego commented, “Thank you. And you of all people know what a person is capable of when they are cornered and desperate.”

Rock mentioned, “You are correct about that. Still, we are going to have to see Chang, to save your life.”

Abrego replied, “That figures.”

Rock said, “Not to worry. He has learned his lesson.”

Abrego stated, “If anyone else had told me that. I won't believe them. You, on the other hand, try to be honest. So, I will trust you. And I won't fight going to him.”

Rock replied, “Thank you.” She thought, 'He probably realizes what is going to be done to him, to save his life. But, I won't stay it outright. Because, I don't want him to have second thoughts on resisting me. Now, to get some help.'

Rock turned to the group in front of the Rats Nest, as she asked, “Could someone help me take Abrego to Chang?” She mentally reflected, 'I don't want to use the GTO, considering that is how Dutch, Benny, Janet, and Revy, are going to get back to the hotel.'

Eda commented, “Normally, I would decline. But, he clearly has information we need. And him dying will not give us that information. So, we can take my car.” She thought, 'Though, River and Annie could pull that information from his mind. But, both of them have made it very clear, that unless it is an immediate life or death situation. They will not do that.'

Yolanda said, “I will go with you, too.”

Revy said, “I might as well, also go.”

Rock looked over at them, as she said, “Thanks.” She turned back to Violin, as she requested, “Violin. Care to help us get Abrego into Eda's car?”

Violin turned to Rock, as she replied, “Sure.” She then looked back over at Abrego, as she approached him. She then scoped up the larger man in her arms. And, with little effort, she turned, as she started walking towards the Rats Nest parking, on the left side of the building.

Abrego did not fight Violin, nor did he say a word.

(_)

A few minutes later, Abrego was back of Eda's four door car, while Eda, Rock, Yolanda, and Revy, were inside as well. Which was parked, in the Rats Nest parking lot, to the left of the bar.

Meanwhile, after helping Abrego into the car, Violin had walked back over to join her wife in the group that was looking at them, from the front of the Rats Nest.

Inside Eda's car, Eda was in the left driver's seat. to her right, in the front passenger seat, sat Rock. And in the backseat, behind Rock, was Revy. To Revy's left was Abrego. And to Abrego's left was Yolanda, whom was behind Eda.

Yolanda warned, “Do not try anything, Abrego?”

Abrego turned to Yolanda, as he commented, “I won't dream of it. By the way, who are you?”

Yolanda replied, “Yolanda.”

Abrego asked, in surprised, “From the Rip Off Church?”

Yolanda said, “The very same.”

Abrego complimented, “Damn. You look great.”

Yolanda calmly replied, “Thank you.”

On the other side of Abrego, Revy could not help but giggle a little at Abrego's response to Yolanda's restored youth, and right eye.

By then, Eda had used her key to start her car, and she rolled slowly rolled her vehicle out of the parking lot, and onto the road.

Meanwhile, Rock, had pulled out her cellphone, as she dialed the number to Chang's cellphone. To contact Chang, about was had happened, and what was going on.

(_)

As the group, by the front of the Rats Nest, watched Eda's car speed away, down the road, Matt looked around, including the windows, into the bar, to see that Pedro and Matthew were gone.

Matt turned towards the group, as he asked, “Where are Pedro and Matthew?”

Fabiola turned to Matt, as she answered, “They had to leave. But, they did not reality jump.”

Molly said, “It figures those two would disappear, while we are distracted.”

Leigharch inquired, “Why would they run from you? I never did get the straight story on that, from them.”

Shenhua said, “We had questions for them. Though, we also have questions for you, Leigharch?”

Leigharch turned to Shenhua, as he replied, “Sure, Shenhua. I will tell you everything that has happened to me, sense we last spoke. And you can tell me what has happened to you. But, not tonight. It has been a long day for us.”

Shenhua shrugged, as she replied, “Okay.”

Dutch stated, “And I doubt they are stupid enough to head back to Pedro's home, the police stations, nor the casino, tonight.”

Benny agreed, “You are likely right, Dutch.”

Balalaika said, “They will turn up again, later.”

Janet responded, “Yea. They will turn up. I am sure that if they stay, Pedro will at least check in on the police, at the police station. Considering, he cares greatly about his subordinates.”

Balalaika complimented, “That is a good point, Janet.”

Janet replied, “Thank you.”

Matt inquired, “Okay. With Pedro and Matthew gone. What are Leigharch and I suppose to do? Pedro was the one with the money and transportation.”

Leigharch looked over at Matt, as he said, “Thanks, for including me in your question.”

Matt turned to Leigharch, as he replied, “No problem.”

Matt and Leigharch then turned to the crowd of women.

Fabiola stated, “Simple. We will just take you two back to the Devil's Hotel, with us. I already share a room there, with Roberta. And we will get a room for each other you.”

Roberta commented, “Yes. I am more than happy to pay for the rooms of two of Fabiola's friends.”

Matt looked over at Roberta, as he thought, 'I never thought I would say this to Roberta, though...' He responded, “Thank you. Though, why is the hotel called the Devil's Hotel?”

Roberta said, “Not to worry. It is a good hotel.”

Matt replied, “Okay.” He thought, 'It is best not to look a gift horse in the mouth.'

Fabiola turned to Roberta, as she admitted, “Still, we need a ride.”

Roberta stated, “I brought my car here. So, that should not be a problem.”

Fabiola replied, “Good. And thank you.”

Roberta responded, “No problem. Also, I already told Hernan and his family this. I went back home, and talked with Garcia, earlier today. And he said that he will be able to come visit us in a day, or two. Our time.”

Fabiola said, “Cool. I look forward to seeing him.”

Roberta replied, “He feels the same way about you.”

Dutch commented, “Well, with that said. It might be a good idea to call it a night.”

Balalaika replied, “I agree.”

Roberta said, “So do I.”

Balalaika commented, “Well, tonight was more entertaining, than most of our nights here. We will have to do this again, sometime.”

Roberta stated, “I looked forward having this fun, again, as well.”

B turned to Lotton, Shenhua, Sawyer, Violin, and Aeryn, as she offered, “I will call ahead. So, your children will be ready to be picked up, from the Maria Zeleska, when you get there, in a few minutes.”

Violin said, “That will be fine.”

Lotton replied, “Thank you.”

Shenhua requested, “And please thank them for watching over our children.”

B said, “I will.”

Leigharch noticed this, as he thought, 'So, Shenhua is a mother. And she has children. I will ask her about that matter, later. It is too late, tonight, to discuss such topics. And I am way too tired to do so.'

Meanwhile, Hernan looked over at Roberta, as he stated, “I need to take my car, and go home. It is late enough, as is. And I need to get back home to my wife and children, before it gets any later.”

Roberta turned to Hernan, as she replied, “I understand. And we will talk, tomorrow.”

Then, all of them headed for their vehicles. Except for Bao.

As Bao walked back inside her bar, to clean up, and start to close the bar for the night, she happily thought, 'At least my bar was not damaged this time.'

(_)

Fifteen minutes later, Eda drove her car into the parking lot of the Daiyu Palace Casino.

As Eda drove her car under the large awning, in front of the casino, in the backseat of her car, Abrego was feeling worse, as he stated, “I can feel myself starting to fade.”

Rock turned to her left, as she looked between the front seats, to the backseat. She said, “Don't worry. We are about to get you some help.”

Rock then sat back in her seat, as they came to a stop, she saw, on the curb.

Rock saw, to their right, on the sidewalk, Chang, Simon, some personnel is medic scrubs, and a gurney were waiting for them. Chang was about twenty feet from Simon, and the other personnel there. And Chang was dress in his usual, professional clothing.

Rock also noticed some valets nearby, though the women were avoiding Chang, and the medical team.

Rock thought, 'I am glad I called ahead.'

Rock then felt as Eda put her car in park.

Rock stated, “Eda, stay with the car. Revy, Yolanda, please help Abrego out, and onto the gurney. I am going to go talk to Chang.” She then opened her door, and got out of the car.

As Rock walked towards Chang, Eda turned of the ignition of her vehicle. She then got out of her car. Though, she just stood by the open, driver's side door, as she watched what was going on, from across the roof of her car.

Revy opened her door, and got out, as well. She then started to gently pull Abrego out, as on the inside the car, on the opposite side of Abrego, Yolanda was helping to gently push Abrego out of the car.

Fortunately, Abrego was still awake enough to help himself out of the vehicle.

As this went on, Rock came to a stop, in front of Chang.

Chang looked at Rock, as he said, “Hi Rock. You seem to bring me the most interesting of people.”

Rock thought, 'It is too late at night for these sorts of games.' She calmly replied, “I am glad you agreed to help Abrego.”

Chang responded, “Of course. I always wondered what happened to him. Now, we know. For the most part.”

Rock asked, “Can you save him?”

Chang said, “Well, since you told me he came out of the vat process early, like you did. The solution is simple enough. He has to undergo the vat process. Fortunately, we have vats on hand to help Abrego. I just hope he likes becoming a woman. Though, the brainwashing will help with that part.”

Rock responded, “Yes. Abrego will just have to adjust, like the rest of us did. And when she gets out of the vat, we will be able to find out who she was working for.”

Chang stated, “True. And we need to know who gave him that reality traveling technology, and the powerarmor. Also, we need to know if he is connect to the Xanatos family.”

Rock thought, 'I am glad you told me about that, on the phone.' She commented, “I agree. Though, I am just not sure we can afford to wait a month, for those answers, for the vat process to be complete.”

Chang said, “We don't have to. It will only take a few days for us. I will have Abrego taken to another reality, where I have a place at. There, we will do the vat treatment over a month. Until it is complete. And then, we will bring her back here, a few days later for us. After which, we will get our answers.”

Rock thought, with mild amusement, 'Time dilation for the win.' She stated, “That is nice to hear. I guess we can wait that long. Also, Abrego did mention that he used to abuse tranquilizers. And that is how he was able to wake up, in the first place, during the vat process.”

Chang said, “I will inform, Simon, and the others, that will over see the vat process, to keep a more detailed eye on Abrego. To make sure he stays under, during the vat process, until he is a she. Also, I ask that you let me handle this.”

Rock inquired, “Okay. Though, I would like to know what you plan to do with Abrego, after this?”

Chang stated, “Even if I don't get any useful answers, I already plan to add a little bit to Abrego's brainwashing, to make her more sociable and loyal to me. So, I can hire her for a job at the casino. Something simple. So, I can keep an eye on her. And prevent her from getting into trouble.”

Rock commented, “If this was anyone else, I would object to such brainwashing. But, for Abrego, it is the best solution, from a lot of bad options.”

Chang said, “I know. I am not exactly crazy about doing this myself.” He thought, 'I will make sure to talk to River, Lee, Annie, Mal, Zoe, Spike, and a few others, concerning this matter. I am sure they will be fine with the matter. Or, at very least, not negatively react to the news. As long as I explain what is going on. And I don't abuse the situation.'

Rock and Chang then turned to look over at the medical team. They saw that Revy and Yolanda standing to the side, of the medical team, with Abrego laying on his back, on the gurney. Though, Abrego was clearly unconscious.

They also saw Simon was using a stethoscope to check Abrego's vitals.

Chang asked, “How is he?”

Simon looked up at Chang, as he took off the stethoscope. He answered, “His vitals are weak. But, he is not in any immediate danger. Though, we need to put him in one of those vats, soon. To continue the process that, from what I am told, was interrupted.”

Chang said, “No time like the present. Start getting him prepped, to send him over to where our vats are.”

Simon did not replied, as he turned to his medical team. He stated, “You heard the man. Let's gets him to the infirmary. So, we can get him ready.”

Chang and Rock then watched as Simon and his medical team wheeled Abrego into the casino, though the front entrance.

When the medical team was out of sight, Chang turned back to Rock, as he commented, “By the way, thanks for informing me that Pedro, Matthew, Leigharch, Matt, and Fabiola, were back in town.”

Rock looked over at Chang, as she inquired, “No problem. Though, you won't happen to know who Matt, the redheaded man with them is?”

Chang answered, “He is Matt Bluestone, from the Gargoyles reality.”

Rock recognized the name. She said, “Oh. No wonder he didn't want to tell us who he was. Cops don't really go over well with us.” She thought, 'And from his reactions towards us. I get the feeling he knows who we are. Which is not surprising, given whom he had been spending some time with.'

Chang commented, “Yea. He has good reason to keep his mouth shut on who he is. Considering our friends don't care much for cops.”

Chang thought, except for me, and a few others. Anyway, I better say good night. So, we can got to our homes, and get some sleep. I have a feeling that tomorrow is going to be a long day.'

Chang continued, 'Anyway, have a good night, Rock.”

Rock replied, “I will. And have a good night, yourself.”

Chang then turned, and calmly walked back inside the casino.

Rock turned back to Revy, Yolanda, and Eda. All three of whom were looking at her. Rock said, “Come on. Let's head back to the hotel.”

Rock, Yolanda, and Revy, walked back over to Eda's car. Then, all four of the women got back into the car, where they had been sitting before. With then shutting the doors behind them.

Eda in the driver's seat. Rock in the front passenger's seat. Revy sitting behind Rock. And Yolanda sitting behind Eda.

As Eda started her car back up, Revy asked, “So, the redhead is a cop?”

Rock turned to her left, to look between the front seats, and at Revy, as she requested, “Yes. Though, he is one of the nicer ones. So, please go easy on him.”

Revy shrugged, as she said, “Sure. He made me laugh. So, I will leave him be.”

Rock replied, “Thank you.” She then turned back in front of her, as she leaned back in her seat.

A few seconds later, Eda had her car in drive, as she drove out from under the casino awning, and towards a nearby street, as the four women headed back to the Devil's Hotel, to drop off Rock and Revy. Then, Eda would drive Yolanda, and herself, back to their apartment.

(_)

A few minutes later, across town, those that had left the Rats Nests, and directly heading for the Devil's Hotel, finally made it to the hotel parking lot.

It would still be a little while before Eda, Rock, Revy, and Yolanda, would make it to the hotel.

A couple of minutes later, those that had returned to the Rats Nest starting filing into the nearly empty front lobby, except for the two clerks at the check in desk.

Most of those that came in, either headed for their suites, or for the hotel restaurant, to have on last drink, before calling it a night.

Roberta and Fabiola then walked into the front lobby, with Matt and Leigharch following right behind them.

As the two men entered the front lobby, the music coming from the lobby speakers changed.

Roberta, Fabiola, Matt, and Leigharch came to a stop, as they noticed the change in music.

Roberta commented, “What an odd selection to make for those two.”

Fabiola said, “Those two can be very odd. Though, we are not ones to talk.”

Roberta conceded, “True.”

Matt overheard the two women in front of him, as he asked, “What do you mean? And what is the name of that song? It is on the tip of my tongue.”

Leigharch stated, “It is eighties rock song, Mickey, by Toni Basil. And I loved the eighties.” He thought, 'Since I now have access to reality travel. I can visit an Earth, during the nineteen eighties, some time.'

Matt looked at Leigharch, as he commented, “Of course. Considering the number of eighties pop-culture references you like to give out.”

Leigharch just looked over at Matt. He smiled, as he teased, “You're just jeolious that I get to tell all the cool, funny jokes.”

Matt commented, “I don't get even half the jokes you tell.”

Leigharch's smile widened, ever so slightly, as he said, “Exactly.”

Instead of Matt responding to Leigharch, Matt turned to looked at the backs of Roberta and Fabiola, as he inquired, “Now, that question is answered. What do you mean that this song is connected to us? Should we be worried?”

Roberta and Fabiola turned around to face Matt and Leigharch, as Roberta answered, “No.”

Fabiola stated, “Though, this is not a normal hotel. This place is not dangerous. But, this place does have a few oddities. Such as, sometimes the music will change in this lobby here, when a person first enters the lobby. And the song, or music piece is changes to, can mean something for the person. Either their past, present, or future.”

Fabiola thought, 'Also, that reminds me. Given Leigharch and Violin's love of american pop-culture. I need to introduce the two to each other. That way, they can talk to each other about such subjects, without driving the rest of us crazy.'

Roberta mentioned, “One person we know of, we found out when that person entered this lobby for the first time, and the lobby speakers started playing the Eagles, Hotel California.” She thought, 'I am glad that Melanie one day let that little piece of information drop about Lee. That was a nice topic of discussion.'

Fabiola mentally reflected, 'I know who she is talking about.' She mentioned, “And that person eventually got stuck in a twenty year time loop, repeating the same day, over and over again.”

Matt replied, with concern in his voice, “That is bad.”

Fabiola said, “Not really. The person made the most of it. That person took the opportunity to learn a lot during the time loop.” She thought, 'I will get Lee credit. That was very intelligent of her. Though, also...' Fabiola continued, “And that person did not age a day during the loops.

Matt questioned, “Who was this person?”

Roberta answered, “Her name is, Lee.”

Matt looked over at Roberta, as he commented, “I have heard Lee's name dropped a Lee times, by Fabiola here. Along, with Pedro and Matthew.” He thought, 'And I met Lee, once. She didn't seem like much to me. Of course, these two women in front of me, don't seem like much. Though, I know for a fact that each one could singlehandedly stop an entire, modern military platoon by themselves. So, I know appearances can be deceiving.'

Roberta stated, “Take our word for it. Lee is nothing but trouble.”

Matt said, “I will take your word on that. Still, should I be worried about the song that is playing for us? I have no interest in getting stuck in a timeloop.”

Roberta replied, “I doubt that will happen to you.”

Leigharch commented, in a casual tone of voice, “Relax, Matt. Mickey is a fun song. But, otherwise harmless.”

Matt turned to Leigharch, as he replied, “Alright.”

Both men then turned back to Roberta and Fabiola.

Roberta said, “Stay here. I will go get you both rooms.”

Matt said, “We appreciate everything you have done for us.”

Leigharch replied, “Yes. We do.”

Roberta nodded once towards them. She then turned, and walked up to the front desk.

Fabiola looked over at Roberta. She then turned back to face Matt and Leigharch. She requested, “Look guys. I need to make a phone call, and talk to someone, in private.”

Matt said, “Go ahead.”

Leigharch commented, “We will be here, if you want to talk.”

Fabiola replied, “Thank you.”

Fabiola then walked over to the right side of the lobby, away from everyone. She then used her left hand to pull out her encrypted cellphone, from an interior jacket pocket.

While Fabiola dialed a number on her cellphone, she thought, 'I am glad I kept this turned off during my time with Pedro and the others. Because it is still fully charged, and I can use it.'

When Fabiola was finished dialing the number, she held the phone to her left ear.

The phone began to ring as she held it up to her right ear, by her right hand.

After a couple of more rings, the other end picked up. A familiar female voice said, “Hello.”

Fabiola said, “Hi Annie.”

On the other end of the line, Annie happily responded, “Hello Fabiola. How was your hunt?”

Fabiola answered, “Good. If you haven't heard. We are all back in town. With a few extra people with us.”

Annie asked, “Is Matthew and Pedro with you?”

Fabiola stated, “No. Pedro and Matthew are not with us. Long story short, our group teleported in, right beside the Rats Nest, and we walk right into one of Revy's little parties, with nearly everyone there.”

Annie started laughing a little, as she inquired, “Really?”

Fabiola said, “Yes. And while everyone was distracted by something, I will tell you about later. Though, while we most of them were distracted, Matthew and Pedro gave them the slip.”

By then, Annie had composed herself, as she stopped laughing. On the other end of the line, as she calmly stated, “It makes complete sense for them to do that.”

Fabiola replied, “I agree.”

Annie asked, “So, how are they?”

Fabiola answered, “The last time I saw them, they were both fine. And they said they were not going to reality jump.”

Annie responded, “Okay. I am sure they will show up, later. Thanks for finding them, and bringing them back. You can tell me all about details, tomorrow, when you feel like it.”

Fabiola stated, “Sure. No problem.”

Annie said, in a kind, caring tone of voice, “Sleep well.”

Fabiola replied, “You too.” She then hung her up cellphone, and she pocketed back in the interior jacket pocket it was previously in.

Next, Fabiola turned and walked back to join up with Matt and Leigharch. With the three of them patiently waiting for Roberta to return with some room assignments, and room keys, for Matt and Leigharch.

A few minutes later, Roberta had returned from the front desk, to the group, with hotel keys, and room assignments. With a separate room for Matt and Leigharch. Then, Roberta, Fabiola, Matt, and Leigharch said good night to each other. With them agreeing to meet at seven in the morning, to have some of the breakfast, together, at the buffet, in the hotel restaurant. With their meals paid for by Roberta.

(_)

An hour later, Pedro lead Matthew into a two story building, on the eastern, sea side harbor, in De La Plata Podrido.

Pedro used a key, he had on a keyring, to unlock the door, on the first story. He then opened the door, and walked inside.

Matthew followed behind Pedro.

As Pedro made his way inside, he soon turned on a small lamp light, that was on a small table, by a wall, further into the room.

Meanwhile, Matthew shut and locked the door behind him.

Pedro then turned to look at his friend, as he stated, “This is one of my safehouses in town. I didn't teleport us directly to this place, because the others would have tracked us here.”

Matthew inquired, “Okay. So, how safe is this place?”

Pedro said, “We are good for the night. There are a couple of beds, and a bathroom on the second floor. Still, we are near where the cargo ship, the Maria Zeleska, Hotel Moscow HQ, is moored. Though, not too near.”

Matthew commented, “And no one would guess that we would hide so close to such a group.”

Pedro replied, “Exactly. I even used this place to stake out the Maria Zeleska, from time to time. And none of Hotel Moscow ever caught on.”

Matthew inquired, in a sober tone of voice, “Interesting... So, what are we going to do tomorrow?”

Pedro responded, in an equally sober tone of voice, “In all honesty. I am not really sure how we are going to handle this. It is true. Running did not solve our problems.”

Matthew said, “Yea. Learn something everyday. Still, it was worth a try.”

Pedro stated, “I agree. Still, as the situation is right now. We are not leaving this reality. Especially, not without Matt and Leigharch.” He thought, 'Fabiola has her own reality device, and she is with her friends.”

Matthew agreed, “Yes. They would be pissed with us. And we would lose what little respect the girls have for us.”

Pedro replied, “Exactly.”

Matthew commented, “Still, you know what that means.”

Pedro stated, “Yes. It means we have to solve our problems here.”

Matthew said, “I was afraid you were going to say that.”

Pedro responded, “Yea. Well, we are just going to have to bite the bullet on this one. Still, while we figure out what to do next, we can get some sleep. And I need to check on my boys, at the police station, and see what had happened while we are gone. We will wake up, get cleaned up, get some breakfast, and head over there in the morning. From there, we will figure out what to do.”

Matthew said, “I guess we are going to have to finally talk to Chang?”

Pedro stated, “Yes. I believe that cannot be helped. But, I feel we might get more out of this, than we expect.”

Matthew responded, “I hope you are right. So, what about Matt and Leigharch? We kind of leave them in a lurch, back at the Rats Nest. Not that we had any real real choice in the matter. If we had stayed, the girls would have captured us. And while I am sure that Fabiola will be fine. I am not sure about those two.”

Pedro said, “I would not worry. Fabiola is with them. And she will inform them we are not leaving this reality, without them. Chances are, Fabiola and Roberta will take those two back with them, to the Devil's Hotel. And get them each a room.”

Matthew commented, “I hope you are right.”

Pedro replied, “So am I.”

Matthew asked, “I know we agreed not too. But, now that I think about. I have to ask, again. Are we going to tell Chang and the others about Gomez's operation?”

Pedro answered, “No. We are not, unless we have too. All informing Chang and the others would do, is stir up trouble for everyone involved. Including us. Now, let us head up stairs and get some sleep. It has been long day. And we got a long day ahead of us. So, we had best get some sleep, while we still can.”

Matthew agreed, “Good idea. By the way, should we leave the lamp light on.”

Pedro stated, “Yes. It is a small risk. And after we have come all this way. I don't want to just end up accidentally breaking my neck, by tripping on some stairs.”

Matthew commented, “Good point”

Pedro said, ““Now, let's go get some sleep.”

Pedro and Matthew left the lamp light in the room, on, to see, as they headed up stairs to get some sleep.

(_)

Half an hour later, across town, in the Devil's Hotel, in his suite, Barbossa was sitting in a chair, at the table in the bedroom part of his suite. He was dressed in only his shirt, boxers, and pants.

The only light in the room was from the small, incandescent yellow lamp light on the nightstand by his bed.

The curtains curtains were closed, with nothing else on, leaving Barbossa to his thoughts.

While Barbossa sat at the table, he solemnly thought, 'I did not exactly lie to the others. I took a nap for a few hours. And set my clock to wake me up ten minutes ago. So, I did come up here to rest. Like I said I would.' He continued his thoughts, with a bit of bitterness, 'Now, to meet one of the agent of the devil I have chosen to serve. So, we can move forward with the next parts of all our plans.'

A few seconds later, he saw a large woman, teleport into his room, across the table from her.

The woman had her back turned to him, while she had her right hand in her right side pants pocket. Though, as the woman turned around to face the old pirate, she pulled her right hand out her of her pocket.

Barbossa then saw that the woman was Furlow, whom was wearing her black pants suit, and black dress shoes.

As Furlow looked at what Barbossa was wearing, she joked, “Aren't we dressing casual this evening.”

Barbossa groaned, “Don't start Furlow. I have been up all day. It is late for me. And I am an old man.”

Furlow replied, “Fair enough.”

Barbossa commented, “At least you are on time.”

Furlow stated, “Of course. I would not be very good at this job, if I wasn't punctual. So, is the room clean?”

Barbossa said, “Aye. I check this suite out for bugs, earlier this evening. I also checked that none of the individuals of interest in the hotel are staying anywhere near me. Not beside this room. Not above this room. Not below this room.”

Furlow responded, “Good. Now, let's get down to business. Is everything set?”

Barbossa stated, “Aye. This afternoon, Ahsoka called me, and confirmed that the targets arrived at the casino. As planned. She even saw them, herself, for a few minutes. As she discreetly moved around the casino, today. Also, I saw a couple of them pass by the beach here, this morning, as well. So, all the pieces are in place. And all that is left is for Gomez to give the order to light the fuse to this powder keg.”

Furlow said, “That is good. The attack will likely take place, sometime tomorrow. And our boss would prefer you to warn Ahsoka of the coming attack.”

Barbossa stated, “I will call her in the morning. With her force abilities. She will see the attack coming long before I will. She already knows that what is going to happen. Just not when. And to prevent eavesdropping. I will call her, and simply state that everything is set for today.”

Furlow responded, “That will be fine. The attack isn't likely going to happen, until late morning, at the earliest. So, if someone did overheard your phone call to her, they will not know what your commented means, until it is too late.”

Barbossa replied, in a tired tone of voice, “My thoughts, as well.”

Furlow used her left hand to pull out something from her left, side pants pocket. She then walked over and set the item on the table, by Barbossa. She said, “Both Gomez and I want you to have this.”

Barbossa used his right hand to pick up the item, and look at it. It was a small device that was shaped like a lighter. There was a small knob on the center of one of the flat sides of the item.

Furlow stated, “While the kid you run with is nice. Gomez considers you to be one of his best field agents. And he doesn't want anything to happen to you. If the programing on the attackers malfunction, you get caught early, or if you cannot escape, turn the knob on this item. It only turns one way. Clockwise. Turn it one full turn, to where it will stop. That will send out a signal we need to go across realities, to come get you. We will home in on your location, and send someone to pick you.”

Barbossa looked up at Furlow, as he put the device in his right pants pocket. He responded, “I appreciate that. Still, why doesn't he just give me another reality device?”

Furlow stated, “Reality devices don't grow on trees. And we try account for those we use, by controlling the number of them out on the field. These little signal devices act as a stopgap for any such issues.”

Barbossa conceded, “Fair enough. And as long as Gomez upholds his end of our bargain, I will be happy.”

Furlow said, “Don't worry. When you return, your ship is about ready to set sail.”

Barbossa replied, “Good.”

Furlow then noticed a sadness in Barbossa's eyes. She asked, “You are not having second thoughts? Are you?”

Barbossa answered, “No. I am not getting soft. Though, at my age, I have learned to weigh all the ramifications for my actions.”

Furlow said, in a comforting tone of voice, “We all do, sweetie. But, there are just some things we have to do.”

Barbossa responded, “You are correct about that. Still, I am concerned about the attack. There are some people here, I do care for. At least a little bit.”

Furlow stated, “I understand. And listen. Gomez is not a coldblood psychopath. Nor, is he a bloodthirsty sociopath. He, and those he employees. Us included. Operate by our own codes of conduct. And he has a base set of rules of engagement, for operations like this.”

Furlow thought, 'That is why he does not have self-destruct devices in his boomers. That and it is too easy for the enemy to figure out how to use the self-destruct devices at an inopportune moment.'

Furlow continued, “He only wants to take out the primary targets. There will be other casualties. But, that cannot be prevented. Still, there are some targeting parameters to the attackers' programing.”

“The attackers are not programmed to attack you, or the kid, Ahsoka. Or any kids, for that matter. Well, at least those twelve years, or younger. Still, as long as someone is not out on the street, during the attack. They should be fine.”

Barbossa inquired, “That is good to hear. Those sound like fair mission parameters.”

Furlow said, “Yes. And with luck, this attack with go off with hitch.”

Barbossa replied, “I hope you are right.”

Furlow stated, “Yes. So am I. Anyway, you and the kid have your orders. Yours are to leave when the attackers show up. While her orders to take care of an individual here. I am sure you both will live up to your duties. Because, that is all any of us have left in this life.”

Barbossa replied, “Aye.” He then looked down at the table, as he soberly thought, 'And I hope Ahsoka, Shenhua, and Shenhua's family make it out of this okay. I may have made a deal with a devil, or two, in my life. But, that does not mean that I don't have a heart... Even if I don't listen to my heart, most of the time.'

Furlow noticed Barbossa's mood had slightly darkened. She cracked a grin, as she responded, in a slightly more chipper tone of voice, “Ah, relax, you old pirate. And get some sleep. You have already done the hard part for your mission. Now, all you have to do is make your escape, at the proper time. In a discreet manner. Once you have done that, you will have no serious worries, because you will be set for life. Anyway, see you back at base. And have have a good night.”

Barbossa looked back up at Furlow's face, as he calmly said, in a tired tone of voice, “You, as well, Furlow.”

Furlow maintained her smile, as she took a few steps back, into a small open area in the room. She then came to a stop, and used her right hand to reach into her right side pants pocket, where her reality device was located.

A few seconds later, Barbossa watched Furlow instantly disappeared, as she jumped to another reality.

With Furlow gone, Barbossa then got up from his chair. While he headed to his bathroom, he grumbled, “I am getting to old for this.”

A couple of minutes later, Barbossa was back in his bed, with the lamp light, off. With him going back to sleep, for the night.

To be continued.

Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 6: “The Mexican, The Lawyer, And The Mechanic.”

Volume 2: “The Villains.”

Chapter 05: “Population: Badass”: Part One: “That Attack.”

By Paul Cousins.

Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.

(_)

Reality, Pedro and Lee's home reality. Date, Friday, the day after the Atlantic Riders came to De La Plata Podrido. Place, Devil's Hotel and Resort, De La Plata Podrido. Time, seven thirty AM.

In was seven thirty AM on the dot, in the morning. It was partly cloudy, with a cool temperature outside, as the man known as Garcia entered through the front entrance of the Devil's Hotel.

Garcia was dress casually, as he walked into the front lobby of the Devil's Hotel. He wore a dark green turtleneck shirt, brown pants, brown leather belt, dark socks, and brown leather dress shoes. He had his reality device in his right side pants pocket.

As he entered the front lobby of the Devil's Hotel, the wall speakers that were playing music in the room changed. And the new piece of music what that began to play was the theme music from the film, The Dark Crystal.

Garcia stopped in his tracks, as he mentally reflected, 'That is such a beautiful piece of music. Though, I do not know where it is from. Yet, the music sounds like it is about someone on a journey. And that is what I am doing.'

'Now, to fine Roberta. I told Roberta I would meet her, and the Pena family, today, or tomorrow. And there is no time like the present. I know she is staying her, in the hotel. I also know that she is in the habit of getting up early in the morning. So, she is likely at breakfast right now. And she did mention this place has a nice'

'So, she is either here, or at diner the Lowe family runs. Still, I will try here, first.'

'And I also know that Revy, Rock, and the others prefer to start getting up an hour, or so, from now. And to be honest, I just want to visit Roberta and the Pena family. I have no desire to see the others. And I certainly don't want to get mixed up in their adventures.'

Garcia looked around, and he saw to men at the front desk, directly ahead of him. He thought, 'Those two men can probably help me. I feel it might be best to use english, instead of spanish, with them.'

He then walked over to the front desk. As he came to a stop, he looked at the two men standing across the counter from him. He calmly stated, in english, “Hello, I am looking for a guest in your hotel. Her name is, Roberta. She has long purple hair. I believe she is likely having breakfast in your hotel's restaurant. Would it be okay if you could use the phone to call over to the restaurant? So, I could check to see is she is there?”

One of the clerks said, in english, “Sure thing. We will contact the restaurant for you, right now.

The clerk in question then picked up a wireless phone, as he dialed the extension for the phone in the restaurant part of the hotel.

When the clerk finished dialing the number, he handed the phone to Garcia.

Garcia took the phone, as he replied, “Thank you.” He then held the phone to his right ear.

The phone rang twice before it was picked up.

When the phone was picked up, the person on the other end of the line, a male voice, answered in spanish, “Hello.”

Garcia responded, in spanish, “Hello. My name is Garcia. The gentlemen at the front desk have kindly allowed me to use their phone. I am looking for a guest in the hotel. Her name is Roberta. She has long purple hair that is pulled back in a ponytail. Is she there?”

The man on the other end said, “Yes. I believe she is here. I will go get her.”

Garcia replied, “Thank you.”

(_)

At that moment, in the Devil's Hotel restaurant and bar, Roberta, Fabiola, Leigharch, and Matt were sitting at the bar counters.

They had all agreed to meet each other at seven AM, to have breakfast together. And the four adults had set their alarms, they had woke up, gotten ready, and met at the hotel restaurant at seven AM.

While seven AM would be early for most people. As a police detective, Matt was use to altering his schedule, due to shift rotations at his job. Spending years as maids at the Lovelace Plantation had allowed Roberta and Fabiola to get use to awaking early in the morning. And Leigharch did not really have a schedule.

All four of the adults were dressed casually.

Unfortunately, Matt and Leigharch did not get a chance to shave that morning. As they did not have any razors on them. So, they both sported a five o'clock beard shadow. And they were wearing the same clothing they had the day before.

On the other hand, among the fresh clothing Fabiola wore, was in a yellow short sleeved button up blouse, a green long skirt that matched her hair, with boyshorts underneath the skirt. And white socks, with yellow tennis shoes.

Roberta was wearing her usual civilian clothing. Among other things, she wore a short sleeved white button up blouse, black leather vest, black denim jeans, black leather belt, brown cowgirl boots, and a bolo tie around the collar of her shirt, with a blue amulet in the middle of it.

The four adults sat in stools, at the part of the bar counter that faced the left side of the restaurant.

Matt was furthest from the entrance to the restaurant. To Matt's left was Leigharch. To Leigharch's left was Fabiola. And to Fabiola's left was Roberta.

Revy, Rock, and the others had not yet come down for breakfast.

The four adults at the bar counter, had spent the last half hour, eating their breakfast from the breakfast buffet from across the room, as they talked about who they were, and where they have been. And it has been a wonderful, productive conversation, for all those involved.

Their meals and drinks had been generously paid for by Roberta.

Just as all four of them had finished their breakfast, one of the hotel employees, a man, walked up from behind the counter, with a wireless phone in his left hand.

The man stopped in front of Roberta, as he turned towards the purple haired. He asked, in spanish, “Are you Roberta?”

Roberta looked at the man, as she answered, in spanish, “Yes.”

The man said, “There is a Garcia on the line for you.” He then handed the wireless phone to Roberta.

Fabiola, Matt, and Leigharch recognized Garcia's name being mentioned, as all three of them turned to look at Roberta.

Roberta took the phone in her right hand. And the employee walked away, to attend man the cash register. Which Roberta found odd, due to Emily usually manned the cash register, in the morning, at the Devil's Hotel restaurant.

Roberta held the phone to her right ear, as she thought, 'I wonder where Emily is today. She usually works in the restaurant in the mornings. Maybe she is just taking the day off. Still, it is good to know that Garcia is now in town.'

Roberta said, into the phone, “Hello Garcia.”

Garcia replied, in spanish, “Hello Roberta.”

Roberta inquired, “Where are you?”

Garcia answered, “I am actually at the front desk of the hotel you are staying at, waiting for you.”

Roberta responded, “That is good to know. Also, Fabiola returned last night. She is sitting right beside me.”

Roberta turned to look at Fabiola, whom was smiling at her, given the green haired woman had understood every word Roberta had said.

Garcia said, “That is lovely. I look forward to seeing her.”

Roberta mentioned, “Also, Fabiola brought back a few friends with her. They are here, with us, as well.”

Garcia said, “I looked forward to meeting them, as well.”

Roberta stated, “We just finished breakfast. And we will come to you. We will see you in a minute.”

Garcia replied, “See you then.”

Roberta hung up the phone, and set it on the counter.

Roberta continued to at Fabiola, Leigharch, and Matt, as she said, in english, so Matt and Leigharch would understand her, “That was Garcia. He is at the front desk, waiting for us to come see him.”

Fabiola got out of her stool, and she stood up, as she happily stated, “Then, let's go.”

Matt requested, “I would like to come along?”

Leigharch said, “S, would I.”

Roberta stated, “Sure. Garcia said he would like to meet you, both.” She then pulled out some a little money, from one of her pockets. Which she left it on the counter, as a tip.

Then, the adults got out of their stools, and they headed for the front door of the restaurant.

(_)

A minute later, they reached the front lobby. They quickly saw Garcia, as they approached the blond man, whom was standing at the front desk.

As the group came to a stop in front of Garcia, Matt mentally reflected, 'I can see the resemblance of Garcia as a child in the series, to him as a man, now. And Garcia looks good as a man.'

Garcia turned to them. He switched to english for the benefit of Matt and Leigharch, “It is good to see you, Roberta and Fabiola. I hope you had a had a safe trip, Fabiola.”

Fabiola replied, “It was interesting.”

Garcia turned to look at Matt and Leigharch, as he asked, “So, who are these two gentlemen?'

Roberta responded, “Garcia, before we answer your questions. It might be wise if we walk over to the right, front part of the room. Where we could talk in private.”

Garcia looked over over at the right, front part of the lobby. He saw that part of the room was empty. He turned back to Roberta, as he replied, “I agree.”

The five adults then walked over to the right, front corner of the room.

A few seconds later, they came to a stop near the couches in the room. Garcia was in front. With Fabiola and Roberta, behind, and to Garcia's left. While Matt and Leigharch were behind, and to Garcia's right.

Garcia turned to look at the other four adults, as he inquired, “So, who are these two men?”

Roberta mentally reflected, 'There is no point in mentioning the gender bending curse that Garcia is under, to Matt and Leigharch. Also, there is not point in tell them Garcia's full name, and title. Garcia and Fabiola are okay any way I introduce either of them to others. Leigharch seems the type, not to care about titles. And given the life Matt has probably lead, he would likely be more happier if we kept things simple.'

Roberta stated, “Garcia, the redhead is, Matt Bluestone. The blond goes by the name, Leigharch.” She turned to Matt and Leigharch, as she continued, “And Matt, and Leigharch, this is Garcia Lovelace.” She then looked back over at Garcia.

Matt said, “Hello.”

Leigharch commented, “Nice to meet you.”

Garcia looked at the two men, as he stated, “Likewise.” He then focused on Leigharch, as he asked, “Are you the same Leigharch, as from our series?”

Leigharch said, “The very same. And as an adult, you look great, Garcia.”

Garcia replied, “Thank you. We wondered what happened to you.” He thought, 'Since Leigharch and I have never met, it is clear that he has seen the Black Lagoon series. And it is a good guess that Matt here has seen the Black Lagoon series, as well. Now, where have I heard the name, Matt Bluestone, before?'

Leigharch commented, “My tale would be a perfect story to tell over some beers.”

Fabiola said, “I have to agree, with him, on that.”

Matt countered, “It actually wasn't that fun for those of us that were riding with him, at the time.”

Garcia tactfully replied, “We will see what happens.” He then turned Matt, as he inquired, “Matt Bluestone? Where have I heard you name before?”

Matt answered, “I am from the Gargoyles reality.”

Garcia said, “Oh, really. Cool.” He then turned to look at Roberta, as he questioned, “Are our plans with the Pena family still on for today?”

Roberta answered, “Yes. Though, I need to call Hernan, right now, before he takes his kids to school, and he then heads to work.” She then pulled out her encrypted cellphone, and she dialed the number for the Pena family home.

Matt said, “You should have enough time, if you call them now.”

Fabiola replied, “I agree.”

Leigharch commented, “Personally, I never saw the use for schools.”

Fabiola said, “That explains so much about you.”

Everyone quieted down as they saw Roberta bring her phone up to her right ear.

The phone rung a couple of time. Then, a female voice answered the other end of the line, in spanish, “Hello.”

Roberta recognized the voice, as she inquired, in spanish, “Hello Maria. I was wondering, are Hernan and your kids still at home?”

Maria replied, “Yes. Why?”

Roberta stated, “Garcia is here. And he would like to come visit you, and your family.”

Maria happily said, “Wonderful. Tell him he is more than welcome to come over.”

Roberta requested, “I will. And could you put Hernan on the phone?”

Maria replied, “Sure.”

A few seconds later, Roberta heard Hernan say, in spanish, “Hello Roberta. Maria said that Garcia was in town?”

Roberta responded, “Yes. And he is right beside me. And Fabiola is also here.”

Hernan inquired, “How are they both doing?”

Roberta stated, “Fine. Anyway, I know it is a school day, and you usually work today. But, I was wondering. Could you and the kids stay home today, so we can come visit, and show Garcia around town.”

Hernan responded, “Sure. The kids would love a day off of school. Especially, a Friday. Because it means a three day weekend. And I cannot think of a better excuse than when family, from out of town, come to visit.”

Roberta asked, “Good. Though, will Maria be okay with this?”

Hernan said, “Of course.”

Roberta replied, “Good.”

Hernan requested, “And tell Fabiola we would be more than happy if she came along to visit.”

Roberta said, “Thank you. I will let her know.”

Hernan commented, “See you in a little while.”

Roberta replied, “You too.”

Roberta and Hernan then hung up at the same time.

Roberta then pocketed her cellphone, while she looked at the other adults. She stated, in english, so Matt and Leigharch would understand what was said, “Everything is set. And Maria and Hernan will be happy to have us come over, right now. We will head over to the home of the Pena family.” She looked over to Fabiola, as she continued, “And Fabiola, Hernan said you are more than welcome to come with us.”

Fabiola did not reply. Instead, she was unusually quiet.

Yet, Roberta did not noticed this, as she turned to Garcia, as she inquired, “Though, Garcia, I have ask. Have you had breakfast this morning?”

Garcia said, “Yes. I have. And the three of us can catch up on what has happened on our lives, while we have been separated.”

Roberta agreed, “That is a wonderful idea.”

Matt said, “Have fun you, three.”

Leigharch commented, “Yea. We will just hang around here, until you get back.”

Fabiola stated, “I am sorry. But, I cannot come with you, to the Pena home, right now”

Roberta looked over at Fabiola, as she asked, “Why not?”

Fabiola said, “I am responsible for these two men.” She then shrugged in direction of Matt and Leigharch's direction. She continued, “And while I am sure Matt would be fine. We want to help get him home. And none of us are sure what to do with Leigharch.”

Matt replied, “She is right about that.”

Leigharch commented, “I admit that I can be wacky at times.”

Fabiola mentioned, “Also, given Revy and the others are in the hotel. I think it is best I stick around, to keep these two out of trouble.”

Garcia said, “I have to agree with you. That is a wise idea.”

Roberta begrudgingly replied, “So do I.”

Fabiola stated, “You two go have your fun. I will meet with the Pena family, later. Responsibilities come first. You both taught me that.”

Roberta conceded, “Yes. We did. And I am proud of you for showing such integrity.”

Garcia said, “I am proud of you, as well.”

Fabiola gave both Garcia, and Roberta, a warm smile.

There was silence for a few seconds. Then, Leigharch broke the silence, as he asked, “As much as I am enjoying watching this display of love and caring. And I truly admire it. But, I have to ask. What are we going to do today?”

Fabiola turned to Leigharch and Matt, as she answered, “Oh. Don't worry about that. First, we will head to the game room, in the back of the hotel, for a few rounds of pool. Then, we will head to the hotel theater, and request a movie.”

Matt said, “Okay. As long as there is no betting. I don't really have any cash on me.”

Fabiola replied, “That is alright. I prefer to not play for money.”

Leigharch stated, “Even if we are not betting. You guys are about to learn how much of a pool shark I can be.”

Matt replied, “I look forward to seeing that.”

Fabiola said, “So do I. Now, this way, guys.” She then turned, and headed for the hallway entrance, on the left side of the front lobby.

Leigharch commented, “Lead the way.” He then followed Fabiola.

Matt turn to Garcia and Roberta. He smiled, as he said, “Have a nice day.” He then turned, and quietly followed behind the Fabiola and Leigharch.

Roberta and Garcia then silently watched as the three other adults disappear down a hallway, as they headed to the game room, on the back left side of the hotel, on the ground floor, near some of the entrances to the hotel patio, that lead to the beach.

Roberta thought, 'While I am sure Matt is okay to be around. I have a feeling that keeping Leigharch out of trouble, might sometimes be a full time job. Still, that is a worry for later. Now, to get Garcia to the Pena family.' She turned to Garcia, as she stated, “My car is this way.”

Garcia looked at Roberta, as he replied, “Okay.”

Roberta then headed for the front outside entrance of the lobby, with Garcia following right behind her.

Soon, they were in Roberta's car, as Roberta drove Garcia, down the road, towards the home of the Pena family.

(_)

An hour later, at eight thirty AM, Pedro and Matthew walked in front lobby of the Plata Podrido police station.

The two men wore the same clothing as last night. Which was pretty much the same clothing they had on, since they had started their journey through the multiverse. Though, they had occasionally cleaned their clothing, during their journey.

Unfortunately, that morning, they didn't have time to shave their faces, due to their alarms not getting them up when Pedro had wanted them too. Both of them were so tired, from the previous day, that they slept through their alarms.

So, they had to rush in getting ready. And Pedro called a taxi to come get them, to take them to the police station.

But, they were not well rested, to face the day.

On the way to the police station, they stopped by a fast food a drive through, to pick up some breakfast, which Pedro had paid for.

They had finished eaten and drunk what they had ordered for breakfast by the time the taxi driver stopped in front of the Plata Podrido police station.

Pedro paid the fare, with the men exiting the taxi, and heading inside. They carried their trash with them, inside. Where they dumped it in a trash can, by the interior side of the double-doors that made up the front entrance to the police station. With the taxi driving off, down the street.

As Pedro and Matthew made it into the front lobby of the police station, they stood beside each other, with Matthew to Pedro's right side.

The two men looked around in front of them, as the lobby of the police station, which was part of a partitioned room. With the front lobby only part of the room. Then, there was the front desk, with partition, wooden paneled wall, that went half way up to the ceiling. Behind the front desk were several other desks, set out in a grid pattern. On these desks were files, office supplies, and equipment on them.

There were officers, most in uniform, with a few detectives in civilian clothing, sitting at various desks in the room, as they did paperwork.

And on the walls of the room, were various doorways that lead to other parts of the building. Including, among other places, offices, the jail cells, the locker rooms, and restrooms.

Matthew commented, in english, “I guess we have come full circle.”

Pedro said, in english, “And they say one can never come back home.”

Matthew replied, “I guess they were wrong.”

Both men then saw that several of the police officers that were walking around, had come to a stop, as they looked at them.

Pedro turned to Matthew, as he stated, “I have some business to do here. Just follow me. We will likely spend at least an hour, or so, in my office. Where I have to review police reports for the last week, or so. And that is not counting me checking on things around the stations. I am sorry, but I have nothing for you to do here. So, it is going to be boring for you, during your stay.”

Matthew looked over at Pedro, as he commented, “I have been safe, as long as I have been with you. So, I am fine with that. Besides, I am a lawyer. In law school, we took a course on dealing with boredom.”

Pedro started laughing.

Matthew said, “I'm not joking.”

Pedro laughed even harder.

A few seconds later, as Pedro calmed down, he said, “After we get finished, we will get some lunch, and decide how we are going to approach Chang, later this afternoon.”

Matthew agreed, “Good idea.”

Pedro thought, 'Also, while I am here. I can pick up some ammo boxes, of bullets, for my weapons. Which I have tucked away in my office desk. Now, to deal with my job. That I thought I would never have to worry about again. Boy, was I wrong.'

Pedro and Matthew turned to look towards the front desk. Pedro then began walking towards the front desk, with Matthew walking behind them.

When they reached the front desk, they came to a stop, as they looked at the male police officer on duty at the front desk.

The officer on duty, at the front desk, look at the two men. He inquired, in spanish, “Good morning, chief. I trust your vacation was pleasant?”

Pedro lied, in spanish, “It was fine.” He then continued, in a more honest manner, “Matthew, and I, are going to my office. I trust that the all reports for the last week are on the computer network?”

The officer answered, “Yes. They are.”

Pedro asked, “Good. Has anything of note happened while we are gone?”

The officer said, “A few things. There was a robbery at the casino. Thieves got away.”

Pedro questioned, with interest in his tone of voice, “Really?”

The officer replied, “Yes.”

Pedro inquired, “Was anyone injured?”

The officer answered, “No. And as per your instructions, we left those at the casino, alone.”

Pedro said, “Good. Anything else?”

The officer stated, “Some bikers came to town yesterday. Some of them were seen riding hover-bikes. Though, all they have done is ride around, and mostly visit the casino.”

Pedro thought, 'Hover-bikes. They are not of this world. That means they could be trouble for us.' He inquired, “Do you know where they are staying?”

The officer answered, “No. But, we think somewhere out of town, on the island. Also, Mister Chang called. He said he had the situation handled. And since there hasn't been any reports of these bikers causing trouble, we have left them alone.”

Pedro thought, 'Okay. That doesn't sound too bad.'

Pedro complimented, “That was wise of you.” He mentally added, “I will have to talk with Chang about that robbery, and those bikers, later this afternoon.”

Matthew thought, 'I wonder what else happened while we were gone?'

Pedro turned to Matthew, as he said, in english, “Come on, Matthew. We have a long day ahead of us.” He then look in front of then, as he turned to his left, and he headed for one of the gates, on the half-wall, that lead to the other side of the room, and to his personal office.

Matthew silently followed behind Pedro.

(_)

Around an hour later, at the Last Resort Diner, breakfast rush had ended, with the last of the morning customers leaving, ten minutes ago, to continue their daily activities.

Lori, Ed, and Rico, were in their uniforms, as they were handling the morning shift for the diner. Though, Stan, Lewis, Irene, and Leona, were there, that morning, as well.

Everyone was there, because this was when Lori, and her six biker friends, agreed for the bikers to come back to the diner, to visit.

A minute later, the seven adults inside the diner watched through the front windows, as the three motorcycles, two hover-cycles, and one trike, rode into the parking lot, and came to a stop.

A minute later, Lori's six friends walked into the diner, and everyone had a good time, talking to each other.

(_)

Around twenty minutes later, hundreds of blue armored combat boomers began teleporting to various parts of the island of De La Plata Podrido, using reality devices build into their bodies. And the combat cyberdroids then started attacking the locals populace.

Inside an Italian restaurant, in downtown De La Plata Podrido, a combat boomer walked in the front door.

At the time of the morning, there were only handful of customers, and one waitress on duty.

The waitress was a pretty, middle-aged woman of Hindu decent, named Grace. She was slender, and in good physical shape. And like Grace had long black hair, which went down to her shoulder blades, that she allowed to hang loose.

Also, like her slightly older sister, Emily, Grace was a former communist revolutionary, that fled their home country of India. And they eventually settled down in Plata Podrido. Grace was married to the former FARC member, Isandro. Her sister, Emily was married to the former FARC member, Sans. Neither couple had any children. Though, both couples were talking about maybe someday having some children.

As the customers and waitress looked at the combat boomer, they all instinctively knew that this creature was a threat to them.

Fortunately, Grace was only about a dozen feet from the boomer, which nothing obstructing her path to the boomer.

While using both her training, and muscle memory, Grace quickly rushed at the combat boomer, as she unsheathed two combat knives that she had hidden in her waitress uniform.

In the blink of an eye, Grace had decapitated the boomer, before it was able to react. With its head dropping to the floor.

Grace then jumped back, away from the boomer, while still holding her combat knives. With the orange blood of the boomer dripping off the blades of her knives.

The boomer had then rolled to the ground, as the boomer fell down, on its back, with a thud.

The employees in the back of the building had heard the thud, with them coming to see what was going on.

The employees, and customers then silently looked at Grace, then, down at the boomer, and then back towards Grace.

Those people that were still sitting down at either a table, or the bar counter, stood up.

And suddenly, except for Grace, everyone either pulled their concealed, loaded, holstered firearms. Or, they unsheathed their hidden melee weapons.

No words need to be exchanged. They knew if there was one monster like that in town, there were likely more. And these monsters needed to be dealt with, immediately.

The customers then left money on the table, for their meals and drinks.

And everyone, including Grace, then walked around the boomer, as the headed outside, and deal with the combat boomer's many siblings.

While Grace walked out the door, as she thought, 'I better head over to Isandro and Sans' place of business. I believe my sister, Emily is already there. Visiting her husband, Sans, and my husband, Isandro. This business is nearby, and they have more powerful weapons there. It would be safer for me to join them. Then, we can deal with these monsters, together.'

Emily then turned down the sidewalk, as she headed for the building, where Isandro and Sans' real estate business was located. And while she kept her distance, from the other citizens of the city, taking out any boomers they could find.

With most of the boomers not having time to react to such a vicious, well armed, and very skilled, badass populace.

Variations of this scene were happening across the city of De La Plata Podrido. As Gomez's forces inadvertently awakened the single largest badass force on the planet.

For while Gomez, for all his planning, had decided not to include battle boomers in this fight, because he saw no need to use some of his most destructive weapons on a civilian population. And he wanted to limit the amount of possible technology salvaging that might happen after the battle.

But, this oversight was about to cost Gomez dearly. Because what he did not know, and what that the big secret of the population of the Del La Plata Podrido concerned, was that the city was where most badasses of that world went to retire, to live quiet lives, and start families.

That being said, this did not stop the citizens from keeping the weapons of their old lives. Nor, did it stop them from teaching their children how to be badass, as well.

Though, as dangerous as these combat boomers were. And even the battle boomers could be. There was another oversight by their designers at Genom, in Megatokyo, that Gomez was not aware of. This oversight was due to the Japanese culture of being against gun ownership.

The boomer designers never considered their boomers would go up against populations that were completely armed. Such as populations in nations, like the United States of America, and Switzerland.

Also, due to the Genom using the AD Police forces to test out some of their boomers on, they forgot about limitations that they, themselves, had placed on the AD Police forces. Those limitations being, that except for a handful of heavy weapons. And a handful of small, lightly armored, and lightly armed mechs. The AD Police force was only allowed to use light caliber weapons, and they were not armed with piercing ammo.

These flaws in the boomers designs were compounded by the fact that combat boomers and battle boomers were designed to only deal with infantry. Which, from a military standpoint, the combat boomer being classed as a heavy infantry trooper. And the battle boomer was classed as a light armored, highly mobile tank, for mechanized infantry.

Further more, from a combat ratio standpoint, one combat boomer was designed to handle up to eight fully armed, human military personnel. Which equaled a single military squad, or unit. While, one battle boomer was designed to handle up to sixteen fully armed military personnel, or two full military squads, or units.

These boomers were not designed to fight heavily armored tank groups, nor flying tank-killer aircraft. Such as the low flying, air to ground airforce jets, and military combat helicopters. While, Genom had downplayed such battle reports, these weaknesses in their boomers' designs were proven a number of times, when these boomers went up against more powerful, heavily armed and armored forces.

As such, given how heavily armed the population of Plata Podrido were. And due to their concerns of maybe someday being invaded by the Mexican military, all of whom were armed with armor-piercing ammo, which would penetrate the boomers armor with ease. This put the combat boomers, that had invaded the island city, at a distinct disadvantage. Also, there were chinks in the armor that boomers had that allowed for bladed weapons to cut through the boomers, such as at the boomers' necks.

With people, such as Grace being trained to quickly spot such chinks and swiftly take advantage of such weak points.

And so, the local citizenry of De La Plata Podrido were about to go through these hundreds of combat boomers like a hot knife through butter.

With what had happened in the Italian restaurant being only a taste of what was about to come.

(_)

On the deserted part of the beach, where the Klingon Bird of Prey had landed, and was cloaked, thirty combat boomers teleport on the beach, in front of the ship.

For while the ship was cloaked, and far enough away from the water, to not get hit by the gentle waves that usually hit the section of the island, the crew had forgotten that their landing gear made large impressions in the sand that could be seen from a distance, for anyone who know what to look for.

As the boomers attacked, and began to make their way into the ship, the Atlantic Riders whom were inside the ship, which was the majority of the group, quickly realized what was going on, and they swiftly organized. With them retrieving weapons going into battle. With them giving as good as they got, if not more so.

(_)

At the Daiyu Place Casino, measures that had been put in place years ago, were finally being used.

Chang, and his friends, had long since planned out a situation, where they were suddenly attacked by large group of heavily armed personnel, from outside the casino. This was not the only defense plan they had in place, but it was the plan for the situation at hand.

The first part of their plan was to swiftly make sure everyone on the staff, and their families being swiftly accounted for. Though, not everyone could be contacted at the same time.

Chang did not believe in have a single, all encompassing alert system for his employees. Because, such a system could be used to locate everyone it was meant to alert, all at once.

Still, as people were contacted, and informed of which they they were using, they went their assigned locations.

Next, the security staff, along with a few others, grabbed their more power weapons, to deal with boomers. Most were conventional firearms with armor-piercing ammo, while a few people, including Mal and Zoe, were using phaser pistols. As they dealt with the boomers, at Edgar Industries Headquarters, on Mar Dome One, in the Babylon Five reality.

As the battle waged, Chang managed the situation from the main security room of the casino, with a handful of security personal, at their workstations, in the room. While the customers were moved back into the stage theater, and other large rooms, that were deeper in the building.

Chang was even proud of the valets. They were the ones that saw boomers approaching the casino. They rushed inside the casino, while also making sure everyone else got inside, as well. And they continued to have people move further into the casino, as security headed for the front doors, to assist the security personal already stationed there.

Chang planned to give those valets a bonus for their heroic actions in this attack.

Because those involved in the defense of the casino knew about combat boomers, what to expect from the killer machines, and how to destroy these cyberdroids, dealing with the boomers was not that difficult for them.

The security team was deployed around the interior of the building, with them destroying any of the boomers that came inside the casino. And then, the security team moved outside, to deal with the boomers, as they to create a perimeter that stretched from the parking lot, on the interior side of the casino, to the beach, on the other side of the building, which was the same side as the garage doors.

Though the garage doors were on the left back part of the building. With the main the exit, for guests, to the beach, a hundred feet from the casino, was down a main hallway, which was between the right side of the employee pool, and the medical ward, which was on the right back corner of the casino.

And so the casino defense plan work beautifully, in destroying the boomers that came into the casino parking lot, and casino.

Chang even had a little additional help in dealing with the boomers.

That help came from the five parents of the Lagoon family, whom came to the casino, to use the heated, indoor, employee pool, in the back of the casino.

Unfortunately, the boomers attacked before they could even get a chance to change their clothing, in the employee locker room, using their assigned lockers. With each one of them having a key to their own locker.

Though, Revy, with her two Beretta ninety-two FS pistols, was not the only one of her family that had casino, while armed. Due to all the craziness that had happened during the last week, both Dutch and Rock had their weapons on them.

For Dutch, she had her Smith & Wesson Model Six Two Nine revolver, concealed in her clothing. Dutch's revolver was six rounds, that fired forty-four magnum rounds. Dutch also had some speedloaders, for her revolver, on her person.

Rock had her sonic shotgun hidden under the left sleeve, of her long sleeved blouse, in her gamblers' rig, that allowed her to slide her weapon into her right hand, or slide the weapon back down her right sleeve, at a moments notice.

Once Change gave Revy armor-piercing nine millimeter ammo, and Dutch armor-piercing forty-four magnum ammo, they were able to help a great deal more in the battle.

And Rock was careful in her use of her sonic shotgun, so as to only hit the boomers, and not harm any of the people, nor do serious damage to the casino.

Meanwhile, Benny and Janet, were sent to be with the non-combatants that were part of the upper management, or were considered valuable. Such as Inara, and Spike daughter. Julia, whom was being home-schooled by tutors. They were sent to one of the various safe rooms, located on one of the basement levels of the casino.

Though, there was one person, on the security staff that was not present. Jayne, whom was running an errand in town. But, everyone knew that Jayne could take care of himself.

Still, what Chang and the others at the casino did not know was that the casino was not a priority target, nor were the people inside. Save for one person. Which the boomers were not assigned to deal with.

As such, the boomers were only attacking from the front ground entrance, which faced the city, and not the sides of the buildings, the upper floors, nor, the back of the casino, which faced the beach.

Though, Chang did not take chances, and he put guards on those areas of his building, as well. But, Chang made sure those in the parking lot had enough man power and firepower, to protect the casino, and help any civilians that wondered in their direction.

Still, the security staff on guard duty, had infrared glasses, that would inform them if the civilians that were wondering towards them were truly human, or boomers in disguise.

Though, so far, none of the casino staff had face any boomers disguised at humans.

Also, Chang checked to make sure his casino computers were not being attacks. Which he gratefully found not to be the case. Still, he had technicians continuing to monitor the computers, if someone did try to hack into the casino computer networks.

Along with the events taking place on the ground floor of the casino, River and Lee were in the living room penthouse apartment, with high powered rifles, loaded with armor-piercing ammo. Chang had ordered them to stay in the penthouse, and neither felt like arguing with him. Though, between River's telepathy, and Lee precognition, they could sense any boomer scaling the building, towards them, long before the boomers reached them.

Fortunately, that was not happening.

Though, there was a flaw in the casino defense plan. The plan was designed to alert those on the official casino employment list. And Annie and Arcee were not officially employees of the casino.

Even Annie and Arcee's side jobs at the casino, within the casino. Such, as help security, or acting as pit boss, and morale officer, were not on the official books. Because, Chang felt if mexican government ever did try to do a head count of his employ roster, finding out about Annie and Arcee would be the most trouble some part of the situation. As such, Chang kept the two women off the official casino books.

And Kaylee was not high on in the priority list. So, she was not been contact yet by casino security.

And given how well armored the garage doors to the back casino garage were, with doors almost always closed, and sensors put in place to detect if there was a break in, security overlooked sending any people immediately to the garage.

The three women were inside the back casino garage, with Ahsoka.

The boomers had yet to reach the garage. And they would not, because the casino security had already made it outside, with the casino building itself already considered to be secure.

(_)

Within the large, back casino garage, near the middle of the room, Kaylee had just finished working on a car, and put away her tools.

Annie, Ahsoka, and Arcee in robot mode, stood in an open space, near Kaylee, as the four women talked about various subjects.

All four women were several feet apart from each other. With them giving each other space, to create a more relaxing atmosphere and mood for them.

There was plenty of lighting, from the ceilings lights, from everyone to see with.

Kaylee was in her green mechanic's coveralls, and black boots.

While, Annie, and Ahsoka were dressed casually. With Annie and Ahsoka wearing pants, shirts and shoes, among other things. Though, Annie had on her Jedi robe.

Ahsoka had on her red cloak and hood, though, her hood was draw back, to show her face and head.

Also, Annie had her lightsaber clipped to the right side of her belt, while Ahsoka had her two lightsabers clipped to the sides her belt. One lightsaber on each side of her body.

Kaylee enjoyed the company, and the other three women had nothing better to do that morning.

Suddenly, through the force, Annie felt something very wrong happening on the island of De La Plata Podrido. She felt as if the collective will of the entire population of the island had been shifted, and mobilization to fight, something.

Annie turned to Arcee, as she requested, “Arcee, could you check to see if something is going on?”

Arcee then used her communications systems to check with hotel security.

A few seconds later, Arcee's face became a mask of concern, as she stated, “We got a big problem. Combat boomers had been reported appearing and attacking all over the island. Including, the casino itself. Fortunately, Mal, and the security forces are handling this situation here, very well.”

Annie commented, “Still, we need to help them. Where are they at?”

Arcee said, “Around the casino. With Mal, Zoe, and a number of others, in the front parking lot. Also, there have been no human casualties have been reported.”

Annie stated, “Good. Contact the security. Tell them we will be with them in a few minutes.”

Arcee replied, “Okay.”

Annie commented, “I hope you don't mind dealing with the boomers?”

Arcee responded, “Not really. I tend to draw the line on those beings that are built soles to kill. Whom do not think of the consequences of their actions. And whom try not to be better than what they are.”

Annie said, “I will go along with that.” She turned to Kaylee, as she continued, “Kaylee, you better head to one of the safe rooms.”

Kaylee looked over at Annie, as she replied, “Okay.”

Annie turned to Ahsoka, as she requested, “Snips. Go with Kaylee. You will be safe with her.”

Ahsoka looked at Annie, though, she did not reply.

Just as Annie and Arcee were about to head for the closest entrance from the garage to a the casino hallway, an invisible force picked up Arcee, and slammed her against the far wall.

Annie looked over at Arcee, whom was already starting to getting up.

Annie realized, as she thought, 'What a minute. There are only two people here that could do that. Me, and Snips.' She turned to Ahsoka, as she asked, with slight confusion in her tone of voice, “Why?”

Ahsoka looked at Annie, as she unhooked her lightsabers, and ignited them. With the blue bladed lightsaber in her left hand, and the green bladed lightsaber in her right hand. She casually said, “Isn't is obvious. I am part of the boomer attack outside.”

Annie quickly used her right hand to unhook her lightsaber, and she ignited the red energy blade of her lightsaber. She held the hilt of her lightsaber, with both her hands, in a defensive position towards Ahsoka.

By then, Arcee, was back on her feet. And Kaylee clearly understood was about to happen. Kaylee stayed silent, as she quickly walked behind Annie.

Annie kept her eyes on Ahsoka, as she loudly ordered, ““Kaylee, get out of here, and get to the security room. Arcee get outside, and help the people out there. I am sure that the casino staff can handle the boomers here. But, that still means someone needs to be out there, helping the civilians, around the city. Though, be careful. Some of them might mistake you for the enemy.”

Kaylee quickly rushed to one of the exits, to the back hallway to the casino. Within seconds, she had left the room.

Meanwhile, Arcee looked over at Annie and Ahsoka, as she stated, “On it.”

Arcee swiftly used her communication abilities, to remotely open a garage door near her. The garage door opened, she walked through threshold, and closed the garage door behind her.

With everyone else gone from the garage, Annie and Ahsoka continued to look at each other, as they held their lightsabers at the ready.

Ahsoka commented, “How do you like my lightsabers? I built them, myself. I will admit that you were at least a good teacher on that point.”

Annie thought, 'There is no point in upsetting her. Still, I find out why she is doing this. Though, I have a bad feeling I already know the answer.' She casually asked, “They look nice. So, are you going to tell me what this is about, Snips?”

Ahsoka coyly answered, “Justice. Revenge. Kicking your ass. All three.”

Annie inquired, “While I sense you are upset. During your visit, I haven't sense much anger from you. You haven't fallen to the dark side? Have you?”

Ahsoka quipped, “Only during my period.”

Both of them could help but to break out in light laughter, at Ahsoka's joke, for a few seconds.

As they calmed down, Annie conceded, “I will give you that one.”

Ahsoka asked, “You don't experience those? Do you?””

Annie flatly said, “Yes. I do.”

Ahsoka shrugged, as she replied, “Oh well.”

Annie thought, 'If I find what this boomer attack is all about, I might be able to talk Snips down.' She inquired, “What is this boomer attack about?”

Ahsoka admitted, “Honestly. I am not sure, myself. I am just doing my part of this mission. I don't know the whole plan, because my employers were intelligent enough to only give their subordinates only enough information to do their jobs.”

Annie sighed, as she thought, with slight bitterness, 'Well, that is a dead end. I will give her employers credit. They are clearly genre savvy. Though, I can try to reason with her. I will try a different approach.' She questioned, “Snips, why are you doing this? I taught you better.”

Ahsoka sarcastically responded, “Really, Annie Skywalker? How did you teach me better than this?”

Annie tried to answer, with her suddenly finding herself with no answer to give. With there being only silence between them for the next few seconds.

Ahsoka then stated, in a condescending tone of voice, “Exactly. You taught me all the moves. And all the force skills I needed. But, you didn't teach me the moral consequences of my actions. And that is because you never understood the concept of being responsible for your own actions.”

Annie responded, in a sincere tone of voice, “I have since learned that lesson.”

Ahsoka questioned, “And how did you learn that lesson?”

Annie winced, as she answered, “I watched my own movies. All six of them. And even both Clone Wars series.”

Ahsoka smirked, as she sarcastically stated, “Ouch... That much have been rough.”

Annie thought, 'Your reaction only confirms what I suspected. You have not read Lee's stories. Which is good. That would only complicate matters, right now. Now, to try to help explain things to her.'

Annie calmly said, “It was. But, I had a friend that help me get through it.”

Ahsoka asked, “Well, lucky you. Of course, I know you were Vader, when you were fist in black suit. When I saw holovides of you fighting as Vader. I would recognize your lightsaber fighting style anywhere.”

Annie admitted, “Yea. You know me way too well.”

Ahsoka said, “Yes. And I realize that I had to run as far away as possible, to escape.”

Annie commented, “Well, you successfully evaded me.”

Ahsoka responded, “Yes. I did. So, do you still practice aggressive negotiations?”

Annie stated, “No. After much thought, and personal reflection, I came to realize that such tactics were a major part of my downfall. Of the four people I know, whom practiced such tactics, including myself. Aggressive negotiations lead to Qui Gon Jinn being killed in battle. Obiwan becoming a hermit in the desert. Myself becoming a monster. And you ended up an outcast from the Jedi order.”

Ahsoka shrugged, as she said, with slight sadness in her tone of voice, “You right about that. Though, I did leave the order on my own.”

Annie noticed Ahsoka sad feelings, through the force. She commented, “No. You were betrayed by those you trusted, and thrown out. And when you were asked to come back, you rightly refused. I am now proud of you for that.”

Ahsoka countered, in a spiteful tone of voice, “You are just happy, I did not wind up dead, with everyone else, in the Jedi purge.”

Annie replied, in a sincere tone of voice, “Yes. And I deeply regret those actions.”

Ahsoka commented, “I saw the movies, as well. And my series. You were a puppet to both Palpatine, and the Jedi Council. It was just that Palpatine was better at pulling your strings, than the Jedi Council. Though, I still hold many grudges, towards you, during your time as Darth Vader.”

Annie conceded, “And you have every right to do so.”

Ahsoka stated, “But, I am not going to fight you over those grudges, just yet. We are going to talk, first.”

Annie replied, “Good.” She thought, with a little hope, 'Maybe I can talk you down.'

Ahsoka said, in a forceful tone of voice, “I am sure you want to know why I did this. Why I am working for people attacking you and your friends? The answer is very simple. If you had just killed the members of the Jedi council. I would not have minded. Hell, I would helped you, if you had asked.”

Ahsoka continued, with rage evident in her tone of voice, “But, you also murdered the children, and everyone else.”

“While I left the order. I still considered many of them to be my family. And you slaughtered them all, without a second thought...” She yelled, “Even the younglings! You deserve to die for that!”

In contrast to Ahsoka's rage, Annie forced herself to remain calm.

Annie conceded, in a calm tone of voice, “Perhaps. But, not today. And I will not make any excuses for my actions then, either.” She thought, 'Besides. Such excuses would sound shallow. No matter how sincere they were. Still, I need to know what they offered you, Snips, to do all this?'

Annie asked, “So, what was your price in all this?”

Ahsoka answered, “Killing you. Those who hired me, and Barbossa, gave us some information. A rumor that Jack Sparrow's future incarnation was spotted here. And that you were here, and now a woman. To be honest, you look like your own twin sister.”

Annie responded, “I know. And what is your part in all this?”

Annie could now clearly use the force to feel the waves of rage coming off in waves coming off Ahsoka, which were directly towards her.

Ahsoka lips curled into a wicked smile, as she said, in a cold, tone of voice, that hid her rage, “Simple. You should feel honored. My employers feel that you are one of the few people in this city that they believe could pose a real threat to stopping this boomer attack.”

Annie asked, “And what do they want from me?”

Ahsoka continued to smile, as she answered, “They just want me to make sure to prevent you from interfering with this boomer invasion. I figure killing you will accomplish that task. Though, they would be happy if I just delay you.”

Annie questioned, “Do you honestly think you can take me in a fight?”

Ahsoka smile turned into a smirk, as she answered, in a smug tone of voice, “I have gotten a lot better since I was your student. In both the force, and my lightsaber abilities.”

Annie replied, “Well, so have I.”

Ahsoka demanded, “Then, prove it!” She then charge at Annie.

Annie stood her ground. And as Ahsoka reached Annie, their lightsabers clashed.

After several attacks and parries. With neither of them giving an inch, nor being harmed by the other. Annie saw her opening, and she struck out at her first target, at the right side of Ahsoka's pants, less than an inch from Ahsoka's thigh.

Ahsoka sense something just happened, as she jumped back ten feet. After she landed, on her feet, she looked at Annie, as she demanded, “What did you do?”

Annie stated, “I destroyed your reality device. Which you have been hiding all this time. So you cannot escape.”

Annie thought, 'Arcee sense that the moment she met you. And she quietly told me about that, a few days ago, while you were busy.' She continued her thoughts, with more concern towards her friend, 'I am not going to let you escape, Snips. And risk you falling to the dark side on my account.'

Ahsoka risked a quick glance at her the right side of her pants. She saw that the pocket where her kept her reality device was scorched. The smell of burnt electrical wiring coming from the pocket, signifying that her reality device no longer functioned.

Though, Ahsoka felt that her right thigh, itself, was not harmed.

Ahsoka looked back at Annie, as she commented, with a bit of anger in her tone of voice, “And you think that makes me less dangerous.”

Annie responded, “No. It just means you are not going to be dangerous, elsewhere.”

Ahsoka commented, in anger, “As if I have anywhere else to go.”

Annie realized, as she sadly thought, 'Oh Snips. You never found a home, outside of the Jedi Temple. You consider this likely a suicide mission. To die killing the person responsible for destroying the only really home and family you ever had, the Jedi Temple, and the members of the Jedi Order...'

Annie continued her thoughts, with a more resolute feeling, 'Well, I am not going to let you die, nor be crippled from this fight. And I am also not going to let you do the same to me.'

Annie requested, “Snip... Ahsoka. Give this up, before someone is hurt. Trust me. Revenge is not worth it. I know from experience the damage revenge can cause on oneself, and other people.”

Ahsoka spat out, “Annie, all you are doing is proving yourself to be a hypocrite. And that only angers me, further.”

Ahsoka then rush back towards Annie, as their battle continued.

(_)

At the harbor, on the cargo ship, the Maria Zeleska, which served as the current headquarters for Hotel Moscow, the members of Hotel Moscow were having to deal with combat boomers, as well.

Though, like the Daiyu Palace Casino, they were not a primary target. So, they were having to deal with only a few boomers coming, every so often, towards their cargo ship.

Fortunately, there were always guards on duty. And those guards had alerted the others on the ship to the impending attack. And due to decades of training drills, and experience, everyone was organized and ready within three minutes.

Below the deck, a few armed members of Hotel Moscow were guarding the toddler siblings, Dmitri and Alexandra.

Meanwhile, on the deck of the ship, Balalaika, B, and other members of Hotel Moscow, were using their AK forty-seven rifles, and other high-powered weapons, in dealing with the boomers.

As most of the Hotel Moscow members dealt with the closer boomers, they also had snipers stationed on the ship to take care of the boomers, at a distance.

Though, unlike some groups. Hotel Moscow were not pressing their advantage, and moving further into the warehouses and buildings, surrounding the docks. This was because the harbor had several buildings that were close together, which made for excellent ambush points. Instead, members of Hotel Moscow used infrared scopes, on their weapons, to find the boomers, and take them out from a distance.

And given the members of Hotel Moscow had been exposed to the super-soldier soldier serum of the vat process, they had, among other physical abilities, enhanced senses. Such as hearing and sight. And even more steady hands. As such, the distance at which the members could hit a target were mostly limited by the projectile ammunition they used. And they hit the boomers with pinpoint shots to the cyberdroids' heads, killing the boomers instantly.

Still, there were some members of Hotel Moscow that were in town at the time. Though, Balalaika, and B, were confident that those members could take care of themselves.

(_)

As battles waged across the island, the police station of Plata Podrido was no exception.

While not a primary target, at the beginning of the battle, combat boomers had busted into the front of police station, before the police even began getting the first calls for help, by phone.

Fortunately, Pedro had drilled his officers that if the station was attacked, that those near the attackers, where to stall them, while all the other officers made it to the weapons locker.

So, the first bullets were shot, from those officers at the front of the lobby, as they held off the boomers, while the other officers dropped down and made their way to weapons locker.

This included Pedro, whom was sitting in his office, with Matthew. When the attack began. Both dropped to the ground. As Pedro crawled out of his officer, and through the room outside, towards the weapons locker, on the other side of the room.

Meanwhile, Matthew crawled, as he followed behind is friend.

While they passed in the aisle between the office door, and the desks, they took a quick glance towards the front of the room, as they passed by. They saw that the police station was being attacked by blue combat boomers.

As they crawled, there was no officers nearby. And the only sounds were gunfire, from the front of the room.

While still near the floor, and moving towards the weapons locker, Pedro quietly complained, in spanish, “My first day back in town, and all hell breaks loose.”

Matthew heard Pedro, and he had learned just enough spanish to understand what Pedro was saying, as he commented, in english, “That figures. Still, I would be more worried about the citizens here. If this is happening across town, I don't think you will have much of a city left, after these boomers are through with it.”

Pedro continued to looked forward, as he responded, in english, “On the contrary. The citizens of this community are one of the few groups that I am not worried about. They can handle this. I don't expect these boomers to last very long in this city.”

Matthew flatly questioned, with a bit of disbelief in his tone of voice, “Really?”

Pedro stated, “Yes. You have spent most of your time at the casino. You really don't know the people in this town, like I do. As such, I am more worried about us, and my boys. The people in this town can take care of themselves.”

Matthew inquired, “If that is the case. What is the point to this police force?

Pedro answered, “We try to keep outsiders from creating the brushfire that these boomers have likely just sparked.” He thought, 'Because my superiors do not want risk the creation of a firestorm of badass, being created, by pissing off the people on this island. That is why they pay me, and my boys, to keep the peace here. We are not here to just protect the people of this city from outsiders. But, to protect the rest of the world from the people in this city.'

Matthew suggested, “So, you don't want to use our reality device to escape.”

Pedro flatly stated, “Hell, no. I am not going to run, while my boys are fighting. Now, stay down, while we get to the weapons locker.”

Less than minute later, they reached the entrance to the weapons locker. While the door to the weapons locker was usually closed, with a numerical touch pad, by the door, to unlocked it. The numerical pad had a battery to it, so if power was cut, it could be still opened. And one of the officers that knew the code already unlocked the door and opened it.

As they crawled into the room, Pedro turned to Matthew. He said, in english, “You can stand up. The walls and ceiling in here are armored.

While Pedro and Matthew stood up, they saw that several other other police officer retrieving their assigned high-powered weapons, and the loaded magazines that with with those weapons.

Pedro looked at his men, as he thought, 'Unfortunately, we don't have time to get our body armor on. Though, I do have a few orders for them, in dealing with these monsters.'

Pedro stated, in spanish, “Boys. Don't bother with the body armor, just yet. Focus on getting your rifles ready. Pistols and shotguns are not going to do much against these things. Also, get the magazines with armor piecing ammo. And don't bother aiming for the body. Go for these monsters' heads.”

Pedro thought, 'I cannot tell my boys that these are boomers from another reality. Only half of them would understand, and the other half would then I am crazy. Meaning, telling have would damage my authority with them. While it would freak out the other half, whom know how dangerous these combat boomers are. And except for not having mechs, we are better equipped to handle this situation, than the AD Police ever were.'

'Now, to get my own personal rifle.'

Due to the urgency of the situation, none of Pedro's subordinates replied, as they carried out their orders.

Meanwhile, Pedro turned and walked over to the rifle and ammo magazines that he had assigned to himself.

As he reached his rifle, he picked up his FN FAL L Two A One automatic rifle. The reason Pedro had was using such a weapon was a because the arsenal in the weapons locker were not uniform, and varied in types, and styles of weapons. Though, all of the firearms were modern pistols, shotguns, rifles, and a few machine guns.

This was due to the fact, that while his position as police chief gave him the authority to purchase various firearms and ammo. He was only given limited funds, annually, to make such purchases. So, he had to work under a tight budget. Fortunately, over the course of years, along with using his personal connections, Pedro had amassed a respect arsenal of various high-powered rifles, ammo, and equipment.

The FN FAL L Two A One automatic rifle was an inch-gun. Meaning it was built using the British system of measurements, instead of the metric system, that the original Belgium FN FAL rifles used. Though, the rounds the weapon used, which were seven point sixty-two by fifty-one millimeter NATO cartridges, were made using metric measurements.

Pedro's L Two A One had both adjustable iron sights, and a scope, on a raised mount, on top of his rifle. The mount had a hole in it, that allowed him to stop use the rifle's iron sights.

With his rifle in his right hand, by the fore-end, he used his left hand to reach for one of the load ammo magazines, that had armor-piercing ammo in it. Pedro could tell which magazine was loaded with which type of ammo, by the color of the tape on the side of each of the magazine.

The magazines Pedro used, each held twenty rounds of ammo. He preferred the twenty round magazines over the thirty round magazines, for his rifle, due to the more ammo the magazine had, the heavier. And after years of practicing with his rifle, Pedro found he was more accurate with the twenty round magazine than the thirty round magazine.

Pedro used his left hand to slide the loaded magazine he had into his rifle. Next, he used his left hand to pick up a few other magazines, and put them into his left, outer coat pockets.

Pedro then used his right hand to grip the fore-end of the rifle, while he slightly raised up the his right thigh, as he place end of the stock a weapon against the front of his right thigh.

Next, he used his left hand to flipped up the charging handle, on the left side of the automatic rifle. He pulled back to charging handle, as he used his right thigh as leverage, while he chamber a round into the rifle. Pedro allowed the charging handle flipped back, and it closed itself.

After which, Pedro swapped hands, as he used his left hand to grip the fore-end, from the bottom. He then let go of the fore-end with his right hand. Next, turned the rifle to the left side, as he used his right hand to turned off safety, and set the select fire switch to single shot.

Pedro then turned his rifle upright, as he moved his right hand to hold the grip of the rifle, while he rested his trigger finger on the trigger guard.

Pedro then turned to Matthew, whom was nearby, as he said, in english, “Stay behind me.”

Matthew just nodded once, in response.

Thirty seconds later, the police officers were ready, as they came out of the weapons locker, ready to do battle, with their high-powered rifles, with armor-piercing rounds.

The police officers returned to the lobby, to officer cover fire for those police officers that had held off the boomers.

The battle was quick and vicious. Though, for the police, due to Pedro making them regularly practice with their firearms, once they had their heavy weapons, quickly killed the boomers. And all that was left was the aftermath.

A few minutes later, after the end of the station battle, Pedro had quickly reorganized his officers, and ordered them, in spanish, to got get equipped with body armor, riot helmets, some extra magazines for their rifled. And Pedro made sure his subordinates had on the usual radios they had clipped to their belts.

Pedro also found that his police station was not severely damaged, and power was still on.

Once his officers were ready. Except for those taking care of the wounded, they had already found, as best they could, with the station's minor medical equipment, Pedro had the rest of his officers organize in the front lobby of the station.

Matthew stood behind Pedro, as Pedro faced the men and women of his police force.

Pedro gave his orders to his personnel, while Matthew silently stood behind Pedro.

Pedro then had his officers to account for everyone. Both officers, civilians, and prisoners. And for them to check on any wounded, or dead. Including, any of their prisoners, in the station jail cells, that may have been harmed. Fortunately, everyone in the station was accounted for, and there were no dead. But, there were some more wounded they had not accounted for.

Along with these orders, Pedro had his officers, in spanish. He assigned some of his officers to take the wounded to the island hospital. He had them take their rifles with them, as he order them to use the riot van to transport the wounded.

Pedro was not worried about the hospital, because the staff there was just as skilled, and well armed as almost everyone else on the island, and the hospital had their own drills on dealing with outside attackers. Pedro was sure that once his boys got the wounded to the hospital, the officers and wounded, would likely be fine.

Next, Pedro assigned a few guards to guard the prisoners in the station.

After which, he organized the rest of his officers in groups of six, and he ordered them to head out, and hit the streets to take care of any of these killing any of these monsters they find, while helping the civilians as they can. And for his officers to overlook any civilians that had weapons, as it would not be wise to arrest anyone on weapons charges, at the present time.

Though, Pedro warned them, that if they saw large, pink robot, for them not to attack that robot.

Pedro figured that Arcee might be handling a few of the boomers, as well. And he did not want to make an enemy out of her, by upsetting her.

After the officers had left, Pedro turned to Matthew, and told him, in english, to follow him.

Pedro then headed for the communications room. As he decided, he need to oversee command, from there. So, he could keep updated with the situation, and to issue orders to his personnel.

Pedro them planned to order the officers out on patrol to pull out their heavy weapons from the backs of their car trunks, and to assist the local civilian population, in destroyed the blue monsters that had appeared in their home town.

Pedro also planned to get in touch with those at Daiyu Palace Casino, and the Devil's Hotel, as soon as things settled down. Which he guessed would be a few hours. Still, he was sure that the people from those two places, like the rest of the town, could take protect themselves, in need be. As such, Pedro was presently more concerned about the police personnel, than anyone else.

Though, from the communications room, he answered the phones, and issues orders to his subordinates. And in doing so, he did what he could, to both help the civilians of the city of Plata Podrido, and the police that were on duty there, as well.

(_)

As battle waged across the city, when the boomers started coming towards the Last Resort Diner, those inside saw them coming through the weapons, and they swiftly got ready for the attack.

Those inside were Lori, Ed, Rico, Stan, Lewis, Leona, Irene. Lori's six biker friends, Cynthia, Denise, Kyle, Wyatt, Evelyn, and Tommy.

Along with a few a few customers that came in before the attack, along with a few people that ran into the building, for cover, when the attack happened. And those already inside were more than happy to help them.

When the boomers did start to approach the diner, everyone inside saw them, through the windows, coming from a distance. This gave them time to prepare.

While, Lori, Ed, Rico, and the bikers were armed, the others in the diner were not.

The bikers had phaser pistols, while Lori, Ed, and Rico had conventional pistols.

Lori had her three fifty-seven magnum peacemaker top-break revolver, that held six rounds.

Ed used a semi-automatic SIG-Sauer P two two six elite pistol. Her pistol had a safety, and was double action-single action trigger. The pistols was stainless steel with polished, brown wooden grips. The version Ed used nine millimeter bullets in fifteen round magazines.

Rico used a semi-automatic, blued Jericho nine four one pistol, that had a safety decocker and double action-single action trigger. The version of the pistol that Rico used fired forty-five ACP bullets from a ten round magazine.

Lori had extra loaded speedloaders for her revolver. While, Ed and Rico had extra loaded magazines for their pistols. And experience had told the three of them to keep a couple of different types of ammo, for various situations. So, have their ammo was armor-piercing, and the other half was hollowpoint bullets. With them swiftly switching to their armor-piercing ammo, before the boomers reached them.

Everyone in the diner used the center, rectangular counter for cover. With Stan, Lewis, Irene, Leona, and those few people that had fled into the diner to avoid the boomers, being placed against the now, turned off stove.

While those with weapons, were crouching right in front of the counter, as they popped up to fire their weapons at the boomers heads, from the top of the counter, or the sides of the counter, before ducking back down.

Fortunately, the boomers were only attacking from the front, and none of the people in the diner had been harmed. As those defending the diner had killed a number of boomers with head shots. And none of the boomers had gotten closer to them, than the windows, or doors.

The only damage to been done to the doors, the windows, the outer walls, along with a few vehicles being mildly damaged.

Though, these were no cars used by the Lowe family, or other diner employees, as they parked their cars behind the restaurant.

Also, the inter wall and stove, behind the counter were damaged. Due to a boomer ripped off a fire hydrant, and throwing it at them, with it hitting the left side of the inner wall, where the stove met wall.

Though, the hydrant hit the wall, and dropped to the ground, away from everyone that was behind the counter.

And while there was now a water spouting from the broken main outside, the water flowed to the street and drain, while those inside the diner were just happy not to be harmed by the thrown object.

As those with weapons popped up to take head shots at the boomers, before they dropped back down to the cover of the counter, Evelyn asked, “Is this counter armored plated?”

Lori answered, “Yea. When we bought this place, we heavily remodeled the building. There is steel plating, half inch thick sheet, on all sides of the counters, and interior sides of the outer walls. They cost a small fortune, to purchase and have install, but they were worth it. You cannot see steel plating due the paneling over it.”

Evelyn questioned, “So Bob, why are the windows and doors destroyed? I would think, with the armor plating, you would pop for some decent ballistic glass on the windows and doors.”

Lori responded, “We did. The windows are resistant to bullets, but clearly not a boomer's fist resistant.”

Evelyn replied, “Fair enough.”

Lori requested, “So, given my family diner is being destroyed. I have to ask. Are these boomers from your enemies?”

Evelyn said, “Absolutely.”

Ed demanded, “Start talking.”

Denise said, “We might as well tell them.”

Tommy agreed, “Yea. We should. After this, we owe them an explanation.”

Cynthia commented, “As long as we get to continue shooting while talking.”

Rico mentioned, “Don't worry. We are good at it.”

Kyle stated, “That is quite apparent.”

Wyatt said, “Yea. You are doing good.”

Rico replied, “Thank you. I think.”

Leona groaned, as she requested, “Stop with the banter, and just get to the point.”

Evelyn said, “Well, from what we have been able to piece together, it started with this government agent named, Gomez.”

The Lowe family, and Rico immediately realized who they were talking about, as Lori asked, “This Gomez. Is he a fair skinned, big stocky man, very muscular, with short, blond hair? And he likes to wear green business suits?”

Evenly answered, “I haven't see him. But, from what I hear, that is what he looks like.”

Ed stated, “So, that is what happened to him.”

Stan said, “I knew we all should have looked for him, further.”

Lewis replied, “I agree.”

Irene asked, “So, you know who this Gomez is?”

Rico commented, “Yes. We do. And we are going to have a long talk with Lee about this.” She mentally added, 'Damn his... Err her stories. Just another problem caused by Lee. Though, I sincerely hope this is the last problem we have to deal with, from her actions.'

Leona whispered into Lewis' ear, “How is Lee mixed up in this?”

Lewis softly replied, “We will tell you, later.” He thought, 'Last night, my family, and Rico, all agreed, including myself, not to tell dad's bikers about Lee's stories.'

Leona quietly said, “Okay.”

Lori calmly pointed out, “Guys. Do not get to upset. This is not that bad. We at least know who to blame. And who to bill for the damages.” She thought, 'We will blame Gomez. But, we will ask Chang to help us pay for repairs. I am sure he will be more than happy too. Especially, since he and River want to help keep Lee out of trouble. Not that I really blame Lee for this. Still, other might do so.'

Lori verbally continued, “Now, we just need to all survive this in one piece. And on the bright side. At this rate, we will run out of boomers, before we run out of bullets.”

Ed replied, “Good.”

The group then continued alternating between staying behind the cover the counter provided, and shooting at the boomers, as the killed machines approached the diner.

(_)

At the Devil's Hotel, a battle was waging outside of the building. The combat boomers were mostly being fought in the parking lot, though a few tried their luck on the surrounding sides, and lost.

The fight had been going on for the better part of half an hour.

At the beginning of the attack, Aeryn Sun Crichton and Violin Cephon Shinmyou Crichton, along with their young daughter, Gilina Crichton, were walking into the Devil's Hotel, from the front entrance. After they had taken their car to get some breakfast at a restaurant in town, and they had finally returned to the hotel.

The parents had a scheduled a play date, for their daughter, with Lotton's son Thomas, Sawyer's daughter Ivy, and Shenhua's daughter Wenqian. In about ten minutes. And they were going to meet their friends in the hotel restaurant.

As the Crichton family entered, Gilina had looked behind them, and spotted the first few boomers, far, on the other side of the Devil's Hotel parking lot, by the street.

Gilina asked what they were. Her parents turned around and saw the blue armored combat boomers, they instantly recognized what the cyberdroids were. And they saw that the boomers were walking towards the hotel.

Aeryn and Violin turned, and Aeryn picked Gilina, as they rushed through the front lobby, towards the hotel restaurant.

Though, as they passed by the front desk, they told the two clerks on duty to get to the restaurant, as well. The clerks knew the two women well enough to know they should do what the women said, and they did.

Fortunately, there was no one else in the front lobby.

As the Aeryn, Violin, and Gilina reached restaurant, Aeryn set Gilina to stand between her two parents.

Those in the restaurant could see that the two adults of the group were agitated.

A few seconds later, the front clerks also came into the room, and everyone realized something was very wrong.

While, along with a number of their friends, there were a few hotel guests and employees in the room as well, Violin did not bother to choose her words carefully, and she stated they saw combat boomers approaching the hotel from the street. And they had about two minutes before they got the lobby entrance.

Those inside the restaurant that knew was going on and the danger they were in were, Shenhua, Lotton, and Sawyer, whom sitting at a table in back, by the stage, with their three young children. Their children were sitting in booster seats at the table their parents were at.

At a table by Shenhua, Lotton, Sawyer, and their children, were Fabiola, Matt, and Leigharch. The three adults had returned from playing in the hotel game room. And they had decided to come back to the restaurant to find someone to talk to.

Luckily, Lotton, Sawyer, Shenhua, and their children were still having breakfast, and they were more than happily to talk to Leigharch, Fabiola, and Matt. This allowed Leigharch to catch up with Shenhua. Fabiola was happy that the others were happy, and less likely to cause trouble. And Matt was just happy not to be the center of attention.

Their conversation had lasted for a while, before the Crichton family had entered the restaurant with bad news.

Nearby, the five Lagoon sisters, Sarah, Molly, Kristina, Rebecca, and Yukio. With them were the trio sisters, Nodoka, Mikoto, and Yurika.

The eight friends sat between two nearby tables. At one table, sat Molly, Sarah, Rebecca, and Yukio. At the other table, sat Yurika, Mikoto, Nodoka, and Kristina, whom sitting beside her long time girlfriend, Nodoka.

The eight friends had been talking amongst themselves, while they were eating a late breakfast.

They had to order their breakfast from the restaurant menu, because they had come into the restaurant, after the breakfast buffet had been taken down for the day.

Given the week they had. Including, what happened in hotel itself, in the casino, and hose bikers showing up. The five sisters had decided, like Revy, the five Lagoon sister to keep their weapons on themselves, or in their car, when they were traveling.

Sarah had her katana in its sheath in its scabbard, on the left side of her belt.

Molly had her two semi-automatic pistols, in her shoulder holsters. With a few extra magazines, in slots, under where the pistols were placed in the holsters.

Rebecca had her to long knives sheathed in their scabbards that were strapped to her back.

Yukio had set her machine gun, with its hundred round modified c-mag magazine, by her, at the table.

At the other table, Kristina had her two power gauntlets set beside her, on the table.

And the other hand, the trio sisters did not usually use weapons. Though, the did know how to use firearms and melee weapons. This was because they were expert martial artists, and they each had elemental powers.

Yurika had lightning abilities, including creating and projecting arcs of lightning, and electricity.

Mikoto had fire abilities, including generating fire balls and have arcs of flames come out of various parts of her bodies. Though, she preferred to use her hands, when she did that. Though, she was not a pyromaniac, and she preferred to use her martial arts, over her fire abilities.

And Nodoka could generate and control water, ice, and water vapor.

They all had just finished their breakfasts, when the Crichton family had come into the restaurant, with Violin warning them all about the boomers.

Meanwhile, right after the warning was given, Melanie, whom had just come into the restaurant, rush over behind the bar counters, to pick up the wireless phone.

Melanie then dialed an emergencies extension that put out an emergency message to all the phones in the suites, and hotel offices. At once. The recording stated the hotel was under attack, and for those inside to stay where they were, unless the fire alarms went off. In which case, they should calmly exit the building, through the short path out of the building.

The recording played in a few different languages. First was spanish, then english, then in a series of other languages. And the message loops a few times, for a few minutes, before it automatically hung up.

Melanie then hung up the phone, and she turned to the crowd. After the hung up the crowd. She stated for them to not to worry about the money for their meals and drinks. Just for them to handle the matter at hand.

As this went on, Fabiola quickly pulled dialed her encrypted cellphone, and she dialed Roberta's cellphone, to warn her, Garcia, and the Pena family, of the attacking boomers.

But, after a few rings, Roberta did not answer her phone. Which likely meant she, and probably Hernan, were both already dealing with the boomers at the moment.

Though, Fabiola was sure that Roberta and Hernan would be able to protect Garcia and the Pena family.

Roberta was always armed. And considering she knew that Roberta always kept extra weapons in her car. So, Hernan would have weapons, as well. If he did not already carry his own weapon.

Fabiola hung up her cellphone, and put it away.

Then, to everyone's surprised, Shenhua quickly took charge. And no one was going to argue with the Taiwanese woman, whom was a former assassin.

Shenhua stated that she needed few groups to deal with the boomers outside, and a group to stay here and protect everyone else.

Shenhua pointed out that the restaurant was the most defensible position in the hotel. Given the hidden steel armor plating on the walls ceiling, and bar counter. Then, there was the concrete floor. And there were only two entry points into the room, from outside.

Everyone, who knew was going on, agreed with Shenhua's assessments, that this would be the place to stay during the attack, for those not fighting the boomers outside.

Shenhua then turned to Fabiola and told her to go get her weapons. She could tell that Fabiola did not have her weapons on her person.

Though, Matt did have his semi-automatic pistol in a shoulder holster, under his coat.

Fabiola did not reply, as she stood up, and rushed out of the room. She didn't bother to use the elevators, given they did not have the time. Instead, she found someplace private, and she pulled her her reality device. She then did a short teleport to her suite, at the same time she left.

Fabiola did not want to risk time traveling into the future, and missing the battle. Given it was clear that those at the hotel could use her help.

(_)

Once Fabiola was in her suite, she put away her reality device, as took stock of her situation.

Fabiola did not have time to change her clothing. Instead, she quickly retrieved her weapons, which were hidden in the room, in her suitcases, and put them on her bed. Next, she opened them, and then the hidden compartments inside.

She first pulled out shoulder holsters, and put them on, over her shirt. Next, she pulled out her loaded Beretta seventy-sixes semi-automatic pistols. She picked up one of the pistols, pulled back the slide to chamber a round, and then placed the pistol in her right shoulder holster. She then did the same with the other pistol, placing it in her left shoulder holster.

After which, she pulled out a few loaded magazines for her pistols, and she placed the magazines in slots under the places for her pistols, in her holsters.

While Fabiola was fairly sure twenty-two caliber rounds would not doing anything against boomers, but she had them, just in case.

She then retrieved her two Techno Arms MAG-Seven, which were modified semi-automatic loading. The shotguns were already loaded with short twelve gauge buckshot rounds, in five around magazines. She changed out the two magazines with magazines loaded with short twelve gauge armor-piercing rounds.

Fabiola then placed straps on the loops on the left sides of the shotguns. She pulled back the bottom of the fore-end, on each shotgun, to chamber a round. After which, she gently set the two weapons on the bed, by her.

She then pulled out a gunbelt, with ammo pouches on the side, for her shotgun magazines, and a sheathed combat knife, on the back left side of the belt. Roberta had taught how to use a combat knife. Though, she was not that good at it.

Next, she quickly picked out the magazines that were loaded with armor-piercing slugs, for her shotguns, and she loaded those magazines into her ammo pouches.

Fabiola then pulled out out bandoleer with forty millimeter grenade round already in it. She strapped the bandoleer, with the grenade round, across her chest, from her right shoulder to her lower left side.

After she did this, she pulled out her loaded, pump-action China Lake grenade launcher, which looked like an oversized shotgun, with a brown wooden stock. She also pulled out the holster she had for large weapons.

She usually kept that large holsters under the back of her shirt. With her pulling our weapon out by from under the back of the collar. Though, she could use it a couple of different ways. The holster had two sets of straps.

She put on the holster, with the straps running crisscross across her chest, and over the bandoleer. She place the holster itself, on her back, with the hole for the weapon facing up, in a diagonal angle, towards her left shoulder.

The grenade launcher fired the same forty millimeter grenade rounds, as was on her bandoleer. There were already three rounds in the ammo tube, and one in the chamber.

The grenade launcher was in its folded state. Where the stock, right behind the trigger was folded against the right side of the receiver, hammer, and trigger section of the weapons.

Fabiola carefully unfolded the load weapon. She then holstered the weapon, to where the stock was between left shoulder, and her neck.

The only reason she did pull out any hand held grenades, out of her suitcases, was that they would be more a hindrance in this coming fight, than an assets.

Since she was finished pulled out weapons, ammo, and gear, she quickly closed and put back up her suitcases.

She then picked up her shotguns, and hung a shotgun, by its strap, on each of her shoulders.

Her weapons, holsters, and gunbelt made for an interesting contrast, to the yellow short sleeved button up blouse, green long skirt, and yellow tennis shoes, she wore under her weapons and equipment.

She then pulled out her reality device, and teleport back to the hallway, outside of the hotel restaurant, at the same time she had left.

She then put away her reality device, and she entered the restaurant. She had made record time, in returning less than a minute after she had left. Roberta training had paid off against for her.

By the time, Fabiola teleported back her she returned, less than a minutes later, Shenhua was finished organizing everyone. With everyone when to their assigned locations.

Fabiola looked around, and noticed a few things.

Matt had his semi-automatic pistol pulled out, with his trigger on the trigger guard.

Aeryn and Violin, and taken Gilina to sit by where Shenhua, and her family were, near the stage, in the back of the room. both had their pulse pistols pulled out, from their concealed holsters.

Lotton had two concealed semi-automatic C ninety-six Broomhandle Mauser pistols on her person. Of which, she had pulled out, and held one of her semi-automatic pistols, with her trigger finger on the trigger guard.

Also, given Sawyer did not have time to get her chainsaw. Besides which, she knew better than to get that close to a boomer, without a powersuit. So, Lotton had loaned Sawyer her other semi-automatic pistol, which Sawyer had in her right hand, with her trigger finger on the trigger guard.

At that moment, Aeryn, Violin, Lotton, Sawyer, and Matt, all pointed the barrels of their weapons, at the ground, away from everyone.

Melanie had her post-nineteen forty-seven TT-33 Tokarev semi-automatic pistol tucked in the back of her pants, under her untucked shirt.

The pistols held eight, armor-piercing, seven point six two millimeter rounds in the magazine. Though, the chamber of her pistol was currently empty.

Fabiola already knew, from talking to the three lovers, that Lotton long ago taught both Sawyer and Shenhua, how to use her pistols.

Meanwhile, Shenhua was wearing her usual red qipao, under her open, white long sleeved jacket, among other clothing, underneath. She also wore red, flat soled slippers.

Under her white sleeves, on her both her forearms, were armbands, with cords loosely. coiled around them.

On each of her upper thighs, hidden by her clothing, was a garter belt, that held her kunai thrown knives.

And her two kukris long knives were sheathed, in their scabbards, in pockets, on the interior sides of her white jacket, under her arms.

As Shenhua gave the last over her orders, she pulled out her kukris, and connected them to the cords under her sleeves, where were attached to the armbands, on her forearms. So, she could use the long knives, as long distance, thrown weapons.

And even though they were adults, Shenhua cared about the Lagoon children, and the trio sisters. But, she needed them to protect the outside of the building, from the coming boomers. So, she split the difference, and assigned them to the sides of the building, and not the parking. While she and Fabiola would be guarding the front of the building.

Fabiola did not argue with the request, because she knew that of those present, Shenhua and herself, were the best two people to handle the job.

And the Lagoon sisters, and trio sisters, accepted their assignments, without an argument.

Though, Shenhua did admit to herself that Aeryn and Violin could do the job. She wanted to keep those two in reserve, in the restaurant, in case the boomers got passed them. Given Violin's abilities, and Aeryn's training, would make them the only two in the hotel, that could handle close quarters combat with a boomer, without being serious harmed, nor killed. And without becoming extremely destructive.

Though, Shenhua wondered where Barbossa was. But, she knew that the old pirate could take care of himself.

Shenhua then ordered everyone to this assigned locations. She then walked out the room, to the hallway, with Fabiola following behind her.

The Lagoon sisters, and trio sister, got up, retrieved their weapons, and left the room, as well.

Meanwhile, everyone else stayed inside the restaurant.

As the ten adults entered the hallway, the adults in the hallway that were armed, had their weapons at the ready. And Kristina, Sarah, and Yukio then separated from the group, as the headed for the back exit to the hotel, and the beach outside, that exit.

The other seven adults headed for the front lobby.

When they reached the front lobby, they head exited out of the front entrance, of the hotel. They were just in time to stop three boomers, right outside, from reaching the front entrance of the hotel.

The group made short work of the boomers. The group then separated, and fanned out to their assigned locations, where they would stand guard, and destroy any boomers that approach the Devil's Hotel.

Of the various groups Shenhua had created. She had separated the women, based on their combat abilities. Pairing up groups that would be able to compliment each other in battle. And she used fair assessments in doing so.

On the right side of the hotel, Mikoto and Nodoka stood guard. Along with their martial arts abilities, with Mikoto's fire abilities, and Nodoka's water and ice abilities, they would make sure work of any boomers that approached them.

On the right side of of the hotel, Rebecca, Molly, and Yurika were station. Molly would use her pistols to help deal with the boomer at a distance, while Rebecca would her use her long knives to protect Molly from any boomers that came to close to them.

Meanwhile, Yurika would zap any boomers that go close, with lighting. While being careful not to electrocute neither Molly, nor Rebecca. Also, Yurika had her martial arts abilities, to her deal with any boomers that came too close to her.

On the beach side of the hotel, Kristina, Sarah, and Yukio were stationed. They did not need any elemental users, because there was less chance for a boomer to come that way. Still, the plan was that Yukio would take the boomers out at a distance, with her machine gun. While, if any boomers got too close, Sarah, with her katana would protect Yukio. And Kristina, with her two gauntlets that shot out both flames and frost, towards any boomers that closed in on them.

And on the front side of the hotel, in the parking lot, Shenhua and Fabiola were using their weapons to take on the lion's share of the combat boomers that came towards the hotel. And they were both holding their own, without any trouble.

Inside the hotel restaurant, the children were placed behind the bar counter, by Melanie. Because the bar counter had armor plating, as well. Offering further protection from any boomers that might get inside.

Melanie stood behind the counter, closer to the main entrance to the restaurant, that lead to a main hallway, on the ground floor.

Melanie had her pistol out, as well. She pointed at the main entrance to the restaurant. And there was currently seven rounds in her magazine, and one round in the chamber of her pistol, with the hammer cocked back. Though, her trigger finger rested on the trigger guard of her weapon.

The other non-combatants, both the staff, and hotel guests, were huddled in the far, back left corner of the room, where the stairs to the stage were located.

In front of the non-combatants. were Aeryn, Violin, and Matt, whom covered both the kitchen entrance, while also keeping an eye on the main entrance.

And Lotton and Sawyer, were using the pistols in their hands to cover the main entrance to the restaurant.

Also, if necessary, Violin was ready to go hand to hand and fight any boomer that came into the bar. And with her super-strength and super-speed, she stood a fair chance against a single boomer. But, she was not invulnerable, and she had not melee weapons with her. While boomers usually had two pronged claws that popped out of their wrist.

So, if Violin fought a boomer in hand to hand combat, she was taking a very real chance of being seriously injured, or even killed. And the level of danger only went up, with each boomer she fought at once.

Violin figured she could handle three boomers at once, before the situation became too risky, and dangerous, to even attempt to fight the cyberdroids in hand to hand combat.

Everyone in the room just hoped it didn't come to that, and the boomers would not make it inside the building, let alone the room they were in, at all.

(_)

The battle waged outside the Devil's hotel, with those groups on the sides of the hotel were able to deal with a handful of combat boomers, with ease. In the front parking lot of the Devil's Hotel, the area was littered with dead blue combat boomers, with orange boomer blood streaming from the bodies, as the liquid ran down the drain.

Fortunately, the two human fighters in the parking lot, Shenhua, and Fabiola, were unharmed. Though, several cars, trucks, SUVs, and minivans, had been severely damaged. Yet, none of the vehicles had exploded.

Still, while the two women were unharmed, sweat ran down the inside of their clothing, from the exertions of the fight. Though, they were nowhere neither tired, as they held their own against the boomers.

All the while the two women were being complete professionals. And they did not have the time talk. No witty quips. No bards. No insults. Because doing so might create a deadly distraction for herself, or the other woman, with her.

The two women were not trying to show off. They were just doing their jobs.

In addition, they both noticed that it seemed that the boomers were not working together.

And the boomers came in waves, of a few at a time. Which made things much easier for those defending the hotel.

Neither woman knew why this was. But, they were not going to look a gift horse in the mouth.

Shenhua used the kukri in her right hand to swiftly decapitate the boomer right beside her.

While that boomer fell dead to the ground, at Shenhua's feet, Shenhua threw the kukri in her left hand, in a wide, clockwise arc, by the cord attached to the armband on Shenhua's left forearm, like a ball and chain weapons.

As Shenhua used the cord in her left hand to both guide, and control the distance of the arc, so that she use the inwardly curved blade of her left kukri to cleanly slice through the neck of a combat boomer that was thirty feet from her.

With the boomers in the distance dead, Shenhua flicked her left hand and wrist, causing the swinging blade and cord to stop its arc, and jerk back to Shenhua.

A second later, Shenhua caught her left kukri, by its hilt, with her left hand.

She had destroyed all the boomers near here. This offered her a reprieve, for the moment, So, she decided to take the opportunity to take stock of the situation around her.

She saw that the fight had cause her to move to the middle left of the parking lot, when facing the hotel.

Shenhua thought, 'I am a far distance from the hotel. Though, not too far.'

'Now, where is Fabiola? Because, if something happened to her, I really don't want to explain the situation to Roberta and Garcia.'

'Roberta might be more dangerous than me. But, when I look into Garcia, I see a strength behind his eyes that is just begging to be let out.'

Shenhua then jump onto the hood of a nearby, nearly undamaged car, to look around, over the other vehicles.

Next, she looked around, and she quickly saw that Fabiola was across the parking lot. Near the fact right corner of the parking lot, when facing the front of hotel, close to the street.

It was not hard for her to locate Fabiola. All she had to do was listen out for the gunshots.

Fabiola was unharmed, though she was still in the middle of fighting a three boomers. One near her, and two in the distance, whom were approaching her.

Shenhua also noticed that Fabiola had her shotguns in her hands.

Shenhua watched as used her left shotgun, to shoot a boomer nearby, through its right eyes.

As the boomer dropped dead, Fabiola swiftly tossed her shotguns to her side, as she reached from behind her back to pulled out her China Lake grenade launcher, from its holster, that forty millimeter grenade rounds.

Fabiola held the stock of the weapon with her right hand, and the form-end with her left hand.

Fabiola tucked the end of the stock, of her weapon, firmly against the front of her right shoulder, as she took aim, with her dominate right eye, at a boomer about forty yards away from her, near the street. She fired the weapon, and the grenade exploded when it hit the chest of the boomer, causing the boomer to be blown apart in pieces.

Fabiola quickly used her left hand to pull back on the fore-end, causing the empty casing to drop to the ground, as a fresh grenade was loaded into the chamber, from the ammo tube.

Next, Fabiola took aim at the boomer about thirty-five yards, to the her left, by the street, near of the boomer she had just destroyed. She fired her weapon, hitting the boomer in the chest, and destroying it, as well.

Fabiola looked around, and she didn't see any boomers. She used the break in the battle.
as an opportunity quickly reloaded her weapons.

She first reloaded her grenade launcher, from the grenade rounds on her bandoleer. She even had one round in the chamber of the weapon. She then slung the weapon into its holster, on her back.

Next, she picked up shotguns, and she changed out the empty, or near empty magazines that were in the shotguns, with loaded magazines from one of the ammo pouches on her gunbelt. She also made sure that there was a round in the chambers of each of her shotguns.

She then placed the magazines she had just taken out of her shotguns, into the same pouch she had pulled the fresh magazines from.

Though, she was careful to keep track of which magazines she had that were empty and which were full. She could tell which were empty and which were fill, just by the weight.

After which, Fabiola stood back up. And as she held her shotguns in her hands, she was alert to any more boomers that might show up.

While Shenhua watched Fabiola stand there, in the parking lot, Shenhua thought, 'I don't think she has noticed me. Not that it matters. Still, from those moments, when I have had the chance to see her fight out here, I have noticed that she uses her weapons sparingly. With her making each shot count. I doubt she has even gone through half her ammo, yet.'

'Though, I hope this attack ends, before she runs out of ammo. Or, I have to call in one of the others, around the building, to assist me.'

'And she is doing is doing well in this battle. And it looks like we are both handling the situation well.'

Shenhua continued her thoughts, with amusement, 'And while I prefer blades over firearms. It is nice to have friends that like to use firearms. Especially, having friends that prefer to use some of the more destructive firearms available.'

Then, from the corner of her left eye, Shenhua noticed something happening near the front entrance of the hotel.

Shenhua turned, and she recognized a Starfleet runabout shuttle, by its the elongated pylons, one on each side of the ship. She watched as the shuttle slowly landed in the empty lanes, between the front hotel sidewalks, and the parking spots in the parking lot.

The shuttle landed, by the awning, that stretching from the front entrance of the hotel, with it's left side facing the hotel.

The front entrance to the hotel was about forty yards from Shenhua's location.

Shenhua thought, with mild surprise, 'Okay. You don't see that everyday. Though, I am sure that ship, and those on it, are connected to this boomer attack. And that means we can get some answers.'

'Also, they must be well connected to get a runabout. Those things are hard to get. Trying to purchase Starfleet technology, from the Federation, is like pulling teeth. And stealing their technology is just not worth the risk. I should know. A few years ago, Sawyer, Lotton, and I, looked into getting one. And it was just too much trouble do to so.'

'But, maybe I can seize this one. I was a pirate in a previous life. Though, I will have to make sure to disable the self-destructive devices, when I do. To prevent myself from being killed, when I take the ship.'

'Starfleet always likes to destroys their toys, rather than to allow those toys to be stolen by others. Personally, I fund such a stance to be childish.'

Shenhua then watched as she the back ramp of the shuttle lower to the ground.

Shenhua thought, with wicked glee, 'All the better. I do enjoy it when they open the door for me.'

Though, what happened next, caught Shenhua off guard, as a second later, she watched Barbossa, in his biker clothing, and weapons, come out of the front entrance.

Shenhua then saw as Barbossa walked up the ramp, and into the back of the runabout.

Shenhua thought, with confusion, 'What the hell?!...'

Then, Shenhua's emotional state quickly turned to white hot rage, as she realized, in thought, 'He is part of this... Barbossa is part of this... That!...' She yelled, in english, to make sure Barbossa clearly understood what she said. And statement was one word. “Traitor!”

Shenhua swiftly charged at Barbossa, and the roundabout, in a full running dash. With her long knives in her hands, while her arms were outstretched from her, to keep her from accidentally hurting herself with her blades, if she were to trip. Though, she did not.

(_)

A few seconds ago, Barbossa exited the front entrance of the hotel, and walked to the open ramp on the back of the runabout shuttle.

As he walked, he thought, 'It is fortunate that everyone is either in hiding, inside, or fighting boomers outside. It made getting from my suite, to here, very easy. I would hate to have kill anyone that would desire to ask me why I was in the front lobby, during the attack.'

'I am still annoyed that I had to leave this reality in this manner. But, my reality device finally gave up the ghost. And I had to use that little device, Furlow gave me, to signal that I needed a pickup.'

'Though, I am grateful to Gomez, and Furlow, for that little device. And I will get a replacement reality device, when I return to headquarters.'

'Also, standing inside the front lobby, waiting for my ride, watching the battle outside, gave me the opportunity to see how well my lessons for Shenhua, have paid offer for her. I must say, Shenhua is really showing off out there. And I can see how my lessons have improved her fighting style... Ah, if only we had more time...'

Barbossa continued his thoughts, with slight sadness, mixed with a little bitterness, 'But, I have found that my time is quite limited, not matter how I travel through it.'

Barbossa then mentally reflect, with a bit of sarcasm, 'Still, I wonder if Gomez could not have been more flamboyant, in the ride he got me. This is going to attract attention. Though, there is nothing I can do about it, right now. At least, they landed on the correct side of the building. And Gomez knows how to hire competent help.'

By then, Barbossa had made it to the ramp. As he walked inside the runabout
he head Shenhua voice, scream in the distance, in english, “Traitor!”

Barbossa turned back to see, in the distance, Shenhua, with her long knives in her hands, charging towards him, and the shuttled.

Barbossa bitterly thought, 'I guess I was right. I better handle this now. Or, she will track me across the multiverse, in ways I will not be able to plan for.'

Barbossa turned back inside the runabout, as he strongly stated, in english, “Take off, but, leave the ramp open. Also, get us about as high as this building, and start heading for the sea. And go slowly. I will give the order when to close the ramp, and reality teleport to headquarters.

One of the human pilots, in the front cockpit, said, in english, “Roger that.”

Barbossa thought, 'Good. Gomez told them to take orders from me. That man really does know how to please those in his employment.'

Barbossa turned around, towards the open ramp, as he used his right hand, to draw his cutlass, from the scabbard, on the left side of his belt. He then backed away, further into the shuttle, as he faced the ramp.

A few seconds later, the shuttled slowly started to lift off, as it moved forward, in an upper diagonal direction, around the right side of the hotel.

Shenhua reached the ship, by the pointed where the shuttle was five feet in the air, and climbing. Shenhua effortlessly jumped onto the ramp of the shuttle.

Shenhua did not waste time, as she charged inside, towards Barbossa.

As Shenhua reached Barbossa, she did two slashes at once at the old pirate.

While only holding his cutlass with his right hand, Barbossa quickly angle the blade of his cutlass to block both of Shenhua's long knives, at once.

Barbossa then returned the favor, with Shenhua parrying the old pirate's blade.

Neither of the combatants were holding back in their close quarters combat against the other.

Shenhua had the advantage of youth, and physical abilities. While Barbossa's advantages were his skills and experience.

While they fought, they moved around the back cabin of the shuttle, causing the shuttle to start to shake, from side to side.

This was because, the spacecraft, while built using very advance technology, was not designed to be stable, and handle shifting of weight inside, while being effected by outside gravity well, that it was moving over. Such as the planet this shuttle was flying over, so closely.

While, in space, even in orbit around a planet, the shuttle's own gravity system, and navigation system, could compensate for sudden, continuous weight shifts, with its own artificially created gravity well, and inertial dampeners. This was not the case when the shuttle flew right above the surface of a planet.

This was why standard Starfleet regulations stated that all personnel must remain seated, and not stand up, while inside a runabout that was either flying up into orbit, or heading down, into re-entry, towards a planet's surface.

Due to the constant rocking motion, Shenhua suddenly found herself off balance, in this fight she was having.

This was because she was not use to fighting on a vehicle that was moving in more than one direction at once.

On the other hand, Barbossa had spend a lifetime fighting battles on rocking sea vessels, to the point it was second nature to him.

And the experience that Shenhua did have on fighting at sea, only dealt with fighting on medium to large, modern ships. With those ships using modern ballasts. And they were designed only rock as little as possible, while at sea.

In addition, Shenhua did not fight on ships when it was stormy. While Barbossa had fought at sea, during storms, several times.

While they continued to fight, Barbossa noticed that Shenhua was starting to make slight mistakes in both her swordsmanship, and her footwork.

Barbossa quickly realized, in thought, with mild annoyance, 'Shenhua never developed her sea legs. Given she is my future incarnation, this is embarrassing for both of us. Still, I can use this to my advantage.'

Barbossa immediately pressed his advantage, as he force Shenhua back towards the ramp, while he kept her off balance.

(_)

At the fight continued, in the cockpit of the Starfleet runabout, the pilot and co-pilot sat next to each other in their chairs. Both of them were human men.

On a monitor, in the middle of the control panel in front of them, they had the screen set to watch the fight in the back of the ship.

The co-pilot kept his eyes on the control panel in front of him, as he quietly commented, in english, “I hate it when passengers get rowdy.”

The pilot, whom watched his own control panel, softly agreed, in english, “So do I.”

The co-pilot quietly asked, “Are we in danger of capsizing?”

The pilot softly responded, “Nah. We're fine. And even if we were. This ship would automatically right itself.”

The co-pilot whispered, “That is comforting to know.”

The pilot quietly inquired, “Where did you learn to flight shuttle?”

The co-pilot softly answered, “Back at the headquarters. They didn't cover that subject.”

The pilot quietly replied, “Oh.”

The co-pilot softly stated, “I guess that is why you are the pilot and I am only the co-pilot.”

The pilot quietly said, “Thank you. Though, don't sale yourself short. You are doing fine at this job.”

The co-pilot softly responded, “I appreciate the compliment. So, do you think it would be a good idea to just angle ship upward and just dump these two fools out?”

The pilot quietly pointed out, “Not unless you want Gomez to have both our heads.”

The co-pilot softly conceded, “Good point.”

The pilot whispered, “Though, I have to admit that thought crossed my mind, as well. And at least they are so occupied with fighting each other, they don't hear us.”

The co-pilot softly said, “I am glad about that, too. Also, it is a shame that our pickup is fighting such a gorgeous woman.”

The pilot quietly warned, “Don't get any ideas. I have heard about these women. They are crazy, as they are beautiful.”

The co-pilot softly retorted, “Aren't all women?”

The pilot thought about what the co-pilot said for a couple of seconds. He then quietly conceded, “I guess they are. Now, let's focus on doing our job.”

The co-pilot softly replied, “Yes. Sir.”

The pilot and co-pilot then went back to their jobs, as they also occasionally paid attention to the monitor, between them, showing the fight, that was happening so close to them.

(_)

By this time, the shuttle craft was now at same height at the Devil's Hotel, as it passed by the right side of the building. And the ship was slowly making its way over the beach, on the back right corner of the hotel.

At the moment, in the back cabin, Shenhua feet were on the ramp, as her back face the open are, and Barbossa had corned her, with the old pirate being only four feet from her.

Then, after parrying Shenhua strikes, Barbossa swiftly cut the cords that connect her long knives with her armbands. Barbossa continued the motion, as he brought his sword blade to the left side of Shenhua's neck.

Shenhua immediately stopped moving, as she thought, 'It's over.' She then looked Barbossa in his eyes. And she saw firmness behind Barbossa's old, hard eyes.

Since they had stopped moving, the ship finally righted itself, and Barbossa continued to hold his blade to Shenhua's neck, without cutting her skin.

Barbossa ordered, “Drop your blades off the ship.”

Shenhua did not even think twice, as she tossed, her kukris behind her, off the ramp, and into the air. She then allowed her hands to drop to her sides.

Barbossa warned, “And don't even think of going for your throwing knives.”

Shenhua replied, “I wasn't planning to.”

(_)

At the moment, on the beach, right outside the Devil's Hotel, Kristina, Yukio, and Sarah stood together, with their weapons ready. They had only dealt with one combat boomer so far. And they did so without any problems. Still, they are ready for more.

The Kristina noticed something in the sky, to their right. She used her right gauntlet to point at it, as she said, “Look.” She then dropped her hand back to her side.

The three sister turned to their right, to look at the sky, in a diagonal direction from them. They all saw two tiny glints of metal, fall from the sky, and land about a hundred feet from them, near the shore.

And then, they noticed the ship in the sky, above where the to metal pieces had dropped. And that ship was heading out to sea.

Kristina commented, “That is Federation Runabout.”

Sarah said, “Interesting.”

Yukio held up her machine gun, and she aimed it at the runabout. She offered, “Do you want me to shoot it down?”

Sarah, answered, “No. Because, we don't know who it on board.”

Kristina said, “I agree. Besides which. That ship might be armed, and armored. Your bullet will likely not damage it. But, shooting the ship will probably get the pilot's attention. And we are not equipped fight a federation ship.”

Yukio lowered her weapon, as she conceded, “Good point.”

Kristina squinted her eyes, to see a little further, as she used sight part of her sensory enhancements she had inherited from her mother, Dutch. She then saw who was standing on the open hatch, on the back of the ship.

Kristina commented, “I think Shenhua is up there.”

Sarah stated, with concern in her tone of voice, “And I think those two pieces of metal that fell were her kukris. This is not good.”

Yukio replied, “You can say that, again.”

Though, Sarah did not. As they watched what unfolded, in the sky, high above the three women.

(_)

Back on the ship, the shuttled had started to move over water, as Barbossa continued to hold the blade of his cutlass to the left side of Shenhua's neck.

Barbossa ordered, “Now, take a few steps back, my student. As you walk the plank.”

Shenhua took a few steps backwards to the edge of the ramp, with Barbossa take a few steps forward, to maintain the short distance between them, which was only four feet. All the while, Barbossa kept his blade against the left part of Shenhua's neck, without cutting her skin.

Shenhua slid her feet along the ramp, to allow herself to tell when she reached the edge, without looking. She came to a stop, as she felt the back of the bottom of her left heel reach air.

Shenhua continued to look at Barbossa, as she thought, in annoyance, with some rage mixed into her emotional state, 'This is so cliche. Though, I am not going to say that to him, because he might just slit my throat, and dump my body. And I know just because we share the same soul, does not mean that he will not just kill me. Because, I know if our roles were reversed, I believe I would be doing the same thing.'

'Though, where are we, exactly?'

Shenhua risked a glance to her right side, to see that they were no over the water, but not to far out from the beach.

Shenhua thought, 'If I remember correctly, by the eastern side of this island, the dropped off, on sea shelf, is close to the beach. Still, I have one question for my former teacher.'

Shenhua looked up at Barbossa, as she firmly asked, “Why?”

Barbossa smirked, as he casually said, “I'm a pirate, my dear.”

Barbossa then removed his blade, to the left, away from Shenhua's neck and body, as he used his right foot to swiftly kick Shenhua in the stomach, knocking her off the space ship, and into the air, the ocean waves.

As Shenhua fell, she heard Barbossa laughing, as the ramp quickly closed. A few seconds later, after the ramp closed, space ship reality jumped.

Though, Shenhua did not focus on those matters, at the moment.

Instead, Shenhua was focusing on surviving.

Shenhua looked down at the approaching water, as she thought, 'If I land right, I will be fine. I just hope the water is not too shallow.'

She quickly shifted her weight to where her feet were below her, with her legs straighten, but not locked. She then crossed her left arm under her breasts. Next, she crossed her right arm upwards, as she used her right thumb and index finger to pinch her nose closed. Finally, she took a breath, and she closed her eyes, just as her feet hit the water, sinking down like a stone.

Shenhua held her breath, as she came to a slow stop, in the water, without hitting the sea floor.

She then opened her eyes. She looked up to see the sunlight above. And though it was had to judge distance underwater, she saw she was around twenty-five feet underwater.

Shenhua then quickly started swimming up to the surface, as fast she could.

Twenty seconds later, of diligent swimming, she made it to the surface of the water. And just after she broke the surface of the water, she took a deep breath of fresh air.

As Shenhua look around her, she saw she was not that far from the beach.

As she floated in the water, her long, black, loose hair was partly in her face. She used her right hand to pull her hair away from her face, while she thought, with rage, 'I think I might become the only person in the multiverse to kill myself as an act of vengeance. Or, in this case, kill my previous incarnation.'

'My only regret is that I am not going to be able to torture him to death, because I might someday remember the event from his point of view. And that is too messed up, even for me.'

'Now, to get back to shore, and get my weapons. And I think I know what part of the beach my blades landed on. And at least they did land in the water, or it would take far longer for me to find them.'

'Also, I need get these severed cords off, considering they are now useless to me.'

Shenhua swiftly reached up her sleeves, and unhooked the ends of the cords, from her armbands. She then started swimming to shore.

Fifteen minutes later, she made it back to shore. As she walked onto the sand, she found that she still had on her red slippers.

Shenhua kept walking, until she came to came to a stop on dry sand. She then used her enhanced vision to look around, for any reflective glints of metal that would be her weapons.

A few seconds later, she saw both her weapons had landed together, and they were only thirty feet away from her, on the dry sand.

Shenhua briskly walked up to her kukris. When she reached her weapons, she bent down and collected her kukri long knives. She then checked her weapons.

She thought, with relief, “Good. They are undamaged. At least, I don't have to replace them... Again. And this clothing is actually water resistant, so it will be dry in a few minutes. And my hair will dry on its own, within the hour.'

She then removed the severed cords from the bottoms of the hilts of her kukris, allowing the cords to drop to the sand. Next, she sheathed her weapons, in their scabbards, on the interior sides of her wet, white, long sleeved, jacket.

Shenhua thought, 'I don't have time to head to my room, and replace the cords, for my weapons. I will have to do that, later. I need to get back to the parking lot, and help Fabiola, before something happens to her.'

She then continued her thoughts, in a much more grimmer frame of mind, 'And when this battle is over. I will go after Barbossa, and get some much needed payback from him.'

Shenhua then saw, Kristina, Sarah and Yukio approached her.

Shenhua thought, 'Well, it is nice that they are concerned for my well being. They have been nice to me, and followed my orders. So, I better be nice to them, and not take my rage, over what Barbossa, has done out on them.'

As the three sisters came to a stop, Yukio had her machine gun in her hands, with the barrel pointed away from the three other women, whom were present. While, Sarah held her katana, by the hilt, with her right hand, with the blade pointing downward, to her right side. And Kristina held her gauntlets to her sides, towards the ground.

Yukio asked, with concern in her tone of voice, “We saw what happened. Are you alright?”

Kristina commented, “Yea. That was some fall. We are all concerned.”

Shenhua turned to three sisters, as she answered, “Yes. I will be fine. And we still have a job to do.”

Sarah complimented, “That is a good attitude to have.”

Shenhua responded, “Thank you. I need something to kill, right now. And a few boomers will sate by bloodlust just fine. Now, please continue with your duties.”

Shenhua thought, 'Now, that I think about it. While I am worried about, Fabiola. She should be fine, without me, until I get back to the parking lot. Which should be only a few minutes. And honestly, she is almost as good as I am. And she clearly has plenty of ammunition.'

'And after this battle, I will replace my broken cords with my spare set in my room. Then, I will seek revenge.'

Meanwhile, the sisters did not reply to Shenhua, because they were not sure how to reply to the former, or now semi-former, assassin’s comment.

Shenhua turned towards the hotel, and she began to run in the direction of the closest back entrance of the hotel.

While Shenhua ran, she thought, 'It is a shorter distance to go through the hotel, to reach the parking lot, than to go around the building. And I cannot wait to start killing some more boomers.'

A few seconds later, she reached the double-door entrance to the hotel. She pulled open the left door, and ran inside the building, with the door springs, at the top of the door, automatically pulled the door closed.

(_)

Across town, at an in a shopping district, Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, had decide to do some shopping that morning, they had invited Yolanda and Eda, to come with them. Considering, both of the former spies were very good at picking clothing, for almost every occasion.

When the boomers attacked, Ranma and Natsuru used their powers and abilities to take down several boomers, with little effort. With Eda and Yolanda offering support, with their firearms, from a distance. While, Akira, whom did not have her weapons on her, helped huddle the civilians in the shopping district, into on store for cover, as she did her best to keep them calm. Which Akira was doing a good job of.

(_)

Meanwhile near the middle, eastern side of the island, near the beach, though a block inland, Roberta and Hernan were doing their best to deal with the boomers they and their family, were faced with.

Roberta, Garcia, and the Pena family, Hernan, Maria, their three children, Antonio, Carmela, and Ramon, were in the middle of their day trip, of showing Garcia around the island, when the boomers attacked.

Due to this being planned as a family day for them, they all dressed casually, and Pedro did not even have on his sunglasses, which he usually wore all the time.

Given their were seven people in their group, and they only had cars to take them were they wanted to go. They had to take two cars. Maria drove the first car, the Pena's family car. Garcia was in the front passenger seat, while the three Pena children were in the backseat. Maria gave Garcia the tour of the town, as she drove. And she was an excellent driver.

Roberta and Hernan followed in Roberta's car. Roberta drove, while Hernan sat beside her, in the front passengers seat. They followed the other car, while they kept watch for any signs of danger.

When the boomers first started showing up. With only a few showing up, far down the street, from their cars, Maria saw them. She did not know what the blue robotic humanoids were. But, she did know they were likely trouble for them.

While Garcia did not see the boomers, he did trust Maria on what she was doing. And so did Maria's own three children.

So, Maria did as Hernan had taught her. She quickly got off the road she was on, and backed up between two buildings, with the car facing the room. This was she could hide, while still have the car, and with the car pointed towards the road. So, she could see what was going on, and for a quick getaway.

Roberta and Hernan had also saw the blue combat boomers down the street. And they immediately understood why Maria had just pulled into an alleyway.

Roberta then swiftly parked by the sidewalk, on the street, near the alleyway that Maria, had parked in, with Garcia, and the three Pena children were her, in her car.

Fortunately, as Roberta looked back over at the boomers, she saw that the boomers did not noticed them. And she informed Hernan that they had a few minutes to prepare, before they would have to deal with this trouble.

Hernan know what boomers were, and he agreed with Roberta's assessment.

Due to all the craziness that had happened in the last few weeks. With the bikers coming to town, and the powerarmored man showing up at the Rats Nest, the night before, being the last straw. Hernan had start carrying the pistol he kept hidden in his bedroom.

While, Hernan did not usually carry is pistol. He did take the time to teach Maria, and their children proper gun safety, and how to use firearms.

Hernan pistol of choice was a semi-automatic, pre-seventies nineteen eleven Colt forty-five, that was blued black, with brown wooden grips. The weapon had open iron sights. Hernan's pistol was like the Roberta's Sistema pistols. Including, Hernan's pre-seventies magazines holding seven, forty-five ACP caliber bullets in its magazine.

Hernan carried his pistol in a shoulder holster, under his left armpit. His pistol and holster was hidden under the jacket he were that day.

Meanwhile, Roberta was carrying her two Sistema forty-five pistols in two holsters, on the back of her belt, like Chang used for his personal pistols.

Given Roberta liked to be prepared, she kept several load magazines, for her pistols, under the driver's seat of her car. With the each magazine having a colored piece of tape on it, to show what type of ammo was loaded inside it.

Roberta had experience in dealing with boomers, and she knew that armor-piercing ammo would work best for killing the boomers.

Fortunately, the forty-five magazines that Roberta's used for her Sistemas were interchangeable with Hernan pre-seventies nineteen eleven pistol.

Roberta then handed Hernan a magazine loaded with armor-piercing rounds. He changed out his magazine, which was loaded with hollowpoint bullets, with the magazine that Roberta had given him.

Hernan even said thank you, for letting him use her equipment and ammo.

Roberta then changed out her own magazines, that were in her pistols.

Along with this, Roberta had plenty of magazines, with armor-piercing rounds for the both of them.

Roberta and Hernan then pocketed several magazines.

A minute later, they got out of Roberta's car, and walked over to the Pena family car, by Maria.

Maria rolled down her window. Hernan then told Maria, Garcia, and the kids to stay where they were, unless the boomers either take down Roberta and himself, or they start getting to close to them. In which case, the needed to escape by car. If their car was blocked, they need to get out of the car, and escape from them on foot.

Hernan then mentioned that he had taught Maria escape tactics, based on Guerrilla warfare urban tactics.

Roberta mentioned she had given Garcia similar training.

Next, Hernan stated that the boomers showing up here was likely not an isolated event. And they were would all over the island, right now. So, trying to get back home would be to dangerous. The would just keep running across more and more boomers. And they needed to hunker down for the next few hours, and see what was happening.

Roberta agree with Hernan's theory.

Maria asked what boomers were, and Garcia explained they were mass-produced killing machine.

Then, Roberta and Hernan headed for the nearby street, beside the alleyway, as they waited for the first boomers to show up.

The blue combat boomers they saw in the distance, soon started coming in their direction. Fortunately, the area of the city they were in was usually deserted during the winter. With mostly spring and summer shops. So, Roberta and Hernan did not have to worry much about a stray shot hurting someone. Though, they were very mindful of where each other was, and where their family was, at all times.

Though, even taking that into account, they realized they had breathing room to work with, while they fought the combat boomers.

Roberta and Hernan did have a little trouble with a few boomers. When the first few boomers tried use use their claws, or their other weapons. Such, as their heat panels, or mouth energy cannons. The two former FARC members were able to shoot the boomers dead with one shot each, in to the boomers' heads, before the killer machines were able to take aim, or come at arms reach, of them.

Though, most boomers just tried to attack with one their hands, which made them easy prey for Roberta and Hernan.

Also, early in the battle, Roberta's cellphone started ringing. Though, she ignored the ringing, because she was in the middle of fighting some boomers.

Still, Roberta already knew it was likely Fabiola. And she was sure that all her student wanted to do was warn her about the boomers. Which meant Hernan was right, and that the boomers they were fighting were not an isolated event.

(_)

Presently, from a distance, down the street, further in town, someone was watching Roberta and Hernan take out boomer after boomer.

(_)

Combat boomers were not the only individuals that Gomez sent to De La Plata Podrido, during the attack. He also sent few of his agents to oversee the attack. But, they were ordered not to interfere, only to observe.

The boomers were programed to obey these agents.

One such agent was Cad Bane. He wore his usual clothing. Also, he had his usual weapons and equipment on his person.

Cad Bane had six combat boomers with him.

And given whom Bane saw in the distance, in front of him, he decided he would disobey orders, and interfere, in the name of fun and profit.

In the distance, Bane watched at he saw a purple haired woman, and a black haired man, took out boomers, with their pistols. The purple haired woman used a pistol in each of her hands. While the man had a pistol in just his right hand.

Bane quickly recognized Roberta, as he thought, 'That is Roberta, the Bloodhound. I do not know who that man is. But, he is also pretty good. Now, why are they doing this?'

'From what I know of Roberta, she would not just pick a deserted area to fight boomers. Roberta is to pragmatic to do that. And if the man know Roberta, he would willing follow her lead.'

'If it was just the two of them, they would fall back to a better position. So, what is keeping them here? They must be protecting someone.'

Bane then looked around, and he saw a car, parked between two buildings, in alleyway, off the side of the street. It was near where Roberta and the black haired man was. With the cars parked facing them.

Then, Bane saw who was inside, as he mentally reflected, with amusement, 'Garcia Lovelace. Along with a woman and children. So, that is the reason they are staying and fighting. And Garcia is all grown up. Meaning, I know exactly which reality this Roberta, and Garcia are from. And I heard that in the last few decades, they had amassed a large amount of wealth.'

'I think I can make a lot of money holding Garcia hostage, for a ransom. As long as I am careful about this, I should be fine. I will even take the woman and kids, for more leverage.'

'And I will have to thank Wade, for showing me the Black Lagoon series, and telling me about all the good things that happened, later on, for the Lovelace family. At least, for this section of the multiverse.'

'Still, that means this Roberta is both cyborg, and she was exposed to some sort of super-solider serum. At least, she doesn't have her powersuit with her. Still, I better be careful about the situation. She, and the blacked man with her, seem to be very good at killing things.'

'And I think it is best that I come up from behind. Fortunately, the boomers are a lot easier to give orders to, than droids ever were. They at least have the brains to follow instructions, and not do something obviously stupid, unless ordered to do so.'

Bane then turned to his boomers, as he ordered, “You six are to follow me, as quietly as possible.”

Bane turned and briskly walked towards an alleyway, on the side of the road than alleyway that the car Garcia and the Pena family were inside of.

The boomers with Bane silently turned and followed the Duros bounty hunter.

(_)

Of the course of the next few minutes, Bane, and the boomers with him, swiftly, but quietly, made their way around the fighting, to where they were on the opposite side of the alleyway that Garcia and the Pena family were parked at.

Fortunately, for Bane, and his boomers, Maria has parked in the center of the alleyway, between the buildings. Thus, offering Ban and his boomers plenty of room in the alleyway, on both sides of the car.

Bane and his boomers, then came to a stop, on the other entrance of the alleyway, from the direction that allowed them have Garcia and the Pena families backs facing him.

Bane had the right side of his building, beside the wall of the building, as his head look around the corner, into the alleyway, to see both the car, and the fight on the street, on the opposite side of the alleyway. The boomers with Bane, were hidden behind Bane, by that side of the building.

Bane saw that Roberta and the black haired man were currently in having a break in the battle.

Though, Bane, patiently waiting for his opportunity.

And his opportunity came a minute later, when he saw a couple of boomers approach Roberta and the black haired man.

And as the two adults on the street handled the two boomers near them, Bane saw what he expect from the car, with Garcia and the others inside, having their attention drawn to the battle of those they cared for.

Bane turned around, to face his boomers. He issued his orders to his boomers, including not harming their targets, unless Bane, himself, directly ordered them to do so.

With that done, Bane turned back around. Bane and his boomer then swiftly entered the alleyway, and took action, on his attack.

Bane and his boomers came up behind the car and took those inside, completely off guard.

The boomers swiftly ripped off the doors. Though, as per Bane's orders, they gently pulled those inside the car, out to stand by Bane.

Cad Bane then got a good look at Garcia, along with the woman and three children, with him.

All of those in question were trained not to scream, or freakout in a situation like this, because it would only make things worse.

Besides which, doing so would like stroke the ego of their attackers.

With the five humans captured. Two boomers stood by Bane, and the five humans, while the four other boomers walked to the front of the car they had just opened, to the other entrance of the alleyway.

Bane and the others then watched as the two adults in the street killed the two boomers. With them turning back to see what had happened.

Bane could see the looked of surprise on their faces, as the two adults could not believe what they saw in front of them.

Bane then laugh, as he knew the great Bloodhoud, and the man with her, were completely helpless to stop what was back to happen.

Bane then swiftly reached for his reality device, before the two adults could take aim with their weapons, and kill him where he stood.

Cad Bane thought of heading back to headquarters, at the proper date and time. He then press the reality device, and he, along with the two boomers by him, Garcia, Maria, Antonia, Carmela, and Ramon, instantly disappeared.

The four boomers that were left did as they were orders. They destroyed both the car they had pulled the people from, and the car nearby, on the street. So, Roberta and Hernan would not have transportation.

The boomers then charged at Roberta and Hernan.

Meanwhile, surprised turned to rage, for both Roberta and Hernan. As their family had been kidnapped from under this nose, and their two cars had been destroyed.

And the four boomers, that were there, they were the perfect victims for them to take out their wrath on. As they vented their rage.

(_)

In the distance, as he stood on a roof top, this was one of the very rare times that Deadpool was silent, as he used a set of binoculars, in his left hand, to watch what had just happened. With Bane's kidnapping Garcia, Maria, and the three Pena children.

While Deadpool watched the two former FARC members destroy the four boomers with their guns, with ease, he thought, 'Bane. You idiot! To disobey orders like that. And interfere in probably the most foolish way possible. Though, I am not surprised. Your greed always seems to get the better of you, Bane. And I am happy I decided to secretly follow you, in the hopes of keeping you, my partner, out of trouble.'

'Though, I see I failed spectacularly at doing so. And now, I have to be the sane one, in this situation. And I don't like being the sane one of a partnership. Still, I have to defuse this situation, before is blows up, in our faces, worse than even I can plan for.'

Wade lowed his binoculars with his left hand, as he used his right hand to reach for his reality device, which had had in a pocket, on the right side of his clothing.

Wade then thought of the reality, place and time, he wanted to go to, as he pushed the red button on reality device. And he disappeared in the blink of an eye, as he jumped realities.

(_)

Nearby, on the street, as Roberta and Hernan finish killing the last of the boomers that had attacked them, they looked over at their destroyed cars, and they then at each other.

Hernan could see a mask of rage forming on Roberta's face.

While Roberta was furious, Hernan was only very angry. Becoming a parent, and being responsible for a spouse, and children, had tempered his anger some, allowing him to think.

Hernan thought, 'Roberta is about to go crazy. And I am not that far from doing the same, myself. But, we have to calm down, and form a plan. If we are to have any hope of rescuing our family. And the clock is ticking, and we don't have time to get angry.'

Hernan forced himself to calm down, as he stated, in spanish, “Roberta, we have to calm down. We need to remain calm so we can deal with this one step at a time. First, we need to find a vehicle. Next, we need to find weapons. After that, we will track them down, and rescue our family.”

Over the next few seconds, Hernan could see Roberta forcing herself to calm down, as well.

Hernan thought, with relief, 'Good. You are listening to reason.'

She responded, with a bit of anger evident in her voice, in spanish, “I agree. Getting angry will not help.” She thought, 'I have been down that road, and being angry never really helps in the long run.'

Hernan calmly said, “Good. Now, I recognized who took them.”

Roberta said, “Yea. That was Cad Bane, with those boomers. I saw the Clone Wars TV series. Garcia and Fabiola liked it. I didn't care much for that series. Though, I did watch it with them, for their benefit.”

Hernan stated, “Same here. Maria and kids loved it. I didn't. Movies were good. But, the series just didn't click for me. And what I am trying to say is that is it very likely that Cad Bane knows who you and Garcia are. He kidnap Maria, the kids, and Garcia, to hold for ransom. Still, he is the type of guy who will not harm his hostages, unless he has to. So, we have a little time.”

Roberta agreed, “Yes. We do. Though, he is clearly knows who I am. So, he must be insane to cross us.”

Hernan commented, “Well, he did one time break into the Jedi Temple, on Coruscant. While the temple was filled with Jedi. So, he is insane. But, he also stole a holocron, out from under their noses. And he escaped by using only a jedi robe as a disguise, with him getting away by walking out the front doors of the temple. So, he is also good, at what he does. And while he may not be at our level. He is close.”

Roberta said, “That is a good point. Still, our cars are destroyed. And we need transportation. And we need it now.”

Hernan mentioned, “I would not both trying to hotwire car, around here. Most of the cars here are too modern to do that, without tools. Which we don't have on us. Though, I do know where we can get a car, that is nearby. The location is about a couple of kilometers from here. It would take us about half an hour to get there, if we don't have to stop and fight.”

Roberta stated, “That is nice to know. Also, I need to tell you that I really don't have any weapons in my suite, to storm a military base. Which, taken into account where these boomers likely came from, is probably where our family is being held.”

“And I don't want to jump realities, to the Lovelace plantation, and risk a time dilation effect. So, I suggest we need to head to the casino. We should be able to get weapons there.”

Hernan said, “Okay, And if that doesn't pan out. I know a guy, in town, that runs a gunshop. I am good friends with him. You would like him. He is more a gunnut than we are.”

Roberta not could help but crack a grin, as she responded, in amusement in her tone of voice, “Really? Then, I will have to meet this man. Also, I will be willing to pay for anything I need from him.”

Hernan stated, “Don't worry. He is very reasonable with his prices, and his payment plans. And he will be flexible, because he is helping to rescue our family.”

Roberta replied, “Good.”

Hernan inquired, “Should we contact Fabiola, and the others, for help?”

Roberta calmly said, “We will do so, after we have the weapons we need. And we are prepared to leave. We will then contact them for their help, in finding the reality, location, and date, in the multiverse, of where our family was taking too. Along, with getting some of them to help us rescue them, from our enemies.”

Hernan stated, “I agree.”

Roberta requested, “Now, please lead the way, to where we can find some transportation. I am starting to grow impatient, and I am sure that you are, as well.”

Hernan responded, “You are correct. And the location is this way.” He then turned and stated walking down the street, at a slightly hastened pace.

Roberta followed, right behind Hernan, at the same brisk pace Hernan was walking at. And both adults keeping their weapons in their hands, in case they needed them.

They did not run, because they had been training that rushing into battle, with an unknown number of foes, in an urban terrain, was a quick way to die.

As they walked, Roberta inquired, “By the way, how were you able to remain calmer than me?”

Hernan did not turned around, as he continued to lead Roberta to their destination. He responded, “Simple. I have three children that look up to me. As such, I have to set an example.”

Roberta replied, with intrugue in her tone of voice, “Interesting.” She mentally added, 'I guess having children does change a person. And it seems for the better.'

The two badass counterparts then continue down the street, as they headed to their intended destination.

(_)

As battles waged across the island, the staff of the schools on the island of Plata Podrido were adequately prepared to defend the students, and themselves, from the boomers, with the schools' weapons arsenal.

Though, some teenagers that day had decided to skip school that day.

The six teenager friends were at the family home of one of the teenagers.

These are just six regular teenagers for the island of De La Plata Podrido.

In the living room of said family home, the six teenagers sat in some furniture, around a TV. The TV was turned on, along with a video came console.

Two of the teenagers had video game controls in their hands, as they played a fighting style video game against each other. While, the other teenagers watched, as they waited for their turns.

Suddenly, they heard banging coming from the front door, about ten feet, to their left.

The two teenagers playing the video game, paused the game, as they set their game controls down, while as all six teenager turned their attention to the door.

A second later, the door was busted off its hedges, and fell inward, on the group.

The teenagers then saw, standing in the threshold of the door, facing them, was a large, blue, robotic, humanoid monster stood standing on

The teenagers just instinctively knew this creature was trouble.

And before the boomer could react, all six teenagers pulled out their pistols, loaded with armor-piercing rounds, and they shot at the boomer's head and chest.

Most of their rounds hit, and the dead boomer soon fell forward, onto the door it had destroyed.

The teenagers did waste any time, as they turned back on the safeties of their pistols, and put away their pistols away, on their person.

Then, one of the two teenagers that had been playing the game, asked, in spanish, “Do you think we can sell this for scrap?”

The teenager, whose family owned the home, and who, was the other person playing the video game, answered, in spanish, “I don't see why not.”

Another teenager inquired, in spanish, “Still, how are we going explain the door to your parents?”

The teenager, whose family home they were in, answered, “Well, the evidence is right there. The problem is, explaining why we skipped school.”

The third teenager, whom asked about the door, replied, “Good point.”

The teenager, whose family owned the home, commented, “But, we don't have to worry about this, right now.”

A fourth teenager mentioned, in spanish, “True. And at least we brought our pistols with us, today.”

The first teenager agreed, “Yes. Having weapons come in handy.”

A fifth teenager questioned, in spanish, “If that thing has friends, out there, what are we going to do for lunch?”

A sixth teenager stated, in spanish, “We will worry about that, later. Given what those in this town are capable of. Chances are this will blow over in a few hours.”

The teenager, whose family home they were in, commented, “Still, we will have to board up that hole, and find a place for that corpse... Or, whatever it is.”

The sixth teenager replied, “Don't worry, we will. After we all have a turn playing that video game.”

The teenager, whose family home they were in, replied, “Okay.”

The six teenagers then went back to taking turns at playing their video game.

Though, they did eventually board up the front doorway. And luckily, they were trouble no further by the boomers. Still, other hand, when it came to their parents finding out they skipped school, that was another story. But, that was not too serious for the six teenagers.

(_)

During the morning battle, further into one of the business districts in town, Arcee was in robot mode, as she was having a field day, using her flaming swords, to slice through the much small blue combat boomers.

She then noticed that some of the locals were using their firearms to kill some of the boomers around her. Though, she also saw that none of them were shooting at her.

Arcee thought, 'They must realize that I am here to help them.'

She then looked around saw that the last of the boomers around her were dead.

Arcee mentally reflected, in happiness 'Good. The boomers here are dead. And that was fairly easy for me. Also, it is nice to be out in the open, in my true mode, and have locals be helpful. I think I might do something nice for them, sometime, in the future.'

Arcee turned to the people that had helped her, as she said, in english. “Thank you.”

She then deactivated her flaming swords. Next, she put them away. After which, she transformed into her motorcycle mode, as she sped away, down the street, in search of more boomers to kill.

(_)

Elsewhere in town, not all the members of Hotel Moscow members were on the Maria Zeleska, when the boomers attacked.

Six, pretty, fair skinned, youthful, female, russian Hotel Moscow members had left the cargo ship, by two black painted sports utility vehicles, to go have an early lunch, in town.

All six of them appeared to be youthful women in their mid-twenties, in great physical shape.

In truth they use to be men, why had undergone the vat process and became women. Also, the vat process had then exposed to a type of super-soldier serum that reverse their age to what they appeared now, slowed their aging, gave them great physiques, enhanced their senses, and increased their physical abilities.

Among the six women, the woman with long blond her, in a red long skirt, blue long sleeved shirt, and blue slippers, was named, Yuz. She had a very relaxed personality.

Beside Yuz, was her good friend, whom was a woman with short chestnut brown hair. Her name was, Irakly, and she wore blue jeans, brown leather belt, a red t-shirt, a blue jacket, and black tennis shoes. Irakly also had an easy going personality.

Nearby, was a woman very short, dark red hair, was named, Leonid. She word a brown long sleeved button up shirt, black pants, black leather belt, and brown military boots. She had a no nonsense personality.

Next to Leonid, was a woman with black short hair. She wore a blue pants suit with black dress shoes. Her name was Grisha, and she had a professional, straightforward personality.

On the other side of Grisha was a woman with black short hair, whom also wore blue jeans, like Irakly. She also wore a black belt, a light red long sleeved blouse, and blue cowgirl boots. Her name was Timur, and even after becoming a woman, she had a slightly macho attitude. This her a tomboyish vibe to her personality. Though, she never let her attitude effect her work.

And the woman on the far end of the group, on the opposite side of Timur, from Grisha, was Desya. She had long brown hair. And she was one of the members of Hotel Moscow members the completely embraced the gender change. And her personality had become very feminine. Though, she was still tough as nails when she needed to be.

Like Yuz, Desya wore a long skirt, and slippers. Though, Desya's long skirt was orange colored, and her slippers were red colored. She also wore a yellow short sleeved blouse, and a red jacket.

The six russian has spent the late morning in small coffee shop, where they had some sandwiches, and some coffee. As they ate, they sat at a large table, near the front of the shop, as they talked.

When they saw the boomers, through the shop windows, they immediately recognized what the boomers were, and the danger the boomers posed to everyone. And they decided to do something about the boomers.

The six russians got up from their seats, paid for them meals, and walked out to confront the boomers.

All of them had their loaded semi-automatic pistols on them. With their firearms hidden in their clothing. Most of the pistols the women carried were TT thirty-three Tokarev pistols, loaded with armor-piercing bullets. Though, some of the women did prefer to carry other types of pistols, that were also loaded with armor-piercing ammo.

Still, when the women walked outside, and stood beside either other, on the sidewalk, outside the coffee shop, they had yet to act against the boomers.

This was because, at the moment, they could not believe what they were watching in front of them, as they saw the locals kicking the assess of the combat boomers, with their various weapons.

The locals were doing such a good job, that the six Hotel Moscow members did even feel the need to participate, in helping the winning side of such a clearly one-sided battle.

This battle had been going on for over an hour. And the six russian just watched in awe at what was happening in front of them.

While the battle waged, Yuz turned to Irakly, as she commented, in russian, “Irakly, remind me never to piss off the locals, here.”

Irakly looked over at Yuz, as she agreed, in russian, “Yes. It would be a good idea not to do that.”

While the other four russians did not reply, they overheard their comrades comments, and they agreed with their sentiments.

Yuz and Irakly then looked back at the battle that was taking place.

A few minutes later, of fighting, Yuz then noticed someone across the street, as she said, “Look at the guy across the street.”

The five other russian women did so, and they watch, as among the population that was killing the boomers, there was a large muscular scottish man in shirt, kilt, and boots. The scottish man had a large battle-axe in his hands, while charged at two combat boomers.

When he reached the two boomers, before the boomers reacted, he moved between the boomers, as he swung his axe in a single arcing, counterclockwise arc, that decapitated the boomer to his right first, then the boomer to his left.

As two headless boomers fell to the ground, the scottish man did not stop, as he went after another nearby boomer.

Leonid stated, in russian, “Not bad. Sort of of like Shenhua, with her long knives.”

Grisha responded, in russian, “I agree. And I don't think the people that programed those boomers ever expected someone to come at their boomers with an axe, in such a skillful and swift manner.”

Leonid replied, “You are likely correct.”

Desya commented, in russian, “Any full grown man, whom can were a skirt into battle, and still kick ass, has my respect.”

Timur pointed out, in russian, “It is a kilt.”

Desya said, “In the long run, it is the same thing.”

Less than minute later, the locals had killed all the boomers. And the locals, including the scottish man, appeared to be unharmed. Though, a bit tired.

With the boomers gone, Desya continued to look at the scottish man, with interest in her tone of voice, “I am going ask that man, with the axe, out on a date.”

Timor questioned, “Just like that?”

Desya continued to look at the scottish man, whom was across the street, as she replied, “Yea. Just like that.”

Yuz inquired, with concern in her tone of voice, “Are you sure that is wise? Given the lives we have lead, we each have a lot of baggage, that comes with us.”

Desya scoffed, “Oh come on. Live a little, Yuz. I just want a date. Not a marriage.”

Yuz cautioned, “Just don't get pregnant.”

Desya replied, “I wasn't planning too.”

Irakly said, with encouragement in her tone of voice, “Well, I for one, say, good luck, Desya.”

Garsha commented, with a respect in her tone of voice, “Yes. We are rooting for you, Desya.”

Desya turned to the other women, as she happily said, “Thank you.”

Leonid stated, “Just be careful.”

Desya replied, “I will.” She then turned towards the street. Next, she checked to make sure both lanes of the street were clear. She the cross the street and approached the scotsman, with the battle-axe in his hands. The man had his axe, hanging down, with both hand, at his waist, in front of himself.

When she reached the man, the man turned to look at her, with a relaxed expression on his on his face, as he calmly asked, in concern in his tone of voice, in english, “Are you alright, ma'am?”

Desya thought, 'Such a question, in such a kind manner, is a very good sign. Now, to convince him to go out on a date with me. I know I am pretty. So, looks are not the problem. All I need is the right attitude, and to say the right things. Neither are a problem with me. And since he speaks english, I think it is best that I reply in english. It is good that my english is decent. And oh, how I think this conversation is going to be so much fun for the both of us.'

Desya compliment, in english “Yes. And I much say that I was impressed with the skills you displayed in using your axe.”

The man happily replied, “Thank you.”

As the two adults continued talking, Desya found that the man spoke excellent english. And within two minutes of Desya starting her discussion with the scotsman, she learned the man's name's was Gavin, she had arranged a date with him, that would take place, in a few days.

(_)

At the beginning of the battle, during the morning, near a mid-level motel, Jayne was driving by, in one of the black, four door, casino sedan cars, as he was running errand. That errand being going to a local liquor store he liked, to by some hooch for himself.

When he saw the blue armored combat boomers suddenly appeared in the distance, down the street, from himself, he knew they were not there to be friendly. Jayne swiftly slowed his car down, and stopped his vehicle, by the curb, next to a sidewalk, on the opposite side of the street from the mid-level motel. He then put his car in park, turned off his car, pulled out the key to his car, with a clicker attached it, and he pocketed the items.

While Jayne was wearing his black suit, which was his uniform as a member security, for Daiyu Palace Casino, and he had a conceal semi-automatic pistol, in a shoulder holster, under his coat.

Though, Jayne decide he was going to need something with a little more punching power, than a pistol, to deal with boomers

So, he pulled out his weapon of choice. Which he kept on the passengers seat beside him, with a box of ammo for said weapon.

Jayne called his weapon, Vera

Jayne was not worried about the police catching him with his weapon. Because, a few years ago, Chang made it was very clear that Police Chief Pedro Del Soto had ordered the local police to leave those from the casino alone, unless they stirred up trouble.

Vera was a high-powered rifle, that was fed ammo from a magazine at the bottom weapon. The ammo Jayne had in it was armor-piercing, which was perfect for dealing with boomers. And Jayne was an excellent shot with his Vera.

Jayne then thought, with amusement, 'To quote, Mal. I aim to misbehave.'

Jayne got out of the car, pulled out Vera and loaded a round in the chamber of his weapon. Next, leaned against the top of the car, for support, as he took aim, with the scope on the top of the rifle, towards the first boomer he saw. He then fired, hitting the boomer in the head, instantly killing it.

Jayne then began using Vera to take out one boomer at a time, from a distance.

Jayne's aim was impeccable, as he made one successful head-shot, of the boomers he targeted, and killed. And with his box of ammo, he had plenty of rounds to kill as many boomers as he needed to.

Though, Jayne was careful to angle his shots, so as not to hit anyone he saw. Nor, for him to accidentally hit any buildings, or cars, that might have people in them. Such as the motel, across the street.

Also, he noticed a few locals starting to kill boomers, as well.

Jayne smiled at the side before him, as he happily thought, 'It is go to see people that are willing to fight for themselves. Also, I need to check with my family. To make sure they are not under attack. And if they are. So, help me. The forces of hell, itself, will not stop me from exacting my vengeance.'

Jayne then went back to killing some blue armored combat boomers, he saw, in the distance.

(_)

Nearby, George Benedict was in his suite, when the boomers started to show up. After the bikers, the previous day before, he had decided to take the day off from the weirdness that existed in the town he was in.

George had stepped of his suite, to get some fresh air, when he saw a blue humanoid robot, in the distance.

The blue humanoid robot looked familiar to him, though he could not place it. Though, something in the back of his mind did tell him to get back inside, immediately. That the creature was extremely dangerous.

George quickly ducked back into his suite. He then closed and locked the door.

The curtains on the windows were still closed, so there was no worries there.

George then spent the next few minutes in his suite thinking, And he then suddenly remembered when and where he had seen that blue creature before.

Several years ago, in college, he watched an anime, titled was Bubblegum Crisis. And that being look exactly like one of the killed cybernetic machines in that anime.

He thought he was crazy to have such at thought, but he still went to his laptop, opened it, and surfed the web.

He stood found what he was looking for, and confirmed that was a blue combat boomer from the Bubblegum Crisis OVA series.

George then played a hutch, and he searched the web for those people he had photographed. And he was soon was able to identify several of them, from various fictional series. Though, not all of them.

A good portion of those people were from a series titled, Black Lagoon. Which after reading up on what the series was about, did not improve George concerned mood about the situation he now found himself in.

And things then fell into place for him. Including, the reason why the police was so skittish about going near the Devil's Hotel, Daiyu Palace Casino, and the Rats Nest bar.

They knew. Or, suspected. Either way, they knew that they were dealing with forces beyond their abilities to deal with, and as such, they had tread carefully.

The only question left was, how? He then remembered the, world as myth, theory, which he learned about, years ago. And the implications of that made him very worried for the fate of not only himself, but the world he lived on.

George then admitted to himself that this job he had take was way beyond anything he had believed he was signing up for. He was dealing with people from other realities. Of whom, most of these people were extremely dangerous.

And like all jobs, George felt this job was not worth his life. As such, he was going to escape this island as soon as possible.

Also, all the photographs he had taken were worthless. Because either people would not believe him, and they would discredit him and ruin his career, as an investigative journalist and photographer. Or, they would believe him, and make him disappear for knowing too much. A catch twenty-two, if ever there was one.

Unfortunately, George realized that he had waited one day too late to leave. And now, he was stuck in a warzone. Though, this was not the first time this had happened to him. And he knew that he had to wait for a break in the battle to quickly pack his car, and leave.

While he could not step outside just, yet. He did pack his things. And he figured he could make it to his car in one trip, if he packed everything correctly. With him gripping the items in his hand and arms properly. Including, having a few of his small bags handing by their straps, around his neck.

Given the situation, George did not plan on checking out. Instead, he would leave the motel keys in the room, and just immediately head out town, in the car he had rented.

When he was finished packing, he turned towards the curtains. He then slightly lift the curtains away, so he could see outside. To watch the battle outside, as he waited for the right time to leave the island, and never look back.

George watched the battle wage outside, for over an hour. Then, as the combat stopped, with no more boomers showing up, he waiting another twenty minutes. When that time elapsed, he saw that no boomers had appeared. And by then, the only people he saw were a few locals with some pistols and melee weapons, and the main across the street, behind a car, with what looked like some sort of high-powered rifle.

George guessed was Jayne from Firefly. Though, George was not sure, and he was not going to walk up and ask Jayne. Thus, blowing his cover.

Though, he wondered why Jayne occasionally pulled his cellphone? And who he kept calling?

Whomever it was, Jayne finished most of his calls less than a minute later. With him putting his cellphone back into his black coat. With him going back to guarding the area.

Then, there was a break in the battle. But, George knew he would have to wait a little while longer.

George waited for twenty minutes. Then, with no boomers in sight, for the last twenties minutes, George decided it was time immediately to leave time.

George first left the motel keys, on the chest of drawers, by the TV in his room. Next, he opened the door to his hotel, with the intent of leaving it open. After which, he pulled out his car keys, in his right hand. With that done, he quickly picked up, or hung, all his luggage off his person, as he bolted for his car, which was parked right outside his suite.

When George reached his car, he used the key to unlock the driver's side door. He then opened the door, and toss a couple of pieces of luggage, across the left driver's seat, to the right side passenger seat.

George then unlocked the rest of the doors, and he opened the door behind the driver's side door. He then tossed in everything else, into the backseat. This included pulling off the small items that were hanging from his neck, by their straps. Such as his high priced photographic camera. Though, he was careful on where and how he set his camera down. So, as to not damage it.

George then closed the back door, and get into the driver's seat. He closed the front door, and used his key to stop the ignition. Within thirty seconds, he as on the road, heading off of the island of Plata Podrido.

Ten minutes later, George reached the bridge to the mainland, with no problems. He felt relief when he saw that bridge was intact, with no boomers in sight. And the investigative journalist did not look back, as he headed for the nearest airport, and in his home, in the west coast of the U.S.

(_)

Eleven minutes, before George left the motel in his car, Jayne still had Vera in his hand, as he was about to get back into the car, when he saw, across the street, dark skinned, bald man, rushing out of his motel room, in a hurry, to his car. He was loaded down with various types of luggage.

Jayne stopped in his tracks, as he watched the man then get into his car, and drive off in a hurry. With man heading for the bridge off the island.

While Jayne pulled out his ammo box, from inside his car, to reload his rifle, Vera, he mentally reflected, 'I wonder what he was in a hurry about. Likely, the boomers spooked him. Still, I noticed he had that very expensive camera strapped around his neck... And he don't look like no tourist to me...'

'Also, the man left the motel door open, meaning he was not planning on coming back to check out. Instead, from the direction he went, I am guessing he is heading right for the bridge out of town. Not that I blame him...'

'Still, I need to find out more about his man.'

'I doubt he is part of this boomer attack. He would not rush out of town like that, if he was. Something else might be going on under our noses, without us realizing it. And everyone else will be to preoccupied with this boomer attack to notice this man. So, it is my job to investigate him. I am part of the casino security team, after all.'

The door to the motel room then started to close, and Jayne saw the number on the plate mounted to the top part of the door.

Jayne thought, 'Room number, 108. While there is too much going on to try to chase that man down and detain him. I can still learn about him in other ways. I will check hotel desk, there to find out the man's name, from the clerk on duty.'

'A little cash will loosen the clerks lips real quick. And if that doesn't work, I have Vera. I already planned to keep Vera handy. Just in case anymore of those boomers show up. Those, she also makes for a good intimidator.'

'And it's not like the clerk won't be there. He is likely ducking under his counter, waiting for this mess to be over. He will be happy to hear from me, that it is over. At least in this area. And as such, he will be more than happy to give me the information I need. Then, I will check out the name of that man that just left, with the casino security computers.'

'I doubt that guy used an alias. He was in such a hurry, that he strikes me as a small fry. Whom lacks the connections to have decent false IDs, like we do. Though, I have a feeling that I am not going to like what I find out about him.'

'Also, I need to call my family, and make sure they are okay. I have been calling them occasionally. And it seems the boomers never made it out there. But, until this attack is over. I am going to continue to call. Just in case they need me, at a moment's notice. And I do have my reality device on me. Should I need to be there, at a moment's notice.'

'And I believe, with things calming down, I will call the casino, as well. Though, when I park at the casino, I think I will just park on the left side parking lot, by the casino. And use a side entrance. Chances are, the garage is on lock down, anyway.'

'And I can use my key card to get in from a side entrance.'

Jayne then set his ammo box back inside his car. Next, he locked and shut the black sedan.

Jayne checked both sides of the road. He saw that he as clear, and he then started walking towards the lobby of the motel.

A minute later, Jayne reached the motel lobby. And a minute after that, he had the name, from the motel registry. The name of the person was, George Benedict.

Jayne then left the motel lobby, to his car. After which, he headed to the casino, to the security room. Though, given he was sure the casino was on lock down, he was not planning to return the black sedan, he was driving, to the casino garage. And he would instead, park it in the left side parking lot of the casino, and just walk into the building, from a side entrance, with a key card he had.

(_)

As battles waged across De La Plata Podrido, something very odd was occurring at the Rats Nest. That being that nothing was happening at all.

Inside the bar, there were no customers at that time of day. With the only person inside being the owner of the bar, Bao.

Bao had opened the front door and used a doorstop to keep it open.

Presently, she saw sitting down in a chair, at one of the center table, while facing the front door.

The reason Bao had the front door to her bar open was that, along with having her age reversed to a young adult, and having a gender changed into a woman, due to undergoing vat process and super-soldier serum. She was also gifted her with all the other abilities that those who had gone through the process. This included enhanced hearing.

And with the door open, as she sat at the table, she was able to hear the gunshots being fired in the distance.

When she had first heard the gunshots in the distance, she made a few phone calls to some businesses around town. And from the descriptions of the attacks, by the people she talked to, she guessed that blue armored combat boomers were attacking from all over the city.

After Bao was finished on the phone, she pulled out her pistol from under the bar counter, and tucked it in the back of her pants.

Then, she walked over to her front door, and opened it, outwardly, while using the folding doorstop, on interior sides of the door, downward, on the outside sidewalk, to keep the door open.

Next, Bao calmly walked to a center table, and sat in a chair, in which she was facing the open door, as she quietly listened out for any trouble that might be coming her way.

While Bao continued to listen to gunfire in the distance, she thought, with amusement, 'Well, this is certainly a change. Though, for the better. Experience had taught me that usually, when all hell break loose, my bar was one of the first things to be destroyed. I am kind of happy this is not the case, for right now.'

'Though, if the boomers show up, I'm gone. And I will know if they are coming closer, either by the gunshots getting closer, or I hear the boomers footsteps. Their footsteps make a very distinct clangs that I can listen out for. Once one hears the sound, one never forgets the sound boomers make as they walk.'

'Also, Revy group, Chang's group, and Hotel Moscow might not have to worry about dealing with most of these boomers. Because, after spending a few years in this town, I believe, from the gunshots I am hearing, the locals are going to take care of the problem, by themselves.'

'And when things calm down. And I stop hearing gunfire in the distance, with my enhanced hearing. I will call Melanie, to see what is going on at the hotel. And to check to see if she and the others are fine.'

'I finally found a girlfriend that I love. And she loves me back. And I am not going to lose her over something as stupid as this.'

Bao then patiently waited in her chair, for things calmed down. And she happily found that no boomers had approached, or even come near, her bar, the Rats Nest.

(_)

Meanwhile, an hour and half sense the combat boomers first attack, the battle was over for those on the deserted beach, where the now decloaked Bird of Prey was.

The Atlantic Riders had repelled and destroyed the attacking boomers. But, with the ship damaged, and with causalities. Though, no deaths, only mild to serious injuries, including Durban. They were not going anywhere for the immediate future.

And even though Durban was unable to issue commands, Data and Sally took command of the Atlantic Riders.

First, they contacted Simon at the casino, whom was glad to offer the assistance from his staff, and they started using their ships transporters to directly sent their injured, including Durban, to the casino infirmary.

Then, they had the members of the crew, whom were not harmed, nor tending to the injured, began repairs of their ship. While they had had issue a few of their subordinates to use the their communications to call in those of their group, that were not at the ship during the attack. To make sure those wayward members were alright.

(_)

Across town, about a mile and a half from the eastern beach of the island, Roberta saw that Hernan was leading her to a small building.

The building was about a hundred feet from them, and it was a small, standalone, one story office.

The building was located, down the road, where the road turned to the right. The building itself, was off to the left, at the turn, with a small crescent parking lot, between the building and the road, with a single two lane entry way from the parking lot to the road.

As they got closer, Roberta's enhanced sight allowed her to see in detail the situation in front of her.

There were boomer corpses littering the road leading up to the building. They all had head-shots that killed them. Most of them on had a single shot. Though, a few showed a couple of shots, each. And the boomer furthermost from the building, also showed signs of scorch marks from explosions.

Though, given they had not seen any living boomers in the last twenty minutes, they had holstered their pistols. But, they were ready to pulled out their weapons, at a moments notice.

Roberta then looked over at the building. There were two cars parked in front building. With four people standing in front of the cars. All of whom were carrying weapons.

Though, what Roberta noticed first was that both the building and the cars were undamaged.

Roberta happily thought, 'Well, it looks like we might get a ride, after all. And those four must be very good, to have so many dead boomers around them, without any signs of injury to themselves. Now, to get a better look at these four individuals.'

Roberta then looked in front of the building and two cars parked by it, at four adults standing guard. Two men, and two women. All four of the adults continued to appear unharmed.

And all of them appear middle-aged. Though, the men appeared a few years old than the women, but not by much. The four adults also appeared to be in a good physical.

One of the women was slender and the other woman was slightly more heavier set. Though, the heavier set woman was not fat. She was instead of bit muscular, with a medium physical build. And Roberta could tell that both women were sisters.

The women were both carrying shotguns, and they had bandoleers on, across their chests, that had shotgun slugs in the loops of the bandoleers.

The men were each holding automatic rifles. Roberta immediately recognized the rifles at AKS Forty-Seven Type One rifles. They were a variant of the russian AK Forty-Seven weapon series. The rifle fired seven point six two by three nine ammunition. And the weapon used a thirty round magazine.

The rifle had a selector fire switch that offered either full auto, or single fire, selections. And like the AK Forty-seven, the AKS Forty-Seven Type One had adjustable iron sights.

The made difference between the AK and AKS was that the AKS had a folding stock that folded under the main part of weapon. Though, to fold, or unfold, the stock, required the removal of the magazine.

Both men had had their stocks of their AKS weapons folded inward.

The men also wore gunbelts with hand grenades tied to them, along with open ammo pouches, carrying loaded magazines for their weapons.

Though, due to her not being able to see the bullets of the rounds, she could not tell exactly what type of ammo magazines were loaded with.

Yet, given the boomer head shots were each from large slugs, or small rounds holes, she guessed they were using armor-piercing type ammo.

Roberta then remembered, as she thought, 'To achieve that type of damage, they must be using some type of armor-piercing ammo. Also, those rifles the men are holding. They are the same ones I used in FARC.' She then looked at the faces of the two men, as she continued her thoughts, 'And their faces, they look familiar... No way...'

Roberta quickly caught up to walk beside Hernan, to his right. She continued looking forward, as she stated, in spanish, “Those two men. They look familiar to me?”

Hernan continued looking forward, also, as he responded, in spanish, “Hmm... Interesting... And the weapons? Do they seem familiar also?”

Roberta replied, “Yes.”

Hernan inquired, “Well... Do the names, Isandro and Sans ring a bell?”

The names clicked in her mind, as she remember two such men, from her past. She said, “Yes. They do. I knew the two men during my time in FARC?”

Hernan explained, “That is not surprising. Those two men are the Isandro and Sans, of this reality. They were in FARC, as well. Actually, we left the South America, together, with Maria.” He thought, 'Interesting, Isandro and Sans existed in Roberta's reality. But, unlike Roberta and I, they were not gender-flip. With the counterparts of those two, also being men.'

Roberta commented, “You will have to tell me that story sometime.”

Hernan said, “I will. But, later. After we rescue our family.”

Roberta requested, “Of course. Now, please tell me more about your friends?”

As they continued walking, Hernan stated, “With pleasure. A few years after Maria, Isandro, Sans, and I came here, to Plata Podrido. Isandro and Sans decided to partner together, in starting a real estate business here. And they have done very well for themselves. I know for the fact they even handle the sales for the property Chang bought for his casino and his beach house.”

Roberta inquired, “Interesting. And who are the two women?”

Hernan answered, “They are sisters, from India. The slightly heavy one is Emily. She is the older sister. The younger, slimmer sister, is Grace. They arrived in Plata Podrido about year after Isandro and Sans started their business. Almost a decade and a half ago.”

“Sans and Isandro got set up on a double date with Emily and Grace. And the two couples hit it off very well. Six month later, both couples were married. Sans married Emily. And Isandro married Grace. And after all this time, they are all still happily married.”

Hernan thought, 'And it also helped that before Emily and Grace met Sans and Isandro, that both women were fluent in both spanish and english. And that someone taught those two ladies some manners, before they came to Mexico. Though, Isandro and Sans are gentlemen, as well. When they want to be. And from what I understand, both of them gladly learned Emily and Grace's native language of hindu. And from what they tell me, they are fairly get with that language.'

Roberta commented, “That sounds nice. Very romantic. So, do either couple have any children?

Hernan said, “Not so far. But, I know both couples have talked about it. And they enjoy being surrogate aunts and uncles to my children. Maria and I don't mind. Maria likes all four of them, as well. With her getting along great with Emily and Grace.”

Roberta responded, “That is nice. So, I recognize Emily from the Devil's Hotel? But, does Grace work, or is she a housewives?”

Hernan stated, “Both of them are diligent workers. As you already know, Emily works as a cashier, and maid, at the Devil's Hotel. The pay is pretty good for her. And Grace works as a waitress at an Italian restaurant in town. And she makes great tips there. You may remember her, during that night we met. She was the one that took our orders, and served our drinks.”

Roberta commented, “Oh. That was Grace. Interesting. And now that I think about them. I did meet her, while you, Rock, Revy, and myself, talked that evening.”

Hernan said, “Yes. And that was a very productive conversation.”

Roberta asked, “Yes. It was. So, where did you meet Isandro and Sans?”

Hernan stated, “Isandro and Sans were part of the intelligence group that I worked with, while I was still part of FARC.”

Roberta said, “That was the same for me, and their counterparts.”

Hernan requested, “That is not surprising. Though, only Maria, Emily, Grace, and myself, know that Sans and Isandro were with me in FARC. And I would like to keep it that way.”

Hernan thought, 'Though, knowing Pedro, with his brother, Paciano's previous mafia connections, he likely figured out something with them, by now. But, he likely doesn't know the full story. Because, we never told him the full story. Still, he clearly had not made it an issue. Which is good for all of us.'

Roberta said, “Not to worry. My lips are sealed on this matter.”

Hernan mentioned, “Thank you. Also, Isandro and Sans had have the same training as us. And they have not lost much of their edge over the years.”

Roberta thought, 'From this many dead combat boomers, around us. I can see that.'

Hernan continued, “Their wives are no pushovers, either. They have a revolutionary past, as well. I have gone to a local gun range, with them, to shoot. They are both good with pistols, shotguns, and rifles. Also, I have sparred with both of them. While, they are not as good as I am. One on one, both of them can give me a decent work.”

“Though, I will say that Emily and Grace are both better with knives in combat, than I am. I have seen them do katas with their combat knives. And it is a beautiful sight to behold. Especially, when they do so together.”

Roberta replied, “That is saying something.”

Hernan said, “Yes. And all four of them have great personalities. They are very nice people. Much better than who we are.”

Roberta countered, “We both have gotten better.”

Hernan replied, “True.”

Roberta asked, with a bit of concern in her tone of voice, “Though, while not mentioning their pasts, why haven't you talked about your friends to us?... To me?... Until now.”

Hernan carefully chose his words, as he answered, in a calm tone of voice, “Please, do not take this the wrong way. But, they are good friends of mine. And I do not want them caught up in your friends insanity.”

Roberta responded, “I understand. I may have done the same thing in your position.”

Hernan inquired, “Thank you. So, were you ever friends with your Isandro and Sans?”

Roberta stated, “No. I never really connected with my Isandro and Sans. They just rubbed me the wrong way. Though, they never did anything disrespectful towards me. And they were completely professional during the missions we did, together. But, I guess with the gender gap between those two and I, that was it a bridge too far.”

Hernan said, in a sad tone of voice, “Well, you missed out on two really great friendships.”

Roberta inquired, “Perhaps. How good of a friendship do you have with those four?”

Hernan stated, “I trust them with my life, and the lives of my family. And they feel the same way towards me, and Maria.”

Roberta conceded, in a sober tone of voice, “Perhaps, I should have given my Sans and Isandro a chance.”

Hernan commented, “Live and learn. And now you have a second chance to make a good impression with their counterparts.”

Roberta asked, “That is a good way to look at the situation. Also, look at all four of them. I have to ask. Is everyone in this town a heavily armed badass?”

Hernan shrugged, as he answered, “Pretty much.”

Roberta inquired, “They why have all of you put up with my friends and I, for so long?”

Hernan casually stated, “Well, because you don't go after the locals, and we needed something to talk about.”

Roberta could not help but break into laughter, as they continued to walk towards the four adults.

Roberta calmed down a few seconds later, just as they approached the four adults.

They saw that four adults look at them, those they did not point their weapons at Hernan, nor Roberta.

Hernan and Roberta came to a stop about ten feet from the four adults.

Sans greeted, in spanish, “Hello Hernan.”

Herna said, “Hi Sans. Hi everyone.”

Hernan's four friends could see concern on Hernan's face. And that worried them.

Isandro asked, with concern in his tone of voice, in spanish, “What is it, Hernan?”

Emily inquired, with worry, in spanish, “What is the matter?”

Grace requested, in a calm manner, in spanish, “You can tell us.”

Sans kindly said, “We are your friends. Just tell us.”

Hernan thought, 'I am not going to get any help from them, until I tell them what has happened. But, I need to be careful what I say to them. I don't want to drag this into this mess.' He said, “Maria and the kids have been kidnapped.”

Emily replied, with sadness in her tone of voice, “Oh, Hernan.”

Isandro asked, in an even tone of voice, that was too calm for the situation, “Where are they? And who do we need us to kill?”

Roberta thought, 'I will say this. They are straightforward in their offer of help. I admire that about them.'

Hernan thought, with concerned, 'Even given the situation with my family. I need to keep them from getting to deep into this mess.' He stated, “I already got the rescue party covered. Those that to Maria and the kids are the same group that sent these blue monsters. And the people that are going to help me have experience in dealing with such creatures.”

Roberta did not show it on the outside, but she smiled inwardly, as she thought, 'That is a nice compliment. And Hernan is doing a great job of answering the questions, without giving details.'

Emily asked, “Okay. So, why were they kidnap?”

Hernan coyly answered, “Wrong place. Wrong time.”

Sans commented, “Story of your life.”

Hernan rhetorically deadpanned, “No kidding?”

Sans asked, “So, what do you need from us?”

Hernan stated, “I need to borrow one of you cars. Ours got totaled by those creatures. And we need transportation. But, while we need to borrow it, you four cannot come with us.”

Sans replied, “Okay.” He then left go of his rifle with his left hand. Leaving him holding his rifle, by the grip, with his right hand, while keep his trigger finger resting on the trigger guard.”

Next, Sans used his left hand to reach into his left, front pants pocket.

A second later, Sans used his left hand to toss something to Hernan.

Hernan caught the item with his right hand. He looked at the item to see it was a set of keys, on a keyring. He then looked back at Sans.

Sans warmly smiled at Hernan, as he said, “We trust you, Hernan. Those keys will go to the car to the right of the building. Take it It has half a tank. You can bring is back when you are finished.”

Isandro happily offered, “Yes. Use the car as long as you need it.”

Hernan gripped the keys, as he smiled towards his friends. He said, “Thank you, guys.”

Sans replied, “No problem, at all.”

Grace looked over at Roberta, as she inquired, “So Hernan. Who is this? Except for the purple hair. She looks like your sister?”

Hernan answered, “Yes. She is my sister.”

Emily said, “I didn't know you had a sister.”

Roberta quickly commented, “Long lost sister.” She thought, 'It is clear that Hernan has not told them our connection to each other. And besides. We do view each other at siblings.'

Hernan thought, 'Thanks, Roberta. I will have to thank you later for covering for me.'

Isandro stated, “No wonder you have been cagey for the last few weeks. I would be cagey to if I had a long lost sister come to town, whom was a beautiful woman.”

Roberta turned to Isandro, as she happily replied, “Thank you.”

Isandro looked over at Roberta, as he said, “Still, I am a happily married man.”

Grace smiled at her husbands comment.

Hernan coyly commented, “Yes, Isandro. It is something like that.”

Sans looked between Hernan and Roberta, as he calmly asked Roberta, “What is your name?”

Roberta answered, “I go by, Roberta. And Hernan has already told me about you four.”

Sans responded, “Nice to meet you, Roberta. And I hope what he said about us was nice.”

Roberta replied, “It was.”

Emily turned to Roberta, as she kindly offered, “After Hernan rescues his family. We will have to have you over for a cookout, together.

Roberta questioned, “You seem very sure that he will be able to accomplished this?” She thought, 'I don't want to be negative about this situation. But, it is a fair question. And I want to know why she is so confident in Hernan's abilities? I need to know what she knows.'

Emily answered, “You were not here when Maria was badly hurt by the cartels. To say his reprisal was a roaring rampage of revenge would have been an understatement.”

Hernan slightly groaned at Emily's comment.

Roberta held back a laugh, as she replied, “I can imagine.” She thought, 'Hernan told me about that event. But, given Emily's impression of that event, he clearly glossed over a lot of the details from that event.'

Grace said, “I am sure that Maria and the kids will return, safe and sound.”

Roberta stated, “Well, if that happens, I will have to come over, with a few of my friends.” She then looked over to see Hernan looked at her, with a stern look on his face. She realized what she had just said. She turned back to Grace, as she continued, “With the two people I am talking about being a very kind, blond man. And a very polite green haired woman.”

Roberta turned back to see Hernan's face relax. She thought, 'I guess he is okay with Garcia and Fabiola visiting. Though, I can see why. Though, I wouldn't blame him if he put his foot down if I tried to bring Revy, or the others.'

Both of them then looked back at the four other adults

Grace replied, “I look forward to meeting them.”

Hernan thought, 'We are burning daylight. And we need to get going.' He stated, “As fun as this it. We are on a time table. And we have to leave, now.”

Sans calmly said, “Sorry for delaying you two.”

Hernan kindly replied, “It is okay. Some things needed to be said.”

Sans said, “I am glad you realize that.”

Grace stated, “Goodbye.”

Emily said, “See you two, later.”

Isandro commented, “Nice meeting you, Roberta. And good luck to you two.”

Sans requested, “Let us know what happens.”

Hernan replied, “I will.”

Hernan and Roberta, then started walking towards the car to the right of the building. With was a red, modern, four door, car. With the driver's side door on the left side of the car.

A few seconds later, after they passed by the four people, and made it to the car in question, Roberta complimented, “You have very good friends.”

Hernan said, in a kind tone of voice, “Thank you. They are your friends now, too.”

Roberta smiled, as she said, “And for that, I am truly grateful towards you.”

Hernan happily replied, “You're welcome.”

A minute later. Hernan and Roberta were inside the car, with Hernan in the driver's seat.

A few seconds later, Hernan and Roberta were on the road, as Hernan drove them in towards the Daiyu Palace Casino.

(_)

Roughly an hour and ten minutes into the boomer battle of De La Plata Podrido, the tide had turned against the boomers to the point that victory for the citizens of Plata Podrido was all but certain.

By an hour and forty minutes, after the attack began, most of the boomers were dead.

And within two hours of the initial two invasion, the last pockets of boomers were dealt with.

This is because none of the boomers seemed to not want to hide, and as such, all of the boomers were killed.

As the battled ended, in various parts of the city, the people there then went onto have an accounting of those around them. They checked for the injured and the dead. With them treating the injured, and getting them help. Those that did not focus on the injured, began to clean up, and make repairs on what had been damaged during the attack.

Fortunately, given how well trained, and well armed, most of the citizens of Plata Podrido were, casualties were extremely low. With most of those causalities coming from the handful of people caught by surprise, at the very beginning of the boomer attack. Most of those people were just injured. With those injuries ranging from minor, to serious.

There were only a very few deaths.

Though, even with the all boomers dealt with, this did not mean all the battles had yet ended.

There was still one battle waging in the back garage of Daiyu Palace Casino.

A battle between former teacher and student, over the former teacher's previously unsavory actions, several years ago, against those that the former student cared for.

The battle had left the interior of the garage a giant mess of wreckage that had been literally thrown about the room. With a more than few items having scorch marks on them.

Also, the walls, and support columns in the room, had signs of damages, as well. Though, both combatants were careful not to seriously damage, nor destroy the support columns. Because neither of them desired to have the ceiling collapse in on them.

Though, when Chang remodeled the building, he added more than enough support columns, through out the garage, to handle one or to being accidentally destroyed, by a car crashing into them, or something else happening to the columns.

The only objects in the room that were still mostly intact was the ceiling lighting, which was still functioning, due to the very durable electrical system that Chang had installed, right after he bought the building, and head the renovation of the building which become his new casino.

Both women were near the center of the room, with nothing between them. Thought, they were several feet apart, while they faced each other, with their weapons ready.

Annie had her ignited red bladed lightsaber in both her hands. While Ahsoka, held a lightsaber in each of her hands.

At the beginning of the battle, both of them had brought up their mental defenses up, to kept the other from sensing their opponent’s feelings, and emotions. Save for their most direct emotions towards each other. This was so the other could not tell if the other was tiring, getting desperate, or was injured in a not visible manner. Such as a pulled muscle, or injured joint.

And the two women had maintained those mental defenses since then.

While Ahsoka still had her two lightsabers ignited and her in hands. With her right hand hold her green bladed lightsaber was in her right hand, and her blue bladed lightsaber was in her right hand. Ahsoka held both her weapons in a reverse grip, underhand style that she has spent years mastering.

Both were in defensive stances

The only sound in the room, at the moment, was the hums created by their lightsabers.

And while their was destruction around them, neither woman had been physically harmed the other woman.

Annie was staying mostly on the defensive, during the battle. For Annie had no wish to harm her friend, and former student. So, she tried her best to deflect Ahsoka's attacks, while not harming her former student.

The only times that Annie too the offensive was when Ahsoka was becoming to aggressive and reckless, in battle. As a way to keep Ahsoka from harming herself, by forcing Ahsoka to back off.

Though, Annie remaining unharmed in the dual was not from lack of effort on Ahsoka's part. She tried several different types of attacks to kill her former teacher, Annie.

First, Ahsoka had tried to just killed Annie with her lightsabers.

Annie then quickly reminded Ahsoka of how skilled she was in lightsaber combat, through her lightsaber abilities, by parrying, or dodging, every attack Ahsoka had used against her.

And the reason all of Ahsoka lightsaber attacks fell, was due to the fact that Annie knew most lightsaber styles that Ahsoka tried on her. Because Annie had been the one to originally teach Ahsoka those styles. And those weapon styles that Ahsoka used, that Annie did not know, she was able to easily compensate for.

With her lightsaber attacks a bust, Ahsoka jumped back about ten yards, down the lane, she and Annie had been fighting on.

After Ahsoka's feet hit the ground, she kept her lightsabers at the ready, while she started using the force to throw several things at Annie. And not just small items, such as tools, workbenches, and toolboxes. But, she threw whole vehicles, at Annie. Mostly the cars in the garage, but also the limo, trucks, and anything else not nailed down in the room.

Sometimes, Ahsoka tossed two or three cars at once, towards Annie.

And this was an attack that Annie did not expect. Due to the fact that when Annie was teaching Ahsoka to use the force, Ahsoka did not have this level of power, and skill, through the force.

This oversight almost cost Annie her life. Though, she quickly adapted to the situation.

Annie used her agility, use of the force, and her lightsaber, to keep from being seriously injured, nor killed, by the incoming cars.

Annie mostly was able to jump around most of the objects being thrown at her. Including, the cars.

Or, when she could not avoid the objects, she used the force to push the objects that were being hurled towards her, in another direction, away from her. But, when she did so, she was fighting Ahsoka, whom was using the force to make the multiple large vehicles continue towards her.

In such cases, Annie either used the force to push the objects away from both of them. Or, she used the force, to picked up one, or two cars, at once. To either shield her from objects, or to send a vehicle of her own to slam against a vehicle that was coming towards her, and stop it from harming her.

And even with armor plating Chang had put into the vehicles, the cars, limos, and even the trucks, in the garage, were designed to crumple, at key points, when they were in a collision. This was so the momentum of the crash would be absorbed by the car, and not the people that would have been inside.

Unfortunately, this made the vehicles very pliable, as both Ashoka and Annie used the force to throw the cars around, and into each other. As such, by then, most of the vehicles in the garage were totaled beyond repair.

And given they were inside a room, and not outside, Annie's space was limited. And in some cases, where she could not avoid, or push all the cars, out of the way. In such situations, Annie used a combination of slice the car with her lightsaber, while using both the force, and the momentum vehicle, to push the two new large, separate pieces away from her.

Still, Annie used the force to keep from accidentally hitting the gas tanks and igniting them into an explosion.

These force attacks against Annie lasted for a while. With Ahsoka also maintaining her distance.

Even when Annie tried to bridge the gap between them, Ahsoka would always move around, to keep away from Annie. And Ahsoka always kept her lightsabers ready, in case Annie was able to reach her.

Ahsoka did this, because she could see that Annie was having some problems, as minor as they were, with these types of forces attacks. And Ahsoka wanted to maintain her advantage, and distance, from her force teacher.

Though, Ahsoka did not dare throw one, or both of her lightsabers at Annie, or anywhere else in the room, because she knew that Annie would use that to her advantage, by destroying the spinning lightsaber, while in flight, with Annie's own red bladed lightsaber.

Yet, the most surprising events about this battle, was Annie being able to maintain a calm, emotional state, through Ahsoka's passionate attacks against her.

Eventually, Ahsoka stopped using the force to attacks against Annie. With both of them just standing there, looking at each other, with each of them in defensive stance, while having their weapons in their hands.

Annie was not sure if Ahsoka had stopped because she was getting tired, or if she was planning something else.

Annie had taught Ahsoka not to show exertion, nor exhaustion, in the type of battle they were having. Because doing so would show a wary opponent how much longer she could keep going in battle.

Also, Annie was starting to feel slightly tired from the battle. Though, she was doing a good job in hiding her weariness. And she felt she could keep going for a while long, without stopping.

Though, for the morning, the two of them just stood silence, with their lightsabers at the ready, as they tried to figure out what to do next.

For Ahsoka, she was trying to figure out how to kill Annie.

For Annie, she was trying to plan a way to end the battle, with neither of them seriously harmed, nor killed.

Then, Annie sensed something in the force. And emotion through the force, people around the island. An emotion that was slowly growing in strengthen.

That emotion being, relief.

Annie kept her guard up, as she thought, 'That much relief can only mean one thing. The battle outside is over, and the people in the city have won. I will have to find out what happened, after I deal with Ahsoka.'

'And I figure that by now, Kaylee, or Arcee have informed the others. Though, they likely still have their hands full. And all of them know better than to get anywhere near a battle like this. Between two trained force users.'

'Though, I can just imagine the videos the security cameras are recording of this fight. Depending on how this duel ends, I may ask for a couple of copies myself. To watch, later.'

'Also, along with her lightsaber skills improving. Given Snips has clearly gotten stronger in the force, she has to be able to also sense what is happening outside. Maybe, I can use this to reason with her. And for her to stop trying to kill me.'

'And if she wasn't trying to kill me right now, with her newfound skills, I would be proud of her for her improving her abilities.'

Annie calmly stated, “I know you can sense through the force, what is happening outside. And that you can sense that the attack by your allies has failed. We have won. Now, give up before you get hurt.”

Ahsoka loudly counter, with slight anger in her voice, “You haven't won here!”

Ahsoka then use the force to throw was left of a car, from a pile to her left, that she had already thrown about a few times before, at Annie.

Annie used the force to push the car away, to her right, onto the top of a pile of other wrecked vehicles, that went almost to the ceiling of the room.

Annie thought, 'Let's try this, again.'

Annie stated, with in a firm, though calm tone of voice, “Cut this out. The battle is over. Any more attacks would be meaningless. Your reality device is destroyed. I don't have mine on me. And even if you kill me. After this long a battle, you will be in no shape to take on the others. Let alone escape.”

Ahsoka said, with venom in her tone of voice, “Still, killing you will make me feel better. Even if I die, afterward.”

Though, to Annie's surprise, in response Ahsoka did not throw any objects, nor do anything towards her.

As the two women continued look at each other, from a short distance away, while keeping their guards up, Annie mentally wondered, 'Okay. She still has her death wish. Though, she did not throw anything at me. This is improvement. Still, it looks like I am not going to be able to reason with her.'

'I could mention that dying in another reality would mean she will not see our friends, from the Jedi Order, in the afterlife. But, telling her that could backfire, spectacularly, on me.'

'I wonder if this is how Obiwan felt when he fought me, on the planet, Mustafar?'

'I will admit that Snips has a very large, legitimate grievance against me. Though, I am not going to let her harm, nor kill, me over that grievance. No matter how much she wants to do so.'

'And unlike that jerk, Obiwan. Whom maimed me, burned me alive, and left me for dead. I am going to find a way to stop Snips, in a manner that will leave us both alive, and unharmed.'

'It is fortunate that Snips does not know any direct force attacks. Like force lightning. Or, she would have forced my hand, to take action against her. I could have beaten Snips any time I wanted. But, the only ways I know of that would definitely stop her, would leave her either crippled for life, or dead.'

'And I know she doesn't know such force attacks, because from the way she has been acting, she would have used some attacks against me, by now.'

'I could have cut off her hands, at her wrists. Like I did with Dooku. But, she would likely never get over the emotional scarring of losing her limbs. I never really have. And I have have had my limbs regrown.'

'I could try to force choke her, but that might kill her. Or worse, leave her brain dead. I could crush her bones, but that could permanently damage her nervous system, thus crippling her.'

'Also, if I did any of those things, and she lived, she would never forgive me. Nor, would she ever stop trying to kill me. And it would destroy what little friendship we still might have left.'

Annie continued her thoughts, in a more sober manner, 'I still consider her be the only friend I have left from the Jedi Order. Though, that is due to my actions. Not hers.'

'I have to find a way to end this fight, with neither of us being severely injured, nor killed.'

'And I have an idea, of just how to do it. All thanks to, Lee.'

Just then, Ahsoka taunted, “I am waiting for you.”

Annie calmly said, “I am not going to fall for such childish taunts. And there is something you need to know.”

Ahsoka replied, “What?”

Annie stated, “A little over a year ago, I had a discussion with Lee, over lightsaber combat. You have met her. She is the black haired woman with Chang and River. And after talking with Lee, she mentioned that she had come up with an embarrassingly easy way to end a lightsaber duel. So Snips, I am offering you one last chance to surrender, or you will face a very humiliating defeat.”

Ahsoka flatly declined, “I refuse to surrender to what is clearly a bluff.”

Annie thought, 'This is not bluff. And I did give you an out, beforehand.' She replied, “Alright. Have it your way.”

Suddenly, Ahsoka's two lightsaber energy blades collapsed.

Ahsoka noticed this. She continued to look at Annie. While not taking her eyes off of her former teacher for a second, she tried to use her fingers to work on-off switches on her lightsabers, to reignite the blades. But, doing so was to no avail.

Ahsoka demanded, “What have you done?”

Annie stated, “What I did was so simple that it is scary. I simply used the force to break the connections between the power cell, and the crystal, inside each of your lightsabers. I could have instead messed with the crystals. Causing them to explode, and destroying your hands, with them.”

Ahsoka spat out, “I sincerely appreciate that you didn't do that.”

In spite of everything that had happened, Annie still warmly replied, towards her friend, “You're welcome.”

Ahsoka commented, “Though, I still have the force as my ally. And it has served me well, so far, in this battle. Let us see how you handle a direct attack by the force. With me forcing you to endure an attack that you were known to be so fond up.”

Annie thought, 'I believe know what attack she is about to try. And I no longer fond of using that force attack.'

Ahsoka then tried to use the force to directly force choke Annie.

Though, Annie guessed correctly on what was happening, and she quickly responded, by using her own force abilities, to not only protect herself, but to also knock Ahsoka back, on her butt.

As Ahsoka hit the concrete floor, Annie swiftly rushed to Ahsoka. As Ahsoka came to, in a sitting position, on the floor, Ahsoka saw Annie in front of her, with Annie holding her weapon so that the tip of her blade was a foot away from Ahsoka's chest.

Annie looked down at Ahsoka's face, as Ahsoka looked back up at Annie's face.

Annie casually commented, “Please. Chosen one. Remember. Now, are you going to surrender? Or, is this going to get messy?”

Ahsoka continued to look at Annie, as she let got of her damaged lightsabers, with them being set on the ground. She said, in a defeated tone of voice, “Fine. I surrender.”

Annie happily replied, “Good.” She then deactivated her lightsaber, though she kept her weapon in her right hand, just in case she needed it.

Ahsoka asked, “Still, why didn't you pull that move earlier?”

Annie answered, “Two reasons. I like to hold that technique in reserve. And I believe that you needed to work out these issues with me.”

Ahsoka replied, in a tired tone of voice, “You are correct.”

Annie inquired, in a concerned tone of voice, “So, do you feel better?”

Ahsoka answered, “Even after defeating me. I do feel a little better. So, what are you going to do with me?”

Annie responded, “That depends. First, I still consider you my friend. I understand why you did this. And I do not hold what you have done, against you. As long as you stop this violence. I know what I have done. And it weighs very heavily on my conscience.”

Ahsoka commented, “Find. It is clear I cannot beat you. So, I will stop trying to kill you.”

Annie requested, “I hope you will give me the chance to see that I have changed for the better. And I try to do good now.” She mentally lamented, 'Though, even I will admit that I do not have the best of morally acceptable jobs, right now.'

Ahsoka replied, “If we have the opportunity, I may do so.”

Annie stated, “Good. Though, we are going to have to talk to both Chang, and Kaylee, about all the damage you did here.”

Ahsoka commented, “I doubt that will go very far, because I expect your friends to kill me for being on their enemies side.”

Annie said, in a supportive tone of voice, “No. I won't let them do that to you. And they know better than to cross me. And except for a few of them. Though, they hide it very well. They are still scared of me, because I use to be Darth Vader... Use to be... Not am... Though, they are polite enough not to show it.”

Ahsoka conceded, “There is that. And I will admit you don't act like Vader. Nor, do you even act like when you are Anakin.”

Annie calmly ordered, “I have changed a lot, in the following years. After I was freed of that black suit. And not just my gender. Now please, stand up.” Annie offered Ahsoka her left hand, to help Ahsoka up.

Ahsoka took Annie's left hand, as she stood up. When she was standing straight up, she let go of Annie's left hand.

Annie allowed her left hand to drop to her side, as she stated, “We have a lot to do. Starting with you telling me everything you know about your employers.”

Ahsoka looked away from Annie, as she said, in a defeated tone of voice, “Fine.”

Annie continued to look at Ahsoka, as she commented, “Good. We are going to my apartment to talk. I doubt we will have to worry about anyone disturbing us there.”

Ahsoka looked over at Annie, as she requested, “Okay. But, could we retrieve my lightsabers for me?”

Annie replied, “Sure.” She then used the force to pick up both broken lightsaber, from the floor. And she set the into items in her left hand, where she grip both lightsabers at once.

Annie stated, “I will keep a hold of them, until after we talk.”

Ahsoka said, “That is okay.” She thought, 'It is not like can use them, until I have a chance to fix them. And I might as well not try to push my luck. She beat me, without harming. And then she spared my life. She is clearly no longer Vader, nor Anakin. She is someone else. Someone whom is very emotionally mature, and merciful. Someone that acts in a way that would have made the Jedi order proud of her.'

'Also, it is not like I have anywhere else to go. And after trying to kill her, she is still willing to help me. So, I will let things play out. And I will see if she has become a better person than whom she use to me. And if that is the case, I will completely call off my vendetta against her.'

'And I will let my friends decide what to do with her, after eventually she dies. Though, I doubt that will be any time soon.'

Both women then walked, side by side, towards the closest hallway entrance, where they were at, in the garage. As they walked towards the entrance, Annie used the force, to push some of the wreckage out of their way, for them to get to the door. Though, that was not a problem for a force master, like Annie.

As they walked, Annie was to Ahsoka's right, at a comfortable pace for both of them.

Annie thought, 'When we get to my apartment, I will call Arcee, Mal, and then Kaylee. To let them know everything is fine with me, and Snips. And with the battle over, outside, it should not be that hard to get in touch with them. That is, if they don't already know from the cameras in the room, that the battle is over.'

'Still, it is possible that many, if not all, of the cameras in the room have been destroyed. Or, casino security is just too busy not to worry about us. Considering, there is nothing they could have done about our fight. While they can be helping the injured, and with clean up, after the battle.'

'Though, while I am not going to say this to Snips' face, just yet. I guess she won this fight, in the end. Because, her mission was to keep me out the battle that was happening outside. And that is what has happened. And I need to keep any eye on Snips. Which means I cannot go out there, and help in the aftermath of this battle.'

'Still, that does not mean, I cannot prepare for the next battle, by getting all the information I can from Snips. In humane ways. I know her well enough, that I don't need the force to know she is directly lying to me. And I will know if she is lying to me. Besides, at this point, there is no point in her lying to me.'

'I will get the information I need, and move forward, from there.'

'Within an hour, or so. As soon as I have the information from Snips. I will call Chang, to inform him which what have I learned. And I will offer him a deal. I will give him the information, in exchange for allowing Snips to live here, and let me take care of her, in the casino.'

'And I know Chang will take the deal. He is pragmatic enough to realize that it is better to keep me happy, and for me to keep an eye on her. Than to cut Snips loose, or worse, try to kill her. And in the process, make me very upset with him.'

The two of them then made it to the door. Annie used the force to gently turned the knob and open the door.

Annie said, “You first. We are going to the back elevator back.”

Ahsoka replied, “Fine.” She then walked into the back hallway.

Annie followed behind, with her using the force to gently close the door behind her.

(_)

Meanwhile, on the opposite side of the casino building, Hernan had just driven Roberta to Daiyu Palace Casino. When he reached the casino parking lot, he had parked the car he had borrowed from Sans, near the front entrances to the casino.

During their car ride, among other topics, they decided to just speak english at the casino,

Hernan and Roberta then got out of the car, and walked up to the front entrance, and into the front lobby of the casino. They saw that the female valets had returned to their stations, at the front entrance, under the large awning.

As Roberta and Hernan entered the front lobby, and came to a stop in the front lobby, the two adults siblings stood inside the front lobby, side by side, with Roberta to Hernan's right side.

They looked around, to see that while having slightly damaged walls, and furniture. The room had been cleaned up. With the staff now back to working at their stations, in the lobby.

But, there were no customers in sight. Though, Roberta could hear in the distance, the gaming floor was as busy as it usually was. So, the customers were just avoiding the front of the building, for the moment.

And except for a few guards still on duty, at the front door, everyone else that defending the casino had not left, to either resume their duties, or relax. This included, Revy, Rock, Benny, Dutch, and Janet, whom were in the casino restaurant, having lunch, as they emotionally decompressed from the battle.

As they continued to looked around, Roberta asked Hernan, in english, “So, how do you plan to get Chang to meet us, on short notice? I have never been able to meet the man on my own terms. Only when he, or she, depending, on his terms. Even one time. When Fabiola and I came unannounced. We were leave to Chang. Chang did not come to us.”

Hernan answered, in english, “I have a simple plan. Just follow me lead.”

Hernan then turned to their left, and he walked to the check in desk, with Roberta following right behind him.

As Hernan and Roberta came to a stop, by the counter of the check in desk, they saw there were three female clerks on duty, standing across the counter from them.

Hernan saw the three clerks turn towards Roberta, and himself. He then calmly requested, in english, “We would like to see Mister Chang, right now.”

While the clerks did not recognize the man, they did recognize Roberta. And they did as they were ordered to do. Press the silent alarm, and let the security team handle Roberta.

The clerk whom Hernan addressed, said to him, “Members of management will be here to see you, shortly.”

(_)

At the moment, in the back left part of the casino, on the ground floor, Jayne had just returned from the casino. After he had finished at the motel in the middle of the city, and he had called his family. To make sure they were all right. And his family turned out to be fine.

After Jayne finished talking to his family. Jayne had decided to the casino security, with the casino security phone number that only casino security knew. One of the technicians at a computer workstation, in the main security room took his call. The woman told him that the boomers had been taken care of, at the casino. Though, there was fight that was currently happening in the garage, between Annie and her alien friend. But, that fight was being handled, by Annie, alone.

Jayne did not ask for details, but he could guess that by now, everything in the garage was already trashed.

Though, Jayne realized that the black sedan he drove might be one of the first casino vehicles left, that was in one piece. And he felt there was likely going to be a lot of sharing, for the next week. Until new vehicles could be bought, and brought to the casino.

Still, Jayne did as he already planned to do. He parked the car he was using in the left side parking lot, around the left side of the casino. As Jayne got out, pocketed the ammo he had left for his rifle, into his coat pockets, and he grabbed the form-end of his rifle, Vera. When he was out of the car, he locked and shut the driver's side door to his car.

Jayne then headed for a side entrance, on the left back side of the casino.

When Jayne reached the side entrance, he used his right hand to used his key card, and punch in his password, on the electronic lock on the door, to enter the building.

The outside door, in question, like almost all the outside doors, was also an emergency escape route, and did not need a key card, nor password, to exit from. And unlock the garage door, even in lock down, people could escape that way. So, a hacker could not lock the doors to the outside, locking in the people inside casino.

The outside door Jayne used, was close to the security section of the casino. Though, he would still have to use his key card, along with his password, on some electronically locked doors, inside, that lead to the security section.

Though, Jayne had not even had a chance to get main security room, to look up the name, George Benedict, on the security computers, and internet. This was due in part because he had just put away Vera, and the ammo for his rifle, in a weapon's locker, in a secure room, that was near the main security rooms, located in the back part left part of the casino. With the garage being several rooms to the right of the security section of the casino.

Jayne had just finished putting away Vera and his ammo, when his cellphone started to ring.

Jayne held the cellphone to his right ear, as he said, “Hello.”

On the other end of the line, Mal inquired, “Jayne. Are you at the casino?”

Jayne looked into his weapons locker, and Vera, as he commented, “Yea. I am just finished putting some stuff up. What do you need?”

Mal stated, “I need you to bring your pistol, and get to the front entrance of the gaming floor, as soon as possible.”

Jayne replied, “I'll be there.” He thought, there is no point in asking questions. I just need to get there, now.'

Jayne hung up his cellphone, put it away, closed the weapons locker, and rushed out of the secure room, towards the front of the casino.

(_)

Around two minutes later, Hernan and Roberta were patiently waiting at the front deck, when they noticed something to their right.

Both Hernan and Roberta turned to their right, to see four adults, in black suits, come toward them, from the hallway that lead to the gaming floor.

These four adults were part of the security team. All four adults had their pistols draw, though pointed towards the ground, with their trigger fingers resting against the trigger guards of their pistols.

Chang had standing orders, concerning Roberta, for the casino staff. Chang put these orders in place, over two years ago, local time, after Roberta and Fabiola visited him, in his office, unannounced, on the night Lee first left her reality.

Chang's order were, should Roberta, whom the entire staff knew about, ever come to the casino, looking for change. Or, someone with Roberta, request to see Chang. That security should be immediately alerted. And for the heads of security to deal with the situation.

Chang was not going to take any chances that Roberta might finally have decided to come kill him, or someone he cares for, for some reason. And Chang believed that even if Mal and the others could not stop her. They could slow her down, until he get bring in reinforcements to handle her. Such as Annie and Arcee.

Of the four adults, approaching Roberta and Hernan, the man on the far left to Roberta and Hernan, was the head of security, Mal

To Mal's left was his second in command of security, Zoe.

To Zoe's left was her husband, Wash.

To Wash's left, on the other end the group, was Jayne.

Given the security team had already had a long day, in dealing with the boomer attack, and the aftermath. And they were in no mood for more trouble. So, they had their weapons out, just in case they needed to deal with any trouble, as quickly and efficiently, as possible.

As the four adults came to a stop, ten feet in front of them, Hernan and Roberta turned to face, them, with Hernan taking a step to his left, to stand by the desk, so Roberta was beside him, to his right, he was not directly blocking her view of the four other adults.

Hernan looked over at the front desk to see the three female clerks had fled, while Roberta and Hernan were not looking. He then looked back at the four adults, as he thought, 'Well, the clerk didn't exactly lie me. And those here do know who Roberta is. As such, she was likely just following orders, from Chang. So, I won't hold it against her.'

Hernan then heard Roberta mutter under her breath, in spanish, “Not again.”

Hernan thought, 'I will have to ask her about that.' He then took a close looked at the four member security team, as he continued his thought, 'I believe that is Mal, Zoe, Jayne, and a blond haired man. I don't know who the other blond man is. But, I will ask, in a minute.'

Hernan and Roberta silently just looked at the security team, for a few seconds, as the security teams did the same.

Though, the security team had not yet raised their pistols on them.

Roberta thought, 'At least they haven't pointed their pistols at us. Which is a good sign.'

As both groups looked at each other, Jayne started to noticed the similarities, as he thought, 'What is it about them, that is setting me on edge? Besides, on of them being Roberta.'

While Hernan's feel black beard hit his face, Jayne was able to take a closer look at their eyes, and the look they both had in their eyes.

Jayne stated, with concern in his tone of voice, “Oh shit. It's their blue eyes. The hair color is different. The gender is different. Their builds are obviously different. But, their eyes are the same. The rumors are true. That man is the Bloodhound's counterpart for this reality.”

Mal said, “That is not possible.”

Zoe commented, “Actually sir, some of us did hear a rumor that Roberta's counterpart lived in this town. And that he was a guy, whom kicked Revy's ass.”

Roberta stated, in english, “It is no rumor. I was there. And as someone whom fought Revy, I can attest that it was an impressive display of skill on my brother's part, in defeating her, with his bare hands. While she started out being armed with her pistols. Especially, given the fact that he does not have the super-soldier serum, while she does.”

Jayne said, “That is not surprising. Any counterpart of yours has to be able to kick some serious ass.”

Roberta and Hernan responded, in unison, “Thank you.”

Zoe inquired, “How do you consider each other, from a blood relation standpoint?”

Roberta answered, “Sister and brother.”

Hernan thought, 'I think taking a polite approach is our best bet to get what we want from them.' He kindly said, “It is nice to meet you. My name is Hernan Pena. A local mechanic, and family man. And I know who you are. Except for the blond man.” Hernan turned to Wash, as he asked, “Who are you?”

Wash answered, “Wash. Reincarnation. Long story.”

Hernan responded, “I bet. Glad to have you back among the living. You were one of my favorites.”

Wash replied, “Nice to be back, with my wife.” Wash and Zoe turned to look at each other, as they shared a smile on their lips. They then turned back to face Roberta and Hernan.

Mal calmly requested, “Well, please don't take this the wrong way. But, we are very busy, right now. And even on a good day, one Bloodhound, is one too many, for this casino. So, I am asking you both to please leave this casino.”

Hernan thought, 'I guess we are going to have to be a little bit more forceful. Though, only a little bit.' He casually dared, “Make us.”

Roberta turned to Hernan, with a little bit surprised on her face. She thought, 'Now, that is a bold move, against these four.' She then turned back to look at the security team.

Mal turned to his security team. He saw Zoe, Wash, and Jayne, looking back at him.

But, before Mal could issue any orders, Jayne quickly spoke, “Captain. No offense intended. But, no matter how much you and Chang pay me. And no matter much we have been through. I am not going to pick a fight with the Bloodhound. Let alone two of them, at once.”

Zoe commented, “Sir, with all due respect. I have to agree with Jayne, on this. Suicide is not on my schedule for today. And we have been through enough already, this morning.”

Wash stated, “I am not sure who these people are, but I am with my wife on this one.”

Roberta calmly requested, “Now that introductions have been made. And since we are not here to cause trouble. Please, put away your weapons, before you embarrass yourselves.”

That was all the excuse Jayne, Zoe, and Wash needed, as all three of them
put away there weapons, in their holsters, hidden among their clothing.

Mal then spent the next few seconds doing some hard thinking. Where his pride came into conflict with his sense of self-preservation.

Mal thought, 'A mutiny based on self-preservation. I can think of worse reasons.'

Mal finally groaned, as he put away his pistol. He then looked over at Roberta and Hernan, as he relented, “Okay. What do you want?”

Roberta stated, “We need weapons, of the creatively destructive type. And the only two groups in town that I know of, with access to such weapons, are here, and Hotel Moscow. And while I can work something out with Chang. I do not want to owe Balalaika a favor. So, we need to see Chang, about this.”

Mal said, “While I appreciate the way in which you are asking to see Chang, about this matter. As you can guess. Chang is very busy at the moment. And he is the only one whom can give someone outside the casino clearance to have access such our arsenal.”

Wash calmly asked, “Why do you need weapons from us?”

Hernan flatly stated, “It is personal.” He thought, 'I am not going to tell them why. Because of our reputations. They already know about Roberta reputation, of what happens when her loved ones are threatened.'

'And if they did some digging in this town. They would find out that I can be as bad as her, on matters of the family. So, if they learned our family has been kidnapped. They will not only refuse to give us weapons. They might even trying to stop us from getting such weapons, in a misguided attempt to avert the righteous massacre we are going to have, when we rescue our family.'

Roberta looked over at Hernan, then back to the security team, as she thought, 'It is likely a wise idea to keep what has happened, from them.' She said, “Yes. It is personal.”

Mal calmly responded, “Then, I cannot even entertain letting you have access to those weapons.”

Roberta flatly said, “Fine.” She turned to Hernan, as she ordered, “Let's go.”

Hernan turned to Roberta. He nodded once in agreement. He thought, 'I guess we will go with my plan b.'

Both Roberta and Hernan then turned around, and walked towards the front doors of the casino.

A few seconds later, the security team watched the two adults exit the front doors.

Then, all four adults let out a breath of relief.

The four adults continued to look at the front doors, as Jayne commented, “That was close.”

Zoe stated, “Something bad just happened to them. Very recently. You can see that in their eyes.”

Mal said, “Well, they didn't want to tell us what happened to them. So, we cannot help them.”

Zoe sadly replied, “I have to agree with you, captain.”

Wash said, “I just hope this doesn't come back to bite us.”

Mal stated, “Well, if it does. This time, we have powerful friends that can handle them.” He then turned his subordinates, as he inquired, “So, what is are your plans, for the next few hours?”

Three adults turned to look at Mal, as Zoe answered, in a slightly happy tone of voice, “Wash and I will be having some lunch at the casino restaurant, while we spend some time with the Lagoon family. When we finish lunch, we will resume our duties.”

Mal responded, “That will be fine. You have both earned a break... And you, Jayne?”

Jayne stated, “I was planning to head to the security room.” He thought, 'And look up the name, George Benedict, on the security computer.'

Mal replied, “That will be fine.” Mal mentally reflected, 'Well, at least I have dutiful subordinates. '

Wash inquired, “How about yourself, Mal?”

Mal thought, 'I need to talk to Chang, about Roberta, and this Hernan, stopping by.' He asked, “I need to go see Chang. Any of you know where he is? I know he left the main security room, a little while ago. But, I don't know where he went.”

Zoe said, “I believe he in the infirmary, checking on Simon, the medical staff, and the injured.”

Mal thought, 'That is very nice of Chang.' He happily replied, “Thank you, Zoe.”

Mal thought, 'I won't use my cellphone, just yet. Because I don't want to risk disturbing the injured, nor the medical staff. If Zoe is wrong. I will just exit the infirmary, and call Chang, then.'

Zoe said, “You're welcome, captain.”

Mal stated, “Have a pleasant lunch.”

The four adults then split up, as they headed into take care of their own errands. Zoe and Wash headed to the casino restaurant, to get some lunch, together. Jayne headed for the main security room. And Mal headed for the casino infirmary, to look for Chang.

(_)

At the moment, outside the front entrance of the casino, Roberta and Hernan walked together, to their borrowed car.

They soon exited the front awning, as they headed for their car.

As they walked, Hernan said, in spanish, with disappointment in his voice, “Well, that was a bust?”

Roberta agreed, in spanish “Yes. It was. Though, that is what, plan b's, are for.”

Hernan replied, “True.”

Roberta inquired, “So, who is the gun dealer you want us to meet?”

Hernan answered, “Actually, along with selling weapons, he is a master gunsmith. He is both a good friend of mine, and Pedro's. And I am sure he will help us. His is name is, Burt. Though, he is american. And while his spanish is okay. It might be best to use english with him.”

Roberta mentally wondered, 'Where have I heard that name, Burt, before?... Not that it matters right now.' She stated. “That will not be a problem. So, how long will it take us to get to his gunshop? Or, is he at home?”

Hernan responded, “His home is above his gunshop. So, that will not be a problem. I have a key to his place. So, we are fine there. And I am sure the boomers did not kill him. He wouldn't let himself go that way. Though, it will take us around twenty minutes to get to his shop from here. Maybe thirty, to forty, minutes, with all the wreckage on the streets.”

Roberta said, “Then, let's head over there.”

Hernan replied, “Okay.”

A minute later, they had reached the car they were using. They then got into the front seats, with Hernan driving.

Less than a minute later, they were on the road, as Hernan drove them to Burt's gunshop.

(_)

Meanwhile, back in the casino, Mal was in one of the main hallways, as he headed for the casino infirmary.

As Mal walked towards the casino infirmary, his cellphone rang. He continued walking, as he pulled out the cellphone. He held the cellphone up to his right ear, as he answered, “Hello.”

On the other end, Annie stated, “Hello Mal. I take it that you heard about my fight with Snips?”

Mal inquired, “Snips?”

Annie replied, “Ahsoka.”

Mal responded, “Oh yea. Sorry, but I have a lot on my mind, right now.”

Annie said, “I am sure you have.”

Mal stated, “Well, to answer your question. Yes. Kaylee rushed into the front security, and informed the staff of what happened. And they told us. Soon after, Arcee radioed us, as well. We decided it was best to let you handle the fight, yourself.”

Mal thought, 'That reminds me, I need to make sure that all those in the saferooms have been informed the battle is over, and they can come out. Though, I believe that Wash already handled that... It is so good to have Wash back. And the last time Book came to visit, he seemed to be happy with his new life.'

Annie said, “That was wise of you all. And I appreciate that.”

Mal asked, “So, was she part of this attack?”

Annie answered, in a slightly disappointed tone of voice, “Unfortunately, yes. She was here to deal with me. But, defeated her.”

Mal questioned, “Good. Is she alive?” He thought, 'Maybe we can learn something from her, about those that attacked us.'

Annie requested, “Yes. And I already have the information from her, about our enemies. Sooner than I expect. Though, I will handle getting any more information, on this, in my own way.”

Mal casually responded, “Go ahead. It is one less headache for me to deal with today.”

Annie kindly said, “Thank you for understanding. Also, I need to talk to Chang about this. But, I cannot reach him by cellphone.”

Mal thought, 'That could mean a few different things. Chang might be in a shielded area to him just not answering his phone, because he is busy.'

Mal responded, “Okay. If a see him, I will mention that to him.” He mentally added, 'Which should be in a few minutes.'

Annie replied, “That is alright.”

Mal inquired, “By the way, where are you two, right now?”

Annie answered, “My apartment, in the casino.”

Mal commented, “That is about as good a place as any for you two to be.” He thought, 'Also, her apartment is away from any critical areas of the casino. Though, that was by her choice, and request. In case she ever lost control of her powers.'

Annie responded, “I know. Talk to you later, Mal.”

Mal replied, “See you, Annie.” He then hung up, and put away his cellphone, as he continued down the hallway, towards the casino infirmary.

(_)

While Mal was busy heading to the infirmary, Chang was inside the infirmary, near the medical ward, with Simon. Did to this, Chang had his cellphone set to vibrate, and not ring, and he was not taking calls, at the moment, as he handled various, more immediate, delicate matters.

The infirmary was located in the far right corner of the building, opposite to the back casino garage. With the employee gym, employer showers and locker rooms, the indoor employee pool, and the main hallway leading to the beach, to the outside back part of the casino, being between the garage and the infirmary.

On the left side of the casino was the security headquarters, managed by Mal. And further down the left side of the casino, closer to the front, was the spa that Inara oversaw.

Like the rest of the casino, Chang did planned ahead, and prepared accordingly, when he built the infirmary wing of the casino.

The infirmary was like a small hospital, in of itself. Chang had planned the infirmary to handle the aftermath of treating patients, after a direct attack on the casino. Which is what it exactly was admirably doing, at the moment.

The infirmary was fully staff with doctors, nurses, and other personnel. With Simon overseeing, and managing everything that happened infirmary. The only person that could overrule Simon, in the infirmary, was Chang.

The infirmary was was five stories high. With each story being set to perform different medical functions.

There were two large elevators, and a single large stairwell, that were dedicated to the infirmary.

Though, there were access doors, from the casino to the infirmary, on the second, third, fourth, and fifth floors of the casino, these doors were only to be used on in emergencies. Which there had been a couple, in the casino. Mostly in treating either a heartattack, or stroke, that an occasional guess suffered from.

The main entrance, to the infirmary, was located on the ground floor, inside the casino. There was also an emergency door to the outside of the casino.

Right inside the main entrance to the infirmary, there was a patient waiting room, and check in desk, that was staffed around the clock.

There was also a doctor, nurses, and other personnel, in the infirmary, all the time. Though, is was for emergencies. And their standard business hours of the infirmary, for appointments, were between nine AM and five PM, every day, including, weekend. But, barring a few exceptions, excluding holidays.

While the employees of the casino enjoyed free health care, the customers of the casino, and those from outside the casino, were usually charged a fee for any medical services the infirmary staff performed on them.

Though, Chang did not charge them much for such services and medicine. When compared to other doctors and hospitals. And the casino did make allowances, and fair payment plans, in cases where it was an emergency, and the patients, nor their families, did not immediately have the money to pay for the casino medical bills.

The first floor of the infirmary was mainly for just for doctor's visits and check ups. Though, the ground level of the infirmary did have two surgery rooms, in case those that came in needed immediate surgery. Also, there were two skilled dentists on staff, with their offices on the first floor. And the pharmacy was located on the first floor.

The second floor was surgical. Along with labs, that ranged from medical body scanning equipment, to blood analysis equipment and computers.

The third floor was the medical ward, that mostly housed patient beds. Including, intensive care rooms, and post surgery rooms. Though, part of that floor part was reserved personal offices for Simon, and the other doctors that were on staff, to work on paperwork, in private.

The third floor also had a few quiet rooms, with beds. Along with a few break rooms. For the doctors, nurses, and other staff, that were on shift, though they needed a some rest for half an hour. Or, they needed a place to have a snack, for a few minutes.

The fourth floor deal with research, and experimental medical treatments of aliments, or injuries.

The forth floor was where Chang secretly had a few vats stored, and ready for use. Along, with reality transport, and communication equipment, to move sick patients to other realities. In case they could not handle the situation.

The fifth floor held first rate isolation rooms, with proper ventilation system, water circulation system, serialization rooms with backwards pressurized air systems, bio-hazard suits and equipment, decontamination equipment, and waste disposal equipment, to keep any isolated patients from exposed the medical staff, and others, to their aliments.

Also, the waste disposal equipment used for all the sections of the infamy

Fortunately, due to quick thinking and action, on the casino staff, none of customers were harmed. They were all moved further into the building, before the battle had begun. And they were allowed back continue what they were doing, after the battle ended.

Also, given most of the skills, abilities, and weapons, of the security staff, that faced the boomers, injuries were light. With injuries only being a few minor cuts, and bruises.

So, the casino infirmary had plenty of beds, when Data and Sally called the casino, to request that the had a number of injuries, due to the boomer attack.

When Data and Sally were transferred to Simon's encrypted cellphone, Simon talked to them, and found out what had happened. And that while the Atlantic Riders had beaten the boomers, there ship was damaged, and they had a number of injuries.

The problem being that the medical staff on their Bird of Prey were overwhelmed with injuries. And when they had visited the casino, they had heard that the casino had a medical staff on hand. Also, given they did not want to go to the local hospital for various reasons. Such as not wanted to many questions asked about them. They were requesting permission to send the injured members to the casino.

Simon made the call, to allow the Atlantic Riders to use their transporters, to sent their injured to the casino infirmary.

Luckily, the ship's transporters were still completely functional,

Simon told them exactly where to send the injured. And once the location was confirmed and locked, on the Bird of Prey's computers, the Atlantic Riders began sending their injured. From most severe, to least serious. To the casino infirmary.

Among the injured, included the lead of the Atlantic Riders, Professor Johnathan Durban.

Simon and his medically staff immediately began treating the wounded, as they came in.

Fortunately, Simon, and his staff, did not lose any of their patients. And with their advance medical equipment and training, they had treated almost everyone, within a half hour, after the boomer attack had ended in the casino, they had finished treating the Atlantic Riders. And most of those they had treated, were sedated, and resting in their bed. The exceptions for a handful of members that were not serious injured, and whom were transported back to their ship.

Also, as a precaution, Simon called the local hospital, to check what was going on there, at the moment. The local hospital which located near the center of town.

Of the last few years, Simon had developed a working relationship with the doctors and staff, of the local hospital. After he had proven to them to be a very capable doctor, the head of the hospital had allowed him to even teach some advanced surgical techniques, to the doctors there, that had not yet been developed at the present date, of the local reality.

The doctors of the hospital were grateful for what Simon had taught them. As such, the hospital staff had not problems in tell Simon what was happening on their end.

Fortunately, the hospital was not overflowing with patients. While the boomers had injured a number of people. Most of those injuries were minor. This was because of the level of fighting skills, and armaments, that the locals had possessed.

Though, the hospital did request Simon to treat any injured people, that came into the casino, looking for help.

So, Simon also made the call to treat those outside of the casino, in the infirmary.

Given it was no secret that the casino had a first rate medical staff and resources. And those on the south end were sometimes closer to the casino, than the hospital. A few people did come to the casino, looking for medical treatment.

Still, once the injured Atlantic Riders were taken care of, Simon allowed his medical staff to handle the trickle of injured civilians that came into the infirmary, from outside of the casino.

Simon then headed to his personal office. When he reached his office, he shut the door, and he then used his cellphone to call Chang. After Chang answered, Simon informed Chang of had happened to the Atlantic Riders, the request of the local hospital, and what he had done about those issues.

Chang supported Simon's decisions, and he stated that casino would pay for the medical cost. That is would be good for public relations with the islands population.

Also, as a way to smooth things over with everyone, Chang requested that the medical treatment, concerning those injured in the battle, or, for today, would be free of charge. For Simon to just send him the bill. That the casino would cover the charge.

Simon agreed with Chang comments, and request on free serve.

Though, Chang did also request that he wanted to see the injured, and to talk to Simon, in person, as well.

Simon said he could arrange both.

So presently, Simon and Chang were standing next to each other, in a hallway, with dimmed lighing, on the third floor of the infirmary, by a window that looked into the medical ward, where the injured Atlantic Riders were asleep. With that room the injured were in, next to them, being almost dark, to allow those inside to rest, while the vital were being monitored.

Chang looked into the window, at the people in the beds, as he asked, “How are their conditions?”

Simon looked at Chang, as he answered, “All of them are stable, and resting. We have a few critical cases in the ICU. But, they are stable as well.”

Chang thought, 'That is nice to know.' He turned to Simon, as he inquired, “Do any of them required the vat process?”

Simon replied, “No.” He thought, 'Given the circumstances. It is a fair question.'

Chang stated, “Alright. That makes things simpler for us, and them. Still, I would not be surprised that as soon as their ship is repaired. They will want to transport the injured and leave this reality. Not to sound cold. And I don't want them to leave, until they are ready. But, how long until they can be moved?”

Simon thought, 'That is a legitimate question, as well.' He responded, “Barring any unforeseen events. All of them should be strong enough to be moved within a few days.”

“Even the critical ones should be able to be transferred by then. Though, everyone will need to be careful, on both ends, during transport. And they will each need bed, with adequate medical resources and staff, waiting for them.”

Chang questioned, “Do they have those resources on hand?” He thought, 'I do not want one of them dying on us. Because that could start a fight that neither of us really want.'

Simon answered, “While I have not seen their infirmary. Sally, Data, and I, already talked about this subject. And from what they told me, I believe so. A number of the more critically injured that came to us, clearly had signs that very advanced medical technology, and surgical techniques being used on them, before they came to us.”

“The only reason they asked for our help, is that the battle caused their medical staff to be overwhelmed with patients.”

Chang replied, “Good.” He thought, 'The sooner they are out of our hair, the better. Though, I do have one more question.'

Chang questioned, “I believe you said their leader, Durban was also injured? And that he was transported here, as well?”

Simon looked at the window, then back to Chang. He stated, “Yes. He was moderately injured. He has been treated, and resting in the room beside us. He was a little banged up when he got here. But, he should be fine.”

Chang thought, 'Good. Barring his clothing. Durban seemed like he has a good head on his shoulders. And I feel that I can say the same for Data and Sally, as well. Now, to keep Simon happy. While I pay him well. I do not want lose him, and his skills, by upsetting him to the point he will leave. Plus, doing so would upset River.'

Chang responded, “Okay. Thank you again for informing me about what is going on here. And I see from the decisions that you have made, that I was correct in giving you the authority to over see this section of of the casino.”

Simon thought, 'I guess he is just trying to keep me happy.'

Chang requested, “Let me know if there are any change to their conditions. Even if it is late at night.”

Simon said, “I will.”

Chang replied, “Good.”

Chang thought, 'Now, to head up my apartment, and check on River and Lee. I am sure they are fine. But, it makes a much better impression to check on them, in person. Than, to just call them. Though, I wonder is anyone has told them the battle is over, yet. But, with their abilities, they likely already know that.'

Chang then turned, and he headed for the infirmary elevator. From there, he would go to the ground floor, where he would head for the interior exit of the casino, to go to the back elevator bay, and take the back express elevator to his penthouse apartment.

(_)

Meanwhile, in the penthouse apartment of the casino, River and Lee, were putting their weapons away, in a weapons locker, in their home.

Between River's telepathy, and Lee's precognition, they could tell that the battle was over.

River had sensed a few stray thoughts, a few floors below, of some of the guests getting phone calls, that said they could leave their rooms.

Lee precognition informed her that there was no longer any immediate danger in the casino.

So, they no longer needed their large weapons, and they putting them away.

They had just put away their weapons, into a hidden closet, in the hallway, between the living room and their bedroom. The hidden closet was opened by pushing against it, which would undo the latch, and open it forward, into the hallway.

After Lee closed the door to the hidden closet, which was now nearly seamless with the wall, she looked over at River's face, and she noticed something. She thought, 'Something important is on River's mind. Something that is greatly bothering her.'

River could read Lee's mind, and she tried to change the subject. She turned to look at Lee, as she casually asked, “I wonder why we did not get an all clear call from security, downstairs?”

Lee calmly answered, “That was likely an oversight on their part.” She then continued, in a more concerned tone of voice, “Still, I know you are trying to change the subject. So River, what is the matter?”

River was silent for a few seconds. She then looked at Lee, with worry on her face. She stated, “You are still as good as ever, Lee. And yes, these is something important that I need to talk to you about. But, I need to talk to both you and Chang, about it, at the same time.”

Lee suggested, “Fine. We will call Chang, and get this sorted out.”

River responded, “No. I am sure he has his hands full, right now. Though, this cannot wait. We need to see him, in person.”

Lee said, “Then, let's got downstairs and find him.”

River commented, “That is what I was thinking, as well. We will take the back express elevator. Considering, that elevator bay will be less busy. And with everything happening, I do not want to take chances.”

Lee replied, “I agree.”

Both women then headed out of their apartment, down an interior hallway, towards the back express elevator bay.

(_)

At that moment, downstairs, on the ground floor, Chang was walking down a mostly empty hallway, towards the back elevator bay. When he turned a corner, with Mal and himself almost running into each other.

Though, both men were able to stop a few feet from each other.

There being no one else around them in the hallway.

As both of them stood, a few feet from each other, Mal said, “I was looking you.”

Chang thought, 'It figures that Mal would want to talk to me. He likely didn't call me by phone, because he heard that was I in the infirmary.' He responded, “Okay, Mal. What do you need?”

Mal said, “I thought it best to inform you that Roberta, and a man named Hernan, came to the casino, looking for you. And I handled the matter for you, with no problems presenting themselves.”

Chang thought, with worry, 'Oh. This is not good. They would only come to me weapons, and if something happened to people that cared for. Still my plan worked, and Mal was able to handle the matter.' He asked, “I appreciate that. Also, Hernan and I have met. Now, why did they come here, in the first place?”

Mal thought, 'I am going to have had a long talk with both Zoe, and Chang, here, about being the last one informed on such matter, about the counterpart to Roberta living in this town. But, now is not that time.'

Mal said, “They came by, looking for weapons. Though, would not tell us why. They were very cagey about that. So, we turned them away. Fortunately, they were willing to leave.”

Chang stated, “Good job.”

Chang thought, 'Them acting cagey, and not telling us why they wanted weapons, means whatever happened to them, was personal. Adding to the theory that something happened to those they care for.'

'Still, the reason they left so easily is because, I am sure, there are other places in town at Hernan can get them weapons from. And clearly what happened to them, was too important to start a needless fight, that would delay them, and gain them nothing.'

'I will look into this matter, later today. After I handle settling this current crisis. And the first part, for me to do so, is to pull all the information we have, into one place. By calling all our friends in, to have a meeting, on what happened. And what to do next.'

Mal inquired, “That is not all. Were you informed about the fight between Annie and Ahsoka?”

Chang thought, 'Damn. In everything that happen. I forgot about that.' He answered, “I remember hearing something in passing, during the battle. We have been kind of busy, today.”

Mal responded, “That we have. It seems that Ahsoka was part of the attack. Though, Annie called, and the fight was over.”

Chang sarcastically thought, 'And I thought my day could not get any worse.'

Chang asked, “Where was this fight at?” He mentally added, 'So, I know where this months profits will be going to for repairs.'

Mal answered, “The back garage.”

Chang questioned, “I am guessing everything in that garage is now a scrap?”

Mal replied, “I believe so.”

Chang groaned, as he thought, 'It is going to take months to replace all those vehicles, tools, and equipment.' He inquired, “We will start doing an inventory of damages, tomorrow. So, why did Ahsoka attack Annie?”

Mal said, “Save for throwing Arcee against the wall. She only attacked Annie, I am guessing she was here to take care of Annie.”

Chang commented, “I am not surprise. Annie's force abilities would be an unknown factor for this battle.”

Mal pointed out, “Yes. Though, it is clear that the attackers also did not factor in the hostile response by the local population.”

Chang said, “Yes. Even I didn't realize what this population is capable of.”

Mal commented, “I am just happy we haven't yet don't anything to piss off the locals, just yet.”

Chang responded, “I feel the same way. When this mess is cleared up, in a few days. Send out a memo to the casino staff, not to antagonize the locals.” He thought, 'I have already done that a few times. But, it is nice, on occasion, to remind them to do so.'

Mal thought, 'That is something that likely needs to be taken care of today.' He stated, “I will have it done by the end of the day.”

Chang asked, “So, I take it that since Annie talked to you, that she won the battle?”

Mal, “Yes.”

Chang questioned, “Is Ahsoka still alive?”

Mal responded, “Yes. And Annie said that she already got some information from her. And that she requests to be the one allowed to continue to get information from her friend. And she wanted me to tell you that she was trying to reach you by your cellphone, but you did not answer.

Chang thought, 'I was wondering who kept calling me. I just got so caught up with talking to Simon, and going to see River and Lee, that I forgot to check my cellphone. Still, this is good news. And we have the information we need to start to find out who is responsible for this attack.'

Chang guessed, “I was kind of busy, a few minutes ago. And while I am sure Annie will get the information we need. I doubt she will harm her friend. Though, I can guess why she wants to talk to me, right now. Even after this. Annie will likely ask for us to spare Ahsoka. She might even ask me to let Ahsoka stay in the casino. Considering, I doubt she has anywhere else go to.”

Mal agreed, “That is very likely, on both counts.”

Chang asked, “So, where are they?”

Mal answered, “Annie's apartment.”

Chang stated, “Well, that is about as good a place as any for Annie to get information from Ahsoka.”

Mal mentally reflected, with slight amusement, 'My thoughts, exactly.'

Chang inquired, “So, what are you thoughts on this?”

Mal responded, “It is your call. Right now, I could care less. I got too many things happening. From what I understand, Ahsoka only wanted to harm Annie. None of the rest of us. And Annie can take care of herself. And most of the others that know about the fight, probably feel that same way.”

Chang said, “You are likely right. Ahsoka is no a threat to us. So, I will let her live, and stay at the casino. If that is what she and Annie want.” He thought, 'Plus, it will put Annie in a good mood towards me.'

Mal mentioned, “Well, I have things to do.”

Chang sighed, as he thought, 'I might as well ask you, right now, to do this.' He then stated, “Mal, I hate to add to your workload. But, I want to call a meeting about this attack. And I want you oversee organizing it.”

Chang looked at his wrist watch. It was twelve ten PM.

Chang turned back to look over at Mal, as he continued, “It is twelve ten, now. I want this meeting to take place at three PM, here, at the casino, in my private theater.”

Chang thought, 'There should be enough room there. If not, we will move it to the stage theater. Or, the guest movie theater. There is plenty of room in both their areas. But, the other two room are close to the gaming floors. And I don't want a guest accidentally overhearing us.'

Mal thought, 'No point in arguing about this. Though, I expected him to wait a day or two, before calling a meeting.' He asked, “What do you wish to discuss at this meeting?”

Chang answered, “We will be pulling together all our information, on this attack. I figure by then, that Annie will at least have gotten all the useful information she can from Ahsoka, on who attacked us.”

“And then I want to plan, and organize a reprisal for what has happened. And then we attack them, later this afternoon, our time. And for them, we will attack them soon after they attack us.”

“I want to strike while the iron is hot, and before they can be ready for us.”

Chang thought, 'That is what Rock did to me. She attacked me sooner than I expected. And I did not see it coming. And due to that oversight, I lost control of my organization then... Lee really does know how to write a good story...'

'Also, it is possible that Abrego is connect to this. Someone had to give him that powersuit. Unfortunately, I will not get any answers from Abrego, until after all this is over, and she comes out of the vat process.'

'Though, this also means that Pedro, Matthew, Fabiola, Leigharch, and Matt, are involved. But, I doubt those five know what is going on. Because, if they did. They would likely inform me. So, that means they likely were being chased without really knowing why. That occasionally happens. I will see what they have to say at the meeting, And I will go from there.'

Mal thought, 'So, he wants to pull together the people and plans, for a counterattack, this soon, after what has happened. That is ambitious. But, not surprising, on his part.'

Chang continued, “Though, I want to do this in the proper way. Not for us to just rush in. I want a thorough plan. With all those involved having their assignments, and carrying them out.”

Mal thought, with a bit of intrigue, 'Now, that is the Chang I know.'

Chang went on to say, “I want you to invite all our friends, that are in town, to this meeting. Invite the upper management of the casino. You, and the rest of the Serenity crew, included. Along, with Arcee, Spike, Jetta, and Faye. And contact Annie, and have her bring Ahsoka with her. I don't want Annie's little friend left alone, right now. Besides, if she has information, it is best to hear the news from the horse's mouth. As it were.”

Mal thought, 'I cannot argue with that logic.'

Chang requested, “Also, call the Lowe family. I just know we are going to need some computer expertise. And try to get in contact Roberta and Hernan. And convince them to come here, as well. If those two are planning to go on the warpath. Let us put their bloodlust to good use.”

Mal happily thought, 'That is crazy... But, I like it.'

Chang said, “And invite, Revy, and her friends.”

Mal mentioned, “I believe Revy, Rock, Dutch, Janet, and Benny, are in the casino restaurant, having lunch.”

Chang stated, “Good. You can have them contact their friends for us. Though, I am not sure about having their adult children coming along. Nor, those three elemental sisters they hang out with.”

Chang thought, 'Their parents would never forgive me, if something happened to them, during this attack.'

Chang continued, “I do want Shenhua, Sawyer, Lotton, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma to come. Also, having Violin and Aeryn come, would be good. And having a couple of professional retired spies, like Yolanda and Eda, wouldn't hurt.”

“And call in Balalaika and B. Having her badass, amazon army helping us, would solve a lot of our problems”

Mal questioned, “Don't you think that is kind of overkill? Even for this mission?”

Chang lips curled into a wicked grin, as he answered, “Exactly. I want overwhelming firepower. We are going to make an example out of those responsible for attacking us. So, is does not happen again.”

“And I know Balalaika, and the rest Hotel Moscow, will be more than happy to help us on this little endeavor.”

Chang thought, with amusement, 'Damn. This is like that Farscape episode, Liars, Guns and Money, part two. When John and the rest of the crew of Moya make up their plan, to put together their break in team. Some time, I will have to talk to Violin, about how she felt when she came up with that plan. But, not right now... Still, there are two others we need to get.'

Chang requested, “And contact Matthew and Pedro. I want them in on this meeting, as well. And I am sure they will come, if we contact them over this matter.”

Mal inquired, “I heard they disappeared. But, I don't know why?”

Chang coyly said, “Balalaika leaned too hard on them.”

Mal replied, “That would do it. Still, given the importance of this meeting, they will come.” He thought, 'And it might get them out of trouble with you.'

Chang stated, “Yes. And I feel my lawyer should be here. Along with the highest ranking city official. And that is Police Chief Pedro Del Soto. Those two are likely together. And your best bet to contact them is to try the police station. I am sure Pedro checked in on, his boys, this morning. So, with this attack, they still might be there.”

Mal thought, 'Chang is calling in everyone.' He asked, “Okay. Do you want me to contact the Atlantic Riders? They are likely the reason for the attack.”

Chang stated, “Yes. They likely are. But, no. I don't want you to contact them. They have their hands full. And we can handle this, in house.” He mentally added, 'Beside we didn't really know them. And as such, I would like to keep them at arms length, on this matter.'

Mal replied, “I will have Zoe handle it.” He though, 'Zoe can be more diplomatic, and less gruff with me. And with the day we all have had. We don't need to get on each others nerves.'

Chang said “That will be fine. You're dismissed.”

Mal then turned, and walked away, to carry out his orders. As he headed for the casino restaurant, to Zoe, Wash, and the Lagoon family.

Meanwhile, Chang started heading towards the back elevator bay, so he could take the express elevator there to his penthouse apartment, as he pulled out his cellphone.

Chang dialed Annie cellphone number. He then placed his phone to his right ear.

The phone rang a few times. Then, Annie answered the phone, “Hello.”

Chang said, “Hi Annie. I believe you were looking for me.”

Annie inquired, “Yes. I take you heard what happened in the garage?”

Chang replied, “Yes.”

Annie commented, “I got Ahsoka to surrender, and she is answering my questions. I have some information already. But, we are trying to piece together if she knows anything she might not realize she knows.”

Chang thought, 'Now, to play the game.' Chang asked, “When do you think you will have this information ready for me?”

Annie stated, “First, I need some assurances from you, concerning Ahsoka.”

Chang replied, “It depends on what you are requesting.”

Annie requested, “I want Ahsoka to be spared for her part in this. I want her to come to live in the casino. And I will take responsibility for her. Also, I will be handling getting any information from her.”

Chang thought with mild amusement, 'I love being right.'

Chang responded, As long as the information checks out. I believe those are reasonable requests. Still, you will have to take this up with your friends here.”

Annie replied, “I will do so.”

Chang thought, 'It might be best if I got all the information from you at once. Instead of piecemeal.” Chang said, “Fine. And you don't need to tell me what is going on right now. Let me know in an hour, what is going on. Just call me by phone.”

Annie stated, “I will call you, then. And thank you.”

Chang thought, 'Now for the invite.' Chang responded, “You're welcome. Also, we will be having a meeting in my private theater, at three PM. Over this attack. I request that you and Ahsoka attend. Also, if you hear from Arcee, let her know that she is invited, as well.”

Annie said, “We will be there. And I will inform Arcee, if I here from her.”

Chang replied, “Thank you. And talk to you, later.” He then hung up his cellphone and put it away.

Chang then continued on his way to the back elevator bay.

(_)

Less than a minute later, Chang made it to the back elevator bay, and he used his key to open the express elevator door.

Though, instead the doors immediately opening, the door remained closed. This was odd because to the express elevator, itself, be set to remain on the ground floor, unless summoned.

Chang thought, 'Interesting. Maybe someone is using elevator. Well, it would take longer to walk around to the front express elevator. So, I will just have to wait here.'

A few seconds later, the doors opened, and Chang saw River and Lee standing in front of him. With his two lovers looking back at him.

Lee playfully said, “Fancy meeting you here.”

Chang suppressed a chuckle, as he thought, 'Leave it to Lee to lighten the mood.' He asked, “What is going on?”

River stated, with seriousness in her tone of voice, “We need to talk, in private, in our apartment. Right now.”

Chang thought, 'River, I know you are reading my thoughts. But, I have only seen you like this a few times. And those times were always important. So, I will. Besides...” He said, “I was just heading up there, to see you two.”

Lee commented, “Then, this meeting is fortuitous for all of us. Let's head back up there, now.”

Chang walked into the elevator, with the doors soon closing behind him.

(_)

A few minutes later, Chang, River, and Lee, had entered the living room of their penthouse apartment.

Lee was the last one inside the room. She shut and locked the door behind her. She then went to join Chang and River, in the center of the room, with the three lovers looked at each other, as they stood near one another.

Just as Lee joined them, Chang turned to River. He inquired, “Okay, River. What do you want to talk about?”

River looked to her left, towards the far windows of the room, as she quietly said, “This is not very easy for me to say. I never intended to tell any of this.”

Lee calmly asked, “What is it? You can tell us?” She thought, 'We are not ones to judge.'

River heard both Lee's words, and thoughts. She took a deep breath, and slowly let out it. She then looked over at Chang and Lee, as she admitted, “I have been writing our lives.”

Chang asked, with confusion in his tone of voice, “What do you mean, River?”

Lee thought, 'I have a bad sneaking suspicion as to what you're talking about.'

River said, “I have sneaking off to another reality, whose Earth is during similar time period and cultural advancement, as this one. I have a home there. And no one there is aware of who I am, or what I have been doing.”

Chang inquired, “What have you been doing?”

River stated, “I am getting to that. I have been writing what has been happening to us, and then living, with everyone else here. I proved one of Lee's theories, during that whole time loop mess, was true.”

Chang flatly questioned, “What theory?”

Lee winced, as she requested, “Let, me explain.”

River replied, “Go ahead.”

Lee looked over at Chang, with a relaxed expression on her face. She stated, “The theory is the next logical step to my original writings. Where you write about what happens in another reality. Or, realities. And what is written comes true in that reality. Or, realities.”

“Only, in this case, River has taken my ideas to the next level. She went to another reality, where she wrote what she wanted to happen to us. Then, she returned to us, and lived out those written events with us.”

Chang was slightly surprised at what he heard, as he muttered, “That is insane.”

Lee commented, “Yea. Literally the story of our lives.” She turned to River, as she asked, “How long been going on?”

River admitted, “Since you first left your reality, Lee.”

Lee did not expect River's answer to be that long ago. With Chang and Lee being left speechless, for a few seconds.

Then, Lee said, with slight shock in her tone of voice, “Well, that is longer than I thought.”

River quickly pointed out, with worry in her tone of voice, “Lee, I didn't change your personality much. And I had to figure a way to get the others off your back. If I just wrote that they stopped coming after you. They would have likely figured out something was up. So, I had to write this elaborate story to get them off our backs. So, we can have our happy ending, that never ends.”

Chang questioned, “And the kingdom, and our family?”

River sheepishly said, “I am wrote that too.”

Chang quietly stated, “I don't know how to feel about this.”

Lee softly commented, “Neither, do I.”

River tried to defend her actions, as she mentioned, “Chang, you are better off than where you were. And Lee, you are now in the body and life, where you are happy.”

Chang pointed out, “But, are we happy because we want too be? Or, because we are written to be?”

Lee commented, “Likely both. At this point, I believe free will is more of an illusion, than anything else. And River's heart was in the right place.”

River said, “Thank you.”

Lee pointed out, “Oh, River. You are still on thin ice with me, over this. But, I am not going to get upset over this. I have done worse, myself. Though, I did not know it at the time. Did you write about Pedro and Matthew leaving this reality? And us chasing them?

River said, “Yes. I figured we all needed and adventurous vacation. And it gave me an excuse to solve how Garcia ended up in Plata Podrido, as a teenager, with Garibaldi in his cursed little girl form, while also figuring out an ending to Roberta and Fabiola's hunt for you.”

Lee replied, “Okay. That was not so bad.”

Chang inquired, “Have you written anything else?”

River responded, “No. Not since we got back from the Dominican Republic. That got a little out of control, on my part. I didn't realize that Roberta of Hotel Caracas would be so scary in person.”

Chang stated, with annoyance in his tone of voice, “You should have. Crossing Roberta and Balalaika is about as scary a combination as one can get. But, that is a discussion for another time. What I need to know is did you accidentally cause this boomer attack”

River answered, with worry evident in her tone of voice, “I had nothing to do with this attack. Nor, did I write about Hernan, Barbossa, nor Ahsoka. I don't know where any of that came from. And that scares me. Before that, I have everything under control. No one had died, nor been seriously harmed, among our groups, while on my watch. But, after this attack. I do not know what to do. It is a mess. And to much is on the line for me to just attempt to write us out of this problem. I need help, from both of you.”

Lee asked, “I know about Barbossa and Ahsoka. But, who is Hernan?”

While Chang was still upset, he did not take his emotional state out on Lee, as he answered, “Hernan Pena is an auto-mechanic in town.”

Lee looked over at Chang, as she commented, “Oh yea. Pedro mentioned him a few times. They are good friends.”

Chang said, “Yes. And it seems that Hernan is also Roberta's gender flipped counterpart for this reality.”

Lee eyes went wide for a second, as she understood the implications of this revelation. She forced herself to remain calm, as she responded, “That I did not know. Though, I hope you are kidding. Right?”

River commented, “No. He is not kidding. I read some of the minds of our friends. It seems that not only is Hernan Pena the counterpart to Roberta, but his lovely wife, Maria, is the counterpart for Garcia. And they have three nice, young children.”

Lee looked over at River, as she inquired, “How did this come out?”

River answered, “Hernan kicked Revy's ass.”

Lee said, “At the time, I am sure she deserved it.”

River replied, “That she did.”

Lee questioned, “So, how did Roberta and Garcia handle this news?”

Chang said, “From what we have managed to gather. All four of those adults took the news very well. And Hernan and Maria's children are happy to have a new aunt and uncle. And they all consider each other family.”

Lee shrugged, as she replied, “Well, at least there is that.” She thought, 'And at least this will give Roberta, and Fabiola, a reason to be nice. Also, given the Pena family have three young children. I just know those three are going to be trouble, when they grow up. We will have to keep an eye on them... From a distance... Still, for fictional counterparts to exist here, should be impossible... Unless... Though, that is an issue for later. When we are not pressed for time.'

River overheard Lee's thoughts, though she did not reply.

Lee continued to look at River, as she changed the subject. She stated, “Now, back to the matter at hand.” She turned to looked at both River and Chang, as she calmly said, “Chang. River needs help. And we are the only ones that can help her.”

Chang let out a deep breath, as he forced himself to calm down. He thought, 'Lee is right. River needs help. And getting angry over what she had done will not solve these problems.'

'Besides, I am really not that upset about what happened to us. I am only annoyed that River did this behind our backs. And she did not speak to us, beforehand.'

'Though, I guess that has now changed for the better.'

Chang agreed, “Okay. I will help you, River.”

River said, “Both of you. Thank you. And I hope someday you will forgive me for what I have done to you.”

Lee calmly stated, “We just need some time. But, we are not going to let this wreck our relationship with you.”

Chang agreed, “Lee is right. We just need some time. That is all.”

River replied, in a humble tone of voice, “Okay.”

Chang requested, “Also, we will want a few copies of all the stories you have written. So, we can read them.”

Lee inquired, “Speaking of which. What format did you write you stories on?”

River responded, “Like you, I types them on a computer, on a compatible format for our computers here. I will be more than happy to give you both a few of my data disc copies, of my most recent backups.”

Chang said, “That will be fine. And we will read them, later.”

Lee stated, “Yes. Also, I would like to know what events you came up with, and what events honestly happen to us, that were unplanned.”

River said, “I was very vague with a lot of details of various scenes, that span several years. So, we had flexibility, and choices, in what we did.”

Chang responded, with a bit of relief in his tone of voice, “Knowing that makes me feel better.”

Lee agreed, with a bit of relief in her tone of voice, as well, “Yes. I guess we did have some free will on those matters, after all.”

River commented, “I am glad you feel that way. And the way I wrote, was that I first read people's thoughts. I figured out what they wanted, and I wrote it, so those events would happen to them.”

Chang stated, with pride in his tone of voice, “River. That is genius. You take manipulation to a whole new level, for all the right reasons.”

Lee said, “Yes, River. You are quickly working you way back into our good graces.”

River smiled towards her two loves, as she replied, “Thank you.”

Lee stated, “Now, let us see what we can do to fix this mess.”

Chang commented, “It is a big job. But, I guess we are the only ones that can do it.”

Lee pointed out, “But first, we are going to have to figure out who is behind this.”

Chang mentioned, “That won't be a problem. Annie already has a line on that. I figure, in an hour, Annie will call me with that answer.”

Lee playfully asked, “Do I want to know the details?”

Chang casually answered, “No. But, I will tell you, later.”

Lee stated, “Okay. Now, River. Let us get a few reality devices. Then, you can take us to your home, in this other reality. And we can then find out what you have done. Next, we will come back here. Find out from Annie, who is behind this, and go from there.”

Chang happily complimented, “Now, that is a plan.”

River said, “I agree. And thanks, Chang, and Lee.”

Chang and Lee smiled at River.

Lee said, “You're welcome.”

Chang replied, “No problem.”

The three lovers then set out to fix the mess they found themselves, those of the island of De La Plata Podrido, and the Atlantic Riders, were in the middle of.

To be continued.